Pharr 4thed Homeric Greek

HOMERIC GREEK
HOMERIC GREEK
A BOOK FOR BEGINNERS
Fourth Edition
Clyde Pharr, John Wright, and Paula Debnar
U N IV E R S IT Y O F O K L A H O M A P R E SS : N O RM A N
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Pharr, Clyde, 1 8 8 3 -1 9 7 2 .
H om eric Greek : a book for beginners / Clyde Pharr, John Wright, and Paula Debnar. — Fourth
edition.
p. cm .
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 9 7 8 -0 -8 0 6 1 -4 1 6 4 -0 (paper)
1. H om er— Language— G ram m ar. 2. G reek language— G ram m ar 3. Hom er. Iliad.
I. W right. loh n, 1 9 4 1 - II. Debnar, Paula. III. Title.
P A 4179.P5 2012
4 8 8 .2 ’4 2 1 - d c 2 2
201103 7 2 1 3
The paper in this b o o k m eets the guidelines for perm an ence and durability o f the C o m m ittee on
Prod uction G uidelines for B o o k Longevity o f the C oun cil on Library R esources, Inc.o°
Fourth edition copyright © 2012 by the U niversity o f O klahom a Press, N orm an, Publishing
D ivision o f the University. M anufactured in the U.S.A.
All rights reserved. No part o f this publication m ay be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system ,
or transm itted, in any form or by any m eans, electron ic, m echanical, photocopying, recording, or
oth erw ise— except as perm itted under Sectio n 107 o r 108 o f the U nited States C opyright A ct—
w ithout the p rior w ritten perm ission o f the U niversity o f O klahom a Press.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONTENTS
Preface to the Fourth Edition ix

Notes to Instructors on Using the Fourth Edition xiii
Introduction to the Iliad xvii
Map of the Aegean Region xx-xxi
Lessons
1. Introductory 3
2. Syllables; Accents; Punctuation; Parts of Speech 9
3. Clauses; Syntax; Cases; the First Declension 15
4. The First Declension (Continued); Accents 27
5. Verbs; Present Indicative Active of -co Verbs 32
6. The Second Declension; Elision 37
7. Review 41
8. The Second Declension (Continued) 44
9. The Imperfect of - a Verbs 48
10. The Future and Aorist of-ft) Verbs 51
11. Masculine Nouns of the First Declension;
Root Aorists; Compound Verbs 56
12. Review 59
13. Nouns of the Third Declension; Iliad, 1-5 64
14. Prosody (Meter); the Greek Hexameter; Iliad, 1-5 69
15. The Third Declension (Continued); Iliad, 1-10 74
16. Present and Future, Middle and Passive;
Deponent Verbs; Iliad, 11-16 78
17. Imperfect and Aorist Indicative, Middle and Passive; Iliad, 17-21 84
18. Perfect and Pluperfect Active 87
19. The Infinitive; Iliad, 2 2 -2 7 90
20. Active Participles; Iliad, 28-32 94
21. Middle and Passive (Medio-Passive) Participles; Iliad, 33-37 99
22. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Medio-Passive;
Iliad, 38-42 103
23. The Subjunctive Mood; Iliad, 4 3 -4 7 106
CONTENTS
24. The Imperative Mood, Active; Iliad, 4 8-52 112

25. The Imperative Mood, Medio-Passive; Iliad, 53-58 116
26. The Optative Mood; Indirect Statement; Iliad, 59-63 119
27. The Passive Voice; Iliad, 6 4 -6 9 127
28. Adjectives of the Third (and First) Declension; Iliad, 70-75 131
29. Demonstrative Pronouns and Adjectives; Iliad, 76-80 134
30. Personal and Possessive Pronouns and Adjectives; Iliad, 81-85 137
31. Relative Pronouns; Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns
and Adjectives; Iliad, 86-92 140
32. Regular -fii Verbs; Iliad, 93-100 143
33. Regular -/ui Verbs, Middle and Passive; Iliad, 101-108 147
34. Regular -fii Verbs (Continued); Iliad, 109-117 151
35. Irregular Verbs {eifii); Enclitics; Iliad, 118-125 155
36. More Irregular Verbs; Iliad, 126-132 159
37. Prepositions; Iliad, 133-141 164
38. Comparison of Adjectives; Iliad, 142-151 167
39. Formation and Comparison of Adverbs; Iliad, 152-157 171
40. Numerals; 7/iW, 158-164 174
41. The Present, Future, and First Aorist System
o fV e r b s ;/ / iW , 165-172 179
42. The Second Aorist, and the First and Second Perfect Systems
of Verbs;//;W, 173-181 181
43. The Perfect Middle System of Verbs; Iliad, 182-192 183
44. First and Second Passive Systems of Verbs; Iliad, 193-200 186
45. The Present, Future, and Aorist System of -jui Verbs; Iliad, 201-211 189
46. First and Second Perfect Systems of -fii Verbs; Iliad, 212-222 192
47. The Middle and Passive of -/// Verbs; Iliad, 223-232 195
48. Review of Nouns; Iliad, 233-239 197
49. Review of Adjectives; Iliad, 240-244 199
50. Review of Pronouns; Iliad, 245-249 201
51. Review of Participles and Infinitives; Iliad, 250-259 203
52. Review of Verbs in the Active Voice; Iliad, 260-268 206
53. Review of Verbs in the Middle Voice; Iliad, 269-289 208
54. Review of Verbs in the Passive Voice; Iliad, 290-303 211
55. Review of Irregular -fii Verbs; Iliad, 304-314 213
56. Iliad, 315-333 215
57. Iliad, 334-347 217
58. Iliad, 348-358 219
59. Iliad, 359-379 221
60. Iliad, 380-400 223
VI
CONTENTS
6\. Iliad, m - 4 l 2 225

62. Iliad, 413-424 228
63. Iliad, 425-435 230
64. Iliad, 436-449 232
65. Iliad, 450-461 234
66. Iliad, 462-470 236
67. Iliad, 471-479 238
68. Iliad, 480-489 240
69. Iliad, 490-499 242
70. Iliad, 500-516 244
7 \. Iliad, 517-527 246
72. Iliad, 528-535 248
73. Iliad, 536-550 250
74. Iliad, 551-572 252
75. Iliad, 573-589 254
76. Iliad, 590-598 256
77. Iliad, 599-611 258
Grammar
Introduction to Attic Greek 263
Grammar of Homeric Greek 267
Greek-English Vocabulary 381

English-Greek Vocabulary 415
Index to the Grammar 427
VI1
PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION
Pharr’s Hom eric Greek is now approaching its centenary. It saw a second edition in
1959 and was rejuvenated once again in 1985, when John Wright jettisoned some
of the comparisons with the Old Testament and all of the doggerel—“Polyphlois-
boisterous Homer of old” included—to make room for some much-needed addi
tional grammatical help. The fourth edition provides todays students, many of
whom have never studied English grammar (let alone Latin), with a systematic and
thorough introduction to the basic grammatical concepts and terminology necessary
to learn Greek.
Hom eric Greek has rightly enjoyed its remarkable longevity. Book 1 of the Iliad
is hard to beat for drama and variety. As Pharr understood, once students know the
story of the epic and begin to visualize the setting and characters, they can make
intelligent guesses about vocabulary. This, in turn, makes it easier for them to read
at sight. For example (as I note in Lesson 13), if the priest Chryses did something
or other “up to the ships of the Achaeans,” students soon realize that it is far more
likely that he “walked” or “went,” rather than “hurled” or “shouted in agreement.”
Homeric epithets, too, reassure students that they can master the vocabulary, varied
and rich as it is. If the old priest approaches the ships of the Achaeans, those ships
are likely to be black or swift, not well-greaved or slender-ankled. And, of course,
the notes help students with the more difficult aspects o f the poems syntax.
Beginning with epic poetry also means that students encounter mostly short
sense units. Even when the syntactic going gets tough, they are relieved to find that
a passage may be difficuU not because they have forgotten all the Greek they
thought they had learned, but because the speaker is upset. Moreover, very few of
my students in recent years have entered the course with any sense of what poetry
can do, even in English. Some express wonder when they discover that sound and
rhythm as well as the order of words can affect sense. They also find poetry is easier
to retain than prose and quickly realize that it is not so very difficult to memorize
five, ten, or even twenty-one lines of the Iliad—and that reciting (or listening to
recitations of) passages of the poem reinforces what they have learned.
Obvious as these features may seem to experienced readers of ancient Greek
epics, they make a big difference in how quickly students gain confidence, encour
aging them to apply common sense to their reading and to focus on meaning, not
just translation. In this way Homer fosters the combination of flexibility and preci
sion that is necessary in order to read ancient Greek at more advanced levels.
IX
PREFACE TO TH E FO U RT H E D ITIO N
Despite the many advantages o f Homeric Greek, the majority of classicists

prefer to begin with the Attic dialect, and there are good reasons to do so. Dismissing
Homeric Greek as a legitimate alternative, however, is unwarranted. A skeptic once
asserted that he was as likely to teach elementary Greek with Homer as he would
be to teach elementary English with Jabberwocky. I might agree—if the goal of
learning ancient Greek were to speak modern Greek, or if some of the greatest
works produced in ancient Greek were not in epic dialect, or if much of the litera
ture that followed did not assume a thorough knowledge of both the Iliad and the
Odyssey. As for the objection that epic, in contrast to Attic, contains too many odd
forms and constructions, in “Homer and the Study of Greek” (prefaced to earher
editions and reprinted in Classical Weekly 14, no. 15 [February 14, 1921]), Pharr
offers a detailed reply to this and other objections. O f his many convincing argu
ments, I quote but one:
Many Atticists have maintained that the great number of irregularities in

Homeric Greek would be an added difficulty to the beginner. It is true that
they are troublesome, but not so troublesome as the considerably greater num
ber of irregularities in Attic Greek. Any one who will take the trouble to count
them will find that the irregular formations in Attic Greek considerably out
number those in Homer. There is not space here to catalogue the various irregu
larities, heteroclites, metaplastic forms, etc., of Attic Greek, but the lists given
in Kuehner-Blass, or any other o f the more elaborate Greek grammars, are
enough to convince the most skeptical.
Here I add some general points. Book 1 of the Iliad offers a variety of both
narrative and speech (indirect as well as direct); there are also wishes and com
mands. While it is true that uses of the subjunctive and optative in Homer are more
difficult to reduce to rules than their Attic prose counterparts, Homeric examples
have the virtue of offering students a glimpse of the scope of these moods, which is
arguably more valuable than rules and formulae for translation. Indeed, experience
with Homeric uses of the subjunctive and optative is highly useful when one is
faced with epic constructions in Greek tragedy. It is equally true that after a year of
Homeric Greek students are not likely to have a firm grasp of the use of the optative
in secondary sequence or perfect participles, and they will need some help with
conditions and the use of the article if they immediately turn to Attic. But, as Pharr
points out, it is not wise to overwhelm students by asking them to learn too much
grammar at once. Iliad 1 offers a solid foundation, and it is important to get students
to read as soon as possible—which is exactly what beginning with Homer does. In
the third semester students can fill in grammatical gaps, whether they turn from
Homer to Herodotus or to Attic prose and poetry.
New to this edition are the grammatical lessons (“Preliminaries”) in most of the
first forty lessons. For the most part, vocabulary lists, practice sentences, and notes
PREFACE TO TH E FO U RT H ED IT IO N
to the Iliad in the seventy-seven lessons, as well as the two reference sections at the
back of the book (Grammar and Vocabulary) remain unchanged from the revised
third edition. I have, however, made a few changes; some of the more abstruse or
archaic definitions have been removed from the vocabulary lists, and entries
for nouns and adjectives of the third declension are now abbreviated only after
Lesson 28, where students are warned of the change after being asked to undertake
a thorough review of this declension. In all seventy-seven lessons vocabulary
entries have lost their hyphens (which tended to confuse students rather than help
with word-formation), and the sections called “Related Words” (formerly “Deriva
tives”) have been lightly revised. On the other hand, I have retained Pharr’s mix of
upright and Porsonic Greek fonts, which helps prepare students for the variety of
typefaces they are likely to encounter if they continue to study Greek.
Here I would like to thank John Wright, whose concise revision of the third
edition did much to keep H om eric Greek alive, and John Drayton, former director
of University of Oklahoma Press, for his initial support o f this project and for
encouraging the press to have the entire text reset to improve legibility. I also thank
Alice Stanton, special projects editor at OU Press, along with production manager
Emmy Ezzell, for the hard work they put into dealing with the technical difficulties
a text of this complexity poses, and Carol and David Foucault o f C.E Graphics for
the remarkable job they have done rekeying the original text and interpolating the
new material.
Mary Bellino, who lent a hand at every stage of editing and production, deserves
apotheosis for her consummate skill—and her patience. Knowing that I could call
on Philippa Goold for a round o f proofreading made the last stages of the project
less daunting. Thanks to her keen eye and unerring sense of English prose, the text
has been purged of countless errors and more than a few infelicities. My thanks also
go to Dale Sinos for additional proofreading and checking, and to Marie Flaherty
for preparing the index to the Grammar. I am grateful to my colleague Geoff Sumi
for his willingness to teach elementary Greek using Pharr’s text and the grammati
cal supplement (the forebear of the “Preliminaries” sections), to our many students
who test-drove the new material, and to Mount Holyoke College for a faculty grant
that allowed me to prepare “Pharr Four” for production. Finally, many thanks to
Boaz Roth (Thomas Jefferson School, St. Louis, Missouri) and to Lyd Wells (St. John’s
College, Santa Fe, New Mexico) for their help in finding and compiling errata in
the first printing.
My hope is that the changes I have made do not detract from Pharr’s remark
able work and that Hom eric Greek will provide as enjoyable a teaching and learning
experience as it has in the past.
Paula D ebnar
XI
NOTES TO INSTRUCTORS
ON USING THE FOURTH EDITION
The first forty lessons of this edition now provide thorough explanations of gram
mar and syntax, expanding on John Wrights earlier additions and supplying what
English G ram m ar fo r Students o f Russian and similar books offer students of other
languages. As in earlier editions, the lessons are divided into numbered sections
(from 1 in the first lesson to 1192 at the end of the reference grammar), which make
it possible to direct students to the grammar at the back of the book for morpho
logical charts, explanations o f odd forms, and rules of syntax. The numbered
sections also make it easier for instructors to break up assignments within a lesson
or to declare material optional. Given how much the earlier lessons (and the lesson
on indirect discourse) have grown, instructors are likely to want to spread some of
them over several class meetings.
Although students will benefit from additional exercises to practice forms and
grammatical concepts, Pharr’s Greek sentences are as crafty as they are well crafted.
When asked to explain what each sentence emphasizes, students initially tend to
dwell on new vocabulary, but will soon recognize a word from an earlier lesson
that might easily be confused with a newly learned word. They then begin to find
more interesting details, such as a new use of the genitive or dative—and quickly
realize that it is dangerous to ignore second and third meanings in vocabularies or
the parenthetical references to sections o f the grammar.
Once students begin to read the Iliad, they are likely to need some guidance in
using the practice sentences to puzzle out the more complicated grammar of the
poem. Comparing a Greek sentence with its counterpart in the Iliad can help with
such things as elision, implied pronouns, and odd forms that students should
verify in the reference grammar or vocabulary. The Greek practice sentences are
equally useful when it comes to unraveling word order in the poem.
Similarly, when translating Pharr’s English sentences into Greek, students
should look for their Greek model (or models) and be asked to explain how each
sentence is like or unlike its model(s). This exercise builds in repeated review, while
it also draws attention to easily overlooked but important details in the Greek.
Once adept at deconstructing both kinds of practice sentences, students can put their
skills to good use when working alone or in study sessions among themselves.
Despite the additional help in this edition, Pharr’s original reference grammar
and the general vocabulary sections (Greek-English and English-Greek) remain
valuable assets, and students should be strongly encouraged to consult them. The
xni
N O T E S T O I N S T R U C T O R S ON U SI N G T H E F O U R T H E D I T I O N
The Twenty-Four Commonest Verb Forms

Percentage o f Percentage o f
R ank and Form O ccu rren ce R ank and Form O ccu rren ce
1. Them . pres. ppl. act. 10.35 13. Them . pres, i n f m id. 2.03
2. Them . pres. ind. act. 8.18 14. A them . pres, in f act. 2.00
3. Them . pres, i n f act. 6.26 15. P e rf ind. act 1.94
4. Them . impf. ind. act. 4.35 16. Them . 2d a o r ppl. act. 1.77
5. A them . im p f ind. act. 4.23 17. Fut. ind. act. 1.68
6. 1st aor. ind. act. 4.03 18. P e rf ppl. m id. 1.53
7. Them . pres. ind. m id. 3.94 19. Them . 2d a o r in f act. 1.51
8. Them . pres. ppl. m id. 3.86 20. Fut. ind. m id. 1.42
9. Athem . pres. ind. act. 3.54 21. Them . pres. opt. act. 1.24
10. Them , im p f ind. m id. 2.64 22 Them . pres, im p e r act. 1.13
11. Them . 2d a o r ind. m id. 2.55 23. Them . pres. sub. act. 1.10
12. 1st aor. ppl. act. 2.43 24. 1st a o r ind. pass. 1.07
Total 76.78
grammar aflfords ambitious students a chance to learn more on their own without
becoming overwhelmed. Moreover, the traditional format of the grammar helps
familiarize students with its more advanced counterparts, and learning to use a
“real” grammar (such as Smyths) is as important for students of Greek as learning
to use a lexicon. As for the lexical richness of the Iliad, Owen and Goodspeed’s
H om eric Vocabularies (Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1969), organized
by parts of speech and frequency of use, will help students make the most efficient
use of their time.
Although my intent was to be thorough, I also recognize how easy it is to over
teach elementary Greek—as Pharr clearly understood. To guard against this
tendency, I have treated some sections as optional or “for reference” or “for recog
nition.” My choice of optional verb forms was informed by a tally (which Pharr
attributes to a Prof Robbins) of forms found on ten pages each of Homer, Euripides,
Herodotus, Demosthenes, and Plato, and on twenty of Xenophon (ten each from
the Anabasis and the M em orablia). The table (above) summarizing this informa
tion shows that 24 forms account for about 77 percent of all verbs found in these
samples; it counts all perfects together, and it includes the present participle of ei/ui
among the thematic present participles (aorists like are counted as athematic).
As Pharr notes, these numbers indicate that as soon as possible students
should learn
• the present, imperfect, first and second aorist, perfect, and future indicative;
• the present and first and second aorist infinitive and participle;
• at least the active present optative, subjunctive, and imperative;
• eifii in full, and some forms of (prjfif.
Some of the irregular verbs and adjectives that come toward the end of the first
forty lessons are likely candidates for optional material, better learned in context.
xiv
N O T E S T O I N S T R U C T O R S ON U S I N G T H E F O U R T H E D I T I O N
although not all will agree. But, as Pharr knew, much of what students learn—and
retain—comes from reading the Iliad.
I offer three pieces of general advice. First, I recommend that students not
write out English translations of Greek sentences or passages of the Iliad. Doing so
takes up time that could be put to better use rereading and translating the Greek. It
also creates the misleading impression that there is one correct translation for
every Greek sentence, when there may be more than one possibility. So too, obvious
as this may seem, if students consult their English translations for in-class recita
tion, they will be reading English, not Greek, and they will lose an opportunity to
practice their new language. It is also quite possible that they will memorize (even
if inadvertently) the English sentence instead of thinking about the Greek. These
points are especially important to keep in mind when they begin reading the Iliad.
Second, students should read aloud all the Greek they encounter (practice sen
tences as well as the Iliad). Reading aloud trains them to collect clues about forms
and syntax as they hear them (from left to right as they read). Given the impor
tance of the internal syllables of Greek words and the flexibility of Greek word
order, conditioning students to read—and reread—sentences before trying to
translate should be a priority. Moreover, since Pharr’s practice sentences contain
metrical phrases, students will begin to develop a natural sense of the rhythm of
epic verse even before they are introduced to dactylic hexameter.
Finally, while most scholars acknowledge the accuracy of the so-called restored
pronunciation, there are good reasons not to adopt all the proposed restorations
for the classroom. The first is pedagogical: some o f the restored sounds are not
found in English or are difficult for English-speakers to pronounce (or to distin
guish from similar sounds), and mispronunciation can obscure differences between
letters. Secondly, the restored pronunciation is based on Attic Greek of the classical
period. But Athens was not the only place where rhapsodes performed the Homeric
poems, and the Iliad as recited by a Corinthian performer in, say, the sixth century
B C E might have sounded quite different from the Iliad as it was recited by an Athe
nian in the fifth century.

The new grammatical introductions end with Lesson 40. Most of the remaining
lessons call for a review of forms or, if they deal with new material, introduce forms
that do not appear with much frequency in Homer. Equally important, having
finished forty lessons of H om eric Greek, students know how the book works and
have the tools to figure things out on their own—and that, after all, is more impor
tant than teaching them everything about Greek.
XV
INTRODUCTION TO THE ILIAD
The Iliad opens in the tenth year of the Trojan War. Despite its title, “The Story of
Troy”—or rather “of Ihon,” as the city is called in Greek—the subject of the poem is
the rage of the Greek warrior Achilles. Sparked by a quarrel with Agamemnon,
commander of the combined Greek forces, Achilles’ fierce anger prompts him to
withdraw from battle. His absence brings the Achaeans (the Greeks) to the very
brink of defeat.
Over the course of the poem Achilles’ rage grows in both magnitude and com
plexity as he contemplates the futility o f fighting when he—like all mortals—must
soon die. Unlike other mortals, however, Achilles has a choice of fates. As his
mother, the sea goddess Thetis, has told him, he can return home and live a long
life without glory, or fight at Troy, kill Hector, and die soon thereafter. Yet, as Achilles
knows, he cannot truly be “Achilles,” the hero who is “by far the best of the Achae
ans,” unless he fights.
Even so, it is not until Book 18 that Achilles finally takes up arms again and
returns to battle, and even then he does so only to avenge his closest friend, Patro-
clus, killed while trying to storm Troy in Achilles’ stead. In his rage at Patroclus’
death Achilles becomes like a force of nature, slaying countless Trojans, including
Patroclus’ killer, the Trojan prince Hector. As he learns, however, neither killing
Hector nor repeatedly defiling his corpse by dragging it around the walls of Troy
can bring back his friend.
Finally, urged by the gods, Achilles abandons his rage and allows King Priam,
Hector’s father, to ransom his son’s body and return it to Troy. He also grants
Priam’s request for twelve days for mourning and burying his son. The Iliad ends
with the funeral of Hector, but although they are not recounted in the poem, the
audience knows that both Achilles’ death and the fall of Troy will soon follow.
Who we are, what we do—for ourselves and for our communities—and why
we do it, given the short span of a human lifetime, are questions as relevant today
as they were in the seventh or eighth century b c e , when we believe that a poet (or
possibly poets), traditionally referred to as “Homer,” composed the Iliad. It is for
this reason, as well as for its remarkable poetry, that the Iliad is still read and
enjoyed 2,700 years or so later.
xvn
IN TR O D U CTIO N TO THE ILIAD
It is also Studied for the intriguing questions it raises. How traditional oral
poems could have been combined to create such a coherent, monumental work as
the Iliad remains a matter of debate among scholars. O f particular interest is the
role that literacy may have played in the epics composition and preservation.
Could the poet—or poets—of the Iliad write? Is it even possible to compose a
poem of this length and complexity without the help of written texts? Could the
ancestor of the text we now read be the transcription of an especially masterful
performance of the epic? Equally intriguing are questions about the historicity of
the events referred to in the poem and its anachronisms. Certain elements of the
Iliad—in some cases, words and phrases—may be relics of the period of upheaval
in the Mediterranean world (around 1200 b c e ) that led to the destruction o f the
great palace centers of Mycenaean (Bronze Age) Greece. On the other hand, men
tion of cities (as opposed to palaces and estates), and of iron as a base rather than a
precious metal point to a more recent date of composition.
Concise and stimulating discussions of the composition of the poem as well as
its literary themes can be found in Bernard Knox’s introductory essay to Robert
Fagles’s translation (New York: Viking, 1990) and in Sheila Murnaghans introduc
tion to the translation by Stanley Lombardo (Indianapolis; Hackett, 1997). For
those interested in stories about the Trojan War and its antecedents, Richard R
Martins Myths o f the Ancient Greeks (New York: New American Library, 2003)
provides a lively retelling of the Trojan legends, while Pierre Grimals Dictionary o f
Classical Mythology (Oxford: Blackwell, 1996) is a useful reference. Two short books,
Seth Schein’s The M ortal Hero (Berkeley: University of Californian Press, 1984) and
Jasper Griffin’s H om er on Life and Death (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1980), remain
essential reading.
For those who would like to delve more deeply into Homeric scholarship, the
following volumes are good starting places; all provide further bibliography:
Richard Rutherford, Homer. Greece and Rome: New Surveys in the Classics, 26
(Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996).
Ian Morris and Barry Powell, eds., A New Com panion to H om er (Leiden: Brill,
1997).
Douglas Cairns, ed., Oxford Readings in H om ers Iliad (Oxford: Oxford Univer
sity Press, 2001).
Robert Fowler, ed., The Cam bridge Com panion to H om er (Cambridge: Cam
bridge University Press, 2004).
J. M. Foley, ed., A Com panion to Ancient Epic (Oxford: Blackwell, 2005).
Equally valuable are the introductory essays in the multivolume G. S. Kirk et

al.. The Iliad: A Com m entary (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985-93).
On the restored pronunciation of ancient Greek see W. S. Allen, Vox Graeca,
3rd ed. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987).
X V lll
INTR O D U CT IO N TO THE ILIAD
Last, but hardly least, students learning Homeric Greek should read the entire
Iliad in English. In addition to those mentioned above are translations by Rich
mond Lattimore (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1961) and Robert Fitzger
ald (New York: Anchor, 1974), as well as the more recent translation by Herbert
Jordan (Norman: Oklahoma University Press, 2008).
XI X
W A ^ iW A V .V A W V iW iW '.V .V .V A W .V A V V W .'A ^ W .V A W iV .V A V .W S H A 'A V .W .V A
PO DO NA
Pelion
O
Dulichion s
'a e t o l i a /
^‘ '-LOCRIS o.
-<0^
Ithaca CAIYDON p ^ „^ / A O fc K °
(DELPHI) BOEOTIA
ELIS . Ath ens

\ \ Salamis
Zccynthus \ ABCO$i<’MY<ENAE
P Y L O ^ R C A D I/^ °T ib y n S
I o n i a n
S e a 'S p a r t a
pylo s (P y l u s ) LACE^blSvEMON
Cythera
^ z
A
•S' e
100 Kilometers
100 Miles
XX
i^VVA*.’.V .V A V A V .V W .'.'.'.'.-.V .'.S V .‘,.*.V ,> .V .V ,‘.V ,V ,W .V .'/ .S ’rV.‘. '>y
C I C O N I A
G
Sam othrace
Imbros qA B Y D O S
SiMO/s <
ILIU M P H R Y G I A >
(T R o V )^ '
•mnos Tenedos
, ^ ^ . , - Q ^ : ^ S C A M A N D E R (XANTHUS)
<;^ <
CH RVSA ^ ^ O th e b e
°O L L A (> )
M Y S I A
<s>
Lesbos
^£>■
<s>
yro s O
M A E O N I A
LT> <
<
a
Q EANDER
Samos M
Mycafe C A R I A
MILETUS
<
L Y C I A
\A
Cos
Nisyros
Syme
Rhodes
Cosos
CNOSSOS
Crete
T he A e c e a n r e g io n
XXI
LESSONS
Lesson 1
INTRODUCTORY
How to learn Greek with this book
H om eric Greek is divided into five main parts:
1) Seventy-seven lessons (sections 1-455)

2) A brief introduction to Attic Greek for those who intend to continue the
study of Greek with this dialect (456-500)
3) Grammar of Homeric Greek (5 0 1 -1 1 9 2 ), for reference and additional
information
4) Greek-English and English-Greek Vocabularies
5) Index
The individual lessons contain:
1) Preliminaries (in Lessons 1-40). Because this edition o f H om eric Greek does
not assume that students already know Latin (or any language other than
English), the section of preliminaries introduces the basics of Greek (and
English) grammar. Moreover, because Greek differs from Latin inmany
respects, even students who do know Latin will find newmaterial in each
lesson—and are likely to benefit from a review of the basics as well. (The
final thirty-seven lessons focus primarily on reading the Iliad; for grammat
ical material they direct you to the relevant sections in the Grammar.)
2) Numbered sections, including:
• the grammatical material covered in the lesson

• a vocabulary section: a list of Greek words and their definitions (followed
by a few related English words, prefixes, or names)
• Greek sentences to translate into English (these will also help you under
stand the assigned passage of the Iliad)
• English sentences to translate into Greek
• verses from Book 1 of the Iliad (beginning in Lesson 13)
• notes to help you with the Iliad passage.
To be well prepared to tackle—and get the most benefit from—the translation

assignments in Hom eric Greek, when you begin a new lesson:
• read assigned sections carefully

• memorize the vocabulary
• practice new forms.
HOMERIC GREEK
Do your best to learn the new vocabulary and forms right away. If you rely heavily
on vocabulary lists or noun- and verb-charts for your homework, you will make
in-class recitation and exams more difficult than they should be. It is better to
spend two or three moderate sessions (40 minutes or so) studying Greek than it is
to try to do all your studying at once; even very short bursts (10-15 minutes) of
memorization can be very useful—and easy to fit into a busy schedule. In general,
however, you should count on spending about twice the time you spend in class
studying outside o/class.
One final piece of advice: always read Greek aloud. As you will soon discover,
Greek words often contain several syllables. Overlook one and you are likely to
miss an important clue about what a word means or how it is used.
1 The Greek alphabet and pronunciation

The pronunciation of ancient Greek differs radically from the pronunciation of
modern Greek, and even the received pronunciation (that is, the traditional way in
which ancient Greek has been pronounced in modern times) has changed, espe
cially since the mid-twentieth century. Based on what ancient grammarians have to
say about pronunciation and on evidence such as wordplay and spelling variants,
including those on inscriptions, scholars believe they have been able to reconstruct
or “restore” the way Attic Greek (the dialect of Athens) was pronounced during the
classical period, the fifth and fourth centuries b c e .
The most important differences between the received and restored pronun
ciations involve a few consonants, vowels, and diphthongs (pairs of vowels). For
these letters (marked with asterisks on the chart that follows) you will find both
pronunciations. Your instructor will indicate which you should use.
You need two more pieces of information to be able to understand the pro
nunciation chart. First, some vowels can be either short or long. The length of a
vowel represents the length of time it is held (much like a note in music); it does
not change the quality of the sound the vowel represents. (In other words, the a
sound in Greek is ah as in the exclamation A ha!—never ay as in hay.) Second, there
are two forms of the lowercase sigma (the 5-sound). The first is used when the letter
appears inside a word (medial)-, the second when the letter ends the word (final).
(In some texts you will see the letter c—called a lunate sigma—used for both.)
2a Learn the alphabet and sounds of Greek letters (501-508).

(Numbers refer to sections in the Grammar at the back of this book, which often
contain additional information.) Keep in mind that the pronunciation equivalents
presented here are only approximate.
LESSON 1
The Greek Alphabet
Letter Sound Greek Name English Name

Aa a (short) like the first a in aha! dX(pa alpha
a (long) as in fa th e r
Bj3 B as in bite firjza beta
ry g as in get y d fifia gamma
A8 d as in deal d ekra delta
El: e as in red E ii/ilov epsilon
ZK zd as in Mazda zeta
H yf ay as in fate. ^ ra eta
* Restored: like e in French/cfe
0 6* th as in thin. drjra theta
* Restored: t + h as in fat head
11 ee (short) as in meat im a iota
ee (long) like the i in machine
K k k as in kill KCLJUia kappa
Aa 1 as in love Xd^fida lambda
Mu m as in met fAV mu
Nv n as in net vv nu
(ks) X as in wax xi
O o* o as in rose. O lUlKpOV omicron
* Restored: o much like English ought
n ji p as in pie Jii pi
Pp r as in red
(Rrrrroll it, if you can.) pa> rho
Z o (medial)
5 (final) s as in sit oiy/xa sigma
(With /j, y, (5, or // pronounced like the s in rose.)
Tr t as in tie zav tau
Yv u (short) as in lunatic;
u (long) as in ruse V y/iXov upsilon
<P<p* f as in fat (or ph as in
sophomore). (pT phi
* Restored: p + h as in top hat
ch in Loch Ness. X< chi
* Restored: k+h as in thick head
ps as in lips y/i psi
Qco* o as in go. a jney a omega
* Restored: like the vowel sound in saw
000-000 HOMERIC GREEK
2b Learn the order o f the alphabet.

To look up a word in a lexicon (Greek for dictionary; the plural is lexica) you
must know the order o f the Greek alphabet. With a few exceptions it is much like
the English alphabet, but there are letters in the Greek alphabet that do not exist in
English and vice-versa. Here are some suggestions to help with the new letters. No
doubt you can come up with your own (more clever) memorization device. In fact,
being able to create such tricks (called mnemonics) is a key ingredient for success in
learning languages.
• First come a , /?, y, d, e (like English except that Greek has y where English
has c).
• Immediately following are t], 6. (Think of the letter zeta. Mispronounce it
slightly and you will say zay-th-a, spelled - 9 - [a].)
• After the Greek equivalents of i, k, I, m, n (i, ic, A, fi, i') instead of o comes
The nonsense word ksop will help you remember o , n.
• There is no q, so next come the equivalents of r, s, t, u (p, a , x, v ) .
• The first of the four final letters of the alphabet is cp (think of the initial sound
of first, four, and final), which is followed by %and iff.
• The very last letter in the alphabet is co as in “from alpha to omega” (i.e., from
beginning to end).
2c The digamma (vau)

The digamma or vau (f), which represents a w-sound, is a kind of ghost letter:
it is not written or pronounced, nor is it a letter of the alphabet when it comes to
searching for words in a lexicon. Its ghostly presence, however, can help to explain
some irregular forms, and knowing about the digamma is also usefiil for determining
the meter (rhythm) of Greek poetry. Consequently, you will sometimes encounter
a digamma in a note or in a word in parentheses in the vocabulary entry.
3a Learn the breathing marks: the /j-sound in Greek (527-533).

Although there is no letter h in Greek, some words beginning with a vowel (or
pair of vowels) are pronounced as if they began with an h. To represent this sound,
Greek uses a rough breathing mark, which looks like an opening single quotation
mark ( ‘ ) over the vowel (on diphthongs, see 3d). Words that start with the letter p
(rho) are also pronounced with an /i-sound, so this letter too is capped by a rough
breathing mark when it begins a word. The /i-sound is why some English words
derived from Greek, such as rhythm and rheumatism, begin with rh instead of r.
Greek words that begin with a vowel without the /i-sound carry a smooth breath
ing mark, which looks like a closing single quotation mark ( ’ ), over the vowel (or
second of two vowels in a diphthong). The smooth breathing mark does not aflfect
pronunciation; however, it does help you to distinguish words whose meanings
are different, but whose spellings are identical except for their breathing marks.
The word oV (pronounced on), for example, means being, but dv (pronounced hon)
means which.
LESSON 1
Example Pronunciation Sound Breathing

i):iep hoo-pair h rough
ai'To ow-toe (none) smooth
For the purpose of looking up words in a lexicon, breathing marks are not
treated as letters of the alphabet. But to spell words correctly you should include
them. More important, by including breathing marks you will remind yourself to
p r o n o u n c e the word correctly, and the correct pronunciation may suggest a related
English word that will help you recall the meaning of the Greek.
3b Capitalization (502, 527)

The earliest examples of written Greek contain all capital letters with no
spaces between words and little or no punctuation. Byzantine (i.e., medieval
Greek) scribes used lowercase letters, and modern printers of ancient Greek have
retained this convention. Proper nouns (names) begin with a capital letter, but
sentences normally do not, unless the first word of the sentence begins a new
paragraph. When single initial vowels are capitalized, breathing marks and accents
are usually placed before the first letter: 'iXioq. For diphthongs, see 3d.
3c Learn the pronunciation of g-combinations, called gamma nasals (508).

The letter y followed by another y or by a k , o r x is pronounced like a v (nu),
a nasal consonant, which is why is it called a gamma-nasal. The gamma-nasal
explains why in English we spell Sphinx and larynx with an n instead of a ^ as these
words are spelled in Greek.
yy —> ng as in laughing
yK —> nk as in ink
y^ —> nx as in Sphinx
yX —> (probably) nk(h) as in pink hat
As is true in many languages, the pronunciation of Greek consonants most

likely changed when they were combined with other consonants—even if the
second consonant appeared in a different word. The combination of /r + (5, as in
E K d o a i g , for example, was most likely pronounced e g - d o - s i s . But you do not need
to memorize these combinations to be able to recite Greek. Many of them occur
naturally—just as in English you will pronounce the ‘s’ in d o c k s i d e r differently than
the V in d o g s .
3d Learn the pronunciation of diphthongs (504-506).

A diphthong consists o f two vowels that glide together, creating (roughly) a
single sound. “Diphthong” means “two sounds,” and in the classical period speakers
of Greek might have distinguished the sounds of the two component vowels. But
even in antiquity diphthongs began to be pronounced as single sounds (monoph
thongs), so we might as well do the same.
HOMERIC GREEK
Vowel + iota Saying this quickly. . . should give you this:

ai ah + e e -> ai as in aisle
El e + ee —> ay as hay
oi oh + ee —> oy as in boy
VI DO (as in m oose) + ee —> ui as in suite
Vowel + upsilon Saying this quickly. . . should give you this:

av ah-oo ow as in house
EV e-oo (not found in Enghsh)
T]V (same as e v ) (not found in Enghsh)
ov 0-00 (hke the oo in moose)
cov (same as o v ) (same as above)
N o t e : The breathing mark usually appears over the second letter of a diphthong;
both breathing mark and accent will appear on this letter if the word is accented on
this syllable, for example, evopK oq, A iaq.
When a diphthong is followed by a vowel, adding a closing y-sound (for a

diphthong ending in an iota) or w-sound (for a diphthong ending in an upsilon)
will make the combinations easier to pronounce.
aioX og —> ai-(y)o-los

EvopKog —> eu-(w)or-kos.
Vowel + iota subscript (“improper diphthongs”)
An iota subscript is an iota written (script) under (sub) a vowel. Current practice is
to ignore it for purposes of pronunciation, although originally it was probably pro
nounced. In other words, the letter-subscript combinations q , //, and co should be
pronounced like simple a , rj, and <u. (Before a word beginning with a vowel, the
subscript in a improper diphthong may be treated as a gentle y-sound.)
Keep in mind that not all pairs of vowels create diphthongs. An iota and alpha
(in that order) do not create a diphthong; in the name rip ia fio q {Priam, the king of
Troy), for example, the two are pronounced separately. When two vowels that nor
mally form a diphthong (such as o i) are to be pronounced separately, you will find
two dots (called a diaeresis) over the second letter: the word jipoidjiTco should be
pronounced pro-i-ap-to.
If a word begins with two vowels, placement of the breathing mark will indi
cate whether the letters form a diphthong or should be treated as two separate sounds.
The breathing mark on the word e v , for example, indicates that e and v form two
syllables. In the word oIkoc,, on the other hand, the breathing mark on the second let
ter indicates that o i is a diphthong and should be treated as a single syllable.
Lesson 2
SYLLABLES; ACCENTS;
PUNCTUATION; PARTS OF SPEECH
4a Learn the principles of dividing words into syllables (560).

Pronouncing Greek words is more difficult to describe than it is to do. Never
theless, learning how to divide words into syllables will make this task easier.
Words have as many syllables as they have vowel sounds. Greek words tend to be
polysyllabic (having many syllables), so they contain a number of units of sound
consisting of a lone vowel (or diphthong), or a vowel and one or more consonants.
The name A y a fisu i’coi’, for example, has four syllables (count the vowels). Close
your eyes and pronounce d d X a o a a . How many vowel sounds do you hear?
Rules for dividing Greek words into syllables:
1) A vowel (or diphthong) on its own may comprise a syllable.

Example; 'Ayaêuvcov —> A - y a - fie fx - v a v (The first alpha is a syllable on
its own.)
2) If a vowel is followed by a single consonant, that consonant will begin the
next syllable.
Example: d d k a a o u —> 6 a - A aa- o a (The X begins the second syllable, Xao.)
3) If a vowel is followed by two adjoining consonants, the first usually closes
(ends) that syllable, while the second consonant begins the next syllable (for
an exception see 560).
Example: d d /.a a o u —> d a - X a a - a a (The first a closes the syllable Xaa,
while the second a begins the final syllable, o a .)
Example: A yanenvcov —> A - y a - n e ^ - v a v (The letter closes the syllable,
/ueu, while the i' begins the final syllable.)
These rules may seem arbitrary, but they will make it easier to pronounce
Greek and to understand the meter o f Greek poetry. If you are skeptical, try
this experiment:
First, ^ronounct AyaîEfivav divided into syllables like this: A y-a^ -E fiv-cov.
Now say the same word divided correctly, like this: A-ya-fXEpL-vmv.
Which is easier to pronounce?
4b WORD LIST FOR PRACTICE IN PRONUNCIATION

Spell and pronounce the following words. If you have not yet memorized the
names of the Greek letters, a may be call ‘a,’ (i may be called ‘b,’ etc., but the sounds
should be familiar.
HOMERIC GREEK
^fjvig wrath, fury, madness, rage

defSo) sing (of, about), hymn, chant
0ed goddess
son o f Peleus, Achilles
Achilles
ov^6 |uevo; accursed, destructive
65 who, which, what
^vpioi countless, innumerable
A nalog Achaean, Greek
aXyo5 grief, pain, woe, trouble
T^6t]^l put, place, cause
jio>.X6g much, many, numerous
d i but, and, for, so
^(p6lôg valiant, mighty
\|»®Xf| soul, spirit, breath, life
X ig Hades, g od o f the lower world
jtpoidutTw hurl forward, send forth
iipog hero, mighty warrior, protector
at)T65 self, same
EXcopiov booty, prey, spoil(s)
TEVxo) make, fashion, cause
Kvrav dog
oiuvog bird (of prey), vulture, omen
and, also
8a (5 portion, feast, banquet
Z tvq Zeus, fa th er and king o f the gods
TeXeib) accomplish, fulfill
PovXi] will, wish, plan, purpose, counsel, council
Connect the following words with the Greek words in the vocabulary list,
consulting a dictionary when in doubt.
Related words: maniac, maniacal (621); ode, odeum, melody, palinode;

myriad; neuralgia, nostalgia; psychology; hero, heroic; automaton, autocracy;
cynic, cynical; teleology.
5a Learn the basic principles of accentuation (534-550).

It is possible to ignore accents and still learn ancient Greek. But accents, as you
will discover, are very helpful. They sometimes provide information about the
10
LESSON 2
meaning of a word or its use, so it will be worth your while to learn them as you
study your vocabulary.
Accents in ancient Greek represented changes in pitch (higher or lower tones).
Pronounced with pitch, Greek may sound “sing-songy” to you, which is not such
a bad thing, since the Iliad, like its sister epic the Odyssey, is likely to have been
chanted and accompanied by music, rather than spoken. On the other hand, since
we are not sure what the actual change in pitch was, we must either improvise or
treat pitch as stress (that is, as emphasis). Stressing an accented syllable may seem
easier than changing pitch, but might make life more difficult for you when you
begin to read poetry. Moreover, exaggerating pitch (or stress) when you pronounce
vocabulary words will help you to remember where accents belong.
Greek has three accents:
Acute ( ' ): A higher or rising pitch: or fiovXri.

Grave ( ' ): Possibly a lower or falling pitch. Scholars are not entirely sure what
the grave represents. It only appears when a word accented on its final syl
lable is followed by another word, as in fiovXfj Kai. Yet even grave accents
are useful, at least indirectly. When we expect a grave accent but find an
acute instead, the acute is likely to tell us something about the word that
follows. (You will learn more about this in Lesson 35.)
Circumflex ( ') : A rising and then falling pitch: fiovXfjg.
Accents move around within words, but there is method in their madness. As
you study your vocabulary and read Greek sentences, try to discern patterns. Ask
yourself, for example, whether there are any syllables on which you do not see
accents. We will return to accents as we study nouns and verbs. (Detailed rules can
be found in 534-550.)
5b Now return to the exercise in 4b and pronounce the words aloud again, this
time with their accents.
6 Learn Greek punctuation (622).

Periods and commas look just like those in English, but the punctuation marks
for half-stops (semicolons or colons) and questions differ. Greek uses the same
mark for both the semicolon and colon: a raised dot (which looks like the top half
of our semicolon).
English: The Achaeans agreed to accept the ransom; it did not please Agamemnon.
Greek: En£v<pr]ur]oav A y u io i d ex d ai d iio iv a- oi>x rjvdave A ya/xe/jvovi.
A question mark in Greek looks like an English semicolon.
English: Who o f the gods set the two o f them together to fight?
Greek: r/g t ' dp' o<pco£ 9e3 i' ^vvit]Ke fidxeaO ai;
11
HOMERIC GREEK
7a Grammatical terminology
Learning to identify parts of speech, terms that classify how words are used in
a given language, may seem tedious, but it will prompt you to think more about
how words produce meaning—a phenomenon people tend to take for granted in
their native languages. Being familiar with parts of speech as well as grammatical
terms (like gender) will also make it easier to discuss grammar.
In Homeric Greek you will find the following parts of speech; nouns, pronouns,
adjectives, verbs, adverbs, conjunctions, prepositions, particles, and interjections.
There are also terms for categories of words that combine the functions of two
parts of speech, such as participles (verb and adjective) and infinitive (verb and noun).
If you are unfamiliar with these terms (and the abbreviations for them) or with the
concept of grammatical gender, read and study the following section.
7b Optional: Definitions o f parts of speech and other grammatical terms

Nouns (n.): Persons, places or things. Often a noun is something concrete:
Helen, book, spear
Sometimes it expresses an abstract concept: wisdom. Greek (like English) has
suffixes that allow us to form abstract nouns from adjectives and verbs. Notice the
English suffixes:
wise —> wisdom

intelligent —> intelligence
to elect —> election
to move —> movement
Proper noun: A particular person (or creature), place, or thing: Helen, King Priam.
In Greek, as in English, proper nouns are capitalized.
Common noun: A noun that is not a proper noun: king (vs. King Priam).
Pronouns (pron.): Words that stand for nouns, such as she or him or it. Later you
will meet special kinds o f pronouns, such as the demonstrative pronoun (dem.
pron.), which points out someone or something (this, that) and the relative pro
noun (rel. pron.) (who, which, whose, whom).
Adjectives (adj.): These words modify—that is, give us more information about—
nouns and pronouns; they usually tell us what kind of, how many, or which.
Gender is not a part of speech, but it is an important grammatical concept when

dealing with nouns, pronouns, and adjectives. In many languages nouns, pronouns,
and adjectives have gender. Greek has three genders: masculine, feminine, and
neuter. Do not confuse grammatical gender with sexual gender. Although a person
or creature of a particular sexual gender may also be of that grammatical gender
(in Greek, as in English, Helen is a she), the gender of most common nouns has
more to do with the form of the noun (and the suffixes it uses) than its sex. The
12
LESSON 2
gender of fiifiXwv (book) is neuter, but the gender of Jiora/udg (river) is masculine.
Things, including abstract concepts, however, are sometimes personified according
to their grammatical gender. In mythology rivers are personified as men. The word
jiEiOco (persuasion) is a feminine noun, and Persuasion is personified as a woman.
(See 634-636 for more examples.)
Verbs express actions and states of being.

A verb used transitively expresses an action performed on a person or object
(any noun or pronoun)—or at least an action that directly affects this object.
Example: Homer walks his dog twice a day. (The action—walking—affects
the dog.)
A verb used intransitively expresses either an action performed absolutely
(i.e., without an object) or a state of being.
Example: Homer often w alks (absolute); Homer was not always blind (state
of being).
Participles are verbal adjectives; that is, they are adjectives formed from verbs, and
they share some of the characteristics of both parts of speech. Examples are the
word running in the sentence The man running down the street fell down and the
word hit in the sentence The boy hit by the car is fine. In these sentences the parti
ciples modify (provide more information about) man and boy.
Infinitives (in f) are verbal nouns. An example is to run in the sentence To run
downhill is dangerous.
Adverbs (adv.) modify (give more information about) verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs; they often tell us how, when, or where (quickly, very here, now).
Example: Homer walked slowly.
Conjunctions (conj.) are words like and, or, and but. They join words with words
or clauses with clauses. (Conjungo, the Latin word from which conjunction is
derived, means;oi« with.)
Examples:
Jack and Jill went up the hill. (The conjunction and joins nouns)
Jill is slow but tall. (The conjunction but joins adjectives)
We came and we saw and we conquered. (The conjunction and joins clauses)
Prepositions (prep.) together with their objects form prepositional phrases. (You
will learn more about prepositions in Lesson 3.)
Examples of prepositions: in, on, down, from , to, around, with, of.
Examples of prepositional phrases: in town (adverbial, expressing where);
o f the b o o k (adjectival, expressing which one, whose); at eight o ’c lock
(adverbial, when).
13
HOMERIC GREEK
Particles: Little words called particles can impart tone to a sentence. Sometimes
the effect can be expressed by tone of voice, sometimes particles can be translated
by phrases like o f course, at least, obviously, indeed, or I suppose. Often they should
be left untranslated.
Interjections are words like Oh! or Alas!
14
Lesson 3
CLAUSES; SYNTAX;
CASES; THE FIRST DECLENSION
Preliminaries
In order to learn Greek you must be able to analyze the structure of a sentence. So
if you need to familiarize yourself with (or review) English grammar and syntax
(the way words are put together in clauses to create meaning), immediately turn to
the appendix on clauses, sentences, and syntax at the end of this lesson.
8a Cases of nouns, pronouns, and adjectives

Greek nouns, pronouns, and adjectives change in ways that provide informa
tion about their syntax; that is, about their function and meaning in context.
Change in case: The suffix of a Greek noun (or pronoun) tells you its case; that
is, it tells you quite a bit about its syntax, or how it functions in the sentence. For
the most part, English nouns have lost their case endings, but some pronouns are
still inflected; that is, modified in a way that expresses their syntax.
She does the work. I used she, not her, because she is the subject of the sentence,
the one who performs the action.
Mary hit her. 1 used her, not she, because her is the direct object of the sen
tence. The subject performed the action on her.
They came along with Sarah and me. I used me, not I, because m e is the object
of the preposition with.
H is [book] is on the table. I used his to express possession. In English we can
also add s to a noun to express possession: Georges means o f George or
belonging to George.
English relies heavily on word order to convey meaning. The following two
sentences, for example, have entirely different meanings, although they contain
identical words:
Sally gave Sam a book.

Sam gave Sally a book.
Word order is so important in English that even though the pronouns should
be enough to distinguish subject from object, a speaker would not say Him gave she
a book, if she meant that Sally gave Sam a book.
You could describe the difference between the two sentences above by saying
that in the first sentence, Sally gave Sam a book, the subject of the sentence is Sally,
book is the direct object, and Sam is the indirect object. In the second sentence,
15
HOMERIC GREEK
Sam gave Sally a book, the subject is Sam, book is still the direct object, and Sally is
now the indirect object.
In a Greek version of the first sentence, Sally would have a suffix to tell you that
she is the subject; book would have a different suffix to indicate that it is the direct
object, as would Sam to let you know that he is the indirect object. Consequently,
word order in Greek can be much more flexible than it is in English, and you must
pay close attention to case endings.
8b Learn some common uses of the Greek cases (978-1022).

Greek has five cases. Below you will find a few of their most common uses.
Whenever you have difficulty determining how a case is used in a sentence, look
through the more complete lists in the Grammar (978-1022). Often you will find
the very word or phrase you are wrestling with.
1) The nominative (978) is used to express:
• The subject of a sentence or clause, which (for now) we will use to mean
either the person or thing performing the action expressed in the verb
(e.g., Helen in Helen reads this book), or the person or thing that is in a
particular state o f being (e.g., Helen in Helen is tall).
• Predicate nouns and predicate adjectives with linking verbs such as is
(e.g., spear in This thing is a spear).
2) The genitive (979-994) limits nouns (or pronouns); it often expresses:
• Possession, source, or origin (think of genesis): In Priam is Cassandra’s

fa th er (the father o f Cassandra), Cassandra would be in the genitive case
in Greek. In The wrath o f Achilles destroyed many men, the noun Achilles
would be in the genitive. In Greek the preposition o f is unnecessary,
because it is already implied by the use of the genitive case. In other words,
Achilles (or Cassandra) in the genitive case in Greek expresses the same
idea as o f Achilles (or o f Cassandra) in English.
N o t e : W h e n in d ou bt, fo r now try tran slating th e genitive by using the word

o/plus the noun.
3) The dative (995-1010) is used to express:
• The indirect object, the person or thing to whom (sometimes fo r whom)

the subject gives or does something: Chryses will give ransom to A gam em
non. In Greek the preposition to is unnecessary because it is already
implied by the dative case. In other words, in Greek Agamemnon in the dative
case expresses the same idea as to Agam em non in the English sentence.
• Advantage: The person (or thing) fo r whose advantage (or disadvantage)
the subject does something: Victory will be good fo r the Trojans. In Greek
fo r is implied by the dative.
N o t e : When in doubt, for now try translating the dative by to or/or plus the noun.
16
LESSON 3
4) The accusative (1011-1021) is used to express:
• The direct object, the person or thing on whom the subject of the verb
performs an action: Patroclus in The spear struck Patroclus, or Hector in
Achilles killed Hector. Although in the sentences Agamemnon saw Menel-
aus and Clytemnestra knows her nam e it may not seem as if Agamemnon
did anything to Menelaus when he saw him or that Clytemnestra is doing
anything to the name when she knows it, Menelaus and nam e are the
direct objects of their sentences.
If you have trouble determining the direct object in sentences like
these, ask yourself “What/whom did the spear strike?” (answer: Patro
clus). “What/whom did Achilles kill?” (answer: Hector). “What/whom did
Agamemnon see?” (answer: Menelaus). “What does Clytemnestra know?”
(answer: [her] name). The answers to these questions are the direct objects.
5) The vocative (1022) is used to address someone or something directly:

Greeks, listen to me! You will often find the vocative with a command of
some sort or with the expletive a (usually left untranslated).
8c Meaning vs. translation of cases

Although in these early chapters specific English words are suggested as trans
lations of Greek cases, keep in mind that cases express relationships. They are not
merely translations of words like to and/or, which in English can be used in very
different ways. Consider, for example, the different uses of to in the following
sentences.
Chryses walked up to the ship.

He went there [in order] to fr e e his daughter.
He gave ransom to the king.
Greek would express to the ship very differently from to fr e e or to the king.
Now consider the different meanings offo r in these sentences:
He did this/or the Trojans.

They fought fo r three days.
He is strong,/or he runs every day.
Again, Greek would express fo r in each of these sentences in different ways, because
they all express different ideas.
8d Greek cases at work

It’s now time to turn to six English sentences (the same sentences are analyzed
in the appendix to this chapter on clauses, sentences, and syntax) and analyze them
as if they were in Greek. The first three sentences contain transitive verbs:
1) Clytemnestra killed Agamemnon.

2) The priest gave the ransom to the king.
3) The poet sang a song.
17
HOMERIC GREEK
(The words in parentheses below are impHed in Greek.)

nominative accusative
subject verb (action) direct object
2) (The) priest gave (the) ransom (to the) king.

nominative accusative dative
subject verb (action) direct object indirect object
3) (The) poet sang (a) song.

nominative accusative
subject verb direct object
The next three sentences contain intransitive verbs:
4) Agamemnon became king.

5) The hero’s spear is sharp (The spear o f or belonging to the hero is sharp.)
6) Agamemnon was wrong.

nominative nominative
subject verb (state o f being) predicate noun
5) (The) spear is sharp.

subject verb (state of being) predicate adjective

subject verb (state o f being) predicate adjective
So-called linking verbs such as becom e and is function much like equal signs: in
sentence 4 Agamemnon is in the nominative, and Agamemnon = king, so king is
also in the nominative. Likewise, since Agamemnon is in the nominative, and Aga
memnon is wrong, then wrong must be in the nominative. In sentence 5, spear is in
the nominative, so sharp is also in the nominative, since adjectives agree with the
nouns they modify in case as well as in gender and number (see below).
8e Number in Greek
In Greek (as in English) nouns and pronouns have number; that is, they can
be singular or plural. But some Greek words also appear in the dual, which is usu
ally used for natural pairs like (two) eyes, (two) ears, (a pair of) oxen, or the (two)
sons of Atreus (Agamemnon and Menelaus).
The suffix -s in many English nouns tells us that there are at least two things (or
people): book (singular) vs. books (plural). Sometimes a stem-change (roughly, a
18
LESSON 3
change in the vowel in the middle of a word) tells us the same thing: man vs. men.
Greek always uses a suffix to indicate number.
9a Declensions and paradigms

Several different patterns of Greek suffixes (called case endings) are used to
indicate the case and number of nouns (also pronouns and adjectives). Each pattern
is called a declension. When we add case endings to a noun, we decline the noun.
Greek has three declensions, some of which have subgroups:
1) The first (or a-/rj-stem ) declension, which consists mostly (but not entirely)
of words of the feminine gender.
2 ) The second (or o-stem) declension, which consists mostly of masculine and
neuter words.
3) The third declension, which consists of nouns of all three genders. Many
(but not all) third-declension words have stems that end in consonants.
The pattern of case endings for each declension as it is demonstrated by a rep

resentative word is called a paradigm (from the Greek word meaning m odel or
pattern). For the first type of nouns of the first declension the word fiovki] provides
the paradigm.
9b Learn the declension of jiovXi^ (type 1A) (626-658).

Since the forms for the nominative and vocative are identical in this declension,
they are given together. Practice declensions beginning with the singular, nomina
tive through accusative (or through vocative, if it differs), followed by the plural.
Type lA. jiovX ^, fio v lfji;, // (the or a) plan, council, counsel
Singular Full form Ending Meaning(s)

nom./voc. (iovXij -V (the, a) council, plan; Council!
gen. fiovXtjg of (the, a) council, plan
dat. fiov kfj -J1 for (the, a) council, plan
acc. j3ovXi]v -t]V (the, a) council, plan
Plural
nom./voc. fto v k a i -ai (the) councils, plans; Councils!
gen. PovXacov -ao)v of (the) councils, plans
dat. fto v lfjg or -rjQ or
fiovX fjai{v) -!loi{v) to or for (the) councils, plans
acc. jiovX aq -ag councils, plans
N o t e : Words that end in a vowel will sometimes have a final v, called nu-
movable (561). The v (much like the n in English an) makes the word easier to
pronounce, especially when followed by a vowel. It does not affect the word’s
meaning.
19
HOMERIC GREEK
9c Note on accents
As you can see from the chart above, if in the genitive (singular and plural) or
in the dative (singular or plural) a noun of the first declension is accented on the
final syllable, the accent will be a circumflex.
9d Dual (for reference)
nom./accus./voc., fio v k d ; gen./dat., j3ovlfjiv.
(Hereafter you should consult the Grammar for dual forms.) As noted earlier,
the dual is used for natural pairs, like eyes, ears, and the two sons of Atreus. Poets
also use the dual to link significant pairs (such as Cassandra and Apollo in Aeschylus’
Agamemnon). It is usually easy to recognize the dual in context. Consult the charts
in the Grammar if you suspect you have encountered one.
9e Learn the declension of the feminine adjective /raA//.

Like nouns, Greek adjectives have gender, number, and case. Adjectives also
belong to declensions. The feminine form of the adjective good or noble is icah ],
and it belongs to type 1A, which means that it is declined just like povX ^ .
9f Learn the first and most important rule of syntax about adjectives (1025).
Adjectives agree with the nouns (or pronouns) they modify in gender, number,
and case.
In Greek (iovXr] Kaki] means The plan [is] good. (For this kind of sentence, the
word is in Greek can be omitted.) The gender of is feminine; there is just
one plan (ftovXt] is singular), and it is the subject of the sentence (which is why it is
in the nominative case). The adjective /raA?; is also feminine, singular, and in
the nominative case. Because it agrees with fiovXtj in gender, number, and case,
chances are extremely good that Kaki] modifies fiovXi]. As it turns out, it is a pre
dicate adjective telling us what kind o/plan it is. As you can see from the chart
below, asftovXt] changes in case and number (declines), the adjective changes
as well.
Case Singular Plural

nom./voc. fôvh) K a h ) P o v la i K akai
gen. f i o v X f j g K a X tji; [ i o v X a c o v Kakacov
dat. fiov ktj Kakfi f t o v X f jg {jiov kfjoi) xakfji; { k u Xi j o i )
accus. [ io v X r ] v K a X 'q v fio v X a q K aX ag
Important: while icaXi] will always be declined like fiovX^, not all feminine adjec
tives are first-declension adjectives, just as not all feminine nouns are first-declension
nouns. For this reason, the rule stated above does not say that the endings of icaXtj
and fiovXi) are the same; it says that the noun and adjective agree in gender, num
ber, and case. This point will soon become clear when you meet a feminine noun
that is not declined like ftovX^.
20
LESSON 3
The chart above also illustrates the rule that an acute accent on the final syl
lable becomes a grave when another word follows; becomes ftov^fj
because it is followed by another word, KaX^. The word Kakij is not followed by
another word in the chart; it therefore retains its acute accent. We will return to
this rule in Lesson 4.
9g Vocabularies and lexica (plural of lexicon)

The entry for a noun in the vocabulary list in each lesson (or the general
vocabulary at the back of the book) or in a lexicon (such as Liddell-Scott’s Interm e
diate Greek-English Lexicon or Autenrieths Homeric Dictionary) lists the nominative
singular first, followed by the ending of genitive singular, and a demonstrative
adjective that indicates its gender, so that it will look like this: fiovX^, fjg, ?/. This
entry is an abbreviation for jSovXtj, fiovXfjg, The combination of a noun ending
in -7] in the nominative singular and the genitive singular ending in -rjg tells you
that this is a first-declension noun and that it will decline just like fiovXi] (although
its accents may differ). So to look up the meaning of a word that is in, for example,
the dative plural, you must be able to return it to the nominative singular (or some
thing close). The last word, i], is the feminine form of the demonstrative adjective
this, which tells you the word’s gender. The wise Greek student will always memorize
all three elements of a vocabulary entry. You will understand why after you meet
more nouns of the first declension.
9h Cases and spaces: Using cases to express spatial relationships

A noun or pronoun in a particular case by itself (without a preposition) can
also be used to express what usually requires a preposition-plus-object in English.
The genitive usually expresses motion away from.
The dative tends to express place where, without any movement (static). One
way to remember this use of the dative is to think of the iota-subscript that
rests (without moving) in or under the letter rj in the dative singular
{fiovkfj). In Greek the dative is used to express in and under {place where,
with no motion implied).
The accusative often expresses motion toward.
Accusative Dative Genitive

on
(static, no movement)
movement toward------> in ------> movement from

(static)
movement into------ —> under ------ ------> movement out from

(static)
21
HOMERIC GREEK
The chart above expresses the same ideas in visual terms.
9i Prepositions; Cases and places

A preposition and its object form a prepositional phrase. The word preposition
means something placed before, and many (although not all) Greek prepositions do
precede their objects. Prepositional phrases can act as adjectives or adverbs: they
tell us what kind of, whose, which (adjective) or how, where, when, etc. (adverb).
Examples of prepositions: in, on, down, from , to, around, with, o f

Examples of prepositional phrases: in town (adverbial, expressing where); o f
the book (adjectival, expressing which one, whose); at eight o’c lock (adverbial,
when)
Prepositions, linguists believe, began their lives as adverbs, and you can see
traces of their earlier function in the Iliad. In some sentences you will find what
looks like a preposition used (by itself) as an adverb; it may even be repeated as a
preposition with an object. The statement We placed it therein in the temple would
be perfectly at home in Homeric Greek.
Greek often uses case endings alone to express spatial relationships, but it
sometimes uses prepositional phrases to express the same idea. The dative fio v lfj
by itself, for example, as well as the prepositional phrase ev fiovXfj, can mean in the
council. You will find that some prepositions have objects in just one case; for
example, the object of iv is always in the dative, and the object of eg is always in the
accusative. Some prepositions, however, have objects in different cases depending
on the spatial relationship they express, so the chart in 9h is also useful when deal
ing with these prepositions.
Languages, however, are rarely (if ever) entirely regular, and Greek is no excep
tion. There are more than a few Greek prepositions whose meanings with a partic
ular case are not self-evident, such as en'i with the genitive (upon) or/ierd with the
accusative (after). So be sure to read the entire vocabulary entry.
10 VOCABULARY
|}ov^T|, fji;, f) plan, will, wish, pu rpose, cou nsel, cou n cil
8 eiv t | fearful, terrible, awful, dreadful
^ (tv i), eiv adv., and prep, with dat., in, among, there(in, -on), at
eXEi (he, she, it) has, holds
EXOVOi('') 561, (they) have, hold
T |v (he, she, it) was, there was
T |o a v (they) were, there were
Kai and, also, even, furthermore
KaKri bad. poor, ugly, mean, cowardly, evil, wicked
22
LESSON 3
KftXri good(ly), noble, handsome, brave, fair, beautiful

KXaYYH’ n (up)roar, noise, shriek, clang
t i ; (m., f.), who? which? what? t i (neut.), which? what? why?
XpvCTTi, r|^, f| Chrysa, a town in the Troad
<piXi] dear, darling, lovely, beloved
Related words: dinosaur, dinichthys; cacophony; calligraphy, calliope; clang;

Philadelphia, philanthropy.
11a Reading, understanding, and translating Greek

Its finally time to read Greek. The following exercises are a mix of phrases and
full sentences. If you find a subject (nominative) and verb—or even just a verb
(since Greek verbs can imply their subjects)—you are likely to be dealing with a
sentence. On the other hand, if you do not encounter a verb, you are dealing with a
phrase (the lack of final punctuation is another hint). There is an important excep
tion: the verb to be in Greek is often implied. If you see a noun and adjective in the
nominative without a verb, try adding is or are. To render this kind of sentence into
idiomatic English, you may need to begin with a helping phrase (called an exple
tive)-, for example, instead of “Many terrible noises were in Troy,” you might say
“There were many terrible noises in Troy.” A quick glance at the sentences to be
translated from English into Greek will give you a sense of the kinds of meanings
that you are likely to derive from the Greek sentences and phrases.
The translation exercises in this lesson contain only two verbs, one an action
(transitive) verb, one a state-of-being (intransitive) verb. With the action verb has/
have you are likely to find a direct object; with the state-of-being (intransitive) verb
was/were you should be on the alert for a predicate noun or adjective.
When reading a Greek sentence, do not try to translate it straight off. Reread it
several times. As you do, collect clues from left to right—that is, as you hear them
when you read them aloud. Try to identify the subject of the sentence (nominative),
the verb, and the direct object (accusative), if there is one. If you encounter a state-
of-being verb, be on the alert for a predicate noun (or adjective) in the nominative.
These form the “backbone” of a sentence. Once you know the subject, verb, and
direct object (or predicate noun/adjective), the remaining words in the sentence
(adjectives, adverbs, indirect objects, etc.) should fall into place.
Since Greek rarely follows the order subject-verb-direct object, at first you may
find it helpful to make a small chart, like the one below, to organize clues as you
collect them. The same kind o f chart will help you analyze the English sentences
you are asked to translate into Greek.
Subject Verb Direct Object or Predicate noun/adj.

(if there is one) (if there is one)
23
HOMERIC GREEK
li b Translate;
1 . (iovX ai (660) vdAa/ kui icaKai. 2. rig exei fiovkr]v KaX^v; 3. r/ Exovaiv;
(561) 4. K a k a i [iovX ai fjo a v (pikai. 5. r/g Kakrj; 6. deivi] Kkayyt] tjv iv Xpvot]
Kdkfj. 7. e'xovoi fio v k a g K akaq icai <p'ikdq- 8. r; iqv Kkayyt] deivfj iv X pvorj Kakfj;
9. KaKrjc, (iovkrjq 10. Kaicfg fiovkfjg 11. icaicacov f}ovkd(ov 12. KUKfj fiovk^ , KaKfj
fiov kfj, KaKfjv Povkrjv, KaKag jio v k a g
12 Translate:
1. of good and bad plans 2. for the (660) noble plan 3. Who has the evil plan?
4. (There) was a terrible uproar in beautiful Chrysa. 5. Was the plan good?
6. The plans were cowardly.
APPENDIX: Clauses, Sentences, and Syntax
Clauses consist of groups of words with at least one subject and verb; that is, a
clause consists of at least one person (or thing or abstraction like wisdom) who (or
which) either performs or experiences an action (throws, sees, speaks) or experiences
a state of being (is, becam e ). An independent clause makes sense standing by itself
If a clause does not make sense on its own, but depends on information in another
part of a sentence, then it is a dependent (or subordinate) clause.
Independent clause: I walk.

Dependent (subordinate) clause: Because I walk . . .
A sentence contains at least one independent clause. In other words, a sentence

expresses a complete thought. It may express, among other things, a fact, a com
mand, a possibility, or a general rule.
A simple sentence has one independent clause: I walk quickly.

A compound sentence consists of two or more independent clauses joined
together with a conjunction (or proper punctuation): Homer is blind, but I can see.
A complex sentence contains at least one dependent as well as an independent
clause: Because I w alk quickly, I am healthy.
Syntax: The analysis of some English sentences will help you to understand the basic
terms and expressions used to talk about syntax. In the following three sentences
each verb expresses an action.
Clytemnestra killed Agamemnon

Clytemnestra is the subject because she performed the action of killing.

Agamemnon is the direct object because he is the one Clytemnestra killed. The
direct object, in other words, is the answer to the question, “Whom (or what) did
Clytemnestra (the subject) kill?”
24
LESSON 3
2) The priest gave the ransom to the king.
The priest gave the ransom to the king,

subject verb (action) direct object indirect object
The priest is the subject because he performed the action of giving.

Ransom is the direct object because it is what the priest gave. As in the sen
tence above, the direct object is the answer to the question, “What (or whom) did
the priest give?”
The indirect object is the person or thing “for which” or “to which” the subject
performs an action. Here the priest gave the ransom to the king. You will often find
indirect objects with the verb to give.
3) The poet sang a song.
The poet sang a song,

It may not seem to you that someone performs an action on a song when she sings
it—or for that matter, performs an action on a building when she sees it. But for
grammatical purposes, we will treat this kind o f sentence just like Clytemnestra
killed Agamemnon.
Poet is the subject because he performed the action sang.

Song is the direct object because the poet performed the action of singing on
the song. Once again, it is easy to identify the direct object by asking “What
did the poet sing?” He sang a song; therefore, song is the direct object.
Not all direct objects are as obvious or literal as the ones in the sentences
above. If you think a thought, for example, thought is a direct object.
In the next three sentences the verb expresses a state of being.
Agamemnon became king,

subject verb predicate noun
Agamemnon is the subject of becam e because he is the one who was in the
state of becoming. Verbs like becam e, is, and was function much like equal signs:
Agamemnon = king. In this kind of sentence we call king a predicate noun.
5) The spear is sharp.
The spear is sharp.

subject verb predicate adjective
Spear is the subject of is because it is in the state of being sharp.

We call sharp a predicate adjective.
25
HOMERIC GREEK
Agamemnon was wrong

subject verb (state of being) predicate adjective
Grammatically, sentence 6 is just like sentence 5.

Agamemnon is the subject of was because he was in the state of being wrong.
Wrong is a predicate adjective.
26
Lesson 4
THE FIRST DECLENSION ( c o n t i n u e d );
ACCENTS
13a Learn the declension of Bed (type IB) (663).

So far you have learned fto v h ) (type lA ); in this chapter you encounter two
more types of first-declension nouns, those whose paradigm is Qed (goddess) and
those whose paradigm is d d X aooa, da^doorjg, ^ (sea)
Type IB. 0fd, dedq, tjgoddess
The characteristic of this paradigm is a stem ending in a long a . Think of this vowel
as so powerful (like a goddess) that it appears throughout the paradigm in both
singular and plural.
Singular Full form Ending Noun -Hadjective

nom./voc. 0fd -a B e o . KaXij
gen. Oedg -ag dedg KaXfjg
dat. ded -q ded KaXfj
accus. Oedv -av dedvKaX ^v
Plural
nom./voc. d eal -ai d ea l KaXai
gen. dedcov -acov dedcov icaXdcov
dat. eefjg defjg KaXfjg
detjaiiv) -rioi{v) 6efjoi{v) KaXfjoi(v)
accus. 6edg -aq Oedg KaXdg
13b Answer the following questions about the first declension:
1) When you encounter a new vocabulary word, how will you know whether it
is declined like or like 0ed?
2 ) Compare the paradigm of ded in the singular with the paradigm for P o v lrj.
How would you describe the differences (if there are any)?
3) Compare the paradigm of ded in the plural with the paradigm for PovXrj.
How would you describe the differences (if there are any)?
13c Learn the declension of O dX aooa (type 1C) (663).

The two types you have learned so far, lA and IB, account for most first-
declension nouns. Less common are nouns like d d X a ooa . The defining characteris
tic of type 1C is a short a in the nominative and accusative o f the singular. (Think
27
HOMERIC GREEK
of this a as too weak to resist turning into an r] in the genitive and dative singular.)
By the way, now you know why it is important to learn both the nominative and
genitive forms of nouns. Without the genitive, you might think that O d X a a o a
would decline like ded.
Type 1C. B d X a o o a , d a ^ d a a tjg , 7] sea
Singular Full form Ending Noun -(- adjective

nom./voc. ddXaoaa -a d d X a o o a icaX?)
gen. d a X d o o tjg Q aXdooT]g K a X fjq
dat. d a X d a a j] -n d a X d o o t] K a X fi
accus. ddXaaoav -av ddXaooav KaX^v
Plural
nom./voc. Q dXaooai -ai Q dXaooai K a X a i
gen. Q aXaooam v -am v Q a X a o o d c o v K a X a co v
dat. O aXdooTjg ■m 6 a X d o a r]q icaXfjg
6 a X d o o j] o i{ v ) - rja ii y) d a X d o o T ]o i(v ) K a X f jo i(v )
accus. daXdaodg -ag daXdooag KaXag
13d Answer the following questions about the first three types of first-declension nouns:
1) What are the differences between the paradigms for dd X a oo a and fiovXrj'^.
2) What are the differences between O d la o o a and 0£ct?
3) Are there any differences between the plural forms of d d k a o o a and PovXrj'^.
4) In Q d la a o a icaXij, why does icaXt] end with an //but d d X aa aa with an a?
5) Which nouns in Lessons 1-4 decline like 0£d? d d X a a o a l How can
you tell?
14a More on accents (534-550)

As mentioned earlier, it is possible to read and enjoy ancient Greek without
knowing much about accents, and some instructors may decide to declare this
material optional—or delay the introduction of accents until later in the course.
But accents sometimes give you important hints. The following discussion will help
you perceive those hints; it is also necessary for understanding the movement of
accents in later lessons.
From the preceding chapters and the paradigms you know the first rule:
1) There are three accents:

• Acute: Represents a higher or rising pitch; (plXrj or ôvXrj.
• Grave: An acute on the ultima (usually) becomes a grave when the word is
followed by another word: j i o v l r j but fiovXf] K a l .
• Circumflex: Represents a rising and then lowering pitch: fiovXfjg.
You may have noticed these rules as well:
2) If the nominative of a first-declension noun has an acute on the last syllable,

then in the genitive and dative singular and in the dative plural there will be
28
LESSON 4
a circumflex over the rj: P o v X t ) (nominative), but f i o v k r j q (genitive singu

l a r ) , A , ^ (dative singular), znd fiovXfjg or jiovX fjoiiv) (dative plural).
3) Accents appear on one of the last three syllables. A less mechanical way of
stating this rule is that a word did not sound right to native speakers of
ancient Greek if its accent came too early in the word. You could also say
that it did not sound right if too many syllables in a word followed—that is,
too much time lapsed after—the accented syllable.
To make it easier to talk about accents, each of the last three syllables has a
name. The last syllable is the ultima; the next-to-last is the penult; the third-to-last
syllable (if there is one) is the antepenult (or propenult): O dX aooa: 9 a = antepe
nult; /laa = penult; o a = ultima. Now you are ready for the fourth rule:
4) The length of the ultima (the final syllable) determines where an accent can
appear. What does “length” mean? Long syllables take longer to pronounce
than do short ones. For purposes of accentuation:
a) Syllables with tj or co are long {o-m ega literally means big o).
b) Syllables with e o t o are short {o-micron means little o ; e-psilon means bare e).
c) Syllables with a . i . and v can be either long or short. For now, assume that
they are short unless otherwise indicated. In the vocabulary lists and
Greek practice sentences a macron or long mark (~) appears over long
vowels that are ambiguous. (The macron, however, is not to be included
when spelling a word.)
d) Diphthongs are usually long, but if the very last letters of a word are -ai or
-oi. the diphthong is usually treated as short—/or purposes o f accentua
tion only.
14b Possible positions of accents
1) An acute can appear in any of the last three syllables.

2) An acute can appear in the antepenult only if the ultima is short.
3) A circumflex can appear only over long vowels (or diphthongs). (Can you
explain why?)
4) A circumflex can appear only in the penult or ultima: 6 f j f i o g or f i o v k f j q .
5) A circumflex can appear on the penult only if ultima is short: dfjfioq.
8/j^ ov (not dijjuov or dtjfico). So if there is a circumflex on the penult, what
do you know about the final syllable?
6) A grave can appear only in the ultima, and then only when followed by
another word.
The six rules are summarized in the chart below. As you begin to work with
these rules, accents will become easier to understand.
Accent antepenult penult ultima

acute ddX aooa fiovM cov fio v li]
circumflex defjai fiovXfjq
grave fiovXf/ K a i
29
HOMERIC GREEK
14c The usefulness of accents

Paying attention to accents can be useful for both meaning and meter (the
rhythm of the poetry). If, for example, you know that the vocabulary entry for g o d
dess is ded, dedg, ?/, can dedg be the genitive singular? From the accent of OdXaooa,
what do you know about the length of its final a?
14d Accenting nouns

Nouns and adjectives have persistent accents: they try to keep their native
accents—that is, they retain their accents on the hom e syllable. For nouns and
adjectives, the home syllable can be found in the nominative singular. The accent of
Q dXaaaa, for example, will try to remain on the a- sound of Qa-.
But there are mysterious forces at work in the world of Greek accents. A kind
of vocal gravity tries to keep accents from getting too far away from the end o f the
word. As mentioned earlier, to a native speaker of Greek a word must have sounded
strange if too much time lapsed after (too many syllables followed) the accented
syllable. If you think about it, English does something similar; for example, we do
not pronounce a long word like deciduous (the adjective for a tree that sheds its
leaves) with the accent at the beginning of the word: DE-ci-du-ous. Instead we pro
nounce it de-CI-du-ous.
1) If an acute cannot remain on its home syllable—for example, if a case end

ing makes that syllable too far away from the end of the noun or adjective—
the accent moves one syllable closer to the end of the word (in writing, to
the right): Q dX aaaa but QaXdoorjg.
2) If a circumflex cannot remain on its home syllable, before moving closer to
the end of the word it will become an acute on the same syllable: dfjfioc,
becomes
15 VOCABULARY
N o t e : A postpositive conjunction {post, conj.) never comes first in its sentence (or
clause), but usually second.
Y<xp post, conj., for, in fact
8^ post, conj., but, and, so, for
Eiat(v) (553-554) (they) are, there are
e o t ((v ) (553-554) (he, she, it) is, there is
EK (before consonants), e^ (before vowels) adv., and prep, with gen. from, out of
Erti adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc. to, at, (up)on, against, over, for, by; adv.,
(up)on, thereon; with gen., (up)on, over, during; with dat., (up)on, in, for,
about, against, at, beside, by; with acc., to, up to, over, (up)on
0d>.aooa, riq, t] sea
0Ed, aq, f| goddess
Ki>.>.a, riq, fi Cilia, a town near Troy
30
LESSON 4
ov) (before consonants), ovk (before smooth breathing), ovx (before rough
breathing) not, no
ndTpi], riq, f| native land, fatherland
jToXXi] much, many
nvpT|, fji;, Ti (funeral) pyre
fiq, f) soul, breath, life, spirit
Related words: thalassocracy; patriotic; pyrotechnic(al), pyrography;

psychology, psychotherapy, psychic.
16 Translate:
1. exî icaAfj d ea liovkr)v Kak^v; 2. K akai dea'i eia i (553-554) <ptXai y/i'xf]
dedg 9 akd oot]g deivijg. 3. K ikX a Kai X pvorj c/o;(555) K akai Kai (plXai Oefjoi
d a la a a a m v . 4. Kaki] dsG. ovic Exei KaKrjv. 5. Kaki^ eoti d ea, e'xei Se y/vxfjv
KaKrjv. 6. 6eivr] Kkayyt] ea riv ek d akd aorjq. 7. K ik k a Kai X pvm j tjaai> ijii
d akd ao)]. 8. Oeai Oakdoorjg e ia i (555) (pikai y/vxfjg nokkfjg, (pikai y d p eioiv .
9. J i d r p t ] K d k i] e o n (pikrj T w k k fjc , i c d k f j i ;. 10. eic j i d r p r j g K a K fjg fjv.
1 1 . i q a a v n v p a i : i o k k a \ e v <pikt] J i d r p ^ e j i i d s i v f j d a k d o a r j . 1 2 . T ig o v k e x e i
Kdkrjv y/vx^y;
17 Translate: (Note: do not translate words in parentheses)

1. Are the good plans dear to the souls o f the goddesses? 2. They have many
plans, but (they are) cowardly (ones). 3. The plans are dear to the soul of the
beautiful goddess, for they are noble. 4. The lovely goddess of the sea was not in
Cilia. 5. (There) are many funeral pyres by the sea in (our) beloved fatherland.
6. Who was in Cilia by the sea?
31
Lesson 5
VERBS; PRESENT INDICATIVE

A C TIVE OF -(o VERBS
Preliminaries (789-806)
We have seen that verbs are words that express actions or states of being: I wrote
this (an action); Greek is easy (state of being). Like its counterpart in Enghsh, but to
a much greater extent, the form of the Greek verb changes to tell us its tense,
mood, voice, person, and number.
Tense in a statement of fact in Greek expresses time (e.g., now, yesterday, tomor
row) as well as aspect (whether the action is completed or continuing). Greek has
seven tenses, but two of them are very seldom used, especially in Homeric Greek:
• Most common: the present, imperfect, future, and aorist

• Not as common as the first four: the perfect.
• Far less common (especially in Homer): the pluperfect and the future per
fect. At this stage, you need only to be able to recognize these two tenses
when you see them.
Mood expresses the manner or mode in which a statement is made. Greek has
four moods; the first two we use regularly in English.
1) The indicative expresses a statement of fact or a general statement: I study

today; I studied yesterday; I will study tomorrow.
2) The imperative expresses a command: Study every day!
3) The subjunctive has a variety of uses (which you will encounter later) and
cannot be translated without help from the context. English has retained
the subjunctive in only a few constructions and expressions, e.g., I wish I
were a rich man . . . or be it large or small.
4) The optative is not found in English. As with the subjunctive, the transla
tion of an optative depends on context.
Voice expresses the relationship of the subject o f the sentence (or clause) to an
action or state of being expressed by the verb. Greek has three voices, two of which
we have in English:
a) A verb is in the active voice when its subject performs the action (or expe
riences the state of being) expressed by the verb: Achilles (subject) kills Hector;
H om er (subject) is blind.
32
LESSON 5
b) A verb is in the passive voice when the subject of the verb (nominative)
receives (suffers or enjoys) the action: Helen (subject) was loved by Paris.
c) The middle voice does not exist in EngHsh. You will learn about it later.
Person and Number: The form of a verb also tells us its person and number;
that is, whether I, you, or we do something.
Singular Plural
I = first person we = first person
you = second person you = second person
he, she, it = third person they = third person
In addition to the first, second, and third person (singular and plural), Greek
also has a second-person and third-person dual: you two and the two o f them. As
you learned from nouns, the dual is usually used for significant or natural pairs.
Compare the English /see and She sees. Even if you did not have the pronoun I,
the verb see tells you that it is not a he, she, or it that is doing the seeing. On the
other hand, sees tells you that the subject is not I, we, or you. Changes in English
verbs are limited, however, which means that the form of an English verb is often
ambiguous. See, for example, is the form used for I see and they see as well as for
you see and we see. So in English we usually need a noun or pronoun to tell us
number; that is, to tell us whether one person/thing—or more than one—performs
the action. The noun or pronoun also indicates the person—whether I see or you
see (if singular), or whether we, you, or they see (if plural).
The ending of a Greek verb (usually) indicates both its person and number—
or at least greatly limits the possibilities. So a noun or pronoun is unnecessary. By
itself, for example, the verb fxoj means I have (or hold); it never means he has or
you have.
18a Learn the principles of the formation of the present indicative active (830-840).
We will begin with the present indicative active, which is shorthand for saying
that we will make a factual statement (indicative mood) about the present time
(roughly, about something taking place now—e.g., today as opposed lo yesterday or
tomorrow), in which the subject performs some kind of action (active voice).
In the indicative mood, a Greek tense (usually) expresses both time and aspect.
The present tense is used for an action that is not complete, but continues, although
there may be more or less emphasis on the continuing aspect. So when translating
the present indicative active into English, there is more than one possibility. The
verb Xvo). for example, can mean I free, I do free, or I am freein g (the last empha
sizes the continuation or repetition of the action). Context will help you decide
which is the best English translation for a Greek present tense. When translating
from English to Greek, keep in mind that the English helping verbs do and am
are already implied in the Greek verb, and you should not translate do and am as
separate verbs.
33
HOMERIC GREEK
To create the correct form for each person and number of the present indicative
active, join the present stem of the verb to the endings for this tense and mood—a
process called conjugating a verb (“joining together” the verb stem and ending).
Endings are really the combination of a connecting (thematic) vowel and a per
sonal ending, but in the present indicative the twô are so intertwined that they are
difficult to distinguish, so it is easier to treat the combination as one unit. As you
will see from the chart below, -co is the ending for the first-person singular of k v a .
Remove the ending -m from the verb and you have the present stem: Xv-.
18b Learn the present indicative active of Xvco (904).
Singular Full form Stem Ending Meaning

1 Ivco Xv -CO I free, I do free, I am freeing
2 Iv e ig Xv -eig You free, etc.
3 XVEI All -ei He (she, it) frees, etc.
Plural
1 XvOflEV Iv -OfiEV We free, etc.
2 Avers Xv -ETE You free, etc.
3 k v o v o i{u ) Xv -OVOl They free, etc.
For the dual {the two o f you free, the two o f them free) consult the Grammar (904).
Keep in mind that you will also find nouns instead of pronouns (or implied pro
nouns) as the subjects of verbs:
Third-person singular: Achilles runs swiftly (instead of He runs swiftly).

First-person plural: Achilles and I burned many sacrifices (instead of We burned)
or even We Greeks burned many sacrifices. In Greek We would not be expressed,
but the ending of the verb will tell you it must be We Greeks (first-person plural)
not The Greeks (third-person plural).
Second-person plural: You Greeks left Troy {G reeks will be in the nom ina
tive plural).
19a Accenting verbs

In Lesson 4 you learned that:
• Accents can appear on one of the last three syllables of a word.

• The antepenult (the third-to-last syllable) can be accented only when the
ultima (the final syllable) is short: d d k a a o a .
• When the ending of word like d d X a ooa changes so that the ultima is long,
the accent cannot remain on the antepenult, but moves one syllable closer to
the end of the word (in writing, to the right). In other words, it will be on the
penult: dakd oarjq.
. The accent of a noun is persistent: it tries to remain on the home syllable (the
syllable on which the accent appears in the nominative singular).
34
LESSON 5
Verbs behave differently: a verb’s accent appears as early as possible—that is,

on the antepenult, if it has one. If it cannot appear there (e.g., because o f the length
of the ultima), it will move one syllable closer to the end of the word. In other
words, the rules you learned about the movement of accents in nouns (Lesson 4)
apply to verbs as well.
Many textbooks, by the way, refer to the accents of verbs as recessive, as if the
accent recedes or moves as far to the left as it can. But this terminology is misleading
and a product of reading and writing, not speech.
With a brief review of circumflexes and one new rule you will be ready to
accent verbs. You’ve already learned that
• A circumflex can only appear on a long vowel (or diphthong).

• A circumflex can only appear on the penult or ultima.
• A circumflex can appear over the penult only if the ultima is short: e.g.,
Araoi' (the aorist imperative of h'xo), but n a id ev ei.
Now the new rule:
• For both nouns and verbs, if the accent is on the penult, and if the penult
is long, while the uhima is short, the accent must be a circum flex: X voov
or oiK og.
19b Conjugate (aloud and in writing) three of the verbs in the following vocabu
lary list with correct accents.
20 VOCABULARY
N o t e : The first form of a verb appearing in the vocabulary list is the first-person
singular of the present indicative active (if this form exists).
deiSo) sing (o f about), hymn, chant
dv- {before vowels), d- {before consonants), a prefix (sometimes called alpha-
privative) not, un-, dis-, -less, without
dv8dvca please {with dat., 996), be pleasing (to)
dTl^d!;(o dishonor, slight, insult (c f prefix a-, cti/-)
Paivo) come, go, walk
£15 (e5> adv., and prep, with acc., to, into, until, therein
ex® have, hold, keep
Kaio) burn, consume
loosen, free, break up, destroy
6>iK(o kill, destroy, ruin
send, escort, conduct
teXeIii) accomplish, fulfill, complete, perform
TEVXO) make, do, fashion, perform, cause, prepare ( 1020:2 )
(p^po) bear, carry, bring
35
HOMERIC GREEK
Related words: ode, odeum, melody, palinode; atheist, anarchy; caustic,

cauterize, holocaust; analysis, hydrolysis, synthesis; pomp (593); teleology;
periphery, phosphorus (593).
21 Translate:
1. a eid o fie v (iovX aq d e a a v iwkXacov. 2. Kkayyf] deivfj KaKtjg daXdoorjq ovx
dvddvEi i/ri>xfj Oedg. 3. Tig dzTfidÊi KaXdg Oedg; 4. ovk d u fid ^ o^ ev ndrprju,
(piXrj y d p eo tiv . 5. fia iv o v a iv e k KiXXrjg Eig X pvorjv. 6. Ka'iovoi Jivpdg JioXXdg
iv X pvot] EJii daX doorj; 7. EôfiEv jioXXdg Kai KaXdg fiovXdg. 8. KaiExe Jivpdg iv
ndxpj]; 9. XvEig, Xvoêv, X vovoiv, Xvexe 10. oX ekoêv i/vxag JioXXdg icai K a i c d g
EX' Jidrpt] (p'lXrj. 1 1 . zig Jie/iJiei dedg Eg X pvorjv; 12. teX eiete liovXdg KaXdg JidTprj
(piXtj. 13. teXewîev fiovXrjv (plXrjg dE&g. 14. tev% ohev iivp^v. 15. r/ <pEpEZE; ti
(pEpovoiv;
22 Translate:
1 . Who is singing the evil plans of the fair goddesses? 2. The roar of the sea is
pleasing to the soul of the goddess in Cilia. 3. We do not dishonor the goddesses
of (our) dear fatherland. 4. Are you going from Chrysa to Cilia by the sea? 5. The
goddesses come from the sea into Cilia. 6. They are burning funeral pyres in
(their) fatherland. 7. They have many fair plans. 8. we loosen, you loosen, he is
loosening 9. The goddess destroys many wicked souls. 10. We escort the goddesses
into (our) dear fatherland. 11. They accomplish the will of (their) native land.
12. He is making a funeral pyre. 13. What does he bring?
36
Lesson 6
THE SECOND DECLENSION; ELISION
23a Nouns of the second delension

Most second-declension nouns are masculine (type 2A) or neuter (2B). Learn
the second-declension nouns 9i'/.(6g (2A) and ep y ov (2B) (678-679). Learn the full
declension of the adjectives <p'doq, tp’d r], (p'lXov and KaXog. ica lij, KaXov (719-
721), which follow the second declension pattern for masculine and neuter forms
(the feminine forms you have already learned).
Type 2A. o-stem nouns like 9vfi6g, Ovfxov, 6 heart, spirit (mostly masculine).
Note that in the singular of type 2A the vocative differs from the nominative
and is given separately.
Singular Full form Ending dear heart

nom. di'fiog -og dxi/udg <pilog
gen. Ovfwv -OX) (o io ) dvfiov (or d v fiolo) (p'lXov
dat. 9 v fia -CO dv/uS <piX(p
accus. dvôv -ov dv^dv (piXov
voc. Qvui -E dvîe (pile
Plural
nom./voc. di\uoi -Ol dvfioi (pilot
gen. dvLimv -CDV Ovficov (piXcov
dat. 6v/.wig -oig Oimoig (piloig
dvôTai{v) -oioi{v ) OvfioTai (piXoioi(v)
accus. dvfôvg -ovg Qvôbg (piAovg
Type 2B. o-stem nouns like k'pyov, ep y ov , to deed, work (neuter).
With the exception of the nominative (singular and plural) and the accusative
plural, these nouns decline like dvfxdg, and the exceptions are easy to remember. In
fact, the following rules are some of the very few in Greek that are not broken—or
are broken so rarely that they are virtually absolute.
For neuter nouns and pronouns (no matter what declension):
1) The accusative and vocative look just like the nominative.

2) The nominative plural ends in a short a .
3) Given the two rules above, the accusative plural must also end in a short a .
37
HOMERIC GREEK
Singular Full form Ending good deed

nom./voc. E pyov -ov E pyov K akov
gen. t'pyov (Epyoto) -ov e p y o v KaXov
dat. Epyo) -a epycp KaXm
accus. ep y o v -ov e p y o v K a ld v
Plural
nom./voc. Epya -a e p y a KaXd
gen. Epymv -(OV Epymv Kak&v
dat. Epyoig, E p yoioi{v) -oig, -o io i(v) Epyoig Kakoig
accus. Epya -a Epya KaXd
23b Accenting second-declension nouns (and adjectives)

As with the first declension, if in the genitive (singular and plural) or in the
dative (singular or plural) a noun of the second declension is accented on the
ultima, the accent will be a circumflex.
23c Vocabulary entries for nouns and adjectives

In the vocabulary lists for each lesson, adjectives now appear in this form:
KaXog, y],6v. This is an abbreviation of the masculine, feminine, and neuter nomi
native singular forms of the adjectives; KoXoq, Kolrj, koI ov. All adjectives that follow
this pattern will be called 2 - 1-2 adjectives, since the masculine is second-declen-
sion, the feminine first-declension, and the neuter second-declension.
You will find the same abbreviated entry in a Greek lexicon: adjectives are
listed under the masculine nominative singular (or the plural, if the singular is not
used) followed by the endings for other genders (if they differ). All of the adjectives
you have met so far follow the pattern of Kakog, 6v. Their accents may differ (as
with (p'dog, t], ou), but their case endings are the same.
24 Learn the principles of elision (575-583).

As is true in English, vowels often drop out of Greek words. Think of the con
tractions can’t or wont, where n’t represents not. In Greek this happens most often
with vowels (sometimes diphthongs) at the ends of words, which disappear when they
are followed by another word beginning with a vowel. This phenomenon is called
elision. Like English contractions, in Greek elision is indicated by an apostrophe.
o z efifia z a e'xcov —> ote/x^ u t ' ex(ov

o iK a d s 'iKEodai —> oi'icad ’ iKEodai
Elision is frequently found with:
1) Words ending in e with one syllable: ye, S e , ice, re (elision is especially

common in these “weak” words)
2) Prepositions and conjunctions of two syllables: aX ld , d^<pi, ejiI
3) Some common adverbs: fidX a, zd x a, d fia , h i , EJiEira, s h a
38
LESSON 6
There are exceptions, some of which can be explained by the “ghost” letter /r,
whose presence may be felt, although the letter itself does not appear.
If the word following the elided word begins with a rough breathing, the final
consonant of the elided word will change to reflect the combination of the h sound
with the consonant that now immediately precedes it:
1 ) K followed by a rough breathing —> k + h; that is, the letter;^

c b ica £ K a T o y x £ i p o v — > cox' E K O -T o y x e ip o v
2 ) 71 followed by a rough breathing —> p + h; that is, the letter (p
Em itju i — > e(p'n]fii
3) r followed by a rough breathing —> t + h; that is, the letter 6
TE 'lEp tja — > 8 ' lE pfja
The same thing happens when these consonants immediately precede a rough
breathing even without elision: ovk iX cipia —> ov x ekcopia. This is why scholars
are confident that 6. <p. and x were originally pronounced t+h, p+h, and k+h.
25 VOCABULARY
N ote: Some nouns are found only in the plural,
dyâog, q, 6v bright, shining, splendid, glorious
dvd, av adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., up(on), along, up through; adv.,
(up)on, thereon; with dat., (up)on, along; with acc., through(out), up through
djiepEioiog, ov boundless, countless, immeasurable
d n oiv a, cov. m ransom(s)
X x a io g , oti, 6 Achaean, Greek
Seivog, 6v terrible, awful, dreadful, fearful
eXiapiov, 01). x6 booty, spoil(s), prey
0EO5, ou, 6 god, divinity
0€|h65, o\), 6 heart, soul, spirit, courage, passion
KttKog, n. 6v bad, poor, ugly, mean, cowardly, evil, wicked
KttXog, n. 6v good(ly), noble, handsome, brave, fair, beautiful
Xaog, ot). 6 people, host, soldiery
^vpôl, a i. a countless, innumerable
vovaog, ov. f) plague, disease, pestilence
oicovog, o i. 6 bird (of prey), vulture, omen
6v much, many, numerous
orpatog, ov. 6 army, encampment, host
(piXog, r|, ov dear, darling, lovely, beloved
Related words: anatomy; penalty; theology, theocracy, atheism, polytheism,

monotheism, henotheism, pantheism; laity, layman; hoi polloi; strategy, strategic.
39
HOMERIC GREEK
26 Translate:
1. a y X a a d jto iv a ^ ep ov aiv A x a io i eig orpaTOV. 2. (pEpofiev a n ep ew i ’
d iw iv a a v d a x p a to v A /a iS y . 3. Osog xevxei noXXovq 'A xaiovg eXcopia (1020:2)
oicovoioiv. 4. fjo a v A x a io i K aKol; o v k ■qoav KaKo'i, KciXoi 6 L 5. vov oog icaKfj
oXeicei l a d y icaXov. 6. A x a io i n efin ov aiv d n o iv a fiv p f eig Jidzprjv. 7. dedg
^ a iv ei ig a rp a z d v , o X e k e i S e Xadu A x a m v . 8. Tig dzTfidÊi d E O v g KaXovg;
9. KaKoi X aoi dzTfidlôvoi OEOvg Jidrprjg. 10. dedg JiEfiJisi v o v o o v KaKr/v d v d
OTpaxdv A xai& v, o v y d p teXeiovoi fiovXrjv d eav Jidiprjg. 11. (iaiv ei eni
Q dXaoaav deivfjv Kai zevxei nvpdg JioXXdg d v d OTpaxdv A x a ia v . 12. exovoiv
djiEpelai' d jio iv a A xaim v Evi o r p a r a . 13. fiovXr] ox p ax ov ov x dvddvEi dv^ a
(996) dEov. 14. Xadg KiXXtjg <piXog fjv y/vxfj dEdg OaXdaorjg. 15. ovk aEidojUEv
icaXdg fiovXdg dsau OTpazS, o v y d p dvddvEi A x a io io i (996) Ovfim (1009).
27 Translate:
1. The terrible roar of the sea is pleasing to the goddess (996) in (her) soul
(1009). 2. We bring much splendid ransom(s) { u s e p l u r a l ) to the army of the
Achaeans. 3. The god does not destroy the host of the Achaeans, for they do
not dishonor the gods of (their) fatherland. 4. The evil plague makes countless
Achaeans booty ( u s e p l u r a l ) for many birds. 5. The people of the Achaeans send
countless shining ransom(s) to the goddess of the sea in Cilia. 6. The Achaeans go
to the sea and sing, but the noise is not pleasing to the goddess (996) in (her) soul
(1009). 7. The plague destroys the people, for they dishonor the god of Chrysa.
40
Lesson 7
REVIEW
28 Review the vocabulary list below, which includes all the words assigned thus far.
29 Optional: Review the paradigms you have learned thus far for the first and
second declensions.
30 VOCABULARY
dyXaog, n, 6v bright, shining, splendid, glorious
deiSo) sing (of, about), hymn, chant
dv- (before vowels), d- (before consonants), a prefix (sometimes called alpha-
privative) not, un-, dis-, -less, without
dvd, av, adv., and prep, with gen., dat., an d acc., up(on), along, up through,
thereon; adv., (up)on, thereon; with dat., (up)on, along; with acc.,
through(out), up through
dv8dv(o please (with dat. 996), be pleasing (to)
djiEptioio?, ov boundless, immeasurable, countless
d jio iv a, cov. la ransom(s)
dtl^di^ca dishonor, slight, insult
X x aio g , 01). 6 Achaean, Greek
Paivo) come, go, walk
P o v X.t|, fjq, q plan, w ill, w ish, purpose, co u n cil, cou nsel
ydp (postpositive) for, in fact
8e (postpositive) but, and, so, for
5 eivo5, n, 6v terrible, awful, dreadful, fearful
E15 (e5) adv., and prep, with acc., into, to, until, therein
eio((v) are; Eori(v) is
£K (e^), adv., and prep, with gen., out of, (away) from
E^wpiov, o\). TO booty, spoil(s), prey
^ ( i) , Eiv adv., and prep with dat., in, among, on, there(in, -on), at
e:i( adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., to (up)on, against, by, over, for; adv.,
(up)on, thereon; with gen., (up)on, over, during; with dat., (up)on, in, for,
about, against, at, beside, by; with acc., to, up to, over, (up)on
41
HOMERIC GREEK
eCTt((v) is
eXo> have, hold, keep
T|v (he, she, it) was; Tjoav (they) were
GdXaooa, tiq, fj sea
Bed, aq, ti goddess
0EO5, ot), 6 god, divinity
6vô9, oti. 6 heart, spirit, soul, courage, passion
Ktti and, also, even, furthermore; Kai . . . Ka( both . . . and
Kttuo b u rn , consu m e
KttKog, 11, 6v bad, poor, ugly, mean, cowardly, wicked, evil
KotXog, 6v good(ly), brave, noble, handsome, fair, beautiful
riq, fj Cilia, a town in the Troad
Kkayyi\, fi<;, ti, (up)roar, noise, shriek, clang
Xclog, oti, 6 people, host, soldiery
Xvw loosen, free, destroy, break up
^Cpioi, a i, a countless, innumerable
V0V005, o\), Ti disease, plague, pestilence
oiwvog, ot), 6 bird (of prey), vulture, omen
oXcKb) kill, destroy, ruin
ov (oi)K, oux) not, no
jidtpt], T)^. f) fatherland, native land
send, escort, conduct
JioX>.6?, 1^, 6v much, many, numerous
rtvpiijfiq, T] (funeral) pyre
oxpatog, 01). 6 army, encampment, host
teXeuo accomplish, fulfill, complete, perform
TEVxw do, make, perform, fashion, cause, prepare
TI? (m„ f.), TI (n.) who? which? what? ( t i why?)
(pepci) bear, bring, carry
cpiXog, rj, ov dear, darling, lovely, beloved
Xpôii, r|q, f| Chrysa, a town in the Troad
\)/13xT|, f|i;, fj soul, breath, life, spirit
31 Translate:
1. aeid o /u ev d e a y d a A d o o ijg d e iv ^ g ic X a y y fj Tiokkf] (1005). 2. o v k
dxTfidlôvoi S e o v g . 3. jio v k a i A x a i & v o v x d v 5 d v o v o i ded KaXfj dvfim . 4. f t a iv e i
£K o j p a x o v A x a i & v eig K i X X a v Kai <pepei d jie p e io i d i w i v a Q ea. 5. v o v a o g KaKrj
P a i v e i d v d o j p a x o v K ai r e v x e i Jto k X o v g A x a i o v g eXcopia o ia v o T o iv . 6. Kai deoi
42
LESSON 7
Kai d eal oX ekov oi k a d v A x a ia v . 7. rig A x a iS v e %£1 dvfidv icaKov; 8. ^]oav

iioXXai d ea l evi QaXdoofj: 9. /cai'ei Jivpdg ejii OaXdoofj. 10. Xvere orpaT ov
A xaim v. 11. JiaTpi] e o n (piXtj y/vxf] ^vpicov A xaim v. 12. T ig jie / u jie i o ip u z d v e k
tz
KiXXrjg eig X p v otjv : 13. fiovXf] k u k ^ e o t i v , avddvE i 3 e B e u 6v ^ a . 14. dEidsTE;
32 Translate:
1. The Achaeans sing (of) the beautiful goddess of the terrible sea. 2. We do
not dishonor the gods, for they are dear to (our) souls. 3. The plans o f the army
are pleasing to the goddess in (her) noble soul. 4. Many Achaeans are coming
from the encampment and are bringing countless glorious ransom to the gods.
5. The evil plague destroys the people and makes the army a booty (i.e., prey) for
countless birds. 6. We do not sing, for it is not pleasing to the soul of the goddess.
43
Lesson 8
THE SECOND DECLENSION (c o n t i n u e d )
33a Learn the declension of relative pronouns (773).

Relative pronouns are words like who, whom, whose, and which. They introduce
relative clauses and link them to the rest of a sentence. Before working with relative
clauses, you must learn to decline the relative pronouns. As you can see, the pronouns
og, if, 6 are second-declension in the masculine and neuter and first-declension in
the feminine. They decline like the adjectives you learned in the previous lesson
with two exceptions: the neuter nominative (and accusative) singular is 6 (instead
of 6v) and the feminine genitive plural is cbv (instead of a a v ).
Singular Masculine Feminine Neuter

nom. og V 6
gen. ov ov
■5* T
dat. 0) n (p
accus. ov i]v 6
Plural
nom. Ol at a
gen. av 6)v 0)V
dat. o ig . o i o i ( i ') fjg ,^ a i{v ) o ig , o i o i { v )
accus. o vg ag a
You may have noticed that all the forms have rough breathing marks. If you
pronounce them correctly, you will remind yourself of the h in English relative
pronouns {who, which, whose, whom, etc.).
33b Relative Clauses

In this lesson you will work with relative clauses that act like adjectives in that
they modify nouns and pronouns by providing information about them {which,
what kind of, etc.). Before defining a relative clause, a brief review of what you have
learned so far about clauses will be useful;
• A clause is a part of a sentence that has its own subject(s) and verb.
• An independent clause expresses a complete thought: I teach Greek.
• A dependent (or subordinate) clause is not complete on its own: B ecause
I like G reek . . .
44
LESSON 8
A relative clause Is a dependent (subordinate) clause, linked to the main clause by a

relative pronoun.
So far you have seen clauses linked with conjunctions such as Kai, 6 e , and y a p :
( ia ii’Ei EK o r p a r o v Axuidjv K ai (pepei djiepEio aTioiva. He comes fro m the

camp o f the A chaeam and he brings countless ransom.
(iovlr] KUKt] EOTiv. avddvEi d s d sa. The plan is evil, but it pleases the goddess.
OVK dTijAdôixEv Tidiprjv, <piXr] y d p eotiv . We do not dishonor our native land,
fo r it is d ear (to us).
A relative clause, on the other hand, does not need a conjunction because the
relative pronoun itself refers {refer and relate are derived from the same Latin verb)
to the noun or pronoun that the clause modifies. In fact, if you are faced with a
sentence with two clauses (two sets of subjects and verbs), and there is no conjunc
tion linking them, you should be on the alert for a relative clause—so look for a
relative pronoun. In the sentence Achilles, who killed Hector, was a great warrior, for
example, there are two clauses (Achilles was a great w arrior and who killed Hector).
There is no conjunction, but the relative pronoun who relates the clause who killed
H ector to Achilles. The noun or pronoun to which a relative pronoun refers is called
its antecedent (Latin for coming before), so in the sentence above the antecedent of
who is Achilles.
Learn these two rules and you’ll have little trouble with relative clauses:
• A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number. In

other words, the gender and number o f the pronoun will help you identify
its antecedent, which is usually close by or at least obvious.
• The case of a relative pronoun is determined by its syntax, that is to say, by
how it is used in its own clause. This last rule holds true in English, too,
although we are quickly losing our case endings. In the sentence I know the
w arrior whom Hector killed we use whom instead of who because whom is
the direct object of the relative clause.
When in doubt whether to use who or whom, try recasting the relative clause as a
simple statement with a personal pronoun and see whether he or him sounds right:
I know the w arrior Hector attacked him. The sentence H ector attacked he would not
sound right, so you know that who is not the correct relative pronoun to join the
two sentences together; you need whom: I know the w arrior whom Hector attacked.
(This sentence also uses whom instead of which because it refers to a person, not a
thing. Except for this distinction, relative pronouns do not express gender in English.)
34 Learn the declension of the demonstrative adjective o, rj, to (765) this, that.
This adjective is called dem onstrative because it points to or points out people
or things.
45
HOMERIC GREEK

nom. 6 V TO
gen. TOV Tfjg TOV
dat. T& W Ta
accus. TOV T1]V TO
Plural
nom. 01(to/) a i (raO TO.
gen. T&V TOLCOV(or t S) v ) T&V
dat. TOig m Tofg
TOlOl TfjOl TOlOl
accus. TOVg Tag rd
How do the case endings of this adjective differ from those of raAdg, di^? How
do the nominatives differ from the other forms on the chart above? Have you met
any of these words before? Where?
35 Learn the declensions of avxoc,, r], 6 s e lf, h i m ( s e l f ) , h e r ( s e l f ) , i t ( s e l f ) s a m e (766)

and E K e i v o g , rj, o t h a t ( o n e ) , h e , s h e , etc. (774).
As you can see from the ending of the neuter nominative singular, the case
endings will be the same as 6, rj, to, not those of KaXoq, rj,6v. How will you decline
the adjective aXkog, rj, o other, another?
36 Adjectives used as nouns and pronouns

English adjectives can be used as substantives (nouns); for example, in English
we can say She is a g ood person or She is a bad person (adjectives), but we can also
watch a film about the good, the bad, and the ugly (nouns). We can also say That was
good (pronoun) or That essay was good (adjective). Similarly, in Greek you will find:
dXXoi A x a io i [the] other A chaeans (adjective) or aXXoi, others (pronoun)

EKEivog A x aid g , that Achaean (adjective) or sKEivog, that [man] (pronoun).
For this reason the adjectives 6, rj, t o and siceTuog, rj, o are also demonstrative
pronouns.
Because Greek adjectives have gender, number, and case, whenused as pro
nouns they convey more information than do, forexample, t h is , t h a t ort h e s e in
English. Since rd is neuter plural, it can, by itself, mean t h e s e t h i n g s . Given the
gender and number of T o v g , it can mean t h e s e m e n .
37 VOCABULARY
ai.'ka but, moreover
aXXog, T|, o other, another
av)T05, 11, 6 self, him(self), her(self), it(self), same (1041)
8 10 5, a, ov, heavenly, glorious (in the feminine, declined like OdXaaoa)
46
LESSON 8
EKEivo 5,ri, o = KEivog, r|, o that (o n e), he, she, it (1 0 4 1 )

EKT]P6>^09, o-u. 6 free-shooter, sharpshooter, epithet o f Apollo. >4s an adjective:
sh oo tin g, or h ittin g at will; as substantive: freeshooter, sure-shooter,
sharp shooter
KUKU; evilly, harshly, w ith evil co n seq u en ces, in a cow ardly way
KEIV05, r|. o = EKEIV05, rj, o
6 ,f|,TO this, that; he, she, it; who, w h ich, what (1 0 4 1 )
65, i], 6 who, w hich, what
ovvEKa (= oi)-EVEKa) becau se (o n acco u n t o f w h ich)
OKtjjrTpov, o\j. TO staff, scep ter
TE (enclitic, postpositive) and, also; te . . . te (o r te . . . ic a i o r K a i. . . te) b o th . . .
and, not only . . . but also
XPV0E05, r). ov g old (en ), o f gold
R elated words: allopathy; autom aton, autocracy, autograph, autonom y;

ch rysan th em u m , chrysalis, chrysolite.
38 Translate:
1. d log EKtjfioAog a m o g a e id e i, aXX' ov>x a v d d v ei d l k o i o i d eo io i Ovfia (9 9 6 ,
1009). 2. Keivoi A y a io i aT lfid^ ovoi rov g deovg. 3. 0 EKrjfidXog nefxm i v ov oov
KaKrjv d v d OTpazov A x a ia v ku i KaK&g oX ekei keiv ov X aov, o v v ek u rov
dT l^dôvoiv. 4. ovK duîdôfiEV rovg Osovg, 01 ex o v o i OKijjizpa x p v o sa .
5. 0 EKTjPoXog TE Ka'i o i dXXoi Qeoi (ptpovoi x p v o s a OKrjjnpa KaXd. 6. Tig tevxei
rd oKfj.iTpa xpi'OEa roToi dEoig daX doorjg; 1. oLEidEi EKtjfidXog a v r o g ftovXdg
dXXav OEav to Toiv A x a w ia iv ; 8. sia iv o i A x a io i KaXoi, 01 oXekovoi tov
oxpaTOv K a w v o i te Tag m 'pdg; 9. rj dsd rfjg dEivfjg OaXdoarjg e'xei to OKrjmpov
XpvoEov. 10. h n Tfj jidTpt] eioiv a i Jiv p ai. 11. Tig tev x ei ôv OTparbv iXcopia
Toioiv oicovoloiv:
39 Translate:
1. D oes th e divine fre e-sh o o ter h im se lf sing these n oble plans o f the gods?
2. W h y is it not pleasing to these o th er gods w ho are in the sea? 3. That A chaean
d ishonors th o se gods o f (his) fatherland w ho have these golden scepters. 4. This
free-sh o o ter sends m any evil plagues up through th at cam p o f the A chaeans and
destroys cou ntless people (plural), becau se they d ish o n o r him . 5. W h o is burning
those funeral pyres o f the A chaeans by the terrible sea? 6. This free-sh o o ter m akes
cou ntless A chaeans a b ooty fo r the birds, becau se they d ish o n or these beautiful
goddesses o f the sea.
47
Lesson 9
THE IMPERFECT OF -(a VERBS
Preliminaries
The tense of a Greek verb in the indicative mood tells you something about time
(past, present, future) and about aspect (continuing, simple, completed). The
imperfect, which is always in the indicative mood, refers to the past and expresses
continuing (or repeated) action {im-perfect is Latin for not completely done). English
uses a form of the verb be as a helping (auxiliary) verb together with a participle,
such as running, to express continuing aspect: I was running. In contrast, the simple
past (/ ran) refers to a completed action and does not indicate whether that action
went on for any length of time.
A formula such as I was running (I used to run), however, often does not quite
work for the translation of a Greek imperfect or sound right to a speaker of English.
Consequently, you may have to translate the Greek imperfect as you would a simple
past. You should keep in mind, though, that this tense expresses a different kind of
action. There are also more subtle (and interesting) uses of the Greek imperfect,
which you will encounter as you read more Greek.
40 Learn the principles of the formation of the imperfect indicative active (830-840).
First, since you want to form a tense that expresses continuing or repeated action,
begin with the present stem, which you find by removing the personal ending from
the present indicative active; for example, the stem of Xva is Ad- {Xvco minus -co).
Next, add the augment, a prefix that signals a past tense of the indicative mood.
There are two types of augments:
Syllabic: When the verb stem begins with a consonant, the syllable e- is prefixed
to the stem.
Temporal: When the verb stem begins with a vowel (or diphthong), the initial
vowel (or diphthong) of the stem is lengthened.
Initial vowel (diphthong) Augmented vowel (diphthong)

a , £, r] {a i, e i ) rj (//)
O, CO(oi) CO(to)
!, V T, V
Finally, to the augmented stem add the endings for the imperfect, which, just as
in the present tense, are a combination of a thematic (connecting) vowel and per
sonal endings.
48
LESSON 9
41a Learn the imperfect indicative active of h'ico (904).
Sing. Full form Augmented stem Ending Meaning

1 eXvoi’ eXv -ov I was freeing; I used to fr e e
2 eh'Eg ekv You were freeing, etc.
3 eXve eXv -E She, he, it was freeing, etc.
Plural
1 e lv o n s v eXv -OflEV We were freeing, etc.
2 ekVETE eXv -ETE You were freeing, etc.
3 eXvov Eh) -OU They were freeing, etc.
41b A note about connecting (thematic) vowels

As you may have noticed, there is a pattern in the connecting vowels used in
both the present and imperfect. Before fx ox v the thematic vowel is o . (Note:
M o v o i was originally kvovT oi.) In other forms, you will find e.
41c A note about augments

An augment guarantees that a verb is in a past tense of the indicative. In
Homeric Greek, however, verbs in past tenses of the indicative do not always have
augments (837). So not seeing an augment does not guarantee that the verb is not a
past tense of the indicative. The good news is that verbal endings usually help you to
determine the tense. If the verbal ending is ambiguous, context will help. In English
you sometimes confront a similar problem: the verb read looks the same in the
present and past tense (although it is pronounced differently). Without any context
you cannot tell which tense in meant, but when you see them in context you will
rarely mistake one for the other. As you read the Iliad, pay attention to what tenses
are most common, especially when the poet/narrator rather than a character in the
poem is speaking.
42 VOCABULARY
a^Xt] elsewhere
ApYEiog, o\j, o Argive, Greek
-8e suffix with acc. 788:4, to (e.g., C>L)^\JH7t6v8e to Olympus)
6id adv., and prep, with gen. and acc., through, on account of, by means of; adv.,
between, among; with gen., through; with acc., through, by means of, on
account of, during
5ii(piX.oi;, r). ov dear to Zeus (1168)
Eipo) speak, say, tell
1^, 6v my, mine
epyov, CD, TO (fEpYOv), work deed, accomplishment
- 0 CV (suffix added to noun stems; see 712 ), from (e.g., Tpoiri0ev from Troy)
49
HOMERIC GREEK
K>wt)TainvT|OTpti (or K>^vTai|HT|OTpii), riq, fi Clytemnestra, wife o f Agamemnon,

leader o f the Greeks at Troy. She was unfaithful to her husband in his absence,
and murdered him on his return home.
HavTOffuvii, r|i;, f| gift of prophecy
oiicog, o\), 6 house, home
’O XvnJiiog, T|. ov Olympian
’'OXvjiJioi; (or OvX,vfiJio5), ou, 6 Olympus
IIpâôg, oti, 6 Priam, king o f Troy
065, oil. oov your, yours
Related words: diameter; erg, energy; mantic, mantis, necromancy;

economy, ecology.
43 Translate:
1. 6 EKTjPdlog d id . [lavToovvrjv eipei jSovkag tS>v Qemv A p y eio io iv . 2. 0 1
O lv fiJiioi d eoi Eixov (imperf., 836) oiK ovg ev OXvîJiq). 3. 6 EKrj(idXoq dii<pikoq
hEV%E T o v g A p y etov g A /a io v g xe E^copia oimvoToiv. 4. A% aioi A p y e w i x
h E v x o v Epya K axa d ia /3ovlfjv dE&g. 5. KXvxai^vôxpr] d ia xdv dvfidv hEV%£v
xa Epya d E i v d . 6. Tlp'iafiog Adog xe flp id fio v coXekov nokXovg A pyEw vg. 7. xig
EipEi xa a d Epya KaKd flp id ^ a : 8. xd Epya eoxi (973:1) KdXa, ovyEica exevxov
jio v k a g Qecov Kai dEacov d id xr]v fiavxoovvrju. 9. ijie/.iJioÊi' xd xpvoE a oK fjm p a
Eig oiK ov ripiduco. 10. EKaiEXE xag Jivpag dEivfj Kkayyfj (1005),- 11. ov% r^vdavE
1] (iovXi] dEq daXdoorjg d v fia ; 12. a i dEai aE id ov o i xd KdXd Epya xmv dE&v,
EKtjfidXog Se fiaivEi dlXr]. 13. Ei%E (836) fJp ta fio g dyX adv icai KaXdv o i k o v .
44 Translate:
1. Who brought this countless shining ransom to the beautiful home of
Priam? 2. The Achaeans and the Argives burned many funeral pyres in your
beloved fatherland. 3. Clytemnestra was wicked and performed many dreadful
deeds. 4. Through the gift of prophecy we tell many glorious deeds of the gods
and goddesses who have Olympian homes. 5. My deeds are noble but yours are
cowardly. 6. The gods sent an evil plague up through the camp and destroyed
many Achaeans, because they dishonored the free-shooter. 7. It was not pleasing
to Clytemnestra in (her) wicked soul.
50
Lesson 10
THE FUTURE AND AORIST OF -<y VERBS
Preliminaries
The vocabulary list in every lesson will now provide three forms for each verb.
These are the first three principal parts of a verb. Although Greek verbs have six
principal parts, we will initially focus on the first three. Using the stems of all six of
the principal parts we can create all Greek tenses and moods, as well as other
verbal forms. You should consult the Vocabulary review in Lesson 12 or the Greek-
English vocabulary at the back of the book for the second and third principal parts
of verbs you met in Lessons 1-9.
Principal parts of verbs appear in the first-person singular
• The first principal part (e.g., Mco) is the present indicative active.
• The second principal part (e.g., ^voco) is the future indicative active.
• The third principal part (e.g., eX voa) is the aorist indicative active (the
simple past tense).
One of the most important things you can do to improve your ability to read
Greek is learn the principal parts of verbs, in large part because of the arrangement
of a Greek lexicon. In order to look up the meaning of a verb in the aorist or imper
fect, for example, you must be able to generate its first principal part—or at least
come close. You will n o t , in other words, find the entry for e X v o a under e but
under X (for kvco).
Because principal parts often differ from the present indicative active in unpre
dictable ways, you must m em orize them. Nonetheless, some verbs follow a pattern
(841-857). For the future indicative (the second principal part):
• Verbs whose present stem ends in v (or ev) often have a stem that looks like
the present with an -o added to it (although the length of the upsilon is long
in the future).
Example: Xv-a —> Xv -o -co = Xvocd
•Verbs whose present stem ends in f or o often lengthen the vowel before add
ing the o:
Example: (piXe-co <piX-r]-o-a = (piXôco
Example: xoX6-co = xoXmom
2) The addition of an a to stems ending in certain consonants changes that

consonant:
51
HOMERIC GREEK
Type Consonants Consonant + a

Velar y,/r. (also oo) ^
Example: ay-m a y -o -co d^co
Dental 6, t , B (or P o
Example: ne'idco neiQ -a -co jieioco
Labial /?, Jt, <p (also jit ) y/
Example: JiEfiim -o -co Ji£fi\j/(o
45a Learn the principles of the formation of the future indicative active (844).
To the future stem add the same personal endings you used for the present
indicative active. Because the endings for the present and future are the same,
when you read (or listen to) Greek you wîll find the sounds that distinguish the twô
tenses right in the middle of the word. In contrast, English often begins with either
a helping verb like will or adds a suffix {-ed) to signal the tense of a verb. For this
reason it is very important to pay attention to each syllable of a Greek word—and
to gather clues syllable by syllable as you hear them (as you read from left to right).
Immediately peeking at the personal endings (as high-school Latin students often
do) increases the likelihood that you will fail to notice the stem of the verb and its
thematic vowel, both of which are very important. So you will make life easier for
yourself—and enjoy Greek more—by reading Greek aloud, pronouncing each
word carefully, and collecting clues as you read (or speak).
As with the present tense, verbs in the future indicative express continuing
action, although there may be more or less emphasis on the continuing aspect. So
there is also more than one way to translate verbs in the future. The first-person
Ivoo), for example, can be translated I will fr e e or 1 will be freeing.
45b Learn the future indicative active of ^vco (904).

Write out the full conjugation of X voa. Consult 904 to check your work.
46a Learn the principles of the formation of the aorist indicative active (841-843,
863-865).
The third principal part is the aorist indicative active, which expresses a com
pleted action that has taken place in the past. (In the Grammar, tenses that refer to
actions in the past are called secondary tenses.)
There are two types of aorists, the first (or weak) aorist and the second (or
strong) aorist. Similarly, there are two ways to form a simple past tense in English,
with a suffix {play, played) or with an internal change, usually to the main vowel (sing,
sang; but also bring, brought).
Some verbs have first aorists, some second, and usually there is no difference
in meaning between the two. A few verbs, however, have both kinds of aorists, and
in such cases there is a difference. You will learn more about this in the next lesson
when you meet the two aorists oijiaiv co {to walk).
We will begin with Xva, kvaco, eX voa. As you might expect, given the last let
ter of the third principal part {eIv o-o.), the first aorist uses a new set of endings.
52
L E S S O N 10
46b Learn the first (weak) aorist indicative active of Ivco (904).
Singular Full form Augmented stem Ending Meaning

1 EAvoa i'Xvo -a I freed
2 EAVoag eXvo -ag You freed
3 £/A’OE iX vo -E She, he, it freed
Plural
1 EXvoaUEl’ iX vo -aÊv We freed
2 EAVOUTE eXvo -azE You freed
3 EM'OUV eXvo -av They freed
With the exception of the third-person singular, the thematic vowel of the personal
endings o f the first aorist is a —just as the first letter of the word aorist is a (a lucky
coincidence). Despite the different thematic vowel, there are some similarities between
the endings of the present (or future) and the aorist. Can you identify them?
46c Learn the second (strong) aorist indicative active of dyco and Xeinco (863;
865:1,865:4).
The second aorist use the same secondary endings as the imperfect. Two exam
ples of verbs with second aorists are d y a , d^co, tjy ay ov (I lead, I do, I conduct) and
Xe ':i uo. Xeiif/co, eXihov (/ leave, I abandon). The ending of the third principal parts of
these verbs {-ov instead of -a) tells you that they are second aorists.
The formula for conjugating the second aorist indicative is the same as the
formula for the first aorist: augmented aorist stem -i- personal endings. Since you
know where to find the aorist stem (third principal part), and you know the
personal endings (the same as those for the imperfect), conjugate ekin o v —with
accents. Compare your results with 933. Next write out the conjugation of the
aorist of dyto, d^co, ijy ay ou .
The verb dyco should persuade you, if you have not yet been convinced, of the
importance of paying close attention to all the syllables of Greek verbs. Compare,
for example, the first-person singular of the imperfect and the aorist: i^yov vs.
tjy ay ov . Since both the imperfect and the second aorist indicative of this verb are
augmented and both use the same endings, to distinguish between them you must
identify their stems.
46d A note on third principal parts

The augmented stem of a first aorist often looks just like the future stem with
an augment; in other words, it looks like the (augmented) present stem -i- o, which
is why the first aorist is sometimes called the sigmatic aorist. This means that future
and aorist principal parts often undergo the same kinds of changes in their stem
consonants (or final vowels), so the patterns you learned for the future will be help
ful for the principal parts of sigmatic aorists as well.
But not all Greek verbs are as docile and regular as Xvco. There are, for example,
some first aorists that do not have a sigma (the same is true of some futures),
53
HOMERIC GREEK
although they use exactly the same endings as those of eX vaa. The principal parts
o f the verb t o b r i n g or t o b e a r , for example, are (p ep o), o t o c o , f j v e i K a . The personal
ending (-a) of rjvEiica indicates that it is conjugated like eX voa. For this reason,
always write out, memorize, and regularly recite aloud the principal parts of verbs
in the vocabulary lists.
46e Advice about verb stems

Because Homeric Greek often omits the augment and because verbs outside the
indicative (as well as other verbal forms, such as participles) do not use augments,
you should make sure you know the unaugmented stem of a verb in the past tense
of the indicative. The unaugmented stem of eX voa, for example, is kv o -. The verb
Tjyayov is more challenging, since the t] could be an augmented a or an augmented
e. Given that the first principal part is dyco, however, you can safely infer that the
unaugmented stem is d y a y -.
47 VOCABULARY
No te : Full forms in parentheses are alternative forms; stems (628-630) follow the
principal parts.
ayo), a^ft), tiYayov lead, drive, conduct, bring, carry, take
dvdooM, dvd^w, ijvaâ (stem: pavaK-), with gen., 985, rule (over), guard, protect.
apioTog, Ti, ov best, noblest, bravest, fairest, superl. o f ayaQ oq, ii, 6v good
ai)Ti5 (back) again, anew
Aavaog, oti, 6 Danaan, Greek
eKaxo^Pt], r|i;, f| hecatomb, sacrifice, a n u m b e r o f a n im a ls (o r ig in a lly o n e h u n d r e d
c a t t l e ) o f f e r e d in s a c r i f i c e
Gdvatog, ou, 6 death

'IXiog, o\j, Ti Ilium, Troy; also, the Troad (the region around Troy)
HEydGvno?, ov great-souled, brave
oâ (by) far, much, considerably
JiEi0(i), rteioM, EJTEioa (ji^ iB o v ) (steins: jie i B-, jio i B-, rti0-), persuade, win over,
mislead
(piXô), (piXffOu, E(ptî]oa love, cherish, entertain hospitably
Related words: pedagogue, demagogue, synagogue; aristocracy; thanatopsis,

euthanasia (610:9).
48 Translate:
1. T/g 6% d p ia ro g A a v a a v ; 2. F lpiafiog /êyaQvôg ijv a o a ev 'IM o v (985).
3. ovK avTig d ^ ov oi A a v a o i fiey d d v ^ oi sKaTOnâg jioXXac, eig Xpvorjv. 4. o v k
E Jieioav EKtjfioXoy TwXXfjq eKaTOnjirjai tcaXfjoiv (1005). 5. o v <piXi]oofi£v Osovg,
ovvEKa KaXoi e io iv ; 6. A a v a o i zev^ ovoi Qdvaxov Tlpidfim ev 'IXIo). 7. EipiXrjaa
54
L E S S O N 10
deau daAdoorjg, aAA' ov x ijvdavE eKrjPdXm dvfim. 8. a e ia o fie v Kai neioo/uEV

Qeovg. 9. o x d p io x o i ev 'IXm to. eijiov [eip a 57] Tlpid^cp, dlX d rov g ijrifiaoEv.
10. r ip ia n o g E:;iE^\ffE to v o z p a x o v a p ia r o v eji' A pyE w ioiv. 11. E^Tjaav [fia iv a
57] avxig A a v a o i ei^ ^ Ihov, aXX o v k ejieio u v F lp iafiov . 12 . dsioofiE y EKrjjioXov
ox d p ia x o v 9e w v , ovvek' fjyayE [dyco] A a u ao v g £ig"lXiov.
49 Translate:
1. The great-souled Achaeans will not persuade the free-shooter with goodly
hecatombs, but he will prepare evil death for the people. 2. The noblest of the
Achaeans went to Ilium, but they did not persuade the soul of Priam. 3. We will
sing, because the gods have led (aor.) the people into Troy. 4. We will have many
shining golden scepters. 5. Did you not love the gods who have Olympian homes?
6. Priam will not rule Ilium again, for the Achaeans will prepare evil death for
him. 7. Did he speak to the beautiful goddess of the sea? 8. They will persuade the
souls of the gods with many hecatombs.
55
Lesson 11
MASCULINE NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION;

ROOT AORISTS; COMPOUND VERBS
Preliminaries
You have already met three types of first-declension nouns.
lA: nouns Wke fiovX ^. PovXfjq, iq

IB: nouns like Oed, dedg. r/
1 C: nouns like Q dX aaoa, daXdoatjg, ri
The last type, ID, consists of masculine nouns, mostly patronymics (that is,
they have a suffix that means son of, like -ovich in Russian names) and agent nouns,
like the English words actor and teacher, where the suffixes -or and -er create nouns
meaning one who acts and one who teaches. Most masculine nouns of the first
declension end in -rjg in the nominative singular and -a o in the genitive. (See 664-
665 for variations, such as A ivelag.)
50 Learn the declension o f ArpEidrig, A z p eid a o , d (type ID), son ofA treus (664).
Type ID. AzpEidrjg, A r p e id a o . 6 son ofA treus
Singular Plural
nom. ArpEidrjg A xpEidai
gen. A ip E id a o (ArpEidEco) ATpEiddav
dat. AxpEidr] ATpei6r]g, -r]oi{v)
accus. ATpEidrjv 'Axpeidag
voc. AipEidrj (same as nominative)
This paradigm differs from that of in only two forms, the nominative
and genitive singular. The two sons of Atreus, Agamemnon and Menelaus, are
important figures in the poem, so be sure to consult 664 for the dual.
N o t e : Instead of A rpefdrjg (A-rpe-i-dtjg) you will sometimes see ATpeidrjg
(A-TpEi-Srjg)
51a Learn the principles of forming the root (second) aorist (865, 930).
Some verbs have two third principal parts: 1) fiaivco, 2) firjoco, 3) efirjaa /efirjv
(to walk). The second form of the third principal part, is called a root aorist
(a kind of second aorist). With the exception of the third-person plural, root aor-
ists use exactly the same (secondary) endings as do the second aorist (and imper
fect). The endings, however, connect directly to the verb without a thematic vowel
For this reason they are also called athematic verbs (797).
56
L E S S O N 11
Second aorist endings Root aorist endings

(thematic) (athematic)
Singular
1 -Ol' -V
2 -eg
3 -£
Plural
1 -oftey -flEV
2 -fTf -TE
3 -ov -o a v (borrowed from the first aorist)
Compare the (thematic) second aorist e a d o v (from avddvco, please, be pleasing to)
with the root (athematic) aorist Ejitjv. As should be clear from the chart below, the
augmented stem of is ejirj-.
Singular Second Aorist Root (Second) Aorist

1 ea8\o\v Ejir,\v
2
3 fa(5|f|
Plural
1 ed6\o\iuev E^T]\HEV
2 fd(5|f|r£ Epr]\T£
3 ea6\o\v £[ir]\aav
When verbs like jiaivo) or dvafiaivco {walk up, em bark) have both a first and
second (root) aorists, the two aorists have slightly different meanings (864).
• The first aorist is usually transitive and has a causal sense: dv efirjoa I m ade
[him ] walk up / em bark.
• The root aorist is intransitive: avE(ir]v I w alked up / em barked.
51b Learn the principles of forming and augmenting compound verbs (838-839).
Compound (as opposed to simple) verbs are composed of a prefix (often a
preposition) attached to a simple verb to make a new word: dv afiaiv o) = a v a (up)
+ fiaiVQ) (to walk) = walk up, em bark.
If the prefix ends with a vowel and the simple verb begins with one, you should
expect elision:
Example: d.'id + aipEco —> dipaipEco, where the rough breathing of aipEco
turns an- into ci(p-.
The augment of a compound verb appears between the prefix (di>d in d v a /ia lm )
and the simple verb. Expect the augment to replace the final vowel of a prefix.
Example: d v a -p a iv o ) becomes dv-E -fitjoa (first aorist) or dv-E-firiv (second

aorist).
57
HOMERIC GREEK
52 VOCABULARY
N o t e : For compound verbs, the stems of the simple verb are given,
dvapaivft), dvapiôo) (dvapir|ooâi), dveptioa (dvePtiv) (stems: Pav-, Pa-) go
up, ascend, embark
dnoXvo), djioXvoo)* djieXCoa loose, set free, release
A tpEi6ti5, ao (ew), 6 son of Atreus; usually refers to Agamemnon
KaxaKau), KataKarow , KateKtia (stems: Kav-, Kap-, Kai-) burn, consume
k)êv(o, — » ekXvov (stems: kXev-, kXep-, kXv-) with gen. 984, hear, hearken to
fiETEEirtov or nETEiJiov = nEtd-Eijiov (stcm: pEn-) 2nd aor. o f tipw spoke among,
addressed, with dat.
OTE when(ever)
I1i]Xtiid5ti;, ao (eco), 6 son o f Peleus, Achilles
JipooEEirtov or JipooEiJiov (stem: pEJi-) 2nd a o r o f Eipe) addressed, spoke to {with
acc.)
TOTE then, at that time
X okoo, xoXuoo), ExoX,(ooa anger, enrage, vex
Xpvot]5, ao (eco), 6 Chryses, a priest o f the god Apollo, fro m the town Chrysa
53 Translate:
1. KaXoi Qeoi exEvâv Q dvarov kukov dico nrj^rjiddt], 6 (5' dvejir] nvp-qv.
2. EKtjjidXoq Xadv A xai& v. ovueica 8iog Azpeidrjg i^rifiaae Xpvar]v.
3. icaTEKTja E K a r o ^ f ia g iio k k aq - 4. E K rjP o X o g o v k e k I v e v 'A x p E id a o , o v v E K a
fiT ifia o E X p v a r j v . 5. X p v o t j g h e x e e i j i e v A x a io T o iv , a k X o i)K A x p E i6 r ] i^ v6 a v E
9 v ^ 3 . 6. OTE KaKcbg Jip o a s E iJiE v A xp Eid rjc, X p v o i j v , t o t e e x o X cooev E K t](i6 X o v .
7. d j i E k v a a n E v X p v a r j v , o v v E K a t o v E (p iX t]o a fiE v . 8. X p v o r j q fjV E iK E v [cp E p a, 57]
a j i E p E i o i ayX a d jw iv a ArpEidtj. 9. o i o o f i E v [(pipa, 57] a i w i v a JioXkd Kai
djioXvoo/XEv X pvarjv, ovvEKa t o v E ip iX ^ o a n E V , Kai (piXog e o t i v EKtjfidXm. 10. Tig
(pEpEi d.'toiva X p v o a o ATpEidtj; 11. d iog Hrj^rjiddrig ex6X(ooev AxpEi8r]v.
12. OTE K a T E K ija fiE v jioXXdg E K a T O fx P a g KaXag, t o t e EJiEiaafiEV dvfxovg dE & v.
13. 8 id f i a v x o o v v r jv X p v a r j g e Ij i e f io v X d g Qe & v A x p E td r] n r jX r jid d i] x e .
54 Translate:
1. The Achaeans ascended into Troy and killed the noble Priam. 2. We burned
many goodly hecatombs to the Olympian gods. 3. Chryses spoke among the
Achaeans (d a t), but the son of Atreus did not hearken to him (gen., 984). 4. The
Achaeans addressed the son of Atreus, but he did not free Chryses. 5. The son of
Atreus will bring much ransom (plur.) into the camp of the Achaeans. 6. Who
will persuade the gods with many good hecatombs?
58
Lesson 12
REVIEW
55a Review all the forms from preceding lessons.
55b Review the vocabulary from preceding lessons (listed below).
56a Review the first three principal parts of all verbs.

Recite a l o u d the first three principal parts of regular verbs. Then recite a lo u d
the first three principal parts of a l l the verbs in Lesson 12.
56b Help with reviewing verbs

Organize the verbs in the review list according to verb-stem type: vowel stems
like h')(o: vowel stems like fiêo) or xoôco; different types of consonant stems
(velar, dental, labial); and irregular verbs. Some verbs will almost, but not quite, fit
a category. Assign them to the type they fit best and underline their irregular (or
second aorist) forms. For example:
Velar verb stem: y, k . x (or o a ) —> ^
1) present 2) future 3) aorist meaning

avdaoo) avd^ a tjv a ^ a rw/e (+gen.)
dyco d^ co r jy a Y o v lea d , c o n d u c t
Dental verb stem: r, <5, 6, ^ — > a

d iifid ^ c o d n fid o c o r jT ifia o a d is h o n o r
57 VOCABULARY
N o t e : Hereafter, the following symbols mean that the form does not appear in
Homer (although you will need it for reading other works in Greek): asterisk (*),
double asterisk (**), and dagger (t). Words preceded by an asterisk (*) are assumed
forms; that is, they do not appear in extant ancient Greek, but have been inferred
from forms that do appear. Those followed by an asterisk are in the Attic dialect,
analogous to known Homeric (Epic) forms, but not found in Homer. Those fol
lowed by a double asterisk {**) are Attic, not analogous to Homeric (Epic) forms;
those followed by a dagger ( t) are not Homeric (Epic) or Attic, but are found in
works composed in the Ionic dialect.
dyXaog, 6v bright, shining, splendid, glorious
ayo), aô), i^YaYO'' lead, drive, conduct, bring
59
HOMERIC GREEK
dei5ca, dEioo), t]£ioa sing (o f), hym n, chant

dX>.d but, m oreover
dXXt) elsew here
ri, o other, another
dv- (before vowels), a - [before consonants), a prefix (sometimes called alpha-
privative) not, un-, dis-, -less, without, (cf. d-T1 ^d^(a dis-honor)
dvd, dv adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., up(on), along, up through,
thereon; adv., (up)on, thereon; with dat., (up) on, along; with acc., through (out),
up through
dvapaivo), dvaPôu (d v a P iia o jia i), dvEptfoa (dveptiv) (steins: Pav-, Pa-) go
up, ascend
dvdoow, dvd^M, i^vaâ (stem: pavaK-) (with gen. 985) rule (over), guard, protect
dv8dv(o (opa8(e)), dSTjowt, ea5ov (evaSov) (with dat. 996) please
d jiep eio io;, ov boundless, countless, immeasurable (571)
d jio iv a, cov, id ransom(s)
dnoXvb), djioXvoo), djitXvoa loose, set free
ApY£to5, o\), 6 Argive, Greek
a p i0T05, r|, ov best, noblest, bravest, fairest (superl. o f dyaOog)
dT1^d!;(l), dtljidoM *, TjTinaoa (stem: TljiaS-) dishonor, slight, insult
A tp eiStis, ao (eco), 6 son of Atreus; in sing, usually refers to Agamemnon
ai)Ti5 (back) again, anew
ai)T05, n, 6 self, him(self), her(self), it(self), same
X x a io g , ot), 6 Achaean, Greek
Paivo), pf|O(0 (Piiao|iiai), ePt)oa (tPtiv) (stems: Pav-, Pa-) come, go, walk
Poi)Xr|, Tie;, Ti plan, will, w ish, purpose, cou nsel, cou n cil
ydp (postpositive) for, in fact
A avaog, ou, 6 Danaan, Greek
S i (postpositive) and, but, for, so
-8e, with acc. (788:4) to (e.g., OuA.\)nn6v5e to Olympus)
8 eiv o 5, 11, ov terrible, awful, dreadful, fearful
8 id , adv., and prep, with gen. and acc. through, by means of, on account of; adv.,
between, among; with gen., through; with acc., through, by means of, on
account of, during
5ii(piX.o;, ri, ov dear to Zeus, beloved of Zeus (1168)
8iog, a, ov divine, godlike, glorious, heavenly
eipo), Epew, EiJiov ( eei ; iov ) (stems: pEp-, ppi]-, pen-) speak, say, tell
Eig (Eg) adv., and prep, with acc. into, to; until, th erein
60
L E S S O N 12
eio((v) (they) are

£K (e^ ), adv., and prep, with gen. out of, (away) from
£KaT 6 ^ P t], r|(;, f| hecatom b, sacrifice
(e)KEivog, ri, o that (o n e), he, she, it
eKTiP6>.o;, o\j, 6 free-sh oo ter, epithet o f Apollo
eXwpiov, ou, TO booty, sp o il(s), prey
Efi65, n, 6v my, m ine
^ ( 0 , e iv adv., and prep, with dat. in, am ong, at, on, th e re (in , -o n )
e jii, adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc. to, (u p )o n , against, by, over, for; adv.,
(up)on, thereon; with gen., (u p )o n , over, d uring; with dat., u p (o n ), in, for,
about, against, at, beside, by; with acc., to, up to, over, (u p )o n
epyov, o\), TO (fEpYOv), deed, accom pH shm ent, feat
ig = EI5
EOt((v) (he, she, it) is
EXo>» eoxov (stems: 0£X*» 603, 619) have, hold, keep
r|v was; ijoav were
OdXaooa, r|(;, ti sea
Odvatog, o\), 6 death
0 E (i> aq, f| goddess
-6rv (suffix added to noun stem s; see 712), fro m (e.g., T p o ii j d e v fro m Troy)
0EO5, o\j, 6 god, divinity

OCfidg, o\), 6 heart, soul, spirit, cou rage, passion
"I>.io 5, o\). fj Iliu m , Troy, the Troad
K a i and, also, even, fu rth erm o re
Kt t l . . . K a i b oth . . . and, n ot only . . . but also
Kaiio, Kavoo)*, EKtja (stems: Kav-, Kap-, Kai-) b u rn , con su m e
K a K o ;, n. 6v bad, poor, ugly, m ean, cowardly, w icked, evil
KaXog, 11. 6v goo d (ly ), noble, brave, fair, beau tiful, hand som e
K ataK au i), K a ta K a v o w *, K atE K tia (stems: K av -, Kap-, K a i-) burn (dow n), consum e
KEIVOg, T|, O = EKElVOg, rj. o
KO -Xa, T|(;, T] C ilia, a town in the Troad
Kkayyi\, fji;, ti noise, shriek, (u p )ro ar
KXrtainvf|CTTpti, r|q. ti C lytem nestra
*K>tEi)M,----- » e k Xvov (stems: k Xe v -, k Xe f -, k >^v -) {with gen., 984) hear, hearken to
X aog, o\). 6 people, host, soldiery
Xvo(o, e X v a a loosen , free, b reak up, destroy
HavTOffvvti, ri(;. fi gift o f prophecy
61
HOMERIC GREEK
H £Y a0®fio5, ov great-souled
(lETEEiJiov {2nd aor.) (stem: ptre-), spoke among, addressed {with dat.)
^vpioi, ax, a countless, innumerable
V0V005, o\), f| plague, pestilence, disease
6 , r|, TO this, that; he, she, it; who, which, what
oiKog, o\j, 6 house, home
oiwvog, o\j, 6 bird (of prey), vulture, omen
OXCKO) kill, destroy, ruin
’O XvnJiiog, ri, ov Olympian
“OXvnnog, ou, 6 Olympus
6 5 ,11, o who, which, what
ore when(ever)
ov (ovK, ovx) not, no
ovvEKa (ov-EVEKtt) because
o x a far, by far, much, considerably
Jid tp ti, r|(;, T] fatherland, native land
^£(06), nEioo), EJiEioa (jifoiiGov) (stems: rtEi0 -, Jioi0-, 3ii0-) persuade, w in over,
mislead
;lE^;I(o, n;E^\|/(i>, ejien v a (stems: JiEfin-, jiohji-) send, escort, conduct
Ili]Xtiid5T);, ao (ero), 6 son of Peleus, Achilles
Jto)^>.65, 11, ov much, many, numerous
^ p^ a^ o;, ou, 6 Priam, king o f Troy
n;pooEEi:iov {2nd aor.) (stem: pEn;-) spoke, to, addressed {with acc.)
TOpf|, fit;, Ti (funeral) pyre
OKiiîTpov, 01), TO staff, scepter
0 65, OT|, oov your, yours
oxpatog, ot>, 6 army, encam pm ent, host
TE {postpositive enclitic), and, also; te . . . te (or . . . Kai) both . . . and, not o n l y . . ,
but also
TE>kEiw, te Xeo) (xe Xeow, te Xeoow), ET^>i,Eo(o)a (stem: te Xeo -) accom plish, fulfill,
complete, perform
TEVX®), TEV^w, EtEvâ (xExvKov) (stems: TEVx-> tvx*, TDK-) do, make, perform ,
cause, fashion, prepare
t(? , t i who? which? what? t ( why? ( 780 - 781 )
TOTE then, at that time
cpEpo), 010(0, tiVEiKa (stems: <pEp-, 0 I-, ^ e k -) bear, bring, carry
(piX.£A), (piXr|0(a, £<pi>,iioa love, cherish, entertain hospitably
62
L E S S O N 12
(pi>.o;, r|, ov dear, darling, lovely, beloved

XO>.6(i), xoXcoota, anger, enrage, vex
Xpvoeo5, r|. ov gold(en), of gold
Xpvtn], ri^, f| Chrysa, a town in the Troad
Xpvat]?, ao (eco). 6 Chryses, a priest
^ soul, life, breath, spirit.
63
Lesson 13
NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION

Ilia d , 1 -5
Preliminaries
The third (and final) declension exhibits several patterns. The main division is between
stems ending in consonants and stems ending in vowfels (693-707). Despite the varia
tions, if you know the stem of the noun (or adjective) and you know the third-
declension case endings, you should be able to identify the case and number of any
third-declension noun. Since there are masculine, feminine, and neuter nouns of
the third declension, you must memorize each noun’s gender, ahhough some pat
terns of stem change offer a clue (see 74).
58a Learn the principles of the formation of nouns of the third declension (680-692).
The formula for declining nouns is always the same: stem plus case ending. To find
the stem of a third-declension noun (or adjective) turn to the genitive singular and
remove the case ending -og. After examining the following charts, you should
understand why you cannot use the nominative.
58b Learn the declension of ara^ , avaK xoq, 6 king, lord, ruler (693).
Some of the case endings are new, but just as in the first and second declen
sions, the I is a sign of the dative, and the final letters of the genitive plural are -cov.
Singular Full form Stem Case

nom./voc. dvUKX-
gen. dvaKxoq dvaKx- -oq
dat. dvaKxi dvaKx- -I
accus. dvaKxa dvaKx- -d
Plural
nom./voc. dvUKZEC, dvaKx-
gen. d v d K x o jv d vaK X - -cov
dat. dvdKXEoai dvaKx- - eaa i
d v a ^ i{v ) -Ol
accus. dvaKxaq dvaKx- -dg
The shorter ending of the dative plural {- o i) causes predictable changes when it
joins a stem that ends in a consonant. In the case of d v a ^ , d v a ic c o g , the stem d v a K Z
+ o i becomes d v a ^ i . These changes are much like those you see in the future and
first aorist principal parts. Consult the paradigms in 704-707 for more of these
64
L E S S O N 13
consonant changes. Until you become more comfortable with them, we will use the
-ea a i dative plural ending.
58c Learn the declension o f /ia o ik ev g , fia a d r jo g , 6 king, ruler (701).
Singular Full form Stem Case Ending

nom. fia a d e i' g fiaoiX eif]- -‘n
gen. (iaaiArjog fia o d r j- -og
dat. ft a a u fji fia a d r j- -I
accus. jia a ilf ja P a o d r j- -d
voc. jiaaiAEV ( ia a d £ [ f]- (the “naked” stem)
Plural
nom./voc. (3aou fjeg jia o d t] -
gen. fiaou /jm i' P a o d r j- -0)V
dat. fta0iX^£00i fia o d r j- -E O O l

fta O lA E V O l fia o d e lf]- -Ol
accus. P a o d fja g jia o d r ]- -dg
N o t e : the stem o if i a a d e v g originally ended in a f (digamma). When the digamma

ended a word (as in the vocative singular) or appeared between a vowel and a con
sonant (as in the nominative singular), the f became v {fia o d e p g —> fia o d e v g ) .
Between two vowels the digamma disappeared, but left behind its ghostly presence
in the form of a lengthened stem vowel { f i a o d £ [ f \—> jia o d r]-).
58d Decline ijpmg, ijpcoog. a and e'jwg, e'jieog, t o .

Now that you know the case endings for the third declension, you should be able
decline tjpcog. rjpcoog, d hero, protector. Find the stem and write out the full declen
sion of d ear hero. Consuh 701 to check your work.
You should also be able to decline snog, eneog, to word, com m and—as long as
you remember the rules for neuter nouns (pronouns and adjectives, too). Write out
the full declension of b ad com m and. Consult 707 to check your work.
As you can see from these examples, third-declension nouns can be masculine
or neuter. They can also be feminine, like jw h g , miXiog, ^ city (704). The case ending for
the accusative singular of third-declension nouns whose stems end in -i, such as
jid?.ig, is -I' instead of -a. So the accusative singular of n o lig is JwXiv. Believe it or
not, the two sounds (r and d) are related: both create a nasal uh sound. Another
example of a third-declension accusative singular that ends in v is fifjviv, the first
word of the Iliad.
The many different kinds of stems that you find in third-declension nouns are
shown in 693-708.
59a Reading and translating the Iliad

Congratulations. You have now learned enough Greek that you can read and
translate passages from the Iliad. A few words to the wise before you begin the
65
HOMERIC GREEK
poem. First of all, this book does not simplify or abridge the poem to accommodate
students at the introductory level. The practice sentences (section 61), however,
provide clues to help with the more difficult Greek of the Iliad, as do the notes that
follow the assigned verses of the poem. So read the practice sentences and notes
carefully, and be sure to consult the cross-references to sections of the Grammar;
they often direct you to important grammatical information.
Equally important, think about what you read. If you have forgotten the defini
tion of a word, try to determine its meaning (or at least its general sense) from the
context before consulting the vocabulary list. If, for example, you are reading about a
council of Greek warriors, you are likely to find verbs meaning to stand up, to sit
down, and to speak. If someone is doing something “up to the ships of the Achaeans,”
he is probably walking (or at least moving in some way). The ships themselves are
likely to be black or swift, not well-greaved or godlike. Visualize the scenes. Imagine
the characters and their voices.
59b Memorize thoroughly the word list in 4b, which has all the words used in this
lesson.
60 VOCABULARY
N ote: The first entries for verbs (if not deponent, 897) usually end in -co, but
some, such as Tidrjfii, end in -fit (although the remaining principal parts are like
those of h'tm). You will learn about the forms made from the first principal part of
-fii verbs in Lessons 32-34.
X 15,* 'A1601;, 6 (nom. not used) Hades, god o f the lower world
aXyo?, aXyeoq, 16 grief, pain, woe, trouble
AxiXXev?, Axi^^fioq, 6 Achilles (sometimes spelled with one X)
8a i ; , 5aix6(;, ti feast, banquet, portion
Zev5, Ai6(;, 6 Zeus, fa th er and king o f gods and men
iipco;, Tipcooq, 6 hero, mighty warrior, protector, savior
^(p6 1^0l;, (r|), ov mighty, valiant, stout-hearted, brave; 723-724
Kvrov, Kuvo^, 6, Ti dog
ni^vioq, f| wrath, fury, madness, rage
ov)X6|hevo5, ri, ov accursed, destructive, deadly (= dXofievog, 1168)
jipoiojiTW, n;poiid\|/o), :ipoia\|/a hurl forward, send forth
tiO im i, 0T|O(i), cGtiica (steins: Gi^-, 0e-) put, place, cause
61 Translate:
1. nrjvig n rjlrjid d em Axi^fjog fjv ovXofievr], eOr/Ke y a p n v p i a k y e a xoloiv
A x a io io iv , Jipoiay/e d e JioXXag y/vxag i(p9ifiovg (724) iqpdxov’A id i, etevxe <5’
a v r o v g eXcopia Kai S a n a kvi’eooh’ oicovoTol re, eteXeoe 6 e fiovXfjv Aidq.
2. d sa CLEi'dEi fifjviv ovXofiEVTjv A x d fjo g , fj eOtjkev ^vpi aXys A x a io ia iv .
66
L E S S O N 13
3. d eoi o^ iicov oi tov o ip a r o v , K ai n p o'id m ov oi JioAAag tjpcoav A id i.

4. revôjuei' fiv p iov g A x a io v g ekcopia kvveooiv icai d a h a x o io iv oicovoiaiv,
ovvEKa riT ifiaoav Xpvorjv. 5. KoiXfi fjv 7 fiovXtj Aiog.
62 Copy and translate:
Iliad, 1-5
Mrjviv d eid e, 6ed, rit]Xt]iddeco A xikfjog 1
ovXofisvrjv, fj fxvpi A xaioic, dXye eOtjKev,
jioXkdg i<p6inovq y/i'xdg A i6i jipoiay/eu
lipcocov, avToi'g d e ekdipia revx^ Ki)i’£oaii'
oiavoia'i te d a h a . Aidg 6 crfAc/fro fiovX'q 5
N o t e : Vowels are not marked long and short in the Homeric passages, because
even the length of ambiguous vowels (or “doubtful vowels,” 519-520) can be deter
mined from the meter (see Lesson 14).
63 Notes
1 . M iiviv is emphatic, by its position. —a e iS e [aEidw]: pres. act. imperative,
2nd sing., sing, i.e., inspire me with the gift of song, 1069. —Oed (the muse of
song) is vocative. —ritiX,tiid8 eci) = n rjX rjid d d o 573 (probably n r jk r jt d d a ’
A x ik fjo g stood here originally).
2 . 0vX,0 |ii^t]V is emphatic; it is at the head of the verse, at the end of its clause,
and out of the natural order. Ahhough modifying fifjviv, it is placed in the
second line, as though it were an afterthought, and is expanded and amplified
by the following clause. —11 log, rj, 0 , 773] refers to n fjviv. —fiCpi’ X x a io ig :
for the elision and hiatus see 576; 1178:3.
3. Merely a picturesque way of saying “killed.” —npoiaij/EV: 830-831, 837.
—^ 1 8 1 = A f i d i . l o the ancient Greeks the realm of Hades was not primarily a
place of punishment, of tortures, and of horrors, like the Christian Hell, but
was a faint and cheerless copy of the upper world, and it was the abode of all
departed spirits of the dead. Consequently no one, no matter how good and
pious, was anxious to die. —i<p0-: 724.
4. f|p(0(i)V is emphatic, coming at the beginning of the verse and out o f its natural
order. —8 e eXiapia = 6 e fsX copia (580). —avTOvg: themselves, i.e., their bod
ies, as contrasted with their souls. —XEV/E = h s v x £ : 837. In order for the soul
of the deceased to obtain rest, it was necessary that the body be buried or cre
mated, with the proper funeral rites. If the enemy gained possession of his foes
body, as a mark of the worst he could do he might give it over to the dogs and
birds to devour.
5. exEXeiETO [teXeico]: im perf pass, indie., 3rd sing., was being accomplished.
These verses, together with the two following, form the proem, or introduction to
the Iliad. The subject is announced in the very first word {^fjvig). The wrath of
67
HOMERIC GREEK
Achilles and its disastrous consequences to the Greeks, but all in accordance with
the will of Zeus, form the principal theme of the poem.
64 Translate:
1. The valiant Achaeans are singing (of) the accursed wrath of Achilles. 2. The
wrath of Achilles caused many woes for the Achaeans and sent many valiant
souls of heroes to the god Hades. 3. We will make the army of the Achaeans a
booty for the dogs and a banquet for the birds. 4. We are accomplishing the will
of the goddess.
68
Lesson 14
PROSODY (METER); THE GREEK HEXAMETER

Ilia d , 1 -5
Preliminaries
The Iliad and Odyssey were sung—or chanted rhythmically—in dactylic hexame
ters, which means that in each line there are six (hex = k'^) metrical units (called
feet), and that the rhythm of each foot (in theory) is d aaa da da (long, short, short).
This rhythm, called a dactyl, is represented by one long mark (m acron) and two
shorts (— '^^). It is conventional to use a vertical line to separate each foot of the
verse. So six dactyls are represented like this:
In practice, however, since there is a slight pause at the end of each line, dac
tylic hexameters always end with two long syllables (a spondee), even if the final
syllable is technically short:
Thanks to the final spondee, the last two feet o f dactylic hexameters often have
a “shave and a haircut” rhythm (— "^"^1------- ), as in dAye' edrjKEv (line 2 ) and
t£VX£ K v v eooiv (line 4).
Even with this variation, perfect dactylic hexameters repeated for 15,000 or so
lines would lull you to sleep (for several days). So Greek poets introduced varia
tions based on the notion that the length of two short syllables equals one long,
although they did not substitute two short syllables for the initial long of a dactylic
foot. In fact, you can find a spondee (-------) in place of a dactyl (— '^"') virtually
anywhere in a line. A series of spondees sounds very serious indeed—so pay atten
tion to what the poetry emphasizes.
Variations also made the meter more interesting by creating pauses at different
points in the line. Listen for them. Because of these pauses you will sometimes hear
the rhythm — instead o f — This rhythm is like that of horses’ hooves as they
run. In fact, once you learn how to scan (determine the rhythm) of verses, return
to this page and read this line: p'lfKpa i y o v v a (pepei fie id z ’ rjdea Kai vofibv Ltiuov
(Iliad 6.511). Around the middle of the line, starting with ^ erd , you should hear
the sound of a horses hooves as Paris, running back into battle, is compared to a
horse galloping along.
69
HOMERIC GREEK
65 Learn the rules of quantity, which determine long and short syllables (519-526;
1159-1192).
The rhythm of poetry in Greek is not determined by stress (as in English), but
by the length of the syllables. So you must learn how to determine the length of a
syllable; that is, to determine whether it is long or short (roughly, whether it is held
for two beats or one). This process is called scanning.
Long and short by nature:
Syllables containing a long vowel or a diphthong are long by nature (the rules were
covered in an earlier discussion of accents, but they warrant review here):
The vowels rj and a (as well as t] and a ) are naturally long.
The vowels a , i, and v are sometimes long, sometimes short. In vocabulary
lists and practice sentences they are marked long (a, I, v) if they are ambiguous.
The vowels e and o are naturally short.
Although final -oi and -a i are short for purposes of accentuation, they are long
when scanning poetry.
Long by position:
A “closed” syllable, which is a syllable ending in a consonant, is long by position,

regardless of the natural length of its vowel. If you think about how we divide
Greek words into syllables, this means that the following syllable must also begin
with a consonant. If you have a cluster of consonants, you pronounce the first con
sonant before you begin the second. Thus it takes longer to pronounce a closed
syllable than an open one: in jioXXag i(p9ifiovg, for example, you must say the
first X in jroAldg before you pronounce the X of the next syllable (-Aag), and you
must pronounce the g of jioXXag before you pronounce the d of <5' i(pd'ifiovg, etc.
The easiest formula for remembering this rule \ slfa vowel is follow ed by two conso
nants it is long by position.
The second of the two consonants (or both) may belong to the next word.
When we speak (or chant or sing), we do not stop at the end of each word. We
speak (and hear) in phrases, rarely word-by-word. We pause, but we usually do so
for reasons unrelated to word-endings. Ancient writing conventions reflect this.
Some of the earliest surviving manuscripts in Greek (and in Latin as well) have
no spaces between words or signs to separate words. So when scanning a line of
Greek poetry (determining its meter), treat words as if they were pronounced in
phrases and written without any space between them. If we were well trained orally
and aurally (i.e., in both speaking Greek and listening to it), most likely we would
find it easy to hear open and closed syllables.
66 Double consonants and meter

The consonants and ij/ are shorthand for commonly occurring pairs of
consonants. (Greek inscriptions often contain the original two consonants.) For
this reason a vowel followed by one of these letters is long by position.
70
L E S S O N 14
^ =0(5
^ = Kg, yg, or x i (also ktq)
[f/ = Jig, jig, or <pg (also m g)
67 Optional: Consult 1159-1165 on using accents to help determine quantity.
68 A metrical irregularity: synizesis

Although the meter of the Iliad isfor themost part regular,every now and
then you will encounter an irregularity In the first line o f thepoem,for example,
there is a slurring (called synizesis, 586) of the final two syllables (eco) of nrjXrjiddeco
into a single syllable. A note directing you to section 586 willusually alert you to
this feature.
69 Scanning practice
Iliad, 1-5
M fjviv d eid e. ded, ritj?.t}iddea} A x d ijo g 1
ovAoÊvt]v, fj fivpi A x a io ig dXye' edrjKev,
TiokXdg d itpdifiovg y/vxdg 'Aidi Jipoiay/ev
}]p6iov, avTohg 8 e ekcopia tevx£ kvveooiv
oicovoTai te d a ir a , Aidg (5' eteAeieto /SovAtj, 5
70 Scanning, step-by-step
In line 1, the first syllable of must be long, because it has a long vowel
(522). The accent shows that the second syllable must be short (545, 1160). The
next syllable (d-) must be short, because when there is one long followed by a
short, there must be another short to complete the foot (1169).
The next syllable (-£/-) is long, being a diphthong (521-522).
The next syllable (-f5f) is short, having a short vowel followed by a single
consonant.
The next syllable (Be -) is also short, having a short vowel followed by another
vowel.
Since 0e-completes this foot, the final syllable (-d) o f dEd must be long, as it is
the first syllable of the next foot (1171).
The next syllable (fltj-) is long, having a long vowel (522).
The next syllable (-At/-) is long, having a long vowel.
The next vowel (-/-) is short (see the vocabulary in Lesson 2).
Then the next syllable (-a-) must be short to complete the foot.
The next vowel (-f-) is short, but since the first syllable of a foot must be long
(1171), the -S eco is pronounced as one long syllable, by synizesis (586).
The next vowel (A-) is short (see the vocabulary in Lesson 2).
Then the next syllable {-xi-) must be short to complete the foot.
The next syllable (-A7 -) is long, having a long vowel.
71
HOMERIC GREEK
The final syllable (-og) is short, having a short vowel, but must be marked long
here, because dactylic hexameters always end with two long syllables (a spondee),
because of the slight pause (1184).
Therefore the metrical scheme of this verse is:
Now mark the next verse: ovXofievrjv, fj fivpC AxaioTg dXye' edtjicev:
The first syllable (ov-) is long, being a diphthong.
The second syllable (-Ao-) is short, having a short vowel.
The next (-/<£-) is short, having a short vowel.
The next (-I'/ji') is long, having a long vowel.
The next (i^) is long, having a long vowel.
Since this completes the second foot, the next syllable (fiv-) must be long, as it
is the first syllable of the next foot.
The next syllable (-pi ) is short; this is indicated by the accent, since only short
vowels are elided, and a penult (the -pi of fiv p i[a ]) can only have an acute accent
(instead of a circumflex) if it too is short (575, 1162).
Then the next syllable (^ -) must be short, to complete the foot.
The next syllable (-xai-) is long, having a diphthong.
The next syllable (-oTg) is long, having a diphthong (and circumflex).
The next syllable (dA-) is long, as it is closed (a followed by two consonants).
The next syllable (-y s’) is short, having a short vowel.
The next syllable (e-) is short, having a short vowel.
The next syllable (-6rj-) is long, having a long vowel.
The next syllable (-/c£y) is long because closed, and owing to its place at the end
ofthe verse (1184).
Therefore this verse should be scanned as follows:
71 Write out the first five lines of the Iliad, marking each syllable long or short.
Separate each foot with a vertical line. A good plan to follow at first is to start
by marking only those syllables whose quantities you know without having to
consult the vocabulary. You can usually determine the quantity of the remaining
syllables from their position in the verse. For example, if you encounter one long
syllable followed by one short syllable, you’ll know the next must also be short.
And if you encounter two short syllables, the next must be long.
Soon (the sooner the better) you should be able to scan less mechanically by
reading each line aloud and doing your best to pronounce long and short syllables
correctly. Keep in mind that single consonants begin syllables and that you can
deduce unknown quantities from the position of the syllable in the verse. If you
scan lines in this way, you will begin to hear the dactylic rhythm and sense when
you have made a mistake. When this happens—that is, when you find that you
72
L E S S O N 14
have too many or too few syllables in a line—start over and go back over the line
more closely.
72 Practice reciting the opening verses aloud.

Practice, by yourself or in a small group, until you have memorized the first
three lines and can repeat them rhythmically. Before trying to memorize a verse,
however, translate it several times, so that you are familiar with the exact meaning
of every word and understand accurately every construction in it.
73
Lesson 15
THE THIRD DECLENSION (c o n t i n u e d )
Il ia d , 1 - 1 0
73 A common pattern for neuter nouns

You will encounter several neuter nouns of the third declension that follow the
pattern of dw/xa, dcoârog, to house (stem = dafxar-). Conversely, if a noun is of
the third declension and its stem ends with the letters -fia t, its nominative will end
in -jua. and its gender will be neuter. Find another example in the first twenty-one
lines of the Iliad.
Singular Plural
nom./voc. 8a>fia d(6/xaia
gen. dco^drcov
dat. dcofiari dcofiaTEOoi, dcofiaoi
accus. dmfia dcofiaxa
74 Other common nouns of the third declension

jiaTg, Jiaid og , 6 , rj (stem: n a i6 -) child
Singular Plural
nom. jia lq jiafd eg
gen. jia id o g jiaidcov
dat. n a id i jia iS e o a i, n a io i
accus. n a id a n a id a g
voc. jia i jiaTdeg
For words like iiaTg, which have one syllable in the nominative and two in the geni
tive, the accent falls on the case endings in a) the genitive and dative singular, and
b) the -ai forms of the dative plural—regardless of the words native accent.
The noun ai>7]p alternates between two stems, a v ep and avdp- {avdp- is really
avp- with a (5 inserted to facilitate pronunciation):
avi^p, avipoc, or avd p og , 6 (stems: av ep- or avdp-) (real) man, warrior, hero
Singular Plural
nom. av ^ p avEpeg, dvdpEg
gen. dvepog, av d p og dvepcov d v d p av
dat. a v ep i, av d p i dvdpEOOi, d v d p d a i
accus. avEpa, d v 6 p a d v ip a g , dvd p ag
voc. a v ep dvepEg, dvdpeg
74
L E S S O N 15
The accents of the av d - forms of av i]p are especially odd. As with jiaTg, the accent
falls on the case endings of the genitive and dative singular, and the shorter form of the
dative plural, but also on the case ending of the genitive plural {dvipcov vs. avdpSv).
75 Notes on the sentences in this lesson

To translate the practice sentences you will need forms of the aorist dual (904,
933);
First aorist: iX v o a r o i’ (you two freed ); eXvoaTtjv (the two o f them freed )
Second aorist: tjydyeToy (you two led); ijy ayerrji’ (the two o f them led)
In line 6 of the Iliad you will find the dual of a root (second) aorist (930): 6ieori]rr]v
(the two o f them stood apart). The verb dilozrjfii, like /?a;V«, has two aorists.
The first aorist d ie o ir jo a is transitive and has a causal sense: I m ade them
stand apart.
The root (second) aorist d ieo rtji’ is intransitive: I stood apart.
Remember: With the exception of the third-person plural, the root aorist uses the
same endings as those of the second aorist (and imperfect) but without the the
matic vowel.
76 Memorize verses 1-5 of the Iliad.

Memorizing passages of the Iliad might seem like an old-fashioned exercise,
but it is an excellent way to learn Greek and to appreciate the qualities of the poem.
Copy and scan the Iliad in each lesson (being sure to include breathing marks and
accents) and memorize one line each day until you have learned the first twenty-
one lines of the poem. You will discover (as ancient oral poets clearly knew) that
memorizing rhythmic verses is easier than trying to commit to memory words in a
vocabulary list or paradigms, and the first ten lines of the Iliad contain a broad
range of forms that will help you as you continue to read the poem.
77 VOCABULARY
ava^, avaKxoi;, b king, lord, protector
dvf|p, dvep05 (dvSpog), 6 (real) man, warrior, hero (571, 1168)
dp, (dpa, pd) naturally, of course, as you know, as you might expect, that is, in
effect. It is not always translatable into English, which has no exact equivalent.
Pa(Ti).et)5, Paoi^fjoq, 6 king, ruler
8n indeed, truly, now, forsooth
SiioTtm i, Siaotiiao), 8iEaxiioa (6ieottiv) (steins: orrti-, ora-) stand apart,
separate
epi^M,—, iip io (o )a (stem: Epi8-> quarrel, strive
Epi5, ept8o(;. f| strife, quarrel
75
HOMERIC GREEK
Aiitm, Arix6o(; (Arixoti; 584-585), ti Leto, m other o f Apollo

|lldxoâl fight, battle
^vviioo), ^vvtiKa (^vv^K a) (stems: t|-, e-), bring together, throw
together, hearken, heed
opvvm , opaco, (opoa (wpopov) stir up, kindle, incite, excite, arouse
npuTog, ri, ov first, foremost, chief; to Jipwtov, td Jipwta, as adverb (780-781), at
first, first
\)io5, 01), 6 (also gen. u'leoq or ■uioi;, as if third-declension) son
Related words: polyandry, philanderer, Andrew, androgynous; basilisk, basilica;

stay, static, stand; eristic; logomachy, theomachy; protoplasm, prototype.
78 Translate:
1. Oea aeioE i [irjviv Axi^fjog, o v (from the time when, i.e., beginning at
the point in the story) dfj to. n p m a dTog Kai A rpeidijg dva^ avdpmv
i^piadTtjy [epH^co] Kai dieoTTjrtji' [dnarrjfii]. 2. T/g deSv ^vvetjke [^vvir/fii] d iov
AxiXfjd re Kai AxpEidriv epidi (1009) fidxEoQai (to fight); 3. vidg A rjioog Kai
Aidg, EKTjjidXog, ^vvet]ke o(pmE (these two) spidi fxdxEoQai, t o v y a p fia o ik ev g
AzpEidrjg ExokaoEV, 6 mpoe KaKrjv v o v oo v d v a a rp a x o v A x a ia v , alEKE
5 e Xaovg.
79 Copy, scan, and translate:

Iliad, 1-10
Mr]viv d eid e, Oed, nrjlrjiddEO) A x d fjo g
ovXoiÊvrjv, fj /xvpf A x a io ig dXye' eOrjKEV,
iwXkdg d ’ iipdifiovg y /v x ag A id i Jipotay/ev
lipcocov, a v r o v g d e sXcopia tev x e k v v eo o iv
o im v oiai xe d a ix a , Aidg (5’ exeXe Iexo 5
ov 6 t] xd Jipmxa diaoxijxrjv EpwavxE
AxpEtdrjg XE dv a^ avdpm v Kai df og AxiXXevg.
xtg x' d p o<pcoE dE&v Epidi ^vvitjKE fidxE odai;
Arjxovg Kai Aidg vidg. 6 y a p jiaoiX fji xoXcoGeig
v o v o o v d v a oxpaxdv mpOE k o k ijv , oX ekovxo 3e X aoi, 10
80 Notes
6. ov [dg, i], d, 773], o v , referring back to dsidE. fro m the time when, literally,
fro m what [time]. —td npS»xa: 780-781. —8 iaoxT|Ttiv = diEOxtjxrjv, 837

[duoxrjfii]. —epioavTE [ep/^«]: aor. active participle, nom., dual, masc., (the
two) having quarreled.
7. This line is in apposition with the subject of 6iaox^xr]v. The son of Atreus is
Agamemnon, commander-in-chief of the allied Greek military expedition
against Troy, undertaken to bring back Helen, wife of Menelaus (Agamemnon’s
76
L E S S O N 15
brother and king of Sparta): she had been stolen away from her home in
Greece by Paris, son o f Priam, and was now in Troy. —te ava^ = r f fd v a ^ ,
580. Agamemnon was so well known that it was not necessary to give his name.
8. This verse is a rhetorical question, a common device of public speakers.
—0(po)E [eo, 760]: 3rd pers. pron., acc. dual, these two. —tp iS i: 1009.
—HdxeaOai [ludxofxai]: pres, infinitive, deponent (active in meaning but
med.-pass. in form; you will learn about deponent verbs in the next lesson)
to fight.
9. PaoiX.fji: 996. — [;ôAdw]: aor. pass, participle, nom. sing. masc.
(modifies o, this man, he), having been enraged. — Atitovg = A rjioog, 584-
585. —Paoi^t|i = A y a n efiv o v i. —AijtoCg Ka\ A 1 6 5 1)165 = A:;i6k^cov, who
was the immediate (although not the original) cause o f the quarrel, since the
plague he inflicted on the Greeks brought about the strife between Achilles
and Agamemnon.
10 . voCoov is emphatic by position, as is KaKT|V, which is further explained and
expanded by the following clause. —oêkovto = coI ekovto, 837 [oXeko}],
imperf pass, indie., 3rd plur., were being destroyed, kept perishing. —Xftou the
soldiers in the Greek army.
81 Translate:
1. We were singing the accursed wrath of Achilles, from the time when first
the son of Atreus, king o f men, and divine Achilles quarreled and separated.
2. Which (one) of the gods brought together the Achaeans and the people of
Priam in strife to fight? 3. Did the son of Leto and of Zeus, the free-shooter,
bring these two together in strife to fight? 4. The son of Atreus, king of the
Achaeans, and the divine Achilles enraged the lord, the free-shooter, and he
kindled many evil plagues up through the camp of the Achaeans and kept
destroying the brave people evilly.
77
Lesson 16
PRESENT AND FUTURE, MIDDLE AND PASSIVE,

DEPONENT VERBS
Ilia d , 1 1 -1 6
Preliminaries
You know that the subject o f an active verb performs an action (or experiences a
state of being). If a verb is active and transitive (as opposed to intransitive) the
subject performs an action on someone or something (direct object) or brings
something about (also a direct object):
Intransitive: Achilles (subject) runs (performs action).

Transitive: Achilles (subject) chases (performs action on) Hector (direct object).
Transitive: H om er (subject) sings (brings about) a song (direct object).
Greek, Hke English, also has the passive voice. The subject of a passive verb
receives (is the object of) an action performed by an agent (a living being) or an
instrument (a thing), or is brought about by that agent or instrument, ahhough the
agent or instrument may merely be implied. If, for example, I say, “The passive
voice is used too much,” I may imply something like “by politicians” or “by students.”
Writing instructors discourage the use of the passive voice because without an
agent or instrument a sentence in the passive is vague. Politicians and bureaucrats
love the passive voice because it allows them to avoid taking responsibility for
unpopular actions by making statements like “The bill was passed” instead of “I
voted for this bill.” In Homeric Greek, if the agent (or instrument) is expressed, it is
in the dative.
Hector was stabbed (agent/instrument implied).
Hector was stabbed by Achilles (agent).
Hector was stabbed with a spear (instrument).
The song (subject) was sung by H om er (agent).
Greek, unlike English, has a middle voice, which has a variety of meanings.
Some common uses of the middle voice are:
• To indicate that the subject applies an action to himself: yvfivdôîai, I exer

cise (literally, I exercise myself).
. To imply “for oneself”: X vo/iai, I ransom my daughter (literally, I fr e e my
daughter fo r my own benefit). As this example suggests, some verbs in the
middle voice have a specialized meaning.
• To denote that a subject changes her physical or mental situation: n eid ofia i,
I obey (vs. the active JieiOm, I persuade).
78
L E S S O N 16
•To express having something done for oneself: (peperai, as in Jh e queen has
her boat carried to the water. (After all, a queen not would not carry it herself)
In most tenses Homeric Greek uses identical forms for both the middle and
passive, so this form is called the medio-passive (or middle-passive). Context will
usually help you to determine the meaning. Be on the alert for clues. If there is an
agent or instrument (e.g., by him or with a spear), you have encountered the passive
voice. If there is a direct object, the verb is middle. In the aorist, these forms tend to
be middle rather than passive, but this rule is not hard and fast.
82 Deponents
Although active in meaning, a deponent verb has only (or almost only) medio-
passive forms. You will sometimes hear it said that deponents have “lost” or “set
aside” (the meaning of the Latin verb deponere) their active forms. It is more likely,
however, that what we call deponents were originally thought to refer to actions that
affected or interested the subject in some way—in other words, they were middle
in voice. Consider the deponent verb (iovX ofiai, wish. If you wish for something or
wish to do something, you usually have an interest in that thing (or action).
Deponents are listed in vocabularies and lexica under the first-person singular
of the present indicative: [iovkofxai, /xaxo/xai, Epxofiai, U o o o fia i.
83 Learn the principles of the formation of the present and future indicative
medio-passive (887-897).
Now it is time to put to work what you already know about conjugating verbs.
We will begin with the present indicative of the medio-passive.
Step 1: Find the stem

The present stem is found by removing the personal ending from the first prin
cipal part (regardless of the voice of that principal part).
Step 2: Add the thematic (connecting) vowel.
For the present tense use the same thematic vowels that you used for the pres
ent indicative active: -o before endings that begin with -fi or -v and -e before
other endings.
Step 3: Add the personal ending.
Before going any further, close your eyes and repeat four times this chant:
f i a i —a i —Tai—/Aeda—o 9 e — v T ai.Jh ese are the six medio-passive personal
endings for the present indicative.
84a Learn the present indicative medio-passive ofXvo) (910) / ransom (middle) or
I am being fr e ed (passive).
Singular Full form Stem Vowel -hEnding

1 li) o u a i Xv -o-/iai
2 Aveai h) -E-ai
3 ^ verat Xv -e-Tai
79
HOMERIC GREEK
Plural
1 kvoêO a Xv -o-fieda
2 XvEoQe All -e-oQe
3 XvovTai kv -o-vzai
84b Learn the future indicative medio-passive of ^.vco (910).

Given what you know about forming the future indicative active, you should
also be able to conjugate the future medio-passive indicative. Follow the same three
steps as for the present, but begin with the future stem, found in the second prin
ciple part. As with the future indicative active, the future middle uses the same
thematic vowels and endings as the present. Write out the full conjugation of X va
in the future indicative medio-passive. Consult 910 to check your work.
85a Adjectives of the third, first, and third declensions (3-1-3 adjectives)
So far, you have encountered adjectives o f the first and second declensions
(2-1-2) like K akog. ij, 6v. There are also adjectives whose masculine and neuter
forms are third-declension, while the feminine adjective is first-declension. A good
shorthand for them is 3-1-3 adjectives. An important example of this type is Tidg,
jid a a , Jidv, all, every, (the) whole. With the following reminders you should be able
to supply the missing forms in the chart below. Consult 732 to check your work.
• If there is a circumflex over the penult of Jia o a , the final a must be short
(545).
• The short a tells you which first-declension paradigm you should use to decline
the feminine adjective.
• Given what you know about the neuter, you should be able to figure out its
nominative and accusative plural forms.
Tidg, Jid o a , Jidv all, every, (the) whole (stem: navr-)
N o t e : In the genitive and dative singular the accents are on the case ending.

nom. jidg jid o a ndv
gen. jiavTog jiavTog
dat. iiavTi jtavTi
accus. ndvTa ndv
Plural
nom. ndvTEg
gen. ndvrcov jidvxcov
dat. jid v z ea o i, n d o i (jidi'z + oi) JldvTEOOl,
accus. jid v rag
80
L E S S O N 16
85b (For reference) Another third-declension noun with two stems

dvydTiip. 9i'yaT£pog or d v y a ip o i;. rj daughter (stems: OvyaTsp- or dvyaxp-).
Case Singular Plural

nom. Oi'yuTtjp Ovyarepeg O vyaipeg
gen. di'y arip og d vyazpog OvyaTspcou OvyaTpav
dat. dv y arep i dvyazpi O vyaripEooi OvyaTpdoi
accus. dvyuTEpa Q vyaipa dvyuTepag Qvyazpag
voc. d v y a ie p dvyarepeg QvyuTpEg
N o te ; In the short (Oi'yarp-) forms, the accents in the genitive and dative (singu
lar and plural) are on the case ending.
86a Memorize the first seven lines of the Iliad.
86b A metrical irregularity: correption

The Greek hexameter is very strong, so strong that it sometimes distorts the
length of a syllable. Similarly, when we sing in English, we often force the pronun
ciation of lyrics to conform to a tune. Poets needed a lot of short syllables for dactyls,
so they apparently bullied some syllables into shortening their length. If a word
ended with a long vowel (or diphthong) and the next word began with a vowel,
poets would sometimes treat the first vowel (or diphthong) as short for metrical
purposes. This phenomenon is called correption. In line 23 of the Iliad, for exam
ple, you would expect -9ai in dexQai d jio iv a to be long, but it isn’t. Instead, because
dai is followed by another vowel, it is short, and the phrase is scanned — ----- .
(For other metrical irregularities see 571-572.)
87 VOCABULARY
AjioXXmv CAn6X>.(ov 571), A7t6XA,oovo<;, 6 Apollo
dpTfTiip, dpr)Tfipo(;. 6 priest (a pray-er)
8i)o (8rw) two
Epxofiai, EXev)ooâl, r|X0ov (i^XvOov) (stems: epx-, e>i0-, tXerO-, eXrO-) come, go
6o6g, n, 6v swift, speedy
BvyaTiip, 0\)YaTepo<; (BDycxTpoq), f) daughter
Koa^tiT(op, Koo|iiiTopo(;. 6 commander, marshaller
Xâaoâl, — >EX(X)i<idntiv ( eXitohtiv) (stem: Xit -) beg, entreat
HdXiora most, especially, by all means
vt)v 5, vtiog (VE05), n ship (5 7 2 )
jiag, n a a a , nav all, every, (the) whole
OT£^â, oxeniiaxoq. to fillet, wreath
XEip, xeipos- ^ hand, arm; dat. plu.
81
HOMERIC GREEK
Related words; dual, dyad; cosmetics, cosmic, cosmogony; naval, nautical;

pantheism, pandemonium, panoply, panorama; chiropractor, chirurgeon
(= surgeon).
88 Translate:
1. AjwXXwv EK-qfioXog xoX ovzai (584-585, 943) jiaoiX fji ATpeidjj Kai jie/ujiei
u ov oov Kaicfjv a v a a x p a r o v A xaim v, oleK ov T ai de k a o l, ovvEKa diog A rpeidrjg
ijrifia a e X pvoi]v aprjTfjpa. 2. X pvotjg y a p apt]Trjp eKtj^dXov ep x era i eni 9oag
vfjag A xaim v, <pipei (3’ a n e p e io i d jw iv a dvyarpog, fjv [dg, t], 6 773] Axpd6r]g
£%£/ iv a x p a x a . 3. 6 6' aptjrijp exei a iififia T a EKrjjidkov AnoXXmvog ev x^poiv
a v a xpvoEcp oKijJiTpco Kai XwoExai ndvxag A x aio v g , fid k io x a d’ A zpEida dvcu
KOOfi^TopE Adaii'. 4. AjtoAXcoi' xoXcooErai (ia a ik fji Kai opoEi v ov o ov icaicfjv a v d
O Tpaiov. 5. EkEvoovTai ejii dodg vfjag A xaim v Kai o ia o v a i [(pspm] djispEioi
d jio iv a (iaaiX fji. 6. X ioaov zai ndvxag A x aiov g . 7. ATpEi6f]g rjTiâoEV aprjrtjpa
Kai ovK djilXvoE O vyazpa.
Iliad, 11-16
ovvEKa Tov X pv otjv tjrifiaoEv aprjrtjpa 11
AzpEidrjg. 6 y a p tjIOe dodg tn i vfjag A xaim v
kvoo^ E vog TE O vyazpa <pEpav z djiepEioi' d n o iv a ,
ozEfinaz' Exmv ev x^poiv ektj^ oXov AjioXXmvog
XpvoEm d v d OK^Jizpm, Kai eXIooezo ndvzag A x aio v g , 15
A zpE ida d s ^dX ioza dvm, Koa^^zopE Xamv-
90 Notes
1 1 . tov: that well-known, since the circle of legends was familiar to the ancient
audience of the poem. —T|T^âoev [dzTnd^m], dpi]Ttjpa: 1182. Observe that
this verse ends in two spondees, making it a spondaic verse. This, together with
the position of the final word, throws special emphasis on it, making it practi
cally equivalent to “although he was a priest,” which would of course make
him an object of more than ordinary reverence.
12. AtpeiSiig is made distinctly emphatic by position. It is he who must bear the
burden of responsibility in slighting the priest. —erei vfjag, i.e., to the Greek
camp on the shore, where they had drawn up their ships, out of the water.
13. >^Co6 fiEVog [Xvm]-. fut. mid. participle, nom. sing. masc. (modifying 6, which
refers to the priest) being about (desiring) to ransom,(in order) to ransom,
1109:5. —(p^pMV [(pspm]-. pres. act. participle, nom. sing. masc. (also modifies
6), bearing, bringing.
14. EX®'’ {^XoA'- pres. act. participle, nom. sing. masc. (modifies o), having, holding.
—XEpoiv p£KT]P6Xov: explained in 526. —£Ki)P6Xov "An6>.X,(ovo5: 571, 1173.
82
L E S S O N 16
15. xpCoECp: synizesis (586). —xpCoEW dva: 1173. —Kai eXiooeto: 1173. The
latter part of this verse implies that the scene takes place at a meeting of the
assembly of the Greeks. —e>.iooeTO [Xiooo/uai]: imperf deponent ind., 3rd
sing. Observe the force of the imperfect: the old priest kept entreating
Agamemnon and his brother Menelaus, but Agamemnon, in spite of these
repeated opportunities to avail himself of the mercy of the god, chose deliber
ately to slight his holy ambassador.
16. A tpeiSa = Menelaus and Agamemnon.
The priest is a native of Chrysa, a small town near Troy, which has been plun
dered by the invading Greeks. His daughter has been taken prisoner of war, and he
now comes to the Greek camp, where the ships have been drawn up on the shore,
to ransom her.
91 Translate:
1. Chryses, the priest of Apollo, is dishonored by (dat.) the son of Atreus.
2. The Achaeans will go from (their) swift ships to Troy and ransom the beloved
daughter of the priest. 3. We will bring many ransoms and will hold in (our)
hands the fillets of Apollo. 4. We do not have a golden scepter, but we entreat
Priam and all the people of Troy. 5. The two sons of Atreus, marshallers of the
people(s), are entreating Priam, but he will slight them. 6. The son of Atreus,
king of men, slighted the priest and did not release (his) daughter.
83
Lesson 17
IMPERFECT AND AORIST INDICATIVE,

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE
Ilia d , 1 7 -2 1
92a Learn the principles of the formation of the imperfect indicative medio-
passive.
(Remember: the imperfect is always in the indicative mood.) To the augmented
present stem, add the correct thematic vowel { e or o) and endings. As it turns out,
the medio-passive of the imperfect differs from the active only in its endings. Like
its active counterpart, the imperfect medio-passive does not use exactly the same
personal endings as the present and future. So it is time to learn a new chant:
—o —r o —fis d a —o d e— vro.
92b Learn the imperfect indicative medio-passive of Xva (910) I was ransoming
(middle) or I was being fr eed (passive).
Singular Full form Stem Vowel -1- Ending

1 iX v o fx rjv eXv -o-^riv
2 eXvEO eXv -E-O
3 eXvETO eXv -E-TO
Plural
1 E X v o fiE d a eXv -o-fiEda
2 e Xv e o 6e eXv -e -o Qe
3 e Xv o v x o eX v -O-VTO
93a Learn the principles of formation of the first and second aorist indicative
medio-passive.
For the first aorist medio-passive indicative of Xvco, to the augmented stem add
the thematic vowel a (throughout the paradigm) and the same personal endings
that you used for the imperfect medio-passive. For the second aorist, to the aug
mented aorist stem add a thematic vowel (either e or o, depending on the first letter
of the ending) and the same personal endings that you used for the imperfect (and
first aorist) medio-passive. Once again, only the stem differentiates the forms of the
imperfect and second aorist medio-passive.
93b Conjugate the (first) aorist indicative medio-passive of Xvco (ransom; the aorist
is often middle rather than passive).
Review the chant of the past-tense endings for the medio-passive (92a). Con
sult 910 to check your work.
84
L E S S O N 17
93c Conjugate the (second) aorist indicative deponent (medio-passive in form)

verb 'iKVEOfiai (arrived, reached on e’s destination).
Compare the (second) aorist medio-passive indicative o f Xeijuo (leave, forsake,
abandon) to verify your work, 934
94 VOCABULARY
aôjuai (stem: ay-) reverence (defective; see 106)
Se^ ojiai, eSe^dntiv (eSeYJiil'') accept, receive
S^S(a^t (5i)S(6o(o, eSoiKa (stems: 5w-, 8o-) give, grant
5 (o ^ a , Sconaxoq, to house, home
eyw (iy ^ v ), JiEO (fiEV 584-585, 760) I, me
EicnepBo), eKJiôo), E^Kitpoa (cÔTpaGov) (stems: :iEp0-, npa6-) sacic (utterly)
EV, EV well, happily, successfully
EVKVTinlg, e-uKVTîilSoq well-greaved (greaves are shin guards)
iKVEOjiai, ^ôâl, iKoî]v arrive, reach (one’s destination)
(correlative with 5e) on the one hand, truly, hev . . . 8e on the one hand . . . on
the other, p a r t l y . . . partly, the one . . . the other, etc.
oiKaSE 788:4 hom eward, to home, home
n ;ai5, TtaiSot;, 6, ti child, son, daughter
n;6Xi5 (jiToXig), TcoXioq (7c6A.r|0(;), fi city, state
(TV, aeo (oe\j 584-585, 760) you (sing.)
Related words: hagiography; dose, antidote; dome; egotistic; euphony, eulogy,

euphemism; pedagogue; acropolis, necropolis, metropolis, cosmopolitan, politics.
95 Translate:
1. 9 eoi e'xovoiv O lv ^ m a d cofiaia. edcoKav (5' ArpEidrjg Kai dXXoioiv
evKvrjîdeaoiv A y a io io iv SKjiipaai (to sack utterly) noXiv Ilpidfiov. tote d
IKOVTO £v oiKade, ovvEKa Jialda <piX.r)v aprjirjpog EXvoav. 2. d :iE lvaav
EVKvtjfildEg A x a io i OvyuTpa <piXt]v dprjTfjpog, idsâvTO dyAad d:ioivu,
ovvEKa EKrjftoXov A:i6XA(oi’a zl/og vidv dôvro. 3. dÊTai EKrjjioXov.
4. ATpEidtjg oi'ic eS eûto tu dyXa d jio iv a . 5. X pvorjg aprjTrjp e6o)Kev d.'ioiva
jioXXd (iaaiX iji ATpEidrj. 6. JidviEQ 9eoi Kai n d a a i Qsai e 'x i ov [ex(o] OXvfxma
dcoâTa. 7. A x a io i EVicvijfiTSEg SKJiEpoovoi F lp id fio io JioXtv, i ôvtcu d' ev
oiKadE. 8. :ia ig <piXi] dptjTtjpog eXvouto, iketo d ’ ii) oiK ad s.
Iliad, 17-21
“ A rpE idai TE Kai dXXoi EVKV^fiidEg A x a io i, 17
vfiiv jUEi> dsoi doiEv OXvfima dcofiaT exovTEg
85
HOMERIC GREEK
EKnEpoai npiufiolo JioXiv, ev d' oiKad' iKEodai-

jiaTda 6 ’ e^ oi X voal te (piXrjv, zd t d n o iv a dsxEodai 20
dôfiEvoi Aidg v id v EKtjôXov AjidXXcova."
97 Notes
17. A tp eiS a i, etc.: vocatives. —Kal a^>.oi EVKvfmlSEg: 1173. Greaves were a kind
of leggings, serving as shin guards, for protection against weapons and
to prevent chafing from the long shield of the wearer.
18. r jiiv [ov]: dat. plur., to you. —Geofc one syllable by synizesis, 586. correla
tive with 6e, line 20. —Soiev aor. act. optative, 3rd plur. (its subject
is QeoI), m ay they grant. —exovteg [£%«]: pres. act. participle, nom. plur. masc.
(modifies dsoi), having, possessing, i.e., inhabiting. The gods were said to live
in palaces on the top of Olympus, a high mountain in northern Thessaly.
19. EKTiepaai [EKJiEpdco]-. aor. act. in f, to sack utterly. —iK eo0ai [iK veoiiai]: aor.
deponent in f, to arrive. —JioXiv: 1167:1. —8 ’poiKa5’: 580-581, 1174.
20. From its position in the verse Jia iS a is emphatic. “It is my child for whom I
make my entreaties.” Observe how the addition of (plXr/v heightens the pathos
of the old mans plea. —ûoai, StxEoSai: aor. act. in f and pres, deponent in f,
used as imperatives, 1107:11,/ree and accept. —td : these [things]: the priest evi
dently points to the gifts he has brought.
21. dônEvoi [alôfiai]: pres, deponent participle nom. plur. masc. (modifying
you, the implied subject of X voai and d £ % E o d a i ) , reverencing. 21 is a spondaic
verse, 1182. —viov pcKt]-, 526.
98 Translate:
1. The gods who have (EXoi^rEg) Olympian homes will grant [permission] to
the sons of Atreus and to the other well-greaved Achaeans to sack utterly
{EKTiEpoai) the city of Priam. 2. When they sacked the city of Priam, they returned
happily home. 3. They accepted the shining ransom and freed the dear daughter
of the priest Chryses. 4. We reverenced the free-shooter Apollo, son of Leto and
Zeus, and escaped (101) death. 5. Will the son of Atreus accept the shining ransom?
6. The child of the priest was freed, when he gave many shining ransoms, which
the two sons of Atreus accepted.
86
Lesson 18
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT A C TIVE
Preliminaries
Verbs introduced in this lesson appear in the vocabulary list with a fourth principal
part, the first-person singular of the perfect indicative active. (For the fourth prin
cipal part of other verbs consult the Greek-English Vocabulary at the back of the
book.) The perfect tense signifies a completed action (the Latin word perfectum
means completely done) that results in a state or condition in the present. So the
perfect tense in Greek is sometimes translated by a present tense and is also treated as
a primary, not a secondary (past), tense of the indicative. English uses the helping
verbs has and have with a participle to construct this tense:
They have died (perfect) means They are [now] dead.

The flow ers have now bloom ed (perfect) means The flow ers are now in bloom.
Some Greek verbs have a special meaning in the perfect tense:
Apollo has w alked around Troy means Apollo protects Troy.
99a Learn the principles of the formation of the perfect indicative active (867-885).
You must memorize the perfect active principal part, but sometimes you can
predict it if you know the usual patterns. At the very least, having a sense of the
possible patterns will help you get back to the first principal part of a verb in order
to find the verb in a lexicon.
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

(present) (future) (aorist) (perfect active)
/ll'O) Aram e lv a a XeXvKa
(pEvyco (pevôjuai ecpvyov JiE(pEvya
Notice that the initial consonant sound of the stem (Au-) is doubled and linked by
means of an e to the rest of the verb: ^ i-lv ica . This doubling is called reduplica
tion (867-876). The consonants tp, and Q reduplicate without aspiration (the
/j-sound of the restored pronunciation), so that you find neipevya (not (pEiQEvycj).
Some fourth principal parts end in -Ka (like X ikvKa), although many end in a (like
.lEipt v y a). By the way, in contrast to the first three principal parts, which can be
medio-passive, the fourth principal part is always active in form. There is a separate
fifth principal part for the perfect passive.
87
HOMERIC GREEK
A note about reduplication: Some verbs (such as those beginning with a vowel,
a diphthong, the letter p, or a double consonant) do not reduplicate, but have what
looks like an augment (syllabic or temporal); the lack of secondary (past tense)
endings will offer a clue that the tense is perfect, not pluperfect.
99b Learn the perfect indicative active of Ivco (904), q>evya, and [iawco (922).
With the exception of the third-person plural ending {-a o i), the endings o f the
perfective indicative active are the same as those of the first aorist.
Singular
1 AelDva Jie(pEvya
2 X elvK aq netpevyag
3 AeAfve Ji£<pevye
Plural
1 êXvKa/iEV neq>Evyafiev
2 ^.eXvKare Ji£<pEvyare
3 XeXvKaoi ne<pEvyaoi
In the plural the perfect of the verb ^ a lv a (as well as the compound afi<pi[iaiva)
often uses the s te m ^ s lia - (instead o f 922).
Singular Plural
1 (i£[ir]Ka jisfi^KanEv or fisfiafiEV
2 jSE^TjKag fisfiri KaxE or fisfiaxE
3 fiefirjKE jiEpri K aoi or fiE^ daoi
99c Optional: The pluperfect indicative active

The pluperfect indicative is a secondary (past) tense expressing an action com
pleted in the past whose result is also in the past: iÊkvKt] {I h a d freed, as opposed
to I have freed ). Just as the perfect may sometimes be translated as a present, the
pluperfect may sometimes be translated as a simple past: If Achilles h ad died by the
time Troy fell, then he was dead when Troy fell.
If you look at the table in “Notes to Instructors Using the Fourth Edition” in
the front of this book, you will see that the pluperfect indicative active does not
appear often enough to earn a place as one of the twenty-four most common verb
forms. Nonetheless, you should at least be able to recognize the pluperfect, which is
easy enough if you know the perfect and you know how to augment a verb stem.
Consuh 904 and 922.
100 Learn the declension of y sp a v , yspovTog, 6 old man (693).

Third-declension nouns and adjectives whose stems are - o v t - are very com
mon, so write out the declension of y^pcov several times.
88
L E S S O N 18
101 VOCABULARY
dyopt], fji;, Ti assembly, meeting place, gathering, harangue
a i^ , aiyog, 6. f] goat
’'Apyog, Apyeoi;. x6 Argos, a country and city in Greece
yepov, YEpovioq, 6 old man
yflpag, ynpao<;. to old age
5eKaTog, r). ov tenth
fm n e p o ;, r|, ov our, ours
0vf|OK(o, GavEOfiai, cGavov, teBviiKa (stems: 0vii-, 0av) die, perish
iepev5, iepfio(;. 6 priest, holy man
K0 1X05, r|. ov hollow
|ui]piov, o\). TO thigh-piece, thigh-bone
:iovs, nodoc,. 6 foot
tavpog, o\). 6 bull
(peryta, (pEvôâI, e<pvyov, JiEcptrya (steins: (pevy-, <pDy-) flee, fly, escape, run
(os', away, along)
cppijv, 9 pevo(;, r\ diaphragm, midriff, mind, heart, soul, spirit, disposition
UKV9, coKEia. CDKi) (726-727) swift, speedy
Related words: gray 597-598, gerontology, gerontocracy; decalogue, decade;

hierarchy, hieroglyphics; antipodes, tripod; fugitive; phrenology, frenzy.
102 Translate:
1 . ATpEidTjg ovK a.ioÊkvK:£v ieprjog jia fd a (piXrjv. 2. jiefiaÊv [fiaivo)]
ayopfjg. 3. kutektje yipcov AjwIXcovi dvaKxt iiolX a nrjpia z a v p a v icai a iy a y .
4. yfjpag eoxev [Eya] lEpfja. 5. yfjpag oi>x ikexo fia o d i j i 'ATpEidr], sdavE 8 e
KUKmg evi oiKco ev ApyEi, ovvEKa top o)Xeke KXvtai^vrjOTpr]. 6. jw d a g coicvg
[1014] Ayi^Êvg te6 vi] kev ev ~IMm. 7. 6 yEpcov JiE<pEvy£v sig xrjv ayoprjv.
103 Translate:
1. We have freed the beloved daughter of the priest, because we reverence
the free-shooter Apollo. 2. All the Achaeans have gone from the assembly to the
hollow ships. 3. The priest burned many thigh-pieces of bulls and of goats to the
gods who had Olympian homes. 4. That old man has died in our home. 5. The
swift-footed Achilles has escaped. 6. The old man has not persuaded the mind of
the son of Atreus. 7. Apollo has loved the beautiful goddess of the sea. 8. Shall we
flee with swift feet into the city of Priam?
89
Lesson 19
THE INFIN ITIVE

Ilia d , 2 2 -2 7
Preliminaries
The infinitive is a verbal noun. It is called an infinitive because it is not limited to a

particular person or number (finis means limit in Latin). Conjugated verbs, on the
other hand, are called fin ite verbs. English adds the word to to a verb in order to
create an infinitive: to give, to free. Like any noun, an infinitive can be modified by a
predicate adjective: To give is good. Since an infinitive is a verbal noun, it can be
modified by an adverb as well: To give often is good. It can have also an object: To
give gifts often is good.
Greek infinitives have tense (present, future, aorist, perfect), which expresses
aspect and sometimes implies relative time, about which you will learn more in
later lessons.
Greek infinitives also have voice (active, middle, passive): to fr e e (active); to
ransom (middle); to be fr e e d (passive).
More often than not the translation of an infinitive will depend on the context.
You have already met infinitives used in very different ways in the Iliad. (For other
uses see 1107.)
• In line 20 infinitives are used (by themselves) to give an order (X voai free;
dexEoOai accept).
• In line 8 the infinitive fid x e a d a i (to fight) expresses purpose; Which o f the
gods brought them together in strife to fig h fi
• In line 23 you will find two middle infinitives (a id e lo d a i to pay reverence,
and dexOai to accept) used with the verb ETievcprjfiEO): They shouted assen t. . .
to pay reveren ce. . . and to a cce p t. . .
Expressing the aspect (completed, continuing) of an infinitive in an English

translation can be especially difficult; consequently, you may find that a “correct”
translation of an aorist infinitive sounds just like a “correct” translation of a present
infinitive.
104 Learn the forms and basic meanings of the infinitives (908, 914, 1107).
There are more variations than usual in forms of the Homeric Greek infinitive.
Memorize the most common forms of the present, future, and aorist. If you suspect
a word is an infinitive, but aren’t sure, consult the Grammar (especially 908,914) or
the Greek-English Vocabulary at the back of the book, where there are entries (in
90
L E S S O N 19
regular as opposed to bold type) for some infinitives that are difficult to identify.
You should be able to recognize the others in context, especially since you can
anticipate infinitives with certain verbs. Can you think of one?
Active Infinitives: Since only finite (conjugated) verbs in the indicative are
augmented, for both aorist infinitives use the unaugmented stem. Add the ending
-eiu to the stem to create present, future, and second aorist active infinitives. Add
the ending -at to the stem to create a first aorist active infinitive. What will help
you to remember that only the first aorist uses an ending that begins with -a? What
do you know about the conjugations o f the present, future, and second aorist that
will help you remember that their infinitives share the ending that begins with -e?
Present Future Second Aorist First Aorist

^veiv Xvoeiv a y a y etu X voai
to fr e e (be freeing) to be about to fr e e to lead, to have led to free, to have freed
Note that the accent on the aorist infinitive ending -eiv is also a clue that this is a
second aorist infinitive.
Medic-Passive Infinitives: Medio-passive infinitives use the ending -oOat;
only their thematic vowels differ. As usual, only the first aorist uses a .
Present Future Second Aorist First Aorist

XveoQat AvoeoOai IKEOdai A v o ao d ai
to ransom; to be about to to arrive; to ransom;
to be freed ransom; to have arrived to have
to be about to ransom ed
be fr eed
105 A note on spelling

In line 23 of the Iliad you will encounter the present medio-passive infinitive
dEXEoOai spelled dexQ ai.V ae meter of the line seems to have required two syllables
instead of three. (However, see 798.)
106 VOCABULARY
N o t e : Verbs marked defective {def.) are found only in forms made from the princi
pal part listed.
XyafiEfivwv, Ayaiienvovoq, 6 Agamemnon, king o f Mycenae, brother o f Menelaus
(Helens husband), and com m ander-in-chief o f the allied Greek military expedi
tion against Troy
ai5E oâl,ai5£o(a)oâI,f| 5E o(o)d ^ I]v (stem: aiSeo-) reverence
dcpiTmi, d(pT|0(a, d(pf|Ka (dtp^Ka) (stems: t|-, e-), send away, dismiss, hurl, drive
off. (dcpiEi, imperf act., 3rd sing.)
6ti&6v(o [d e f), loiter, tarry, delay
91
HOMERIC GREEK
Eim , cia o fia i (stems: ei-, i-) come, go; pres, often with fut. meaning, will come,
will go (965)
EV0a then, there(upon), here
EJiercpimeo), EJiEvq>tmr|O(0, EJiEixpTijiiiaa shout assent, approve by shouting
En;iTE>kX(i), — s EJiCTEiXa, — , EniTExaXjiai (stems: teX-, taX-) command,
accomplish
11 (t|e) or, than, whether
1^ . . . either . . . or, whether . . . or
Kixdvw, KixT|ooâi, EKixHwdniiv ( ekixov , ek Ixhv) (stems: k ix *, k ixe -) come
upon, overtake, arrive (at)
KpaTEpog, 11. 6v strong, harsh, powerful, stern, mighty
|iir| not, lest, that not
jivBog, CD. 6 word, command, story
vi3v now, at this time, as matters now are, as it is. Commonly implies a contrast.
jiapd, n a p , Jiap ai adv., and prep, with gen., dat. and acc., from the side of, by the
side of, to the side of, beside, along; adv., beside, near by; with gen., from (the
side of, beside); with dat., by (the side of), near, beside; with acc., to the side
of, along (by), beside, stretched along
TE^^w, — >ETEi>.a, — »TExaXnai (stems: teX-, taX-) command, enjoin (upon),
accomplish, rise
roTEpog, r|, ov behind, later, at another time, further(more)
Related words: euphemism; mythology, mythical; paragraph, parallel;

hysteron proteron.
107 Translate:
1. OTE y e p a v i X i a a e r o n a v x a q ’A % a i o v c , i c a i A r p e i d d f i d X i a r a , d X X o i f i t v
T id u T sg A y a i o i e L i o v a i d e i o Q a i (585) t o v ie p fja K a i d ix d a i (105) d y X d ’ d jio iv a ,
d k X o v x i] v 8 a v £ v A T p e t d r j A y a ^ E f i v o v i Q v fia , dXX' d < p iei y E p o v r a K a K & q , ex eX X e
6 e K p u z E p b v f i v d o v . 2 . A y a f i £ f i v ( o v o v K i x ^ o E x a i y i p o v x a j i a p d K o iX r ja i v r j v o i v ,
o v y a p 8 r]Q vvE i e v o T p a r a A x a i w v . 3. d r jd v v E iy , a i d E i o d a i , lE v a i (965), ’f f i s v a i
(965), E7i£V (pr]fiE E iv, E JiE V ip r ju fjo a i, E iiE ix p r j^ ^ o E iv , t e X X e iv , x E l X E o d a i , K i% a v E iv ,
IC lX tjoE oO ai. K lX ^ O a o Q a i, / x d x E o d a i , E K JlE p d siV , EKHEpOElV, E K i iE p o a u
E K J i E p o a o d a i , i K E o d a i , d s x E o d a i , d E ^ a o G a i , d l^ E o d a i.
92
L E S S O N 19
Iliad, 22-27
£V0' dXXoi !.i£\' 7idvTeg En£v<pi]fxt]0a v A x a io i
aidsToOai 6' k p fju ku i d y ^ a d dixO ai d jioiva-
dAA oi'K ATpeidt] A ya^ i/uvovi ijv d av e OvfuS,
dXXd icaKag d<pi£t. KpuTspdv d' em fivQov hsXXev- 25
O f, y ip o v . KoiAtjoiv eym Jia p d vrjvoi Kixtjco
fj I’f ’i’ drjdvvovx' {] voTEpov uvzig io v ia ,
109 Notes
22. n^v: corrrelative with d/,A’ in line 24; thus dXXoi ndvTEg A x a io i is contrasted
with ATpEidt]g.
23. aiStioOai = aidEEodai, 584-585. —0 ’ = xe, 575, 582. —Kai dyXad 8 ^ 0 a i
a jio iv a : 1173. — 8 e x 6 a > = 8£XE<T0ai (105).
24. dXX’ ovK brings the action of Agamemnon into sharp contrast with that of all
the other Achaeans {dkXoi fXEV ndviEq). — X t p e i S t ) : 996, 1176. — i ] v 8 a v e =
EdvdavE = EOfavdavE, 835-836, 603-604. — 1009.
25. ejii . . . etE>.>kEv: tmesis, 1048-1049. —KaKwg: harshly (also perhaps with evil,
i.e., disastrous consequences). —d<pki: im perf act. 3rd sing, of d<ph]fii.
26. HT|. . . Kix>j(o [Kixai’o)]: 2nd aor. act. subjunctive, 1st sing., may I not com e
upon, let me not com e upon, —at: [ov]-, acc. sing.,;ÔM (thee), —i y a is always
emphatic, 761.
27. 8ii0vvovt’ = dt]dvvovra [drjQvvco] and io v ta [fzja/. 965] are pres. act. parti
ciples, acc. sing. masc. (modifying oe), loitering, tarrying. —a v tig io v ta : com
ing back, returning. —voxepov: adv., 781. —i] ijorepov = rjp voxEpov.
110 Translate:
1. All the other Achaeans will not shout assent, to reverence the priest and to
accept the shining ransom. 2. We shouted assent, to free the beloved daughter of
the priest. 3. To free the daughter of that old man was not pleasing to Agamemnon
in his soul. 4. The king sent away that old man harshly, and enjoined a stern
command upon (him). 5. Agamemnon did not find the old man beside the hollow
ships of the Achaeans, for he did not loiter. 6. to reverence, to fight, to loiter, to
send, to have sent (aorist), to shout assent, to come upon, to command, to sack
utterly, to accept, to be sacked utterly.
93
Lesson 20
A CTIVE PARTICIPLES
Il ia d , 2 8 -3 2
Preliminaries
Participles are verbal adjectives; for example, in the sentence The man eating candy
is fat, eating is an active participle. In the sentence The man eaten by the Cyclops
was tough, the word eaten is a passive participle.
Participles are verbal in that they
• are formed from verbal stems and pertain to actions or states of being
• have both tense and voice (for example, present active, present passive)
• can have direct and indirect objects
• can be modified by adverbs.
They are adjectival in that they
• modify nouns and pronouns

• have gender, number, and case
• agree with the nouns and pronouns they modify in gender, number, and case.
The tense of a Greek participle expresses aspect and (in some contexts) time
relative to the main verb of its clause.
The present participle expresses continuing (or repeated) action and often
expresses time simultaneous with the main verb. It can sometimes be trans
lated literally by the English present participle {-ing words): eating (active), being
eaten (passive).
The future participle expresses continuing action and time subsequent to the
main verb. English does not have this form, so to translate a future participle it is
necessary to use a phrase like about to free. When a future participle is used together
with a verb of motion, it often expresses intent or purpose; intending to do som e
thing or in order to do something. The sentence literally translated He cam e being-
about-to-free his daughter means He cam e in order to free his daughter
The aorist participle expresses a completed action, and can refer to an action
prior to that of the main verb. We use various expressions to translate the aorist
participle, depending on context and emphasis. The aorist participle of the verb
laugh, for example, could be translated:
Having laughed, the Cyclops began to drink m ore wine, (prior time)
With a laugh, the Cyclops began to drink m ore wine, (completed aspect)
94
L E S S O N 20
There is also a perfect participle, which express a completed action with a

present result: a person having-been-educated is a person who is educated (right
now). The-men-having-died are (now) the dead. This form, however, does not
appear frequently in Homer.
111a Learn the principles of the formation of the present active participle (736-738).
To the present stem add the endings -cov (masculine), - o v a a (feminine), - o v
(neuter). As you can see from the chart below, this participle is a 3-1-3 adjective.
The accent on the nominative of the present active participle falls on the last
syllable of the tense stem: on Xv- in I v a v and on in azifidlâv. Thereafter,
the accent is persistent: it will try to stay on that same vowel or diphthong.

nom. Ivcov X vovoa ^ vov
gen. kvovTog ^vovorig XvovTog
• Which forms resemble those of yspcov'^.

• Why are only the nominative and genitive singular provided in the chart
above?
» How will the neuter differ from the masculine?
• What paradigm {fiovX^, ded, or O dX aaoa) will the feminine form follow?
How do you know?
mb Decline fully the masculine, feminine, and neuter present active participles
of Ivco.
Compare your results with 740.
111c Learn the future active participle of Xvco.

Given what you know about the similarities and differences between the present
and the future indicative active, you should be able to decline the future participle.
Begin with the future stem.
The pattern for accentuation is the same as for the present: the accent on the
nominative falls on the last syllable of the tense stem; however, since the v in the
stem Xva- is long, there will be a circumflex in Xvaov.
11 Id Learn the principles of the formation of the first aorist active participle.
Begin with the unaugmented aorist stem. (Remember that only finite verbs in
the indicative are augmented.) The endings for first aorist participles are -ag, -a o a ,
-dy (once again think of a for the first aorist). They decline like nag, Jid o a , Jiav,
except for their accents; also notice the short a in av. For the first aorist participle
(like the present and future) the accent on the nominative falls on the last syllable
of the tense stem, avo-.
From the chart below, how can you tell whether the v of the aorist stem Xvo- is
long, even without the help of the macrons?
95
HOMERIC GREEK

nom. kvaag X voaoa X voav
gen. kv oav T og Xvodorjq kvaavxoc,
H ie Decline fully the masculine, feminine, and neuter aorist active participles o fXvco.
Compare your results with 741.
l l l f Learn the second aorist active participle of dyco.

The second aorist participle uses the same endings as the present active parti
ciple {-coy, - o v a a , -oi^). The one difference is that the accent o f a second aorist
participle tries to stay over the thematic vowel of the endings, a / o (or ov ). What do
you already know about the second aorist that might help you remember that it
uses -coi', -o v o a , -ov^

nom. dyayav dyayovoa dyayov
gen. dyaydvTog d y a y ov o rjg dyayovT og
112 More sophisticated uses of the participle

So far you have worked with literal translations of participles. But participles
are often translated best with clauses expressing their logical relationship to the
sentence. For example:
a) The people sacrificing to Apollo were killed could also be translated as The
people who were sacrificing to Apollo were killed (an attributive participle).
b) Having been freed, the people sacrificed to Apollo could mean Because they
were fr e e d . . . (causal) or After they were freed (temporal), the people sacri
ficed to Apollo.
c) Participles can take the place of an although-clause (concessive): Although
they were freed, they did not sacrifice to Apollo.
d) They can also express the i/-clause (the protasis) of a condition: I f the people
are freed, they will sacrifice to Apollo.
Participles are one of the Greeks’ favorite verbal forms. It’s a good idea to make
friends with them. Moreover, determining how participles are used is part of the
challenge—and pleasure—of both interpreting and translating Greek. You should
always consider the possible meanings of participles in sentences and in the Iliad.
Context will help.
Keep in mind, however, that when translating a participle as a clause with a
subject and finite verb (representing the participle), the tense o f the finite verb
should express the correct time relative to the main verb. In a sentence such as I
prayed to Apollo ruling over Cilia, the praying and Apollo’s ruling take place at the
same time. A more sophisticated translation, then, would be I prayed to Apollo,
who ruled over Cilia. Although ruling is a present participle, turned into a clause, it
expresses an action simultaneous with prayed.
96
L E S S O N 20
113 VOCABULARY
d v T id o ), d v T id a o ), T |V T ia o a ( d v t io o ) = d v t id c o , 945-948, 603) approach, go
(come) to meet; prepare; partake, share {with gen.)
EÊiî, Eneiooâi (steins: t i - , i-) come upon, come on, approach
E:lo^xoâl, E:ioixT|oonai*, — >EJi(px®fa (steins: o ix-, oixE-, oix©-) go to, go
against, attack, ply (in the sense of work)
Ep£0i^(a, £pE0iao), r|p^6ioa vex
ioT o;, OX), 6 loom, mast
KE, dv (1085-1091) perhaps, perchance (often left untranslated)
XeX05, Xex£oq, to bed, couch
jiiv acc. only, enclitic, him, her, it
VEOjiai (stem: veo-) usually in fut. sense, come, go, return
vv encl. now, indeed, surely, then
jipiv sooner, until, before, formerly
oacoTEpog, ri, ov com parative o f oaog, i], 6v 747-748, safer
TtfXoOi far (from, away), at a distance, with gen., 992
Expaujntioa (Expaionov) (stems: xpaiojiE-, XP“ ‘ ®-)»
with dative, 996, help, assist, benefit, avail
(bg so, how, so that, in order that, since, like, as, when
Related words: soteriology, 584-585; telegraph, telephone, telepathy, telescope.
114 Translate:
1. OKrjmpov Kui OTSfifia deoTo o v xpaio/u tjoovoi rm yepovTi, davh'Tai y a p
n a p a vrjvoiv A x a ia v ij i^vi’ 6r]6vvav fj v ox sp ov avxig irnv. 2. o v Xvoei Jia ld a
(piXtjv, Jipiv d e yfjpag ejuioi /uiv ev oikco A yafiEfxvovog iv 'Apyei jrjXddi
ndxprjq yepovTog. 3. evda ^ avT idei A y a fie^ v ov o q Kai EJioixEtai ioTov.
4. ipeO iaag A y a fieu v o v a yepcov o v v eerai oacozEpoi;. 5. AipEidtjg t e dVa$
dvdpdiv Kai d w g AxiXXevq spioavTE diEOTqiYjv [8iiozr]fii, 949]. 6. yEpav rjlQE
6 oag L'li vf]aq A x a ia v (pEpcov anEpEioi d n o iv a , ex(ov 6 e OTE,ufiara EKtjfidXov
AjwXkcovog £ vx£poiv. 7. B e o i ExovTsg OXv/uma d a ^ a i a dcoaovaii' [didcoî]
A x a io io iv EKJiEpoai r ip id fio io JioXiv, e v oiK ad' i k e o Ou i .
Iliad, 28-32
vv TOI ov xpaioi.n] OKfjmpov kui OTEfifia Oe o w .
Ttjv (3’ Eyo) o v Xvom- npiv /xiv icai yfjpag ejie io iv
tJjUETEpcp EVt OlKCp EV ApyEi, TtjXodi jidTprjg, 30

iordi' EJTOixojUEyrjy Kai Efxdv Xsxog dvTiocooav.
dXX' Wt, n ' EpEdiÊ, oacoTEpog a g ke vEtjai.”
97
HOMERIC GREEK
116 Notes
28. |itT|...ov: 1125-1127.—TO! [ o v ] : 760, 996. —xpaia|iiti [xpaiofxico]: 2nd aor. act.
subjunctive, 3rd sing., may help, avail. Although singular, this verb has a plural
subject. It agrees, however, with the nearest of the two subjects, oK fjm pov (973:2).
29. TT|v is emphatic, and is said with haughty brevity, and perhaps with a contemp
tuous gesture or jerk o f his thumb over his shoulder toward the tent where the
daughter of Chryses was. — £y<o is placed in emphatic contrast to the other
Greeks. “Even though the others do agree with you, I have something to say
here.” —Kai: even.
30. TinETEpM: emphatic; she shall never be returned to you znd. yours.
31. eJioixon^ t)v [ejw'ixofxai]-. pres. act. (deponent) participle, acc. sing. fem.
(modifies fxiv, her), plying, working at (the loom). —dvTiowoav: an “assimi
lated” form, 945-948, = dvTidovoav.
32.101 [eifî] pres. act. imperative, 2nd sing.,ô, begone. — h t| . . .EpeOiê
[fpf0/C«]: pres. act. imperative, 2nd sing., do not vex, anger. —v ^ a i
[veoâi], pres. act. (deponent) subjunctive, 2nd sing.,jyou may return.
— oawtepog (emphatic by position): more safe(ly), i.e., than if you should
remain. —v etiai (oiK ad e): 1115-1117.
117 Translate:
1. The scepter and the fillets of the god will not avail the old man (dat.) if he
tarries (particip.) beside the hollow ships of the great-souled Achaeans, or if he
returns (particip.) later, for Agamemnon will attack him and send (his) soul to
Hades. 2. He will not free his darling daughter, but old age will come upon her in
the home of Agamemnon and Clytemnestra, far from (her) native land. 3. vexing,
having vexed, quarreling, having quarreled, bearing, having borne, having
(holding), sacking, having sacked, helping, having helped, sharing, having
shared, going (965), tarrying.
98
Lesson 21
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE

(MEDIO-PASSIVE) PARTICIPLES
Il ia d , 3 3 -3 7
118a Learn the principles of the formation of the present, future, and aorist
medio-passive participles (735).
Medio-passive participles consist of three components:
1) the (unaugmented) tense stem

2) a thematic vowel
3) the endings -êvoq, -fievov (2-1-2)
Throughout the present, future, and second aorist medio-passive participles,

the thematic vowel is o, since fx is the first letter of the endings: kvdfievoi;, Xvofievr],
Xvo/iEvov.
As you might expect, the thematic vowel for the first aorist participle is a .
118b Write out the nominative singular (all three genders) of the future medio-
passive participle of kvco.
Accent these participles as you would their active counterparts. Be prepared to
offer a possible translation. Compare your answers with 915.
118c Write out the nominative forms of the (first) aorist medio-passive partici
ple of Xvo) and the (second) aorist participle of iK veofiai {arrive, come, reach [a
destination]).
Compare your answers with 915 and 934 (the medio-passive second aorist
participle of kei.-m).
119a The genitive absolute (1111)

So far you have encountered participles modifying nouns and pronouns that
play some grammatical part in the rest of the sentence:
eich 'oi’ apT]Tf]pog u p a o ^ ev o v . (/ heard the priest praying.)
Here the word dpTjTfjpog (priest) is in the genitive because kêvcd is a verb whose
object (if a person) is in the genitive. You know that the participle praying modifies
aprjTfjpoq (priest) because it agrees with priest in gender (masculine), number (sin
gular), and case (genitive).
Greek has a construction called the genitive absolute, which consists of a noun
(or pronoun) in the genitive modified by a participle, both o f which, grammatically
speaking, hang off to the side of a sentence.
99
HOMERIC GREEK
A.'ioAAcouog fia im v z o g jia p a 9Iva 6aXdoor]g, apr]Tr]p Edeioev.

Literally: [With] Apollo walking beside the shore o f the sea, the priest was afraid.
Here the subject of the sentence is ap rjifip (priest) and the main verb is ed eio ev
(feared, i.e., was afraid). The genitive absolute AjidXXcoyog [ia'ivovxog (a noun in
the genitive plus a participle agreeing with it) does not modify the subject or verb—
or for that matter, any other word in this sentence. Yet, as you will see, it does offer
more information about the cause of the fear or the circumstances under which the
priest was afraid.
119b Translating a genitive absolute

When you encounter what you suspect is a genitive absolute—that is, when
you see a noun (or pronoun) in the genitive modified by a participle, and you can
not determine the connection of the noun and participle with the rest of the sen
tence (such as in 121 sentence 4), the following procedure should help.
1) Begin with this simple formula, paying close attention to whether the parti
ciple is active, middle, or passive.
With [translate the noun or pronoun in the genitive] + [translate the parti
ciple literally] . . .
E.g., 'ATwkkavog fta iv o v ro g Jia p a d im daXdaorjg, dprjirip ed eio ev .
With Apollo walking . . .
2) Next fill in the rest of the clause (e.g., modifiers of the noun or pronoun in
the genitive absolute, direct objects or adverbs with the participle, etc.).
AjioXkcovog ftaivovT og n a p d diva QaXdootjg . . .
With Apollo walking beside the shore o f the sea . . .
3) If you stop here, you will have a literal translation of the genitive absolute.
But in order to understand the meaning of the genitive absolute, taking into
account the context, you should consider the possible logical connections
between the genitive absolute and the rest of the sentence. You should then
be able to move to the next step.
4) Using a conjunction to express the logical connection, create a dependent
clause in which the noun (or pronoun) in the genitive becomes subject of
the clause and the participle becomes a conjugated verb. In other words, if
it seems as if the participle offers a reason, begin the clause with because; if
you think it indicates what was going on during (or before) the main clause
try the conjunction while (or after)
AjioXXcovog jiaiv ov x og Jia p d diva OaXdoorjg, dprjxfjp ed eio ev .
Because Apollo was walking beside the shore o f the sea, the priest was afraid
While Apollo was walking beside the shore o f the sea, the priest was afraid.
Notice that in this example the participle is in the present tense, so its action
takes place at the sam e time as the main verb. Since the main verb is in the past
(aorist indicative), the action of the present participle also takes place in the past
and is translated was walking.
100
L E S S O N 21
A genitive absolute can even represent an if-clause, as in the example below:

A:idAô)vog p a i i ’o i’Tog :ia p a Qiva OaXdoorjg, dprjrfjp d etaei.
I f Apollo walks beside the sea, the priest will be afraid.
In short, genitive absolutes can do all the things that other participial clauses
can do. (See “More sophisticated uses of the participle,” section 112.)
120 VOCABULARY
dKEWv, aKEo\)oa, cxKeov silent, quiet, being silent
d^(plPa^v(o, d^(plPf|O(0 (d^(pIPlôoâl), d^(pepT)oa (d|ii(pePiiv), d^(plPEpt1Ka
(stems: Pav-, Pa-) surround, go round, protect
dJidvEV0E(v) apart, away
dpdojuai, iipT]od^1]v, pray, curse, invoke (what an dptiTir|p does)
dpyvpoToôg, ov of a silver bow, equipped with a silver bow, silver-bowed one.
Apollo
YEpaiog, n. 6v old; masc. as substantive, old man
S e i S o), S E io o ^ a i, EfiEioa, 5E(8oiKa (S E iS ia ) (steins: 5pi-, 8 fe >-, 5poi-) fear, be
afraid
EÊ ita then, thereupon
fjVKOôg, ov fair-haired, beautiful-tressed, well-tressed, having long, flowing hair
(e{)-. 571, 1168)
015, Slvoq. f| beach, shore, strand
Kiw (def.) come, go, depart
7io>.V(pX.oioPo9, ov loud-roaring, heavy-thundering
TiKTM, TEô), ETEKOV, TCTOKtt* (= Ti-TEK(o; stems: TEK-, TOK-) bear, produce, give
birth to
(pT]^^, (pr|0(a, Eq>tioa* (stems: (pi]-, q>a-), im p erf act. E<ptiv, mid. E(pd^T]V speak,
say, tell
(w5, wg) thus, so, in this way; wg . . . M5 as . . . so
Related words: toxicology, toxin, intoxicate; comet; polygamy, polygyny,

polyandry, polytheism; prophet, prophecy.
121 Translate:
1. A yaf.itpivwv cog Etpazo, 6 6 e yepcov de'ioag EJie'idexo fivdco Kpazepm (996),
a.KE(ov efh] jia p d diva :ioXv(pXowftow SakdooYjg, enEixa de k ic o v dndvevdev
d y ep aid g rjpdEio noXXd (780-781) dvuKTi AnoXXcovi. tov (1028:3) rjvKOfiog
ArjTU) hEKEv. 1. AndkXcov d i’a^ eicXve lEpfjog a p a o fie v o v (984), rdv y d p
EcpiXrjoE. 3. EsrtjfidXog OEog dn<piPaivEi X pvarjv (p'lXrjv. 4. /urjviog AxiXrjog
jipo'ia\t/doi]g (1111) :wXXag y/vx^? ijpcocovAidi TEVâat]g d' av ro ijg EXcopia
icvvEOOii' oicovoTai te S a n a ftovXf] Aidg ezeX eieto. 5. XEVxdfiEvog, TEVÔfiEvog,
101
HOMERIC GREEK
T E V ^ d fiE v o i, naxofievrjq. 6. yepcov i^XQe d o a g em v fja g A x a i a v X voonevoq

Q vyaxpa. 7. n d v T e g A x a i o i ^ v o o v o i J i a l d a ( p iX rjv y e p o v x o g , a i ^ o f i e v o i v i o v
A i d g £ K T ] ji 6 k o v 'A n o X X a i v a . 8. y f j p a g e j i e i o i t t ] v e v i o ik c o A yafie^ v ov og
K X v T a i/ x v ijo T p t jg z e E J io ix o fiE v r jv i o i o v .
Iliad, 3 3-37
a g £ (p a T , e 6 e i o e v d’ 6 y s p c o v i c a i i j i e l d s T O f iv d c p .
(if] (5’ UKECDv j i a p d d i v a J i o ^ .V ( p ^ o io ( { o io O a k d o a r j g .
jio X X d d ’ E JiE ir ’ andvevdE K ia v ^ p d ff 6 y E p a id g 35

A T i o X X a v i d v a K x i , t o v i j v K O f i o g x e k e A ) j x (6-
“ k X v 6 i f iE V , d p y v p o x o ^ ’ , o g X p v o r j v d ] i»v<pô(oPoio is an onom atopoetic word, i.e., the sound of the
word suggests and imitates the meaning.
35. JioX>.d: 780-781. — T|pa0 ’ = i^pdxo = r]pdExo [ap d o n a i], 575, 582, 584-585.
36. XEK£ = hEKE. — pdvttKTi: protecting lord, protector. — t 6 v : relative pronoun;
originally it may have been thought of as demonstrative, 1028:3, note.
37. kXvBi [*Kk£vco]-. aor. act. imperative, 2nd sing., hearl —jiev [ey®]: gen. sing.,
984. —dpYVp6TO^’(c) is vocative. By calling upon Apollo in his capacity as
archer god, the priest already has in mind the kind of answer he desires to his
prayer: he wants the god to slay the Greeks with his arrows. Naturally the bow
of Apollo must be of precious metal, as befits the dignity of a god.
—dîpiPePiiKai;: the perfect is to be translated as a present, dost protect
(i.e., you [sing.] who protect).
124 Translate;
1. Thus spoke Agamemnon, and the old man obeyed the stern command,
being fearful {use the a o r participle). 2. They went in silence along the strand of
the loud-roaring sea, and going apart they prayed much to (their) lord Apollo,
whom fair-haired Leto bore to Zeus. 3. Apollo of the silver bow heard the Greeks
praying, for they were dear to (his) soul. 4. Many aged men came from Troy to the
camp of the Achaeans to ransom (their) beloved sons. 5. The Achaeans will free
the sons of the priest and accept the shining ransom, because they reverence
{participle) the gods who have Olympian homes. 6. Old age will come upon the
daughters o f Priam (while they are) plying the loom in the homes of the sons of
the Achaeans.
102
Lesson 22
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT,
AND FUTURE PERFECT MEDIO-PASSIVE
Il ia d , 3 8 -4 2
Preliminaries
The tenses presented in this lesson do not appear often in Homer; nonetheless, you
should know something about their forms and meanings. The fifth principal part
provides the stem for all passive forms of the perfect. Because the perfect indicative
in Greek expresses a completed action with a result in the present, it is a primary
tense and for the most part uses the same primary endings you used for present
indicative of the medio-passive. The second-person singular, however, uses -a a i
(instead of -a/), and in the third-person plural Homeric Greek prefers -ara/ to
-vTai. Even these exceptions are easy to recognize.
125 (For recognition) The perfect passive (910, 925)

Perfect passive forms are athematic: the personal endings connect directly to
the stem without a thematic vowel.
Singular Plural
1 êXvfiai lEXv/xeda
2 keX vaai XiXvode
3 kekvrai X skv a rai(o rX eX v v ra i)
Since the perfect medio-passive stem of kvco ends in a vowel, the stems and endings
are easy to distinguish. Many verb stems, however, end in a consonant, which is
likely to interact with consonants that begin personal or participial endings. If you
are not aware of the kinds of changes that can take place, the results can disguise
the endings. The fifth principal part provides an important clue: since the personal
ending of the first-person singular is -^ ai, it shows you what happens when the
stem meets an ending that begins with So if you know what happens when -fiai
is added to the stem (which you can infer from the perfect passive), you know what
happens when -nevoq, -jxevri, -^ evov are added to form the perfect medio-passive
participle. Unlike the medio-passive forms of the present, future, and aorist, the
accents of these perfect participles try to remain over the e of the suffix ( -/iEvog,
-ÊV T], -fiE V O y ).
The perfect medio-passive indicative o f zpEJUo (turn), whose stem is XEXpan-,

shows the changes you will encounter with stems that end in n-. ji-, or (p-. Consult
925 for other combinations.
103
HOM ERIC GREEK
Singular Plural
1 T E T p a iifia i 71 +11 = f if i TETpd/^fiEOa Ji + jx = n fi
2 r h p a y /a t Ji + a = y/ Thpa<p0£ Ji + o 9 = <pd
3 Thpam ai n +x=m r e r p d fa z a i Ji + v = <pa
126a (For reference) The pluperfect medio-passive indicative (910, 925)

The pluperfect indicative is a secondary (past) tense, so you are likely to
encounter an augment. It, too, is athematic, and its endings are, for the most part,
those used for the imperfect and aorist indicative medio-passive. In the second-
person singular, however, you will find -a o (instead of -o) and you are likely to find
-UTO instead o f - vto in the third-person plural.
126b (For reference) The future perfect medio-passive (910, 925)

This tense is a rare form indeed, although it does appear in the Iliad (line 139,
leexoXcooeiai). The word XeXvooâi means I will have been freed (or I will have
ransom ed). The stem looks like a perfect passive stem with the letter o and a
thematic vowel tacked on. See 910 for the complete conjugations of the perfect,
pluperfect, and future perfect passive indicative of Xvco and 925 for the perfect pas
sive forms of consonant-stem verbs.
127 VOCABULARY
PeXog, (3eA.eo(;, to dart, arrow, shaft, missile (c f pdA.X,co)
SoLKpv, 5aKp\)0s, 10 tear
ee>.5(op (indecl.) to desire, wish
ei (ai) if, whether
EpE(po)*, Epe$/(i)*, iipe»|/a cover (over), build
^dOeog, t), ov very sacred, holy, sacrosanct
T |8 e and, also
icpi mightily, with might: an old instrumental case form o f pts might (c f Lat.vis)
Kpaiaivo), — ÊKpT|iiva (stem: Kpav-) accomplish, perform, fulfill
vti65, o\j, 6 temple, shrine
68e, ii5e, toSe this, that
jriEipa, Ttiov fat, rich
JiOTE {encl.) ever, at any (some) time, once
LjiivGEvg, X|aiv6f|o(;, 6 Smintheus, an epithet o f Apollo
T ^ e 8o5, o$, fi Tenedos, an island near Troy
TIVW, Tlow, ETloa, TCTlojiai* (stems: t e i -, t i -, tivp-) requite, atone for,
pay the penalty
XapiEi5, xcxpieooa, xapiev (727) pleasing, grateful, graceful, agreeable
Related words:, charismatic, eucharist.
104
L E S S O N 22
128 Translate:
1. A twaacov dv a^ an(pij3Eli}]KE X pvorjv K'lXXav re âder]v. 2. Zîvdevg
av d aoE i i<pi T ev ed ov <pi^tjg. 3. rjpey/av Eîvdfji vrjbv xupiEvxa, icareicrjav 6e
jiio v a fit]pfa ravpcov a iy a v re. 4. ei jiote Kpaia'ivEi dva^ EEXdcop 'lEpfji, A a v a o i
T ioovoi duK pva yEpoi'Tog P eXeooiv Oeov .

Review the preceding lesson, which contains the first part of Chryses’ prayer
and contains the verb for which K ' l k k a v t e l^ a d E t jv is the direct object.
Iliad, 38-42
K i X Z a i ’ TE ^ a O E T jv , T e v e 6 o i 6 t e i(pi d v d o o E i g ,
Z f i i v d E V , E l n o r E TO i y a p 'iE V T im v r j d v E p E if/ a ,
i] E l d ) ] J io T E T o i K a T d J i i o v a f i r j p C E K t ja 40
T a v p c o v ) ] d ' a i y o j v , t 6 8 e f i o i K p i^ r ]v o v E E X d a p -
T io E ia v A a v a o i E ^ d d a K p v a o o T o i jiE k E o o iv ."
130 Notes
38. TeveSoio: 985. —dvdooei^: (you) who are protecting lord. —te pi<pi
pavdooeig.
39. Erti . . . EpE\|/a: 1049. —t o i [ov]: dat. sing.,/or thee—£h iv 0ev : vocative. This
epithet may originate from Apollo’s connection with the town o f Sminthe in
the Troad, or be derived from a word for a mouse, with which the god appears
on ancient coins.
40. TOI [ox>]: dat. sing.,/or thee —KOTd . . . EKtfa: 1049.
41. |iioi [fyw]: — —
dat. sing.,/or me. toSe: this (774) Kpif|tivov [ K p a ia 'i v m ] - . aor.
act. imperative, 2 nd sing., accomplish!
42. TiOEiav [tiv(o]: aor. act. optative, 3rd plur., may they atone f o r —Pe>i.eooiv:
1005. —A av aoi is yet another name for the Greeks in Homer, with no par
ticular distinction in meaning from A x a io i or A pyEioi.
131 Translate:
1. All the gods who have Olympian homes protect very sacred Chrysa and
Cilia. 2. Apollo Smintheus will rule Tenedos by his might. 3. We buih (roofed
over) many pleasing temples to the Olympian gods and burned for them the fat
thigh-pieces of bulls and goats. 4. If we accomplish the will o f the god, he will
attack ( E J i o l x o f i a i ) the wicked Danaans with his darts. 5. Agamemnon will atone
for the tears of the old man.
105
Lesson 23
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

I l ia d , 4 3 -4 7
Preliminaries
So far you have encountered verbs in the indicative, the factual mood. Other
moods in Greek are the subjunctive, the optative, and the imperative (for com
mands). The subjunctive and optative have a variety of uses, so their meanings—
and translations—are dependent on context. In general, both express something
that is conceived of mentally, but is not entirely certain (e.g., a desire, or a fear) or is
in some way removed. In Homeric Greek a verb sometimes appears in the subjunc
tive or optative when an English speaker, at least, would expect the future indicative.
To the Greeks it might have seemed illogical to present an action that had not yet
taken place as a fact.
The subjunctive (subjunct.) appears both in main clauses (independent uses)
and in subordinate clauses (dependent uses). Its meaning will differ accordingly.
To translate it into English, it is sometimes (although not always) necessary to use a
helping verb like may or should or a phrase such as let us. The particles dv and kev,
which you learned in Lesson 20, are used in some subjunctive constructions (see
1085-1091). In fact, these modal particles, which often appear near the beginning
of a sentence or clause, will alert you to the likely presence of a subjunctive (or
optative) in that clause. The negative will be fii^ or o v , again depending on the
particular construction.
Common independent uses of the subjunctive (1098-1101):
• To express a desire or request in the first person; Let us ask a seer. (With or
without dv or k ev ; for the negative use fit].)
• To deliberate (usually in the first person); W hat should I d o ? (For the nega
tive use .)
• With to express a negative command or prohibition in the second person
of the aorist (but sometimes in the first and third): Old man, may I not com e
upon you.
• To say something about the future (In Homeric Greek the meanings of sub
junctives overlap with those of future indicatives): I will take Briseis. (With
or without d v or for the negative use ov.)
Common dependent uses of the subjunctive (1115-1152):
. In purpose clauses (1115-1117): But go . . . so that you may go hom e more

safely. (Positive clauses are introduced by coq or }Va, negative by .)
106
L E S S O N 23
• In fear clauses (1125-1127): He fears that the king mav kill him . Fear clauses
are introduced by . If you fear that something may happen, in a sense, you
wish that it does not happen. So if someone fears something may not hap
pen, fit] will be accompanied by another negative, o v : You should fe a r that
your scepter may not help you ( . . . fiij toi ov x p aiofi^ aKrjm pov).
• In certain kinds of conditions (i.e., (/'-clauses; see 1133-1149). (For the nega
tive use fir).)
Homeric grammar is fluid compared to that of later classical Greek. None

theless, by encountering diflPerent kinds of Homeric subjunctives you will develop
a sense of the scope of this mood—and you will also be equipped to understand
how later poets, such as Sophocles, used the subjunctive in tragedy. Context (or a
note) will usually help you to determine the meaning and the best translation of
a subjunctive.
132a Learn the principles of the formation of the present and aorist subjunctive.
The subjunctive appears in the present, aorist, and (seldom in Homeric Greek)
perfect. Tense in the subjunctive and optative moods (as in participles and infini
tives) expresses aspect (continuing, completed) rather than real time {now, today,
yesterday, tomorrow). Outside the indicative, as you know, it can be difficuh to express
aspect in English. So there may be no difference between your translation of a present
and aorist subjunctive, although there may be a subtle difference in meaning.
The subjunctive is a finite verb. To the correct (unaugmented) verbal stem add the
ending, which consists of a thematic vowel plus a personal ending. Believe it or not,
unlike the subjunctive in many other languages, the Greek subjunctive is easy to form.
The endings are the primary endings that we used for the present and future,
but with lengthened thematic vowels. You learned how to lengthen vowels when
you augmented verbs beginning with vowels, so the following changes should be
familiar (799-800). (Notice the iota subscripts in the chart below.)
Person Singularendings Plural endings

1 CO—> CO ojxev —> cofiEv
2 £ ig — > j]g ETE — > rjTE
3 El — > // o v o i — > cooi
132b Write out the present active subjunctive of kvco.

Accents are recessive, as in the indicative. Consult 905 to check your work.
133a The first and second aorist subjunctive

The subjunctive uses the same active endings in all tenses of the active voice.
Only the stem changes.
• Conjugate the aorist subjunctive active ofXvco. Compare your results with 905.
• Now conjugate the (second) aorist subjunctive active of Xeituo, Xsiy/co,
eXi:jiov . Compare your results with 933.
107
HOMERIC GREEK
133b Learn the present and aorist subjunctive of Xvco (910) and êijuo (934) in the
medio-passive.
The medio-passive voice of the subjunctive is formed on the same principle as
the active. To the correct stem add the primary medio-passive endings, but with
lengthened thematic vowels. In other words, as with the active, only the stem of
the aorist subjunctive medio-passive differs from that of the present.
Singular Present First Aorist Second Aorist

1 Xvwfiai Xvacofiai Xijuofxai
2 Xvrjai Xvorjai XiJttjai
3 XvrjTai Xvarjxai XiJitjrai
Plural
1 kvconeQa Xvocofisda X ijm fieda
2 kvrjode XvorjoOe kinrjode
3 kvcovxai Xvarnvxai kiJm vTai
134a Learn the declension of the adjective a e iK ijg (masc., fem.), d e iK s g (neut.)
u n s e e m ly .
For some third-declension adjectives the masculine and feminine share a

single set of forms, so they have only two sets of endings (3-3 adjectives). As is
usual for third-declension adjectives, a lexicon or vocabulary list will n o t provide
the genitive singular form. For 3-3 adjectives, however, you can often determine
the stem from the neuter form. As you can see from the chart below, the stem of
dei/fj/g, a e iK E C , is a e i K e - (the neuter form, but without the final g).
Singular Masculine / Feminine Neuter

nom. a E iK t j g a E iK E g
gen. O LE iK eo q OLElKEOg
dat. d E lK E l OLEIKEI
accus. a E iK E a OLElKEg
voc. CLElKEg OLElKEq
Plural
nom./voc. a E iK iE g OLElKEa
gen. aElKECOV aElKECOV
dat. OLElKEEOOl 1 a E l K ^ a i C L E lK E E a a i / a E lK E O l
accus. a E iK E a q a E iK E a
Note that sometimes the combination of e plus another vowel will contract,
disguising the endings; for example, a e i K E a will sometimes appear as a e i K f j . (For a
table of contractions see 585.) An odd accent may provide a hint that vowels have
contracted.
108
L E S S O N 23
134b Learn the declension of Kpeioocov (masc., fern,). K pew oov (neut.) mightier
(cf. aêivcov, d/ueivov better, braver, 731).
Adjectives whose stems end in -ov are also very common. As you can see from
the example below, the neuter form of this kind of adjective also reveals the stem.
Singular Masculine + Feminine Neuter

nom. K p e io o c o v K pew oov
gen. K p E io o o v o q K p e io o o v o g
dat. K p e io o o v i K p e io o o v i
accus. K p e io o o v a K pew oov
voc. K pew oov K pew oov
Plural
nom./voc. K p e i o o o vE t; K p e io o o v a
gen. K p e io o o v c o v K pew oovw v
dat. K p e io o o v e o o i /K p e w o o o i K p e io o o v e o o i /K p e l o o o o i
accus. K p e io o o v a g K p e io o o v a
Note that sometimes a v between two vowels will drop out, and the vowel
of the stem will contract with the vowel of the case endings: K p e i o o o v a > —
—>
K p e io a o [v \ a K p e i o o c o (585).
135 VOCABULARY
d^(pTfp£(pf|g, cxiicpripecpEc; (731) covered at both ends
EiK(o,* £1 ^(0*, — i EoiKtt (stems: peiK-, poiK-, piK-) be like, resemble, be fitting,
seem (likely), appear (suitable). EOiKug perf act. participle (744), like, similar
to {with dat.)
ei3xojiai, evôâI, ev^dfiiiv, — êv y n ai* pray, talk loud, boast, exult.
Koptivov, ou, TO peak, summit, headland, citadel
Katd adv., and prep, with gen. and acc., down (from), down over, down through;
adv., down, below; with gen., down (over, from, below); with acc., down
(along, through), according to, on
Ktjp, KTipoi;, TO heart, soul
K lv f j o w * , E K i v i i o a , — ^ K E K iv ? in a i* move, stir; m iddle an d pass., move
oneself, bestir oneself, go, come
KXd^d), KXdy^M*, EKâyâ (EK>âYOv), K^K^tiya (steins: Kâyy-, K kay-) roar,
shriek, resound
vv^, vuKToq, f| night, darkness
610x65, ou. 6 arrow, shaft
Toôv, o\), TO bow
109
HOMERIC GREEK
cpap^pi], T|(;, Ti quiver

«I>oipo5, o\), 6 Phoebus, = clear, bright, shining, an epithet o f Apollo
Xraoâi, xtaooâi, angry, be enraged, be irritated
(ojuoi;, o\), 6 shoulder
Related words: cranium (597-598); kinetic, cinema.
136 Translate:
1 . Evx^TO noXXa 6 yEpav. zov 6 ’ eicXvs 0 o ijio q AndXXaiv. 2. 6eoi d' ekXvov
A xai& v EvxofiEvav. 3. (ia iv o v o i Qeoi ndviEq K a ra Kap^vmv 'OXvfiJwv xcoofiEvoi
Kfjp (1014). 4. Exovoi Toâ Kai (papETpag a ^ o ia iv . 5. Kkdiôvoiv oioT oi eji’ w/ucov
A jwXXavog xdoofiEvov. 6. xmoÊvog Oeoc, fjiE [Elfii 965] soiK ag (744) vvkti K ara
Kaprjvcov OvXv^Jwv (OXv^Jwv, 571). 7. oe koiXi]OIv syd) n a p a vr]vaiv icixijco,
fii^ vv Toi ov x p alofii] OKijmpov. 8. yipcov ipEOioag A y a fisfiv o v a firj o a a r s p o g
VETjTai. 9. aacoTEpog ke vEjjai (1101).
Iliad, 43-47
cig £<paT EvxofiEvog, ro v (5' ekXve 0 o ifio g AjwXXcdv,
j3fj 6 e k u t O vXvfiJioio Kaprjvcov xcoofiEvog icfjp,
TO^' (ofioioiv Excov afi(pr]pEfEa te q>apEzpr]v. 45
EicXayâv <5’ dp' o io x o i eji’ mficov xcoo^ evoio ,
a v r o v Kivt]d£VToq- 6 (5’ fjiE vvkti EoiKag.
138 Notes
43. Ecpat’ [(piini]. —Tov: 984. —4>oipo;: an epithet o f Apollo, bright, shining
44. = Efirj [fiaivco], set out. —OvXvfiJioio, 1168, 571. —Kiip: 1014.
45. TOâ: plural used for the singular. —wnoioiv: 1009. —d^(pt1p£cp£a has its
final vowel long here, although it is short by nature. See 1168 for explanation.
46. EKXayâv: like JioXvq>Xoiafioio (line 34), an onomatopoetic word: we are
made to hear the rattle of the arrows of the god in his rage. — is
used substantively, o f him enraged.
47. auxov kTvuG^to^: (refers to [Oe o v ] xcoo/iivoio in line 46) as (thegod) him self
moved. (Some commentators treat this as a gen. abs.) —vdktI: 1003.
—pEpoiKco;. —ai)tov is emphatic by position. —VDKxi eoikm;: like the night,
both in swiftness of coming and in the awful gloom and dread which night
may bring. This expression visualizes his appearance for the eye, as EicXayâv
presents his coming to the ear.
110
L E S S O N 23
139 Translate:
1. Apollo heard the Achaeans as they prayed. 2. The gods went down from the
summits of Olympus. 3. Let us carry bows and quivers on (our) shoulders. 4. The
arrows may clang upon the shoulders of the angry gods. 5. May we not come upon
the children beside the hollow ships. 6. They may return more safely home when
they have sacked utterly (i.e., having sacked) the city of Priam.
I ll
Lesson 24
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD, ACTIVE

Ilia d , 4 8 -5 2
Preliminaries
The imperative (imperat.) is the mood of command: Sing o f the wrath {firjviv
d eid e). In English the imperative implies a subject in the second person (you); con
text indicates whether you is singular or plural. If I say Sing this song, I could be
speaking to one person (you, singular) or to many {you, plural). Sometimes an
accompanying vocative will help: Sing, goddess, o f the wrath o f Achilles, or Achae-
ans, go home!
Greek has singular, plural, and dual imperatives. There are also third-person
imperatives (singular, plural, and dual), which English does not have. Conse
quently, to translate these imperatives it is necessary to use phrases to convey the
same ideas as the verbal endings express in Greek. Although you should focus on
the second-person (singular and plural) forms, here are examples of translations of
third-person and dual imperatives.
Let him (or May he) sing! (third-person singular).

Let them (or M ay they) sing! (third-person plural)
You two, sing! (second-person dual)
Let the two of them sing! (third-person dual)
The Greek imperative also has different tenses, which in this mood express
aspect, not time: Keep running! (present) vs. Run! (aorist). Translations o f present
and aorist imperatives will often sound the same, however, because of the difficulty
of expressing aspect in English. Also, as you can see from the third-person impera
tives above, English translations cannot always distinguish between the Greek
imperative and subjunctive. To a Greek, however, the imperative was likely to have
sounded forceful, while the subjunctive was (perhaps) more polite.
The negative imperative uses (not ov).
140a Learn the second-person (singular and plural) present imperative active (907).
Singular Plural
2 Xve 2 Xvere
(For reference) 3 Xverco 3 ^vovtojv
112
L E S S O N 24
140b Learn the aorist imperative active (first aorist, 907; second aorist, 933).
Singular Plural
X vaov X voaxe
(For reference) Xvodxco XvodvTcov
Who would expect o to appear in the ending of a first aorist imperative? Even hn-
guists struggle to explain it. But make friends with this common form. A student
once suggested “Rock on!” as a way to remember the imperative ending -ov. Those
who sing in choirs are likely to have heard the phrase Kyrie eleison (Lord have
mercy) from the Catholic Mass. The word skEtjaov is the second-person singular
aorist imperative of the verb elEico have mercy.
The second aorist imperative, on the other hand, usually uses the same endings
as the present (933). You will, however, sometimes see the ending -6i (827) for the
second-person singular, especially with root aorists and verbs whose first principal
part ends in -/.ii (which you will learn about in Lesson 32). There are at least two
examples of these forms in the lines of the Iliad you have read so far. Find them!
(That’s an imperative.)
141 Learn the declension of fiey a q . [xeydlr], fie y a (733).

This adjective is irregular in the masculine and neuter singular, but regular in
the plural and throughout the feminine paradigm. Look for patterns. Which forms
do not use the ^syaX- stem? Which forms with the stem fisyaX- are second declen
sion, and which are first?

nom. u ey aq fieydkri pLEya
gen. lxeydloi> HeydXrjq HEydXov
dat. fieydkcp Heydkj] fiEydXcp
accus. f.iEyav êydXrjv fiEya
Plural
nom. LiEydkoi ^ eydX ai HEydXa
gen. ^leydlun' HEyaXacov fisydXcov
dat. fteydX oioii) jj.Eydk]ô(i) fi£ydX oio{i)
accus. u ey d k o v q fiEydXaq ÊydXa
142 VOCABULARY
a iei, a i ^ (= aip ti) always, continually, eternally
dpyo5, n, 6v bright, swift, flashing
dpyvpEog, r|. ov silver(y), of silver
avTOp (dtdp 571) but, moreover, on the other hand
pdXXb), PaXeo), ePaXov, PepXifKa, pepxtm ai (stems: Pa>.-, pXi^-) throw, hurl,
shoot, dash to the ground
113
HOMERIC GREEK
pio5, o t, 6 bow
y iy v o fia i, y c v fio o n a i* , YEyova, (ste in s: yev-, ye\t-,
YO V-) become, be, arise
Eôâl, Eoooâl, t io a (e[E]oodnnv) (oeS- 603), sit down, seat
E(pitmi, £(pr|0(a, £(pfjKa (Ecp^Ka), EcpEiKa*, EcpEijiai*, with dat. (1004), shoot
against, hurl upon, send upon; EcpiEi; particip. pres, act., masc. (gen. iipiEVTog).
EXEJiEVicf|5, £xe7ie'UKe(; sharp, biting
Oa^dE;, Ganeai, Ganea thick, crowded
itlHi, iioM, T|Ka (EiiKa), e I kc *, E ifiai* throw, hurl, shoot, send
iog, ot), 6 arrow
H^Y«5» neYCxA.r|, iieya (733) great, large, tall, mighty
ÊTd, adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., with, in, among, amid, into the
midst of, after, next to; adv., among, after(ward), around, about, in the direc
tion, in pursuit; with gen., with; with dat., among, in the midst of; with acc.,
among, into the midst of, after, in pursuit of, to
v^Kvg, veKuoq, 6 dead body, corpse
ovpEv;, oiipfioq, 6 mule
Related words: hyperbole, parabola, parable, 593-597; genesis, hydrogen,

oxygen, theogony, cosmogony; sedentary; necropolis, necrology, necromancy,
necrosis.
143 Translate:
1. icimv Kar' OvXvfiJioio Kap^vcov AjioAA(oi> eêt’ andvEvde vrjwv A x a ia v
Kai ETjKEv toy fiETO. o z p a z o v . 2. KXayyfj d' a p y v p io v fiw v tjv 6 eiv)]. 3. AjidlXcov
e'xei Piov apyvpE ov. 4. EKrjfidXog EJwixEzai npaxov ov p fjag Kai Kvvaq ap y ov g .
5. oXEKovrai ovpfjEg Kai KVVEg a p y o i. 6. 6 Gsdg EiplEig (142) EXEJiEVKEa (iskEa
a m o ia iv [A x a io ia iv ) EfiaXXEV. 1. JioXXai S e n v p a i vekvcov EKawvTO 9a/uEiai.
8. fitjviv aEids, Qeol, nrjXrjictdEco AxiXtjog. 9. dXX' i6i (827), firj fi EpsOiÊ,
aam xE pogag k e v itjai. 10. kXvOi (827) /xev, apyvpoxoÊ. 11. to S e ^ oi
Kp^rjvov EEXdcop.
Iliad, 4 8-52
EÊT EJiEiT djidvEvds yEav, fiExd d ’ idv et]Kev
dsivfj 6e KXayyrj yEVEX d p y v p io io fiio io .
ovptjag fiEv jip m o v ejjmxexo K ai Kvvag a p y ov g , 50
a v x d p EJiEix’ a v x o io i (UXog ExsJievKEg E(piEig
pdXX’- aiEi d s n v p a i vekvcov K aw vxo dafiE iai.
114
L E S S O N 24
145 Notes
48. VEWV = vrjmv, 572, 992. — u t t d : 1049. — i o v : the first arrow.
49. 6 e iv t | : terrifying. —Kkayyi\: onomatopoetic. We thus hear the clang of the
bow. The rhythm of the verse, especially toward the end, helps in producing
this effect. —Pioio: gen. o f source, 987.
50. 7ipMTOv: 780-781. —ejimxeto [E:lo^xoâl] A p y o v g : swift as a silvery flash, a
highly picturesque way of presenting the effect upon the eye of the swift glanc
ing motion of the feet of dogs as they run.
51. a iiT O io i: 1004, the men (the Greeks), as contrasted with the animals, 1041:6.
—PeXo5 exEnevKeg: for the meter, see 1168; 619. —EcpiEig: participle, pres,
active, masc. nom. sing., hurling.
52. pdA.X,’ is emphatic by position, by the following pause, by the prolonged sound
o f the double XX (making it onomatopoetic), and by meaning (imperfect). The
imperfect represents a series of repeated actions. Observe how vivid this pas
sage is. We can see the funeral pyres, with their heaps of corpses, burning on
every side.
146 Translate:
1. When the gods came down from the summits of Olympus, they seated
themselves apart from the ships and shot arrows among them, and a terrible clang
arose from their silver bows. 2. All the gods have bows and quivers covered at both
ends. 3. The bow of Apollo is (of) silver. 4. First let us attack (subjunct.) the mules
and swift dogs, and then hurling {participle, 142) biting darts upon (the men)
themselves, let us shoot (subjunct.) (them). 5. Let them burn [usepres, imperat.,
907) the funeral pyres. 6. Burn the pyres of dead bodies. 7. Shoot (fidlXm) your
sharp arrows, and sit down. 8. Destroy {oXekco) the army of the Achaeans, for
they insulted Chryses, the beloved priest of the great (733) god, Apollo.
115
Lesson 25
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD, MEDIO-PASSIVE

Ilia d , 5 3 -5 8
147a Learn the second person (singular and plural) of the present medio-passive
imperative of Ivco (913).
As in the active voice, the plural form of the second person looks just like the
plural form of the present indicative. As usual, context will help. Possible transla
tions for the second person (singular and plural) include ransom, keep ransoming
(middle), or be freed (passive); for the third person, let him /her ransom (sing.); let
them ransom (plur.).
Singular Plural
2 XvEo 2 XveaOe
(For reference) 3 Xveodco 3 X veodav
147b Learn the second-person singular and plural of the aorist medio-passive
imperative of Xva> (913).
Possible translations for the second person include ransom (middle), or be freed
(passive)—although the aorist medio-passive is more likely to be middle than pas
sive in meaning; for the third person, let them ransom.
Singular Plural
2 X vaai 2 X voaode
(For reference) 3 XvodoOm 3 Xvadodmv
148 Reread lines 1-52 o f the Iliad, paying attention to each verb form, especially
imperatives.
149 VOCABULARY
dyeipM, — >iiYEipa» — i dyriYepnai (stem: dyep-) collect, assemble, gather
dvioTT]î, dvaoTT|O(0, d vttm ioa (dvEoxtiv), dvtortiKa, dvôrafiai* (stems:
CTTt]-, ora-) stand up, set up, raise, (a)rise
SeKttTog, T], ov tenth
ewfjuap (for) nine days
CTsi when, since, for
"Hpn , riq, Ti Hera, consort o f Zeus and queen o f the gods
Kay.i(a, KttXew, EKdX£o(a)a, KEKXriKa*, K£KXt]|uai (stems: Ka>.e-, call, sum
mon, convoke
116
L E S S O N 25
Ki^So), Kt]5r|0(a, EKT|8iioa*, K£icii5a* (stems: ki]5-, kiiSe-, Ka5-) distress, hurt,
afflict; {middle with gen. 984), grieve for
KtjXov, o\), TO arrow, shaft, dart
êvkwXevo?, ov white-armed
^£xd(pt]^l, ^£Ta(p1ô(l), fietEcpiioa*, with dat. (stems: tpt]-, (pa-) speak among,
address, converse with
o lxo ^ al, oixT|oonai*, — raxcoKa (stems: oix-, oixe-, oix©-) come, go, depart
o^tfYEpi^g, o|ir|Yepe<; collected, assembled, gathered together
6pd(i), o y o ^ a i, eiSov, ojirana (stems: pop-, piS, on-) see, behold, look, observe
OTi (oTTi) that, because, why
oi)v therefore, hence, now, then, in fact
Related words: panorama, optic(al), synopsis, autopsy.
150 Translate:
1. o iy e o d i’O. orpaTOv A xaim v. 2. oixeoOm d v a o ip a z d v . 3. K tjla deov
AiidXXcovog oi'xovTai d v d OTpazov A x a ia v . 4. jw d a g cbicvg (1014) Axi^^svg
EKakeaaTO X a d v A yaim v dyopyjvde. 5. Oea X e v K m k e v o q "Hpr] ejii (ppeoiv edrjKe
Tt]v f i o v k r j v A x d fji. 6. Hprj eK tjdero A avadiv (984) o n zovg QvôKovTag
copdero. 7. rjyepovxo (= yjyeipovTo) o i A xaio'i, eyevovTO <5’ ofirjyEpesg.
8. dveorr] [dvioTrjî, 949] .lodag cbicvg (1014) A x M ev g t o i o i v A x aioioiv
fXET£(pt] re.
Iliad, 53-58
Evvtjfiap ^£v dvd OTpuTov axETO Kf]Xa 6eoTo ,
xfj dEKaTj] d dyoptjvdE KakiooaTO Xadv AxikkEvg-
t S y a p EJii q>pEoi OfjKE Beu, lEVKcokEvog 'Hptj- 55
KjjdETO y d p A avaoii’ o n p a dvôKovxag o p d r o .
o i (5' Lie i o v y fjyEpdEv o^rjyEpEEg te ysvovTO,
toToi (5' dvioTauEvog ixETEiprj n o d a g cbicvg AxiXÊvg-
152 Notes
53. [oi'xoâi]: neut. plur. subject with sing, verb, 973:1.
54. Ti] 5ek(xtii (tjfiEp}]): 1009, on that (never-to-be-forgotten) tenth (day). —tfi is
emphatic, and of importance for the further development of the plot.
—(E)KaXô(o)aTo: causative, 1069. —dyopT|v8E: 788:4, 558.
55. xS: 997. —E:ii (ppEo\ 0fjKE 0Ed: Achilles has an idea, which is represented as
an inspiration put in his mind by a god.
56. Aavawv: 984. —op ato = oipaExo, 584-585, 837; middle of interest, 1067:2-3.
Hera has a special affection for the Greeks: “She kept seeing her own Danaans
dying.” Observe the force o f the imperfects.
117
HOMERIC GREEK
57. iiYEp0ev = ijyepdrjoav [ayeipco]: aor. passive ind., 3rd plur., they were assem
bled. This with the following phrase is a good example of epic fullness of
expression.
58. Totoi: 997, or 1009. —716805: 1014.
153 Translate:
1. For nine days we will shoot many arrows up through the camp of the well-
greaved Achaeans. 2. Who summoned those people to the assembly? 3. The swift
footed Achilles called all these Achaeans to the assembly, because he was grieved
for them in (his) heart. 4. We see many of the Achaeans dying, and we are grieved
for them. 5 . 1 put a noble plan in the mind (i.e., heart) of (for, use dat.) the son of
Peleus. 6. We were assembled and became gathered together beside the swift ships
of the Achaeans. 7 . 1 arise and address these Danaans, who are gathered together.
118
Lesson 26
THE OPTATIVE MOOD; INDIRECT STATEMENT

Ilia d , 5 9 -6 3
Preliminaries
The optative (opt.) is likely to imply contingency and to suggest (or at least allow
the possibility) that whatever is conceived of will not take place. In this respect, it is
more removed than the subjunctive. Like the subjunctive, however, the optative
appears in both independent and dependent clauses, and the meaning, as well as
the translation, of an optative will depend on its context.
Some independent uses (1102-1105):
• To express a wish: May the gods allow you (doTev) to return home. (For the
negative use/<?;.)
• To express a command (sometimes used almost as an equivalent of the
imperative) or exhortation: Please m ake them requite {r'lOEiav) my tears
with your arrows. (For the negative use fiij.)
• To express potential (usually found with the particles d v or kev): They could
[or would] allow you . . . Sometimes the potential optative can be translated
as if it were a future, although it is likely to be a less confident statement
about the future than one expressed by the future indicative or subjunctive.
(For the negative use ov.)
The optative in dependent (or subordinate) clauses:
• In future conditions, the optative may suggest a lack of confidence as to whether

the condition will be satisfied: ^ we (were to) escape death (and we might not),
we would go home. The subjunctive and future indicative are more forceful:
I f we escape death (and we probably will), we will go home.
For other uses of the optative in subordinate (dependent) clauses see 1115-1149; 1153.
154 Learn the principles of the formation of the optative in the active voice.
The most common tenses of the optative in Homeric Greek, and the ones you
should focus on, are the present and aorist. The ingredients of the optative are:
1) the (unaugmented) stem;

2) the optative suffix;
3) the personal ending.
119
HOMERIC GREEK
The suffix for thematic verbs like Xvco consists of a vowel plus i (iota), the distinc
tive sign of the optative. The vowel for the present optative is o (like the first letter
of optative); the complete suffix for the present optative, then, is -o;. The first aorist,
as usual, uses a , and the complete suffix is -a i. The second aorist follows the pat
tern of the present; its suffix is -oi.
155a Learn the present optative active of Xvco (906).

Compare the following active forms of the present tense of Xvm to learn the
present optative active.
Indicative Subjunctive Optative

Singular
1 XVQ) kvoifii
2 kv£iq Xvfjg Xvoiq (or -ada)
3 X vei Xvji Xvoi
Plural
1 Xvofiev XvcoÊv kvoifiEV
2 XVETE kvrjTE kvoiXE
3 X vovoi Xvcool kvOlEV
155b Learn the aorist optative active of kvrn (906).

Compare the following active forms of the first aorist to learn the aorist opta
tive active of X v c o :
Singular
1 eXvou Xvaco X vaaifii
2 ekvoac, Xvoijg X voaig, -Eiag (-o6a)
3 eXvoe XVOT] A voai, -EiE
Plural
1 EkvoafiEv kvooifiEv XvoainEv
2 iXvoazE XvorjrE XvoaiXE
3 EAvoav kvawai XvaaiEv, -Eiav
The optative endings -oi and -ai are always long, even for purposes of accentua
tion: CLTifidiôi (not aT ifiaôi).
The ahernative forms of the second- and third-person singular and the third-
person plural of the first aorist are quite common. One way to remember them is to
think of the first three English vowels: a, e, and i. You first learned the endings with
a (the first English vowel) throughout. The second set of endings begins with a
combination of the next two vowels ei-, to which you add the regular endings of
the aorist indicative:
120
LE SSON 26
Singular Plural
El + a g —> -£iag
tl + £ —> -£l£ £i + a v —> -eia v
155c Learn the aorist optative active of Xstmo (933), leave (behind).
Compare the following active forms of the second aorist of Aeimo to learn the
aorist optative active:

Singular
1 eXiJioi’ XiJW) X'lJioifii
2 EXLisg X'mrjq XiJioig (-0
3 eXiJie XtJiij XiJioi
Plural
1 eXiJiofiEv XimofiEU XinoiÊv
2 eXinETE XmrjiE XlJlOlXE
3 eXijiov X'ljuoai X'lJlOlEV
155d Learn the principles of formation of the present and aorist optative medio-
passive (912).
To the combination of the correct (unaugmented) verb stem and the correct
suffix (either -oi or -ai) add the secondary medio-passive endings: - f i t j v , -o, - t o ,
-Heda, -ode. Homeric Greek tends to use -ax o for the third-person plural instead of
-VTO (used in later Greek). Even this variation should seem familiar. You already
know that in Greek v and a are sometimes interchangeable, as in the accusative

singular of some third-declension nouns: fiaoiX rja vs. /ufjviv.
155e Learn the present and aorist optative medio-passive of Xvco (912) and the
(second) aorist medio-passive of XeiJico (934).
Compare the following tenses of the optative medio-passive of Xvco (912) and
Xeimo (934):
Present First aorist Second aorist

Singular
1 Avoiftrjv Xvaai^rjv XiJioi^r]v
2 AVOW X v oaio XtJioio
3 IV O ITO X voano X lJW lT O
Plural
1 X voifieda Xvoaljueda XiJiolÊda
2 I v o ia d e k v o a io d e XiJioioOe
3 Avo'iaro X v o a la ro X iJioiazo
121
HOMERIC GREEK
Other tenses of the optative (see, e.g., 906) appear rarely and only in indirect ques
tions; they are easy to recognize once you learn the present and aorist.
156a Indirect statement (also called indirect discourse)

The easiest way to explain indirect statement is to begin with some examples in
English. Keep in mind, however, that the verb introducing indirect statement need
not be a verb of speaking. Verbs of thinking and feeling or any verb of perception
(either mental or physical) can introduce indirect statement.
Direct statement Indirect statement

Her mother is angry (today). 1) You say (today) that her m other is
angry (today).
2) You said (yesterday) that her m other
was angry (yesterday).
Her mother will be angry (tomorrow). 1) We say (today) that her m other will
be angry (tomorrow).
2) We said (yesterday) that her m other
would be angry (today).
Her mother was angry (yesterday). 1) We say (today) that her m other was
angry (yesterday).
2) We said (yesterday) that her m other
had been angry (two days ago).
The direct statement can be in any tense, including the perfect.
Direct statement Indirect statement

The soldier has died. 1) Are you sayingthat the soldier has
died?
2) Did you say (yesterday) that the
soldier had died (two days ago)?
156b The two main types of indirect statement in Greek (1154-1158)

Type 1: There are two variations of the first type. Unlike English (but like
Latin), both lack the introductory conjunction that. Instead the signals for indirect
statement of Type 1 are, first, a verb that is likely to produce an indirect statement
(such as a verb of asserting, believing, knowing, or thinking) and, second, either an
infinitive (Type la) or a participle (Type lb).
Type la: An infinitive represents the verb of the original direct statement.
In the first book of the Iliad this is the type you will encounter most often. When
the subject of the introductory verb (e.g., the verb of speaking, etc.) and the subject
of indirect statement differ, then the subject of indirect statement appears in the
accusative: dio} d fifie ajio v o a x rja eiv . The tense of the infinitive expresses relative
time (i.e., time relative to the introductory verb). The present infinitive represents
the same time, the aorist prior time, and the future subsequent time.
122
L E S S O N 26
Introductory verb + accusative + infinitive

dico dînE djioyooTâeiy.
1 think (that) we will return home.
The accusative plural of the first personal pronoun (d p ifie ) indicates that the sub
ject of the original statement was we. As you can infer from the future infinitive,
the verb of the original direct statement was in the future. The original direct state
ment then was d:iov ooT t]oou ev , “We will return home.”
When, however, the subject of the indirect statement is the sam e as the subject
of the introductory verb, then the subject o f the infinitive in indirect statement can
be omitted. Moreover, any word modifying the implied subject will be in the nomi
native: 01(0 aacoTEpoc, d:iovoaTiôEiv.
Introductory verb -i- nominative -t- infinitive

oico oaaTEpog dinovoaxriaEiv.
I think (that) (I) m ore safe(ly) will return home.
The lack of an accusative noun (or pronoun) together with the future infinitive
tells you that the verb of the direct statement was djiovooTtjoo), I will return. In
this statement, the subject (inferred from dim) is modified by the adjective
oadjTEpog, agreeing with it in gender, number, and case: I think (that) I will return
hom e m ore safe(ly).
Type lb: A participle (instead of an infinitive) may represent the verb of the
original direct statement.
This construction is like that with the infinitive, except that an infinitive is
indeclinable, whereas a participle must agree in gender, number, and case with the
subject (implied or expressed) of the indirect statement. As with type la, the sub
ject of the indirect statement will be in the accusative if it differs from that o f the
verb introducing indirect statement; however, because participles themselves have
gender, number, and case, it is not always necessary to express the subject with a
noun or pronoun. If, on the other hand, the subject of the indirect statement is the
same as the introductory verb, the participle will be in the nominative. As with the
infinitive construction, the tense of the participle expresses relative time.
Type 2: This construction resembles its counterpart in English in that it signals
indirect discourse by means of a verb that is likely to produce an indirect statement
(such as a verb of believing or knowing or thinking) and the conjunction that (e.g.,
OTi or m g ) to introduce the indirect statement itself. (Be on the alert, however: the
word or; does not always introduce indirect statement; it can also mean, for exam
ple, why or because.) As in English, the verb will be conjugated. The subject will be
in the nominative or may be implied by the personal ending of the verb.
Introductory verb -i- (or/ -i- nominative subject -i- conjugated verb)
In Homeric Greek the verb of the indirect statement will be in the same tense
(and mood) that it was in the direct statement. Expressed indirectly, cljiovootiôei
(He will return hom e) becomes:
123
HOMERIC GREEK
• Xeyo) oTi a jw v o a r ^ a e i. I say that he will return home.

• e X e y o v o n a j i o v o o T i j o e i . I said that he would return home.
In both statements the future indicative in the indirect statement represents a future
indicative in the original direct statement. Only the introductory verb has changed.
As you can see, the Greek construction is straightforward, but the English transla
tion can be tricky.
In English, if the introductory verb is in a secondary (past) tense, the tense of
the verb in indirect statement changes to express the correct relative time:
You sax m other is angry. —> You said that her m other was angry.
We sax m other will be angry. —>W e said that her mother would be angry.
In the first example, the verb is becomes was because her mother was angry at the
same time that you said that she was angry. In the second statement, the verb will be
changes to the form used for the past, would be, although the temporal relationship
between the introductory verb said and the verb of indirect statement {would be)
remains the same: the state of being angry is still subsequent to (it follows) the
speakers utterance.
156c Uses of different types of indirect discourse (1154)

Generally speaking (the rules are not hard and fast):
• Verbs of speaking can introduce either an infinitive or a or; (or «g) clause.
• Verbs of thinking and believing usually introduce the infinitive construction.
• Verbs of knowing, learning, perceiving, hearing, and showing usually intro
duce the participle construction, but may have a o n (or a ^ ) clause.
157 VOCABULARY
aye, ayETE [ayw] strictly imperat., but used as an interjection, Come!, Go!
dnovoatew*, djiovoorfiaM, aJiEv6oTtjoa return (home), go home, come, go
a\|/ back (again), backward(s) (cf. otTco)
y i postpos. encl., em phasizing the preceding word or clause, at least, indeed, at
any rate
5a^d!;b>, 5a^d(o)(o (603-604), £5dâo(o)a (stem: SajitaS-) subdue, overcome,
crush
Ep^(o (steins: EpEf-, EpEV-) (def.) ask, inquire, seek
Xol^6g, ou, 6 plague, pest(ilence)
^dvxlg, ndvTioq, 6 seer, prophet, soothsayer
01(0 (oiw), o ifjo o jia i* , rolod|iiTiv (steins: o i-, oIe-) think, suppose, imagine,
expect, believe
ofiov together, at the same time
ovap (in decl), to dream
124
L E S S O N 26
6veipo :i6X o5, ou. 6 dream interpreter, dreamer of dreams

Jid>.iv back, backward(s), again, anew
n>^d^(o, rtXdyôjiai, tJiXayâ (stem: K kayy-) beat (back), baffle, (cause to)
wander
(jiT0>.en05), o\), 6 war, battle, fray
( e n c l.) some(one), something, any(one), any(thing); t i a s adv. (780-781) at all
Related words: nostalgia; oneiromancy; palingenesis, palinode, palindrome;

Planctae; polemic(al).
158 Translate:
1. oi'ei AxiÂEvg Toi>g A x a io iig u jio vo o ti^ o eiv o 'l K a d e . 2. A x a io i ovic
E(pvyov ddvuTov, zovg y a p ::i6^£fiog e d d ^ a o e icai Xoifxdg o fio v . 3. Epeicofiev (=
EpEvcofiEv) keTvov fidvxiv, 6 y a p <p'ikoq e o tiv AnoXXcovi. 4. EKrjj3d^.og jidkXoi
oio T ovg JioXAovg d i’d o ip a T o v A xai& v. 5 . PovXfjv Aidg TElEicofiEV. 6 . Jw lEpiog
KaKog dXEKOi KaK&g A a v a o v q , o v v e k ^ T i^ aaav A jw lXcova. 7. jivp fiEya K aioi
EKaTonfiaq xavpcov tjd' aiym v. 8. x eIe o e ie (= teX eoui) (iovXr]v EKt]fi6kog dva^.
9. viîv fiei’ Oeoi doiEi' O lv fim a dcofiax ExovTEg EKiiEpoai F lp id fioio :i6Xiv, iv
(5’ oiK ad iKEodai, n a id a d E/uoi X vaanE (piXtjv. 10. u o E ia v A a v a o i Ejud
ddicpva ooToi jifAEOoiv.
Iliad, 59-63
“ ATpEidtj. yvv duuE JidXiv JiAayxOsi'Tag dim
dy/ djiovooTtjoEiv, e '{kev d d v ax ov yE (pvyoiÊv, 60
E l d i] d ju o v .ToAf.Mog xe d a f iq K a i k o ifid g A x a io v g .
dAA', dyE, 6^ xiva ftdvxiv EpEWfiEv fj isprja
rj icai 6vEipo::i6Xov. Kai y d p x' o v a p ek Aidg eotiv,
160 Notes
59. 01(0 is trisyllabic; observe its accent and breathing. —anjiE [iyu)] 971, acc.
plur., subject of the indirect statement. —Jid>.iv rtXayxO^Tag: aor. passive
participle [jiA d i^ a ], masc. acc. plur., modifying the subject { w e ) of the indir.
statement, h a v i n g b e e n d r i v e n b a c k a g a i n , i.e., without having captured Troy,
the object of the expedition.
60. E l KEV . . . (p ry o iH E V is parenthetical.
60-61. (pvyoifiEV . . . 5 a ^ a = da/idE i = d a /iao E i [da^dlâ], 603-604; 584-585,
973:2: by the use of the optative in the first clause and the future indicative in
the second, Achilles implies that he felt it more probable that they would all
die there rather than escape.
62. Tiva [xig, r/]: acc. sing. masc. —epeIo|hev = EpEvoÊV = EpEvcopiEv, 800, 1098.
—11 K ai: o r e v e n . — K a i y d p t ’ 6 v a p :/ o r t h e d r e a m a ls o , as well as other signs
and portents.
125
HOMERIC GREEK
161 Translate:
1. All these Achaeans are driven back, and they will return homeward, if
(perchance) they may escape (opt.) evil death. 2. They will not escape death, for
war and pestilence will crush them at the same time. 3. May the fire burn (opt.)
the hecatombs of bulls and of goats beside the swift ships of the Achaeans. 4. May
the great (733) gods shoot many arrows up through the camp of the Danaans.
5. May all the Danaans fulfill the plans of Zeus and escape evil death. 6. May the
war and pestilence at the same time crush these wicked people, because they
dishonored Chryses, priest of Apollo the free-shooter.
126
Lesson 27
THE PASSIVE VOICE

Ilia d , 6 4 -6 9
Preliminaries
While in most tenses medio-passive forms can express either the middle or passive
voice (e.g., M o p ia i means I a m being fr e e d or I a m ra n s o m in g ), at some point the
Greeks began to use different forms for the middle and passive of the aorist:
e X v a d fiT jv (middle, I ra n so m ed ) and e X v d rjv (passive, I w as fre e d ).
This use of the aorist passive, however, was evolving when the Homeric poems
were composed. In practice, Homeric Greek sometimes uses the aorist middle as a
passive, and the passive as a middle (888-890). Context, as usual, should help.
162a Learn the principles of the formation of the aorist indicative passive of Xvco.
To form the aorist passive you need the sixth (and final) principal part.
1 2 3 4 5 6
present future aorist perfect perfect aorist
active passive passive
Avo) /.vo w eXvoa X e Xv k u XeXvâi e X v 67]v
Notice that the ending of the sixth principal part does n o t look like a passive
ending. It looks just like the ending of the active form of the root aorist ePtjv. In
fact, you will conjugate it exactly like efir]v. By the way, many sixth principal parts
end in -Qrjv (as in e X vO riv), but some end in -r]v, as in ETpd<pt]v (the sixth principal
part of rp£(po}). To translate the practice sentences in this lesson you will need the
sixth principal parts of some verbs you have already encountered: eddfxrjv (from
daf^d^co) and ^ yep O tiv (from d y e lp o )). Consult the general Greek-English Vocab
ulary for the complete set of principal parts of other verbs.
162b Learn the conjugation of the aorist indicative passive of X vo) (916), I w as freed.
Singular Aorist passive Stem |Ending

1 e k v d rjv eX vd rj \ v
2 iX v B r jg eX vd t] \ g
3 iX v d t ] eX vd t] I
Plural
1 E X v d rjfis v eX vd rj \/ueu
2 eXvdrjT E eX vd rj \ t e
3 E X v d r ja a v ( e X v Oe v ) iX v d t ] { o a y
127
HOMERIC GREEK
162c Write out the conjugation of hpdtprjv I was nourished.

Consult 935 to check your work.
162d A note on the aorist passive and deponents.

The verb jiovX o^ ai is deponent (with the exception of the perfect), but it has
no aorist middle. Instead, its aorist passive has an active meaning: sjiov^Q -qv I
wished, I was wilUng. The same holds for some other deponent verbs, such as
EJiifiEfKpo/uai. Conjugate iftovXtjOrjv. Include the meaning of each form.
163a Optional: Learn all moods (indicative, imperative, subjunctive, optative) and
the infinitive of the aorist passive of Xva (916-920).
163b Optional: Learn the subjunctive, optative, imperative, participle, and infini
tive o f efitjv (930).
164 VOCABULARY
a i (= El 127), if, whether
djivvw, anvvew *, (stem : dfivv-) ward off, defend, protect, avert
d jio adv., and prep, with gen., off, from, away, back
dpTjv, dpv6<;, 6, Ti lamb
Pov>.oâI, PovXf|oonai*, — PePovXa, p epovX tm ai’^, e P ov Xt|0iiv * (stems:
P©v>.-, PovXe-) wish, desire, be willing; prefer {usually follow ed by i])
E l XE ( e i t e ) . . . El te (e i t e ) whether . . . or
E:llÊ^<poâl, E:itnEn\)/onai*, EJiEHEfi\)/dfinv*, — ^ — » EJiEfiEjKpOtiv* blame,
find fault (with), reproach {acc. ofp ers; gen. o f cause)
Ei)X(oXri, fjq, fi vow, boast, prayer
r| ( t o i ) ( t|TO i ) surely, indeed, truly, certainly, for a fact
0 EOTop(6ti5, ao, 6 son ofThestor (= Calchas)
KdXxag, KdA.xavT0(;, 6 Calchas
Krviai], nq, n fat, savor, odor of roast meat
Xoiyog, o\j, 6 destruction, ruin, death, curse
o ye, i] t o yE (oyE, iiyE, ToyE) this, that; he, she, it
oi(0VOJt6Ô5, o\j, 6 bird-interpreter, augur, soothsayer, seer
ootig (oTig), 11x15 , OTi (o tti) whichever, what(so)ever; who, which, what; 6xi
(oTTi) as adv., 780-781, why
JK05 encl., (in) some way, somehow, (in) any way, perhaps
TE>.Ei05, r|, ov complete, finished, full-grown, unblemished, perfect
16 0 (0 )05, r|, ov so much, so great, so large, so many, so long
128
L E S S O N 27
165 Translate:
1. 6v£ipo:i6kog xrev eiJioi oti toooov exmaaxo ôTftog AjioXkcov. 2. ovk
ekvdr] QvyoLTijp ieptjog. 3. nmdec, Axaicbv elvdrjoav Aya/nefivovi (1005).
4. eXvdt]T£, A a v a o i. yepovTi. 5. rjyepdeu (= ijyepdrjoav) A x a io i. 6. Edd^?jaav
A x a io i jiokefAcp i f icai Xoifim o fio v . 7. ndvTEg rjpcoeg ejild y x d t]o a y ndXiv. 8. deoi
emfieîl/ovTai Ayaiox'g, ovveku ra g £?3;(;«Aag ovk eteX eouv Kai xhq EKaTOfijiag
dpv&v aiyS)P te teXeicoi’ ovk EKtjav. 9. A j i o l l a v PovÊTai dvxiaE iv Kviorjg
(982) d p v a v aly& v te teaeicov kui k o iy d v a fiv v a i rifiiv (760). 10. K d^xag
0£OTopidtjg o iav on 6 lm > ox d p io ro g k ’ eijioi /xfjviv Aji6lXa)i>og.

Iliad, 64-69
og k ' eijioi oti toooov exmouto (Poiftog A jioXXcov,
EiT dp' 6 y' Ei'xojXijg Emn£H(pETai £i O' EKaxofijirig,
a'i KEV Jiwg d p v a v Kviorjg a iy S v te teXeicov
P ovXetui d v T idoag ))niv a n d Xoiydv d ^ v v ai."
Toi 6 y ' cog e Ijiw i' kut dp e êto , to Toi dvEOTi]
KdX xag 0EOTOpidt]g. oicoifoJioXav ox dpioTog,
167 Notes
64. eiJioi: 1103, 1105. — o t i : why, introduces an indir. question. — t o o o o v : 780-
781. Apollo, as god of health and disease, would be the first one thought of in
the present emergency. —65 k ’ ptuioi: 580, 581, 1174.
65. EiJXioXiig, EKaTO^Pt]g: 979:6: on account o f a vow (unfulfilled), or on account o f
a hecatom b (unoffered).
66. KVioTjg: 982. — t e X e i w v goes with both nouns.
67. P o r ^ a i : 800,1140. —rmiv [Eyti]: dat. plur., 997. —d;i6 . . . duCvai 1048-1049.
68. KttT'. . . EÊTo: 1049.
168 Translate:
1. Calchas, son of Thestor, is the seer who can tell ( k e v with opt.) the Danaans
why Phoebus Apollo is so greatly enraged. 2. Did Apollo blame the Achaeans on
account of a vow, or on account of a goodly hecatomb of unblemished lambs
and goats? 3. Apollo the free-shooter did not wish to partake of the fat of
unblemished lambs and goats, but he warded off evil destruction for the Danaans.
4. When the swift-footed Achilles had spoken {aor. particip.) thus, he sat down,
and the good seer, Calchas, son of Thestor, arose and spoke among the Achaeans
in the assembly. 5. May Calchas, son of Thestor, far the best of seers, speak the
will of Zeus.
169 Optional: At this point you should m ake a thorough review o f all the preceding
Iliad passages; all the paradigm s o f all nouns should be m em orized, and the verb Xveo
129
HOMERIC GREEK
in all its form s, including infinitives an d participles, should be m astered before

attempting to read further. A g ood plan fo r reviewing both form s and vocabulary is to
take each word o f the Iliad as it appears in the text, identify the form , and give the
meaning o f the word.
130
Lesson 28
ADJECTIVES OF THE
THIRD (AND FIRST) DECLENSION
Ilia d , 7 0 -7 5
Preliminaries
You met 3-1-3 adjectives when you learned Jidg, n d a a , n dv and active participles.
You also encountered the adjective ;âp/e(g when Chryses the priest prayed to
Apollo to punish the Achaeans. Masculine and neuter forms of these adjectives are
third-declension. The feminine adjective is declined like d d k a o o a . As with other
3-1-3 adjectives, a vocabulary or lexicon entry will not provide the genitive singular.
So you must determine the stem of the third declension forms by studying charts
like the one below (see also 7 2 5 -7 3 2 )—or by paying attention to adjectives as they
appear in the Iliad. What, for example, can you learn from line 39 (which you read
in Lesson 22)?
170a Learn the declension of x a p k ig , x (ip i£ o aa , xo^p'i^v pleasing (727).

nom. X apieiq X apiE ooa XO.p'lEV
gen. XaptevTog XapiEoatjg XapiEvxoq
dat. XapiEvri XapiEoorj XUptEVTl
accus. XapiEVTU Xap'iEooav Xapi£v
Plural
nom. XapiEVTEq X apiE oaai Xap'iEVTU
gen. XcipiE\’xm ’ XapiEoodcov XUpiEVTOJV
dat. XO-piEvxEooi, xapiE oi X apiEoatja{i) XapiEVTEOol, xapiE oi
accus. XapiEvraq X apiEooag XapiEvza
170b Learn the aorist passive participle (742).

The aorist passive participle is a 3-1-3 adjective formed from the sixth princi
pal part. Like the conjugated verb, it does not look passive in form. In the opening
lines of the Iliad you encountered xokcodeig {angered; literally, having been angered),
the aorist passive participle of xokoco. It declines much like ;âp/£(g, xo.pi£oaa,
XapiEv, although its feminine forms have only one o {xoXcod£toa)\ moreover, the
accent of an aorist passive participle tries to remain on the syllable of the ending
with the E (or ei) sound.
Keeping these two differences in mind, decline fully xokcodeig, xol(o6eToa,
XoXadiv. Compare your results with the aorist passive participle of Xvco (742).
131
HOMERIC GREEK
171 Learn the adjective coievg, coKeTa, coicv swift.

Another important 3-1-3 adjective in the Iliad is (OKi)g, coKSia, cbicv swift. By
comparing the declension of evpvg, evpeTa, evpv (727) you will be able to deter
mine the stem(s) for the masculine and neuter forms.
172 Review the paradigms of all nouns of the third declension (680-710).
Now that you are familiar with the various patterns of nouns and adjectives of
the third declension, their entries will be abbreviated in the vocabulary lists. In
Lesson 29, for example, for the adjective that means mightier, m ore pow erful you
will see K p eiaaav , o v rather than the two full forms Kpelaacov, K p ew aov ; in the
following lesson the entry for breast, chest will be arrjdoq, eog, to instead of orfjOog,
ozi]9eog, to . As you can see, the addition of the genitive ending can affect a words
accent, so you may need to consult the Grammar (or review the rules of accentua
tion) to determine the correct spelling of the genitive.
173 VOCABULARY
dyopdoâi, — ^r|yopiiodjitiv harangue, address an assembly
ci8w* (EiSonai), eiSrioo) (doofiai), eiSov, o i8 a (steins: ptiS-, poi5 -, pi5 -) pluperf
jlS e a ; in act., aor., see; infut. will know; in p e r f, know; in mid., seem, appear
£10(0 often uith acc., into, to, within
EKaTiiPeXCTii5, ao, 6 free-shooter, free-shooting, sharpshooter
t o gen. 760, o'l dat. (encl.), (of) him, her, it
fiyeofiai, ^Yif|ooâi, Tiytiodntiv, — ^ with dat., 1001, lead, guide, lead
the way; usually with gen., 985 , command, rule
K^Xojuai, KEXiiooâi, EKtXtiodjjiiv* (EKEK>.6ntiv) (steins: keX-, keXe-, kX-) urge,
command, bid, request
^ v6 £ o ^ a l, ^ v6tio o ^ al, EnvOiiodntiv speak, tell, declare
6 5 ,1], 6v (eoq, eii, eov) his, her(s), its (own)
jiopov (stems: Jiop-, :ip<o-) (= Ertopov, 837), (2nd aor, no pres.); gave, granted,
furnished, bestowed; p e r f jiCTpwxai it is fated
jipo adv., and prep, with gen., before, in front, forth, forward
(ppovEft), <pp0VT|0 (i)*, Ecppovijoa* think, consider, plan; ev (ppovEw be well (kindly)
disposed, be wise, think carefully
(0 interj., O!
Related words: hegemony; wit, wise, wizard; idol, kaleidoscope, idea(l); sage,
presage, 603, 604, 621.
174 Translate:
1. A x d e v g Jiodcxg aKvc, eJjie <ai eêTO, towiv d ’ A xaioT aiv dvEOTrj
KdXxag, ovveic' iqv ox apioT og oicovojwkcov Kai fjdr] [eid a , plu perf, 966] jidyTa,
132
L E S S O N 28
fidXiOTa de Jid o a g (iovXag Beai'. 2. KdXxo-<i ^ y^ aaxo vrjeooi dofjg A xaidiv eig
~ lh o v . 3. deoi EHOpoy KdXxavTi ^ avroov v rjv, d id rfjy ijyijouTO vi] eooiv A xaim v
'Ik io v Eioco. 4. judvTig A x a io w iv iv (ppovecov rjyop^ oaxo kui ^ ereem av.
Iliad, 70-75
dg fjdt] xd T eov x a xd x e a a o ^ e y a Jipo x' edvxa, 70
icai vi]eoo' rjyrjoax A xaim v 'iXiov e i o a
fjv d id fxavxoovvjjv, x^v o i Jiope (Poijiog A noX X av
6 o(piv Ev (ppovecov d y o p ijo a x o Kai fiexEEinev-
"c6 A x d e v , K skeai /us. diitpile, ^vdijoaoO ai
/ifjviu AjwXXcovog, SKaxrjjiEXExao dvuKxog- 75
176 Notes
70. 05 FflSt] 966], —td t ’ eovta td t ’ coooneva Jipo t ’ Eovta participles
of sifii, 964, used substantively with xd, those things [that] are, etc., i.e., both
what is and shall be and was before; that is, he knew everything.
71. vf|eoo’(i) 1001.
72. i]v [og, ff, dv] his own. —t t |v rel. pron. —o i [elo, eo] 760.
73. CT(piv [eio , eo] 760.
75. Xjio^^wvog, FEKETiiPE>.£xao pdvaKto?.
177 Translate:
1 . 1 spoke thus and sat down. 2. Calchas the son of Thestor who arose was far
the best of seers, but he does not know everything. 3. Who knows what is, what
was, and what shall be? 4. We do not know (966) the will of all the gods who have
Olympian homes. 5. Calchas the seer, who was far the best of soothsayers, guided
the ships of the Achaeans into Ilium by his gift of prophecy, which the gods gave
to him. 6. Phoebus Apollo granted to many Achaeans the gift of prophecy.
7. Since we are well disposed {participle) toward the Danaans, we addressed
them and spoke among them.
133
Lesson 29
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES

Ilia d , 7 6 -8 0
178a More pronouns and adjectives

Review the demonstrative pronoun o, tj, to this, that; sometimes he, she, it;
who, which.

nom. 6 7 TO
gen. TOV {tow) Ttjg TOV (toTo)
dat. T& Ttj TCp
accus. TOV Tl^V TO
Plural
nom. o i (to/) a i ( tu O TO.
gen. Tcov Tam v {T a y ) TQ)V
dat. Totg / Toloi Tfjg / TfjOl Tolg / Toiai

accus. Tovg Tag TO.
Several compounds of 6 , i] , t o are formed by adding an enclitic suffix, such as

-de or -ye. which does not decline, but throws its accent back to the first syllable:
ode. fide, rode this, this (see 774 for the full paradigm)
dye, ijye, Toye this, this at least (often printed d ye, ij ye, t6 ye)
What other Greek words have you learned whose neuter nominative singulars
end in -o instead of -ov?
178b Decline the relative pronoun og, tj, 6 and check your work by consulting
773.
178c Learn the declension of ovTog, a m t j , t o v t o this.

Compare the forms in the chart below with those for dg, ?j, o. How are they
alike? How do they differ? What patterns do you see ? How can you predict when
forms of this pronoun will begin with raw-, rather than rou-?
134
L E S S O N 29

nom. ovTog avTf] Tovro
gen. Tovrov zavTtjg T o ih o v
dat. TOVTCp xavTt] rovrm
accus. TOVTOy ia m r]v r o in o
Plural
nom. oi'xoi a v ia i T am a
gen. TOVTCOV Tuvxamv / x av x av TOVTCOV
dat. TOVTOlO(l) T am tja(i) TOVTOia(l)
accus. TOVTOVg T avrag T am a
179 Review the demonstrative pronoun eKeivoq (774) and the intensive pronoun
ai'TO!; (766), together with the uses of the demonstrative and intensive pro
nouns (1028-1038, and 1041).
180 VOCABULARY
dpriYM, {with dat., 996), help, assist, succor
eJiog, Eoq. x6 word, saying, command, speech
T| surely, indeed, truly, for a fact
Kpateo) (stem : K p a tE O -), with gen., 985, rule, bear sway
Kptioowv, ov com parative o f Kpatv?, mightier, more powerful, better
fiEY“ great, mighty (733)
6 8 e , i]8 E , x6 8e this (here)
6 n v v m ,d fio v n a i (= 6^ 6(o)o^ al = 6 ^ 6 o ^ a l 603, 584-585), raôa(a)a,
6^ (a^ o K a’^, 6 ^ (^ )^ o (a )^ a l’^, (b n 6 (o )0 tiv * (stem s: 6|u-, o n o -, o jie -) swear,
pledge with an oath, swear by as witness, swear to
0i)T05, aijTt], to v'to that
Jip 6(pp (o v, ov eager, zealous, glad, joyful, kindly
(TVVTiBiini, (TuvOiiao), dvvEOtiica, ODVTE0EiKa*, (ruvTE0£iîai*, ODVETEOtiv (stem s:
01]- , 0 E-) put together, unite, perceive, comprehend, heed
Toiydp therefore
XEpiig, eq {dat. xepilO. worse, inferior, underling, subject, meaner
Related words; epic; democracy, aristocracy, autocracy, plutocracy, theocracy;

megaphone, megacephalous, megalomania; synthesis.
135
HOMERIC GREEK
181 Translate:
X .'A yajitfivajv 6ii< pdog e k e ^ e t o x 6 v 6 e fid v T iv /x v d -qoaod ai r a g fiov ? .ag d£mv
navxm v. 2. ^ v d ^ a o fia i fifjv iv Ajw kX covog A x a io io iv . 3. fifjv ig A n o X k a v o g
E K a rtjP E lira o avaK T og fjv ovXofiEvr] ’A x a io w iv , e t e v x e y a p a v x o v g sXmpia
KvvEoai Jid a i. 4. E y a spEw (fut. o f Eipco) e ’i avvd^ oE ig Ka'i ^ oi apfjÊig npocppav
EJiEoi x^po'i TE. 5. El KdX xag ip sE i, xoX doE i A y a fiE fiv o v a , o g fXEya KpaxEEi
ndvToiv A pyEim v. 6. o m o i A x a i o i n s ld o v x a i A y a /iE fiv o v i. 7. fia o ik E v g Eoxiv
K pE hom v a v d p d g aXXov (993), o x e 6 e X(oot]xai (1151) d v d p i XEprji, xdv oX ekei
KaK&g. 8 . 'A yafiE n vav f ia o ik s v g i x a a a x o K d k x a v x i x^pfjt d v d p i, ovvE K a
EfivdTjaaxo fifjv iv AjwXXcovog.
Iliad, 76-80
xoiydp Eydyv ipEm, ov 6 e ovvQeo Kai fio i oôooov 76
fj fiEv fioi Jip6 (ppav EJiEOiv Kai x^poiv dpiqÊiv.
r] yap o io fia i avdpa xoXaoifxEV, 8g n sy a Jidvxcov
Apysicov KpaxEEi Kai oi m idovxai A x a io i.
KpEioocDV yap (iaaiXEvg, oxe x(OOExai dvdpi X^P^t' 80
183 Notes
76. ty a f e p ia . — ctwvGeo [ovvxiOtjfii]: imperat., 960.
77. fioi: 996. —rtpocppwv: observe that Greek uses the adjective where the English
idiom would ordinarily prefer the adverb. —Ertcoiv Kai /epolv; 1005.
78. xoXwoenev = xoXcooeiv, 908; observe its accent, 902:2. —otto xo>.woeiv
av8pa: the subject o f the in f is I, inferred from d ia . — \iiya-. 780-781.
79. Xpytuov: yet another name for the Greeks, 985. —o i can only be the dat. of
Eo, 760, since it is an enclitic (as can be seen from the accent of Kai, 550) and
formerly had p before it (pot) as is seen from the meter, 1173, 1175. It is a
dative with a special verb, 996.
80. Kp£ioo(ov (soxiv) Paai>^vg: that is, when a king and a man of the common
people become at odds, the king is the mightier, and naturally will punish the
ordinary man for his presumption. — = x^^tjxai, subjunct. in general
(i.e., indefinite) temporal clause, when[ever] . . . (1151). —dv8pfc 996.
184 Translate:
1. The seer will speak if Achilles hearkens (lit. will hearken) and swears (lit.
will swear) to defend him zealous(ly) with words and hands. 2 . 1 think Calchas will
enrage Agamemnon, who rules all the Argives, and the Achaeans obey him.
3. Agamemnon is king and is mightier than the seer or any other inferior man.
4. When(ever) the king is enraged {subjunct.) at an inferior man, he will destroy
(i.e. he always destroys; pres.) him, for he is mightier.
136
Lesson 30
PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE

PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES
Ilia d , 81-85
Preliminaries
Personal pronouns are words like I, me, you, he, him, she, her, it, etc. You have already
met some of these pronouns in the course of reading the Iliad. Since pronoun sub
jects are implied by the conjugated form of a verb, when you see a pronoun in the
nominative, it is emphatic.
185 Learn the declension of the personal pronouns (760-763).

The chart below contains the most common personal pronouns in Homeric
Greek. Although there is a variety of forms, there are some patterns (f^- in the
first-person sing.; ?///- in the first-person plur., etc.). The same form is used for all
genders, and there is no form for the nominative of he, she, it and they, for which
Homeric Greek uses a demonstrative pronoun (e.g., 6, x6).
Singular 1, me You He, she, it; him, her

nom. eycotv) ov —
gen. EiisTo, fXEV tfieo) OEW, ( 0 £V), 0 £ 0 EIO, EO
dat. e^ oi, uoi OO'l, TO I eoT, Ol
accus. £ fie, fi£ OE, OE EE, E (filV)
Plural We, us You They, them

nom. t]fieTg(dfi/i£g) v/i£Tg (viUjUEg) —
gen. v/UEtay OfEimv, a<pEcov
dat. VfiTi’ a<pioi (ocpiv) o(pioi
accus. iifi£ag(dfift£) v/4 Eag (VfifiE) o<pEag, o(pE{ag), o<pdg
186 Learn the declension of possessive adjectives and pronouns (764).

Possessive adjectives are words like my, your, his, her, their, our. As their name
suggests, they express possession. In fact, the word their is a possessive adjective
(third-person plural): the name belongs to them, which in this example stands for
possessive adjectives. English possessive adjectives often differ from possessive pro
nouns; e.g., my (adjective) vs. mine (pronoun) or your (adjective) vs. yours (pro
noun). In The heart you broke is hers, for example, hers is a pronoun standing for
her heart (noun -i- adjective). The words his and its can act as either adjectives or
pronouns, as in The heart you broke is his and You broke his heart.
137
HOMERIC GREEK
Like all Greek adjectives, a possessive adjective can be used as a substantive:

Efioq can mean my or mine. How can you distinguish between the adjective and
pronoun? If the word m odifies a noun, then it acts as an adjective. If it replaces a
noun, it is a pronoun.
Possessive adjectives are declined like ica?.6g, //, 6v, so they offer yet another
opportunity to review the first two declensions. Compare them to the personal
pronouns. Do you see any patterns or similarities?
My, mine Your, yours His, her(s), its

£ fi6 q ,ri,6 v o6q„ r},6v ox k o g ,r],d v ox
XEog,ri,dv d g ,i],d v
Our, ours Your, yours Their, theirs

7]fiETEpog, T], o v v/xexepog, rj, ov 0 (phepog, rj, ov
[ox cifioq, ^ , 6v) (ox vfi6(;,'q,6v) {ox o(p6q,^ ,dv)
In this lesson, forms of both eog, t], oif and og, i], o v (his, her, its, etc.) appear in the
practice sentences. Compare the latter with the relative pronoun (773). What
differences do you see? How will you know that you have encountered a relative
pronoun and not a possessive adjective/pronoun? (See Lesson 8, 33b.)
187 VOCABULARY
dnaêiPo), d jianeivw *, dnf|fiEi\);a, — > ---- > djiiiHE(<p0tiv* (ex)change; middle,
reply, answer
avxfjâp the (self)same day
eo5, er|, eov (= oq, n, ov) his, her(s), its, his own, her own, its own
OapoEw, 6apoT|o<o*, eGdpoiioa, TE0dp(n]Ka take heart, take courage, be bold, dare,
be resolute
0EOJip6niov, o\), TO oracle, prophecy
KatajiEoow, Katand\)/(i)*, KaTCTE$»a, — >Kataii^JiEnnai*, KatEnEcpBiiv* (stems:
JIEK-, m n -) digest, repress, cook
k o to ;, ou. 6 grudge, rancor, hate
^dXa very, exceedingly, even, by all means, much, enough
ÊT6Jllo0E(v) afterward(s), later, hereafter
oq>pa until, in order that (with subjunct.); while
n ip encl., exceedingly, very, even (if), although
:lp6o(pt]Î, Tipoocpiiao), jipooeeptioa* (stems: <pq-, <pa-) speak to, address (with acc.)
oaoo), 0a(i)0(a, e a a a a a , ---- > ---- > Eoa(o0tiv (cf. adj. aoo q - c a o q ) save, protect,
rescue, preserve
OTti0O5, eoq, to breast, chest
138
L E S S O N 30
(ppdô)*, q>pdo(i)*, E(ppaoa ([e]jiE<ppa6ov), jiE(ppaKa*, Jt£q)paonai*, e(ppdo6i]v

(stem: (ppa5-) tell, point out, declare; mid. consider, plan, think
x6>.o;, o$, 6 hot, furious wrath, blind anger, choler
Related words; amoeba, amoebean verse; dyspeptic; melancholy; opistho-

dome, opisthography; stethoscope; periphrasis, paraphrase.
188 Translate;
1. A y a f i E ^ v a v a v a ^ a v d p a v K U T a jiE fE i x d ^ o v a v r f j/ x a p , d/l/ld^ E T o m o d e v
k '^ e i [ e x o A i c o t o v £ v o i o i o r ^ d e a o i v , d < p p aTsXeoorj (1115-1116). 2. j w d a g c o K v g
A xM E vg ( p p d a e x a i e i o a c o o e i K a X x a v r a ^ d v z i v o x a p i o z o v . 3. K d X x a c ,
O apoâei K a i e p E E i d E O J i p o m o v A j t o X X c o y o g . 4. f i d m g o 'i6 e (966) d E o z p o m a

jid v ja .
Iliad, 81-85
E l : i £ p y d p TE x o '^ o v ye K a i a v r f j i u a p K a r a jiE y / i] , 81
d X X d TE K a i u E T o m o d E V s y E i k o t o v , d ( p p a t e X e o o i ] ,
Ev oi-qdEooiv E oiai. ov 6 e <ppdoai, ei jUE oacooEig."
xdv d' djiaÊijioÊvog Jipoa£<pr} jw d a g coKvg AxiXlEvg-
" d ap a^ oag ^dXa e i j i e QEonpomov, o n oio d a - 85
190 Notes
81. ei rtEp ydp x t fo r e v e n if; introduces a subjunct. (without k e v ) in a general
condition (1142).
82. TE Kai also. —6(ppa teXEOOfl (parenthetical): i.e., till he obtains his revenge, or
gets satisfaction.
81-82. k o t o ? : the first of hot resentment (which may pass); the second of a
deep-seated grudge (which may result in revenge).

83. t\ OTf|6eooiv Eotai; the possessive pronoun is emphatic, to indicate that he
keeps it absolutely secret and bides his time for revenge. —otiiGeooi: plural
for singular. —ov everything now depends upon you. —(ppdoai: aor. mid.
imperat., 2nd sing.
85. EiJiE: aor. act. imperat.; observe accent, 902:1. —oloGa = o id a g . —6 t i o io 0 a :
expands on dEonpom ov.
191 Translate;
1. The very mighty king was enraged at an inferior man, but on that selfsame
day he repressed his wrath. 2. Many men have evil grudges in their own breasts
until they accomplish (subjunct.) (them). 3. Let us consider if we will save the king
of men, Agamemnon. 4. The seer will take courage and speak the oracles o f the
gods, for he knows them all.
139
Lesson 31
RELATIVE PRONOUNS; INTERROGATIVE

AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES
Ilia d , 8 6 -9 2
Preliminaries
Interrogative pronouns are words like who? which? whom? what? whose? These same
words can be used as adjectives: which city? Examples of indefinite pronouns are
someone, anyone, something. They too can be used as adjectives; som e city (indefinite).
Greek interrogative and indefinite pronouns differ only in their accents. An
interrogative pronoun jealously guards its acute accent, which does not change to a
grave accent when the interrogative pronoun is followed by another word {rlq
avi^p, what man?). One way to remember this is to remind yourself that in English
the voice rises to express a question.
Indefinite pronouns, on the other hand, are enclitics, which means that they
often appear with no accent at all (or with an accent on the second syllable, if there
is one): e.g. rig. zivdg. They also try to throw their accents back to the previous
word: e.g. si + Tig becomes e i n g and Q aX aaoa + Tig becomes Q dXaooa rig.
For the rules about what happens to disyllabic (two-syllable) enclitics see
Lesson 35, or 553-559.
192a Learn the declension of the interrogative pronouns rig, r/ who? which? what?
(767, 769).
As you can see, rig is used for both the masculine and feminine. The nomina
tive and accusative are the forms you will encounter most often in the Iliad.
Singular Masc. / Fern. Neut.

nom. Tig Tl
gen. TSO ( tsv , Tivog) TEO ( tev , Tivog)
dat. TE(p (rm, Tivi) TECp (T&, TlVl)
accus. Tiva T l‘
Plural
nom. Tiveg Tiva (d o o a )
gen. te3 v TE&V
dat. TEOiai TEOiai
accus. Tivag Tiva (d o o a )
In later Greek you will find these pronouns declined using the stem riv- with third
declension endings (as in the nominative Tiveg).
140
L E S S O N 31
192b Decline the indefinite pronoun rig, xi som eone, anyone, something (769).
Note that in grammars and vocabularies this pronoun appears with a grave
accent to indicate that it is enclitic.
193 (For reference) Indefinite relative pronouns (776-777)

The relative pronoun combined with the indefinite pronoun creates the indefi
nite relative pronoun, which means whoever, whomever, whatever, etc. Sometimes
both parts are declined, sometimes only the second part. Just as with the indefinite
pronoun, the forms you can expect to encounter most often in Homer are the
nominative and accusative. Indefinite relative pronouns are ofi:en used to introduce
indirect questions. (For an example see line 64.) Note that the neuter is sometimes
printed o ti so that it will not be confused with the conjunction o n .

nom. d 0 Tig, 0 Tig ijTig o t/ .o t/ .o tt;
accus. o v iiv a .o x iv a fjvriva or/,or/,orr/
194 VOCABULARY
ov blameless, noble
dva(paiv(0, dvaepavew, dvEqmva, dvajiE(pnva’^, dva7i£q>aa|uai, dvE<pdvtiv
(stem: (pav-) reveal, show (up), manifest
av5d(a, av)8T|O(0'^, iiv S ijo a speak, say, declare, shout, cry out
Papvg, eia. X) heavy, weighty, violent, severe, grave, serious (727)
SEpK oâi, — i cSpaKov, S tS o p K a , — >e8epx0iiv* (tSpdK iiv)* (stem s: 8epK-,
SopK-, SpaK-) see, look, behold
eTiKpô), EJioioo), EJtijveiKa (E:tT|veiKov), £rtevT|voxa*, enEvf|VEYHai*,
EnTjvex0»lv’^ (stems: <pep-, o i-, evek-) bear upon, bear against
^(0(1) live
i^v (= El dv) if (expect the subjunct.)
0Eonpojii>1, riq. f| oracle, prophecy
fid adv. o f swearing; surely, verily, by (often followed by accus. of deity or thing
sworn by)
65 TE, 1] TE, 6 TE (ooTE, i]TE, o te ) who, w h ich, w hat(ever)
o vS e not even, and not, nor. but not
( r tjiJia g , o ij( ij:a o a . oi)|i7iav all (to g eth er)
X6(ov, x0ov6^. Ti earth, land, co u n try
Related words: phenomenon, diaphanous, phantom, fantasy, fancy; barometer,

baritone; epizootic, zoology, protozoa, palaeozoic, mesozoic, cenozoic; chthonic.
141
HOMERIC GREEK
195 Translate:
1. Jiodag coKvg Axi^^svi; eiTie fidvTei afivfiovv “dfivvî fia Qedv AiioXXava
diiq>iXov, A yanefivav dpiozog Axaimv o v k ejio io e i jSapelag oot KoiXrjg
jiapd vrjvaiv.” 2. fidvTig duvfiav evxd/êvog AjwXXavi d v a fa lv e i
d e o j ip o m a g A a v a o T a iv . 3 . A x iX fjo g ^cbvrog xrai d e p K O ^ e v o io ( 1111) etu xO ovi,
ov TIC, ovfindvrcov /J a m a v ejioiaei fiapeiag ;f£rpag KdXxavTi n dvxeiA . 6wg
AxiXXevg oacoaei KdXxavTa fidvriv, i]v Einrj AyapLE^vova, d g evx£^(î E iv a i
TiokXov dpioTog Axaimv. 5. i]v AxdXEvg aawor] fidvxiv, d a p a ^ o E i Kai avdrjO E i
dsojipojilag EKaxT]fiEX£Tao dvaKxog. 6. AjwXXcov ia r i 0eog a ze [og t e , tj te , 6
re] KdXx&g e v x e t g i .
Iliad, 86-92
o v f i d y d p A jid X X w y a d iiq u X o v , co te o v , K d X x a v , 86
E v x d fiE v o g A a v a o T o i d E o n p o m a g d v a < p a iv E ig ,
o v T ig E/XEV t,& V T O g K a i E U I X d o v i d E p K O flE V O lO
o o i K o iX t jg j i a p d v r j v a i f i a p E i a g x ^ ip o - g e jio io e i
ovfindvTcov A a y a m r, o v d ’ ijv A y a n E n v o v a EiJirjg, 90

og vvv jioXXdv d p io T o g A x aim v E v x era i E iv a i.”
K ai TOTE dfj OdparjoE K ai rjv d a fidvT ig dfivfim v-
197 Notes
86. oi) jid Y«P An:6^>.(iiva (i.e., d / i v v f i i f i d ) : this is the answer of Achilles to the
demand of Calchas that he s w e a r { d f i o o o o v , line 76) to protect him. He
meets the issue fairly and promises frankly. —(o te
[ o g t e , tj t e , o if].
—Kd^xav: vocative.
88. ^WVT05: 994, 1111.
89. o o l 1004.
90. XyanEnvova: 1018
92. 6dp(Tt]OE: took courage: aorist marking an entrance into a state or the begin
ning of an action (inceptive aorist), 1081. —n v 5a = r j v d a E [ a v d d m ] , 584-585.
198 Translate:
1. Take courage and speak the oracles of Apollo the free-shooter. 2. By Apollo,
son of Zeus, the Achaeans will not lay heavy hands upon you beside the hollow
ships. 3. The blameless seer prays to Apollo the free-shooter and reveals the
oracles of the god to the Danaans. 4. While the Achaeans live and look out
upon the earth (1111) Agamemnon will not lay heavy hands upon the old priest
of Apollo beside the hollow ships. 5. Who (plural) boast that they are far the best
of the Danaans?
142
Lesson 32
REGULAR -HI VERBS

Ilia d , 9 3 -1 0 0
Preliminaries
You have already learned the complete system of verbs whose first principal parts
end in -co. It is now time to learn to conjugate verbs that end in Four verbs of
this type have appeared in earlier lessons: lorrjfii {stand, set), (place),
(hurl; usually in compound verbs, such as eip'irjî), and didmî (give). An outstand
ing feature of these -î verbs is reduplication in the present stem (e.g., the sound
in the prefix di of didcofii). The doubled sound is connected to the stem with an i.
(Reduplicated forms of the perfect use an e .) Greek, however, avoids reduplicating
aspirated consonants, so you will find TiOtjfii instead o f OiOrjfii. (The verb 'torrjî
was originally oioTtjui, and iri/ui was oiorjfii; the initial o in both verbs became a
rough breathing.)
Principal parts of important -fit verbs:
1 1 3 4 5 6
I'oTtjfil OTÔO) E orrjoa / eaxrjKa EOTTJfiai E O T d d r jv
eoTtjv
Tidrjfii 07] 0(0 E d r jK a xidEiKa TsOEifiai E T £ d t]V
tjoco ETjKa EiKa Eifxai E id r jv
d'ldcofii 6(00(0 EdcoK a didojKu dE dofiai Edddtjv
The future, aorist (medio-passive, passive), and perfect (active and medio-pas-
sive) forms of -//z verbs are (for the most part) like their Avco counterparts. Almost
all of the new forms you will encounter are made from the present stem. Notice the
two aorists ofiortjfî. The first aorist eorrjou is a transitive verb, I stood as in I stood
the chair up after it fell over The second (root) aorist eortjv is intransitive: I stood.
199a Learn the principles of the formation of the present indicative active o f v e r b s .
1) The outstanding feature of forms made from the present tense is the use of a
different stem in the singular and plural:
For the singular use the long stem: iarr}-, Tidtj-, irj-, didco- (long vowels rj
and (o).
For the plural use the short stem: ioia-, nde-. ie-, dido- (short vowels a, e, o).
2) Add personal endings directly to the stem (i.e., without a thematic vowel).
In the third-person plural, the ending seems to have been colored by the
143
HOMERIC GREEK
vowel of the stem, and the resuh is a diphthong that depends on that vowel:
ioxdoi, ieioi, didovai.
Singular Stem Ending Full form

1 Tldt] m TiOriî
2 Tidrj ? lierig
3 TiOr} Ol TiOrjoi
Plural
1 Tide fXEV i i Oe^ ev
2 Ti6e TE ti Qexe
3 t i Gs [e ]oi zi Oe Ioi
199b Conjugate the present indicative active o f trj/xi, lortjfii, and didcofii.
Homeric Greek regularly uses didolg instead of d id ag for the second-person
singular—a form you should be able to recognize. Compare your results with 949.
200 Learn the aorist indicative active of -î verbs (949).

The aorists of ridrifii, irjfii, and dldcofii are regular first aorists. In the plural,
however, verbs whose third principal parts end in -Ka sometimes shift to a
second aorist with a simple short vowel stem: 6 e-, e-, do- (see the chart below). The
endings of these athematic second aorists are the same as those for root aorists like
eoTtji' and ejitjy.
Plural (ziOrjî) (irj/ii)

1 EdsfiEV ElfXEV (E-EfiEV) EdofiEV
2 e 6 exe EIXE idoTE
3 EdEOaV Eloav sdoaav
Aorist participles and infinitives of these -fii verbs are formed using the second
aorist stems.
201 VOCABULARY
dEiKf|i;, iq unseemly, grievous, shameful, unfitting
avdnoivos, ov (c f djioiva) unransomed, without a ransom paid
d :lo 5 ^ o ^ a l, d7Io5^ôâl, djiE6e^dniiv (dn;E8EY^n'')’ — >djio6E5EYH«i,
d:iE8Ex0ilv’^ receive, accept
djTpiaTog, r|, ov unbought, without price
dji(o0EW , drtMOw, d jid eo o a, — » d :iE O )o n a i* , d n E w o B tiv * (stems: w 0 -, w0 e - = pwO-,
p(o0E-) shove away, push off, drive o ff

d tlfid w , d T lnffoo), T itin tio a , dishonor, insult, slight, despise
EXiKO)\|i, (gen. eîKCOTtoq) masc. adj., £X iK u n :i; (gen. eA.iK0)7ci60(;) fern, adj., b rig h t
eyed, flashing-eyed
144
L E S S O N 32
evEKa (e iv cK a , 5 7 1 ) w ith g en ; u su ally fo llo w s its ob jec t, on acco u n t of, because of,
for the sake of
CTi yet, still, in addition, further
iep og, n, 6v sacred, holy
tX d o K o ^ a i, iX d o (o )o ^ a l, iX a o (o )d n iiv , — > — » iXdoOiiv* propitiate, appease
Kovpt], ric;, Ti girl, m aiden, young wom an
ovTE and not, nor. o rx e . . . o v te neither . . . nor
natT ip , Jtaxepoq (jiaxpoi;). 6 father, sire
TovvEKa (= tou evEKa) on acco u n t o f this, for this reason, therefore, consequently
Related words: pandect; o p tic(al), synopsis, autopsy; hieroglyphics, hierarchy;

p atriarch, expatriate.
2 0 2 Translate:
1. A j w XXcdv EmÊixfETUi EvxaX rjq K a l £ K az6 fi(ir]q (9 7 9 :6 ). 2. 9 eoi
EJii/UEfiipoi'Tai A x a i o v g e v e k ’ a p r jifjp o g (p ilo v A jio X^covi, x b v y a p rjT ifirjaav .
3. AjwXXmv EdcoKEv d k y E a l o i o i v A x a i o i a i v y d s dcooEi e t i , o v v e k ’ Aya/AEfivcov
riu fiJjo E v d.pr]Tt]pa, o v d ’ eP ov Xeto Xv e iv d v y a x p a K a i d y X a d d £ x 9 a i d n o i v a .
4. El E K tjfid lo q d:id}OEi X o iy b v cleikeu A a v a o T o iv , d m o o v o i E h K m m d a K ov p rjv
<piX(p J i a r p i CLRpidrriv d v d n o i v o v , d ^ o v o i (5’ iEprfv EicaTOfiPrjv Eg X p v a r j v tote
OEd v iX a o o d fiE v o i jie io o v o iv .
2 0 3 Copy, scan, and translate:
Ilia d , 9 3 - 1 0 0
" o v T ' d p ’ o y ’ Et'xcoXfjg iJii^ EfiipET ai o v d ' EKaTo^firjg, 93
dXX' e i ’e k ’ d p rjT ijp og , oV l i r i f i t j o ’ AyajuEjuvcDv
o v d aTiEkvoE d v y a T p a K a i o v k djiE dEâT d n o i v a , 95
TovvEK d p ' d /ly f ’ e 8(okev EKT](i6)iog r jd ’ h i dcooEi.
o v d ' o yE n p iv A a v a o i o i v uEiK Ea X o iy d v d jiw o E i,
np'iv y ' d j i o n u T p i (p'llm ddjX Evai i l ii c c o m d a K ov p rjv
d n p id T rjv d v d n o i v o v , d y s i v 6' lEprjv EKaToîfitjv
eg X p v o r j v tote kev fiiv iX a o o d fiE v o i JiEJtlO oifiEv.” 100
2 0 4 Notes
93. Et)xci)Xil5, EKaTOfiPng: 9 7 9 :6 .
94. dpt]T tip o;; em phatic by position, and placed in strict con trast with EvxcoXfjg.
as both occupy the sam e position in the verse.
96. TOVVEK’( a ) sum s up the preceding and brings it out prom inently, so that there
can be no m istaking what the real cause o f the trouble is.
97. A a v a o i o iv : 997. — o y t resum es the subject, Apollo, with emphasis.
9 7 - 9 8 . Jipiv . . . Jtpiv: h e w ill n o t (s o o n er) d riv e o f f p e s t il e n c e . . . till (we) g iv e b a c k
. . . 98. S ofiE vai: 2nd aor. act. in f with n p iv . The subject o f 5 6 ^ E v a l m ay be
145
HOMERIC GREEK
we—that is, the Greeks—but more Hkely it is intended to refer to Agamem

non, and is omitted on purpose by the priest, who is afraid of his anger, in
spite of the assurance of Achilles.
99. dn:pidTiiv dvoOToivov: “without money and without price.” Tautology (repeti
tion) for the sake of emphasis. —0 ’(e) = r ’(e), 582.
100. eg Xpvat]v: into Chrysa, the town, not to Chryses, the priest. —JiejiiOoijiEv:
1105, redupl. 2nd aor. (865) opt. act.
205 Translate:
1. Do the gods blame the Achaeans on account of a vow or a hecatomb, or on
account of Chryses the priest, whom Agamemnon dishonored? 2. If Agamemnon
will not release the dear daughter of the aged priest and receive the shining
ransom, the free-shooter will still give many woes to the Danaans, nor will he
ward off unseemly destruction for them until they give back to her own father
the white-armed maiden, unbought and unransomed, and lead a sacred hecatomb
into Chrysa; then perhaps they may appease the god and persuade his soul.
146
Lesson 33
REGULAR -m VERBS, MIDDLE AND PASSIVE

Ilia d , 101-108
Preliminaries
The medio-passive forms of -fxi verbs use the short grade of the present stem (in
both singular and plural): ioTa-, Tide-, ie-, d id o - (957-962). In the second-person
singular of the present tense, however, the ending is -o a i (instead o f the usual -at),
while the imperfect uses -o o (instead o f -o). Otherwise the personal endings for
the present and imperfect are the same as those for X voâi and eXvoiArjv.
206a Learn the present indicative medio -passive of Tidrjfii (957):
Singular Stem Ending Complete form

1 Tide /xai Tidefiai
2 TiOe oai Tideaai
3 Tide TUI Tiderai
Plural
1 Tide fied a Tidefieda
2 Tide od e Tideode
3 Tide vTai TidevTai
206b Conjugate the present medio-passive indicative oiia x rjfii, irjî, and d ii
206c Learn the imperfect medio-passive of ridrjfii (957).
Singular Stem Ending Complete form

1 h id e jUt]V hiQefirjv
2 h id e oo h ld e o o
3 h id e TO h id e r o
Plural
1 h id e /ueda h id e fie d a
2 h id e od e h id e o d e
3 h id e VTO hidevTO
147
HOMERIC GREEK
206d Now conjugate the imperfect indicative medio-passive of iottj/ai, and

d ld w fii.
207a Learn the aorist medio-passive of ridtjfii and I'rjfii (957).

To the augmented second aorist stem (short grade, no reduphcation) add the
secondary personal endings. The forms are regular—even in the second-person
singular, where the aorist uses the usual personal ending -o. For trjfit, however, the
£of the augment and the f of the stem contract to form e i - as in E ifirjv. (For a table
of contractions see 585.)
Singular Stem Ending ( r ie r jfii) O m O
1 e 6e HYJV E d E firjV E ifir ji'
2 e Be o e Oe o E lO
3 EdE TO e Oe t o E l TO
Plural
1 e Oe fiE O a E d E f lE d a E l/X E d a
2 e Oe o 6e e Oe o Oe e Io 9e
3 e 8e VTO e Oe v t o e I vto
207b Conjugate i o t t jiu i and d i d c o f i i in the aorist indicative medio-passive.

Note that while the second-person singular of the aorist medio-passive of zidrji
(edeo) does not contract, the same form of the verb d ld a ^ i does: e6 oo -^ e6 ov .
While Homeric Greek exhibits fewer contractions than other dialects, most likely the
juxtaposition of two identical vowels was conducive to it.
208 VOCABULARY
d^(pI^£>.ag, aiva, av black all around, very black (732)
dj^vDjiai be grieved, be vexed, be enraged
£00^05, 11. 6v good, noble, brave, true, helpful, kindly, virile
evpvg, eia. {) broad, wide, large (727)
KpEicov, o\)oa, ov ruling, prince, ruler
Kpfiyvog, ri, ov good, helpful, favorable, honest, true, truthful, useful
Xa^JiETdb) (see 945) shine, gleam, blaze, flame
âvTEVOâl, fiavTEVOonai, Enavtevodntjv predict, prophesy, divine
eoq, TO rage, anger, might, courage, fury, power, spirit
oooE (dual only), eyes
d o a o ^ a i (stem: ok -) eye, look upon, look, glare at
n ifin X im i, JtXiioM, ejiX tioa (ErtXTjuiiv), ÊJiXuKa*, :i ^ X i i o n a i * , ejiXtio0iiv
(stems: n>.a-) with gen. o f material, 986, fill, sate, stuff
148
L E S S O N 33
jipwTioTog, n. ov a double superlative, first, chiefest, the very first

nupoq, 6 fire, flame
:iM (enclit.) in some way, any way, ever, yet, at some time, at any time
Related words: melancholy; lamp; mantic; ocular, oculist; plenty, plenitude,

plethora, pleonasm; proto- (80); pyre.
209 Translate;
1. toToi d' aviard/êvog ÊTeiprj evpv KpEicov AyafiEfivcov. 2. jiaaiX evq
Ayaê^vcov d x w T a i jueya, .'lifijd av rai (5’ dfK pi^ ekaivai ippevsq fiev eog icaicov
(986). 3. o a o e dvaicTog .iv p i Xaîn.Ez6avTi (= XafiJiExdovxi, 945) EiKTrjv [*eiKo)].
4. A x a io i d ' d o o o v r a i n d v riv KaKa. 5. KaX^dQ fid v iiq KaK&v o v mo jio te
Kpijyva e'i:jev Ayafxtfxvovi dvaK xi. 6 . rd KaKa fidvTEi a'm <plX’ e o tiv
uavTEVEoBai. 7. AyiXlEvc, eih ev EJiea JtoXXd ku I rd eteX eooev.
210 Read and translate:
Iliad, 101-108
1] Toi o y' cog Eincbv k u t' dp' e^ eto, roToi d ’ dvEoxr] 101
tjpcog ArpEidtjg Evpv KpEicov A yaîfivcov
dxvvfiEvog- f.iEVEog 6 e Êya <ppEVEg dfi<pi/XEXaivai
jiifin la v T ’, dooE 6 e o i Jivpi XafiJiEzocovrt EiKxrjv.
K dX xavxa zipm xiaia KaK' ooodfXEVog npooEEiJiEv- 105
“fxdvxi KaKmi’, o v .k6 :x o x e ^ oi xd Kpijyvov Efjiag-
aiEi xoi xd KdK' Eoxi <piXa <pp£oi fxavxEVEoOai,
EodXov (5' ovxE XI mo Eijiag t'mjg ov x e xiXEOoag.
211 Notes
102. evpv: adverbial, 780-781. —evpv Kpeiiov: wide(ly) ruling, i.e., ruling over an
extensive area.
103. fiEVEog: 986. — adverbial, 780-781.
104. o i [fo]; dat. of reference or possession, 998-999. —Jivpi; 1003. —eikthv
[*EiK(o]: pluperf 3rd dual, were like. —XafiJieTowvti (945-948): to contrast
with diu<pi/HEXaivai. line 103.
103f The diaphragm or midriff was thought of as a seat of the emotions, just as the
word “heart” is still used in English.
105. JipwTiora: 780-781. — kck ’: 780-781, 1012. — k Ak ’ oooo^ evoi;: “with evil
look” (“looking evilly”), i.e., a look that boded trouble for Calchas.
106. ndvTi: vocative, —to Kpf|yt)ov p tin a? corresponds to the rule in the latter
part of 526. —EiJiag: = El~iEg, 865:3.
107. TOI echoes the u oi of the preceding verse, with which it is contrasted. — t a
k(xk’ Eort 973:1.
149
HOMERIC GREEK
212 Translate:
1. The swift-footed Achilles arose and spoke among the Achaeans. 2. When
he is vexed, his heart, black all around, is mightily filled with anger, and his eyes
are like blazing fire. 3. Agamemnon eyed Calchas evilly and addressed him.
4. Because you are a prophet of evils you have never spoken (aorist) or accom
plished anything good for me, but it is always dear to your heart to prophesy
evil. 5. “Prophet,” said I, “bird of evil!”
150
Lesson 34
REGULAR -fii VERBS (c o n t i n u e d )
Il ia d , 1 0 9 -1 1 7
Preliminaries
The imperfect active o f i o t t j /a i is regular. As is usual with active forms of - f i i verbs

created from the present stem, in the singular the imperfect uses the long-grade {iazr]-)
and in the plural the short-grade stem (io z a -)—both stems, of course, are augmented.
Conjugate the imperfect using the same endings used for the root aorist i'jSrjy.
213a Learn the imperfect active ofiax rju i (949).
Singular Plural
1 io x r] v 1 lO Ta/xev
2 lOTrjg 2 lOTaxE
3 lo r r j 3 'ia x a a a v
213b Optional: Learn the imperfect active of ziOrjini, irjfii, and 6'idcofii (949).
In the singular, some forms of the imperfect active of TiOrjfii, irjfii, and dldcofii
are irregular, having abandoned athematic personal endings in favor of the imper
fect endings of -a verbs (i.e., a combination of a thematic vovêl and ending). Take
Ti6r]fii, for example. The first-person singular of the imperfect active is predictable
(given the formula you know for the imperfect): augment -i- long grade stem + v =
eridr/v. But the singular forms of the second and third person look as if they are
contracted forms of -eco verbs (940):
ETideig {eTiGe+ eg) You were putting

irid e i { h id e + e) He was putting
Throughout the singular the verb didcoî behaves as if it were a thematic verb (i.e.,
didoco) whose stem vowel contracts with the vowel of the ending: ed id o v v {ed id o
+ ov) I was giving (585).
The plural forms are regular athematic forms, and you can easily recognize all
the forms in the singular, as long as you keep in mind that the regular imperfect
endings are likely to be disguised by contraction.
15 1
HOMERIC GREEK
Singular {Tldrj^l) im O (did(0/ii)

1 ETldrjV IEIV Ed'idovv
2 ETldEig lE ig E dldovg
3 eti Oei lEl e6'i 6 ov
Plural
1 ETlOEflEV lEflEV EdldoiiEV
2 eti Oete lEXE EdldoTE
3 ExiOEoav lEoav E d id o o a v
214a Optional: Learn the active and medio-passive subjunctive of verbs (950,958).
N o t e : A long vowel with a circumflex in the ending will alert you to the
subjunctive.
214b Optional: Learn the active and medio-passive optative of -jii verbs (953, 959).
The suffix -I (the regular optative suffix) with the short stem of the -jii verbs
will alert you to the optative. Notice, however, that the active forms of the optative
use the suffix plus the endings -r]v, -tjg, -tj in the singular (e.g. t i Q e i t j v , ri9eiT]g,
Tideitj, etc.). The aorist optative uses the second aorist stem {Be-, ie-, do-).
214c Optional: Learn the infinitives of -fii verbs (955,961).
Present active lara/XEV TlOi/XEV lEflEV didOjUEv

ioT dêvai TiOe/xEvai lEjUEVat didofiEvai
Aorist active OTfjvai deivai s lv a i dovvai
{d s fiE v a i) {sfiEvai) (do/iEvai)
Notice that the aorist infinitives of irjfii, and d'ldcofii use the second aorist stem.
The medio-passive infinitives of -fii add the regular ending -oOai directly to the
short stem: zidEoOai, dEoOai, etc.
214d Optional: Learn the participles o f -fii verbs (956, 962).

As is often the case, the medio-passive forms are regular: add the endings
-fiEvog, r), ov to the short-grade stem of the verb (962).
The active participles, like those for thematic verbs, are 3-1-3 adjectives. From
what you know of nag, n d o a , ndv, you should be able to guess the stem o f /ordg,
ioT d oa, ioTdv, as well as the second aorist ordg, a r d a a , ozd v . (Notice their
accents, however.) From your knowledge of the aorist passive participle xo^codsig
and the adjective ;t;ap/e;g, you should be able to determine the stem of TiQsig,
iid E iaa, xiBev and of the second aorist OElg, d sia a , dsv, as well as of the participles
of irjî (742). Accents on the active participles of -/i; verbs try to remain on the last
vowel of the stem (e.g., on the first o of diddvzog). Consult 741 for the full declen
sion of didovg, d iS o v o a , didou . The second aorist participle dovg, d o v o a , dov
looks exactly like the present minus the reduplication.
152
L E S S O N 34
215 VOCABULARY
d - ( d -) prefix denoting likeness, union, association with, intensification, (cf. aXoxoq
below)
d y o p e v o ) , d Y o p tu o o ), r i v o p e v o a (cf. dyopi] and dyeipw) speak, say, tell, harangue,
address an assembly
a>.oxo5, oti. fi (cf. Xixoc) wife, spouse
d|iiEiV(»v, ov better, braver, superior, preferable; irregular compar. o f dyaGoq, 754
d : I 6 X ^ v ^ l , d :ro X c o (o )(o , d :i(o X e o (o )a , d n o X co X a (s te m s : 6 ^ - , b'kt-, o X o -)
(c f oXekco) destroy, kill, ruin; middle, die, perish (utterly)
aoq. to build, stature, size, form, body, structure
e0eXo) (0e>,(o), E0E>.iio(o, TiGEXqoa, T|0EXt|Ka* (ste m s : e0e>.-, e Oe ^ e -) wish, desire,
be willing
E ifit , £o(a)o^ al (s te m : e o -) be, 964
0Eonpo:iEO) prophesy, foretell, declare an oracle, inquire o f a god, interpret the
divine will
KOvpiSio;, ri, ov lawfully wedded, wedded in youth
oiKoi [oiKog locative, 657, 714], at home (c f the accent of the nom. plur., oiK oi)
JipoPovXofiai, JipoPovXTjoonai*, — >JipoPEôvXa, :ipop£pov>.T]âi*,
n p o E P o v X T |0 iiv * (s te m s : P o r X - , P o v Xe -) prefer, wish (for something) rather
than (another thing)
0605, r], ov (= ado5 = odpog) (c f comparat. oacoxepoq) safe, sound, unhurt,
unharmed, well
<pvfj, fi<;, Ti form, nature, beauty, growth, appearance, character
XEpEUOv, ov worse, inferior (754:3)
Xpvatiig, i6oq, fi Chrysei's, daughter of Chryses
Related words: Apollyon; ontology (584-585).
216 Translate:
1. OeojiponsovTEg iv A xaioT oi fidvTieg d y o p e v o v a iv a g (that) 6r]
A y a^ e^ v ov oq eveKa £Kt]j36Xog revxî aX yea, ovvek ' o v k i]deX£ deâoO ai d y A d ’
d jio iv a Kovprjg X pvorjidog (979:5). 2. AyafiE^vmv ovk Tjdele deâoQ ai d iio iv a ,
£7i£i .lo k v (733, 781) /ioiUfra; e'x £iv rfjv Kovprjv avxr]v o ik o i . 3. JipofiovXôeTai
AyanE^vcov X p v o tjld a KXviaiîvôTpr]g Kovpidlrjg dXdxov; (988). 4. X pvatjtg
OVK EOTi x£p£i(ov KXvTai/Avtjorpijg (988), o v d i/ia g o v d s (pvrjv o vt ' d p <ppevag
ovTE XI ep y a (1014). 5. ideX ovoiv A x a io i dofiE vai ndXiv E kiK anida Kovprjv,
El TO y ’ E o z i v d fX E iv o v , E jiE i f i o v l o v x a i X a d v Eiuai o d o v f j { r a t h e r t h a n )
d j i o X i o d a i . 6. dodEitj (918) t] K o v p t ] n a r p i <piX(p. 7. E o z t] is p E v g X p v o r j g ev
o r p a T a A x a i a v K a i eU ooex' A y a n E f i v o v a . d X X ' o v d ’ a g n a i g <p'dr] exeOt]
{x'i9r ] fii) J i a x p i ev x £ p o i v .
153
HOMERIC GREEK

Iliad, 109-117
icai vvv £v A a v a o io i deonpoTiecov a y o p ev eiq ,
mg 8i] r o v d ’ eveko. ocpiv £Kr]fi6koi; a X y ea tevx ei , 110
o v v ek ’ iyd) Kovpt]q Xpvorj'idoc, a y k d ’ d n o iv a
oi)K e Oeôv d E ^ ao d ai, — ejiei JioXi) fiovX oju ai av rrjv
oiK o i EXEiv. K ai y a p p a K X v ratfiv ijorp rjg J ip o fU P o v la ,
Kovpidirjg d k o x o v , ejiei o v eOev ear; X£p£io)v,
o v dEfxag o vdh (pvfjv o v r' d p <ppEvag o v t e ti k'pya. 115
d/lAd Kai mg e OeXo) ddfiEvai n d k iv , si to y ’ dfiEivov-
(io v X o ^ ’ Eyd)}iadv o d o v E/A/.iEvai if dnoXEoQai.
218 Notes
109. Kai vvv, as proof of his assertions. — d y o p E V E ig ; contemptuously, yow p/ajy
the demagogue.
110. W5: 1154:1. —toC 5’: explained by owVem in line 111.
111. Kovpiig: 979:5.
112. avTTjV: the girls own self, as contrasted with the ransom. —JioXv: 780-781.
113. pa KXvtai|iiVT|OTpii5: 524,988.
114. e 0 ^ [eo ]'. 993.
115. Scfiag, (pvijv, (ppEva5, epya (p^pya): 1014. —t i: 780-781.
116. Kai; even.
117. E ^ in e v a i:= Eivai, pres, in f of e ' i^ i . — rather than.
219 Translate:
1. You prophesy to the Danaans and harangue them, saying that it is on
account of me that the free-shooter is causing them countless woes. 2. For this
(reason) the free-shooter caused many woes for the Achaeans, and he will still
cause them, because Agamemnon was not willing to accept the splendid ransom
for the bright-eyed maiden Chryseis. 3. Agamemnon wished to have her at home,
since he greatly preferred her to Clytemnestra, his lawful wife. 4. Chryseis is not
inferior to Clytemnestra, either in build, in beauty, or in accomplishments. 5. If
that is better, Agamemnon will be willing to give back the bright-eyed maiden to
her dear father. 6. We wished the people to be safe rather than to perish.
154
Lesson 35
IRREGULAR VERBS {einiy, ENCLITICS

I l ia d , 1 1 8 -1 2 5
220 Learn the present and imperfect indicative active of eiî {so-) be, exist (964).
Singular Present Im perfect

1 Eifii ?/a
2 eoai ôQa
3 eari m v (^ v )
Plural
1 eifisv tjfiEV
2 eoTE fixe
3 e io i fjo a v
The original present stem of e i f i i was s o - , still visible in the forms e o a i , e o t i and
fare. The a , however, vanished when it fell between two vowels (or between a
vowel and a or v), leaving behind traces of its earlier presence in the form of a
diphthong (e.g. the e i of e i u i , e i / x e v . and e i o i ) . The second person singular indica
tive preserves the original personal ending, -o i. The a disappeared altogether in the
imperfect (augmented stem 7 -). In the plural of the imperfect, as is usually the case
with athematic verbs, the forms are regular.
For the subjunctive ( m . e r ] g , etc.) and optative { e 'i r jv , e i r jg . etc.), as well as alter
native forms of the indicative, consult 964.
When the accent of a first principal part of a verb is not recessive, but appears
on its last syllable (as it does in eifxi and <pt]/xi), the present indicative active o f this
verb is enclitic.
221a Optional: Learn how enclitics affect accents (553-559).

An enclitic is a word that clings to the word that precedes it; another way to
think of it is that the enclitic leans tow ard (the root kXiv - means to lean) the pre
vious syllable. Those of you who know Latin should be reminded o f- q u e (the same
as T£ in Greek), which adheres to the previous word as if it were a suffix. In written
Greek the connection is indicated by the enclitic’s effect on the accent of the pre
ceding word.
Even if you do not memorize all the rules concerning enclitics, you should be
alert to some of the things that can happen to accents in their presence. When the
indefinite pronoun z i g . for example, is followed by r e , the result is r i g r e . If you did
not know that the acute accent on r i g was a gift from re, then you might think that
155
HOMERIC GREEK
r/g T£ meant and who? when it means and someone. The hst below describes some
of the effects of enclitics on accents. (See 555-559 for a more complete list.)
1) An enclitic throws an acute accent back to the ultima (14a) of the previous
word in the following situations:
• The previous word has no accent (i.e., it is a fellow enclitic): r/g re (and
som eone).
• The previous word has an acute on the antepenult): a j w l l v f i i te (words
cannot have acute accents on adjacent syllables).
• The previous word has a circumflex on the penuh (14a): o 'l K o i te (a cir
cumflex can be followed by an acute in the adjacent syllable).
2) An enclitic allows the previous word to retain an acute on its ultima: koXo^ te .
3) An enclitic does not lose its own accent in the following situations:
• It has two syllables and follows a word with an acute accent on the penult.
In the phrase i'dfiEv Tivd, for example, the accent of Tiva appears on the
ultima (second syllable) of the enclitic.
• There is no previous word.
• The previous word is elided: JidkX ’ eo OX’ eoti (there are m any g oo d
things). Notice that because of the elision, the usual accent on the ultima
in noXXa and EoQXd moves to the penult, but does not change from acute to
grave when followed by another word.
• The enclitic is being emphasized.
4) When eoti means it is possible or there exists, it is written eoti. The verb is
also written eoti ( v) when it is the first word in a sentence or clause or is
preceded by ovk , e i , Kal, mg, fi^, dAAd, or T ov f, as in ovic eotiv.
221b Other enclitics

In addition to the verbs ii/ii and <pr]ni, there are enclitic pronouns, such as Tig
(som eone) and many of the personal pronouns; conjunctions, such as te , and parti
cles, such as ys, Jisp, and toi . See 554 for a more complete list.
222 VOCABULARY
dydpaoTog, ri, ov without a prize of honor (yepag)
djiEiPw, dnei\|/(o’^, T^êl\)fa, — ^ >rmeicpOtiv* (ex)change; (mid.), answer, reply
a v tix a immediately, forthwith
Y£pa5,ao<;, x6 prize (of honor)
SaTôâi 8d o(o)ofiai, E8aa(o)dntiv, — ^5 e 5 a a ^ a i (steins: S a t-, S a te-) divide,
distribute, allot
ETOindô)*, etoindow *, T]Toiâoa (stem: EtoinaS-) prepare, make ready
KEiâi, KEioonai lie, recline, repose
k^6 io to 5, ri, ov most glorious, superl.
156
L E S S O N 35
êvaoo) (stem : >.euk -) see, behold, observe, look (at)

^Cviiio5,ri, ov common (stock, possessions)
0 10 5, ri. ov alone, sole, only
Jio5dpKiig, eq swift-footed
nov (encl.), any way, anywhere, some way, somewhere, somehow, perhaps
jiwg how? in what way?
(piXoKTEavtitaTog, r|, ov superl. most avaricious, most greedy of gain
Related words: cemetery; kudos.
223 Translate:
1. h o i f i d a o / ^ e v a v r i K a y e p a g A y a ^ i f i v o v i , o < p pa f if j o i o g A x a i S v e j]
2. j i d v r e g A x o l io i X e v o o o v o i v o t i
d y e p a o T o g , t o y e y a p o i i d t e o i k e v { e ik c o ) .
3. r j ^ e n i f d f i E d a a v a K x a K a i E in o f iE V .
y s p a g A y a n e u v o v o q e p x s T a i a lX r }.
4. JioddpKtjg d w g AxdXEvg eijie fiv d ov KpaiEpov A ya^ sfivovt Kvdlarco,

(piXoKTEavardTw 6 e :idvTcov a v d p a v . 5. A x a io i EKJiEpoovoi nokXd e k XaS>v
jwXimv Kai d d o o v z a i n dv x a X da. 6. o v daaopLEv yEpag A yafiE fivovi, ov y a p
EXOfiEVJiov ^vv)]ia KEifiEva (1027).
Iliad, 118-125
a m d p E fio i y e p a g a v x i x ' E r o i f i d o a z ’ , d ( p p a fif] o lo g
A p y E i c o v d y i p a a x o g eco, ejiei o v 5 e eoikev-
X ev ooete y a p t o ys Jidvxeg, 0 fio i y ep ag EpxExai aXXr].'' 120

Tov d ’ rifiEifiET’ e jie n a JtoddpKTjg d iog AxiXXevg-
“ ATpeidrj, Kvdiaxe. (piXoKxeavmaxE ndvxcov,
n ag y d p xoi dcoaovoi y ip a g fXEyddvfioi A x a io i;
oiidE XI Jiov idfXEv ^vvîa KEifieva noXXd,
dX/M xd jXEv jioXicov Eênpddonev, xd d e d a o x a i, 125
225 Notes
118. EHoi; 997
119. “Even if I should not demand a ytp a? as justly due to me in return for my
giving back mine, common decency would require that the king should have
one, and thus not be lacking in this matter of honor, while all the other chief
tains have prizes.” In the society of the Iliad, a hero is who he is by virtue of
his status, the role he plays. Status dictates both what a hero is obligated to
do for his society and what that society owes him in return, the honor due
him. The prize of honor { y e p a g ) is physical confirmation of status, and so to
withhold it is to challenge a hero’s very identity. Thus Agamemnon’s demand
for an equivalent prize is prompted by his feeling of wounded honor and by
his inherent sense of the prerogatives due to his status as king, and not by
157
HOMERIC GREEK
avarice as Achilles thinks (line 122). His demand for immediate ( a v iix ’)
recompense, however, is unreasonable, and Achilles clearly shows it to be
impracticable without committing an injustice to the others. But Achilles
goes entirely too far in insulting the king and accusing him of avarice beyond
all other men.
120. o = OTi: that (explaining t o y e)—fioi: dat. of interest, 988, or of disadvantage,
997-998.
124: litotes (an affirmative expressed by the negative o f the contrary; e.g. “not
unlikely” instead of “quite likely”) with a touch of the sarcastic in jwkXd. —t i
780-781. —iSjiEV: see o id a (perf of eidco) 966. —^CvT|ia: used substantively,
1027, com m on stores.
125. td , td: the first of these should be translated as a relative, the second as a
demonstrative used substantively: W hat(ever) we took as p lu n d er. . . this
(literally, these things) has been divided. —eênpdOonev: eicnipdo}.
—S tS a a x a i: singular verb with neuter plural subject, 973:1; the perfect
tense indicates that the matter is settled, and not to be reconsidered. The
Greeks had not yet been able to take Troy, but they had captured and
plundered many cities of the Troad, and a good amount of spoil had been
taken and distributed among the soldiers.
226 Translate:
1. The Achaeans will prepare another gift of honor immediately for Agamem
non, in order that not alone of all the Argives he may be without a prize of honor;
for it is not seemly. 2. They all see that the prize of the king is going elsewhere.
3. Thereupon all the Achaeans answered the swift-footed, godlike Achilles. 4. The
son of Atreus was the most glorious, but the most avaricious of all men, for he was
not willing to give his own prize of honor back to her beloved father, because he
did not see many common (stores) lying about, and what the great-souled
Achaeans sacked from the cities had been divided (pluperfect, 910).
227 Optional: At this point you should m ake another thorough review, similar to the
one at the end o f Lesson 27.
158
Lesson 36
MORE IRREGULAR VERBS

Il ia d , 1 2 6 -1 3 2
Preliminaries
The present indicative of eifî, come, go, will go (965), usually has a future sense.
(The present tense of epxo/uai often substitutes for the present.)
Like other -fii verbs, ei/ii uses different stems in the singular (ei-) and plural
(/'-). You met the /- stem of this verb in a present participle, when Agamemnon told
the priest Chryses that he did not want to see him coming (id y ra) back again later
(line 27). Unlike the indicative, the present participle is not treated as a future.
228a (For recognition) The present indicative of eifii and eifii (964-965)
Present indicative forms of £ijui and eifii are easy to confuse. To help distin
guish them, keep in mind that f //<; is enclitic, whereas ei/ii is not, but follows the
usual (recessive) rules for accenting verbs.
Compare the two verbs in the present indicative;
eifii eifii
(he, exist) (come, go)
Singular (stems) a?- ) (£ / •-)
1 eifii eifii
2 eooi ek
3 eoxi eioi
Plural (stems) (k - ) a-)
1 eifiiu ifiev
2 eare lie
3 eioi I'aoi
228b (For recognition) The imperfect of eifii and eifii (964-965)

Compare the two verbs in the imperfect (964-965).
In this tense neither verb is enclitic, so you must pay close attention to their
stems. Thanks to the stem ei- there is an iota (sometimes a subscript) in all the
forms of the present and imperfect of eifii. There is no iota in the imperfect forms
of eifii (whose stem is f-).
159
HOMERIC GREEK
eifii El Ul
(augmented stem) in-) {t]i- or//-)

Singular
1 fjia
T
2 fjoda fje ig or fje ia O a
3 fjev i^v) f}ei
Plural
1 fjofiev {fiixEv)
2 fjxe TJTE
3 ^ oav i]w av i^ aav )
229a Learn the present indicative middle of Kei/xai lie, recline, is placed (968), and
^ /iai sit (969).
Both verbs are athematic: their personal endings adhere directly to the stems,
icei- and ijo-. Like other athematic verbs they use -a a i (instead of -ai) for the second-
person singular ending. There are two apparent irregularities. First, in the para
digm for ^/xai, the o of the stem disappears before / i o r v (and there is just one o in
the second singular iqoai). Second, for iceTfiai Homeric Greek prefers the ending
- a r a i (instead o f - vtui) in the third-person plural (i^ and a are related, as is shown
in the accusative singular ending of the third declension).
Singular
1 K£t/uai rjnai
2 KEioai rjaai
3 KEixai ÔTai
Plural
1 KElflEda ijfieOa
2 keio Be ô6e
3 KEiaTai ^vxai
229b Learn the imperfect medio-passive of iceTfiai (968) and ^juai (969).
The imperfect is also athematic. The endings are the regular secondary (past
tense) endings for medio-passive verbs, except for -o o in place of -o. You should
now be able to conjugate iceTfiai and ^/âi in the imperfect. Keep in mind, however,
that, as in the present tense, the a of the stem disappears before ^ or i' (and there is
just one o in the second singular i]ao). Consult 968-969 to check your work.
230 Conjugate (prjfii, say, speak in the present and imperfect active (967).
If you can conjugate 'I'ortjfii in the present and imperfect indicative active, you
can conjugate this verb. The only difference is that in the present indicative (prj/il is
enclitic, as you can tell from its accent {(prjî, not (pfj/xi). Remember to change the
160
L E S S O N 36
Stem from long to short-grade in the plural in both the present and imperfect.
231 Learn or<5a/enow (966).

You first met o id a in Lesson 28, where it appears as the perfect of eidco see /
fin d out. Like other verbs in the perfect indicative, o id a is present in meaning: I
have s e e n /fo u n d out (in the intellectual sense) means I (now) know. The pluperfect,
then, means /knew. The perfect and pluperfect of this verb have three different stems:
oid -, id-, sid e-. In the singular o id a uses regular perfect endings. In the plural it
uses the id- stem, to which the endings are attached without a thematic vowel. This
stem, however, changes to io- before the endings -re and -a a i.
Singular (stem a id -) Plural (stem id-)

1 o id a 1 idêv
2 o id a g ( o io d a ) 2 lOXE
3 o id e 3 la a a i
232 (For recognition) The pluperfect of o i d a

The pluperfect of o id a is more challenging, especially in the singular (966).
Just as with the perfect, the singular and plural use different stems { s id E - , id - ) . You
met the pluperfect fjd > ] in line 70 of the Iliad, where it is said that Calchas the seer
knew ( jjd t j) what is, what will be, and what was. Not all forms appear in Homer.
Singular (stem e id e -) Plural (stem id -)
1 fjd e a 1
2 fjd > ]o ( d a ) 2
3 jjd)] 3 i 'o a v
Being able to distinguish the following sets of similar forms is probably more
important than learning all their Homeric forms outright. At the very least, you
should be aware that they are easily confused with one another, so that you will
consult a grammar when in doubt.
Singular Imperfect: e i ,u i be Imperfect: eifii go Pluperfect: o id a know

(n o ;) (notice the i) (notice the i+ d )
1 >ja ijia fjd E a
2 rjoOa fje ig or f j e i o d a fjd t jo (6 a )
3 t]EV (}jv) fje i
Plural
1 7]Hev ijoflEV {fiflEv) idfiEV (T)
2 }]T£ ^TE lOTE (T)
3 r jo a v fjio a v ifjo a v ) lo a v (T)
161
HOMERIC GREEK
In the plural the present indicative of Eifii can also easily be confused with the
perfect and pluperfect of o Jd a .
Plural e lm go o Jd a know o i d a (p lu p e rfe c t) k n e w

1 i'/UEV idflEV (i) —
2 he iaref/j —
3 la o i i'aaoi (I) lo a u
233 VOCABULARY
djioTiv®, djtoTioM, drterloa, dreoT^xlKa, d n oT^nojiai, d™cTio0t|v* (stems: te i-,
TI-, Tivp-) repay, requite, recompense, atone for
£â)â:Td^(a, i^ aX an a^ a, e^t)>.dn:aâ (stem: d>.a:iaY-) sack utterly, destroy
utterly
CTayeipo), — ereriYEipa, — ÊJiayiiYEpnai (stem: dytp-) collect,
gather (together)
*EJiefKM, — i i ETieoiKa (stems: pEiK-, poiK-, piK-) p erf. used as pres, be
seemly, be fitting
5
e v te (x e o , ov well-walled
0EO EIK EX .O 9 , T|, ov godlike
kXeJITW, KÊ\)/<0*, EK>.E\|/a, K^KXotpa**, EKX^<p01]Vt (EK>.dntlV)*
(stems: kXe^-, kXoji-, KXaji-) steal, be stealthy, deceive, hide
V005, o\), 6 mind, plan, purpose
68e, i]8e, t 68e this, that; he, she, it
OVTO) (ovTtog) thus, so, in this way
jiaXiXXoyog, r|, ov gathered together again, re-collected, re-assembled
Jiap^pxoâi, ;lapEX£vooâl, n;apti^0ov (jiapT|Xv0ov), napE>.r|>,v0a
(jiapEXT|Xov0a ) (stems: Epx*, £>^0-, eXv0-, eXed0-) evade, pass by, outwit,
elude, circumvent
71001 (e n c l.) ever, at any time
np oitm i, np0T|0(a, n:po^Ka (jtpoiiKa), JipoEiKa*, Jip oE ijiai*, :ipoE(0iiv send
forward, send forth, give up
TETpare>kii fourfold, quadruply
tpiJiXi] threefold, triply
Tpo(i|,r|i;, n Troy
Related words: kleptomania(c), klepsydra; tetragon, tetrahedron, tetrameter;

triple(t), trigonometry, trimeter, tripod.
234 Translate:
1. EJiEoiKEv A x a io v g y s p a a naXiXXoya fiaaiX fji EJiayEipEiv; 2. vvv fikv
A yafiE fivav Jip o ijo ei X p v a rjld a Kovprjv iXiKcomda dsS EKTj^dXcp, v a x e p o v 6 ’
162
L E S S O N 36
A x a io i x d v d jio T io o v a iv . 3. d c o a ei Z e v g A x a i o l o i v n o Q i e ^ a X a n d ^ a i T p o ir jv
j i o X i v E V T E ix E O V . 4. A x a i o i jip o o £ ( p a o a v A x i^ fjo . Jio d d p K e a . 5. a y a Q b q fis v eo ti
d E O E iiC E X o g A x i ^ ^ e i 'i ^ . k X e ^ t e i 6 e v o a K a i e Oe X e i n a p E k d e i v A y a j i E f i v o v a
dvaK xa avdpav.
235 Read and translate;
Iliad, 126-132
X aovg ^ ' o i> K L ie o ik e :ja U X lo y a r a v r ’ in a y E ip E iv . 126
a X X a a v f i k v v v y r T j v d E Oe & J i p o s q , a v x a p A x a i o i
x p i J i X j] T E T p a j d f ] r ’ a n o r i a o n E v , a i k e n o d i Z E v q
d a a i n o h v T p o iT jy e v t e ix e o v E ^ a X a jid ^ a i
x d v 6 ' d n a f X E i f i d f i E v o c , J i p o o E f r ] K p E ic o v A y a f i E / x v a v - 130
“ f i f j d r ] o ijT c o g , d y a O o g J i E p e a v , d E O E iK E k ' A x i ^ ^ e v ,
k X e jit e v 6 ( o , E JiE i o i ' J i a p E X s v o E a i a i d e : f i E J i E i o E i g .
236 Notes
126. la o v q : 971.
127. Jipoe; [ j i p o i r j ^ i ] : 2nd aor. imperat. (954).
128. TpiJiXfi TETpaJiXi] t ’; threefold, even fourfold.
129. 8w(oi): 950 {tjfiTi’). —JioXiv: object of i^ aX ajid^ ai.
131. 5r| 0VTW5: synizesis, 586. —dyaOog n tp ewv (concessive): although you are
brave.
132. v6(p: 1009. —:iapE>.ev)OEai is a figure taken from the race-course: you shall
not pass (me). Agamemnon begins his speech as did Achilles (line 122), by
addressing his opponent with a highly honorable title, which is immediately
followed by an abusive term.
237 Translate:
1. What the Achaeans sacked from the well-walled cities has been divided,
and Agamemnon is not willing to gather this together again from the people.
2. If Agamemnon will give up his prize of honor to the gods, the Achaeans will
recompense him threefold, even fourfold, if ever the gods who have Olympian
homes should grant (opt., 953) to them to sack utterly the well-walled city of
Priam. 3. The Achaeans answered (the) widely ruling (king) Agamemnon and
said, “Though you are (participle) very brave in war, divine son of Atreus, do not
be stealthy in mind, for it is not fitting for a very mighty king to outwit the people
and persuade them evilly.”
163
Lesson 37
PREPOSITIONS
Il ia d , 133-141
Preliminaries
Greek prepositions began their lives as adverbs, words that express how, when, and
where. In fact, they are often used as adverbs in the Homeric poems; Kpaxepdv eni
juvdov ET£?.?.£i’, he enjoined a stern command thereupon. As Greek evolved, adverbs
combined with verbs to form compound verbs, such as imzEXXco. You will some
times see the earlier “uncombined” use referred to as tmesis, which means “a cutting
apart”—that is, the removal of the prefix from the verb. But the term is misleading
because prepositions began as independent adverbs, which then adhered to verbs
(1048-1049).
238 Prepositions and cases (1048-1061)

In addition to the adverbial usage, there are prepositional phrases consisting of
a preposition plus a noun (or pronoun) in the genitive, dative, or accusative. Origi
nally the cases alone expressed spatial relations (place from, place where, motion
toward). The addition of prepositions (i.e., adverbs) to the cases helped to empha
size or define more clearly certain case relations (1052). Whereas the genitive on its
own can express from , Kaxd with the genitive expresses down from . Consequently,
although you may hear that a preposition governs or takes a certain case, in fact the
case has “taken on” the preposition.
Some prepositions (djio, n p d , e k ) appear only with objects in the genitive
(1056); others { e v , e v ' i, e i v , ovv I^ v v ) with objects in the dative (1058); still others
(eig /eg, and the suffix -ê) with the accusative. With some prepositions, however,
you will find objects in several cases, depending on their meaning. You have
already met several of these: d i d , K a r a , d^<p'i, d v d , e j i ' i, J i a p d , fiE zd.
When used as verbal prefixes, d i d , e k , K a r d , o r o v u may express completion
(e.g., EK-JiEpOo) means sack utterly). The objects of many compound verbs (espe
cially those with the prefixes e v -, e j i ' -i , and o v v - ) are in the dative. In other words, if
you find a dative and are not sure how it functions, look around for a compound
verb. So-called improper prepositions, on the other hand, do not form compound
verbs. Many of them appear with objects in the genitive: d v r l o v , ndX iv, ay/, TrjXodi,
EVEKa lEivEica (1057).
If you do not know the meaning of any of the prepositions above, look them
up in the general Greek-English vocabulary at the back of this book.
164
L E S S O N 37
239 Prepositions and accents (1050)

A preposition of two syllables is accented on its final syllable except in the
following two situations:
• when its object precedes it: ejii 9Tva, but d lv ’ e<p’ aXog, upon the shore o f
the sea;
• when the preposition stands for itself com p ou nd ed with a verb like e i fi i:
oil y a p Tig uexa roTog av /jp . There is am ong [fiereori] (them ) no such man.
240 VOCABULARY
A ia 5, avxo<;. 6 Ajax, leader o f the troops from Salamis
a ip E b ), a ip ii o o ) , ee X o v ( t i X o v , 584-585), f lp t iK a * , f l p t m a i * , f|p E 0t iv * (ste m s:
aipE-, eX-) take, seize, deprive, (mid.) choose

a k q , aXoq. b. f) sea, brine
d v td ^ io g , r|. ov equivalent, of equal value
d :t o § ^ S 6 ) ^ l, d n o Sco ao ), dTiEScoica, d j i o S E S u K a * , d :I o 5 £ S o ^ a l , d 7i£ 566 t ]v (s te m s:
6 (0-, 8 o -> give back, return, give away, pay

dpapioKO), — ripoa (iipapov), dptfpa, — i^pOiiv (s te m : dp-) join, fit, suit,
adapt, adjust
avT (05 in the sam e way, thus, so, as m atters now are
8 e v )0 |u a i, S e v i j o o n a i , E5 E V » io a (s te m s : 5 e v - , 8eve-) lack, need, be in want
Eprw, Epv)[o](i), E ip v o (o )a , ------» Eipv(o)nai (s te m s : pspv-, P P ^ -) draw, drag,
launch
f i n a l (s te m : f|o -) sit, be seated
ÊXotg, aivot. av black, dark, dusky (732)
HETacppdô)*, nETa<ppdo(o*, nETE(ppaoa (nETEJi^cppaSov), jiEtajiEcppaKa**,
H E T a jtE q > p a o n a i* , n E T E (p p d o 0 iiv (s te m : q>p a 5 -) tell, point out, declare; mid.,
consider later, plan hereafter, reflect on later
’0 6 v o ( o ) e v 5, fioq, 6 Odysseus (Ulysses), leader o f the troops from Ithaca
o:i(n)(05 in order that, that, how (that)
TE0 5 , 11 , 6 v thy, thine, your(s)
Related words: salt, saline (603-604), halite; axiom(atic); dose, dowry;

melanoma.
241 Translate:
1 . oi'K id s X e i A y u X e v g A y a /u e fiy o y a d e v o n e v o v tjo G a i, d f p a v r d g ex !l
y e p a g . 2. A yaîej-ivcov tjoT u i avTcog d e v o f is v o g , K ek eT a i (5’ A x i^ fja y e p a g
d j i o d o v v a i . 3. /u ey d d v /u og A x d X e v g o v 6a>oei A y a ^ e fi v o v i jioXX d y e p a ( a ) ,
d p o a g TO. k u t u Qvîov, o m a g e o o v r a i (1119) d v T a ^ ia . 4. e i d e k £ fifj b m m oiv
A x a i o i fi e y d d v f io i y e p a g A y a fie ju v o v i, d p o a v x e g to r a r d d v fio v , o ju o g E o x a i
165
HOMERIC GREEK
avTog k e v e X r jT u i f j y e p a g A x i ^ f j o c , f j A i a v x o g f j ’O d v a r j o g .
a v T d ^ io v ,
5. A y a ^ ifiv a v ia v ekrjTai y ep aq, eXav de t o a^ ei, Axi^êvg 6e k e KEXoXcooETai

ifut. perf., 910; transl. as fu t ) , 6 te ro v kev A yafisfivcov iKrjxai (1151). 6. n d v x E q
A x a io i fiETE(ppdt,ovTo x a m a Kui a m i g . 7. E ipvaav vfjag fiE kalvag E ig aX a d iav .
Iliad. 133-141
?/E 0 E ? .e ig . d < p p ' a v T o g e x r j g y s p a g , a v r d p e^ ’ am cog
iq o d a i d E v o f i E v o v , K E k s a i 6 e fiE T i ju d ' d j i o d o v v a i ;
d X X ' El fiE v d c o o o v a i y s p a g f iE y d d v f i o i A x a i o i , 135

d p a a v x E g K a x d Q v fio v , o ju o g d v x d ^ i o v E o x a i —
E l 6 e k e fit ] d a c o o iv , E y a 6 e k e v a v x d g E k c o ^ a i
f j X E O v f j A i a v x o g l a v y s p a g , f j 'O d v o r j o g
d ^ c o e X cov - 6 6 e k e v K E X o X c o o E x a i, o v k e v iK c o /u a i.
dXX ' f] x o i fiE V x a v x a f i E x a t p p a o o f i E o d a K a i a v x i g , 140

v v v d ’ d y E v t j a f i E l a i v a v E p v o o o ^ E V E lg d X a d i a v ,
243 Notes
133. exH5: 1115-1116. —6q)p’ avroc, exT15 parenthetical.
137. eXftinai: 1140:2.
138. Observe how the addition of Imv makes the picture definite and adds a touch
of the dramatic.
139. K£xoX,(6o£Tai: fut. perfect; transl. as fut. — 6 v : whom[ever]. — ^K O )âl: 1146.
141. epvooo|iiev [ipvoco/uEv]: 800, 1098. —ne>i,aivav pepvaoonev, 526.
244 Translate:
1. Surely we do not wish (that) the son o f Atreus (should) sit (inf.) lacking in
this way, in order that we ourselves may keep (our) prizes of honor; and we do not
order him to give back the flashing-eyed maiden to her dear father. 2. We will give
the great-souled Achaeans many prizes of honor, adapting them to their desire, so
that they will be equivalent (to what they lost). 3. If we do not give (him one), the
son of Atreus himself will seize either your prize, or (that) of Ajax, or o f Odysseus,
and when he has seized {aor. participle) (that prize), he will lead (it) to the broad
camp of the Achaeans. 4. If Agamemnon should come upon (opt.) Achilles, he
would perchance be enraged { k e v with opt.). 5. But he considered this also after
ward. 6. We will now drag many swift black ships into the divine sea.
166
Lesson 38
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
Il ia d , 1 4 2 -1 5 1
Prelim inaries
Adjectives have three degrees of comparison: positive (faithful or swift), compara

tive (m ore faith fu l or swifter), and superlative (most faithfu l or swiftest). In Enghsh
(as in Greek) adding the word m ore (fidXXov) to a positive adjective creates a com
parative adjective; adding the word most ( fid h o v a ) creates a superlative. But the
usual practice in Greek is to add a suffix, just as with the English swift-er and swift-est.
In Greek, however, the comparative sometimes means rather faithfu l or rather
swift, and the superlative very faith fu l or very swift.
245 Learn to form comparative and superlative adjectives (747-753).

Regular comparative and superlative adjectives are usually formed in two ways.
1) For adjectives that end in - o g , - r j, - o v , replace those endings with -o rep o g or

-c o x e p o c , (i.e., add the new endings to the stem of the adjective) to create the com
parative, and with -o ru T o g or -co T a z o g to create the superlative. The resulting
adjectives decline like K a X o g , t], 6 v .
How will you know when to add -o x E p o g (-o x u T o g ) and when to add -m e p o g
(-co ra T o g )?
• If the penult of the stem of the adjective is long (either by nature or posi
tion), then use the short endings ( - o x e p o g l - o z a r o g ) .
• If the penult is short, add the long endings ( - c o T E p o g l - a r a T o g ) .
The penult o f T iio T o g ( t r u s t w o r t h y ) , for example, is long by position, while that of

fx a X a K o g (s o ft) is short.
Positive Comparative Superlative

- o g ,t ],o v -T £pog,T],ov - T a r o g . r j.o v
moTog nioTOTEpog moTOTazog
fiu A U K o g fiaX aK co z ep o g / x a X a ic m a z o g
2) For adjectives ending in -vg or -pog, add -icov (masculine and feminine) and
- lo v (neuter) to the stem to create the (3-3) comparative adjective; add -lazog, rj,
o v to create the (2 - 1 -2 ) superlative.
167
HOMERIC GREEK

sweet tjdvg rjdimv, fjdiov rjdioTog, t], ov
sham eful a io x p o q aiox'icov, a ia x io v aiaxioT og, rj, ov
These comparative adjectives decline like afiEivcov, dfiEivov (731). What is the
stem of tjdlcov, rjdiov^
246a Irregular comparative and superlative adjectives (754)

Like the English adjectives good, better, and best, many of the most common
adjectives in Greek have irregular comparative and superlative forms. Memorize
the irregular adjectives in the following chart. (Instructors may want to assign
additional adjectives in 754.) You have already met some of them. Pay close atten
tion to the entries. Which adjectives are like KaXdg, du'? Which are 3-3 adjectives
and what are their stems?
dyadog d p em v , ov apioTog, t], ov

dnelvojv, ov
jiekxepog, r],ov
Kpazvg or /cpazepog Kpe'ioocov, ov KpaTiozog, t], ov
(pepxepog, t], ov (pepxarog, rj, ov
KUKOg KaKimv, lov KaKioxog, T},ov
ijo o a v , ov tjKioxog, t],ov
Xeipcov, ov
jueyag fiel^ av, ov jueyioxog, rj, ov
246b Optional: Review the Iliad, identifying comparative and superlative adjec
tives as you read.
247 VOCABULARY
a v a i8Eiti,Ti(;, f] shamelessness
dpx65, o\j, 6 leader, commander, ruler, pilot, guide, chief
PovXtfcpopoi;, ov counsel-bearing, full of counsel, discreet
C15 , fiia , Ev (758) one, only, sole
EKdepyog, ou, 6 free-worker, working his will, Apollo
EK:iaY>^05, ov terrible, awful, dread(ful), frightful, fearful
EJiiEw Dm (E<pEwOm), £q>Eo((T)(o, Eq»Eo(o)a,-- i Eq»£^âl (EcpEaâl) (stem: pEO-)
{both with an d without elision o f the prep.) clothe, invest
EJiiTti6£i; (adv.) sufficiently, in sufficient numbers, appropriately, suitably
£p^Tti5, ao, 6 oarsman, rower, sailor
"I8oh£VEV5, fioq, 6 Idomeneus, com m ander o f the forces fro m Crete
lEpov, ot), TO sacrifice, sacred rite, victim for sacrifice (1168)
Ka>,îndpi]o;, ov beautiful-cheeked, fair-cheeked
168
L E S S O N 38
KtpSaXfocppwv, ov crafty-minded, cunning-(minded), sly, mindful of gain

6865, ot». Ti road, way, path, journey, expedition
cp(p)eâ, — i i epExOtiv (stem: ppey-) work, accomplish, do,
perform, make sacrifice
vnoSpa scowlingly, askance, looking at darkly,/rom beneath (vjw ) the brows
drawn down
w fioi alas! ah me!
Related words: anarchy, hierarchy, monarchy, oligarchy, patriarchy, archangel,

archbishop, archduke, architect; phosphorus; vestment, invest; calligraphy,
calliope, calisthenics; synod, (h)odometer.
248 Translate:
1 . A x a io i /xeyddvfioi fjy eip a v Eperaq ejiixr]de<; eig vfja fie k a iv a v . 2. eig vfjag
A yafiE fivav edtjKev sKaTOfifirjv iepfjv 6e&. 3. d v a ifjv Oofiv vfja fieX aivav
Aya/xi/^vcov e(ir]0 £v (1069) am r]v X p v o rjid a Kakki7idpr]ov. 4. cFg Tig dvfjp
(iovXr]<pdpog e o r a i d p /o g zSv A xai& v. 5. rirjkrjiddrjg EKJiayXorazog dvdpS v
E orai dpxdg Trjg vtjog. 6. AxiXXevg peêi iep d Kai iX d aerai EKdepyov AjidXXmva
Toioiv A x a io ia iv . 7. o v Tig Axuimv jipd<ppcov jietoETai enEoiv Aya/iE/xvovi
d v a id d r jv enieifievcp (1020:1; 1071) Kal KepdaXeoippovi. 8. o v Tig eOeXei o d o v
iXdelv fj d v d p d a iv fidxeoO ai i<pi.
Iliad, 142-151
eg d ’ ipsT ag EJiiTtjdEg d y eip o fiev , eg (5 ’ eKaTOfifâg
Oôfxev, d v (5’ av rtjv X p v o rjid a KaXXmdprôv
P ijoofiev . e'lg d e Tig dpxdg dvrjp fiovXr]<p6pog eaxo),
fj A'iag fj 'Idoêvevg fj dTog 'Odvoaevg 145
ije ov , rirjXeiSt], JidvTcov eKnayXoTaT' d v d p av ,
0 (pp' ijfiTv eK depyov iX d ooeai, iep d peâg."
Tov d' dp' v :w 6 p a idmv Jipooe<pr] Jiod ag ojKvg AxiXXevg-

" a fxoi, d v a id eltjv em eifiev e, KepdaXed<ppov,
jm g Tig toi Jip6<ppcov en eoiv 7ieidr]Tai A xai& v 150
fj o d o v eXdejxevai fj d v d p d o iv i<pi fidxeaO ai;
250 Notes
142. E5, E5: 1048-1049. —dyEipojiEv: 800, 1098.
143. 0f|ojiFV [TiOtjfii]: 800, 1098. —av = d v d . 1048-1049, 567.
144. Pt|oofiev: 1049, 800, 1069, 1098. eoTto: 964.
146-147. iXdooEai: 800, 1115-1116. —itp d p^ôlg: (by) perform ing sacrifices.
149. d v a i8eitjv 1020:1; 1071. en iE in ^ e= Ecpein^ve, voc. of the perf.
participle. Observe the accent.
169
HOMERIC GREEK
150. TOi: 997. —EJieaiv: 996. — JiEiOtitai; 1100. Observe the alliteration of n in
this verse.
151. 686v: 1012. —dvSpdoiv: 1007.
251 Translate:
1. But come, let us drag the swift black ships into the divine sea, collect
therein oarsmen in sufficient numbers, place in (them) many sacred hecatombs,
and embark (cause to go on board) many beautiful-cheeked maidens. 2 . Some
counsel-bearing man shall be commander. 3. Neither Ajax nor Idomeneus nor the
divine Odysseus was cowardly, but they feared the son of Peleus, most terrible of
men. 4. Will you perform sacrifices and appease the free-worker for us? 5. We
glowered (looked askance) at the swift-footed Achilles and addressed him.
6. Alas! how many of the great-souled Achaeans will zealously obey a crafty-
minded man clothed in shamelessness, either to go on an expedition or to fight
mightily with men?
170
Lesson 39
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

Il ia d , 152-157
252 Adverbs
Adverbs tell you such things as how, when, or where. The variety of forms of
adverbs is a result of their different origins (780-788):
1) What look like prepositions are sometimes adverbs: K parepov 8 ’ eni fivdov
er£?.Aev, he commanded a harsh word thereupon.
2) The neuter accusative of an adjective (singular or plural, with or without the
demonstrative to or rd) can act as an adverb: ov dfj r a np&xa diaoztjTtjv
EpioavxE.from the time they first stood apart in a quarrel. The neuter accu
sative of comparative and superlative adjectives can act as comparative and
superlative adverbs.
3) Some adverbs are old case forms of nouns, pronouns, or adjectives that
“froze” in that case and thereafter were used adverbially (an example is
aX ka KUKag a<piEi, line 25). Adverbs of this kind have their accents on the
same syllable as the accent for the genitive plural of the adjective.
Adjective Genitive Adverb

KUAOi; ica^.3v Kal&g
KaKog KaK&v KaK&q
d/lAog aXXcov dkkcog
4) Some adverbs were formed by adding suffixes (788).
-di place where: x^XoQi {far, at a distance)

-6a or -6e { i') place where: Ev9a {there)
-Oev from a place: ovpavodEv {from heaven)
-5 e to a place: oiKadE {homeward)
-X£ denotes time: xoxe {then), oxe {when), jioxe {when^),
JTOTE {at any time, at some time)
-icig with generalizing, indefinite meaning (akin to xig, xi):
.loXXdKig {many times, often)
Other adverbs you have met include i(pi {by force), EJiEiza (then), JidXiv {back),
f i d l a {very), vvi' {now), fisxa^v {between).
253 Optional: Review the Iliad, identifying adverbs as you read.
171
HOMERIC GREEK
254 VOCABULARY
aiTiog, n, ov blamable, guilty, at fault, accountable, responsible
alx ^ iiT ii;, oto, 6 spearman, warrior
P0C5, Pooq, 6, f| cow, bull
P<oTidvEipa/ew., man-nourishing, nurturing heroes; subst., nurse of heroes
Sevpo hither, to this place, here
5T|Xnooâi, E5 t)>,t1od^t)v, — 1, StSiiX im ai* harm, hurt, destroy,
damage, wrong, ruin
e X d u , £>.d (o)(o)(o, i ] X a o ( o ) a , e X f |^ a K a * , E X r | X a ^ a i, T|)td6t iv * drive, strike, carry
on, push, press
{g en . epi[3coA.aKO(;) rich-clodded, fertile [land]
T|xiiei5, eooa, ev o n o m a t o p o e t ic , (re)echoing, roaring, (re)sounding, thundering
iroiog, o\), 6, f| horse, mare
Kapjiog, o\), 6 fruit, crop, produce, harvest
fiaxeofiai (n d x o jiai), ^ ax^ oo ^ ai (âxeo|llal), ejiaxeo(o)dm iv fight, battle
Êta^v between, intervening
ovpo; (opo;, 571), eo<;, to mountain
OKIOEI;, eooa, ev shady, shadowy
TpwE5, cov, o'l Trojans
, riq, Ti Phthia, h o m e o f A c h i l l e s , a t o w n a n d d i s t r i c t i n T h e s s a ly , in
n o rth e rn G reece
Related words: (a)etiology; bucolic, bovine; elastic(ity); echo; hippopotamus,

hippodrome, hippocrene, Hippocrates, Philip; carpogenic. Polycarp; orology, oro-
hippus; squirrel, sciomancy.
255 Translate:
1. i]W ov A x a io i S ev p o fiax r]o6fievoi evsKa Tpcocov aix^rjxacov. 2. e ia i
T p m g a h w i A x a io ia iv (998); 3. ijX doafiev j3ovg (= fio ag ) te Kai ijuiovq
Axi^tfog, Kapjw v d ' edrjXrjadfieQ’ ev 0&trj epijicoXaKi. 4. T p m g eio iv TrjXodi
(Pdtrjg (icoTiavEiprig, i o u (973:1) d e f i d l a TwXXd OKidevx’ o v p e a Kai ^xV^âa
Q d ka o o a fieza^v.
I lia d , 152-157
o v y a p e y d ) T p a a v e v e k ’ r jX v Q o v a i x f i r j r d c a v
d e v p o f ia x t ja o / x e v o g , e j i e I o v z i f i o i a h i o l e Io i v -
o v y d p m o j i o z ’ E f i d g ^ o v g r f k a o a v o v 8 e f i s v '{ j u i o v g ,
ov 6 e 7 W Z ’ e v < P 8 tf] e p i f i a k a K i ^ c o z i a v E i p r ] 155
K a p jib v E d r jX ijo a v z ’, e jie i ^ fid X a J i o k l d f ie z a ^ v ,
o v p e d ZE o K i d s v z a Q d X a a a d z e r jx ^ E O o a -
172
L E S S O N 39
257 Notes
152. Eyw; emphatic (1039), as contrasted with Agamemnon and his brother Mene-
laus, who had a strong personal interest in the success of the expedition.
— rjXvGov = rjAdov
153. juaxtioonevog; 1109:5. —t i: 780-781.
154. PoCg = fioag .
157. r|XT|eooa onomatopoetic, to represent the sound of the roaring sea.
—OKiOEVta refers to the long shadows which high mountains throw. This
verse is in apposition with 7io?ikd (used substantively) in the preceding verse.
Observe the heaping up of the first personal pronouns in this passage, to indi
cate that Achilles had no personal interest, as did Agamemnon, in the expedition.
Achilles emphasizes his own generous motives and self-sacrificing spirit in joining
the undertaking, throwing into high relief the ingratitude of Agamemnon and the
deep injustice of his selfishness. “The Trojans have never done me the slightest
harm, that I should have gone to all this trouble in making this expedition against
them.”
258 Translate:
1. We came hither to fight with the Trojan warriors; for they are blamable to
us (i.e., at fault in our opinion). 2. Once the Achaeans drove away our cattle and
horses, and destroyed our crops in fertile, man-nourishing Phthia. 3. Phthia is far
from Troy, and there are very many shadowy mountains and the roaring sea
between.
173
Lesson 40
NUMERALS
Il ia d , 158-164
Preliminaries
Students of modern languages tend to learn numerals in the first chapter of their
textbooks. There are good reasons, however, to delay their introduction in Greek.
First of all, you will not encounter many of them in the Iliad, except in the catalog
of ships in Book 2. For the most part, one, two, three, four, many, and countless suffice.
Numerals in the Iliad are spelled out, and one, three, and fo u r are even declined.
(The rest are indeclinable.) Second, Greek notation systems were cumbersome, and
they varied from place to place. The system used in inscriptions of the classical
period (fifth-fourth century b c e ) resembles Roman numerals, but it never really
caught on—and you will soon see why.
The earliest sytem was, for the most part, acrophonic; except for / = 1, a
numeral was represent by its initial letter:
r = 5 (this looks like a gamma, but is really part of the pi for FI E N T E)

A = 10 {A for d iica)
H = 100 {H is really a large rough breathing mark from the word evardi')
X = 1,000 (A" for xi^ ioi)
M = 10,000 (M for ju v p h i).
There were also multiples of some numbers: ¥{r with a small delta under its “wing”)
= 50 (5 X 10), while V { r with a small X) = 5,000 (5 x 1,000). Other large numerals
can be quite lengthy and complicated.
On the other hand, for lists, the order of the alphabet was sometimes used in
place of numbers. Even today, you will find texts in which the twenty-four books of
the Iliad are designated A, B , f , A, E, etc., while the twenty-four books of the
Odyssey are designated a , /3, y, d. e, etc.
Around the second century b c e or so, a complicated alphabetic system became
common. Consult the section on numerals in a reference grammar (such as H. W.
Smyth, Greek Grammar) and you will understand why it is unwise to trust numbers
in Greek manuscripts.
Consult 757-759 for cardinals, ordinals, and adverbs.
174
L E S S O N 40
259 Learn the declension of one, three, and fo u r (758-759).
£ig. fi'ia, ev one

Masc. Fem. Neut.
T
nom. eig fiia eV
gen. Evog fiifjg ivog
dat. EVl fiifi Ev'l
accus. Eva fiia v EV
rpefg, r p ia three; reooapeg, r e o a a p a f o u r

three (masc./fem.) three (neut.) fo u r (masc./fem.) fo u r (neut.)
nom. TpEig {rpi-Eg) T p ia TEO oapsg TEoaapa
gen. ip ia v Tpmv etc. etc.
dat. Tpiai xpio'i
accus. xpEig Tpia
What do you think o v d e ig {o v d e + eig) means?
260a Memorize the cardinal numbers from 1 to 13.
260b Optional: Memorize ordinals and adverbs from 1 to 10.
Cardinal numbers Ordinals {first, second, etc.) Adverbs {once, twice, etc.)
1 E ig,n 'ia,E v n p m o g , rj, o v dna^
2 6va dEVTEpog dig
3 TpEig, Tpia i p h o g (xp'naxog) xpig
4 TEOoapEg, z i o a a p a xExapxog {xExpaxog) XEXpCLKig
5 JIEVTE jiEfijrxog TlEVXdKig
6 E^ EKXOg EÔLKig
1 Ema Ejidonog EJixaKig
8 OKxa dydoog oKxaKig
9 EvvEa Evaxog {eivaxog) EVCLKig
10 dEKa dEKaxog dEKCLKig
11 EvbEKa E vdiKaxog EvdEKOLKig
12 dadEK a dcodsKUTog ScodEKOLKig
{ d v o Kai dEKo)
13 jpEioKaidEKa xpEioKaidEKaxog xpEiOKaidsKdKig
' How many games are there in a pentathlon? In a decathlon?

' What does triskaidekaphobia mean?
175
HOMERIC GREEK
260c Optional: Memorize twenty, thirty, etc., up to one hundred.
20 ElKOOl
30 Tpi^Kovra
40 TEOoapdKovza
50 jievTijKovTa
60 e^^Kovxa
70 iftdoîjK ovTa
80 oydaK ovza
90 EvevfjKovTa
100 EKaxov
• How many rowers are there on a pentekonter?
261 VOCABULARY
(stem: dXEyiS-), with gen., 984 care, consider, (have) regard (for), worry
a jia with dat., at the same time, together (with)
dvaiSif|5, EC, shameless, unfeeling
djieiXto), djiei>,T|O(0, T|nei).iioa threaten, boast, menace
dpvunai, dpEoâl*, acquire, win, save, preserve
d(paipE(o, d(paipf|oo), d(pee>.ov (dq>ei>.ov), dtpfipiiKa*, dcptjptmai’*^, d<pi]p^6iiv*
(steins: aipe-, t'k-) take away, rob, deprive
e:i(o, E\|/(o, Eojiov (steins: a^ll-, oji-) be busy, perform; mid., follow, accompany,
attend
ia o 5, r| (eiori), ov equal, equivalent, well-balanced, symmetrical
KDV(6:tti5, ao (o-u), 6 (voc. Kvvrajia) dog-faced, dog-eyed, shameless [one]
MEVE>.ao5, o\), 6 Menelaus, brother o f Agamemnon and husband o f Helen
JlEXaTp^W, flETatpEyW, |llETCTpE\t/a, (jlETCTpaJlOV), flETttTCTpOCpa**,
HEtatCTpannai, nEXExpdcpOtiv (nETEtpdjiiiv*) (stems: tpe:i-, tpoji-, tpait-)
turn (around); mid. turn oneself toward, heed
ôyEO), — Enoyiiaa toil, struggle
va i(i),---- i Evaa o a ,---- 1, ---- ^^doGuv (stem: vao-) dwell, inhabit; mid. be
situated
6:i(n:)6tE w hen(ever)
n:po5 (rtpoti, :ioxl) adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., to, toward, also, at, on,
from, on behalf of; with gen., from, before, at the bidding, in the sight; with
dat., on, at, by; with acc., to, toward, (up)on, against
JixoXfE 0 pov (= 7i(t)6A,k;), ou, to city
xlHT|, fji;, Ti (c f xi|idco and dxind^co) honor, satisfaction, recompense, retribution,
value
176
LE SSON 40
Xaipo), xaipiÔfa, — KExapti(K)a, KExap(il)nai*, (stems: xap-, x«PE-»

Xaipe-) rejoice, be glad; {in imperative) hail! welcome! farewell!
262 Translate:
1. Axi^Êvg fO-TfTo dvuKxi (1007) av6p(ov AyapiEnvovi fie y ’ d v a id h , dqjpa
Xaiprj. 2. A x a io i Eonovi' A yai.iefivovi ap.a, ufi^ v dpvvfiEvoi (1070) x& Kai
Meve^dq). 3. ijv Ayafie/xvcov Kvvdjitjg; 4. d p v v fied a Tjfir]v :ipoQ Tpacov
Meve^dcp. 5. Aya/ue/uvcov o v fiSTaxpEnexai ov d ' r a v (984). 6. ^ a o d e v g
avT oq ))nEiAr]OEv d<paipt](jeo6ai y ep ag Axi^fji (997). 7. Axi^êvg efidyrjOE
n o k k d r& y ep d i. 8. y e p a :idvTeg eô/xev i o a [iaaiX fji, oiuioxe iKJispoco/ueda
ju oX iedpa Tpmav.
Iliad, 158-164
dXXd o o i, (0 ^ iy ’ d v a id ig , d ^ ' eojto/xeO', d(ppa o v xa'ipjK,
rififjy dpv v fiev oi M evehico o o i re, Kvvmna,
jipdg Tpcoav. t&v oi' ti fieTarpejii] o v d ’ dXeyiêig- 160
Kai 6t] ^loi y ip a g avxdg d(paip7]oeodai djieiAelg,
COEJii noXXd /.loytjou, dooai> d e f40i vieg A x a ia v .
ov fiev o o i noTE io o v e'xjo yEpag, o ju io t' A x a io i
Tpcocov EKJiEpocoo' H ’ vaidÊvov JixoX'iEdpov-
264 Notes
158. aov 1007, emphatic, as may be seen from the accent, 762. —ney’(a):
780-781. —xaipt]?: 1115-1116. — cti': emphatic, as contrasted with Achilles
(1039).
159. dpvvnEVOi; 1070. —MevEXdw ooi te; 997.
160. Twv (used substantively): 984. —xi; 780-781. —n e x a tp ^ fl = fietatpCTeai:
584-585.
161. jio i: 997. —avTog: yourself, i.e., “arbitrarily,” without the consent of the army
or the other chieftains.
162. EJii: 1050. —Jtokkd: 780-781. —8ooav= o (£)8ooav.
163. aoi; brachylogy, that is, a short {j3paxvg) or compressed expression, as in
English, “what is good for a cold,” which means “what is good for a man who
has a cold.” This thought intensifies the injustice of Agamemnon’s action.
Observe the emphasis and contrast created by the use of the personal pro
nouns in this passage, and the rhyming effect of o o i, ov , o o i. fio i, juoi, a o i.
265 Translate:
1. They followed the very shameless Agamemnon and Menelaus, so that they
might win recompense for them from the Trojans. 2. But the two kings did not
177
HOMERIC GREEK
(have) regard (for) or consider these things at all. 3. The king of men, Agamem
non, threatened to take away the prize of Achilles, for which he had struggled
much, and which was given to him by the sons of the Achaeans. 4. We never had a
prize of honor equal to Agamemnon(’s), whenever we sacked a well-situated city
of the Trojans.
178
Lesson 41
THE PRESENT, FUTURE, AND

FIRST AORIST SYSTEM OF VERBS
Il ia d , 16 5- 17 2
Prelim inaries
Once again, congratulations are in order. You have learned the basics of Homeric
grammar and syntax. The emphasis in the next thirty-seven lessons is on reading
the remaining lines of the first book of the Iliad. For review, as well as for new
Greek forms and finer points of grammar, you will be sent to the Grammar and
vocabulary lists.
266 Review carefully all the forms o f ?.v(o in the present, future, and first aorist, all
voices, moods, and tenses, 904-921.
267 Learn the conjugation of (paivco in the first aorist sytem, 931-932.
268 VOCABULARY
dtdp ( - aiJTdp 571) but, moreover
a tln o g , r|, ov dishonored, unhonored
a<pevo5, eoi;, to wealth, riches
d(pvoo(0, dtpvô) (stem: dtpvy-) dip up, draw (out), collect, heap up
5 a a ^ 6 ;, o t, 6 division (of spoils), (c f d a T so fia i)
5ie\|/(o, SiEOJiov (stems: oeji-, o:i-) accomplish, perform, go through, be
engaged (in)
^ 0d8E here, hither, there, thither
Kd^vco, Kafiôâi, EKanov, K£K|iii](K)a (stems: Kan-, do, make, toil, be
weary, suffer, accomplish with pain
Kopcavig, iSoq curved, bent
6>.1yo5, ti, ov little, few, small, of slight value, cheap
n>i0i)T05, o\). 6 wealth, riches, abundance
Ji(t)oAf 7I(T)o>,£^^4(a war, battle, fight (cf. 7iT0?i.en0i;)
(gen. iKoq) impetuous, onrushing
(Tvv adv., and prep, with dat., with, together (with), along with
(p^pttpog, r|. ov {comparat. 754:2), mightier, better, braver, stronger, more power
ful, more productive, more profitable
179
HOMERIC GREEK
Related words: coronation, crown; oligarchy; plutocrat, plutocracy; polemic;

synagogue, synthesis, synthetic.
269 Translate;
1. diSTiofiev JidXeixov JioXvdlKa xs'ipeooiv. 2. i]v jio te dao/xdg iKtjrai,
'AyafiEfxvav exî t o y ep ag jw kv êTôv, Axi^êvg S ’ £Xî (yepag) oX iyov fiev
(p'lXov 6 L 3. A xiX levq y sp a q d U y ov te (piXov r ’ EpxEiai ejii vrjai;, ejiei ke
KCLixj] jioXeîI^cov. 4. uvu AxiXXsvg e'ioi <P9frjydE. 5. rj jwXv cpEpTEpov e o tiv ipLEv
o w a d E oi)y vrjvoiv Kopcovioiv. 6. A xiXXevq Emv du/xog, ovk dqrvÊi a<pEvog Kai
jiXovTov A yaÊfivovi EvdddE.
Iliad, 165-172
dXXd TO fiEv jiXe Jov jwXvdiKog jioXeiioio 165
X£ip£g £âi diETwvo', UTap fjv jiote 8ao/^dg 'iKrjTai,
a o i TO yEpag JtoXv fiel^ ov, i y a d ’ oX lyov te (p'lXov te
Ep x o n ’ £XO)v EJii vrjag, ejiei ice Kdfim jio Xe^ i ^cov.
I'Vl' 6 ’ Elfil <PQ'i T]v5 ’, ejiei tj JwXi) fEpTEpOV EOTlV
o iK a d ' ifiEv a v i’ vrjvoi Kopcovioiv, o v d i o' dim 170
E v Q d d ' a T if io g m v d f E v o g K a i jiX o v t o v d .Eiov: comparat. ofjioX vg, 754:9, the greater (part).
166. XEipc? Enai my hands, i.e., “I did it.”
167. x6: that usual (gift of honor). —toXu: 780-781. —jiEiôv: comparat. of/x^yag,
754:5. —oîyov: o f slight value. —6X,1yov te (piXov te : o f slight value, yet dear
(to me). Cf. Shakespeare: “an ill-favoured thing, but mine own.”
168. Epxoji’(ai)- — when I am weary {of) fighting.
170. o’(oi): 997. —6i<o: ironically, as often. —Kopmvioiv: this word visualizes the
curved line of the Greek ship, with its high prow and stern.
272 Translate:
1. Although our hands performed the greater (part) of this impetuous war,
you always have much the greater prize, whenever a division o f spoils comes.
2. When they grew weary (of) fighting, they went to their ships with {lit. having)
prizes, small yet dear to their hearts. 3. It was much better to go to Phthia; nor did
they think that (since they had been) dishonored here they would collect wealth
and riches for Agamemnon.
180
Lesson 42
THE SECOND AORIST, AND THE FIRST AND

SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS OF VERBS
Il ia d , 1 7 3 -1 8 1
273 Learn the conjugation of the perfect active system of ^vco, 904-909.
274 Learn the conjugation of the second aorist system o f fiaivo). 922, 930.
275. VOCABULARY
5iOTpe(pf|;, eq Zeus-nourished
eivEKtt (= evEKa, 571) on account of
enioaevw, — ^cjieooeva, — EJieo(n)nai, erteo(o)v0t]v (stems: oev-, <ru-) drive
on, hurry on, urge
ETapo; (Etatpog, 571), o\), 6 companion, comrade, follower, friend
EXBpog, n, 6v {compar. exOiwv, ov. superl. t>»') hateful, hated, enemy,
hostile, odious
KaptEpo;, 11, 6v ( = KpaTEpog, 597-598), strong, mighty, severe, harsh, stern
KOTEO),---- EK0TE0(0 )a , KEic6Tti(K)a hold a grudge, be angry, be vindictive
HdXiora {superlat. o f ^dXa) most of all, especially, by all means, decidedly
jid/i], r\q. Ti battle, fight, fray
^ ^ (a, fiEVEw, EÊlva, fiEjiEviiKa** (steins: hev-, îeve-) remain, avâit
m iTiEta, cto, 6 (= HT)TiETii5, 664-665, 671) counselor, (prudent) adviser
M vpm 8(6v, ovoq. 6 Myrmidon; the M yrmidons were troops from Thessaly, led by
Achilles
oOojiiai with gen. 984, care (for), consider, (have) regard (for), worry (about)
xl^d(a, Tljiiioft), E tiî]oa, tE tin tiK a’^, TET^^T]âl, EXlnii0t]V* honor, gain honor;
mid. avenge, exact recompense
w5e thus, so, in this way, as follows
Related words: logomachy, sciomachy, theomachy; timocracy.
276 Translate:
1. 2.
(pevôfiai ^ d k a , e m i f i o i dvfxdq ijie o o v z a i zod e. h o o o /x e d a
rir]Xr]id8r]v fxeveiv e i v e k ’ A yane/uvovog. 3. n a p ’ 'A ya^sfivovl ye d k k o i eiaiv ,
o i Ke zov z i/ijjoov ai, /udkioza d e ^tjziEza Zevg. 4. A xdX svg eoziv exSiazog
Jidvzcov d iozp efecov j3aoiXi]Q)v A y a fiefiv o v i. 5. epit; z e (plXr] A x d fji e o z i v a i E i
181
HOMERIC GREEK
JwXE/ioi T£ fid x a i re. 6. A x M e v i; fid k a K apzepoq eoxiv, aXXd Jiov Qeoc, o i to y '
e d c o K e r . 7. AîAAevg e io i oiicad e o v v vrjvoi ze Kai ex d p oioiv , dvd^ ei de
M v p fiid ov eaaiv ( 10 0 1). 8. A yafiefivcov o v k dAey/ê/ o v 8 ’ d 9 ez ai AxiXfjoi;

Kozeovzog.
I l l Read and translate:
Iliad, 173-181
“(pEvys f i d k ’, E iz o i dvfidg EJiEoovzai, o v d i o ’ kym yE
M ooofâi EivEK’ EfiEio fiEVEiv- j ia p ’ E/xot yE Kal a lX o i,
o i KE HE zifirjoov ai, jidX ioza 8 e /xrjziEza Zsvg. 175
EXOiozog 3 e juoi eooi diozpE<pEcov (iaoiA^cov-
a'lEi y d p zoi Epig ze <piAt] jioXEôi ze fid x a i ze.
El fidX a KapzEpog eooi, dEog jw v o o i z6 y ’ e6(okev.
oiicad' imv ov v vrjvoi ze ofjg Kal o o ig Ezdpoioiv
M vp/uidovEooiv d v aooE , oeOev 6 ’ Eya ovk dkEyil^co 180
o v 8 ’ dOo/uai KozEovzog- djiEiXi]oco d s zoi cbdE-
278 Notes
173. Toi: 998. —(pEVYc: flee, desert. It is this insinuation that helps Achilles decide
to stay.
173-174. “Run along home, by all means; don’t stay on my account.” Ironical, of
course. —a>.>iOi (Eioiu).
175. A reply to the assertion of Achilles in line 159. This is a good example of
irony, for it is Zeus and no other who tiishonors Agamemnon in the sequel.
—Tlniiaovoi: 1144.
177. epig t e <piXii (ear/V). (pi'Ar/ agrees with spig, but is to be taken with jidXEôi
ZE fid x a i ZE also.
180. M vpm 66veoaiv: 1001, but in the mouth of Agamemnon may be considered a
dative of disadvantage, 997. —M rpjiiSoveooiv pdvaoffe: see 526. —oêv; 984.
181. KOTEOVXog (oeo): 984.
279 Translate;
1. Agamemnon, king of men, said to Achilles, “Flee by all means, if your soul
urges you.” 2. The Achaeans entreated us greatly to remain with them, that we
might honor them especially. 3. Zeus, the counselor, will especially honor all the
kings. 4. Agamemnon and Menelaus were to Achilles the most hateful of all the
Zeus-nourished kings; for always strife and wars and battles were dear to their
hearts. 5. Although they were very strong, some god gave that (strength) to them.
6. Let us go home with our ships and our comrades, and rule the Myrmidons.
7. We do not (have) regard (for) Achilles, nor do we care when he holds a grudge,
since we are much mightier.
182
Lesson 43
THE PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VERBS

Il ia d , 182-192
280 Learn the perfect middle system of Xvco (9 1 0 -9 1 5 ), Tpsjico, zevxco, and
jtev d o fia i, 925-929.
281 Optional: Study the table of personal endings of verbs, 821.
282 VOCABULARY
a v T T jv openly, before the face, in the presence (of someone)
axo5, eoq, to woe, pain, grief
B p l0T]ig, iSoq, f| Brisei's, daughter of Briseus, prize o f Achilles
8 idv8 ix a in two ways, differently
Evapi^d), Evapi^M, f|vdpiâ (stems: Evapiy-) strip of armor, spoil, slay
epHTVo), — ■, T |p T |T voa, — — ■, T|ptiTV 0i i v check, restrain, control, contain, hold
back, curb
r|Top, opoq, TO heart, soul, spirit
KX.iaiT], riq, fj hut, barrack, tent
Xdoiog, r|, ov hairy, shaggy, rough, bushy
fiEp^T]pi^(o,-----y£Êp^lr|plâ (stem: utipiy-) ponder, consider
^1]p6; , o\i. 6 thigh
6^0 10 (1)*, ^— , (oôKoOtiv liken, make like, compare, make
equal
6^1)5, eia, u sharp, biting, cutting, keen, acid
oo(a)o 9, ri. ov how much, how great, how many, how large, how long (c f T oaoog
so much)
Jiavow, EJiavoa, Ji^ a v K a *, Ênavnai, E:iav)0tiv* cease, stop, check,
restrain, hold off
(OV, covog, 6 son of Peleus, Achilles
a x v y m , ---- >Eorrâ (EOTvyov),----->---- ÊOfrrYii0tlt (stems: axvy-, axvye-) hate,
loathe, dislike, make hateful, hold in horror, fear
(pdoyavov, o'u, to sword, saber
Related words: homeopathy, homologous, homogeneous; pause; Styx, Stygian.
183
HOMERIC GREEK
283 Translate:
1. CLipaipedfieda f i a o i l f j a X p v a t]id a (1020:1), to y ep ag Ka^dv.
2. Ayaêfivcov jie^y/ei X pvarj'ida eg X pvarjv ovu vrji icai ex d p oioiv ioToiv.
3. dv a^ a v r b g ia v K h o i r j v d e dêi BpTorjlda KaXXimxprjov xd yepag A x M ^ og ,
o<pp’ A x d ^ ev g ev ei'drj b a o o v (pepxepdg eo ziv A yafie/ivcov. 4. dkXoi o x v y eo v a i
(pdodai o<peag av x ov g eJv a i fo o v g A yaixefivovi Kai dôm O ijfievat dvxrjv.
5. ijxop rirjXetcovog efiepfii^piê d id v d ix a , ij 6 ye epvooafxevog <pdoyavov d^v
jia p d fi^pov d v a o x ijo e ie (1153) fiev xovg A x a io v g , evapl^ oi <5’ Axpeidrjv, iqe
jiavoE ie xo^ ov eprjxvoeie xe dvfidv. 6. d xog /ley a eyevexo xoTaiv A x a io ta iv ,
ovveK a A yafiefivm v d<peiXexo BpTorjida K alX m dprjov A x d fja .
Iliad, 182-192
(bg e f i ’ aqyaipeixai Xpvorj'ida 0oT fiog A ji6?.Xcov,
xfjv fiev e y a ov v vrji x ’ efifj K ai efioig ex d p o io iv
7iefi\f/(o, eyd) de k ’ dyco B p io rjid a KaXXmdpr]ov
avxdg id ) v K h a i r j v d e , xd o d v yepag, o f p ’ ev eidrjg 185
o o o o v (ptpxepog eifii oedev, axvyerj de K a i dXXog
lo o v ejio i (pdodai K a i o fio ia d ^ fiev a i dvxrjv."
mg <pdxo- rirjXeimvi 6' d x og y tv ex ’, ev 6e o i iqxop
oxtjOeoaiv X a a w ia i d id v d ix a /iepfi^piêv,
fj 6 y e (pdayavov d^v ep v o o d fiev o g Jiap d firjpov 190
xovg fxev d v a o x ^ o eiev , 6 6 ’ A xpeidrjv evapi^ oi,
rje xoXov jia v o e ie v eprjxvoeie xe dvjiov.
285 Notes
182. efi’(E), X p ro ii(6a: 1020:1. —dcpaipEltai = d<paipeexai: 584-585. —wg: as,
since.
184. —ayco: 1101.
185. “To prove my superior power, I will go myself.” —to odv y ip a g : in apposition
with BpTorjlda. The addition of the demonstrative pronoun ( to) makes the
expression more emphatic. — 1115- 1116.
186. oooov: 564:3. —oe0ev: 993. —otuy^TI: {d(ppa) axvyerj, 1115-1116. —K at
also, even (as well as yourself).
— —
187. cô^ ( e i v a i ) : 1003. (pdo0ai [< p r j^ i]. ofioKoOrmevai: liken himself, 890.
188. niiXciwvi: 998. —tv 6e o i . . . orf|0eooiv: 998,1009.
190. ii: whether.
191. TOV5 (dX)ôv5 evidently Agamemnon was sitting down in the
assembly, with the other chieftains seated around him. Achilles would need to
184
L E S S O N 43
make these start up in order to get at Agamemnon. —dva0TT|0EiEV,

^ a p i^ o i: 1153.
192. r|E: or. — :iav)ociEV, ep titv o E iE te: 1153.
286 Translate:
1 . Since the gods thus take away our prize, we will send it to Chrysa, (along)
with a sacred hecatomb for the god, but we will go in person ( a v T o i ) to the tent
of Achilles and lead away his prize, the fair-cheeked Briseis, so that he may well
know how much stronger we are than he (gen.), and all others may hate to say
they are equal to us and compare themselves with us openly. 2. After he spoke
thus, grief arose for the sons of the Achaeans, and within their hairy chests they
pondered in two ways. 3. We will draw our sharp swords from our thighs and
rouse the sons of the Achaeans, and slay the two sons of Atreus, or we shall
check our wrath and curb our spirit.
185
Lesson 44
FIRST AND SECOND

PASSIVE SYSTEM OF VERBS
Il ia d , 1 9 3 -2 0 0
287 Read 830-837, 839 on augments.
288 Review the first passive system of Xva, 916-921, and of tpe(pco, 935.
289 VOCABULARY
AGtivaii] (A0T|Vti), r|q, t] Athena, goddess o f war, wisdom, an d weaving
a^qxo (nom., accus., voc.) ajKpoiiv, (gen., dat.) both
YIYVCOOKO), y v w o o n a i , E y ^ w v , E y v w K a * , e y v w o f i a i * , Eyvco aO iiv* (ste m s: y v m -,
y v o -) recognize, know, learn, perceive

eXko) draw, drag, pull, tug
Tjog while, until
BajuPEO), 0afiPr|O6)*, £0d^Pt]oa wonder, be amazed, be frightened, be aghast
l a t T i n i , a T f|0 (a, E o t i i o a ( e o t i i v ) , E o x tiK a , E o r a f i a i * , E O td G iiv (ste in s: a T t]-, o r a - )
set (up), stand, make stand, take one’s stand, station

koX,e 6 v ( k o v X e o v , 571), ou, to sheath, scabbard (1168)
K6 ^t), riq, f| hair, locks, tresses
âvGog, 6v tawny, yellow, blond
îq>09, eoq, to sword
0HS5 equally, alike, together, at the same time
orti 0 E(v) (6jiioGe[v]) behind, from behind, later, latter; as prep, with gen
o p ^ a i v o ) , ---- ■
, w p ji t i v a (s te m : 6 p |iia v -) toss about (turn over) in mind, ponder,
consider, plan
o iip a v o g , ov, 6 heaven, sky
ria^Xdi;, dSoq, t] Pallas (Athena)
x p ^ w , TpE\|/w, ETpE\|/a ( e t p a n o v ) , t ^ r p o t p a * * , T ^ p a m u a i , e tp a q iG fiv (ste m s:
x p E Ji-, t p o j i - , t p a r t - ) turn (around), rout, put to flight; mid., turn oneself, flee
(paEiVM (s te m : cpaEV-) shine, gleam, glare, flash; aor. pass. E cp ad v G iiv
186
L ES SON 44
(paivb), (pavew, ecptjva, JiC(pi]va*, :iE (p ao^ ai, E<pdvtjv (eq)dv0tiv*) (stem: <pav-)
show, shine; (mid.) appear, seem
Related words; agnostic(ism), prognosticate; stay, static; comet; trope,

apotropaic; diaphanous.
290 Translate:
1. o'l A x a io i a p f ia i v o v T a v ra K a ra (ppeva Kai Kaxa dvfiov. 2. eXkcohev e k
KoXsmv ÊydX a ^lq>Ea K ai ivapl^co/XEV 'A y a fiifiv o v a . 3. A dijvt] riXdEV
ovpavoOEV, xfjv y a p etjicev Hprj levtccoÊvog. 4. "Hprj XEVKwAsi'og (piXEEi
AxiXfja. TE K ai A y a fii^ v o v a Ofxaq dvjua, K ^ dexai 6 e touv afi<poiiv. 5. A 6i]vi]
^XQev ov p a v od E v , so rt] 6 ’ oJiidEv, ei I e ( a i p m ) 6 ’ A x d f j a âvQfjq KOfiijg (983).
6. Adtjvt] ifpaivEv' AxiXfji oico, oi) y a p rig ra>v dkXmv A xaim v cbpaETO Trjv dsdv.
1. EHEi Qeo. eIaev A x d fja Kd^rjg, EQdfi(ir]OE, /ÊTaTpEy/dfiEvog d' i'y m a v riica
riaX X dd’ A9T]va'ir]v. 8 . o o o e AQr]va'ir]g E(padvdr]oav {(pas'ivo}, 973:3) dsivcb
A x d fji.
Iliad, 19 3 -2 0 0
T]og 6 ra t'd ’ apjuaivE K a ra (ppiva K ai K a ra Ovôv,
E^KEro 6 ’ EK koXeow fis y a ^t(pog, tjXOE 6 ’ AOijvt]
ovpavodEv- npd y a p i^ke dEd, XEVKaXEvog "Hprj, 195
dfiqxo 6fla g dvf/co (piXEOvod rs KTjdofiEyrj re.
art] 6 ’ ojiiQev, âvdfjg 6 e KOfirig eXe nrjX Eiava,
oicp (paivojAEvrj, ra u 6 ’ dXXcov o v rig d p d ro .
dd/xjirjoEv d' AxiXsvg, fxsrd (5’ ErpdjiEr’, a v riK a (5’ Eyva
riaXXdd' A6r]vah]v- dEivo) Se o i o o o e (pdavdEV. 200
292 Notes
194. e Xk e t o : was drawing. — t|X0e 8 ’ A0f|vti: coordinate, instead of subordinate
construction, 1114.
196. djiiqxa = AyajUEfivova AxiXfjd rE: Hera did not want to see either of them get
hurt. —0t)nw: 1009. —tpiXôvoa, 1109:2.
The situation has now reached the point where Achilles feels constrained to
act, since he would rather die than endure such deep insults and humiliation at the
hands of Agamemnon. The imperfects in the first two verses make the description
strikingly vivid, while the abrupt action of the two following aorists are well
adapted to introduce Athena suddenly and dramatically.
197. K6^tl5: 983.
198. 01(0 (AxiXfji). — o p a to = (bpdsro, 5 8 4 -5 8 5 , 837.
200. o i refers to Athena. — <pdav0EV = E<paEvdr]oav, 973:3; 9 4 5 -9 4 8 .
187
HOMERIC GREEK
293 Translate:
1. While they were thus pondering in their hearts and were drawing from
their scabbards their great swords, the gods came from heaven together with
white-armed Hera, who loves and cares for all men equally in her soul. 2. They
stood behind the ships of the Achaeans. 3. Athena appeared to Achilles alone, and
seized him by his tawny locks. 4. None of us saw the goddess, but we were amazed.
5. When they turned around, they immediately recognized the goddess, for her
(two) eyes gleamed terribly.
188
Lesson 45
THE PRESENT, FUTURE, AND

AORIST SYSTEM OF - f i i VERBS
Il ia d , 2 0 1 -2 1 1
294 Learn the conjugations o f the present and both aorist systems (including
imperative, subjunctive, and optative,) o f lOTrjjui, TiOrjfii, irj/ui, and didcofii,
9 4 9 -9 5 4 ; 95 7 -9 6 0 .
295a Learn the inflections of the participles o f the present and both aorists of
lOTrjui, Tidrjfii, ujni, and didcofii, 956, 962.
295b Learn the infinitives of the present and both aorists of loztjfii, ridrjfii,
and didcoui, 955, 961.
296 VOCABULARY
dv = K£(v) (1085-1091)
aiyioxog, r], ov aegis-holding
a v te again, in turn, but, however, further(more), anew
(gen. i5o(;) gleaming-eyed, flashing-eyed (or “owl-eyed”)
iv a in order that, (so) that, where
XtjYw, EXi]â cease (from), refrain
H115e and not, but not, nor, not even; n t f S t . . . nnSe neither . . . nor
oXA,v|iii, 6X£o(o)(o, raXco(o)a, dX.(a>â (stems: oi.-, 6 ke-, d ko-) destroy, kill, ruin,
lose; (mid.) perish, die
6vei8 i^(o, — i (bvei6 io a (stem: 6vei6 i 6-) revile, reproach, abuse
JipooavSdw, npoaav8r|0())*, JTpoanvST)oa address, speak to, say to
JitepoEig, eaoa, ev winged, flying
td x a (taxi)5, 780-781) quickly, swiftly, soon
TEKog, eoq. TO child, descendant, offspring, young
TuiTE ( ti noTE, 592) why (in the world)?
v^pig, loq, fj insolence, wantonness, forwardness
VTOpo:i>.it), riq, f| arrogance, insulting conduct (deed), 1168
(pwvEO), q)(oviio(o*, Etpwvtioa speak, lift up the voice
Related words: op-, 201; slack(en); pterodactyl; tachygraphy; phonology,

antiphony, euphony, symphony, telephone, megaphone, microphone.
189
HOMERIC GREEK
297 Translate:
1. A x M e v g (pavôaq Jip oorjv d a yX avK anida AB tjvtjv (1017) ejisa ( 10 1 2 )
m e p o e v x a . 2. T im ’ iqXQev a v r e H akX ag Adijvr] rsKog a iy w x o io A i6q;
3. y la v K a m q Adijvrj rjkQev iv a idrj v(ipiv A y a fien v o v o q A r p e id a o . 4. A x ille v q
e p ie i A&^vi], t o d e Kai XETekeofievov eo x a i (fut. perf. pass.), d m x a m a xeXeeodai.
5 . x d x ’ d v Jioxe A ya^ iefivav oXeoot] O v fid v fjq v j i E p o j i l i r ] O i v . 6. y X a v K m m g
AQrivr] fjXdE J ia v o o v o a t o fievog A x d rjog , a i k e mOrjxai. 1. sXrjyEV A xdkE vg
Epidog (987), o v S e e X icexo ^ i i p o g x £ i p ( ; 8. dvsidiÊi A yaixEfivova e j i e o i v , cog
E O E x a i ( E o x a i ) JiE p .
Iliad, 201-211
K a i H IV q x a v iq o a g E J iE a n x E p o E v x a J i p o a r j v d a - 201
" x i J i x ’ a v z ’, a i y w x o i o A id g zE K o g , E iX ijX o v d a g ;
rj i v a v P p i v i8 r ] A y a / X E f i v o v o g A x p E i d a o ;
dAA’E K TOt EpECO, TO6 e K U l X E X s E O d a i OICO'
fi g v n e p o T r l l r j a i x d x ' jw x e Q v fid v o X E O o r ].’’ 205

rd i' <3 ’ a v x E n p o o E E i ii E 0E d , y k a v K & n i g A O ijy rj-
" iq X d o v E y a n a v o o v a a tog o v f i E v o g , a i ' k e J ilO r ja i,
o v p a v o d E v - jip d d s //’ ijiCE O e o XEVKwXEVog H p r j,
d fi(p o } 6 f l a g Q vfi& ( p i l E o v o d t e K r id o fiE v r ] t e .
dX X ’ d y E X fjy ’ E p i d o g , f i r j d s ^ i< p o g eXkeo x ^ i p '' 210
d X X ’ r] x o i E J i E o i v fiE V d v E i d i o o v , cog i o E x a i J i E p .
299 Notes
201. mv: object o f Jip oorjv d a. —EJiea: 1012. —JitEpOEVta: 523.
202. a iy io x o io : the aegis was a shield, adorned with the head of the Gorgon, a
snaky-headed monster, which petrified with chilly fear all who looked upon
it. Achilles seems displeased at Athena’s interference and is greatly vexed that
he should be prevented from killing Agamemnon. —a v te does not refer to
an earlier appearance of Athena, but may merely denote Achilles’ impatience
that one trouble after another seems to have befallen him; and so he says,
“And have you come too” (in addition to all my other vexations)? —
EiXi^>.ov6a ; , 1168.
203. T|: introducing interrog. sentence. Is it? Can it be? —tSii = i'drjai: 584-585.
Achilles answers his own question (line 202) by a second rhetorical one.
—vppiv piSil, 526; 1067:2.
204. t o : subject o f XEXiEoOai, 971. — oiw : ironical, as usual in Homer.
205. Achilles broadly hints at his intention o f killing Agamemnon for his arro
gance. —f|5 (og, ij, ov). —vjiepojiX,iiioi; 1005. —6>,ô(ni: 1101.
206. yXavKtaJiig: supplements lines 199-200, and shows why Achilles so quickly
recognized the goddess. Originally it seems to have meant owl-eyed, and
Athena was associated with the owl.
190
L E S S O N 45
207. :iavoovoa: 1109:5. — Athena is not quite sure that Achilles will obey,
but hopes so.
210. EpiSog: 987. —eXkeo: continue to draw. —XEipi 1005. —Xiiy’(e) imperat.
2 1 1 . I.e., abuse him roundly; only do not strike him. The goddess counsels a word-
war, instead of a resort to arms, and thus there is a reversion to the situation
previous to Achilles’ attempt to draw his sword. —(bg EOEtal Êp: “tell him
how it shall be,” i.e., “tell him what shall take place.”
300 Translate:
1. We lifted up our voices {participle) and addressed the flashing-eyed goddess
(with) winged words. 2. Why, O dear daughter of aegis-bearing Zeus, have you
returned (come again) to the swift black ships of the Achaeans? 3. Is it so that you
may see the insolence of the Zeus-nourished kings? 4. But we shall speak out to
you, and we think that this will be accomplished, that they will soon lose their
souls by their own arrogance. 5. Athena, the flashing-eyed, came from heaven to
check the anger of Achilles, if perhaps he would obey (opt.) her. 6. If Achilles wUl
cease from strife nor draw his great sword with his heavy hand, he may revile
Agamemnon with harsh words.
19 1
Lesson 46
FIRST AND SECOND

PERFECT SYSTEM OF -//i VERBS
Il ia d , 2 1 2 -2 2 2
301 Learn the conjugation of all the perfect forms of lortjfii, 924.
302 Learn the conjugation of all the perfect forms o i * e ’{d(o (o id a ), 966.
303 VOCABULARY
djii0E(o*, djiiOâw, T|3i(0iio a , with dat., 996, disobey, fail to obey, distrust
Saiftcov, ovoq. 6, f| divinity, god(dess)
S& pov, o\). TO gift, present
E (i)p C jia i, E(i)pi)CT(o)onai, E(i)pvo(o)a|iitiv (stem: ptp®-) save, preserve, observe,
protect, guard, retain
EÊIpCO, EÊpEO), EÊIJIOV, EÊipt]Ka*, EÊipTmai, EÊIp1T|6 l)V (stemS: pEp-, FP»1-5
pErt-) speak out, declare
EniJlElOo), EninElOO), E Jl^ E lO a (EJIIJIKIiGoV), EJllJlEJlOlOa, EJllJlCTElOHai,
ejie:ieio0iiv* (stems: jieiG -, n i0 -, n;oi0-) persuade, trust; mid. obey {with dat.)
T|n( (stem: r|Y-) speak, say; im p erf, TjV
loxft) another fo rm ofz-fta, have, hold, restrain, check
kovX eov = koXeov, 289; 571 , 1168; scabbard
K(6:ii], r|(;, ti hilt, handle
:ld p E l^ I, n a p E o (o )o fia i (stem: eo -) be present, be at hand, be near, be beside
atpraiTEpog, ri, ov of you two, belonging to you two
xpig thrice, three times
XPT| (xpeiw, Xpeio)» il need, necessity, fate, destiny, due, duty; used impersonally
with or without eaxiv; [it] is necessary, (one) must
(oOeco, (00(0, E(oaa, — Êftjojiai*, e(oo0 iiv* (stems: p(o0 -, p(o0 E-) shove, push,
thrust, drive, strike
Related words: demoniac, demonology, pandemonium; Dora, Dorothy, Theodore.
304 Translate:
1. Jidvxa y a p tolSe teX eo o o v o i d soi OXv^nia d eod a r’ ExovxEq, a q i y a a o i
EÊpEco. 2. Kai 7WZE zpiq T o o a a d a p ’ a y X d ’ eêi A x M siig EivEKa rrjo d ’ vfipiog
192
L E S S O N 46
'AyapLifivovog A T p eid ao. 3. AxiXXevg w x£Tai, Jieidszai de defjiv 'Hprj

XevKcoXevcp AQrjva'iri re yXavKcomdi. ‘^■XPV eaxiv AxiXXfja (1107:6), Kai
fidX a Ji£p d v fia KExoXcofievov, EJiog e ip v o a o d a i (1107:7) defjiv KaXfjiv, cog y a p
EOTiv d fisiv ov . 5 . Qeot fidX' ekX vov AxiXXtjog, ovvsK a t o w iv em T ieidetai.
6. A x a io i EOxeOov (e'xo)) X^'PO-Q fia p e ia q im Kcojiijg ap y v p erjai ^Kpecov fieydXmv.
7. AxiXXevg ecooe fie y a î(pog dV eg KovXedv. 8. A x a io i K a m i iquiOrjoav fivO oioiv
Adrjvairjg. 9. ded yXavKmmg AO-qvr] fiejiijKE OvXv/uJidvde eg dcofiaTa Aiog.
Iliad, 212-222
code y a p e^ ep ea , to d e icai TereX eojuevov e a r a i-
K a i n o r e r o i xpig r d o o a n a p e a o e x a i d y X a d 8a>pa
v fip io g eiv eK a ifjo d e - o v 8' lo x e o , n e id e o S' iqîv."
zt]v 8 ’ d jia fieijio fiev o g npooeiprj jw d a g d)Kvg AxiXXet>g- 215
“XPV o((xoiTEpdv ye, ded, e'jiog e ip v o o a o d a i,
Kai fidX a Jiep dv^ a KexoXconevov mg y a p afieivov-
og KE deoig EMJieiOrjrai, judXa t ’ e k X v o v a v T o v .”
fj K ai E z’ dpyvpET] Kconr] oxeOe x^'PO- ffapE iav,
ay/ (5 ’ Eg k o v X e o v w o e fiEya ^ ifo g , o v d ' d m d r ] O E v 220
fivdcp AOrjvatrjg- rj 6' OvXvfiJtdvdE P e^^ keiv
dcofiar' eg a iy id x o io Aidg jxexd d a ifio v a g dXXovg.
306 Notes
212. K a t also.
213. TOi: 1004 or 999. —napeooEtai: 973:1.
214. Tintv = A dr]vair] K ai H pr]: 996. — loxeo: reflexive 1067:1; restrain yourself.
216. xpil ( e o n I'): with infin. —ocpwitEpov is made emphatic by the following ye,
whereby Achilles contrasts his attitude of respectful obedience toward the
goddesses with that of stubborn defiance toward Agamemnon, whom he no
longer intends to obey. —penog peipvo-, 526.
217. KEXoXô^ôv: 1109:6. —Kai even though. aneivov ( e o t i v ).—
218. 0EQI5: 996. —ekXvov avtoC: 984, 1082.
219. T]: [ij/xi], he spoke. —oxeOe = eax ed e [ex(o\, 901
220. 01)8 ’ djiiOtiOEV: litotes, the use of the negative of a contrary to intensify the
affirmative; c f “not at all bad,” meaning “very good.” —kovXeov p&OE, 526.
221.nt0cp: 996.
307 Translate:
1 .1 shall declare the will of the gods to you, andthis also (Kai) shall be accom
plished. 2. At some time you shall have twice as many splendidgifts on account
of this arrogance of Agamemnon, if you will restrain (yourself) and obey us.
3. We must obey the gods, even though (we are) greatly enraged in our hearts;
193
HOMERIC GREEK
for it is better thus. 4. The gods give especially (great) heed to (the prayer of) those
who obey them. 5. Upon their silver hilts they hold their heavy hands and thus
disobey the commands of the goddesses. 6. When Athena departs (dV with
subjunct.) to Olympus, among the other divinities, we will thrust our mighty
swords into their scabbards.
194
Lesson 47
THE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE OF -fii VERBS

Il ia d , 2 2 3 -2 3 2
308 Thoroughly review all the -fxi verbs, both regular and irregular, in the active
voice, all moods and tenses, 924, 949-956, 964-965, 967.
309 Thoroughly review the -fii verbs, both regular and irregular, in the middle and
passive voices, all moods and tenses, 957-961.
310 VOCABULARY
dvTio;, r|. ov in opposition, opposing, facing, meeting
dpicnevg, no(;, 6 chief, leader
dtapTtipoq, 11, 6v harsh, bitter
5 t]ôP6po9, r|. ov devouring the (goods of the) people
eXacpog, ou. 6. f| deer, stag, hind
eâvTi5 again, anew, then
6o)pr|oo(o, G b ip i^ ^ o ^ a i, £ 0 (o p ti^ a , — ^ ^tO w p rixO tiv (stem: O u p tiK -) arm, don
the breastplate
Kif|p, icr|p6(;, f| death, fate
K p a S ii ] (K a p S iT i, 597-598), r|<;. n heart
Xoxos, o\), 6 ambush, ambuscade
Xcaîiooâi*, EXa)PT]ad^T]V, insult, revile, act arrogantly, outrage,
ruin, wrong
oivoPapf|5 , iq drunken, wine-heavy
^^â, aio(;. x6 eye; plur., face
oi)Ti8avo5,11. ov worthless, of no account, cowardly, feeble
*tX,d(o, TXTjooâl, ET>.iiv (cToXaaoa), T^r>,tiKa (stems: tX a-, ta^ a-) have
the heart, have courage, endure, dare, suffer
SoxaTOi;, r|, ov (superl. o fv a x e p o g , r|, ov) latest, last, uppermost, hindmost
Related words: antidote, antipathy, antipodes; aristocracy; demagogue,

democracy, epidemic; thorax; cardiac.
311 Translate:
1. E 7 iE a J i T E p o e v r ' A x u f j o i ; r je v ( e if i i} a r a p r r j p d . 2 . jip o a e e i ju b v A r p e i d r j p
A x M s v g e X r jy E x o ^ o io . 3. A y a ^ e ^ v a v o v k e o t i v o i v o f i a p ^ q , o v d ' e'x e i o / u / u a z a
195
HOMERIC GREEK
Kvvog Kpadirjv d ’ eXdipoio, dAA’ eVA?; dvfiS QmprjxQfjvai d fia X aa eg JioXejLiov,

iev a i 8 ’ eg lo x o v o v v d p io z tjeo o iv A x a ia v . 4. rd de d d e x a i eiv a i lefjp dXXoiaiv
d v d p d o iv . 5. f] JioXv k a io v eoxiv d n oaip eeoO ai dmpa JidvTcov o'( Tiveg (d on g )
eim oaiv dvxw v aedev. 6. A yafie/xvav eaxi dtjfiofidpog (iaoiXevg, EJiei d v d a o e i
ovxidavoT oiv dvOpmjioiaiv- ?/ y a p a v uvi> v o x a x a X a fiijo a n o , xd%’ a i”de
Qvfibv d k e o o a ix o .
Iliad, 223-232
nTjXeidrjg 6 ’ eâvxig dxapxrjpoig ejieeo o iv
A xpeidtjv TipooeeiJiE, Kai o v juo Xfjye x d lo io -
“oiv ofiap eg , Kvvdg dfifxax’ e%(ov, Kpadirjv d' eXd<poio. 225
ovxe Jio x ’ eg JidXefiov d ^ a Xam Ocoptjxdfjvai
ovxe X oxovd' iev a i o v v d p ia x ijea o iu A xai& v
xexXt]Kag dvfiS- xd d e xoi ktjp eid ex a i eiv a i.
rj TioXv X aidv eaxi Kaxd axpaxdv evpvv A xoli& v
d a p ’ djioaipeToO ai, og xig oeGev dvxiov eiJitj- 230
drjfiolidpog fiaaiX evg, en ei o v x id a v o io iv dvdaaeig-
fj y a p dv,A xpeidr], vvv v o x a x a Xcof^Tjoaio.
313 Notes
223. tnEEoaiv: 1005.
224. xoXoio: 987.
226. XaS: 1007. —:t6Xe|uov a|na: 1168.
111. X6xov5’(e); 788:4.
228. 0VJIM: 1009. —e iS e ta i mid.: seem, appear, resemble.
230. djioaipeioO ai: 584-585. —S « p ’ {dudpog). —65 T15 = 60x15 . —dvriov
ptuiti: 526.
231. StmoPopoi; Paoiiêi)?: 978:3. —ovTiSavoioiv: 997, 1001.
232. v o x a x a : 780-781,784.
314 Translate:
1. All the well-greaved Achaeans addressed the gods with bitter words, nor
ceased they ever from their hot wrath. 2. The drunken Agamemnon has the face of
a dog and the heart of a deer, nor does he ever dare in his soul to arm himself with
the breastplate together with his people for war, nor to go into ambush with the
leaders of the Achaeans, for this seems to be death to his soul. 3. He thinks it
much better throughout the broad camp of the Achaeans to take away the prizes
of honor of all who dare to speak against him. 4. This king is a devourer of the
goods of the people and he rules over worthless men. 5. The son of Atreus has
now insulted for the last time, for he has lost his soul.
196
Lesson 48
REVIEW OF NOUNS
Il ia d , 2 3 3 -2 3 9
315 Review all three declensions of nouns, memorizing thoroughly the meaning
and forms of each word given in the paradigms in 659-716.
316 Read the sections on the gender of nouns, 634-636.
317 VOCABULARY
dvaGtiXEC), dva0iiXT|O(i), dvE0T|>ktioat sprout, bloom (forth), (anew), bud (again)
SiKttOJioXog, Q-u. 6 judge, arbiter
0E ^ i;, lOToc;. f| custom, law, decree, justice, oracle, rule
X.Ei7i(o, eXijtov , ÊXoiJta, X^>,El^âl, eXe (^\|»a,---- ^^.EXafifiai*, E>i,dmjv* (stems: Xe^ -, Xcm-), strip,
peel, scale
v a i yea, yes, verily
oi;o5, ou. 6 branch, shoot, limb
o p o g ( 0 V p 0 5 , 571), eoq, to mountain
dpK og, DU, 6 oath, that by which one swears (as witness)
T|(;. f| palm (of hand), hand, fist
rtEpi adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., around, about, concerning, for,
exceedingly, over, above, superior; adv., around, about, beyond, over, exceed
ingly, round about; with gen., around, about, concerning, beyond; with d a t,
around, about, concerning, for; with acc., around, about, concerning
TO^l^, fj(;. f) cut(ting), stump
q>>ôi6; , oti. b bark, peel, rind, shell
(popECi), (popr|aii)*, Eq>6pi]oa, bear, carry, bring
(pvXXov, o\j, TO leaf, foliage
(prw, cpvoo), E(pvoa (E(pCv), JiEcpvKa bear, produce, bring forth, cause to grow
XaXKog, ou. 6 bronze, implement of bronze (axe, spear, etc.)
Related words: perimeter, period, periphery, periphrasis; phosphorus;

physical, physiognomy, physiology.
197
HOMERIC GREEK
318 Translate:
1. iêiJiev aTapTrjpa ijie a T oiaiv A x a io io i Kai a fio o e v opKov
fiiy a v . 2. vai /la r o d e OKfjmpov d^vvfii, to toi eooETai fiey a g opicog. 3. rdde
oKfjjiTpov o v jioTE (pvoEi (pvkla Kai dôvg, o v d ’ dm drjX ijaei, Jiepi y a p p d e
<pvXXa TE Kai (pkoidv sXEy/a/XEV 4. to oKr]m pov A x d ijo g XeXoijie rofifjv
£v dpEOOiv. 5. vvv d' avQ' v h q 'Axaimv, d iK a ojw k oi, o i Eipvaxai d ifiia ra g Jipdg
Aidg, (popEovoi TO aKt]7iTpov iv JiaXdfir]oiv.
Iliad, 233-239
dA/l’ £K TOI Epio) Kai Eni Êyav dpKov o ^ o v fia v
ra/' ^ d t6 6 e oK^TiTpov t o fiEv o v JioTE (pifXXa Kai dlôvg
(pvoEi, EnEi dfj J ip m a To^rjv ev opE oai XeXoitiev, 235
o v d ' dmdt]Xt]OEi- n spi y d p p d e xaXKdg eXe^/ev
<
pvXXa TE Kai (pXoiov- vvv avTE fiiv v h g A x a ia v
EV Jiakdfij]g (popEovoi diKaoTwXoi, o i te dEfiim ag
Jipdg Aidg EipvaTai- 6 d i toi jiEyag EOOETai opKog- 239
320 Notes
233. EK, Eni 1048-1049. —6 ^ ov ^ al = 6 fi6 (o )o fia i = dfxovfiai [duvvfxi]-. 603,
584-585.
234. nd t 68e 0Kii:itp0V: when a speaker wished to address the assembly, a herald
placed a scepter in his hands, as a sign that he “had the floor.”
235. npwta; 780-781.
236. Jitp i 1048-1049. — bronze was the common metal for implements,
before the introduction of iron. Here “bronze” means some tool of bronze,
such as an axe.
236-237. E . . . (prXXa, cpôiov: 1020:1; 1021 and note.
234-239. TO o r . . . E ip v a ta i forms a parenthesis, describing the scepter.
There is a return to the main idea in the following words, and this is taken up
and completed in the next lesson, lines 240-244.
239. E ip v atai: perf. 3rd plur. = sip v y ra i, 597-598. —6: masculine, where the
neuter would be expected. It takes the gender of the following predicate
{opKog), by what is known as “attraction.” —npog A 16 5: under the supervision
o f Zeus, or else the laws fro m (i.e., given by) Zeus.
321 Translate:
1. We shall declare and also swear a great oath. 2. By this scepter, you (sing.)
shall not return safely home, but you shall all perish here. 3. Our scepters will
never produce leaves and branches, nor will they sprout forth, since they have left
their stumps in the mountains. 4. The sons of the Achaeans with bronze peeled the
scepters round about of their leaves and branches, and now the kings, dispensers
of justice, who preserve the laws given to them by Zeus, bear them in their hands.
198
Lesson 49
REVIEW OF ADJECTIVES
Il ia d , 2 4 0 -2 4 4
322 Review all regular adjectives, learning thoroughly the meanings and forms of
each as given in the paradigms, 717-732
323 Review irregular adjectives, learning thoroughly the meanings and forms of
each as given in the paradigms, 732-733.
324 VOCABULARY
d^voao), (stem: dfivx*) gnaw, tear, bite, scratch
dvSpocpovog, ti, ov man-slaying, murderous
S v v a ^ a i, 5vvTjooâl, £5vvtlod^tlv, — i, S tS v v tm ai*, eSvvdoOiiv be able, can,
have power
"Ektwp, opoq, 6 Hector, son o f Priam, and leader o f the Trojans
ev8o0i within, inside, at home
EVTE, when, as
ouSei?, ov5e^â, ovSev no one, not any, none, nothing
rtinto), JiEOEOjiai, ErtEoov, rtCTTii(K)a (stems: êt-, n t-, jiti ]-) fall, drop, die, per
ish, sink
JioOii, fji;, Ti yearning, longing, regret
tio), tiow, E T la a , ---- i TETlfiai honor, esteem
v ji6 (v:ia() adv., and prep, with gen., dat., an d acc., under, beneath, by, at the
hands of, by means of; adv., under, secretly, behind, beneath, by, gradually;
with gen., (from) under, by; with dat., (down) under; with acc., (down) under,
during, toward
Related words: dynamic, dynamo, dynasty; hector; hypotenuse, hypothesis.
325 Translate:
1. Jtodij A xdX fjo(; (979:3) iÊTai ovfiJiavTag v ia g A x a ia v , tote d ’
A yane^vcov ax v v fiev oq :tep o v dvvijoeT ai xponofxeeiv Xaw, e v z ’ dV jiokXoi
dvdpeg dvôKOVTsg vji' avdpo(p6voio "Eiccopog mjizcoaiv. 2. d/uvêi de dvfiov
evdoQi 'Ayajienvcov xaojxtvoc, ovveku o v d ev etIoev AxiXfja d p iox ov A x a m v .
3. OKtjJirpov EOTI tetThevov, xpvoE ov y a p eoti, A x M s v g ds to EfiaXs ejii xôvi,
199
HOMERIC GREEK
EÊTO d ' avTog. 4. "Ektcop ajiolEOEi noXXovg A x ai^ y ev f^dxH ov

jiapEovzog (1111).
326 Review the preceding lesson for the connection of thought. Read and translate:
Iliad, 240-244
fj m)T AyjXkfjog JioOi] iÊxai v ia g A xaim v 240
ovfijiavrag- tote 6 ’ o v ti dvvrjOEai axvvÊvoq JiEp
X p u i a / ^ E i v , ev t'dV n o k X o i ix p ' " E K T o p o g a v d p o ( p 6 v o io
dvôKOVTEq JimTcoai- ov 6 ’ EvdoOi dvfiov dfivÊig

XcoofiEvog, o t ' dpioT ov A xaim v ov8 ev h i o a q . ’’
327 Notes
240. XxiX.Xtio5: 979:3, spoken with a proud self-consciousness. —viag; here third
decl.; 1019. The thought of this and the preceding lesson is “as surely as this
scepter will never bear leaves and branches, so surely shall yearning for Achil
les come upon every one of the sons of the Achaeans.”
241. CTVUJiavtag (emphatic by position): modifies v iaq. —t i : 780-781.
—dxvrnevog: 1109:6, although vexed.
242. xpaiOfiEiv = x p a io /is e iv 584-585 (A xaioToiv).
243. d^vÊig: c f Eng. “gnaw ones heart, eat out one’s heart.”
244. o t ’ (e): accus. neuter of oote , used adverbially, w ith respect to the fa c t that,
because, in that. —(A xdX fja) apiorov A/aiMV. —o i)8^ : adverbial, 780-781,
1014 Mof flf all; lit. in respect to nothing, in no way.
328 Translate:
1. A great yearning for the divine son of Peleus came upon all the sons of
the Achaeans, and Agamemnon, son of Atreus, was not at all able to help them,
though grieved in his soul, when many of the brave men fell at the hands of the
man-slaying Hector, son of Priam. 2. Then did Agamemnon gnaw his heart
within, enraged that he in no way did honor to Achilles, the bravest of the
Achaeans.
200
Lesson 50
REVIEW OF PRONOUNS
Il ia d , 2 4 5 -2 4 9
329 Review the meanings and forms of the personal and possessive pronouns as
given in the paradigms in 760-764.
330 Review the meanings and forms of the pronouns as given in the paradigms in
765-777.
331 VOCABULARY
dyoptiTTig, ao. 6 orator
dvopovw *,---- ■,dvMpovoa jump up, spring up, start up
fji;, Ti voice, speech, discourse, language, sound, cry
y a ia , rji;. fi earth, land, country
yXvKrg, ela. v sweet
y k & a a a , r|(;, f| tongue, language, speech
ETEpcoOfv from the other side
ec, sweet-speaking, sweet-toned
f|Xog, ou. 6 nail, rivet, stud
Xiyv?, £ia. u shrill, clear-toned
iToq, TO honey
jitiviOM, efifivloa rage, fume, be furious
Neotwp, opoq, 6 Nestor, one o f the Greek chieftains
:iEip(o, — i E:iEipa, — ^nEnapâl, EJidptivf (stems: JiEp-, reap-) pierce, stud,
rivet
nv)>,i05 ri. ov Pylian, of Pylus, a town in the southwest o f m ainland Greece
p i a , pEVOojiai*, EppEvoa*, EppvtiKa*, — Êppvi|v (stems: pEV-, pEp-, pv-,
pvE-), run, flow, stream, pour
Related words: geography, geology, geometry; glycerine, glycol; glossary,

polyglot, epiglottis; heterodox, heterogeneous; mellifluous; rhetoric.
332 Translate:
L dTog A x d X e v g e ^ e r o x c o d f i e v o g , A y a / i i / u i 'c o v ^ ’ h e p c o d E v e f i i ^ v i e . 2. toToi
d ’ A x a i o l o I N e o t w p k iy v g a y o p ijT fjg F lv k im v a v c o p o v o E v . 3. d n d y ^ d o o r j g
201
HOMERIC GREEK
N âropog avdt) ep peev ykvKicov (751-752) (993). 4. to OKfjmpdv

eoxiv n enap/xivov xpvoe'ioioiv tjXoioiv, A x d k e v i; de to efiaXe jioti yaii], eêro
6 ’ avTog.
Iliad, 245-249
cog (pdxo nrjXEidrjg, Jio u d t OKfjmpov fid k e y a iij 245
XpvoEwig ijXoioi JiEJiapfiivov, e^ eto (5’ avrog-
Axpetdrjg 6' sxepmdEv ifijjviE. toToi S e N eotcop
yjdvEJifig av op ov oE , kiy v g nvklcov dyopi]Ti]g,
ro d Kai a n d ykmoor]g fiE knog ykvKimv pEEv avd'q. 249
334 Notes
245. noxl (with y aii] 1009).
246. {]Xoiai 1005.
248. dvopovoE = d v c o p o v o E .
249. Tou; dem. pron., referring to Nestor. —peev = epeev: the imperfect of customary
or repeated action. —Ê>,lTog; 993.
335 Translate;
1. When the son of Peleus had spoken all these bitter words, he hurled the
scepter to the ground and sat down in anger. 2. Many scepters of the sons of the
Achaeans were studded with golden nails. 3. The son of Atreus kept raging at
the divine son of Peleus; but Nestor, who was kindly disposed toward all the
Achaeans, sprang up and addressed them (with) winged words, which were
much sweeter than honey. 4. The sweet-speaking Nestor, the clear-toned orator
of the Pylians, harangued all the Achaeans with many words. 5. Words sweeter
than honey flow from the tongue of the aged warrior.
202
Lesson 51
REVIEW OF PARTICIPLES AND INFINITIVES

Il ia d , 2 5 0 -2 5 9
336 Review the forms and meanings of all the active infinitives and participles of
Uco. 908-909 and 736-741.
337 Review the forms and meanings of all the middle and passive infinitives and
participles o fX v a . 914-915, 920-921, 735, 742.
338 VOCABULARY
dvGpwrtog, o\). 6 (mere) man, ordinary man; c f dvfip, real man, hero
A x a ii;, idoq.f. Achaean
YEveT|, fiq. f| generation, family
Yti0E(i), Ytl0i1 O6), EYT|0i]aa, yey>1®“ (stems: Yn0> rejoice
f|Yd0EO5, r|, ov very sacred, holy
i]8ti already, at this time
iKdvw come (upon), go
^dpvaâl strive, fight, contend
Êpo\|/, OKoq. 6 mortal, man
VE05 , ri, ov (vEpog) new, young, recent, late, youthful
rt^ 0O5 (rty0-, :ia0-, 597-598) eoq, to woe grief, sadness
:iEV0o n a i (jivv0d v o jiai), JiEvoonai, Ertv06ni]v (rtErtv06fitiv), — ^jiEmJOfiai
(stems: :iv0-, :iEV0-) learn (by inquiry)
jio jio i alas! ah me! O dear! good gracious!
Jipoo0E(v) before, formerly, sooner
Ilv>.05, o\), f| Pylus
TpE(p(i), 0pE\)/w*, £0pE\)/a (Expatpov), TETpocpa, T E 0 p a jijia i*, £Tpd(pi)v (stems:
0pEcp-, 0po(p-, 0pa<p-) nurture, feed, breed, grow up, nourish (619)
tphaTog, n, ov third
(p0iv(o, (p0ioo), E<p01oa,---- i EcpOiâi, E(p0(0i)v perish, die, waste away
Related words: anthropology, misanthropic; genealogy, genesis, heteroge

neous, homogeneous; Neo-Platonism, neophyte, neologism; Nepenthe, pathos
(jiyOog 597-598), apathy, sympathy, antipathy, pathology; phthisis.
203
HOMERIC GREEK
339 Translate:
1. d v o YEvmi fiepom ov avdpam ov ffStj E(pdlaTo (597-598) N eo ro p i. 2. a i
y ev ea i fiepoTiaiv avdpconcov Jipoadev expdiprjoav icai eyevovTo d fia N eo ro p i ev
rjyaOe^ rjvlco, fxexa 6 e xpixdxr] yeuefj tjv a a a e xdxe 6 yepmv. 3. Jio kk d Kai
HeydXa JiEvdea iêxai ejii y a ia v A x a itd a . 4. n piaju og n a id eq xe F lpidfiov
yr]6r]oaiaro, dXXoi xe T p aeg fie y a /cei' Kexapo'iaxo dvfia, ei nvdo'iaxo ndvxa
xd6' Ayj^^fjog xe Kai A y a fien v o v o q fia p v a fiev o iiv , x a y a p nepi fiiu eoxov
A avam v dXXav (988) fiovXijv, Jiepi d' eoxov fxdxr]v. 5. X x d ^ ev g Kai Aya/ê/^vcov
Tjoxrjv veaxepco N eoxopog, dXX ovd' cog ene'idovxo yepovxi.

Iliad, 250-259
x& i] 6 r ] d v o f i e v y e u e a i / x e p o m o v d v B p c o m o v 250
e c p d la d ’ , o ' i o i n p o o d e v d f i a x p d f e v ijd e y e v o v x o
e v n i X u ) r jy a Q e r ] f x e x d b e x p i x d x o i o i v d v a o o e v .
o 0 (p tv e v (p p o v e co v d y o p t j o a x o K a i f ie x e e m e v -
“ a JW Jt o i. 7f i e y a n e v d o g A x a u d a y a i a v 'i K d v e i -
t] K e v y t ] d i ] o a i f l p i a f i o g F l p i d f i o i d x e J i a i d e g , 255
d X k o i xe Tpm g f i e y a K e v K e x a p o 'i a x o Qvfim
e i o ip a iv x d d e n d v x a Jiv O o ia x o ^ a p v a ^ e v o ii v ,
o in e p i êv fiovXr/v A a v a a v , Jiepi d' eoxe fxdxeodai.

d X X d J ild e o d - d fi( p a 6 e ve m x ep m e o x o v e f i e io .
341 Notes
250. Tw: 998.
251. e<p0ia0’ = e(p6laxo. pluperf. 3rd plur., = E(p0iYTO, 597-598. —oi oi: the first
of these is the rel. pron., nom. plur. masc., referring to d v d paim v, line 250;
the second is an enclitic (554, 760). Here it is the dative of accompaniment
with d fia . —tpacprv (= expdqtrjoav) r|8e y^vovro, hysteron proteron, i.e., the
time represented by ey ev ov x o comes before that of xpdêv, ahhough xpd<pev
here precedes ey ev ov x o. This is a permissible device, as it indicates priority o f
interest, instead of the usual one o f time. Compare Shakespeare’s “I was bred
and born.” The main idea is contained in the first expression, while the sec
ond is added as an afterthought, for the sake of greater fullness and accuracy.
252. T p itd to iaiv is masc., referring to the general idea of men, as implied in the
word y e v e a i , line 250. —riy a B ^ { d y a - : 1168, 571).
254. y aiav : 1019, i.e., “our homes.”
255. Ytj0f|oai: 973; 1103, 1105; as indicated by the accent, opt. 2nd sing., i.e., your
quarrel would be a source of rejoicing to our enemies, since it would hinder
the successful prosecution of the war.
256. ÊYa: 780-781. —0ij^w: 1009.
258. PovXr|V, ndx£O0ai: acc. and infinitive of specification, 1014; the two prime
characteristics essential to a successful leader. —Aavawv: gen., because of the
204
L E S S O N 51
idea of comparison contained in the adverb n e p i taken with the verb e o t e

[eini], meaning surpass, be superior, 988. Observe how judiciously the old
man mingles praise with censure.
259. E^£ô: 993; cf. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar: “Love and be friends, as two such
men should be; for I have seen more years, I’m sure, than ye.”
342 Translate:
1. Two generations of mortal men, who were born and bred with him in the
very sacred Pylus, have passed away, and he is now ruling among (those of) the
third. 2. A great woe will come upon all the lands of the Achaeans, because
Achilles and Agamemnon are contending. 3. Priam and the sons of Priam and all
the other Trojans will greatly rejoice in their souls when they learn all these things
about Achilles and Agamemnon contending, for they are better than the other
Achaeans in both council and battle. 4. They are much younger than Nestor, but
they will not obey him.
205
Lesson 52
REVIEW OF VERBS IN THE ACTIVE VOICE

Il ia d , 2 6 0 -2 6 8
343 Review thoroughly all the active forms of k v a , and of all the verbs, paying
careful attention to the meaning of each form, 904-909, 924, 949-956.
344 Optional: Write out the tables of personal endings of verbs in the active, 819-825.
345 VOCABULARY
ft0d v ato5, r|. ov deathless, immortal, imperishable (1168)
d0Epi^(a (stem: 0epi8-), with gen., 984 slight, disregard, despise
A iyEi8ii5, oio, 6 son of Aegeus, Theseus
dvTi0EO5, r|, ov godlike, equal to the gods, a match for the gods
dpEiiov, ov {compar. o f dyaOog, 754:1) better, mightier, braver
A prag, avioq, 6 Dryas
£K:rdY>.(05 terribly, horribly, awfully, dreadfully, frightfully
'E^dSiog, ou, 6 Exadius
EJiieiKEôg, ov like, resembling
EJiiX06v io5, ov (cf. x0Mv) earthly, of the earth, earth-born, upon the earth
0 tlOEV5, fjoq (eoq, 572), 6 Theseus, an Athenian hero
KaiVEV)5, fioq {ioq. 572), 6 Caeneus
KdpTioTog (= KpdtioTog, 597-598), r|, ov {superl. o f KaptEpo; ii, ov), mightiest,
strongest, bravest, most excellent
0 105, ri, ov such (as), of what sort, what
6^1 XE(a, 6 |u1 Xt|om*, ((>ÎXt1o a associate with, collect
opEOKuog, Ti, ov (c f opoq) living in mountain dens
IlEip iBo o ;, o\), 6 Pirithous (1168), leader o f the Lapiths, inhabitants o f Thessaly
Jioiniiv, |i£vo(;, 6 shepherd, guardian, protector
no^vcptmog, o\), 6 Polyphemus
T0105 , r|, ov such (as), o f th e sort that, o f the kind that
(pT|p, (pripoq, 6, Ti wild animal, (savage) beast, brute
Related words: homily, homiletics; feral, ferocious, fierce.
206
L E S S O N 52
346 Translate:
1. NioTcop mÎ aijoev a v d p d o iv ape'iooiv 'A yafiefivovoq Axi^^fjog re, o i (5’
ov JiozE Tov y ' riQipiôv. 2. o v rig juo eiS e ro io v g dvdpag, o v d e idrjrai, o io v
n eip iO oov ze A pv av zd re :w iÊva X dav. 3. Keivoi (pfjpeg ija a v Kdpxiozoi
ndvTOiv (pr]pav opeoKmmv, d k k ’ o '(8e tjpaeg hpd(p7]oav KdpTioxoi ndvTcov
emxdovicov dvSpoiv, e^ idxovio d e <prjpoiv icai dM okeooav xovg EKJidyXag.
Iliad, 260-268
^ 8 r ] y d p J i o r ’ e y a ic a i d p e i o a i v ije J i e p v u i v 260
d v d p d a i v d ) fii/ .T ] o a , K a i o v j w t e f t ' o i y ' d d e p i ^ o v .
o i) y d p n w r o i o v g i d o v d v e p a g o v 6 e i d c o f i a i ,
o io v r ie ip iQ o o v t e A p v a v x a t e Jio ifiE v a Aa<S>^

K a i v E a t ' 'E ^ d d i o v t e K a i d v x i d E o v r i o k v ip r jf i o v
[0r]OEa r ’ AiyEi8t]v, ejiieiiceaoi' dOavdzoioiv]. 265

K dpriaroi 8fj keivoi tnixdoviav zpd(pEV dvdpmv-
KdpTlOTOl fAEV Eoav KUl KapTlOTOig EfldxOVTO,
( p r jp o iv 6 p £ 0 K ( l ) 0 i 0 i , K a i E K J i d y X a g d n d X E o a a v .
348 Notes
260. Kai: even. — dpEiooiv: 1007, an argument a fortiori, i.e., if better men than
Agamemnon and Achilles had taken his advice, so much the more should
they. —C|uiv: some would substitute for this, thus saving Nestors
politeness, but at the cost of his point. His whole argument depends upon
his assertion that better men even than they had taken his advice.
262. ^S(aâl: the subjunct. mid., with the idea of yearning for something past and
gone. d v E p a g , 1168, 571.
265. ftOavdtoioiv: 1003. —Brackets enclose lines thought to be spurious.
268. (ptipoiv opeoKuoiot (in apposition with K a p x i o T o i g in the preceding verse)
doubtless refers to the centaurs, creatures with the bodies of horses and the
heads and shoulders of men.
This passage refers to the famous battle o f the Lapiths and Centaurs, well known
in Greek legend and a favorite subject for Greek art.
349 Translate:
1. Nestor associated with better men than the chiefs of the Achaeans, and no
one ever despised him and his good plans. 2. We never saw such men, nor will we
see (subjunct.) them, for they are all dead (have died). 3. Those were the mightiest
of mortal men upon the earth, and they fought with the wild beasts living in
mountain dens, and they utterly destroyed them.
207
Lesson 53
REVIEW OF VERBS IN THE MIDDLE VOICE

Ilia d , 2 6 9 -2 8 9
350 Review thoroughly all the middle forms of Xvco and of the -fii verbs, paying
careful attention to the meaning of each form, 9 1 0 -9 1 5 ,957-962.
351 Optional; Write out the tables of the personal endings of verbs in the middle
voice, 821, and read 826-829.
352 VOCABULARY
dvTipiiiv with opposing might, antagonistically
ajiiog, r|, ov (c f a:n6) far, distant
PpoTog, OV), 6 mortal, man
YEivojiai, — i eyeivantjv (stem: yt\-) beget, bear, produce, be born
edw, edoM, eictoa, eifiK a*, e ia n a i* , cldOiiv* (stem: oepa-) allow, permit, leave
epKog, £0(;, i6 hedge, fence, defense, bulwark, barrier
kCSoi;, eoq, x6 glory, honor, renown
Ê6f|a(a, fiE0fjKa (^ E 6^K a), nEGEiKa*, HE0Eifiai*, fiE0E(0tiv let go,
give up, forego, dismiss
fiEGoiiilXio), — i ^£0(a^tXt1o a associate with, consort with
Ê^poâl,---- £^ôpE {often 3 r d pers.) (stems: aÊp-, ofiop-, oâp-) divide,
receive as share, as lot; E ifia p ta i (p erf) it is fated
fif|TE and not, neither, nor; ht|te . . . ht|te neither . . . nor
î^Ttip, xepoq (ipoi;) Ti mother
6ôô;, T|, ov equal, similar
^ oip a, r|(;, fi lot, portion, fate, suitability
7tik(o (imperf. En*>.ov, EÊXontiv),---- ^2nd aor. ejiXe (e^Xeto); turn, move; m id
be, become
oimaivco, ormavEM, Eof|fiiiva (stem: oiifiav-) order, point out, command
OKi]nToCxo?, OV scepter-bearing, scepter-holding
ti ])^60£(v ) far, from afar
Related words: gen-, 338; metropolis, metronymic, matriarch; semaphore,

semantics, semiotics; tele-, 113.
208
L E S S O N 53
353 Translate:
1. N e o t c o p 6 e /n eO co fiiA sev xoiaiv a v d p d o iv , a v T o i y a p xdv EKaXeoavTO e k
nvXov, d jiitjg y a trjg . 2. N io r c o p 6e K a z ’ a v r d v E fid x E z o (prjpaiv. 3. juxvzcov
z & v o t v v v ftp o z o i e 'i o i v E Jiix O o v io i, o v zig ju ax EO izo K e iv o io i <ptjpoi K a K o w iv .
4. K E i v o i d ’ d v d p E g ^ v v i r j i c a v j i o i d a c o v N i o z o p o g i c a i E T i E id o v z o fivdco.
5. dfiEivdv E o z i v JiEidEodai. dXX' o v k 'A z p E i d r ] A yafiE/ivovi t j v d a v E dkk'
dyaQog n E p ecov d< p E iX E zi]v K o v p r j v A xi^^fja o v d ’ EiaoE zbv e %e i v z ^ v , a g visg
.
A xaicov E dooav z t j v o i y s p a g J i p S z a . 6 A xdÊvg <5’ t jd s X E V s p i ^ E i v f i a o d r j i
d v z i f i h j v . 7. o v 7 10 Z E z i g dkXog O K T j m o v x o g fia a d E v g , w Z E v g e S c o ke K v d o g ,
E f i u o p E ztufjg d f i o i t j g z i u f j A y a^ sfivovog.
Iliad, 269-289
i c a i jA E v z o l o i v E y a i f A E d o f i i ^ E o v E K r i v X o v e X 8 cov ,
z r j A o d E v E ^ d m r j g y u i r j g - k u X e o u v z o y a p a v z o 'i - 270
K a i / u a y o f i r j i ’ K a z ' e ^ ' a v z o v iy c o - k e i v o i o i d ’ dVo v z ig
z m v , o i v a v f i p o z o i e 'io i v E J i i x d o v i o i , ^ a x E o i z o .
K a i l i E v U EV P o v X ecov ^ v v i e v t i e i Qo v z o z e fiv O c p .
d X X ' .lid E o O E K a i i '^ ^ E g , E J i s i J i E i d E o d a i d f i E i v o v .

o v z o i ’d ' d y a d o g J i E p E a v d m a i p E O K o v p r j v ,
/ut]ZE 275
dXX' Ea. mg o i np&za d o o a v y sp ag v h g A xaiSv-
f it jz E o v , n r j X E i d t ] , 9eX' i p i ^ E ^ E v a i f ia o iX f ji
dvzipirjv. E:iEi ov .~io6 ' opioirjg Efi/iopE zififjg

o K t j n z o v x o g jia o iX E v g , (o z e Z s v g K v d o g E d c o K E v .
Ei d s o i' K a p zE p d g io o i, 0ca Se oe y E i v a x o fifjz r jp . 280

dXX' o 3 e (p E p z E p d g e o z i v , e j i e I jiX e o v e o o iv d v d o o E i .
AzpEidt], oi' ds .lavE z e o v fiEvog- a v z d p iyco ye

X io o o u ' AxiXXfji UEdEfiEv xoXov, og fiE ya im o iv
EpKog A x a io T o iv j i e X e z o i JioXEfioio k u k o To . "
z o v d ' d j i a / X E i f i o ^ E v o g Jip o o E < p t ] K p e i c o v A y a f i E f i v c o v - 285
" m i 8 r ] z a v z d y E J i d v z a , y s p o v , K a z d jU o T p a v E E iJ iE g ,
d X X ' 6 6 ' d v r ] p eOeXei :z E p i J i d v z a v E ^ ^ E v a i dXXcov,

.id v z c o v UEV K p a z E E i v e 6 eXei, Jid v z E o o i 6 ' d v d o o e iv ,
j t d o i 8 e o i j ^ a i v E i v , d z i v ' o v J iE io E o d a i d im .
355 Notes
269. Toioiv: 1007, with such men as these, referring to the Lapiths. —t y a is
emphatic (761), said with a proud self-consciousness, and the effect is further
heightened by the use of the middle KoXsoavzo in the next verse. —avTot "they
themselves, and no less personages, great as they were, called me, even though
I lived far away; for they were willing to go to extra trouble to obtain the services
of such a good warrior, passing over many brave men who lived between.”
209
HOMERIC GREEK
270. KaXeoavTo: observe the force of the middle, “for their own sake,” which
denotes the special interest of the subject in the action, 1068,1067:3.
271. K at’ Efi’ avTOv: by m yself alone.
111. Observe the repetition of i y a . —fiaxeoito: 1105.
273. PovXewv = fiov X aav , 984. —^^6(p; 996. —^vviev [^vvirjixi], imperfect, 3rd
plural.
274. Ktti; also. — JiE(0EO0ai anEivov {eaxiv).
275. t6 v8 ’, Kovpiiv: 1020:1. — ewv: 1109:6.
276. e a = s a e (584-585) Axi^^f]a e'xeiv Kovprjv.
275-277. Observe how impartial Nestor is, in using exactly the same expression of
prohibition in addressing the two contestants (jxîe o v . . . ^rjxe ov). The first
of these refers of course to Agamemnon, the second to Achilles.
278. dvTipinv is emphatic by position. — 982.
278-279. Never has (any other) scepter-bearing king obtained honor equal (to that of
Agamemnon). That is, according to the Homeric tradition, as placed in the
mouth of Nestor, Agamemnon was the mightiest ruler of his time; therefore
Achilles should yield precedence to him.
280. Ei: concessive, even if.
281. ^>.e6 veooiv : dat., with a verb of ruling. —6 8 e : Agamemnon, of course.
282. “Even I, Nestor, entreat you.” Nestor makes a strong personal appeal to the
king. The emphatic eyco (761) is further stressed by being placed at the end of
the verse, and by being followed by ye.
283. HE0£HEvai: i n f i n i t . , —Xxi XXi ii (997).
284. A x a io io iv : 997, 999. — jio >.ejio io : 979:3.
286. Ktttd \ioipa\: fittingly.
287. 6 8 ’ dvf|p is said by Agamemnon with supreme contempt, as he does not even
deign to mention the hated name of his opponent: “this fellow.” —Jidvrwv:
988.
288. :idvT(ov: 985. —redvTEOOi: 1001.
289. a: 1014. —t iv ’ (a): 971, perhaps refers to Agamemnon. If so, it is superla
tively ironical and sarcastic. If it merely means “many a one,” as often, it still
has a considerable amount of the ironical element in it.
356 NOTE: Subsequent lessons do not include practice sentences; unless your instructor
feels m ore practice in translating Greek to English or English to Greek is needed,
in the remaining lessons you will concenrate on finishing B ook 1 o f the Iliad.
210
Lesson 54
REVIEW OF VERBS IN THE PASSIVE VOICE

Il ia d , 2 9 0 -3 0 3
357 Review thoroughly all the passive forms of Xvco, paying special attention to
the meaning of each form, 916-921.
358 Optional: Write out the tables of the personal endings of verbs in the passive
voice; 821, 823.
359 VOCABULARY
dcKcov, o\joa, ov unwilling
a i ^ (= aiEi) always, forever
a i^ a , aioq. x6 blood, gore
ai\|/a quickly, immediately
dvaipeo), dvaipiioo), dveeXov (dveiXov 584-585), dvf|pt]Ka*, dvT|pimai*,
dvflpeOtiv* (stems: aip e-, ik -) take (up), seize
5£iX6g, 11, 6v cowardly, cringing, miserable, pitiable
56pv, 5oup6i; (Soupaioi;), i 6 spear, beam, timber
ei (interj.) up! come! go to!
yEJiCTEiXa, — »EJiiT^raXnai (stems: taX,-) command,
accomplish
Epca^b), Ep(0T|O(a, ^pu iiaa flow, dash, spurt
KEâivoi;, n, 6v black, dark, dusky
^f|v (c f ^d) truly, indeed, to be sure
0VE16 0 5, Eoi;, TO abuse, reviling, insult
Êlpdo), TlEipfjoCi), ErtElpTiaa* (EJlEiptlodnHV), rtEIHEiptlKa*, JtEJlEiptm ai,
e™eip^6t|V try, attempt
TipoTiOrmi, Jipo6r|0(i), JiposOtiKa (stems: Oti-, 0E-) add, grant (in addition)
vnEiKw, vjiEi^M* (v:l£^ôâ^), vjiEiâ yield, submit
vjiopXf|6iiv interrupting, breaking in
Related words: eternal; hematite, hematology, hemorrhage, anemic; empirical,

pirate.
211
HOMERIC GREEK
Ilia d , 290-303
e i d e f x i v a ix f ^ t ] x r ] v i d e a a v d e o i a i e v e d v r s g , 290
l o v v E K o . o i n p o Q i o v o i v d v e 'i d e a / x v 6 i ] o a a d a i ; ”
T o v 6 ’ d p ' v jw fi^ T jd r jv d fo g A x il^ s v g -
" f j y a p /c£y d e i k d q t e K a i o v x i d a v b q K a X e o i f i t j v ,
s i 6 f j o o i j i d v e p y o v v j i e i ^ o f i a i , o t t i ic e v
d X X o i o i v d r ] z a v z ' E JiiT E k k E O , y a p e ix o i y E 295

[ a - q f i a i v - o v y a p s y c o y ’ h i a o i j i E i o E o d a i 6 l( o .]
d X k o d £ T O t E p E co , o v (5 ’ £i>i ( p p E o i j i d l X s o o f j o i v -
% £ p o i l i E v o v TO i i y a y s f x a x r i o o f i a i e i v e k o K o v p r j g
O V TE o o i O V TE T(p d X l c p , E JIE I f i ’ d i p s k E O d s y E d d l'T E g -
T o i l ' d ’ d k k c o v , d f i o i e o t i O o fj J i a p d i>rji f i e X a i v r ] , 300

T & v o v K d u T i ( p E p o iq d v E k a v a E K o v T o g e ^ e To .
E i d ' d y E f i r ] v J i E i p t j o a i , i v a y v m c o o i K a i o 'i6 e .
a iy / d t o i a i f i a K E l a i v o v E p co y o E i J is p i d o v p i . " 303
361 Notes
290. aixntiTT|V: an intentional weakening of Nestors words in line 284 (in
section 354).
291. JipoGeovoiv: 3rd plur. JipoTiQrjfii
294. n:av tpyov: 1013-1014.
295. Ejioi ye : as emphatic as possible.
296. ooi: 996. This verse is a sneering parody of line 289. —oiw: is ironical,
as usual.
298. XEpoi; 1005. — TOi: 760.
299. T(o [r/g. n '769].
300. not: 999. — eoti : 973:1.
301. TMV resumes the dkkcov of line 300, with added emphasis. —dcKOVTog
£^£ô: 1111.
302. ei S’ aye is exclamatory: “come on.” —Jteipiioai: aor. imperat. mid.; issued
in the form of a challenge: “Just try it!” or “I dare you to try it!”
303. 8ovp(
212
Lesson 55
REVIEW OF IRREGULAR -fii VERBS

I l ia d , 3 0 4 -3 1 4
362 Review thoroughly the irregular -/it verbs, 964-965.
363 Review thoroughly all other verb-forms not covered in the review of the last
three lessons, 922-935.
364 VOCABULARY
dvtipiog, n. ov opposing, hostile
dv(OY(o, dvw^ft), fjvwâ, avwya command, order, bid
djioX ruaivofiai (stem; XCfiav-) purify (oneself), cleanse (cf. below)
EeiKooi (eiKooi) twenty
eioTi, [ioo5] equal, equivalent, symmetrical, well-balanced
Eni::i>.e(o, tn iJi^ v o o n a i, EJiKiXtvoa*, EJiirtCTXevKa, EJiirtCT>wEvo(iai* (stems:
jiXev-, Ji>.Ep-, sail (upon, over), navigate
KE>.EV0O5, ou, T] {plur. K£>i,EV0a , (jdv, t(x ) road, way, path, journey, route
Kpivo), KpivEw, EKpiva, KEKpiKtt**, KEKpiâi, EKpi(v)0tiv (stems: Kpiv-, Kpi-)
pick out, select, choose, discern, decide, judge
azoq, t o offscouring, filth
MEVoiTid8ii5, ao. 6 son of Menoetius, Patroclus
:ioXufitiTi5 (gen. loq) wily, rich in counsel
JipoEpvw, JipoEpvxo {same as pres.), rtpoEipvo(o)a, — ^7tpoE^pv(o)âl (stems:
pEpv-, Fpi^-) draw forward, drag forward, launch
i)Ypo?» >1 . ov wet, moist, damp, watery
Related words: crisis, criticism, critique, criterion, hypercritical; Metis;

hygrometer, hygroscopic.
213
HOMERIC GREEK
Iliad, 304-314
c b g r c i y ' a v r i f i w i a i ^ a x t jo a ju e v c o e j i e e o o i v
avoTriTTjv, ^ v oav d ’ d y op fiv Jia p a vtjvoiv ’A xai& v. 305

rir]XEtdr]q fiev in i K lio la q icai v fja q iia a g
iji£ a v v T£ MEVoiTiddt] Kai o lg ir d p o ia iv ,
AipEidTjg (5 ’ d p a vrja dofjv dX ade n p oep v oo ev ,
E g d ' E p e r a g E K p iv e v e e ik o o iv . Eg c5’ E K U T O /ifiT jv
jir jo E 6 e & , d v d 8 e X p v a r j i d a K a X X m d p i] o v 310
E iO E V d y c o v - Ei> d ’ d p x d g E jir j J i o k v ^ r j x i g O d v o o E v g .
o i fiEv E J i E i z ' d v a p d v T E g ejiejiXeov vypd K s l E v d a ,

l a o v g 8 ' ATpsidrjg dnokvâivE oO ai dvayEV.
o l d ’ djiE?iVâivovTO K a i Elg dXa Xvixax' EîaXXov, 314
366 Notes
304. ejieeo o iv :
1005.
305. dvoxf|Ttiv = d v E o x ^ x r j v .
307. MevoiTidSfl: Patroclus. Like Agamemnon (line 7) Patroclus is first intro
duced by his patronymic, because he was such a well-known figure of the
legend that it was not necessary to be more specific. He and Achilles were
close friends, and he stood by Achilles through all this period of trial. It is
only his death in battle that furnishes a motive sufficiently powerful to induce
Achilles to take a further part in the fighting. His introduction at this point
is very skillfully done, as it is clearly indicated where he stands in relation to
the hero.
308. JipoEprooev: 1069, 837.
309. E5,E5: 1048-1049.
310. PnoE: 1069. —dvd: 1048-1049.
311. EioEV: 1069. —dyMV: 1108, Note 2.
312. KE>.ev0a: 1012. C f iw vxog, sea, literally, paf/i.
214
Lesson 56
Il ia d , 3 1 5 - 3 3 3
367 Read sections 584-585 on contraction.
368 VOCABULARY
a^5oâl (= a i§E o ^ ai) revere, (show) reverence
dTpvyEto5,ov barren (?), restless (?)
EX iaob), E iX i^ a , — ^ E i X i y f i a i E iX ix 0 iiv (ste m : f e Xi k -) , ( e i = ee, 584-585)
twirl, twist, curl, turn, roll
EJiajiEiXEO), EJtajtEiXr|O(0, EniiJiEiXtioa threaten (against), boast
Ep8(i), Ep^M , E p ^ a , E o p y a (s te m s f r o m pEpô); p t P Y v PO PY") do, perform, make,
sacrifice, work, accomplish
E v p io K b ), E\)pT|O(0*, E v p o v , E v p ijK t t* * , E v p t i| iia i* , E v p ^ O iiv * (s te m s : E V p -, EV p E-)
find, come upon, hit upon

Evpi'PdTtig, So. 6 Eurybates
0Epdji(i)V, ovTO(;, 6 attendant, squire, comrade
iK w ,---- iôv come, go
Kttjrvog, oti, 6 smoke, vapor, mist, fume
Ktjpif^, uKoq, 6 herald
o t p ii p o i ;, n. 6v ready, eager, nimble, swift
ÊVOfiai work, be busy, labor, do
p iy iw v , ov worse, more horrible
TaXGrPiog, ou, 6 Talthybius
teXt|ei5, eooa. ev complete, perfect, finished, unblemished
JipoocpwvEW, :ipoo(pMVT|O(0*, TipooeqxovTfaa address, accost, speak to
tappEO), tapPfjow’^, ETopptioa fear, be in terror, be frightened
Related words; helix; “Eureka!”; therapeutic, psychotherapy; tel-, 4; phon-, 296.
215
HOMERIC GREEK
Iliad, 315-333
epdov 6 ’ A jT o X X a v i T e X rjio o a g e K a x o fijia q 315
zavpcov 7/(5’ aiycov jia p a O Iv ’ dXdg a x p v y h o io -
K v 'io r] 6 ' o v p a v o v iicev ih o o o f ie v i] Jie p i k u j iv w .
a g o i fi£v i d jiev o v to Kara, axpazdv- o v d ’ Ayafie^vrnv
X r j y ’ epidog, xfjv npcoTov £ J ir]J i£ iX rjo ’ A x i X f j i ,
d X X ’ 6 y e T a X Q v j i i d v z e Kui E v p v f i d z r i v j i p o o e e i n e v , 320
zco o i e ' o a v K i j p v K E K a i o z p r j p m d e p d j i o v z e -
" e p X e o B o v k X io it jv n r jX r ] id d e c o A x d i j o g -
% £ ip d g e X o v z ’ d y E jX E v B p i a i j i d a K a X h n d p r j o v -
E l 6 e k e f i f ) d m t ] o i v , s y m 6 e k e v a v z o g s X c o fx a i
eX 6d)i> o v v j i X e o v e o o i - t o o i K a i p i y i o v E o z a i . " 325

a g E in a v Jip o iE i, K p a z E p b v d ’ i m ^ v 9 o y e z e XXe v .
TO) 6 ’ diicovzE jidzr]v Jia p d d iv ’ dXdg d zp v y sz o io ,

M v p ^ i d d v a v 6 ’ E m z e K X ia ia g K a i v f j a g iK E o d r jv .
z b v 6 ' E v p o v J i a p d z e k X i o i t ] K a i v r j i ^ E X a 'i v i ]
ijfiE v o v - o v d 'd p a zco y E id c b v y q d r i o e v A x i X X E v g . 330

TO) f i E v z a p f t ^ a a v z E K a i a i d o f i E v c o j i a a i X f j a
o z ^ z r j v , o v 6 e z i ^ i v jip 0 0 E < p c 6 v E 0 v o v d ’ s p s o v z o -
a v z d p d E yv co f j o i v e v i (p p e o i ( p d v r jo e v re -
370 Notes
316. KajtvS: round about in the smoke.
318. Td: 1012.
319. epiSog: 987.
321.01:999.
322. epxeoOov: dual imperat. — k Xio Iiiv ; 1019.
323. XEipog: 983. —dYtJiEv: 1107:11.
329. xov: there is no need to mention his name, as it is uppermost now in the
minds of all; and it is much more effective to say “him they found.”
330 (latter part); litotes; c f “not at all bad.” (See line 220.)
331. Observe the difference in tense of the two participles: the first denotes the
confusion they were thrown into (1081) at the sight of Achilles; the other
indicates their customary feeling of reverence toward him. —Paoi>îia
{AxiXXfja): through no fault of their own the heralds are in a very delicate
situation, as they have no desire to offend either Agamemnon or Achilles.
333. 6, here again, without the name of Achilles, is more poetic than to give his
name. Achilles shows fine tact and a human feeling for the heralds in their
embarrassment.
216
Lesson 57
Il i a d , 3 3 4 - 3 4 7
371 Learn the present system, all voices, of the contract verb T i^ d c o , 938-939, 745.
372 VOCABULARY
aYYC^05, o\), 6 messenger, courier
djitivT|5, eq harsh, cruel, rude
dooov nearer, closer (compar. o f a y x i)
8loy£VT|5, iq Zeus-born; Zeus-descended (1168)
e^dvw, E^d^ci), E^TiYayov, lead out, lead forth,
bring forth
EJiaiTio?, r), ov blameworthy, accountable, responsible, at fault
Etaipog (Etapo5, 571), ou, 6 companion, comrade, followêr, friend
OvilTog, 11, 6v (c f 0viioKa)) mortal, human
0 t ( o , ---- yE 0 C o a dash, rush (headlong), be rash, rage, be insane
^dKap {gen. apoq) blessed, happy, fortunate, lucky
^dpTvpog, ou, 6 witness
v o ^ w , V 0 1]0 (0 , ^ o i i o a , v E v o i ] K a * , V E V o i] n a i * , e v o t |0 i i v * perceive, think,
consider, plan
6X0(1 )65, 11, 6v accursed, baneful, destructive (1168, 571)
6nioo(i) back(ward), behind
ndTpoKXo;, 01). 6 Patroclus
np6o(o)(o forward, in front
XpEici) (x p E w ), 6o<;, fi or x6 need, necessity
Related words: angelic, archangel, evangelist; martyrdom.
217
HOMERIC GREEK
3 7 3 Read and translate:
Iliad, 3 3 4 -3 4 7
“Xaip£T£, icijpvKeg, Aidg a y y s k o i iqde Kai avdpav-
a o o o v h ’. ov XI fio i v/xfieg E Jia h io i, aXX' Ayafie/ivcov, 335
o 0(p3i TipoiEi B piarjidog EivEKa Kovprjg.
aXX' a y s , d io y e v ig FlazpdKkEig, EâyE Kovprjv
Kcu o<pcotv 6dg ayEiv. zcb d ’ am cb fidpTvpot Eorcov
jipdg IE OeS v juaicdpcov Jipog te dvrjTav avdpcomov
Kai Jipdg lo v fiaoiXTjog dnt]VEog, e '( jioxe dfj avTE 340
XP£M EfiEW yEvrjxai asiK Ea k o iy d v a^ v v a i
zoTg ukXoig. 7 y a p 0 y' d k o ifjo i tppsoi dvEi,
ovS e II oiS e v o fjo a i a n a npoooco Kai ojtlooco,
ojuuog o i Jia p d vrjvoi 0601 fiaxE O iar’ A x a io i."
(og <pdro, FldxpoKXog 3 e f i l m ejiejieiOeO' Exaipco, 345
EK ^ ’ d y a y s K hottjg B p ia tjld a KakXindprjov,
dcoKE d ’ d y siv . x a <5’ avxig ixrjv Jtapd vfjag A xaim v,
3 7 4 N otes
334. A 165 avY E ^ oi: officials w ere thought to have ob tain ed th eir authority from a
divine power.
337. n a tp o K X E ig : voc., irregular.
338. eaxwv [e/^/]: im perat., 964.
340. 5 t| a v t e , 5 8 6 , does n ot m ean “again,” to d en ote rep etitio n , but denotes a
situation opposed to th e present, as in line 237.
34 1. E^£ô: 979:3.
342. T015 d>^X,oi5: 997, contemptuously, and with emphatic position, perhaps with
a curt gesture, —yap, oôitjoi: 1168, 57 1.
343. I.e., to con sid er carefully and wisely. A chilles at last begins to realize that it is
not m erely m alice on the part o f A gam em n on, bu t a reckless im pulse or folly
[dxr]) that is lead ing h im on to ruin.
344. o i: 99 7 . — n a x e o ( a t ’(o ): opt., 3rd plur.
345. e ta ip w : 996.
218
Lesson 58
Il i a d , 3 4 8 - 3 5 8
375 Learn the present system, all voices, of the contract verb m)teco. 940-941, 745.
376 VOCABULARY
dn:Eip(ov, ov boundless, limitless
d n a v p d u {imperf. djii]v'p( 0v with aor. sense), djiovpf|O(0* , -----{aor. particip.
d jio v p a g = djio-ppctg) (stem : p p a-) take away, deprive, snatch away
dq>ap immediately, forthwith
P ^ 0O5, eoi;. x6 depth
Yvvf|, yuvaiKOi;, f] woman, wife
SaKpvM, SaKpvoo), e6dKpvoa, — ^§E5dKpvâI weep
T|YYvd>.iâ grant, present with
X ld !;o ^ a l, — i e X ia o o a , — ^ eXidoG iiv (ste m : X ia 6 - ) bend, turn aside,
sink, fall
|uivvv0d8iO5, r|. ov short(lived), ephemeral, brief
v6o(pi(v) apart, away, separate
opeym (c f 6pEYVVM*)» opt^w, rapeâ, — »6p(opeY^(Xl, dipÔtiv* reach forth,
stretch out, extend
ocpeiXo) (ocpeXXw), ocpEiXTjoo)*, w(pEXov, ftK pEi^nK a**,----- (i)q)EiXif|0T]V* (stem s:
0(pE>.-, otpEiXE-) owe, ought, be obligated; aor. in wishes, would that!
n d p o i0E (v ) before, formerly
JioXiog, 1]. ov gray, hoary
:i0VT05, o\). 6 sea, literally, path
JiOTVia, ri^, fj revered, honored (lady, queen)
TDT0O5, 11, ov small, little, young, brief
i)ViPpEH£Xt]5, eq thundering (growling, roaring) on high, or high-thundering, etc.
XEW ( x e v m ) , ----- ^ •CEXVKa’^, K ^ D fia i, E xv0tiv (stem s: xe d -, X«-)
pour (out, forth), shed (tears)
Related words; gynarchy, polygyny, misogyny, androgynous, gyn(a)ecology;

bathos, bathometer, 597-598.
219
HOMERIC GREEK
Iliad, 348-358
^ d ’ a e K o v a ’ d/xa z o lo i yvvf] Kiev, a m a p A x i ^êvq
d a ic p v o a g e x d p a v d<pap eX eto vdo<pi XiaaOeig
dll'' £<p’ dXdq T w h r jq . o p o a v i n ’ d m ip o v a itovzov- 350
jioXkd d e fJTjrpi (pilt] ^ p i]oaro dpeyvvg-
“f if jT E p , E J iE i f i ’ h E K E g y E ^ iv v v d d d to v JtEp EOVZa,
Tifitjv n ip fio i o<
pe IX ev 'OXvfinioq iy y v a X i^ a i
Z ev g vi//i(ipE/u£rrjg- v v v d ’ o v 8 e /he rv rd d v e tio e v .
77 y a p f i ’ A rpEidrjg Evpv KpEicov AyafiE/xvcov 355
ijTi/urjOEv iX a v y a p e%ei y ip a g , a v r d g d n o v p a g .”
mg (pdxo d d x p v %£o>v, r o v 8 ’ ekX ve n o z u ta fitjrrip
rifiEvr] Ev (H vQeooiv d k d g n a p d n a x p i y ip o v r i.
378 Notes
348. deicovo’(a).
349. SttKpvaag, 1081.
350. E<p’ (= erti): 1050:1. —6 p6(ov; = dpdmv, 945-948.
351. her name, Thetis, is not yet mentioned, as it was well known to the
audiences of the poem. She had been wooed by Zeus and Poseidon, but when
Zeus learned that she was fated to bear a son mightier than his father, he
forced her, against her will, to marry Peleus, by whom she bore Achilles.
Xtipag opEYvtg: when the ancients prayed they regularly stretched out
their hands in the direction of the divinity whom they entreated. If this were
a god of heaven, they lifted up their hands toward the sky; if a god of the sea,
they stretched out their hands as Achilles does here; if a god of the lower
world, they might even sit down and beat upon the ground to attract his
attention.
352. nivuv0d8iov; Achilles had the choice of a long and inglorious life, or one
short and full of renown. He had chosen the latter, and now that he has made
this choice, his situation is one of deep pathos.
353. Tlnf|v: emphatic by position, showing how keenly the Greek heroes thirsted
for glory, and how bitterly they resented any affront to their honor.
356. T|Tijiiioev by position in the verse is strongly contrasted with tljir|v of line
353. —avTog: o f his own arbitrary fr e e will.
357. T o v : 984.
358. n a tp i YôvTi: Nereus, who is too well known to the audience to require an
introduction. Homer usually calls him merely “the Old Man of the Sea” —
yepMV is here employed as an adjective, aged, old.
220
Lesson 59
Il ia d , 3 5 9 - 3 7 9
379 Learn the present system, all voices, of the contract verb x o l o a , 942-943,746.
380 VOCABULARY
dva5v(o, dvaSvoM, dvcSCoa (dveSCv), dvaSeSvKa d v a S tS v n a i*, dveSvGijv*
rise, emerge, “dive up,” plunge up
SiajTEpSo), Siajiepoo), S i^ e p o a (SienpaGov) (steins: JitpB-, n;pa0-) sack
(utterly), sack thoroughly, pillage, plunder, devastate
eicatiiPoôg (= cki]P6X,o5), o\), 6 free-shooter, sharpshooter, shooting according
to will
EâvSdo), eâv8f|O(0*, e^tjv8t)oa speak out, tell, say, declare
’Hetiwv, covoq. 6 Eetion,/afêr o f A ndrom ache
fivTE as, just as, like
eriP n , riq, f| Thebe, a city in Asia M inor
Ka0£ôâi (= KaOi^w) sit down
KapjiaXi^(o; quickly, suddenly, swiftly
K a T a p £ l;b ), K a T a p e ^ o ), K a T £ ( p ) p c ^ a , — ^ ^K a x e p ^ O t i v (stem: F p e y -) caress,
stroke, fondle
KEV0(O, KEVOM, EKEVOa (EKv GoV, KEKv GoV), K^KEV0tt (stemS: KED0-, KV0-) hide,
conceal, enclose
KXavooâl, EKâvoa, — KEKXav(o)fiai* (stems: k Xu v -, KXap-, k Xu i -,
KXaiE-) cry, weep
6 îxXt], r|(;. Ti mist, fog, cloud, vapor
6vo^d!;a>, ovondoo)*, (av6âoa, wvonaKa**, (bvojiaanai*, o>vojido0iiv* (stem:
ovonat-) address, call by name
rtdpoi0E(v) {with gen. 992) in front of, before
OTEvdxo) groan, sob, sigh
TEKVOV, ou, TO child, young, offspring
Xa>.KOx(Twv, covoi; with bronze tunic
Related words: onomatopoeia, onomatology, onomastics, homonym,

antonym, synonym.
221
HOMERIC GREEK
3 8 1 Read and translate:
Iliad, 3 5 9 -3 7 9
K apJiaU fiag d ’ a v ed v jw h rji; aAog i j m ’ dfiix^rj,
Ka'i p a n d p o id ’ a m o T o icadeêTO doLKpv x iov x oc,, 360
KUTEpEÊV, Eiwq x' E(paT’ £K t ’ dvOfittlÊV-
“tekvov, Ti KXa'iEig; xi 8e oe <ppEva(; ikexo JiEvdog;
Eâvda, jufj kev Oe voco, I'va EidofiEV dfKpco.”
x f jv 6e p a p i) oxEvdxcov JipooE(prj Jioda g m Kvg A x i^ ^ e v q -
“ o io d a - X I )] x o i x a v x a id v ir j n d v x ’ dyopEVco; 365
axofiEd’ Eg 0j]firjy, lEprjv tioXiv H E X ic o v o q ,
x f]v 8e d iE Jip d O o fiE v XE K u i r jy o f is y iv d d d E J id v x a .

Kai xd Êv Ev d d ooav x o fiExd o<piaiv visg A xaiav,
AxpE'idr] X pvotjida Kakkm dprjov.
EK 8 ’ e X o v
Xpvorjg 6 ’ a id ' ispEvg £Kaxt]j36kov AjioXXwvog 370

TjXdE Oodg EJii vfjag A x a ia v xaXKoxixcovav
X v a o fiE v o g red v y a x p a <pEpa>v x ' d jiE p E w i’ d jio iv a ,
axEfifiax' Excov iv x ep o iv EKrjpdXov AjuikXcavog
XpvoEcp dvd oKtjJixpcp, Kai eXiooexo jidvxag A xaiovg,
A xpsida 6 e fidXioxa Svco, K00f4fjX0pe Xaav. 375
eV0' dXXoi fXEv ndvxeg EJi£v<p^fir]oav A xaioi
aidEioQai 6 ’ isprja Kai dyXad dsxOai djioiva.
dXX' oi)K AxpEid]] AyafiEfivovi ijvdavE Ovfia,
dXXd KaKag d<p'iEi, KpaxEpov 8' ejii fivQov ^ eXXev.
3 8 2 Notes
359. r|rT’ the comparison is particularly appropriate for a sea divinity,
who rises easily, quietly, and mysteriously from the water, “like a mist,” and in
shadowy form. — AX6 5: 987.
360. ai)ToTo: 992.
36 1.x e ip i; 1005.
362. OE (p pâ?: 1021.
363. vow: 1009. —eiSonev; 800. — iv a pEi8 onEv: 580.
364. P a p v :78 0 -78 1.
365. Tu why? —TaCta: object of dyopEvco. — n a v t’(a); object of idvir] (fem. parti
ciple of o l8 a, perf of Eidco)—t a v t a piSvit); 580.
367. 8iEJipd0onEV: the first person brings out prominently the fact that Achilles
had a share in the expedition and in procuring Chryseis for Agamemnon.
— ^ 0d6 E; hither.
369. EK: 1048-1049 . — Eôv = EiXov (aipsm)
3 7 0 -3 7 3 . EKatiiPoXov, ekiiP6>.ov: observe how this word is brought into promi
nence by repetition.
222
Lesson 60
Il ia d , 3 8 0 - 4 0 0
383 Optional: Review the uses of the genitive case, 979-994.
384 VOCABULARY
dKovco, dK ovaoâl, tiKovoa, dKtjKoa*, iiK o v ajiai*, TjKovaGtiv’^hear, hear of,
hearken, Hsten to
Atpeicov, (ovoq, 6 son of Atreus
BploEvg rjoq, b Briseus, fa th er o f Briseis
EKttTog, ou, 6 free-shooter, sharpshooter
ejiaoonutepog, ri, ov thick, in quick succession
Ke>.aiV£cpi^;, eq wrapped in black clouds
Kpovuov, covoq, 6 son of Cronus
XanPdvo)*, Xr|\|/oâi*, (>^dvofiait), eXaPov, XE>idPfiKat, XtXafifiai, EXr|q)0iiv*
(e>.dn0tivt) (steins: âP-, XtiP-), take, seize, lay hold of, accept
^lEyapov, o\), TO great hall (plu. palace)
^ v v 8 e (o ( = ctvv S e w ) , ^ v v S tja o ) , ^ v v E S r io a , ^ v v S E S c K a * , ^ u v S E S E jia i, ^ v v e 8 e0 h v *
bind (hand and foot)

ovivtini, 6vf|O(0, M vnaa,---- %---- wviijBiiv* (steins: ovti-, ova-) help, benefit,
assist, profit, be useful
Jidvti] everywhere, throughout
jiEpi^w , JiEpiEô) (jiEpiorxT|0 (i)), ^lEpiEoxov (stems: OEX-, o/-, OXE-) protect,
defend, encompass, embrace
no>.A,dKi(5) often, many times
IlooEiSd(ov, (ovo<;, 6 Poseidon, g od o f the sea, brother o f Zeus, an d one o f the
mightiest o f the Greek divinities
Related words: acoustic(s); astrolabe; syllable, syllabus; pantomime.
223
HOMERIC GREEK
Iliad, 380-400
Xmojuevog d ’ 6 yEpmv JidXiv cpxezo- tow 3' A jio XXcov 380
Evûjueuov i]Kox)aev. ejiei fidX a o'l (p'lXog tjev,
fjKe 6 ’ ejt' A p y e w io i KaKov /ieXog- o i S e vv X aoi
QvfjoKov EJiaoavTEpoi, to. 6 ’ ejtxoxeto KfjXa 6eoTo
ndvTt] d v d OTpaibv Evpvv A xai& v. dfifii d t fidvTig
£V EiScbg uyopEVE OEOJtpomag EKdroio. 385
ain iK ' Eyo) n p m o g K£ldfir]\’ Oeov 'ddaiCEoOai-
AxpEicovu 6' EJiEna xoôg kdpEv, aiy/a (5 ’ d v a a rd g
rjJiEiXtjoEV fivQov, 8 dfj TEZElEOfiEvog eaxiv.
fiEV y a p oi>i> vrji Oofj iXiicmjiEg A x a io i
Eg X p v ofjv JiEfiJiovoiv, d y o v o i 6 e d S p a dvuKTi- 390
TT]v d s vEov KkioirjQEv Ejiav Ki^pvKEg ayovTEg
Kovpijv Bpiar]og, Trjv fxoi d o o a v visg A xaiaiv.
dX?.d o v , El 3 v v a a a i yE. nspioxEO Jiaid o g Efjog-
eXOovo ' OvXvfiJwvdE A ia X'loai, ei jwte dtj ti
tj ETiEi Q}i't]oag Kpadh]v Aidg tjE Kai Epyco. 395
TioXXaKi y d p oeo Jiaxpbg evi fXEydpoioiv u K o v oa
Evxofi£vi]g. or' Siptjoda iCEXaiuEiph Kpovicovi
oh ] Ev d d a v d x o ia iv d E w ia Xoiydv d fiv v a i,
OTUIOTE fiiv ^ vvdfjoai OXv/imoi ijdEXov dXXoi,
Hpt] t ’ ijSe riooE iddcov K a i flaXXdg AO^vrj. 400
386 Notes
380. toio: 984. —6 serves to make y^pwv emphatic, as important for the situation.
381. e:i£l ^dXa o i (piXog T|ev: compare the note on Hne 218 (in section 306).
382. is used collectively.
383. EîwxEto 973:1. —td serves to emphasize and visualize the arrows of
the god, as 6 does the old priest in line 380.
389-391. tr|v jicv . . . tt|v 8 c: the one (Chryseis). . . the other (Briseis), 1029-
1030. —veov: 780-781.
390. dvaKTi: king, lord, referring to Apollo.
393. JiepioxEo: hold about, protect. —naiSog: 989. —ei]05: possessive (og, tj, ov)
here used for 2nd per. sing., “your.”
394. Aia Xiaai; 525. —Xioai: imperat. mid.
395. EJiEi (e.Tog), EpY<p: 1005.
396. oeo: 984. —iJiatpog (ifio v ): 979:1. —iy\ fiEYopoioiv: 525.
397. £<pi]O0a: (= E<pr]g)\ observe the imperfect. Evidently Thetis was quite proud of
her achievement, and so she kept telling about it, as might have been
expected. —KEXaiVE(pî Kpoviwvi: 997.
224
Lesson 61
iL IA D y 4 01-412
387 Optional: Review the uses of the dative case, 995-1010.
388 VOCABULARY
AiyauDV, wvos. 6 Aegaeon
d^(p^ adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., about, around; adv., around, about, on
both sides; with gen., around, about, concerning, for (the sake of); with dat.,
around, about, because of, concerning, at, by; with acc., around, about
a t tj, riq, f] reckless impulse, folly, ruin, misfortune, hurt
Bpidpeug (Bpiaprjoi;. ov, 573, 586), Bpidpeco, 6 Briareus
pit), r|q, f] strength, might, violence
yauo (s te m : yap-) rejoice, exult, glory
y o w , yovvog (yovvato?), t o knee
Stanog, ov), 6 (c f 8e<o) bond, band, fetter
5eo), Siioo), E5t)oa, 8e8£Ka*, 5£5£^ al, e8e0iiv* bind, tie
*EiX(i) (E^Xoâl), — i EE>.oa, — i EEXjiiai, M X t jv (s te m : peX-) crowd, drive
EKatoyxEipog, r|. ov hundred-handed, hundred-armed
EJiai'pioKw (EJtaD pEM ), £:lavplôoâl, E J ia C p o v (s te m s : avp-, a i)p E -) enjoy, reap
the benefit of {with gen., 982)
KtElVO), KTEVEO), EKTElVtt (EKtav[OV]), EKTOVtt*, ---- ÊKtdOtlV (stemS: KTEV-,
KTOV-, K t a v - ) kill, slay, murder
âKp69, n. 6v long, high, lofty, large, distant
^ i^ v itjo K b ), ^vf|O ( 0, E f i v t i o a , ------i E n v r |o 0 tiv (s te m : f i v a - ) remind, call
to mind, remember
Jiapsôâi (oe8- = kb-, 603-604) sit beside, sit near
ripvîvi], riq, Ti stern of a ship
v jio S e i S u , v m o 8 E i o o ^ a i ,i ) ;T E S E i o a , v 7 i o 8 E i 8 o i K a ( v : t o 8 E i 8 i a ) (s te m s : 8 p i - ,
8 p E i-, 8 p o i-) fear, shrink before, cringe before

vjioU'M, vjtoXvow, vjiE>^t'oa, i':io>.E>.vKa*, vJio>ÊXvîai, v:tEXv)0f]v loose (from
beneath, by stealth)
(OKU (wKrg, 780-781), quickly, swiftly, suddenly
225
HOMERIC GREEK
Related words: amphitheater, amphibious; diagonal, hexagon, octagon, poly

gon, trigonometry; hecatomb; macrocosm; amnesty, mnemonic.
Iliad, 401-412
dlAd oi) T o i ' y ’ sA dovoa, ded, vjieX voao deofi&v. 401
w x’ EKaxdyxEipov K a X ea a a ’ eg^ aK pov 'OkvfiTiov,
dv Bpidpecov KaX eovoi deo'i, dvdpeq de re n d v ieg
Aiya'imv- 6 y a p a v iE fHi] o v mxTpdg dfieivcov-
og p a Jia p d Kpovicovi KaOeêio Kvdei y am v - 405
Tov Kai v n ed eia a v ^dK apeq 9eoi o v d e x ’ edrjaav.
T a v v v v f i i v n v ^ o a a a JiapeÊO Kai Xaffe y o v f c o v ,
a i K£v juog edekr]oiv eiii T p m a o iv dpfjâi,

rovg d e K a ra Jipv/xvag te icai d/x<p’ dXa e'koai A x a io v g
KXEivofXEVovg, iv a ndvxEg EJiavpcovxai j3aaiXi]og, 410
y v a 6 e Kai AxpEidrjg Evpv K peiav Aya/xE^vcov
i]v dxr]v, b x ’ d p ia x o v A xai& v o v d kv hioEV ."
390 Notes
401. Seonwv: 987. —0Ed may be nominative (otherwise vocative), “in thy power
as goddess.” In any case it is employed to indicate her ability as more than
mortal.
403. Gods and men do not seem to have had the same language at all times.
—Bpidpewv = Bpidprjov, accusative, 573, 586.
404. aiiTE: on the other side, fo r his side, as the others were previously stronger on
theirs. See the note on line 202. —o r Jiaxpo?: 993, Poseidon. —pti]: 1010.
405. ki SSe i : 1005.
406. Observe how i)JtE8 FEioav is echoed by o v d e x ’ ed tjoav , a pun.
407. TMV: 984. —jiiv: object of fiu rja a a a . —Xa(iE yovvcov: this was the regular
custom of a suppliant among the ancient Greeks. —yovvojv: 983.
408. eB^Xtioiv: idsXi] —i n i 1048-1049. —TpwEOOiv: 996. The prayer of Achilles is
granted by Zeus, at the request of Thetis, but it is directly responsible for the
death of his dearest friend, Patroclus.
409. TOV5: (= the Trojans) 971. —K ata rtpvnvag: because the ships were drawn up
on the shore with their sterns toward the land. Up to this time, while Achilles
had taken part in the war, the Trojans had not ventured far from the gates of
their city. Now Achilles prays that they may drive back the Achaeans to their
ships, and give them a taste of defeat under the most dangerous conditions.
For if they lose their ships, all is lost.
Achilles disdainfully sets the name of the Achaeans at the very end of
the verse.
226
L E S S O N 61
410. KTEivonEVovg by its position probably modifies rovg, line 409, as middle, but
may modify A/ a io vg , as passive. —Paoi).tio 5 : 982. —ejiavpcovtai, with bit
ter irony: that all may reap the benefit o f their king. The only benefit from such
a king is death and woe.
411. Kau even the son of Atreus (arrogant though he is) may realize his own folly.
— a t t ] v : henceforth an important word. Agamemnon later confesses his folly
(ar?/) in this matter.
227
Lesson 62
Ilia d , 4 1 3 -4 2 4
391 Optional: Review the uses of the accusative case, 1011 -1021.
392 VOCABULARY
dyawKpog, ov snow-clad, very snowy
d6dKpCto5, r|. ov tearless
ai0E {used to introduce a wish)
AiOiojierg, fioq, 6 Ethiopian
aivog, ii, ov dread, terrible, awful, painful, sorrowful
a io a , riq, f| fate, lot, portion
djiiijKov, ov unharmed, painless
d:io:iai)(o, dno:iavo{o, d jiK ia v a a , drtoraenavKa*, d jio rt^ a D jia i, djttJiavOtiv*
cease (from), refrain (from), stop (from), restrain
8 t|v long, for a long time
0 CT15 , i5o<;, f| Thetis, a sea goddess, wife ofPeleus, m other o f Achilles
fiivvvGa for a short time
JidjiJiav completely, altogether
oi^Cpog, n, ov piteous, woeful, miserable
:id p im ai (stem: t|o-) sit beside
TepjiiKEpavvog, t), ov hurling the thunderbolt; or m ore probably rejoicing in the
thunderbolt
TM therefore, for this (reason)
XBiôg, 11, ov yesterdays
’QKEttvog, o\j, 6 ocean, Oceanus
(OKVôpoi;, r|, ov swift-fated
(i>Kvn;opoi;, ov swift-sailing, swift going, crossing quickly
228
L E S S O N 62
Iliad, 413-424
Tov d ’ rjn£ifi£T’ ensiTU O h ig kutu daK pv x eo v o a -
“ft) Ôl, TEKVOV ifio v , XI VV O’ hpE(pOV UlVa XEKOVOa:
aid ' d(p£Aeg Jia p a vtjvaiv addK pvToq Kai djiyficov 415
i]aGai, £Jt€i uv t o i a i o a fi'ivvvdd Ji£p, o v it fidX a dtji'-
uvv 6 ’ d fia t ’ (bKVfiopog Kai oil^vpog Ji£pi ndvzcov
£ jd £ 0 - TO) 0 £ KUKfj aiOTJ T£KOV £V fi£ydpOlOlV.
TOVTO d£ TOI £p£OVaa £m)g All T£pjllK£paVVCp
£ifi' avTTj jipdg "Oki'HTiov dydvyi<poy, a i K£ mdrjTai. 420
dXkd o v fi£v vvv vrjvo'i iiap^fi£voq m K vnopoioiv
fx^vi' A x a io io iv , .-ioX£fiov (5 ’ djiojiavEO jid fijia v
Z evc, y a p ei; Q keovov /xet’ d ^ v ^ ov aq A idiojifjag
xOiôg E^rj KaTd d a h a , Beoi (5’ d fia ndvTsg ejiovto-
394 Notes
414. t (, aivd: 780-781. —a iv d TEKOVoa: having given birth (to you who are des
tined for) a dreadful (sorrowful) end.
415. a i6 ' 6<peXe5: the particle a id s strengthens the sense of regret expressed by the
aor. (also im perf) of o fE ilo ): “Oh, I wish that you . . . ” (“would that you”).
416. TOi: 999. —nivvvGd Jiep (eo tiv ). —Sptjv.
418. aim i: 1005.
419. TOi; 997. —Epôuoa: 1109:5.
421. vijvou 1004.
422. A x a io io iv : 996. —:IOÊôv: 987.
423-424. This is to explain why his request cannot be granted immediately. It also
motivates the inactivity of Achilles for this period, thus throwing into strong
relief his abiding anger.
229
Lesson 63
Il i a d , 4 2 5 - 4 3 5
395 Optional: Read sections 1108-1112 on the participle.
396 VOCABULARY
dnopaivw, dnoPrioo) (d:Iopliooâl), dn:ePiioa (dneptiv), dnop£pt]Ka (stems:
Pav-, Pa-) depart, go away
avToC there, at that place
Yot'vd!;onai, yovvdoonai (cf. v o w ) embrace the knees, entreat, implore
8m (neut. indecl.) house, home
6(i))(o8EKaT05, r|, ov twelfth
EVTog with gen., 992, within, inside
EpET^6v, o t, TO (cf. EPEXI15) oar
Evl^wvog, ov well- or beautifully-girded
io tio v , ou, TO sail
ioToSoKT), riq, fi mast-receiver
evoq, 6 harbor, anchoring place
opô9, o\), 6 anchorage
iTEXd^M, m k a a a * , £ T iikaa{a)a, — ^n :^ X i]n ai, ErtE>i,do0tiv (ErtXT||iiijv) (c f nE>,a5
near) bring near, draw near, approach
:ioXrPEV0f|5, iq very deep
npoEpEOOO), J ip o r |p E 0 (o )a (stem: e p e t -) row forward
jt p o T o v o g , Q-u, 6 forestay, cordage
OT£>.X,(i), o t e Xe w , EO TE iX a, EO TttXica**, E o r a X f i a i * , E(rcdXt)v* (stems: o t e X-, o t o X-)
put, place, arrange, furl

txpiôo), i)(pfiKa (ixpEtiKa), vcpEiKa*, vcpEijiai*, v<pEl0tiv, let down,
lower, slacken
XaXKoPaxT|5, iq with bronze threshold, with bronze pavement
230
L E S S O N 63
Iliad, 425-435
dcodeKaTt] d e to i u v t i ^ iX e i'io e iu i O v X v ^ n o v d e . 425
Kai tot' £.-T£iTU TOI H ui A io g JWTi xaXKoftaTEg dm,
Kai f4ii’ y o v v d o o u a i, K a i^ iv :jE ioE odai d im .”
(og d p a q>covtjouo' uiJEjirjaETO, r o v 3 e ^ i j i ’ a v T o v
XcoduEvov KUTO. d i'^ d v Ev^covoio yvvaiK o t;,
Tt]v p a ftit] uEKovTog d.it]vpa)v. u m d p 'O dvooEvg 430
eg X p v o r jv i k c i v e v dym v lE p fjv EK aT O ^ftrjv.
o i 6 ' OTE Sf] /iiuEvog m kvftEvQEog evtoq iko vto ,
i o T i a iîEv O TE iX avTo, Oe o u v 6 ' ev vrji f iE k a i v i] .
ioTOi’ 6 ’ larodoKt] :t £ la o a v JipoTO voioiv ixpEUTEg
KcipjiaAi^cDg, rr]v 6 ’ eig d p fio v JipoEpEooav EpETfioig. 435
398 Notes
425. SuSekoct^ (i]UEpt]): 1009. The Ethiopians live so far away that the gods make a
rather lengthy stay, perhaps to compensate for the trouble of going on such a
long trip. This twelve days’ sojourn makes Achilles’ inactivity seem impressive
and indicates how deeply his resentment has taken hold of his whole being.
426. TOi: 997.
427. Old) does not imply any doubt on the part of Thetis, but is to be looked upon
rather as an expression of her confidence in the outcome.
428. djiePiioETo: 865:1, a “mixed” aorist, 842.
429. yvvaiKog: 979:6.
430. p t ji : 1005. — diitivpwv [d:navpd(o]: im perf, as aor. “They” perhaps refers to
the Achaeans in general, since they did not prevent Agamemnon from taking
his prize. —dcKOVTog: 987 or 994 (referring to Achilles),
430-487. The scene in Chrysa intervenes between the promise of Thetis and its
fulfillment, and thus makes an exceptionally suitable episode to help occupy
the intervening time of twelve days.
432. Xifievog: 992. —io ria : plur. (the Homeric ship had but one sail), to visualize
its different parts; c f the note on ro^(a), line 45 (in section 138).
434. ioxoSoKt]: 1009. — Jipoxovoioiv: 1005.
435. Ep£T|i»oi5: 1005.
231
Lesson 64
Il ia d , 4 3 6 - 4 4 9
399 Optional: Read section 1107 on the infinitive.
400 VOCABULARY
|}(a^6;, ou, 6 (cf. Paivo), altar, base, foundation
Eêitig in order, in turn
evSfiTiTog, r|, ov well-built
Ti bed, anchor-stone, lair, den
Kf)6o9, eoc;, x6 woe, grief, suffering
oi)>.oxi)TH, riq, fj poured-out barleycorn
JioXvoxovo5,r|, ov causing many a groan, rich in groans
jiovTOJiopog, ov sea-going, sea-traversing, crossing the sea
repvnvT|oiov, ou, to stern-cable, stern-hawser
priYfitv, woe;, f| (c f pTjyvCm break), beach, strand, shore
vrt^p, vneip, adv., and prep, with gen. and acc., over, beyond, in behalf of, concern
ing, above; adv., above; with gen. (from) over, for (the sake); with acc., over,
beyond
*XEpvvJiT(i), (xEpvfjiTonai), XEpvivo), ex^vi\|/a, — ^ >exepvitpGijv (stem:
viP-) wash the hands, pour lustral water, purify with lustral water
232
L E S S O N 64
Iliad, 436-449
kuto. d e n p v f i v i ^ o i ’ e d r j o a v -
EK 3 ’ e v y a g e j i a l o v , 436
EK 8 e Kai ai'Toi (iaTvov £:ii ptjyfilvi OaXdoarjg,
EK (5’ E K U T O fi/ itfv ( i f j o a v E K t ]P 6 X q ) A j w X X m v i -
E K 8 e X p v a t j i g v t j b g j3 f) J i o v T O J i o p o i o .
z r ] v I.IEV L i e u ' ( i c o ^ d v d y m v j i o X v ^ t it iq ' O S v o o E v g 440

j i a r p i (piAco E v X E p a i t i Oe i , k u i j x i v n p o o E E i J i E v -
" m X p v o t ] , n p o ^ ’ E .iE iiy / E v a v a ^ a v 6 p S ) v A y a ^ i i x v a v
n a i d d t e o o i a y E jX E v , ( P o i j i m d ’ lE p i^ v E K a T O fij^ t jv
p i ^ a i v jiE p A a v a a v , d<pp' ik a o o ^ E o O a d v u K T U ,
d q I’ v u A p y E w i o i n o A v o T o v a K i n d s ' E t p rjK E V ." 445

m g E in w v e v t i Oe i . 6 6 e d i ^ a r o x a ip c o i'
jiaTda < p iA tjv. t o ! ^ ’ coku 9 e 3 lE p fju E K a r o p ifir jv
E ^ E it jg £ 0 T t ] 0 a v E v d / u t ] T o v J i E p i ( ic o f id v ,
X E p v iy / a v T O (5’ E ^ E i r a kui o iiX o x v r a g d v t k o v T o . 449

402 Notes
436. As the Greeks are not to make a long stay, they merely anchor their ship, and
do not draw it out of the water upon the land, as they would otherwise. K a t d
5e n;pv|uvT|oi’ eStiaav, i.e., the ship was rowed in dose to land, and then
turned around so that the stern pointed landward. The stern was then made
fast to shore by means of the stern-cables ( n p v n v ^ o i a ) , while the prow was
prevented from swinging by means of the anchor-stones { s v v a l ) , attached to
cables and thrown out on either side of the ship well forward.
437. Erti FptiYfiivi.
438. pi]oav: causative,1069. —piioav pEKtiPoXu; 526.
439. viiog: 987.
440. ejii P(a^6v aywv: to make the god a witness of the transaction. —ayMV, 1108,
note 2.
441. ^ t(0ei: “gaveintothechargeof.”
443. dyEHEv: in f to denote purpose, 1107:10.
444. pEâi: in f to denote purpose, 1107:10. — iX a o 6 |U £ o 6 a : 800.
447. TOi [6 .}], to ]: nom. plur. masc.
233
Lesson 65
Il i a d , 4 5 0 - 4 6 1
403 Optional: Read sections 1092-1097 on the uses of the indicative in simple
sentences.
404 VOCABULARY
d v ^ w , d ve ^M ( d v a o x ^ o w ) , d v t o x o v (d v ^ o x e O o v ), d v o x w K a , d v ^ o x i m a i * (ste m s:
OEX-, OX-) hold up, raise, endure, suffer

avEpvd) (= d(o-pepD(o = d p -p E p v w ), — â r ^ p v o a (= d vepepvoa, 837) draw up
(the head)
Sep o), S e p td )* , e S E i p a , — ^5 e 8 a p n a i * , e S d p i iv * (ste in s: S e p - , 8 a p - ) skin, flay
{gen. uxo<;) double, twofold
EKtdnVO), ---- i E^CTa|llOV cut out
E n i K p a i a i v ( o , ---- »ErtEK p T|ijva (ste m : K p a v -) accomplish, perform, fulfill (in
addition)
correl. with i^Se, surely, truly, on the one hand
iJ iT O fia i* , i$»o|iiai, i$/d fitiv crush, overwhelm, punish, afflict
K a X v rtT w , KaXv«)/(i), EKO>.i)\|/a, — ^ K E K d X v m iia i, SK aX txp O iiv (ste m : K a X v P -)
cover, conceal, hide, envelop

Jid p o g formerly, of old, before this
:ioi£<i), J io i t jo w , £ 7 t o it ]o a , JiE n o it iK a * , : i c r t o i i m a i , En o iT |0 T iv* do, make, perform,
execute, cause, effect, fashion, build, produce
:ipo|}dXX(o, :ipoPa>Ê(a, :ipo^PaXov, JipoPspXTfKa, Jipop^pxtmai, n:pOEP>iii0iiv’*
(s te m s : Pa>.-, PX,!]-) cast, throw forward
oq>d^(o, 0 (pd^M *, E a q > a ^ a , ---- Ê O t p a y n a i, E o c p a x O n v t (ste m : o c p a y -) cut the
throat, slaughter, slay
(bô6ETE(o,---- i (bno0CTiioa place raw meat upon
Related words: epidermis, pachyderm, taxidermist, dermatology; diptych;

eucalyptus, apocalypse. Calypso; poet; problem.
234
L E S S O N 65
Iliad, 450-461
T oioiv d e Xpx'arjg fie y d k ’ £ i>x £to avaoxcov- 450
"kav Qi juev apyvpoTO^ , og X pvorjv aju<piliEftt]Kag
KikX av T£ t,ader]v, T eve6 oi6 re Icpi d m o o e ig -
ijÊv drj : iot ’ iîev :tdpoq eickvEg evâ/xevoio,
Tifir]oag fiev ijue, fie y a 6 ' ly/ao k a d v 'Axa.ia>v-
r]d’ h i Kai vvv fxoi rod ' eniKprjrivov EeXdap- 455
fjdr] uvv A avaoT oiv d eiK ea lo iy d v d fiv v o v .”
cog £<pax' svxofiE m g, to v ekXve <t>oi(iog 'AnoXXmv.
a v z d p Eitei p ’ evâvTO Kai ovXoxvTag npojidXovTO,
a v e p v o a v fitv n p a z a Kai EO<paâv Kai k'deipav,
fiTjpovg t ’ EÊxaôv K ard te kvioj] EKaXvi//av 460
diTiTvxa JwitjoavTEg, eti' a v i a v d' m fiod h rjoav .
406 Notes
450. dvaaxcov: see the note on line 351. —toToiv: 997. —fiEYd>.’(a): 780-781.
4 5 1 .^ tv :9 8 4 .
452. T eve5 oio : 985.
453. EfiEv: 984.
454. ehe: 525, 1167-1168. —HEya: 780-781.
455. HOi: 997.
456. A av aoioiv : 997.
457. to v : 984.
460. S iJitrx a ; i.e., covered on top and bottom with a layer of fat (Kviotj). —aixwv
(Utipwv).
235
Lesson 66
Il ia d , 4 6 2 - 4 7 0
407 Optional: Read sections 1098-1101 on the uses of the subjunctive in simple
sentences.
408 VOCABULARY
a i 6o\|/ {gen. onoq) bright, shining
8aiv® m , 5aio(i), t S a io a * (tSaiod n iiv ), — y— E8au i0t]v* (cf. Saiq) feast,
banquet, entertain
e8iitv)5, {)o<;, ti food, feed, eating
cjiiotecpM, Ertiote\)/(i)*, ejieoxE\)/a* (ejt£oxe\|/dntiv), — ^cniEatEnnai*,
E:iE(TTE(p0iiv* surround, encircle, fill brimming full
Epog, cu, 6 desire, passion
Kovpog, CD, 6 young man, noble
icpT]TT|p, npoq, 6 mixing bowl, punch bowl
XeiPu, — E>.Ei\)/a pour a libation
Hi|pov,ou, TO thigh-piece, thighbone
HiotrXXo) slice, cut into bits
opEôg, o\j, 6 spit
oivog, CO, 6 (poivog) wine
on;Td(o, — ^wntTioa, — (bnTT|0iiv cook, roast, bake
jittT E O n a i*, — Ê J i a o ( o ) d n t i v , — jid jiao jiai (steins: Tiaz-, J ia t E - ) eat, feed
jiEHJioipoXov, ov. TO five-pronged fork
r t E p iq )p a 6 E(05 c a r e f u lly
:;i6 v o 5 , o \j , 6 w o rk , la b o r , to il, t r o u b le
jiooig, io<;. n drink(ing)

: i o t 6v , o u , to d r i n k ( in g )
o ji X d y x v o v , o v . to v ita ls , in n a r d s
riq, ti s p lit w o o d
Related words: edible; Stephen; Eros, erotic; crater 621; obelisk; oenophile;
hydroponic; symposium, potion, potable; spleen; schism.
236
L E S S O N 66
Iliad, 462-470
ic a T e d ' e m o y j l ^ t jg 6 y e p c o v , e m ^’ a W o j i a o iv o v
k e i f i e - v e o i d e n a p ' a i n o v e 'x o u J i e ^ J u o f i o X a x ^ p o i v .
a v r a p e n e i leaTO . f i f j p a K a r ] K a i O T j l d y x v a n d o a v T O ,
f d o T V A A o v T d p a z a A A a k u i d f i( p d ft e k o w iv e jie ip a v , 465
a > 7 i r i] o d v r e J i E p K p p a d e c o q , e p v o a v T O r e n d v r a .
a v r d p i'7 i£ i . - l a v o a v r o n o v o v t e t v k o v t o r e S a n a
d a 'iv v v T , ovds ti d v ^ d g id e v s T O d a n o g iio r jg .
a v T d p e :ie i n o o io g K a l e d t jz v o g sp o v eu ro .
K o v p o i U EV i c p t j r i j p a g i j i s o T e y / a v T O j i o t o To , 470
410 Notes
462. aiGojra potvov. — cti 1048-1049.
463.XEpoiv: 1005, 1009.
464. Ktttd Jifjpa Kdt]: were consumed; since they were for the gods, while the
worshipers tasted of the various parts in order to have a share in the sacrifice.
See note to hne 471 (in section 414). —Kaxd: 1048-1049.
465. tdXXa: crasis, 587.
467. jio vo v: 987. — te tv k o v to ; reduplicated aor. mid. of te v x o ).
468. 6aiT05: 986.
469. Jio o io g , E6tiTt'05 : 979:3.
470. JioToto: 986. The wine was mixed with water. The Greeks usually mixed them
in the proportion of three parts of wine to two o f water; but the poet Hesiod
recommends one part of wine to three of water. The later Greeks claimed that
this would be more suitable as a drink for fishes than for men.
237
Lesson 67
iLiADy 4 7 1 - 4 7 9
411 Optional: Read sections 1102-1105 on the uses of the optative in simple
sentences.
412 VOCABULARY
avdyw, dvd^w, dvf|yaYov, dvtjxa**, d v iiy ^ ai*, dvfjxBtiv* lead forth, set out, go
forth, drive, carry
5 ^:10 5, aog. 16 cup, goblet
endpxM, Ertdp^w, £7if)pâ, — ^tJifjpYHai* e3iT|px0tlv* begin, perform the initia
tory rites
T|Î05, 0U, 6 sun
rm©5 when
TipiY^veiog, a, ov early-born
’H(05, 'Hoog, Ti Eos, goddess o f dawn, dawn
iKHEVog, ri, ov favorable, welcome
Kata5v(i), KaTa8vo(i), KattSCoa (KatESvv), K ataSeSvK a, K ata8e 6v n ai*,
KateSvOtiv* go down, sink, set, dive
Kv^cpag, ao<;, to darkness, night, gloom
Koi^do), K0 l^T|0(a’^, EK0l^t10a , — ^ i eKOl^1^61lv (cf. K etâi) (lull to) sleep,
slumber, lie down
EfieXii/a* sing, dance, hymn, chant
ô>Jif|, fjq, Ti dance, song, singing, hymn(ing), dancing
V(a^d(a, V(OHT|0(0*, ^(a^t1o a distribute, apportion, handle easily, brandish
o v p o ;, o\), 6 breeze, wind
naiiiwv, ovoq, 6 paean, song of praise
n a v im ^ io g , r|, ov all day long
p o S o S d ic T v X o ;, ov rosy-fingered
tdpjio), (T E p y o ^ a i), E tE p y a * (ETEp\|/dfiTiv),---- ^ ^ EX^(p0tiv
(EtdpcpOtiv, Etdpjitiv) (stems: T E p ji-, tapre-, tp aji-) please, delight, satisfy,
sate, charm, rejoice
Related words: cemetery; rhododendron; pterodactyl; Terpsichore, terpsichorean.
238
L E S S O N 67
Iliad, 471-479
v c 6 fH ] o a v (5' d p a n d o i i ’ L ~ ia p ^ d ^ e v o i d E J id e o o iv , 471
o i d e n u v 7 ] f i E p i o i f ^ o X jif j d e d v i X d o K o v z o ,
K a X d v d e 'i d o v T E g J i a i i j o v a , K o v p o i ' A x a i & v ,
H e I j i o v t e (; E K d E p y o v - a 6 e ( p p E v a T s p jiE T d /co vco r.
ijfio g d r j E k i o q K a r e d v k c i i e j i i KVE<pac, iq k d E v , 475

d i ] TOTE K o i u ^ a a v T O . l a p d : i p v f i v i ] a i a v r j o g .
^ fio g (5' } ) p i y E V E i a (p d vrj p o d o d d K T v X o g H cog,
K a i t o t ' e jie it ' d v d y o v r o fiE z d O T p a T o v E v p v v A x a i & v -
T o ia iv (5' i K ^ E v o v o v p o v h i E K d E p y o g A j i o X X cov .
414 Notes
471. :iao iv : 995. — S E Jid to o iv: 1005. — tnap^dnEVOi refers to the beginning of
their religious ceremony, which was performed in this case by each o f those
present pouring a few drops of wine from his cup as a libation before the
drinking began.
472. ôX7Ifi: 1005, with song and dance.
473. :iair|ova; 1012 (naico. strike): originally an epithet o f Apollo, the “striker” or
“beater,” who heals by his magic stroke. Then the song having this word as a
refrain; c f “Te Deum,” a hymn of thanksgiving, which is a type of song so
named from its opening words: “Te Deum laudamus.”
474. ntXjiovTEg: praising the free-w orker with song and dance; that is, singing a
song of which Apollo was the theme, praising Apollo in song and dance, the
most important part being the dance. The god can hear the song and see the
dance, although he is far away in the land of the Ethiopians (line 424). —
(ppeva: 1014.
477. poSo5dKTvXo;: the Greeks pictured the rays of light at dawn as the rosy
fingers of a beautiful goddess.
239
Lesson 68
Il i a d , 4 8 0 - 4 8 9
415 Optional: Read sections 1115-1117 on purpose clauses.
416 VOCABULARY
dvEjiog, ov), 6 wind, breeze
6iajipf|ao(o, SiaTipii^ca, 5ie:ipi]â, S ia ji^ p n y a t , 8ian en p t]Y jiait,
5iE;ipT|x0^''t (s te m : Ttpay-) go across, pass through, traverse, accomplish,
pass over
epjua, axoc;, to beam, prop, support
i^TOipog, ov), f) (main)land, continent
0EO), 0EV)ooâl (ste in s: 0 e v - , Gep-) run, speed
idxti),-----i la x a (stems: F*F“ X-» F^F®XE-) shout, howl, roar
K{)â, axoq, TO wave, billow
XEVK05, 11, 6v white, shining
^£009, r| ov middle, midst, medium
n e t d w C m * , jiE td o M * , E J i e x a o ( a ) a , — > J l » r T a ^ a l , e jiE T d o G iiv (ste m s : n e t a - ,
n ta -) stretch, spread (out), unfurl, expand

nt]XEr5, fjoq, 6 Peleus
7top(pvp£oi;, ri, ov dark (red), purple, violet, glistening
npr|6o), jipiiao), £npT)oa blow, burn, inflate
OKiSvanai scatter, disperse
CTTEipa, riq, r\ cut-water, stem (of a boat)
t a v v w , ta v v o o ), E T d v vo (o )a , — >t E t d v v o n a i , E x a v v o O tiv stretch, place along
r\|/oC high
\)/dâ6o ;, o\j. fi sand (of the beach), dune
Related words: anemometer, anemone; leukemia; mesolithic; porphyry.
240
L E S S O N 68
Iliad, 480-489
oi ioTdi’ OTôavx' a v d 6' iax'ia k e v K o . Jiex ao oav - 480
h d' dvEfiog npfjoev fx ioov iaxw v, dfi<pi de Kv/ua
OTEiprj jw pipvpeov fiEyaA i'axe vrjog iovoyg-
?7 d’ edeei' Kaxa KVfxa d ia jip fjo o o v a a KeXevOov.
a v r d p EJiEi p iKovxo Kaxd oT paxov evpvv AxaiSiv,
v f j a f i £ v oi y e / l e A a i i ' a i ’ e j i i j j i e t p o i o e p v o a a v 485
VI//OV e j i i \ f f a f i d 6 o i g , V J i o <5'e p f i a x a f i a i c p d xdvvaoav,
avxoi (3’ e o K i d v a v x o K a x d K h o ia q x e v e a g re.

a v x d p 6 fi^viE vrjvai n ap^ fievog diKVJwpoiaiv
dioyevfjg n rjkfjog viog, jw d a g aicvg A x d ^ ev g . 489
418 Notes
484. K a t d : over against, off.
480. dvd; 1048-1049.
481. neoov ioxiov; the m iddle o f the sail. —tv, d^<pi 1048-1049.
482. oxeipi]: 1009. —vtiog iovotig: 979:1; 994, in the transitional stage between
the dependent genitive (in this case the genitive of possession) and the
genitive absolute.
483. keêdOov: 1012.
486. VJIO: 1048-1049.
487. veag: vfjag
489. viog: 1173, note. This verse is merely explanatory and descriptive of the 6 in
line 488. The poet brings us back for a moment and lets us catch another
glimpse of Achilles in his sullen wrath, before leaving him for a long period.
241
Lesson 69
Il ia d , 4 9 0 - 4 9 9
419 Optional: Read sections 1118-1127 on object clauses with verbs of effort and
fear.
420 VOCABULARY
aK pog, r|, ov sharp, high, utter
apxo), ap^(o, T|pâ, — ^rip yn ai’*^, i]px0iiv* begin, lead, rule, be first
a tep , with gen. 992, apart, away from, without
ai)6i here, there, in the same place
dvTT|, Tiq, Ti battle-cry, war-whoop
Evpvoij/ {gen. onoq) far-seeing (c f tiYippenexTiq far-thundering)
E(peTHT|, fjq, fi command, behest, request, prescription
r|Epiog, T), ov early (in the morning), (clad in mist?)
KOpvq)!], fi(;. f) peak, summit, crest
Kpovi8ti5, cio. 6 son of Cronus, Zeus
K t)8id vEipa fern, adj., man-ennobling, bringing glory to men
>iir|0(a, with gen., 984, escape the notice, be hidden; mid. forget
JIO0EO), Jio0r|ow*, EJi60Eoa (EJi60t]oa*) yearn, long for (what is lacking), desire,
lack, miss
^toXrSEipdg {gen. d5oq) many-ridged, with many cliffs
3i(i)X,EO|iiai, Ji(oXiioojiai,go, attend, frequent, come, return
(p0ivv)0(o destroy, waste away, pine, perish
Related words: acropolis, acrobat(ic), Akron; archon; coryphaeus;

Lethe, lethargy.
242
LESSON 69
Iliad, 490-499
o v T E Jio T e ig d y o p f jv m okeoK ET O K v d id v e i p a v 490
o v T E Jio T e g j w k e u o v , a l k a ( p d i v v d e o K E ( p iX o v K r jp
a v d i f i E m v , j i o Oe e o k e d' a m r ] v te m o k E fio v z e .
d k k ' OTE 6 ) ] p E K T O W d v c o d E ic d .T r ] y E V E T ijc o g ,
K a i TOTE d / j . i p d g "O X v iu t io v l o a v 9 e o i a i e v e o v T E g
jidvTEg d ^ a, ZEvg d' ^p%£- 0ETig 6' o v X'Ôet EipETfiEav 495

jia id o g Eov, dXX tj y' dvEdvoETO icv/ua daXdoorjg,
iÊpir] 6' dvEftr] ^lEyav o v p a v o v O vkvfijw v te .
EvpEv (5' E v p v o n : a K p o v id r jv drepi j f i E v o v d X X c o v
d K p o T d T t ] K o p V ( p fj n o A v d E i p d d o g O v X v f i J i o i o . 499
422 Notes
490. —îmXeoketo: iterative (repeated action), 900.
492. di3TT|V:alwaysofthreesyllables (asmaybeseenfromthebreathing), and
must notbeconfoundedwitha v T t j v [ a m d g , t], 6 ] her(self).
491-492. <p0ivv0EOKE, noOeeoKE: iterative (repeated action), 900.
493. EK Toto: “from that most important (point of time)”; that is, the time when
Achilles withdrew from the conflict and entreated his mother to obtain
satisfaction for him from Zeus, referring to the beginning of the wrath, the
day of the quarrel, so important for the action of the entire Iliad.
495. E<pcTHE(ov: 984, 586.
497. oijpavov OvXvjiJiov : 1019.
te
498. aUwv: 992.
499. Koptxpfj: 1009.
243
Lesson 70
Il ia d , 5 0 0 - 5 1 6
423 Optional: Read sections 1128-1130 on causal clauses.
424 VOCABULARY
dv0epe<ov, wvo(;, 6 beard, chin
dnoEiJiovspeakout, deny, refuse
antft), a\|/(o* (a\|/oâl), r|\|/a, — i, (stem: d<p-) with gen. 983,
touch, layholdof, attack, attach
SeîTEpo;, 11, 6vright (hand), lucky
8 eo5, 5eo5 (5e(ov5), to fear, dread, tim idity(cf 6ei8co)
SEVTEpog, T|ovsecond, succeeding, later
E^poâl (=EpE(o), Elprjoofiai (stems: elp-, EipE-) ask, inquire, question, seek
E^(pvo), £^(pvo(a, £V£(pCoa(ÊcpCv), Eji:iE(pVKagrowinto, clingveryclosely
KatavEvo), KatavEvoo), KatÊvoa, KatavÊVKa* nod(down), assent
Kpdt05, eoq, TOpower, might, rule, victory, strength, dominion
VE<pEXtiYEpExa,ao, 6cloud-gatherer, wrappedinclouds
vi]HEpTii5, e q unerring, true, truthful, reliable, infallible, certain
6(pE>.>.(i)increase, magnify, exalt, swell
OKaio;, 11, 6vleft (hand), unlucky
Tocppasolong, meanwhile
v n ioxon ai, v:iooxT|oonai, i)JiEoxd|iitiv, vjiEo/tinai’*ûndertake, promise, assure
Related words: dext(e)rous; Deuteronomy; aristocracy, autocracy, democracy,

plutocracy, theocracy.
244
L E S S O N 70
Iliad, 500-516
Kai p a :id p o i6 ’ av ioT o icadeêTO Kai Xd(iE yovvcov 500
oKait]. deîTEpfj (5’ dp' v n ’ dvdepE&vog iX o v o a
liaaofiE vr] npooEEms A la K povlcova dvaKxa-
"Z ev JidzEp, El JioTE dtj OE fiEz' dO avdxoioiv dvrjoa
t] EJiEi 7] Epycp. r o d s /xoi Kp-qrjvov EEldmp-
Tifitjoov fio i viov, dg diKvôpmxaTog dXXcov 505
EjdET'- d x d p uiv vvv yE dv a^ d v d p a v A ya/iS fivav
ijri/uijaEv- EXcbu y a p e'xei y ip a q , avxbc, d n ov p a q .
d l k d ov Jiip fiiv u o o v , 'OXv^ jiie fitjriEza Z ev -
z6<ppa d' EJii TpcoEoai ti'Oei Kpdzog, 6<pp dV A x a io i
viov E/udv Tiamoiv, d(pEklcooiv te e Tififj.” 510
cbg <pdTO- jf]v d ’ ov zi JipooE<prj VE<pEXr]yEpExa Zsvg,
dXA' dKE(ov dt]v rjoTO. 0 h i q (5 ’ mg ijy/ato yovvcov,
(bg e'xet ' Efi:n£(pvvTa. m i EipExo dsvTEpov av n g -
"yt]/i£pTEg jUEv dr] fio i vjiooxeo Kai K axdvEvoov,
i] djioEin', EJiEi o v Toi Em dsog, d(pp’ ev EidS), 515
o o o o v Ey<h ÛETa Jid oiv dTifioTdTrj dEog e '^ i i.”
426 Notes
500. avTOio: 992. —yovvov: 983.
501. OKai^ (XEipO? SeîTepfi (xtipi): 1005
505. aXXrav: ablatival genitive, i.e., o f (all) other men.
506-507. Tijiiioov, r|Tiniioev are both emphatic, and in strong opposition and
contrast.
509. T i 0 £ i : imperat., grant.
510.tl|uti: 1005.
512. youvwv: 983.
512-513. (b; . . . cag: as . . . so. She demands a strict or no.
514. KataveCoov: negation was indicated by the ancient Greeks (and the custom
still prevails among the modern Greeks) by an upward motion of the head,
while affirmation was denoted by a downward nod.
515. EJii = CTECTTi; 1048-1050:2. —t n i Speog.
245
Lesson 71
Il i a d , 5 1 7 - 5 2 7
427 Optional; Read sections 1131-1132 on result (consecutive) clauses.
428 VOCABULARY
drtaTii>w65, T|, 6v deceitful, false
d:iooxEix(o, — i aJieoTixov (stems: oxeix-, oxix-) depart, step off, march away
dte>êi)TtiT05, rj, ov unaccomplished
Ep^6(o vex, enrage, tease, torment
eX0o5o:i£(o, — ^T|x0o86ntioa engage in hostility with, be hateful
Ke<pa>.T|,ti(;, n head
X,oiYio5, r|, ov dreadful, accursed, horrible, nasty, deadly
^£>^(0, ÊXTjo(a, — y (Ê^p).Eâl), EHE^Gtjv’^ (stems: êX-,
HeXe-) be a concern, be a care
VEiKEft), v£iKEo(a)(o, ÊiKEo(o)a (stcm: VEIKEO-) struggle, contend, revile, quarrel,
fight
6x0^6), — !, wxBiioa be vexed, be displeased, be worried
naX,ivaYpET05,ri, ov revocable, to be taken back
T^K^(ap neut. in decl, surety, pledge sign, goal, limit
Related words: acephalic, cephalalgia, cephalopod, Bucephalus, encephalitis.
Iliad, 517-527
Trjv d e fiey ’ dxOijoag Jtpooe<pr] vefpeXr/yepeTa Zevg-
"fj dr] k o iy ia epy\ o r e f i ’ ex d o d o jifjo ai e<p7joEtg
"Hpi], 6 z ’ a v fjL' EpEOr]oiv o v e i d e h i q e j i e e o o i v .
?7 3 e Kai am m g f i ’ a ik v ev a d a v d x o io i d eo io iv 520
V E iK E i, K a i r e fiE q n jo i f i d x ] ] T p c i s o o i v d p ^ y E i v .
aXXd av fisv vvv a m ig aiw oxixE, fiTj ti I'oija^

'H prj- E fi o i d e ice z a v x a f i E l i j o E z a i , d < p p a T E X E oam .
El 5 ’ a y s TOi K E (paX fj K a T a v E v a o f i a i , o < p p a Ji£7w ldr]<;-
TOVTO y a p E^ E fiE dE v y E fXET’ a d a v d T o i o i jU E y io T o v 525
TEKjucop- o v y a p E f i o v J ia X iv d y p E T O v o v 6 ’ a j i a r r j X o v
o v d ’ a .T E X E m r]T o v , 6 r i k e v KE<paXfj K a x a v E v o a . "
246
L E S S O N 71
430 Notes
518. ôiyia epya (idd' e o o e r a i) : “a nasty mess.”
519. "Hpi]: 1007. —e:teeooiv: 1005. Hera’s name occupies the most important posi
tion in the line, and in the word order, as again in line 523.
520. Kttl avTMg: even as it is (without any further provocation).
521. ne: 971. —^dx^l•. 1005 (1009). —Tpraeooiv; 996.
523. fiE^TiOETai: 973:1.
524. ei 8' aye here is exclamatory: “come now.” —KEcpa^: 1005.
526. TEK^cap ( e o t i v ). —jiaîvdvpEXOV { e o t i v ).
527. KatavEVOM: aorist subjunct.
247
Lesson 72
Il ia d , 5 2 8 - 5 3 5
431 Optional: Read sections 1133-1149 on conditional clauses.
432 VOCABULARY
alyXriEig, eooa, ev bright, shining, gleaming
aXXoâi, d X ton ai*, 1f|Xd^t1V (aXfitiv, with smooth breathing) jump, leap
d^ppoaiog, r], ov ambrosial, immortal, divine, deathless, heavenly
a n a q , d n a a a , ixnav all, entire, whole, all together
P a0i)5, eia, v deep, profound
P o v Xe VO), P o v )ÊVO(0, EPo\))tEVaa, PEPoV>.EVKa*, PEPoV ÊV fiai*, e P od XeV011V*
plan, counsel, advise, deliberate
8iaTHT|Y(o, (SiExjiaYov), — ^ SiETndytiv (steins:
TjitiY-, xnay-) separate, part, divide, cut apart, split
£5 o9, £oq, TO seat, abode, habitation, home
eXcXi!;®*,— i eXeXiâ, — ^ eêîxOtlv (stem: eitiK-) shake, twirl, twist, coil,
make tremble, brandish
evavxiog, ri, ov opposite, facing, before, to meet
E jicp x o n a i, EJieXEVoonai, ejiiiXBov (eji^XvGov), EJiEXr|>,v0a (£n;EiXf|>,ov0a ) come
(upon, to, toward), attack
em ppuoâi, — EnEppraod^tfv flow down, fall down
Kdpt), kpo(t6(; (KapriToq), to head, peak, summit
Ki)dvE05, r|, ov dark (blue), black, dusky (1168)
VEVti), VEvaw, EVEVoa, vÊ V K tt’^ nod
6(ppvg, voq. f] (eye)brow
oq>6g, 11, ov one’s own, their (own)
Xaixti, riq. f] hair, locks, tresses, mane
Related words: salient, 600, 603-604; bathymetry; bathysphere; seat,

sedentary; cyanide.
248
L E S S O N 72
Iliad, 528-535
Kpovicov-
// K a i K v a v E t ] o i v e : i ’ 6 < p p v o i v e v o e
d p a x a h a i E J iE p p c b o a v x o dvaK zog
d f i f i p o o i a i (5 ’
K p a x d g d j i ’ dO av d roio, fiEyav d ’ eI eXi êu 'OkvfiJiov. 530

Tcoy' cog (iovkEvoavxE d ih n a y e v - /; ^ ev ejieitu
Eig dXa d kx o fiadE iav d:i' aiykrjEVTog 'OXv^Jiov,
Z E v g d e e o v :ipdg dcoâ. dsoi d ’ d/ua JidvzEg dvEOxav
E ^ e 6 e o } V , o(pov Jiaxpog e v u v t i o v - o v 6 e rig hXrj
jUEivai EJiepyofÊvov, d k k ’ dvTw i Eoxav d n a v isg . 535
434 Notes
528. Tj [tjfil]: he spoke. —6<ppvoi: 1005. —vevoe Kpovtrav 524; 571, 1168.
According to ancient tradition, Phidias, the greatest of Greek sculptors,
based his conception of Zeus on lines 528-530. His colossal gold and ivory
statue of the Olympian Zeus (now lost), reckoned as one of the seven
wonders of the ancient world, was among the most famous works of Greek art.
531. SiETnayEV = SiETndynaav. — t| . . . Zevg 8e . . zeugma (lit. a “join
ing”); Thetis (?/) and Zeus share the verb dXzo, which, however, applies to
each differently; Zeus merely goes to his house.
534. jiatpog: 992.
249
Lesson 73
Il i a d , 5 3 6 - 5 5 0
435 Optional: Read sections 1150-1152 on temporal clauses.
436 VOCABULARY
dYVo(i)Ew, — T|yvoiiioa (cf. yiyvcooKco) fail to notice, be ignorant of, fail to
observe
a>.io9, T), ov of the sea, marine (c f aXq)
d :io v 6 o < p i(v ) apart, away (from)
dpYvpojiEôg, a, ov silvery footed
a v anew, again, a second time, but now
Sieipoâi, SiEiptjao|iiai (ste m : eip-, elpe-) inquire into, ask about item by item
5 iK d ^ ( a , S iK d o o )* , E 5 i K a o ( o ) a , — ^ § E 5 iK a o | i ia i , E 8 i K d o 0 i ]v * (ste m : S i K a S - ) ,
judge, decide
S0^0|uf|TT);, ao, 6 deceiver, crafty-minded
EKaoxog, ri, ov each, every
ErtiEiKiig, eq suitable, fitting, proper, becoming, decent
E Jiid ^ o n a i,---- i E n E O > J i a (s te m s: peX:i-, poX:™-) hope (for), wish (for), desire,
expect
0 povo5 , o\), 6 throne, seat, armchair
KEpT6^lo;, rj, ov biting, cutting, sharp, bitter, contemptuous
KpDntdSiog, r|, ov hidden, secret
ÊTaX>.d(a, jiETaX,>,f|aw*, nExd>.Xi]oa inquire after, seek to know, search after
^t15£ and not, neither, nor
JipoTEpos, r|, ov former, sooner, older, before
<n)^q>pd!;oâl, (TV^(ppdo(o)oâI, m)VEq)pao(o)dniiv, — ôvjinEtppaanai*,
oruvEcppdoGtiv (s te m : cppaS-) devise plans with, counsel together
XaXEJio§, 11, ov hard, harsh, severe, stern, cruel, difficult
Related words: metallic, metallurgy; hysteron proteron.
250
L E S S O N 73
Iliad, 536-550
a g 6 ^ e v evQ a K a O i^ e r ' i m d p o v o v o v d e fiiv 'H p r j 536
r jY ^ o ir ja e v i d o v o '. o n o i o v/A < p p d o a a T O fio v X a c ,
d p y v p o T iE ^ a 0 h i g , d v y d r r jp d k io i o y e p o v r o g .
a v T i K a K e p T o iu io io i A i a K p o v i a v a n p o a r j v d a -
"Tig dfj a v Toi, d o lo ^ r iia , d ea v ov fK p p d oo aro ftovXdg; 540

a i e i toi <pikov eo riv , eÊV djiovooipiv ed v ra
K p v m d d ia (ppoveovTa diieaêfiei'- o v d e ri mo fioi
Jip6<ppmv TETXrjKag ein eiv ejiog, otti vo-qorig.”
TT]v d' iqê'ipET' e'jiena Jiarrjp dvdp&v re d eav re-
“
"Hpt], f j i ] 5 r ] n d v T u g i j u o v g i j i t e X n e o / u v d o v g 545
Eidiôeiv- xa^£ôi t o i e o o v t ’ dXoxco JiE p E o v o r j .
dXk ’ OV I.IEV K' EJllElKEg aKOVEfiEV, OV Tig EJlElTa
ovTE Becov :jpoTEpog TOI' y ’ EiOETai o v t ’ dvQpaiuov-
OV d s k ’ Eyd>v djidvEvOE dEav eOeXcoî v o fjoa i,
IA1] T i o h T a v T a E i c a o T a d i E i p e o f i r j d k f i E T a X X a . " 550
438 Notes
537. 1004.
oi: — Tiyvoiiioev = tjy v o r jo E v : 1168, 571.
538.The “Old Man of the Sea” was Nereus.
539. KEptofiioioi ( f x v O o i o i v ) : 1005.
540. 8t| av: 586. —TOi: 1004.
541. Ener: 992. —eovta: accusative to agree with “you,” the implied (accus.)
subject of d iK a t^ E jU E y , rather than the dative to agree with t o i , its antecedent.
543. np6(ppo)v receives emphasis from its position.
546. EiSTjOEiv: [ o i d a ] fut. infinitive with a verb signifying to hope. —eovoi^:
1109:6. — 1023.
547. OV( f i v d o v ) . —ErtiEiKEg( ). eo ti
549. 0EMV:992. —E0EXd)(m): subjunct.
251
Lesson 74
Il i a d , 5 5 1 - 5 7 2
439 Optional: Read section 1153 on indirect questions.
440 VOCABULARY
aajiTog, ov untouchable, invincible
aivcig terribly, dreadfully, awfully
Pora:iig, iSoq calm-eyed, large-eyed, ox-eyed
5 a l^ 6 v lo ;, r|, ov possessed by a daemon; crazy, foolish, wretch; good friend
Ejuni); nevertheless, for all that, by all means, absolutely, completely
EJiiyvdn:iT(i), EJiiYvdnvra*, Ert£Yvan\)/a, — >— i, EJicyvanqiOiiv bend, curb,
subdue, win over
ETTjTVUog, r|, ov true, unfailing, sure, win over, urge, outwit, delude, real, actual
EVKtiXo5, r|, ov undisturbed, in peace, in calm, quiet
T |p a indecl. neut. plur. favor, benefit, pleasure, kindness, protection
"Hcpaiorog, ov, 6 Hephaestus, the god of fire and crafts
KaOfjâi sit down, be seated
KXt)toT£XVTi5, eq renowned for skill in handicraft, of renowned skill
Xitiv exceedingly, very, especially
Ha>.Xov [^dXa] more, rather, preferably
(stems: fieXX-, be about (to), be destined
(to)
Ovpavuov, covoi;, 6, fi dweller o f heaven, divinity, god(dess)
n;apeiJiov 2 nd aor., persuade, cajole, win over, urge, outwit, delude, beguile,
talk over
Jioio5, T|, ov what (sort)? what kind?
7ipT|oo(i), £jrpt]â, Ji»tp i]Y at, Ji^ p iiY fta it, enpf|x6tl''t (stem: repay-)
carry through, do, act, perform
Related words: etymology; polytechnic, pyrotechnic(al), technical, technique;

practice, pragmatism, pragmatic, chiropractor.
252
L E S S O N 74
Iliad, 551-572
Tov (5’ rjêifieT' ETieira jio a m g jw iv ia 'Hprj- 551
"aivoxaTE K povidrj, n o w v xov fivQov h in e^ .
Kai Xir]v OE Jidpog y ’ ovt ’ E ipofiai ovte ÊTaXXm,
a k k a f i d k ’ EvicrjXog l a (ppdlÊai, d o o ’ edEkr]ada-
vvv d ’ aiv& q dEidoiKa K a ra (ppEva, firj oe JiapEiJit] 555
d p y v jiojie^ a 0ETig, QvydTijp d U o io yepovTog-
TÊpiT] y a p a o i yE JiapEÊTO icai XdjSs yovycov-
Tfj o ’ diQ) K arav E v oai h -q iv n o v , mg AxiXfja
TifitjoEig, okEOEig S e J io ls a g im v qv oiv A xai& v."
xi]v 5 ’ uJiafiEifiofiEvog JipooE<pt] VE(peXr]yEpETa Zsvg- 560
“daifiovit], aiEi fisv o'lEai, o v d s oe Xrjda,
npfjâi d ’ EfiJirjg ov zi dvvtjoE ai, d k k ’ a n d dv/iov
fid X lov Efioi EOEai- id 6 e toi /cat p iy io v Eozai.
El d' ovTco r o v r ’ io r iv . Efioi îe XXei <piXov Eivai.
dXX' aKEOvoa icddrjoo, E/ia 6 ’ EJiiJiEidEO /uvda, 565
vv TOi oi) xpatoficooiv, o o o i Oeoi e io ’ ev 'OXv/xjiw,
d o o o v io v d ’, OTE KEv TOI ddiixovg%ETpag eipEico.”
mg £<par’, eS eioev 6 e (io&Jiig Jio rv ia "Hprj,
Ka'i p ’ aKEOvoa K ad fjaio, EJiiyvdfiy/aoa <piXov Kfjp-
SxOrjoav 6' d v d dcofia Aidg Oeoi O v pavlaveg- 570
ro to iv d' "H<paioTog KXvioTExvqg iqpx’ ayopEVEiv,
firjTpi (piXr] EJti i]pa q>Epav. XevkcoXevco 'Hpf]-
442 Notes
552. Not a question, but an indignant exclamation.
554. aoo' E0EXtio0a: 1148
555. fiT| oe Jiaptuiii: 1125-1126
557. o o i 1004. —yovvrav: 983.
562. an o GCjiov: fu rth er fro m my heart, i.e., you will lose my affections.
565. dKEOVoa: translate by another imperat., “But shut up and sit down.”
—^ve(o: 996.
567. iov0’ (id y ra) (fie). Although xpaiofiEco means “help,” here it implies “help
against;” hence the accusative object. —dd:iTors must be understood of
blows as violent as Zeus had the power to deliver. —etptiw: 2nd aorist
subjunct. {E(f>h]fii).
253
Lesson 75
Il ia d , 5 7 3 - 5 8 9
443 Optional: Read sections 1154-1158 on indirect discourse.
444 VOCABULARY
dnq)iKV)JiEX)tOV, ot), TO double cup (goblet); it may be turned upside down, the bot
tom form in g another receptacle
dvaiooo), dvaiô), dvf|iâ, — » — ^dvTjixOilv (stems: p ai-, piK-) start up, dart
up, spring up
dvEKTog, 11, 6v endurable, tolerable, bearable. (dvex<o; 829, note.)
dvT K pep o), d v T o ia e ) (stems: (pep-, o i-, evek-) bear against, oppose
dpYttêog, r|, ov horrible, terrible, awful, cruel, difficult
doxEpojitiTT|5, ao, 6 hurler of lightning
EXavvo) (c f eA,dco) drive, carry on, strike, push, press
E p iS a iv o ) (stem: E p iS a v -) quarrel, bicker
t|5o;, eoq, TO use, utility, advantage, superiority
GeIvo), 0 e v e (o* , E 0 E i v a (stem: 0 e v -) strike, hit, beat
ri, ov propitious, kindly, gentle, favorable
Ka0dn:T<o, Ka0d\|/(o* ( K a 0 d \ | / o n a i ) , K a 0 fj\|/ a , — K a 0 t i ^ f i a i , K a0 T |(p 0 iiv* (stem:
d (p-) attack, lay hold, accost, address
KoX(po;, OTJ, 6 brawl, wrangling, quarrel
âXaKog, ov soft, gentle, tender, mild
vlKdw, vlKT|0(i), EViKiloa, VEViKt]Ka*, VEViKiinai*, £vlKij0i}v conquer, prevail,
surpass
6<p0aXfi69, oti, 6 eye, sight
napd(pTmi, napaq>iio(o, napEcpiioa* (stems: (pTj-, (pa-) advise, counsel, urge,
persuade
CTTVtpEXiô), — i EOTtxpeîâ (stem: OTVcpEîy-) strike, thrust, hurl
xapdaoft)*, xapd^w*, Etdpaâ, xEtpi}x«» TETdpaynai*, ETapdx0ilv* (stem:
tapaX") disturb violently, throw into confusion; per/:, be disturbed
Related words: Nike; ophthalmology.
254
L E S S O N 75
Iliad, 573-589
"tj 6fj A oiyia e p y a to.6' eooetui o v d ’ h ’ avEKTO.,
E l dr] o(po) EVEKa dvrjT&v Epida'ivEiov mdE,
Ev 6 e OeoToi KOAcpov eXuvvetov- ov6 e ti d a n d g 575

E odhjg EOOETUI f]8og, EJIEI TO. X£p£lOVa VIK&.
fitjzpi 6' Ey(h Jiupd<pt]fii. Kai a m fj JiEp voEovor],
jiaTpi (p'lMp £.11 rjpa q>EpEiv Ai'i, d(ppa fifj avTE
VEiKEitjoi JiuTijp. ov v (5’ d a h a rapd^ ij.
EiJiEp y a p k ' Ed£lt]oiv O lv ^ m og aoTEponriTfjg 580
eS emv OTV<pEX'iâi — 6 y a p JioXv (pEpiaTog eotiv .
aXXd ov Toi’ y ’ e: ieeooi icad d jirsod ai ^laXaKoioiv-
avTiK' E71E10' iXaog 'OXvfimog E ooE iai ^fuv."
cog d p ’ E<pij, K a i d v a i ^ a g 5 E 7 i a g d ^ K p iK V JiE X X o v
f i r j T p i (p iX f] EV x E i p i T 10 E I , K a i f i i v n p o o E E i J i E V - 585
‘‘ T E lX a O l, u f jT E p E fit ] , IC a i d v d o X E O , K 7 ] 6 o fiE V t] J l E p ,
f it ] OE q > iX i]v .~iEp E o v o a v e v 6 ( p 6 a X f i o T a i v i'dco /u a i
d E i v o u E v r ] v - TOTE 6 ' o v T i 8 v v i ] o o f x a i d x v v j X E v d g j c s p
XpaioiiEii'- d p y aX iog y a p 'OXvfiJiiog dvTKpspEodai. 589
446 Notes
573. Td8’(E) EOOEtai: 973:1.
574-575. EVEKa Oviitwv, contemptuously, contrasted with d E o i a i . Hephaestus
mediates, as Nestor did between Agamemnon and Achilles, but with

infinitely better success.
576. SaiTog: 979:3.
576. td , said with a deprecating gesture. —vlKa {vlKdEi)-. 584-585, 973:1.
577. 1004. —voEOVOt]: 1109:6.
578. EJii (1048-1049). — T |p a tpspEiv: show kindness toward.
579. VEiKEifloi,Tapd^ti: 1115. —<r6v: 1048-1049.
580. eGeXhoiv: 1135. —580-581: a good example of the figure known as aposiopesis,
i.e., instead of completing his sentence, the god breaks off abruptly, and leaves
to the imagination, as being beyond the power of adequate expression in
words, just what Zeus might do to them all, if he should take the notion.
581. 780-781.
582. EJiEEOOiv: 1005. — K a 0 d n ;T E O 0 a i: 1107:11.
587. i5 (0 |iia i: 1115.
588. Ti: 780-781.
589. ’0>.v)HJiio5 (ioTi): the Olympian (1027) = Zeus.
255
Lesson 76
Ilia d , 59 0 -5 9 8
447 Optional: Review accents, 534-551.
448 VOCABULARY
dÊ^b), dXeîiob), r|X.£^t)oa (a>.aXKOv) (stems: dXe^-, dXe^c-, d)ÊK-, dXK-) ward
off, defend, protect
d)k>.OT£ at another time
Pt]>.69, oti, 6 threshold
ev8eîo5, r|, ov, to(ward) the right
EVEijii, ^ E o (o)on ai (stem: ia -) be in
^âp, Tinaxoq, x6 day
0EO:1£OIO5, ri, ov divine, marvelous, divinely sounding
Kaxartintw, KaxaÊOEOnai, KatmEoov, KaxanEJitti(K)a(stems: jiet-, n:xE-,
JiTt|-) fall, drop
KOî^d), Kojuito, EKOîo(o)a, KEKOîKa’^, K£K6|llloâl’^, £Ko^ô9t)v’*^(stem:
KoniS-) bear, care for, attend, accompany
KvnE^Xov, ou, TO cup, goblet
Afifivog, ou, T] Lemnos, an island near Troy
*fiEi5d(o, — i EÊiStjoa smile, laugh
^£ôva (stems: jiEV-, ôv-, â-) perf. only, be eager, desire greatly, strive zealously,
intend, plan
VEKtap, apoq, TO nectar (drink of the gods)
oivoxoEM, oivoxoT|CT(o*, wvoxoqoa pour wine, pour drink(s)
piJixo), ptyci), Eppt\j/a, Epplcpa**, Epplfiai*, Eppi<p(0)fiv* hurl, dash, throw with a
twirl, brandish
EivxiEg, (OV, 01 Sintians
XExayoiv {2 nd aor. particip. only) touch, lay hold of, seize
Related words; Alexander; ephemeral.
256
L E S S O N 76
Iliad, 590-598
ijdi] y a p Kai a k A o i’ a)i£^£êvai fie/uacoTa 590
piy/E Jioddg TExayav a n d j3fjkov d e o jiea io io .
n a y d ’ lijâp <p£pd^t]v, d ^ a d ’ rieUcp KazadvvTi
K aju ieaov ei> Atjfivcp, d U y o g d ’ h i 6 v/xdg evfjEV-
evda î£ ZtvTiEg d i’dpE:; d<pap Ko^'iaavTO JiE o o v ra .”
me, (puro, fi£idr]0 £v d i 0£d, lEVKcokEvog 'Hprj, 595
uEidTjoaoa 3 e Jtaiddg idE ^ aro xîpi KvnEXXov.
a v r d p 6 roTg dXXoioi dEoig iv d i^ ia Jid oiv
olvoxoE i yXvKv vEKTap, dn d Kprjrfjpog d(fn)oo(ov.
450 Notes
590. ÊâuTa [fiEfiova]: perf. act. participle, modifies^£, object o fpiy/E, line 591.
591. ^0865: 983.
592. ^âp: 1015.
593. KOUtnEOOV = K a T a - n E o o v = k u t - j i e o o v , 608-609. —ev Armvcp: Lemnos was
considered the island of Hephaestus, the god of fire, because of the volcano,
Mosychulus, situated there. —6v^69: breath, soul, life.
594. HivTieg: literally “brigands,” a piratical folk.
595-596. fiEiSiiOEV, ÊlSiôaaa; the repetition to show that there is no doubt but
that Hera is in good spirits once more.
596. JiaiSog: 987. —XEipi: 1005.
597. eEOig: 997, or 1009.
598. oivoxoEi: strictly “to pour wine,” but the meaning of the first part of the com
pound soon became weakened, so that it came to mean to pour anything
good to drink, such as the nectar of the gods.
257
Lesson 77
Ilia d , 599-611
451 Optional: Review enclitics, 553-559.
452 VOCABULARY
dnq>iYVT|£i;, ecsoa, ev wobbly-kneed, bow-legged {possibly = skillful,
ambidextrous)
a 0Pe0T05,T|, ov inextinguishable
yeXog, o d , 6 laughter
^6pv®m, Evopow, evwpoa (^wpopov), ôprapa, ôpcopeâi rouse among,
kindle among, excite
Tjxi where
K a 0 E v 5 ( a , K a0 ev 8 f|O (i)* (stems: e v 5 - , e i ) 5 e -) sleep, slumber, rest (in bed), lie
(in bed)
KaxaKEiio desire to lie down (rest, repose, slumber)
X a^:Ip6;, ii, 6v bright, brilliant, shining, gleaming (cf. A,an7teT:do))
M ovoa, rj(;, f| muse
6\)», 6:165, ^ voice, word, speech, language
TOpiKtt^>.f|5, iq very beautiful, charming
:iEpiicXvT65, 1], 6v famous, very renowned
jioijrvvM, — I, CTOurvvaa bustle, hurry, puff, pant
JipaJiig, {5o(;, ti heart, mind, soul, diaphragm
rtp6rtft5, OLca, av all, entire, whole
i)n:vo5, 01), 6 sleep, slumber
cpdog, eo(;, to light, gleam, luminary
(p6pÎY^, xyyoi;, ti lyre, harp
X p®o60povo5, ov golden-throned,pos5/fc/y with robes em broidered with golden
flowers (9p6va)
Related words: asbestos; muse, music, museum; calliope; pneumonia,

pneumatic(s), 593-596; hypnotic, hypnotism; phosphorus, photograph(y),
photon.
258
L E S S O N 77
Iliad, 599-611
a o f i e o T o q d ’ d p ' e v a p i o y eX o i; ^ a K a p e a o i d e o l o i v ,
(o i; i d o i ’ 'HipaioTov d ia d a fia r a Jio m v v o v x a . 600
a g TOTE juev jip ojiav rjnap eg r]eXwv K axadvvza
d aiy v v T ’, o v d e n Ovfiog edevexo d a n d g aot]i;,

ov fiEv (popfxiyyog nepiKakXeog, fjv e x ’ AnoXXcov,
M o v o d c o v O’, a ? d e i d o v d/iez/Jo/iera/ o j i i K aX fj.
a v x d p EJiEi K a x e d v X a f in p o v (p d o g i q e k i o i o , 605
oi fiE v K a K K E to v z e g s f i a v o i K o u d e E K a o r o g ,
fjx i E K doxco da> fia JiE p iK X v x d g djX ipiyv^ E ig
" H tp a io T o g JioirjO E v i d v t i j o t J i p a m d e o o i v ,
Z E v g d s Jip d g o v l i x o g i]i ’ O X v fin io g d a z E p o jir jT ^ g ,
EvOa J i d p o g K o i/x d d ', o t e juiv y X v K v g v n v o g i/c d y o i- 610
E v d a i c a d E v d ’ d v a j i d g , n a p d d k x p v o o d p o v o g H p r}.
454 Notes
599. The drinks were usually served in Olympus by the goddess Hebe, whose
name has become a synonymn for feminine grace and maidenly beauty. In
marked contrast to her is Hephaestus, rough, ungainly, and distressingly
homely, who here makes his debut as cup-bearer to the gods, and goes
through so many funny motions that all of them laugh most uproariously.
—0EOIOIV: 1004, 1009.
600. n o i :n v v o v T a is onomatopoetic; we can hear the bow-legged, wobbly-kneed
Hephaestus puffing as he bustles awkwardly around. Observe the heavy effect
given to this verse by the spondaic ending.
602-604. SaiTog, (popniyyo?, Movodtov: 986. —dêipoêvai 6 :i i “antiphonally.”
The song was doubtless accompanied by the dance, as Homer tells us else
where that song and dance are the crown of the feast; and thus the muses
would be able to display their varied grace and charms to the best advantage.
The book thus begins with the heroic and tragic figures of Achilles and
Agamemnon, and ends with a cabaret show among the gods of Olympus.
—o ji i 1005.
606. KaKK£iovT£5 = K aT aK E W vxE g [ K a x a K E ia ] : 608-609, 567.
607. eKOMTTO): 997.
608. n p ajiiStooiv : 1006.
609. 5 e Jipo5: 524. —jipog pov, 526.
455 Woven into the action and narrative of first book of the Iliad are the most
important characters, both human and divine, o f the entire poem. After its grim
259
HOMERIC GREEK
and gloomy beginning amid the tragedy of earthly Hfe and its unending sorrows,
Book 1 closes with the laughter of the carefree blessed gods, feasting happily on
Olympus. This alternate play of light and shade, of laughter and of tears, of stern,
dignified men and frivolous, light-hearted gods who serve as their foil, is worked
out with remarkable artistic feeling and delicacy of touch.
260
GRAMMAR
INTRODUCTION TO ATTIC GREEK
456 Dialects The Greek language was divided into a number of dialects. The
most important groups are the Aeolic, Ionic (Ionic-Attic), and Doric.
457 Attic is very closely related to Ionic, and both are usually grouped together
as lonic-Attic. For the most part their forms are fundamentally alike, and differ
only in minor details.
468 The Homeric poems are composed in what is known as the Homeric
dialect, a mixture of Aeolic and Ionic, the bulk of the forms being Ionic (620).
459 Contraction Attic carries the contraction of vowels to a further extent
than does any other of the Greek dialects; two or more vowels coming together and
admitting of contraction are almost always contracted.
460 Hence one of the most important things for the student to do in passing
from Homeric to Attic Greek is to memorize thoroughly the table of contractions
(584-585).
461 In general vowels are contracted in Attic as in Homeric (584-585), the
only exceptions being that e + o and e + ov = o v 'm Attic instead of ev in Homeric.
462 Treatment of a in Attic After e, i, and p, the rj of Homeric, when repre
senting an earlier a (621), becomes a in Attic, except that pft] = prj, as KOpr] for
KopfJ] = Homeric Kovpij m aiden and porj = pprj, as Kopprj for icdparj one o f the
temples.
463 If pr] is the product of the contraction of pea (584-585) it remained
unchanged: dprj = o p s a mountains.
464 Use of vau The letter vau (digamma, f ) had gone entirely out of use in Attic
before the earliest recorded Attic literature and it had no influence on Attic verse.
465 Consonantal change 1) Homeric a o becomes rr in Attic; for example,
Homeric d d X a o o a and Jiptjaoco become d d la z z a and Jipaxzco in Attic; except that
two sigmas brought together by inflection become a, as jw o i for jio o o i (jiod ai),
ETiEoi for EJIEO-Oi, XEAEOui for teX eo-ou i. 2) Homeric p o becomes pp in Attic.
466 Inflection In the inflection of words, the chief differences between the
Homeric and Attic forms are due to the greater extent to which the Attic dialect
carries either contraction (584-585) or metathesis of quantity (573).
467 Thus Homeric 6a?Mooda>v, ijpwi, rjpcoa, EJiEog, sjisa , y sp ao q , y s p a a ,
n6 Xr]0 (;, jia a ik fjo g , (iaoiX ria, PaoiXijcov, jiaoi^ fjag , vrjog, vr]&v regularly become
263
HOMERIC GREEK
in Attic OaXazTai', tjpco, tjpo), en ov q, ent], yepcog, y ep d , JioXecog, fia a ileco g ,

fiaoiX ea, PaoiXemv, jia o d E a g , veag, v£&v.
468 Nouns and adjectives Attic had the following case endings, either not
found or else very uncommon in Homeric:
1) In the dual, the gen. and dat. end in -iv instead o f -iiv.
2) Dual of the first decl. gen. and dat. ends in - a iv .
3) The dative plural of all three declensions regularly has the shorter forms:
in the first declension -aig, in the second declension -oig, and in the
third declension -oi.
4) The gen. sing. masc. of the first declension ends in -ov.
5) The gen. sing, of nouns and adjectives with stems in rjv, i, v is regularly
-ecog.
6) The acc. plur. of masc. and fem. nouns and adjectives with stems in rjv,
I, V, eg regularly ends in -eig.
7) As a result of the loss of the v between vowels and subsequent contrac
tion, comparatives with stems in -ov, such as afieivm v, may end in: co in
the acc. sing., masc. and fem., and in the nom., acc., and voc. plur. neuter;
and may end in -ovg in the nom., acc., and voc. plur. masc. and fem.
469 For the irregular “Attic Second Declension,” and the declension of adjec
tives as ikEcog, (OV, of vavg, and of ypavg, see any good Greek grammar.
470 Pronouns For the declension of the personal, interrogative, indefinite,
and reflexive pronouns, see any good Greek grammar.
471 Verbs Attic Greek has the future optative and future passive, entirely reg
ular in formation, which may be easily learned from any good Greek grammar.
472 The middle optative, third plural, regularly ends in -vzo instead o f in -axo
as in Homeric; and -a r o is very rare as the ending of the third plural of Attic verbs.
473 For the Attic forms of regular -fii verbs, see any good Greek grammar.
474 For the Attic forms of the irregular verbs, eifii, Eifii, (prjfii, KEifiai,
and o id a , see any good Greek grammar.
475 The first perfect active o f verbs, as XeXvKa (904), is common and is
the regular form in Attic Greek for verbs with all classes of stems.
476 In many second perfects with stems in Ji, (i, k , and y, the final mute o f the
stem is aspirated (619): jr and /3 become (p, while k and y become x- Thus n^Jioîcpa
[TiEfimo], XEtpKpa [rplfico], [dym], dEdicoxa [dicoKm],
477 Contracted nouns, adjectives, and verbs For the inflection of contract
nouns, adjectives, and verbs, see any good Greek grammar.
478 For tables of the Attic case endings, see any good Greek grammar.
479 For a table of the endings in Attic resulting from the fusion of the case
endings with the stem of nouns and adjectives (corresponding to the table in 649
for Homeric forms), see any good Greek grammar.
264
INTRODUCTION TO ATTIC GREEK
480 The differences in Homeric and Attic syntax can best be learned by the
careful study of some good work on Attic prose composition.
481 The article In Attic Greek 6. t o is regularly employed as the definite
article (the), its absence ordinarily marking a noun as indefinite: o JioXe/iog the
war; noXefioq war.
482 At times the article may be omitted, especially in poetry, without marking
the noun as indefinite.
483 At times it may represent the unemphatic possessive pronoun: Kvpog
K arajied tjaag a n d tov d p fia ro g xbv daprjKa Evedv Kai dvafâg eni tov ijm ov xa
jidXra eig ra g x^^pag eXafie Cyrus, having leaped down fro m his chariot, put on his
breastplate, and having m ounted his horse took his javelins in his hands.
484 It may be employed, especially with adjectives and participles, in a generic
sense, denoting a class: 6 dvdpconog m an(kind); o i dyado'i the good; 6 fiovXd/LiEvog
anyone who wishes, a volunteer; o i yipovT sg the aged.
485 It may be used with proper names in familiar style, as 6 HcoKpaTrjg Socrates.
486 It is used in a variety of ways to form substantives:
1 ) With adjectives and participles: of JiX ovoioi the rich; o i napovTeg those
present.
2) With pronouns expressing possession: o i o o i your people; i d i^fiETEpa
our possessions, our affairs.
3 ) With genitives: O ovKvdidrjg 6 OXopov Thucydides, son ofO lorus.
4) With locatives: o i MapaQmvi Kai ZaXafiTvi those (who fought) at M ara
thon and Salamis; xd oiK oi affairs, things at home.
5) With adverbs: o i uvi> the people o f today; o i xoxe those o f that time; o i
£KEi those over there.
6) With prepositional phrases: o i ev xS daxEi those in the city; xd Jipdg
xbv jwXEfiov the things (needful) fo r the w ar
7) The neuter article is prefixed to any word or part of speech when con
sidered merely as an expression: xo XsyEi the word “XsyEi”; xd yvmdi
oE avxov the (saying) “know thyself!’
8) The neuter article in the singular, all cases, is used with the infinitive
{articular infinitive), when emphasizing the substantive character of
the infinitive. In this usage it is commonly translated by the English
verbal noun (gerund) in -ing: xd KaXdig /xaxEodai (the act of) fighting
bravely, to fight bravely; xd ypd<pEiv (nom.) writing; xov ypd<pEiv o f
writing; x a ypdipEiv to or fo r writing; xd ypd(pEiv (acc.) writing.
N :
ote The article is always used with the infinitive when the infinitive is con
strued with a preposition.
487 Verbal adjectives In addition to verbal adjectives in -xdg, as found in
Homeric, denoting possibility, or merely as the equivalent of the perfect passive parti
ciple, Attic Greek has verbal adjective in - XE o g , similarly formed, used with sifii
(often omitted), expressing necessity or duty. There are two possible constructions:
265
HOMERIC GREEK
1) Personal (passive) construction. Only verbal nouns from transitive

verbs can be used in this construction, and they agree in gender and
number with the subject. The agent is in the dative: (b<pEkr}TEa a o i ^
Jio h g eox'i the state must be benefited by you; ov Jipo ye rtjg aXtjdeiag
TlfirjTEog dvi]p a man must not be honored before the truth.
2) Im personal (active) construction. In this construction, which is more
frequent, the verbal adjective is active in meaning and is in the neuter
nominative, usually singular, while its object is in the case that the
finite verb would govern. The agent, if expressed, is usually in the
dative, but is sometimes in the accusative as if dependent upon deT,
which has a meaning similar to that contained in these verbals, one
must. Thus aoK rjxiov o o i rf/v apex^v you must cultivate virtue; xovg
(pilovg evepyexrjxeov, xfjv jioXiv axpeXrixEov, xav fiooKrjfidxmv
EJiifielrjxEov one must do favors fo r ones friends, benefit on e’s state, and
care fo r ones cattle; xdv fiovkoiÊvov E v d aifiov a Eivai ocotppoovvrjv
dicoKXEov Kai aoKr]X£ov he who desires to be happy must pursue and
cultivate temperance.
488 av in Attic Attic, which does not employ ic£(v), has the following addi
tional uses of dV.
1) With past tenses of the indicative, apparently as present (contrafactual)
conditional: JiokXov d v a ^ i o v fjv xd jdovxeTv Ei K a i xd xaip£i>^ a v x m
o v v f j v it w o u l d b e w o r t h a g r e a t d e a l t o b e w e a l t h y i f j o y w e r e a s s o c i a t e d
w it h it.
2) With past tenses it takes the place of the iteratives in -oicov, which are
not found in Attic Greek: hpEJiEV dv = xpEUEOKsv, expEy/ev dv =
xpiif/aoKEv.
3) The subjunctive with d v is found in general statements that are valid also
for the future, where English employs the indicative present: fj,aiv6fie6a
jidvxEQ ojio x ’ d v opyil^cbfiEda, w e a r e a l l m a d w h e n w e a r e a n g r y .
489-500. These sections, which are omitted from this book for the sake of
brevity, refer to the standard Greek grammars. Those wishing to learn Attic Greek
should now read some good Attic author, with a few sections from the grammar
each day till the most important fundamentals of Attic Greek become thoroughly
familiar.
266
GRAMMAR OF HOMERIC GREEK
I. PHONOLOGY
501 The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters.
Letter Sound Greek Name English Name

Aa a (short) like the first a in aha! dXqia alpha
a (long) as in fa th e r
B ji b as in bite lirjTa beta
ry g as in get ydjxâ gamma
Ad d as in deal S eXtu delta
Ee e as in red £ y/iXdv epsilon
zc zd as in Mazda ^fjra zeta
H t ay as in fate. T/ra eta
* Restored: like e in French fe te
e e * th as in thin. Bfjra theta
* Restored: t + h as in fat head
h ee (short) as in meat (French vite); iara iota
ee (long) like the i in machine (French vive)
K k k as in kill KOLJUta kappa
/lA 1 as in love Xdpiftda lambda
M u m as in met nv mu
N v n as in net vv nu
(ks) X as in wax xi
O o* o as in rose. d filKpOV omicron
* Restored: o much like English ought.
n n p as in pie m pi
p p r as in red (Rrrrroll it, if you can.) pa rho

J o (medial) g (final) s as in sit o'lyfia sigma
(With p , y, (5, or ,Mpronounced like the s in rose.)
T t t as in tie zav tau
Yv u (short) as in lunatic; u (long) as in ruse V y /d ov upsilon
(p (p* f as in fat (or ph as in sophomore). <pi phi
* Restored: p + h as in top hat
X x* ch in Loch Ness. XI chi
* Restored: k+h as in thick head
ps as in lips y/T psi
Qco* o as in go. COf i e y a omega
*Restored: like the vowel sound in saw
267
HOMERIC GREEK
502 Only the capitals were used in antiquity; the small letters were introduced
by medieval copyists of Greek manuscripts.
503 The vowels are: a, e , rj, o , m, pure vowels, and
I, V, p, semi-vowels.
504 The diphthongs are:
a i pronounced as ai in aisle.
av “ ou in house (or rather as au in Ger. Haus).
£i “ ei in freight (or better still, pronounce both vowels,
£ + /, but fuse them into a single syllable ei, with
the accent on the first part).
Ev “ eh + oo in spoon, but fused into one syllable.
Tf]v “ e + oo, but fused into one syllable.
oi “ o+i “
ov “ o+u “ “ “ “
VI “ we in we
cov “ oh + oo in sou, but fused into one syllable.
505 The im proper diphthongs are a, r], a . These consist of a long vowel (a, rj,
m) with an iota (/), called iota subscript, written beneath, unless the first of these
vowels is a capital, in which case the iota is written in the line, as ^ eto = 'Qixeto =
QIXETO went.
Note:Whenever by inflection (626) or otherwise an iota follows immediately
after a , r], or m, it regularly becomes iota subscript (505), thus producing an
improper diphthong.
506 These diphthongs are usually pronounced the same as a , rj, and a , respec
tively, although in Homeric times the iota was probably sounded to some extent.
507 On the restored pronounciation see section 1 in Lesson 1.
508 Gamma-nasal, y before fi, v, y , k , ^ is called gam m a-nasal, and is pro
nounced as n in song, as K kayy^ uproar, pronounced clahngdy.
509 Mutes The letters n, ji, q>, k, y, %, z, 6, 6 are called mutes or stops.
510 They are divided into three classes, according to the part of the mouth
most occupied in producing them:
Labial (lip) mutes {n, ji, <p), called Ji-mutes.
Dental (teeth) mutes (r, 6, d), called r-mutes or lingual (tongue) mutes.
Velar or palatal (palate) mutes (x", y , x), called r-mutes or guttural (throat)
mutes.
511 Mutes of the same class are called cognate, as they are pronounced by the
sam e organs of speech; lips (labial), tongue and teeth (lingual, dental), or palate
and throat (velar/palatal, guttural).
268
PHONOLOGY
512 The mutes are also grouped in three orders, according to the relative
amount of expiratory force employed in making them:
Smooth mutes {ji. t, ic), called tenues.
Middle mutes {ji, d. y), called medials.
Rough mutes {<p, 6, x), called aspirates.
513 Mutes of the same order are said to be coordinate.
514 Nasals The nasals are /i, v, and y-nasal (508).
516 They may also be divided into three classes, corresponding to the three
classes of mutes:
fx: a labial.
v: a dental (lingual).
y-nasal: a velar (palatal or guttural).
516 Liquids The liquids are X and p, to which are sometimes added the nasals,
jx and 1'.
517 Spirants The spirants (also called sibilants) are g and
518 Double Consonants The double consonants are ^ (= o d ), ^ (= x-g, yg, xs),
and If/ (= Jig. Pg. (pg).
519 Quantity The vowels rj and co are always long; e and o are always short,
while a , I. and v are sometimes long and sometimes short, and hence are called
doubtful vowels.
520 When the doubtful vowels are long in this text, it will be indicated (except
in direct quotations from Homer) by the mark ' (macron) placed over them, as Oea
goddess. This mark will not be placed over vowels having the circumflex accent
(534), since they are always long (537).
521 Diphthongs, including improper diphthongs (505), are always long.
522 A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel or a diphthong.
It is long by position when its vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or by a
double consonant (518).
523 One or both of the consonants that make a syllable long by position may
come in the following word.
524 If a mute (509), followed by a liquid (516), or by the nasals fi or i>, comes
after a short vowel, and the mute and liquid (or nasal) come within the same word or
the same part of a compound, the syllable is common, that is, it may be either long or
short, according to the requirements of the verse.
525 Sometimes, under the verse ictus (1183), a short vowel followed by A, fi, v,
or p (occasionally a or f ) forms a syllable long by position, in which case these con
sonants seem to have been doubled in pronunciation, and are sometimes so written.
526 If f and another consonant come after a short vowel, the syllable is common,
i.e., either long or short (524). Such syllables are regularly long only under the verse
ictus (1183,1171,1168); otherwise, usually short.
269
HOMERIC GREEK
527 Breathings Every vowel at the beginning of a word must have either the
sm ooth breathing (’) or the rough breathing (‘), written over it if it is a small letter,
and before it if it is an initial capital followed by small letters. If the entire word is
written in capitals, the breathing is omitted.
528 The rough breathing, called aspiration, shows that h was sounded before
the vowel, as io ro g loom, mast (pronounced histos).
529 Initial p always has the rough breathing; initial v usually has it.
530 The smooth breathing denotes that the vowel was sounded without the h,
as Eiuog my, mine (pronounced emos).
531 A diphthong, except an improper one (505) at the beginning of a word takes
the breathing over its second vowel, as A m o g (a v ro g ) self (pronounced owtos),
Y iog (viog) son (pronounced hweeos).
532 Improper diphthongs take the breathing over the first vowel when it is a
small letter, and before it when it is an initial capital followed by small letters (505).
533 In compounds no word is written with a breathing unless it is initial, even
though it originally had it, as {^vv + ir]fii) bring together, hearken to. In
such cases the rough breathing should be pronounced.
534 Accents There are three accents, the acute ('), the grave ('), and the cir
cumflex ("), as fiovXi] a plan, fiovki] Kak^ a good plan, fifjvig wrath.
535 In ancient Greek the three accents seem to have represented a difference
of pitch. They may be pronounced alike, by stressing the accented syllable, as in
English.
536 The acute accent can stand on one of the last three syllables only of a
word, the circumflex on one of the last two only, and the grave on the last only.
537 The circumflex accent can stand only over a long vowel or a diphthong.
538 If diphthongs (except improper ones, 505) have either the accent or
breathing, or both, these must come over the second vowel, as av x ov g themselves,
ovvEKa because, o m o g (O vrog) this.
539 For improper diphthongs, these come over the first vowel if it is written in
small letters, and before it if it is an initial capital followed by small letters (505).
540 If a vowel or a diphthong has both the accent and breathing, the acute and
grave follow the breathing, while the circumflex is placed over the breathing, as ava^
king, protecting lord, v m e p o v afterward(s), mg eqiaxo thus he spoke, i<pi mightily,
with might.
541 If the accented vowel is initial, the accent as well as the breathing stands
over it if it is a small letter and before it if it is a capital followed by small letters, as
A id I to Hades, ''OXvfiJiog Olympus, aXyog grief, pain, woe.
542 If the entire word is written in capitals, both breathing and accent are
omitted.
270
PHONOLOGY
543 The last syllable of a word is called the ultima, the last but one the penult,
and the last but two the antepenult.
544 The antepenult when accented must have the acute, but it cannot have the
accent if the last syllable is long by nature (522), or ends in either of the double
consonants ^ or y/, as skm piov booty, but ekcopiov (gen.) o f booty.
545 An accented penult has the circumflex if it is long by nature (522) and the
ultima is short by nature, as oK rjm pov scepter.
546 An accented ultima may have the acute when short, as icakog good, the
acute or circumflex when long, as yvxv soul, y/vxv<i (gen.) of a soul.
547 Final a i and o i are counted short when determining the accent, except in
the optative and in oikoi (loc.) at hom e, as fivOoi (545) words, d d X aaa ai (544)
seas. These diphthongs are regularly long in metrical quantity, and must be so
treated when reading the verse, although considered short when determining the
accent.
548 Verbs are regularly accented as early in the word as the rules of accent will
allow. These accents are often referred to as recessive, as if they are thrown as far
back to the left as possible. For exceptions see 902.
549 A word with the acute on the last syllable is called oxytone (sharp-toned).
550 Oxytones change the acute to the grave before other words, not separated
by punctuation marks, in the same sentence, except before enclitics (553), elided
syllables (575), or the interrogative pronoun rig, t/ who? which? what? as a v d up,
up through, but d v a OTparov up through the camp.
551 Proclitics Some monosyllables have no accent of their own and are
closely attached to the following word, as ei' ;êpaiV in his hands, where ei> has no
accent of its own, just as in the ordinary use of the (unemphatic) definite and indef
inite article in English. These words in Greek are called proclitics, and are accented
only:
1) when followed by an enclitic (553);
2 ) at the end of a sentence;
3) Eig (ig) into, to, ek (e^) out of, from , ev in, and cog as, when they follow
the words they modify.
552 The proclitics are:
1) The forms 6, iq, o i, a i o i the pronoun (usually called the “article,” from
its use in later Greek, 765, 481).
2) The prepositions eig (eg) into, to, ek (e$) out of, from , and ev in, except
when they follow the word they modify.
3) The conjunctions si if, and cog as, that (also a preposition to), except
when it means thus, or when it follows its noun.
4) The adverb oi) (ovic, ov x ) not, except at the end of a sentence.
271
HOMERIC GREEK
553 Enclitics An enclitic is a word that regularly loses its own accent, and is
pronounced as if it were a part of the preceding word, as oicovoioi re and fo r the
birds, where re (re) has lost its accent, which has become attached to the last syllable
of the preceding word.
554 The enclitics are:
1) The personal pronouns fiev, ixoi, fie, a ev {a eo ), o o i (roi), a e, eo (ev),
t'dev, oJ, e, o(pi(oi), o(piv, atpe, o<pdg (oq>dg), 0 (pea(g), a<ponv, o<pcoe,
o(pecov, fill'.
2) The indefinite pronoun rig, ri som e (one), any (one) something, any
thing, in all its forms (but not d a a a = rivd).
3) The indefinite adverbs n ov (jtoGi), nfj, Jioi, JioOev, jiote , mo, mog.
Note: When used as interrogatives, the pronouns rig, ri who?
which? what? and the adverbs jw v (jiddi), nfj, JioT, jw dev, Jiore, mb,
ji3g have the accent here given, which they never lose.
4) The present indicative of eifii be, and of <pr]fil say (except M oi, the 3rd
pi. of eifii, and possibly the second singular ipfjg of (prjfil).
5) The particles ye, re, roi, Jiep, vv(v), Ke(v), dijv, pd.
6) The pronominal suffix -de, the local suffix (“preposition”) -de, and the
adverbial suffix -de (as ei0e, aide).
555 An enclitic does not lose its accent in the following cases:
1) When it is dissyllabic and follows a word that has the acute on the penult.
2) When the preceding vowel is elided (575).
3) When there is no preceding word.
4) When there is an emphasis on the enclitic.
556 eori(v) is written with an accent on the first syllable {eari) when:
1) It comes at the beginning of a sentence or o f a verse of poetry.
2) It denotes possibility or existence.
3) It is preceded by o v k , ei, Kai, cog, dX k’, or r o v r ’.
557 When an enclitic is followed by one or more enclitics in the same sen
tence, each except the last receives the acute accent on its final syllable from the
enclitic following.
558 When a word is compounded with an enclitic, it is accented as though
they were separate, as o v r e {ov + re), rjde {i] + ê), o id e {o'( + <5e), etc.
559 In the following cases the word before an enclitic keeps its own accent,
and never changes the acute to the grave:
1) If it has an acute on the antepenult (543), or the circumflex on the
penuh (543), it adds an acute on the ultima (543) as a second accent.
2) If it has the acute on the penult (543), or the circumflex on the dtim a
(543), no change is made.
Note: Remember that two acute accents cannot stand on successive syllables.
3) If it is a proclitic or an enclitic, it takes the acute on the ultima (543).
272
PHONOLOGY
560 Syllables A Greek word has as many syllables as it has vowels and diph
thongs. In dividing a word into syllables, single consonants, combinations of con
sonants that can begin a word, and a mute (509) followed by ^ or are usually
placed at the beginning of the syllable. Other combinations of consonants are
divided, as dy-6p(o-:iog man, (pa-pe-Tprj quiver, fid -x£-odai to fight, e-xco I have,
6 d -X aa-oa sea. Compound words are divided according to their original parts, as
^vv-E-r]KE brought together (a compound of and etjice, from ^vvirjui = ^vv +
irjî = ^vv-i-rj-iAi).
561 Movable Consonants The following words are sometimes spelled with
and sometimes without a final v, called v-movable:
1) All words (except e a o i), ending in -oi, including and -y/i.
2) All verbs of the third-person singular ending in -e .
3) The third singular of the pluperfect ending in -ei (originally -ee ,
584:2; 585).
4) The verb ear/, and the particles k e and vv, all of which are enclitics
(553, 554).
5) The dative plural of the personal pronouns dfifii, vfifii, 0(pi, otpioi.
6) The endings <pi and 6e , mostly adverbial.
7) The pronoun Eyco I.
562 This nu-movable comes regularly in all these words at the end of a line of
poetry and at the end of a sentence, and always when the end of a verse coincides
with the end of a sentence. Elsewhere the word may be spelled with or without it,
according to the pleasure of the writer or the requirements of the verse.
563 Similarly some adverbs had a movable sigma at the end, as JioXAdKi(^)
often, and others ending in -ici(g). /U£o(o)r)yv(g), d T p E fia ( g ) , d v T iK p v (g ), iOv(g),
îEXpi(^). dxpi(g), d^KpUg), o m a ig ). iub(g}, ek (e^ ).
564 Variant Spellings The following words were spelled at times with a single
sigma, and at times the sigma was doubled:
1) The future and aorists of verbs with stems (630) ending in a short
vowel, or in a short vowel followed by a consonant.
2) The ending of the dative plural of the third declension.
3) The words oafojog, O7ioo(o)og, d a(a)dK i, Tda(o)og, roo(a)d K i, t6 o (o )-
o a d E , T o a i o j o v T o g , fi£o(o)og, J ip 6 o ( o ) ( o , n p 6 a ( a ) o d E ( v ) , d m a ( o ) c o ,
vEfiEo(o)dco, vEH£o{a)r]Tdg, vEfi£o(o)ig, and 'Odvo(a)Evg in all its cases.
565 In the same way, other words were spelled with a single or a double con
sonant, as o.-iiJijag, o.ii.i))]. AyjX(X)Evg, o( x) t i .
566 Many words beginning with k , v, p , and o are often spelled with these
letters doubled when they are brought before a short vowel by composition or
inflection, as e jie o o v tu i (em , OEVOfiat) £fi/uopE ( f i E i p o f i a i ) , EXXafiE (Xa^fidvco),
EppEE (pE(0). d:iEV(l’)llÔVTO (djw , vii^co) (525).
Note: These letters were sometimes doubled in pronunciation, although it was

not represented graphically (525, 526).
273
HOMERIC GREEK
567 A few words were spelled with or without a final vowel:

1) iv(t), ovK(i), n(p)oTl = npdg; 2) -a ; a v (a ), K az{a), n a p {a ).
568 The following words were spelled with and without t or 0 ;
niT)6Xiq, n(T)6kenog, iuaX(d)aKd^, dix(d)d, Tpix(6)d.
569 The following words were spelled with or without initial a : (a)Keddvvvî,
(o)fiTicp6g, ovg (vg), a v fo p jio q (vq>opji6g), ZeXoi (EXXol). See 603-604.
570 Some double forms are: îia (la ) one; y a ia (yfj) earth, land, country;
Xelfico {dfico) drip, drop, pour; Epi(y)dovjiog loud-roaring, resounding; ^vv, avv
together, with.
571 Variations in Quantity Some words have a syllable that may be either
long or short (sometimes, but not always, represented by a difference in spelling),
according to metrical convenience (525, 1168), as ’O Xvfinog {OvXv^jiog), o v o fia
{ovvofxa), KoXedv (/covXedv), o p og (ovpog), dvijp (av^p), AjioXXav {~Aji6XXcov),
eiXtjXovOa (iXijXvda), elveKa {eveK o), ^r]v inev), ex ap o g (h a T p og ), d z d p
(a m d p ), JioXvg (jiovXvg).
572 A diphthong or a long vowel that precedes another vowel in the same
word is often shortened in pronunciation, as v iog son {Iliad 1.489), where the
meter requires the first syllable to be pronounced short. In the following examples
the difference in pronunciation is indicated by the spelling also:
© rjafja becomes 0 r jo ia
eoTTjOTog “ ia x a o x o g
'Aprjog “ A peog
vrjog, vfja, vfjeg, vrjmv, “ têdg, vea, VEsg, veav,
vÊOOi, vfjag veeooi, vsag
i]vg “ Evg
tja r a i “ Euzai
KEiarai “ Ksaxai
*fiaaiXr]vg, *Zrjvg, etc. “ fiaaiXEvg, ZEvg, etc.
(nouns in -*rjvg) (nouns in - E v g )
573 Metathesis o f Quantity a o and rjo often become em by an exchange

(metathesis) of quantity; that is, the long vowel (a, rj) becomes short (e), while the
short vowel (o) becomes long (<»).
574 The accent is not affected by metathesis o f quantity, but remains as it
was before the metathesis took place. Thus FlrjXriiddao becomes nrjXrjiddEco,
B p id p tjog becomes Bpidpscog, etc.
575 Elision A short final vowel (very rarely the diphthongs a i and o i also) is
regularly dropped when the next word begins with a vowel or a diphthong. This is
called elision. An apostrophe (’) marks the omission, as oxEfifiax’ excov (for
oxE/x/iaxa excov) having fillets, oiicad’ iKEoQai {oiKadE iKEoQai) to arrive home,
E7i’ ajxcov ( ejii mficov) on his shoulders.
274
PHONOLOGY
5 7 6 N ote: W h en a final short vowel, preceded by one or m ore vowels in the

sam e word, is elided, only th e last vowel is lost, and the o th er vowels rem ain
unchanged, as / u v p i’ A y a io ig .
5 7 7 The m ost frequent o ccu rre n ce s o f elision are in:
1) W ords o f one syllable end in g in -e, as ye, de, ke , te .

2) P rep osition s and co n ju n ctio n s o f tw o syllables, as dXXd, dfi(pi, sjii,
:ia p d .
3) Som e co m m o n adverbs, as ^ d k a , t d x a , d f ia , h i , e'jiena, e h a .
5 7 8 In the follow ing w ords elision does n ot usually tak e place:
1) d x p t. fte x p i. -IE p i, Jipd. d z i, z i and its com pou nds.

2) M onosyllables (except th o se en d ing in -e , and a very few others, as od ,
p d , and (rarely) a o i, to ;, hoi ).
3) W ords end ing in -v.
5 7 9 E lision o ccu rs also in the fo rm ation o f com p ou n d w ords, but w ithout the
apostrophe to m ark it, as ijiEvipijfirjoav {ijii Eixpijfirjaav) they shouted assent.
5 8 0 W h e n the follow ing word b egins w ith a vowel, preceded by f , elision does
n ot ord inarily take place, as evi oikco = evi poiiccp in (our) hom e; but ei) d ’ poiicadE
happily hom e(w ard).
5 8 1 f , a sem i-vow el corresp o n d in g to Eng. w, thus varied betw een its c o n s o
nantal and vo calic value (cf. 52 6 ).
5 8 2 A sm oo th m ute (5 1 2 ) brou gh t b efore a rough b reath in g (5 2 7 ) by elision

(5 7 5 ) is changed to the cognate rough m ute ( 5 1 1 - 5 1 2 ). Thus k befo re a rough
breathing b eco m es x< t b eco m es d, and Ji b eco m es <p, as aidEwda'i 6 ’ lEpfja an d to
reverence the priest, for aidEioO al te isp tja; a x ' EKazoyxEipov KaX Eoaa’ ig
^laKpdv 'VkvfiJiov quickly having sum m oned the hundred-handed (giant) into lofty
Olympus, fo r mku EKUToyxEipov, etc.; d<piEi he sent (him) away, fo r d jio-isi.
5 8 3 If an accented final syllable o f a preposition o r a conjunction is elided (575),
the accent o f the word is lost with the elided syllable. O th er words so accented throw
the accent back on the preceding syllable, but do n ot change the acute to th e grave
(5 3 4 , 550).
5 8 4 C ontraction W h en on e vowel follow s a n o th er vowel in the sam e word,
co n tractio n som etim es (but not usually) takes place. W h en vowels are thus c o n
tracted , the follow ing are the rules:
1) Vowels that regularly form diphthongs do so, as a H- ; = a ; , o + / = oi,
etc.
Note: O bserve that the long vowels a , rj, co, w hen follow ed by /
regularly form th e im p rop er d iphthongs a , tj, co (5 0 5 ).
2) Two like sounds un ite in th e co m m o n long sound, th at is, tw o a-sou nd s
( a ) , two e-sou n d s (e, t j) , two i-sou n d s (/), tw o o -so u n d s (o, co), or two
u-soun d s ( f ) , unite to form th e c o m m o n lon g ( a , r], T, co, v) sounds,
except EE becom es e i . and o o becom es o v .
275
HOMERIC GREEK
3) An o-sound absorbs an a-sound or an e-sound and becomes long o

{(o), except Eo gives ev, while o e becom es o v .
4) If an a-sound comes together with an e-sound, the one that comes first
absorbs the other and becomes long (a, rj).
5) A vowel coming before a diphthong beginning with the same vowel may
be absorbed, and e may be absorbed before o i. In other cases a vowel
before a diphthong may be contracted with the first vowel of the diph
thong, a following iota becoming iota subscript (505), and a following
V disappearing.
585 Table of Contractions
a + a = a e+6t=r) Tl-hE=ri 0 -I-^=ox
a + a = a e+ai =Ti T|-1-ei =ji (rarelycp)
a + a = a (rarelyai) (rarelyri) 0 -1-1 =ox
a +ax=ai e+e=El r] + r\ = y] 0 +0 =0\)
a +a =a e+El =ei T1+I1 =T1 0 +ox=ox
a +e=a E-HT1 =T1 ^ + v = r\ 0+O X)=0\)
a -(-ei =a e+Ti=Ti T|-1-01 =CO 0 +\)=o-u
(rarely=6c) e-1-1 =ei X+E=T 0-1-CO=CO
a -1-Ti=a eH -0 =eu X+X=X 0 -1-cp=cp
a -1-1] =a e+01 =01 0 +a =C O t)-1-X=u
d+1 =ai E-1-Ot)=E\) (rarelya ) ■u-1-X)=X)
a +I =oc e-1-\)=et) 0 +ax=cxx CO-1-a =CO
a +0 =(0 E+CO=00 0-1-E=ou CO-HE=CO
a +01 =CO E-1-CO=CO 0 -1-EX=ox 0)+X=(p
a -1-o\)=CO Ti-ha=Ti (rarelyo\}) CO+0=0)
a -1-CO=CO Tj-(-ai =p 0 -1-ri =C O 0)-1-CO=CO
e-1-a =T|
586 Somewhat akin to contraction is synizesis, which takes place when two
successive vowels that do not form a diphthong are pronounced as one syllable for
the sake of the meter, as TlrjXytddeco o f the son ofPeleus, where -deco must be pro
nounced as one syllable; deoi d o iev m ay the gods grant, where dsoi is also pro
nounced as one syllable. Or the two syllables forming synizesis may come in
separate words, as df] om cog thus, pronounced as two syllables, or as dfj a v again,
pronounced as one syllable.
587 Crasis A vowel or a diphthong that ends a word may be contracted and
combined into a single syllable with the vowel that begins the word following. This
is very rare in Homer. A coronis (’) is usually placed over the syllable contracted, as
rdAAa the other {parts), for rd dXXa.
588 In crasis the first word loses its accent, while the accent of the second
remains, which may change however from the acute to the circumflex, if the rules
of accent require it, because of the long syllable that arises from it.
276
PHONOLOGY
589 When two or more syllables are contracted into one, if either had an
accent before contraction, the contracted syllable has one.
590 In the case of the contracted penult (5 4 3 ) or antepenult (5 4 3 ), the accent
follows the regular rules.
591 A contracted ultima (5 4 3 ) takes the acute accent if it had the acute before
contraction. If the penult (5 4 3 ) had the acute and is contracted with the ultima, the
ultima takes the circumflex.
592 Syncope is the suppression of a short vowel within a word, as t l t t e ; why
in the world? for r/ Jiore.
593 Ablaut In many words that are closely related a change (or sometimes the
disappearance) of the vowel occurs, as in Eng. sing, sang, song, sung. This is known
as ablaut {vow elgradation).
594 Ablaut has strong and w eak grades, in the latter o f which the vowel (some
times) does not appear {disappearinggrade).
596 The most important grades are:
St r o n g W eak
1)e, o —, o r a
2) a (usually r) in Homer), ro a
3) r), CO e, a
4) (0 o
5) e i, 01 I
6) e\), o v V
N o t e : (5 ) and (6) are really part o f (1 ), b ein g the short vowels e, o com bined
w ith I and u, fo rm in g the d iphthongs ei ov.
E .
596 xamples 1) ^ ek-og missile, sK tj-ôk-og free-shooter, vno-^l,r\-dy]v
breaking in, shooting in, pd>,-A« shoot, hurl; j3ov^.Tj-(p6p-og counsel-bearing, di-(pp-og
chariot {bearer, carrier), (pap-Evpr] quiver {arrow-carrier). 2) (originally
6 2 1 ) / speak, (p a-v m I lift up the voice, speak, E-(pa-ro he spoke. 3) Ti-Qr\-fii I
put, place, 0(o-/7fin e {penalty placed upon one), ri-Qt-fiei' we place; pt\y-i’vî I break,
cp-pwy-a / broke, ip-pay-rj it was broken. 4) 8&-pov gifi, 86-aig gift. 5) Xeui-w I
leave, Af-XoiJi-a I have lefi, e-i.m -oi' I lefi. 6) e-'ks.v-oofiai I shall come, ei^^-kovQ-a
I have come, tj-kvQ-ov I came.
597 Sonant Consonants In an earlier stage of the language, the liquids (A, p )
and fi, V of the nasals were often vocalic (sonant); that is, they were used as vowels
in certain combinations. In this case they are ordinarily written with a small circle
underneath (A, g.fA.y) to distinguish them from the consonantal A, p, i'.
598 In Greek as we know the language:
1 ) Vocalic A (A) becomes consonantal (A) and a strengthening vowel is
developed either before or after, as eozaX fiai I am sent, for an earlier
277
HOMERIC GREEK
eox/^fiai; m finkavT o were filled, for an earlier m(/x)-Jt^vTo; jw^vg

much, for an earlier JiXvg.
2) Similarly vocalic p (g) becomes consonantal (p), and a strengthening
vowel is developed either before or after it, as Kapdlr], icpadlrj (= Kapdia,
K padla, 621) heart, for an earlier Kgdta, Kaptepoq, Kpaxepoq strong,
harsh, for an earlier KgTEpog.
3) Vocalic /i ifx) becomes short a , as in dsK a ten, for an earlier 8 ekix,
eX voa I loosed (freed), for an earlier eXva^.
4) Vocalic y (i’) also becomes short a , as in the ending -a o f the accusative
singular, and the ending -ag of the accusative plural, masculine and
feminine, of the third declension, for all earlier -y and -yg. Compare
jw d a (acc. sing.) fo o t with Lat. pedem, which is for an earlier Jiody
(pedm). It occurs commonly elsewhere, as e ip v a r a i they protect, for
eip v v ra i, fiaQvg deep, snaQov I suffered, for earlier/Si'Sug, EJiydov.
N :
ote Occasionally the vocalic nasals fi, v (/u, y) became consonantal (fi, v),
with or without the development of a strengthening vowel, as jievdog depth, nevdog
woe, for earlier/Jj'Sog, JiyOog.
599 In the case of the development of a short strengthening vowel, two spell
ings of the same word often arose, or else different forms of the same stem were
used, as Kpaxepog, icaprepog strong, harsh; Kapdirj, Kpadirj heart; ejia k o v I hurled,
ej3Xijdr]v I was hurled.
600 Consonantal t. Many Greek words earlier had a consonantal (sem i
vocalic) I, sounded as i in onion, and written /. Its loss when following the final
consonant of the stem of a word caused the following changes in spelling:
A; = I X ; Ku XI = oa; t i, 6i = a o (sometimes a); <5/ = ? between vowels; y/ = C after
a vowel; yi = d after a consonant; avu ap i, ovi, opi = aiv , aip , oiv, o ip ; evi, epi, ivi,
ipl, vvi, vpi = Eiv, eip, Tv, Tp, v u , vp.
601 Compensative (Compensatory) Lengthening The loss of one or more
consonants in a word usually occasions the lengthening of the preceding vowel.
This is called compensative (or compensatory) lengthening. When it takes place, a , i,
V = d , T, V , e = £ i ; o =o v .
602 Consonantal f (vau, digamma) was simply a consonantal (semi
vocalic) V (just as w in English usually represents a consonantal u), and one often
becomes the other in Greek, as may be seen from the declension of such forms as
ftaaiX evg {*(SaaiXt]vg) king, vrjvg ship, and fiovg {*(iavg) ox, cow, of which the
genitives are fia a d r jo g , vrjog, fio o g (for an earlier/SaazAT/fog, vr]fog, fiwpog) (572).
The final v of the stem (630) of these words thus first became f and was then lost.
Note: In a few words f became v and remained, as d jio v p a g having taken
away (= d jio fp a g ), a v e p v o a v they drew up (the heads of the victims) (= d fe p v o a v
= a f f E p v o a v = av p ep v oav ).
278
PHONOLOGY
603 Loss o f Sigma The rough breathing (527) in Greek often represents a lost
sigma. A sigma between two vowels usually became the rough breathing (compare
the change of intervocalic s to r in early Latin) and was then lost.
604 Compare
Greek vjiep over aAgt h e ( s a l t ) s e a lO T T j^ i s t a n d
Latin super sal sisto

Greek r jf n h a l f s ix e m d {eJiT /x 597, 598:3) seven
Latin semi- sex septem
Greek s d o g seat £s e l f ijco g { a p - ( o g ) d a w n
Latin sedes se aurora (ausosa)
Greek o fio g s im ila r aAAo/ia/ (aA(-) l e a p v n v o g s le e p
Latin simi-lis salio somnus (sopnos, c f sopor)

Greek dg, rj. dv {yog, 'ptj, 'pov) y e v E o g o f a ra ce {y s v E -o g )
ones ow n
Latin suus, s u a , s u u m (s v a s , s v a , s v o m ) generis (genesis)

Greek genitive plural ending, feminine, 1st decl. acov {a-cov)
Latin “ “ “ “ “ “ arum (asum)
605 Final Consonants The only consonants that can stand at the end of a
word are v, p, and g (including ^ and if/). Other consonants coming at the end of a
word are dropped, as d a fia house (for da/xaT); vjw dpa askance, scowlingly (for
vjiodpaK); eXve for eXvet. C f Lat. amat, amabat, etc.
606 EK (f^) out o f from, and ovic (ovx) not, are apparent exceptions, but as pro
clitics (551) they are attached closely to the following word.
607 ov. OVIC, ovx not are the variant spellings for this word, depending on whether
it comes before a consonant, a smooth breathing, or a rough breathing, respectively.
At the end of a sentence, clause, or verse, the form ovKi is sometimes found.
608 Consonant Change There are certain changes that some of the consonants
undergo, mostly in the nature of assimilation; that is, a consonant becomes similar
to, or the same as the consonant following {partial, or complete assimilation).
609 Thus Kd:;uiEooi’ { kutjieoov) I fell has complete assimilation of the r to the
following Ji. while in EnEfKpdrjv {ejie/xji6t} v) I was conducted, sent, there is only par
tial assimilation.
610 The most important of these changes are:
1) A labial {.t. /?, (p), or a velar (palatal) (/r, y, x) mute before a dental (r, d,
6) mute must be of the same order (512).
2) A dental (r, 6) mute before another dental mute becomes o.
3) Before ,« a labial mute ( j i , fi, (p) becomes ju, while the velar (palatal)
mutes K and x regularly become gamma-nasal and a dental mute (508),
(r, d, 6) regularly becomes o.
279
HOMERIC GREEK
4) Before o : a labial mute {ji, <p) combines and becomes y/.

a velar (palatal) mute (r, y, %) combines and becomes
a dental mute (r, d, 6) is usually assimilated (608), and
becomes o ; one o is often dropped, as Jioa (a )( = jw d a i with his feet.
5) fi before a labial mute (ji, fi, <p) remains unchanged.
6) Vbefore a labial mute ( t i , (i, <p) becomes fi.
Vbefore a velar (palatal) mute ( k , y, x) becomes gamma-nasal (508).
Vbefore A or p is assimilated (608), becoming A or p respectively.
7) A smooth mute (512) before d becomes a rough mute of the same class
(510).
8) (i + Vbecomes fiv ; d o r z - ¥ n becomes Tin; d + X = XX; X + v = XX; v +
= H,u.
9) r + I (when /is final, or medial followed by another vowel) usually = o i:
jtX ovoiog (jiXovzoi;).
N :
ote yz before final / becomes vg; the v is then dropped and the preceding
vowel lengthened by compensation, 601, 618.
611 Thus, with the exception of e k {out of, from ) in composition, the only
combinations of mutes that can occur are jit, kz, (id, yd, (pd, Ji(p, k%, and zd.
Note: y before k, y, ^ is a nasal (508, 515) and not a mute.
612 When v is brought before p by inflection (626) or composition, a (5 is
developed to assist the pronunciation. Similarly, when a ^ is brought before p (or A)
a is developed, as av^p, av d p og (av p oq) a man, o f a man, dfilipozog (a-^pzog,
597), immortal, fXE/ij3Xezai {fxefiXezai) is a concern. For a similar development in
English compare tender (Lat. tenerum), cinder (Lat. cinerem), num ber (Lat. nume-
rum), hum ble (Lat. humilem).
613 fi, y, vz, vd, vd, p, X before a, and a before v are regularly dropped and the
preceding vowel is lengthened by compensation (601).
614 In prepositional compounds, ev before X, p, or a remains unchanged,
while ov v (^vv) before o becomes o v a -, and before a + a consonant or before ^
becomes ov-.
615 fi before o is dropped and the preceding vowel lengthened, or else the fi is
doubled, as Eifii {sofii) I am, EfifiEvai {EOfievai) to be.
616 Words spelled with an initial p have this letter regularly doubled when by
composition or inflection it comes to stand after a vowel (not a diphthong).
617 X, fi, V, and a are often doubled under similar conditions (525, 566).
618 o between consonants, except in compounds, is dropped.
619 If a syllable begins with an aspiration (a rough breathing, or a rough mute
<p, 6, x), the preceding syllable may not ordinarily have an aspiration, but becomes
280
PHONOLOGY
smooth, as ziOrjî (9i6t]fii) I put, place, rpeqyco (dp£(po)) I nurture, m<pr]va {(p£<pT]va)
I shone, e'xco ( exo)) I have. This is known as dissimilation.
Note: This rule is not always observed in the formation of the aorist passive,
where two rough mutes may begin successive syllables.
620 Dialects The Homeric poems are a mixture of two Greek dialects, Aeolic
and Ionic, the bulk of the forms being Ionic. Certain apparent irregularities are due
to the Aeolic element in them.
621 The long alpha (a) of the earlier language and found in most of the other
Greek dialects regularly becomes 7] in Ionic Greek, as fiovXij desire, plan {(iovXa).
Long alpha in the Homeric poems is regularly due to contraction (584-585), to
compensative (compensatory) lengthening (601), or else is an Aeolic form.
622 Punctuation Greek punctuation differs from English in having the semi
colon and the colon represented by a single dot above the line ( ), while the interro
gation mark has the same form as the English semicolon (;).
623 Transliteration So many Greek words have come into English through
the medium of the Latin that the system of transliteration usually employed by the
old Romans is the one commonly used for the mass of Greek words in our tongue.
This in general represented the Greek letters by their corresponding English
equivalents. Those that differ at all were regularly transliterated as follows:
t = 2, as ^S)ov anim al (zoology, zoon, epizootic).
*■ = c, as S eku ten (decalogue, decagon, decade).
V = y(when standing alone; never when part o f a diphthong) as jtv p fire (pyre,
pyrotechnical, pyrography, pyrolatry).
a i = {a)e, as n aig (stem jia id ) child (pedagogue).
£i = e, i, ei, zsxîp hand (chirography), eidaX ov (idol), eidog appearance (kalei
doscope), fiovoE w v dwelling o f the muses (museum).
oi = (o)e, as oiK og house, (economy, ecology), d/ioTog like (hom(o)eopathy,
homoeomorphous).
o v = u, zsjiov g ox, cow (bucolic, Bucephalus, bucentaur, bucranium).
£v = eu, as £v well (euphony, eulogy, euphemism); however, occasionally = ev
in compounds, as £vdyy£ôg messenger o f good (news); (evangel, evangelistic,
evangelical).
p = rh, as pEcoflow (rhetoric, rheumatism, catarrh).
y-nasal (508) = n, as dyyEôg messenger (angel).
lota-subscript (505) was usually omitted, as ode, 0pt]icrj Thrace, r] in
Homeric Greek, when representing an a in later (Attic) Greek (621), was often trans
literated by a, as Hptj Hera, Adyvrj Athena. This rule applies especially to rj when
following £, I. p (462), or when final.
281
HOMERIC GREEK
624 The following special rules apply to final endings:
oi = i, as X x a io l Achaei, A a v a o l Danai.
r] = a (sometim es e) (621): IjwLprrj Sparta,'Iddio] Ithaca,'EKdrrj Hecate.
og = us (sometimes os): TldrpoicXog Patroclus, ’'OXvfmog Olympus;
but A fjfivog Lemnos, Ar]Xoq Delos, etc.
ov = um, eiS Z o v v io v Sunium, Ila X k d d io v Palladium.
xia, TIT] = cy: drjfioKpaxir] democracy.
irj, la = y, as A pKadirj Arcadia, Arcady, <piXooo<pir] ((piMco love, oo<p'ir]
skill, wisdom), philosophy, literally = love o f wisdom.
625 The traditional system of transliterating Greek proper names follows the
rules given above. They are put into the nominative (639), and are pronounced by
ignoring the Greek accent and by accenting the penult (543) of the word if it is long
(522) in Greek, otherwise the antepenult (543), as Atjtco Leto, "OXvfiJiog Olympus.
II. MORPHOLOGY
Inflection
626 Inflection, including declension (nouns, adjectives, pronouns), compari

son (adjectives, adverbs), and conjugation, is the fusion of a so-called stem (630),
and certain elements that express relationship to other words.
627 A root is the essential part of a word that remains after it has been ana
lyzed into its various parts, and all prefixes, suffixes, and formative elements have
been removed.
628 A stem often has more than one form, its different forms usually standing
in ablaut (593-595) relation to each other. It is ordinarily derived from a root, by
the addition of various formative elements, prefixes, and suffixes.
629 Some roots are also stems, and are combined directly with inflectional
elements.
630 An inflected word is in general made up of two parts:
1) The fundamental part, or stem.
2) The inflectional element (usually an ending, commonly called a suffix;
sometimes a prefix, as in the case o f the augment, 830), which com
bines with the stem to form case, number, tense, person, etc.
631 The last letter of the stem is called the stem characteristic, and from this last
letter stems are classified as vowel stems, mute (509) stems, liquid (516) stems, etc.
Declension
Nouns
632 Nouns, pronouns, and adjectives are declined.

633 Number There are three numbers in Greek, the singular denoting one,
the dual denoting two (usually referring to a pair o f objects closely associated, or
282
MORPHOLOGY
belonging together by nature and forming a closely related, unified group, as ;^£rp£,
6(pdaXfi(6, ijum the two hands, eyes, horses; compare yoke, team, p air in English),
and the plural denoting more than two.
Note: The plural is often used interchangeably with the dual to denote
only two.
634 Gender There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter.
635 The gender must usually be learned by observation, but in general:
1) The names of males are masculine.
2) The names of females are feminine.
3) The names of rivers, winds, and months are usually masculine.
4) The names o f countries, towns, trees, and islands are usually feminine.
5) Most nouns denoting qualities and conditions are feminine.
636 A few nouns are used either as masculine or feminine, as .~iaig child,
which may be of either gender, and may mean either boy or girl. Such words are
said to be of com m on gender
637 The demonstrative (often relative, or personal) pronoun most extensively
used in the Homeric poems is o, ij, t o the first form being masculine, the second
feminine, and the third neuter.
638 The form of the noun that appears in the vocabulary is the nominative
singular, unless otherwise indicated. This is followed by the ending of the genitive
singular, which denotes what declension the noun belongs to. After the ending of
the genitive singular is placed the appropriate form of this pronoun, to indicate the
gender. Thus deog, o v . 6 g od is second declension masculine; jSovli], fjg, r] wish,
will, plan is first declension feminine, and d^yog, Eog, to pain, woe is third declen
sion neuter.
639 Cases There are five cases in Greek, the nominative, genitive, dative, accusa
tive, and vocative, together with remnants of three lost cases, the locative, instru
mental, and ablative (657).
640 All these cases except the nominative and vocative are called oblique cases.
641 Accent o f Nouns The accent of a noun usually remains in all the forms on
the same syllable as in the nominative singular, or at least as near that syllable as
the general rules of accent will allow. Thus ijpcog hero (nominative singular), but
^pcocov o f heroes (genitive plural). See 544fF.
642 Words that are monosyllabic in the nominative singular, when they become
dissyllabic by declension, regularly have the accent on the final syllable in all the
dissyllabic forms of the genitive and dative of all numbers, and on the penult of the
dual (trisyllabic), but keep the accent on the first syllable in all other cases.
643 An accented ultima in general takes the acute, but in the genitive and dative
of all numbers a long ultima, if accented, takes the circumflex, as ij/vxv ôul (nom.
sing.), but y/vxfjg o f a soul (gen. sing.), \irvxfj to, fo r a soul (dat. sing.), etc.
283
HOMERIC GREEK
644 Declensions Nouns are declined in two general ways:

1 ) The vowel declension, for stems (630) ending in the pure vowels, a , o.
2) The consonant declension, for stems ending in a consonant, or the
se m i-v o w e ls ,v.
645 The vowel declension has two forms, with noun stems ending in a or o :
1 ) The a declension, commonly called the first declension;
2) The 0 declension, commonly called the second declension.
646 The consonant declension, for stems ending in a semi-vowel (/, v, which were
at times semi-consonantal) or a consonant, is commonly called the third declension.
647 Words of the first declension have stems ending in a , which either becomes
shortened in the nominative singular to d, or else becomes ?; (621), except in the one
word ded goddess, and a very few proper names. Nouns of the first declension are either
masculine or feminine.
648 Case Endings To form the various cases, numbers, and genders, the fol
lowing case endings were fused with the stems of substantives and adjectives:
VowelDeclension ConsonantDeclension
SINGULAR
First Second
M asc . F em . M. AND F. Neut . M. AND F. Neut .
Nom. 5 (none) none 9 V 5 (none) none
Gen. O (lO?) 5 o (io ) o (io ) 05 05
Dat. I I I I I I
Acc. V V V V v ,a ( y ) ' none
Voc. none none none^ V 5 (none) none
DUAL
N. A.V. none none none none E E
G. D. IIV IIV IIV iiv OllV OllV
PLURAL
N. V. 1 I I d e? d
Gen. (OV (OV (OV (OV (OV (OV
3Dat. (i)o i, 15 (i)o i, 15 (i)o i, 15 (l)CTl, 15 o(o)i, o(o)i,
eo(o)i‘' E0(0)l^
Acc. V?5 V5' V5' d v 5,5 vy5‘ d
L 597; 598:4.
2. But with ablaut of the final vowel of the stem o : e (596).
3. Usually lo i: rarely the shorter form ig.
4. -eo i unusually rare.
5. 613.
284
MORPHOLOGY
649 When these suffixes combined with the stem of a word, the following
endings were produced:
First Declension SecondDeclension

SINGULAR
Masc. Fem. Masc. andFem. Neut.
N. ti,a ,a 05 , [((1)5, ovc,)] OV
G. ao, [ew, w] 0 10 , 01), [00 , (1)0 (w)]
D. H ^ [a ] (p (0
A. i]v, [av] i]v, av, av OV,[((OV)] OV
V. il,a ,[ a ] 11, a , a e [ o 5] OV
dual
N. A. V. a a (1) (0
G. D. [n iv ] O llV O llV
PLURAL
N. V. ai ai 01 , [((? )] a
G. d(i)v, [ e w v , dwv, [ewv, (OV
(wv)] wv]
D. noMis oioi,oig 0 10 1,0 15
[aig]
A. ag OV5, [((05)] a
Note: Forms in square brackets [ ] are rare and need not be memorized; those
in parentheses ( ) are contracted.
Note: - e w . - ecov regularly pronounced as one syllable by synizesis, 586; -eco
usually contracted to -a after a vowel.
Third(Consonant)Declension
singular
Masc. andFem. Neut.
N. 5 (none) —
G. 05, [(ei)5, OU5, (05)] 05 [ev5, OD5, (05)]
D.
A. a ,v [(ii,(o)] —
V. (5 none) —
285
HOMERIC GREEK
DUAL
N. A. V. e E
G. D. o iiv o iiv
PLURAL
N. V. £5, [(£15 , OV5)] a ,[ ( ii ,( 0)]
G. (ov (ov
D. o i , £ o o i , [e o i ] a i , £ a o i , [ £ o i]
A. 5, a q , [(1 5 , C5, lEg)] a , [(i])]
650 Observe that the dative singular of all declensions ends in /, which always
becomes iota subscript (505) after long vowels (584:1, note).
651 The dative plural regularly ends in at, to which may be added nu-movable
(561:1).
652 -//a/ and -o ia i are the regular forms for the ending of the dative plural in
the first two declensions. Occasionally the shorter forms, -t]g, -oig, are found, but
this is almost always before vowels, and it is possible that in that case they should
be treated as examples of elision (575) and written -/70’ and - o i a ’.
653 The genitive plural of all forms ends in -ojt'.
654 There are but two forms of the dual in each declension, one (masc. only)
for the nominative, accusative, and vocative; the other for the genitive and dative.
N o t e : The form of the gen. and dat. dual of the first declension is uncertain.
Instead o f -tjii', some read -aitv (-aiv).
655 As in Latin, the vocative singular is often like the nominative, and the voc
ative plural of all forms is always like the nominative plural.
656 The nominative, accusative, an d vocative o f all neuters are alike, and in the
plural end in short -a.
657 In an earlier stage of the language there were three other cases: the instru
mental, denoting instrument, means, manner, etc., the locative, denoting the place
where, and the ablative, denoting separation, source, etc. There are only remnants of
these left in Greek, as the dative became fused with the instrumental and locative,
taking over most of their uses, while the genitive absorbed most of the functions of
the ablative.
658 In addition to the endings given in the tables (648-649), two other suf
fixes, -<pi(v) and -6ev, were sometimes used. For their uses, see 712, 715.
286
MORPHOLOGY
Paradigms
Nouns
F ir st D e c l e n sio n F em in in e
659 PovXri, 115, r| (a, the) desire, will, plan, counsel, council.
(PovX.a-)
SINGULAR
N. (a, the) plan (as subject).
G. Pov>.fj; of; off, from (a, the) plan.
D. PovXt) to, for; with, by; in, at, on (a, the) plan.
A. Poi)>.r|v (a, the) plan (as object).
V. Pov>i.ii O plan!
DUAL
N. A. V. povXd (the) two plans (as subject, or object); O two plans!
G. D. PoDXfliv of; off, from; to, for; with, by; in, at, on (the) two plans.
PLURAL
N. V. PoDâi (the) plans (as subject); O plans!
G. pouXdwv [erav, wv] of; off, from (the) plans.
D. povXfjoi, 115 to, for; with, by; in, at, on (the) plans.
A. PovXd; (the) plans (as object).
N o te : In the paradigms the stem of the word will be indicated each time in
parentheses; it will not be accented, and will be followed by a dash, as (fio v k a -)
above.
660 Use of Article Observe that there are no words used regularly in Homeric
Greek with the meaning of the English article, either definite (the) or indefinite (a,
an). One decides from the context whether or not the English article is to be
employed in translation.
661 Meanings of Cases The variety of meaning found in the genitive and
dative is due to the fact that each represents the fusion of two or more earlier cases
(657). An attempt is made to represent this above by the use of semicolons to sepa
rate meanings that once belonged to different cases.
287
HOMERIC GREEK
662 KOtXfl pov>iti (a, the) good plan.

(Ktt>.a- PorXa-)
SINGULAR
N. KttXri Pov>.fj (a, the) good plan (as subject).
G. KotXf); of; off, from (a, the) good plan.
D. PovXf] to, for; with, by; in, at, on (a, the) good plan.
A. KaX,T|v PovXf|V (a, the) good plan (as object).
V. KaXri PovXri O good plan!
DUAL
N. A. V. K ot>.a PovXd (the) two good plans {as subject, or object); O two
good plans!
G. D. KaX,titv pov>.tiiv of; off, from; to, for; with, by; in, at, on (the) two
good plans.
PLURAL
N. V. KotXat PovXai (the) good plans {as subject); O good plans!
G. KaXdwv PorXdwv [ewv, wv] of; off, from (the) good plans.
D. KaXtjoi PovXfiCTi, 115 to, for; with, by; in, at, on (the) good plans.
A. KaXdg PovXdg (the) good plans (as object).
663 6ed, ag, t| 0dXaooa, 115, t i y a ta , 115, t|

(0£a-) 0aXaooft-) (y a ia -)
goddess sea land, country.
SINGULAR
N. A. V. 0ed 0dXaooa y a ta
G. 0ea5 0aXdooii5 Y a iti5
D. 0Ea 0aXdo(T^ V a iti
A. 0edv 0d>,aooav y a ia v
DUAL
N. A. V. 0ed 0a)^dooa y a ia
G. D. 0ET11 V 0a>.doofliv y a itiiv
PLURAL
N. V. 0ea i GdXaooai y a ia i
G. 0Edwv [wv] 0aXaaod(ov [ ecov , y a i d w Y [ ecov ,
rav]
D. 0 E f l O l , 115 GaXdootloi, ^5 y a it io i, H5
0
[ Eai ] 5
A. 0Ea5 0a^dooot5 y ala5
288
MORPHOLOGY
F irst D eclension M asculine
664 ATpci8 ti5 , ao, 6 Aiveiftg, ao, 6 aixîlTT|5 , ao, 6

(AtpEFi5a-) (Aiveia-) (a ix ^ 1l^«-)
son of Atreus Aeneas spearman, warrior
singular
N. XtpEiSng AlvEiag aixnntT|5 [ai3c^tlTO]

G. AtpEiSao [e(o] AlvEiao [w] aixfiTiTaQ [em]
D. AtpEiSt] AlvEia aixntiTfi
A. At p e i 5 iiv AivEiav aixunTnv
V. AtpEiSi] AlvEia aixn tii:«
DUAL
A. V. AtpEiSa aixntitd
G. D. AtpEiSfliv aixniiTfiiv
PLURAL
N. V. AtpEi5ai aixfiiiT ai
G. AtpEiSdrav [e(ov, wv] aixniitawv [ewv, mv]
D. AtpEiSfloi, 119
A. AtpEiSag aixjiiiTdg
665 Observe that the original a of the stem of first declension nouns com
monly becomes t] throughout the singular (621). It rarely remains a (in d sa g od
dess, and a few proper names).
666 In some feminines the a of the stem becomes d in the nominative, which
occurs also in the accusative and vocative, but in the genitive and dative singular
the a of the stem becomes rj, just as in nouns ending in rj in the nominative
singular.
667 The masculines usually take the case-ending -g in the nominative singu
lar; the feminines do not.
668 The nominative singular of a few masculines ends in -d; a very few end in
-aq, but most end in -rjg. Those ending in -a , except those with variant forms in
regularly have the recessive accent (548), and all are adjectival except the
proper name O v eo ra Thyestes.
669 Masculines and feminines of the first declension are all declined alike in the
dual and plural.
670 Masculines ending in -?jg and -dg in the nominative singular retain this r]
or a throughout the singular, with the exception that the genitive singular always has
either the ending -a o (regular) or -eco (rare).
671 Those ending in -d in the nominative have the same form also in the voca
tive singular, but otherwise are declined like those ending in -rjq.
289
HOMERIC GREEK
672 Feminines ending in -// or -a in the nominative singular retain this

throughout the singular.
673 Those ending in -a retain this only in the nominative, accusative, and
vocative: the genitive and dative are declined the same as those ending in -rj.
674 Masculines are declined like fem inines except in the nominative and geni
tive singular, and occasionally in the vocative singular
675 Masculines ending in -3r/g have -rj in the vocative singular; those ending
in -xr](; [-ra], compound nouns, and names of nationalities have -a ; those ending
in -ag have a .
Sec o n d D ec l e n s io n
676 Nouns of the second declension have stems ending in -o (-£ in the voc.
sing. m. and f., which stands in ablaut relation (593-595) to the -o). They are chiefly
masculine and neuter, with a very few feminines. The masculines and feminines
end in -g in the nominative singular, the neuters in -v. These combined with -o of
the stem give the endings -og for the masculines and feminines and -o v for neuters.
677 The masculines and feminines are declined alike; the neuters differ from
them in two respects:
1) The nominative, accusative, and vocative singular all end in -v (i.e., -ov).
2) The nominative, accusative, and vocative plural end in -d.
678 Bvjiog, oC, 6 spirit, life, soul. KaKog :I6X.£ôg, ov, 6 evil war.
(015^0-) (Kttico- n;o>.Ejio-)
SINGULAR
N. Gruog KaKog
G. 0Cfioi), oto [6o] KaKov jio>êôv, oio, oio [6o, oo]
D. BCura KttKW 7io>.E^(a
A. 0Cfl6v KttKOV JlOÊHOV
V. 0CH£ KttKE noX.EÊ
DUAL
N. A. V. 0v^(a KaKu JtoX£^(a
G. D. 0CHOIIV KttKOllV rtoXEHOllV
PLURAL
N. V. 0vfioi KttKol Ji6Ênoi
G. 0v^wv KttKwv
D. 0®noioi, 015 KaKofoi :ioX,d|iioioi, 015 015
A. BCnovg KttKovg :no>wEfiov5
290
MORPHOLOGY
679 KaXov Epyov, o r, t o KaKT| voCoog, ov, f|

noble deed destructive plague.
(Kct>.o- FEpyo-) (KttKa- vovao-)
SINGULAR
N. KaXov EpYov kokti V 06005
G. KfiXov E p Y o r ,o t o ,o io KaKiig v o v o o v , 0 10
[6 0 ,0 0 ] [00]
D. KaXw epyw KaKii vovom
A. KaXov epyov KaKT|v vovoov
V. KttXdv epyov kckti vovoe
DUAL
N. A. V. KttXo) Epyw KaK& vovow
G. D. KaXotiv Epyoiiv KaKfliv vovooiiv
PLURAL
N. V. KotXd tp y a KUKal voCooi
G. KaXwv Epywv K aK aw v [ewv, <ov] vovom v
D. KotX.0101 E p y o io i, 0 1 5 ,0 1 5 KaKjioi v o v o o io i, ^5 0 15
A. KftXd Epya KaK^g v o vo o vg
T h ir d D e c l e n sio n
680 Nouns of the third declension are masculine, feminine, and neuter.
681 There are many forms of the nominative of third declension nouns, which
must be learned partly by practice, but in general:
1 ) Masculine and feminine stems (except those ending in y, p, and o) add
o to the stem and make the usual euphonic changes (613).
2) Masculine and feminine stems ending in p, a, and most of those end
ing in V make no change except to lengthen the last vowel if it is short,
£ becoming tj and o becoming co.
3) Stems ending in v(z) either make no change except to lengthen the last
vowel if it is short, dropping final r wherever it occurs, or else they add
a to the stem and make the usual euphonic changes (613), loss of y(r)
and lengthening of the preceding vowel. Thus the stems: daifxov-, dJv-,
^leXav-. y ep o i’T- give the nominatives daifim v divinity, dig shore, beach,
êXag black and yepcou old man, respectively.
682 In neuters the nominative singular is usually the stem, with the exception
of those with stems ending in r, which is dropped wherever it occurs (605).
683 As a rule the stem of third declension nouns may be found by dropping
the case ending {-og) of the genitive singular.
291
HOMERIC GREEK
684 The dative singular regularly ends in i, but occasionally in /.

685 The accusative singular of masculine and feminine nouns is regularly
formed by adding v to stems ending in vowels and by adding y (597) to consonan
tal stems, y of course regularly becomes -d (598:4), thus making the case ending of
accusatives singular masculine and feminine regularly -v for vowel stems and -d
for consonantal stems.
686 The dative plural is formed in two ways:
1) By adding -e a o i (rarely -eoi) to the stem.
2) By adding -oi (rarely -o o i) to the stem.
687 Note: When -oi [-aoi] is added, the preceding consonants are assimilated,
or dropped, according to the rules (613ff.). Thus jw vg, jw dog, 6 fo o t gives Jio o o i
(from Jiod -ai), which may be further simplified to Jio o i; vv^, vvKTog, ?/ night gives
(from vvKT-ai)-, yepmv, yepovrog, 6 old man, gives y epovoi (from yepovx-ai)\ etc.
The longer forms of the datives of these nouns are jw d e o a i, vvK ieaoi, y ep o v zeaa i.
688 The accusative plural of masculines and feminines originally ended in -yg
{-vg), which gives the ending -ag (598:4) for consonant stems, and -Tg, -vg (613ff.)
as the regular ending for the vowel stems.
689 Note: A few vowel stems seem to have had -ag in the accusative plural,
formed by analogy from the consonantal stems.
690 Words ending in -ig and -vg in the nominative singular, but with dental
mute (t, 0) stems, very rarely drop the mute and take the accusative singular
ending (-P') of vowel stems.
691 The vocative singular is either the same as the nominative, or else the
same as the stem, with final consonants except v, p, and g (605) being dropped
whenever they occur.
692 Compensative (compensatory) lengthening (601) regularly takes place in
the formation of the dative plural when vx is thus dropped, but does not take place
when only one letter, such as r, d, 6, a, or v, is dropped; as n a o i (jiavT-oi), y ep ov at
{yepovT-ai), da'ifioai (d a ifio v -a i).
693 D ental M ute Stems
ava^,avcuao5,6 v«§,vuict6?,t| nxxi9,nai569,6,^ Y£p«v,Yep

(paVttKT-) (WKX-) (jiapiS-) (yepovx-)
king, lord night child old man
SINGULAR
N. ava^ Ycpwv
G. avaKxog WKT05 inaiSog Yepovxo?
D. avttKTi WKXi jia iS i Ytpovxi
A. avaK ta vvKxa jia iS a Ytpovxa
V. ava^ [ava] nai Y ^ ov
292
MORPHOLOGY
DUAL
N. A. V. avaKTE vvKte jraiSe yepovTE
G. D. dvdicToiiv VVKTOUV jia iS o iiv YCPOVTOIIV
PLURAL
N. V. avaiCTE5 vvK te? jia i8 E 5 Y ^ o vT E g
G. dvdKTwv VVKTWV jia iS w v YEpOVTMV
D. d v d K T E o (o )i VV)KTE0 ( 0 )l :ia ( 5 £o (o )i YEp6vTE0(0)l
avaî jia io i YEpOVOl
A. dvaKtag v v K ta g reaiS ag VepovTag
694 Observe the irregular accent o f Jiaidcov (642), genitive plural ofjiaTg. This
word is somewhat irregular, owing to the fact that it was earlier dissyllabic (jidpig)
It has the following variants of accent: nom. sing. Jidig, Jiaig; voc. sing, jidi, JiaT.
695 L a b ia l and V e l a r (Pa l a t a l ) S t e m s
ai^ , a iy o ;, 6 , t| Ktfpv^, VKog, 6 Ai0io\)/, ortog, 6

(a iy ) (KllpCK-) (AiGioji-)
goat herald Ethiopian
SINGULAR
N. ai^ K fjp v ^ Ai61o\)/
G. a iY 0 5 K tjp C K o g AiOiojiog
D. a iY i KTjpVKI AlGioni
A. a iY a K t jp v K a AlGiona
V. K f]p V ^ Ai0(o\|/
DUAL
A. V. aiye K tjpVK E AiGionE
G. D. a iy o iiv Kt]pVKOllV AiGiojioiiv
PLURAL
N. V. aiY E 5 icripvKEg A i0 io n E 5
G. aiywv KUPVKMV A iBiojiM V
D. aiYEOoi [ e o i ] KtlpVKEaOI [ e o i ] A iB io jtE o o i [eoi]
a i^ i K TIpV^l Ai0io\)/i
A. aiy ag K i^ p v K a ; AiGiojiag
293
HOMERIC GREEK
696 L iquid and Nasal Stem s
5 a^^(av, 0 V 0 5 ,6 (ppf|V, (ppevos, T| XEip,o5,T|

(Sainov-) ((ppev-) (XElp-)
divinity diaphragm, heart, mind hand, arm
SINGULAR
N. 8 a^^(ov (ppT|V XEip

G. Saifiovog tppEVOS XEIP05
D. 5ai)iiovi (ppEVi X £(i)pi
A. Saiôva (p p ^ a XEtpa
V. 5ai(iov (PPT|V XEip
DUAL
N. A. V. S aifio vE (pp^VE XEipE
G. D. 5aifi6voiiv (ppEVOllV XElpOllV
PLURAL
N. V. 8 aifiovE 5 <ppEVE5 XEipE;
G. SainovM V (PPEVMV XEipWV
D. SaijiovE ooi [ e o i ] (ppEVEOOl [eol] XElpEOOl [ e o i ]
S a ifio o i (ppEoi XEpoi
A. S a i^ o v a g <ppâg X E tpa;
697 Several words ending in -T]p in the nom. sing, have three grades of ablaut
(593-595), -?7p, -ep, -p, in the stem. The voc. sing, regularly has recessive accent (548).
r ttttfip , TEP05, t p o g , 6 father ^fjT T ip , X Ep o g, t p o g , f| mother
( r t a t E p - , -H P , - p ) ( n a t t i p - , - e p , -p )
SINGULAR
N. jiatfip jiiixiip
G. natepos,T P 05 ^l^xôs, xpo5
D. jiaT^pi,xp(
A. :iax^pa fitfXEpa
V. Jia x E p JlllXEp
DUAL
N. A. V. :iaxepE ^tfXEpE
G. D. jiaxEpoiiv fltlXEpOllV
PLURAL
N. V. jiaxEpE5 fitixÊg
G. naxEpwv, xpwv UtlXEpMV
D. naxpdoi î]xpdoi
A. naxipag HilXEpag
294
MORPHOLOGY
OvyaTiip, tepog, tpog, t|daughter dviip, ^ 05, 8po5 , 6 man

(GrYaTiip-, -ep, -p) (dviip-, -EP, -p)
SINGULAR
N. 0VY«ttip avT|p
G. O vYatôg, tpog dv^pog, dv 5 po 5
D. 0VY«Tepi,Tp( dvEpi, dvSpi
A. O v Y a t^ a , OvYatpa dvEpa,av5pa
V. OvYttTEp dvEp
DUAL
N. A. V. GvYatepE dvEpE, avSpE
G. D. OvYat^poiiv dv^poiiv, dvSpotiv
PLURAL
N. V. OvyaTepe?, OvYatpeg dvEp£5, dv8pE5
G. Ovvatepcov, 0vYaipwv dv^pMv, dvSpwv
D. OvyaTepEooi, xpdoi avEpEooi, avSpdoi
A. OvyaTdpag, OvYatpag dv^pag, dvSpag
698 Observe that a (5 is developed in the forms of avi^p between v and p

whenever they would otherwise come together (612). The initial a is often long,
571, 1168.
699 In the genitive and dative singular of avrjp, ju^rrjp, and dvydTtjp, the
shorter forms have the accent, after the analogy of JiaTrjp, n axpoq, Jiarpl, which
was originally monosyllabic {n arg ), and follows the regular rules for the accentua
tion of monosyllabic nouns (642).
700 The p d in the dative plural, and these forms in general are explained in
597-598.
701 Stems in i] v ( ev), ov, and wp
PaoiXEv;, fjog, 6 P0C5, P005, 6 , T| VIIC 5 , VI165 (VE05), T| iiprag, (oog, o

(Paoi>.iiv-, -EV-, -iip-) (Pod-, Pwp-i Pop-) (vav-, vap- 613) (T|p(Op-)
king ox, cow ship, bark hero, mighty
warrior
SINGULAR
N. Paoi>iEt)9 PoCg viivg ijpwg
G. Paoi>.tiog [-E05] P005 vi]65 [vEog] iipoiog
D. PaoiXi]! [-El] Poi VTji iiprai
A. PaaiXfâ [-Ea] Potv [Pmv] vtia [vEtt] iipota
V. PaoiXEV PoC VllV nprag
295
HOMERICGREEK
DUAL
I.A.V. PaaiXtÊ pOE vfjE tlpUE
G.D. PaoriXtiotiv Poouv VIIOIIV fipuoiiv
PLURAL
N.V. PaoiXfjEg P6 e5 VtiE5 ilpwEg
G. PaoiXr|<av Po&V VtlMV[VEMV] f|p(6(ov
D. P aaiX f|£ooi P oEaol VtjEOOl[VEEOOl] f|p(OEOOl
P a o i^ E v o i Poval vtivoi i]p(ooi
A. P ao i> ,fia 5 P oag (P ov 5) vtiag(vEag) iipuag
702 The shortening of a vowel before a following vowel in such forms as
f ia o d e v g {*fiaoiXr]vg), vrjoq (I'sog) is explained in 572.
703 Observe that the v of the stem of these words became f in many cases and
was then lost (602).
704 Stem s IN I (e i , e i ), AND V ( e v , e f )
noXig, l o ; , f| n ijx t);, eog, 6 a o ri),E o ;, to v£K v;,vog, 6 5dKpv,vog,T6

-El-) (m ixv-,-Ep-) (FaoTv-iEf-) (vekC-) (SaKpv-)
city forearm city, town corpse tear
SINGULAR
N. jioXig Jin/v? aoTV VEKV5 SdKpv
G. J10 X 10 5 ,1105 31TKE05 aoTEog VEKV05 SdKpvo;
D. :i6X ii,-T, JiirixEi aoTEi VEKVi SdKpv'i
-til,-E l
A. jioXiv rtfiXDV aoTV v ek Cv SdKpv
V. :i6Xi Jtnxv aaxv VEKii SdKpv
DUAL
N.A.V. :io>wiE jtnxEE aOTEE VEKVE SdKpVE
G. D. :ioX ioiiv ntixôiiv doTEOllV VEKVOllV 8aKpi)oiiv
PLURAL
N.V. J10^1E5, -t)E5 JITCCEE5 aoiE a VEKVE5 SdKpva
G. rtoXirav d(rtE(ov VEKVroV SaKpvMV
D. :ro>kiEaoi doXEEOl VEKVEOOl SttKpVEOOl
jioXeoi, -lOl jirjxEoi aOTEOl VEKl3a(o )i SdKpvoi
A. Ji6>.ia5, -tiag, îrDCeas aOTEtt v^Kvag -C5 ] SdKpva
-15, (EI??)
705 Forms such as JwXig, nfjxvg, d oxv show different grades of ablaut (593-
595): (, £/, and v, ev (ef).
706 Observe the loss of the v and i in such words as nrixvg, -Eog, doxv, -eog,
and JioXig. They first become f , or ; of course (602, 600).
296
MORPHOLOGY
707 Nouns w ith Stem s in -5 (-E5, - a ;, -05) AND IN T
EJlOg, EO5, TO YEpag, aog, x6 T|(o5,T|6o 5,ii

(pEJlEO-) (YEpao-) (dpooo-) (6(onaT-) (T|nap-,TmaT-)
word, speech prize (of honor) Eos, dawn house, home day
singular
N. EJio; r|W5 nn«p

G. eh;eo5 YEpaog t|6o5 Sraâxog i]âTog
D. EJIEI YEpai rjoi ScoâTi illuaTi
A. e:io5 YEpag f|6a 5raâ n^«p
V. EJ105 YEpa? 5o)â V «P
DUAL
N.A.V. ErtEE YEpaE 5(aâTE t^âTE
G. D. e:ieo iiv YEpdoiiv 8o)jidToiiv Tmdtoiiv
PLURAL
N. V. En:Ea YEpa(a) 5(aâTa t]âxa
G. EJl^WV YEpacov §(0^dT0)V rmdto)v
D. En:£EOOI YEpOEOOI 5(a^dTE00l ^^dTEOOl
EnE(0 )0 l YEpa(o)oi Sraâoi fj^ ao l
A. EJiEa YEpa(a) 5(oâTa t]âTa
708 Observe that stems ending in o lose this a when it comes between two
vowels (603). Thus these words were formerly declined:
SINGULAR
N. ETO5 Tiptig = dpoco5(621) avowg (602)
G. EJtEwog ripooog = apoooog av oooo5
D. EJiEoi YEpaoi T|pooi = apooai avoooi
and thus throughout the whole declension, all numbers. The loss of intervocalic o
(603-604), and of f also from i^cog (602), gave the forms found above, 707.
709 Observe that all nouns ending in -og in the nominative singular are m ascu
line or fem in ine (almost always masculine) if o f the second declension, and that they
are neuter if o f the third declension.
710 Nouns ending in -â in the nominative singular, and all others with geni
tives in -UTog, are neuter.
711 The old ending -6i may be added to the stem of a noun or a pronoun to
indicate place where.
712 The ending -dev may be added to the stem of a noun or a pronoun to
indicate source or separation, or to express various other relations of the genitive, as
ovpavdO ev from heaven, a ed ei’ o f you.
297
HOMERIC GREEK
713 -de, a postpositive (15:Note) enclitic (553; 554:6), with the force of a pre
position {d g , eg, enl), may be added to the accusative to denote place to which, or
limit o f motion, as a y op ^ v d e to the assembly.
714 The ending -i may be added to the stem of a noun to denote place where,
or in which (the locative, 657), as oiK oi at home.
715 The ending -q)i(i'), added to the stem of a noun or pronoun, is used to
express various relations, both singular and plural, of both genitive and dative
(especially when used in the instrumental sense).
716 Irregular Nouns There are various types of irregularity in the formation
and declension of nouns; the gender in the plural may be different from that in the
singular; words may be declined from two separate stems (heteroclites), but have the
same nominative singular; they may have cases formed from another stem than the
nominative singular (metaplastic forms); or they may be used in only one case, or part
of the cases (defectives). Irregular nouns can best be learned from the lexicon, as one
meets them in reading and has occasion to use them. Most of them are very rare.
Adjectives
717 Adjectives have three declensions, like nouns, and follow the same
general rules.
718 With respect to form they may be divided into four classes:
1) Adjectives of the first and second (vowel) declensions (2-1-2 adjectives).
2) Adjectives of the second declension (mostly compounds) (2-2).
3) Adjectives of the first and third declensions (3-1-3).
4) Adjectives of the third (consonant) declension (3).
719 The form of the adjective that appears in the vocabulary is the nominative
singular of all genders (except in the case of a very few of only one gender, in which
case the nominative and genitive singular are given).
720 Adjectives of the first and second declensions have three endings {og, rj,
ov) in the nominative singular, for the three genders, masculine, feminine, and
neuter, respectively.
A d je c t iv e s o f t h e Fir st and Second D e c l e n s io n s
721 KaXog, t|, 6v beautiful, noble

(K a X o -, Kct)â-, KotXo-)
sin g u l a r
M asc. Fem . N eut.
N. KaX.og k AXtI KttXoV

G. KOtÔV, o i o [ 6 o ] KaXti; Ka>>.ov,oio [6 o ]
D. koIXm KOtX.f) KaX.w
A. KftitOV KaX,T|V KftÔV
V. Kaê KOtX^ KCt>.6v
298
MORPHOLOGY
DUAL
. A. V. KaXw KctXd Ka>.(a
G.F. K a X o iiv KaXjiiv KftXoiiv
PLURAL
N.V. KaXoi KotJâi KttXd
G. KftXdwv [ewv, Mv] KftJiWV
D. KaXofoi, 015 Ka)^tioi, tjg Ka>.oioi, 0 1;
A. KaX.d; K oX a
(piXog, i|, ov dear, lovely, beloved

((piô-, (plXot-, (piXo-)
SINGULAR
M asc . F em . N eut .
N. (piXog cpiXt] (pl>.OV
G. (piXov,oio [oo] (p at]5 (piXov,oio [00]
D. (piXb) (p(X|i (piXcp
A. (piXov (piXijv (piXov
V. (piXe (piXi] (piXov
DUAL
. A. V. cpiXo) q>i>.a (piXco
G. D. (p iX oiiv cpiXoiiv
PLURAL
N.V. (piXoi <piX.a
G. (pi>.(l)V (piX,dwv [ e w v , w v ] (pi>.(ov
D. q>i>ôioi, 019 (p iX iia i, tjg (pi>.oioi, 015
A. <pi>.oi)5 (piXotg <piXa
N o te:Superlatives (such as d p io ro g , rj, o i ' ) , participles in og, r], ov, and all
words that have these three endings in the nominative singular are similarly declined.
722 The feminine of adjectives of the first and second declensions regularly
ends in -rj, and is declined as above; a few end in the -a, as 5w g, a , ov, and are
declined as d d k a a a a (663).
723 Adjectives of the second declension have only two endings (og, ov), of
which the first is both masculine and feminine, the second neuter. Most of these
adjectives are compounds.
724 The masculine form of many adjectives is often used for both masculine
and feminine, even those that have separate forms for the feminine.
725 Adjectives of the first and third declensions have a separate form for the
feminine, which is declined like a noun in -a (B dX aaoa, 663) of the first declension
299
HOMERIC GREEK
726 The masculine and neuter of adjectives with stems in -v-, -cf- are declined
like Jirjxvg and d a r v , respectively (704).
727 jt T E p o E i;, e o o a , e v winged

(jite p o F E V T -, n x E p o p E T ja -, Jc te p o p e v T -)
SINGULAR
N. JlXEpOEig ntEpOEOOa rtXEpOEV
G. lIlTEpOEVtOg jitepoEooiis JlXEpOEVXOg
D. JlTEpOEVtl nTEpOEOOt] nXEpOEVXl
A. JtTEpOEVXa ntEpoEooav nXEpOEV
V. JlTEpOEV JlTEpOEOOa nXEpOEV
DUAL
. A. V. JlTEpOEVTE ntEpOEOOft JlXEpoeVXE
G. D. JlTEpOEVTOllV JlXEpOEOOfllV nxEpoevxoiiv
PLURAL
N. V. mEpOEVTEg JltEpOEOOai nXEpOEVta
G. JlTEpO^TMV rtXEpOEOodwV [E(i)V, rtXEpO^XWV
<ov]
D. :iTEpo^TEa(o)i jiXEpoâatioi :iXEpO£VXEO((l)l
:itep 6 eo(o) i nxEpoEooti5 JlXEpOE(a)Ol
A. JiTEpoEVtaq jixEpoEooag JtXEpOEVXa
Ei)pi>5, E ia, V broad, wide

(EVpV-, EVpEp-; EVpEfia-; EVpV- , EVPEF-)
SINGULAR
N. Evpvg EVpEia Evpr
G. EVpEOg Ei)pEl115 EVpEOg
D. EVpEl EVpEltJ EVpEl
A. Evpvv [m ] EVpEiaV EVpV)
V. Evpv(5) EVpEia EVpt)
DUAL
[. A. R EVpEE EVpEia EVpEE
G. D. EVpEOllV EVpEltllV EVpEOIlV
PLURAL
N. V. EVpEE? EVpEiai EVpEtt
G. EVpEWV EVpEldwV [ewv, mv] El)pE(OV
D. EV)pE(E)0(0)l EVpEiÔl EV)pE(E)0(0)l
A. EvpEag EvpEiag EVpEa
300
MORPHOLOGY
728 Observe that m e p o fe x ia gives m e p d e o a a (600), while E vpefog gives

evpeog, etc. 602.
A d je c t iv e s of the T h ir d D e c l e n sio n
729 Adjectives of the third declension have only two endings, one for the
masculine and feminine, the other for the neuter. Most of them have stems in -ov
(nominatives in -mv, -ov), and in -eg (nominative in -r]g, -eg).
730 A very few defectives have stems in -con (nominatives in -coy/, -comg), as in
eXlKcoy/, cojwg (masc.), ekiK am g, idog (fem.).
731 dnEiVMV, ov better, braver deiKT|5, eg unseemly

(dnEivov-) (dpElKEO-)
SINGULAR
M asc. and Fe m . Neut. M a sc. and Fem . N eut
N. dficivwv anEivov dEiKTig dElKE?
G. djiiEivovog dnEivovog dEiKôg dEiKEo;
D. dîtivovi dneivovi ttElKEl dElKEl
A. dfiEivova dnEivov dEiKEa dEiKEg
V. dÊlVOV anEivov dElKE? dEiKEg
dual
N . A . V. dÊ^VOVE dÊlVOVE dElKEE deiKEE

G.D. dnEivovoiiv dflElVOVOllV dElKEOllV dElKEOlt
plural
N . V. d|itEivovE5 [ovg] dÊivova deiKEEg deiKEa

G. djieivovwv dflElVOVWV deiKEwv dtlKEWV
D. dnEiv6v£o(o)i d|HEiv6vEo(a)i dElK£(£)o(o)l dElKE(E)(
dnEivoai dflElVOOl
A. dnEivovag [ovg] dnEivova dEiKEag dEiKEa
732 S t e m s i n vt a n d i n v
Jia o a , :idv all, every
(reavT-, navTia- , navT-)
SINGULAR
N. Jid5 jia o a jiav

G. JtavTO? 7idat]9 jiavTog
D. jiavTi jidofl jiavTi
A. n d vta jidoav jidv
V. nd5 Jiao a jiav
DUAL
(None)
301
HOMERIC GREEK
PLURAL
N. V. JldvTE? jidoai jidvta

G. JtdVTMV jiaadmv [ecov, mv] ndvTMV
D. JldvTE0 (0 )l jidoTjoi n:dvTEo(o)i
n;aoi n;dafl5 jiaoi
A. jidvtag jtdaag jidvta
ÊXa9, fiE)iaiva, fie>.avblack, dark
(HE>âv-, nEâvia-, jiEXav-)
SINGULAR
N. ^£>t.ag fitXaiva H£>âv

G. ^lEka^V1]g jiE).avo5
D. fitXavi fiEXaivii Ê)âvl
A. HE>i,ava lnEâivav fiE>âv
V. fieXav fiEXaiva HEXav
DUAL
N. A. V. jiEXave jiEâiva HE>âvE

G. D. jiEXdvoiiv jiEXaiviiiv fiEXdvoiiv
PLURAL
N. V. jiEXavEg HEâivai fiEâva

G. flEXdVMV fiEXaivawv [ecov, wv] HE>i.dv(i)v
D. HEXdvEo(o)i HEXaivtiai HE>.dvEo(o)i
jiEXaai |iie)i,a(vti5 HEXaoi
A. fiEâvag HEXaivag HE>.ava
I r r e g u l a r A d je c t iv e s
733 jiE y a g , jiE ydX i], fiE y a great, large

(HEya-, jiEyaXo-, HEya^â-, fiEya)^©-)
SINGULAR
N. HEyaq HEyd>.ii jiEya

G. HEydôv,oio HEydXti5 HEyd>.ov, oio
D. fiEydXw fiEyd)^Tl fiEydXcp
A. jiEyav HEydXijv jiEya
V. |iiEya(5) HEydXii jiEya
DUAL
N. A. V. HEyd>,(o ÊydXa fiEyd>^(o

G. D. HEydX,oiiv HEydXfliv |iiEyd>.oiiv
302
MORPHOLOGY
PLURAL
N. V. jiEydXai fiEydXa
G. fiEya^dw v [ewv, wv] HEyd^^wv
D. j»EYdXoiai,oi5 HEydXiioi, 115 H Eydôioi,oi5
A. HEydXag fiEydâ
Jio>t^T|, JioXt) much, many

(:to >.v -, JioX E f-; Jio X p a -; JioX E f-)
SINGULAR
N. :to>.Xr| [noDXv]
G. rtoXEo; :ioXXi ]5 J10 XE05
D. :ioX£i jioXXji jio Xe i
A. :ioXv)v [:iovXv)v] no>.XT|v noXv) [jio vX v]
V. t o Xv (5) JlO>.XTj
DUAL
(None)
PLURAL
N. V. ™oXee 5 JioXXai jio Xeu

G. :io>.E(i)v :ioXXd(ov [e (ov, <ov] jio Xemv
D. nol,£(E ) 0 (o )i JioXXfioi, jig n0>.E(E)0((l)l
A. jioJtEag [J10XC5] JloXEtt
734 In addition to the irregular form jioXvg, nokkri, noXv, there is another
form {noXAog. rj, 6i^) of this adjective that is regular and declined like K a lo g , rj,
6v{72\ ).
Declension of Participles
735 All middle and passive participles, except those of the first and second aor-
ist passive, are declined like K alog , ?/, 6v (721).
736 All active participles (except the perfect, 744) and both first and second
aorist passive participles have stems in -vx. The masculine and neuter are of the
third declension, the feminine of the first.
737 The vocative of participles has the same form as the nominative.
738 Participles with stems in ovt usually have the nominative singular mascu
line in -o)v, as yepmv, 693.
739 But the present and second aorist of -fii verbs {didovg, dovg), and all stems
ending in a v j, evt. vvr. add g, lose vt (613), and lengthen the preceding vowel
(giving ovg, ag, eig, vg, 601). The dative plural of these stems is similarly formed.
303
HOMERIC GREEK
740 Participles with stems in o i> T , ending in -a y , o v o a , o v in the nominative

singular:
P r e s e n t Pa r t ic i p l e : >,v)(ov, o v o a , ov loosin g , freeing

(XVOVT-, >.VOVTia-, XVOVT-)
M a sc . Fem . Neu t.
SINGULAR
N. V. Xt)(OV Xvovoa Xvov
G. >,l)0 VT05 )^voi)oti5 ).<)0VT05
D. XVOVTV JiVOVOll XVOVTI
A. Xvovta >.<)oraav ^VOV
DUAL
A. V. XVOVTE Xvovoct ^rOVTE
G. D. >.v6vxoiiv ^DOUOtllV XrovToiiv
PLURAL
N. V. >.V)OVTE5 Xvovoai Xvovta
G. XVOVTWV >.vovod(i)v [ewv, mv] XVOVTWV
D. Xv 6 vteo (o) i , X,«oi)(n]oi, Xv 6 vteo (o) i
>.l)Ot)Ol XvovoTjg >.V)OVOl
A. ^.vovtag Xvovoag ^vovta
741 Participles with stems in o v z , a vT , evT , v v t , ending in a in the nominative

singular masculine:
P r e s e n t P a r tic ip le : SiSovg, ovoa, ov giving

(8180VT-, S i S o T ia - , 8 i 5 ovt-)
M a sc . Fem . N eu t.
SINGULAR
N. V. SiSovg 8i 8ovoa 8180V
G. Si56vto5 8i8ov)(ni5 8i 86vtoi;
D. 8180VTI 8 i 8 ov)oti 8180VTI
A. 8 i 86v ta 8 i 8oCoav 8 i 86v
DUAL
A. V. 8i 86vte 8i 8oi)oa 8 i 8 6 vt £
G. D. 8180VT011V 8180V 0111V 8180VT011V
PLURAL
N. V. 8 i 8 6 vte 5 8i 8ovoai 8 i8 6 v ta
G. 8i 86vxo)v 8i 8orod<ov [emv, wv] 8180VTWV
D. 8i 86vTEo(o)i 8i8o v )o iiai 8 i 86vT£o(o)i
818 0 V 0 1 8 18 0 V 0 11; 8 18 0 V 0 1
A 6 i8 6 v T a 5 8i 8ovoag 8 i 86vxa
304
MORPHOLOGY
A o r i s t Pa r t i c i p l e : X v o a ? , a a a , a v having loosed
(XCoavT-, X C o a v T ia -, X C o av t-)
M asc. Fem . N eut.
sin g u l a r
N. V. Xvoag X.vadaa Xvoav

G. XtoavT05 >.vodoti; XvoavTog
D. XvoavTi >.vadaii Xvoavxi
A. Xvoavta >tVoaoav Xvoav
DUAL
M. A . V. >tVOaVTE )tCodaa XtoavTE

G. D. XvodvToiiv >.Codo|iiv >.CodvToiiv
PLURAL
N. V. XvoavT£5 ^vodoai ^voavta

G. XCodvTwv >.vadadci)v [ewv , wv] XvodVTMV
D. XvodvTeo(o)i ^Codotioi î)odvTEo(o)i
Xvoaai >.C(Td(Tii5 Xvadai
A. Xvoavtag XCodoftg X roav ta
742 A o r i s t P a ssiv e P a r t ic i p l e : XvOeig, e io a , ev (having been) loosed

(XV0 EVT-, ^V0 EVTia-, XV0EVT-)
M asc. Fem . N eut.
SINGULAR
N. V. >.D0£15 >.v0£ioa ^V0EV

G. /.V0 EVTO5 >,l)0ElOtl5 X,v0^TO5
D. XuO^Ti Xv0Ei(r»i Xd Oevti
A. Xi)0 EVTa >,v0E to av X v0^
DUAL
M. A. V. Xv Oevte Xv 0 E iod >.V0^TE

G. D. Xd Oev t o iiv ^V0e ( o111V XvO^TOllV
PLURAL
N. V. X,l)0EVTE5 Xv 0 E io a i >.v0^VTa
G. Xl'0EVT(OV >.v0 Eiod<ov [E(0V, wv] XV0^T(OV
D. >kl)0EVTEO(o)l >.V0e ((TUOI X v0^ T E a(o)i
XV0EIOI Xv0Ei(n]5 Xv0Etai
A. X,i'0EVTa5 X v0Efod5 X v0^Ta
305
HOMERIC GREEK
743 S e co n d A o r is t A c tiv e P a rtic ip le : 8^5, 8Coa, 8vv having entered

(8i)vx-, SvvTia-, 8vvt-)
M asc. Fem . N eut.
SINGULAR
N. V. 8vg 8®oa 8vv
G. 8VVT05 8voii5 Svvxog
D. 8i)VTi Svoi] 8vvxi
A. 8vvTa SCoav 8vv
DUAL
N. A. V. SrvTE Svaa 8 i )vte
G. D. SvvToiiv 8votiiv 8v)Vtoiiv
PLURAL
N. V. 8v)Vte5 8C oai S r v ta
G. 8v)vt(i)V 8aodo)V [emv, wv] Svvtwv
D. 8 vvTe(T(a)i 8 roiioi Si)VTEa(o)i
8v a i Stotig Svoi
A. 8vvTa5 S to a g Sv v ta
P e r f e c t A c t i v e Pa r t i c i p l e s
744 Perfect active participles have stems in { k )ot . Those that have k are called
first perfects, those without k second perfects.
Xe)iVK(05, v ia , 65 having loosed

(Xe Xvkot -, XE>.i)Kvoia-, XeXukox -)
M asc. Fem . N eut.
s in g u l a r
N. V. >i,EXvici)ta XEXvKog
G. XeXvkoto? XEXvKDltig Xe>.vk6t o 5
D. >êXvk6t i XeXvkvvij >.e>.vk6t i
A. XEXvKota X,E^vKvtav XeX.vk6;
DUAL
N. A. V. )êXv k 6 te Ê^VKVia ^.eXukote

G. D. XeXvkotoiiv XeXvku Iiiiv >,eXvk6to iiv
PLURAL
N. V. >.E>kVK6TE5 >,E^VKDtai XEX,VKOTa

G. X,£XrK6T(ov >.EXvKVld(OV [E(0V, Xe^vkotmv
wv]
D. XeX,vk6teo (o )i XeXvkv I^ oi XEXvK0TEa(0)l
XE^VKOai XE>.VKVifl5 Xe^vkooi
A. XE^tVKotag >,E>.«Kvia5 XEXvKOta
306
MORPHOLOGY
ci5(o;, (E )i8 v ta , e iS o ; knowing

(fEiSpoT-, F(£)i8 p v oia-, FEiSpoT-)
M a sc . F em . Neut .
SINGULAR
N. V. £i5(og (E)i8u ia E1865

G. EiSoTog (E )i8 r iti9 EiSoTog
D. ElSOTl (e )i 8 v iii EI865
A. E iS o t a (E)i8v tav EI865
DUAL
A. V. e i 56 te (E)iSvia E180TE
G. D. EISOTOIIV (E)i8i)it)iv Ei80T0llV
PLURAL
N. V. EiSoTE5 (E)i8v ta i E i8 6 ta
G. ElSoTWY (E)i8vido)v [ewv, wv] e 186t(ov
D. E i 86 TE0 (0 )l (E )i6 v itia i e 186te o (o )i
EISOOI (E )iS v iti5 E i8 6 o i
A. E iS o ta g (E)iSv(a5 E iS o T a
No te : 1. XekvKox;, v ia , og does not occur in Homer, and there are very few
first perfects in Homeric Greek. The forms of the first perfect participle, as given
above, are common in later Greek.
No te : 2. Perfect participles are often declined with co instead of o throughout;
and at times end in -cov, - o v o a , -ov and are inflected with the same endings as the
present participle.
745 Participles of contract verbs, 936-944 (usually left uncontracted in
Homeric Greek), are declined in their contracted forms as follows:
T ln M V , o v o a , MV (x ljid r a v , d o v o a , d o v ) honoring
(t ln a o v x -, T ljia o v T ia -, tln a o v T -)
M asc . F em . Neut .
SINGULAR
N. V. TlflMV x l^ u oa Tljirav
G. Tt|llMVT05 TljtKOOt]; TluMVXog
D. TlHWVTl T1 ^(60T] TlfJWVTl
A. TljlWYXa Tlnwoav TlflMV
DUAL
N. A. V. Tl|LlMVTe Tl|ii(6o a TlHWVTE

G. D. Tl^(6VTOllV TlflMOlllV TlmOVTOllV
307
HOMERIC GREEK
PLURAL
N. V. TljlWVTEg x lfiw o a i xin w v x a

G. TlHWVTWV xljKoodtMV [ewv, wv] XlHWVXMV
D. Tln<6vxeo(o)i x I^ (6 o ^ o l Xljl( 0VXEO(o)l
Tl|il<O0l x l^ rao l
A. T lfifiv xag xljK ooag xlHMVxa
jio iw v , E v o a , Evv (jioiErov, e o v o a , eov)

(JIOIEOVT-, JlOlEOVTia-, 7101E0 VT-)
SINGULAR
N. V. nOlMV reoiEvoa rtOlEVV

G. rt0lEtvX05 JioiEvofug rtoiEvvxog
D. JIOIEVVTI rtOlEVOtl rtOlEVVXl
A. jioiEV V ta jro iE v o a v JIOIEVV
DUAL
. A.V. :iOlEVVT£ jio iE v o a JIOIEVVXE

G. D. JIOIEVVTOIIV TOIEV)(T|]IV JIOIEVVXOIIV
PLURAL
N. V. JIOIEVVTE5 jio iE t a a i n:oiEVVxa

G. JIOIEVVXWV jioiEVodwY [ ewv, mv ] JIOIEVVXWV
D. rt0 lEt)VXE0 ( 0 )l rtOlEVOflOl rt0 lEV)VXE0 (0 )l
JIOIEVOI rtoiEt)(ni5 JIOIEVOI
A. jioiEvvxag jioiE voag jio iE v v x a
746 The participles o f -oco contract verbs (as xoôco anger) end in -av,
- o v o a , -ov v (as x o ^ o v o a , xoX ovv) in the nominative singular, and are
quite regular in their declension, the genitive being %oAoSvrog, xoôvorjg,
XoXovvToi;; the dative b e in g x o A o v m , xo^.ovoj), xoXovvxi, etc.
Comparison of Adjectives
747 Most adjectives form their comparatives by adding -repog, r], ov, and
their superlatives by adding -rarog , rj,o v to the stem of the mascuhne positive.
748 If the penult of the stem is long by nature or position (522), the stem for
the comparative and superlative remains unchanged. If it is short, it is regularly
lengthened, o becoming m.
308
MORPHOLOGY
749 Exam ples
Positive Com paratiue Superlative

jiio x o g (jiio T o -) jiia x o T cp o g jiioTOTatos
faithful, trustworthy
âXttKo; (â>l.aKo-) âXaK(aTEpog âXaK(aTaT09
soft, gentle
750 The declension of comparatives and superlatives is usually the regular

vowel declension of adjectives, as icaôg, rj, 6v (721).
751 Some adjectives, mainly those in -v<; and -poq, form the comparative and
superlative by changing these endings to -imv, -lov for the comparative, and to
-larog, t], ov for the superlative.
752 Exam ples

f|5v )5 t| 5 ( w v , iiS io v ilS io T o g, 1], ov
sweet sweeter sweetest
a io x p o g a ia x u o v ,lo v a i o x i o T o g , t), o v
shameful more shameful most shameful
The comparative of these adjectives is declined like a^ eiv a v , o v

753 (731)
and the superlative like KaXog, //, 6v (721).
754 The most important cases of irregular comparison are:
Positive Com parative Superlative

1 ) dyaOog dpEUOV, o v a p i o T o g , 11, o v
good, brave, noble d n E iv w v , o v
PeXtcpog, 1], ov
X(oi(ov, o v (XraiTEpog, 1] , o v )
2 )K p a T v g ( K p a t a i o s , K p E io o ra v , ov icpdTioTog (KdpTioTog)
t|,6v) powerful
Kpatepog, r|, ov (p e p ttp o g (pEpXatO?((pEpI0T05)
(KapTtpoi;) powerful
3) KaK05, t|,6 v KttKIMV, ov (KaK(i)TEp05) KdKioTog, I], ov
bad, cowardly iloawv, ov ilKioTog, n, ov
XEipwv, ov (xEipotepog)
(XEpEioV,ov)
4) Kft^ôg, t|,6 v , KaXXiwv, ov KO>.>.l(Tt05 ,1], ov
noble, beautiful
5) ntyag flEl^MV,ov (HEÔIV,ov?) HEyioxog, I] , ov
large, mighty
309
HOMERIC GREEK
6) ^ lK p 65 ÊUOV, OV
sm all, tiny
7) tX ax v i; Exdoow v, OV eM xiorog, 11, ov
sm all, tiny
8) oXiyog oXeI^WV, OV (oXl^MV, ov) oMyioxog, 11, ov
sm all, few
9) jio>.v 5 :i>.£uov, ov (jiXewv, ov) n;>ÊiaT05, 11, ov
m u ch, m any
10 ) (piXo; <pi).TEpo;, T), ov ov) (piXtatog, 11, ov
dear, lovely
755 Some adjectives do not occur in the positive. Their comparatives and
superlatives are formed from prepositions, adverbs, verbs, nouns, and pronouns.
756 The comparative and superlative may express merely a high degree of the
quality, without any idea of comparison being involved, and at times may indicate
simply characteristic or possession.
Numerals
757 The Greek numerals:
CARDINALS ORDINALS ADVERBS

1 £ 15 , fiia ( l a ) , ev n p M t05,t],0V
2 8v)o(6v(i)) 8ev)tepo5, 11, ov 8 i?
3 TpEig, Tpia ov
Tp((Ta)T 05, 11, xpi;
4 TEoaapE? (jiioDpEg), TExaptog(TEXpatog),ii, ov xexpdKig
TEOoapa
5 nÊ nEn^Tog, 11, ov jiEvxdKig
6 E^ EKTOq,11,OV E^ttKig
7 EJixd E^Soô; (EpSofiaTog),ri, ov EnxdKig
8 OKtU oySoog(0Y86aT 05), ii, ov OKxdKig
9 Êa Evatog (E iv a to 5), ii, ov h'dKig
10 Seko SEKatog, 11, ov 8EKdKi;
11 evSeku ^ 6EKaT05, i i , 0V EvSEKdKig
12 8(v)(o6EKa, 6(D)(i)8EKaT05, 11, 0V 8(r)M 8EKdKi5
Svo KOI 8EKa
13 tpEioK aiSEK a TpEioKai8EKato5,11, ov xpEioK aiSEK dK i;
(tpEig Kttl ScKa)
14 TEOoapEOKaiSEKa TExaptog(x^patog) Kal XEOoapEOKaiSEKdKi;
SEKttxo;, 11, ov
15 nEVTEKttiSEKtt rtEHJixogKaV8£Kaxo;, ii, ov :xEVXEKai8EKdKi5
16 EKKalSEKO EKXogKci 8EKttxo5,11,ov EKKaiSsK dK i;
17 EJiTOKaiSEKa E p 8 o ^ o ; Ktti 8EKaxo5, E3ixaKai8EKdKi5
310
MORPHOLOGY
18 OKTOKaiSEKa oySoog K ai S c K a to ;, ti, ov oKTcoKaiSEKdKi;

19 EWEaKaifiEKa E v a to ; K a i S ekoto ; , t], ov ^ E a K o iS E K d K i;
20ElKOOl (EElKOOl) E iK o ord ; ( eeikooto ; ) , r|, ov E iK ood K i;
21 £15 Koi eTkOOI (ElKOOl ;rpMT05 Kai EiKooxog EiKoodKig o jia ^
K ai tig , eik o o iv Eig)
30TpiT|icovTa TpinKoox65,T|,6v Tpl11K0VTdKl5
40TEOoapdKovta TEOoapaKooxo;, tj, ov TEoaapaKovxdKig
50:iEVTT|K0VTa rtEVTtlKOOTO;, f|, ov JlEVTIlKOVtdKig
60E^fiKovta EÎIKOOTO;, T|, ov E^l]K0VTdKl5
70Ep6o^TiKovTa e PS o^ t] koot69, r|, ov £P50^11K0VTdKl;
80oyScoKovra 6 y 8(okooto5, T|, ov OYSwKovrdKig
90h'Evf|Kovxa(h^Kovra) h ’EVllKOOXOg, T|, ov h'EVllKOVtdKig
100 EKatov EKatOOTOg, T|, ov EKatovtdKig
200 SiT]K6oioi,ai,a 5it]K o o io o x6;, T|, 6v Sit]KooidKig
300TpiiiK6oioi,ai,a TpilfKOOlOOTOg, i], ov TpiTfKOOldKi;
400TEtpaKooioi, ai, a TETpaKooiooTog, r|, ov TETpaKOOldKi;
500:iEVTiiK6oioi,ai,a jiEVtaK ooiooxo;, r|, ov jiEvtaKooidKig
600EâKOOioi,ai, a EâKooiooxog, q , ov E ^ aK ooid K i;
700£JiTaK6oioi,ai,a EntaKooiooTog, t|, ov E:TTaK0(TldKl9
800 OKTaK6oioi,ai,a OKTaKooiooxog, T|, ov O K taK ooidK i;
900âK0oioi,ai,a h'(v)aK ooioox 65, ov FvaKooidKig
1000 X1 >îoox65 , tj, ov XlXidKig
2000 8ioxi> kioi,ai,a SioxlX iooT o;, ii, ov Siox1> .id K i;
3000 T p i o x i^ i o i ,a i,o tpioxl^îooxog, r|, ov TpioxlîdK ig
10.000 f i v p i o i ,a i , a îjploox6;,r| ,6v ^ C p ld K l;
(8EK dxlôi,ai,a)
20.000 S l 0 ^ v p l 0 l , a i , a Slo^ i)p looT 6;, T|, ov 5 la ^ v p ld K l;
100,000 5E lcaK l0^ vp l0l, a i , a SEKaKiofiCpiooTo;, rj, ov 5EKaKloî)pldKl;
758 D e c l e n s io n o f t h e F ir st Fo u r C a r d in a l s
Eiq, fita, Ev one 5v(o (Svo) t p E i 5, t p ( a TEOoapEg, TEOoapa

(h--, n ia -, ^ - ) (Svio-, 0-) tpE-, Tpl-) (TEO O ap-)
N. Eig, fi(a,EV 8v(o indecl. TPE15 tp ia TEOOapE? TEOoapa

G. EV05, |niti5, ^ 6 5 TplWV TplWV TEOodpOJV TEaodptav
D. Evi, |lllfl,£v( T p io i T p io i TEoaapai TEOOapOl
A. E v a, ji i a v , ev TP E 15 T p ia tE o aap ag TEOoapa
N o t e : r p e ig = x p ie q , 584:2.
759 In addition to the above forms there occur at times for fxfa, la {irjq, if],
ia v ) \for for r i o a a p e g , m a v p e g .
e v i , im ;
311
HOMERIC GREEK
Personal Pronouns
760 The personal pronouns are declined as follows:
SINGULAR
N.V. iydt(v) I (TU [tv v til you — he, she, it

G. E ^ E IO , ^ E V (EÊO , OEIO, OEO (OEO, OEV, E io , EO, (EO, El), EV
EHEV,EHE0EV) OEV, OE0EV) E0 EV, E0 EV)
D. Efiol, flOl o o i, x o i [teiv ] Eot, o i (01)
A. E^^, Ê a i , OE e i , E ( e , h iv )
dual
A. V. VMl, V(0 ocprai, a(p(o aqxAE

G. D. vmiv ocpwiv (o<pwv) 0 (p(OIV
plural
N.V. TmEig (annES) (v^Êl;)

^ H E ig
G. TmeilOV (TmEUV) VSjlEiMV (^JIEWV) o<pe (<ov,
oq>Ecav
(Ocp^MV, ocpSv)
D. T|ntv (a n n i(v ), v jiiv (v n m (v ). 0(pi0i, ocpioi
q n lv , riiîv) v fllv ) (oq)i(v))
A. (T|fia5, (vfiHE) 0(pâg, 0(pE(ag),
^^Êa5, a^Ê) ocpdg
761 The nominative singular of the personal pronouns is used only for the
sake of emphasis and contrast, being omitted under other conditions.
762 The oblique cases of these pronouns are enclitic (553), but if the pronoun
is emphatic these cases keep their accent, and the longer forms of the first person
are then used. This happens as a rule after prepositions. The forms without accent
in the above table are enclitic.
763 The pronoun of the third person is sometimes used as a reflexive, that is,
it refers to the subject of the leading verb of the sentence.
764 The possessive pronouns are formed from the stems of the personal pro
nouns and are declined like adjectives of the vowel declension, i.e., like KaXoq, rj,
6v{72\).
Possessive Pronouns
Sing. e|ii6; , f|, 6v my, mine.

a o g , of|, oov (te65, tet|, te 6v) your(s).
e , ( ,
65 Er|, eov 05 q , 6 v ) his, her(s), its (own), [my, your own].
D u a l. vwhEpo5,i],ovour(s).
a<p6)iTEpo;, 11, ov your(s).
P lu ra l. fm ^ E p o ;, t), ov our(s). d|ii ;, t|, vour(s).
6 6
^ ^ ^ E p o g , t j, ov your(s). ^ ^ 6 ;, t|, 6 v your(s).
0 (p ^ E p 0 ;, 11, OV their(s). oq>6;, o<pf|, 0(p6v their(s).
312
MORPHOLOGY
765 The most common pronoun, 6, rj, to, used regularly as the definite article
in later Greek, is usually employed as the demonstrative, but sometimes as a per
sonal or as a relative pronoun in Homer. It is declined as follows:
6, TO this, that; he, she, it; who, w h ich, what
SINGULAR
M asc . F em . N eut .
N. 6 n TO
G. T0 C ,T 010 tn ? T0 C ,T 010
D. TW Tfi TW
A. t6 v Ttjv TO
DUAL
.A . T(0 (TW) T(0
. D. TOIIV (toiiv) TOilV
PLURAL
N. o i (to i ) a i (ta i) T<X
G. TWV tdwv [twv] TWV
D. TOlOl,TOl5 TtlOl,Tfl5 TOlOl, TOI5
A. TOV>5 td5 Td
66 The intensive pronoun is declined as follows;
avTog, f|, 6 self, same
SINGULAR
M asc . F em . Neut .
N. avTog ai)TT| ai)TO
G. a v T o v ,o to avTiig ai)T ov, o to
D. avTw avTfl avTw
A. avTov aV)TT|V avTO
DUAL
.A . avTW (ai)Tw) ai)T(o
. D. avToiiv (ai)Totiv) ai)Toiiv
PLURAL
N. a vT o i a i)T ai a v id
G. avTwv ai)Tdwv[ewv, wv] auTwv
D. a v )T o ia i,o i5 a iJT fia i, tjg avToioi, oi<
A. ai)TO\)5 a v td i; a vT d
767 The most important interrogative pronoun, rig, xl who? which? what? has
the acute accent always on the first syllable, and never changes the acute to the
grave, even when followed by other words.
313
HOMERIC GREEK
768 The indefinite Tig, ri som e {one), any (one), something, anything, a(n) is
spelled and declined the same as the interrogative, but differs from it in accent, the
indefinite pronoun being always an enclitic, 553ff.
769 Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns
Tig, t i some (one), any (one), something T15, t i, who? which? what?
In d e fin ite In te rro g a tiv e
SINGULAR
Masc. and Fem. Neut. Masc. and Fem. Neut.

N. xiq ti t (5 ti
G. TEO (TEtj) TEO (T e C )

D. TEM (TM, TlVl) TE(p (TW, T lV l)
A. Tivd r\ Tiva Tl
DUAL
N.A. TIVE TlVE TIVE

G. D. Tivoiiv TlVOllV t Iv o i i v T lV O llV
PLURAL
N. TIVE5 Tlvd (dooa) TIVE5 liv a

G. TEMV TEMV TEO)V TEMV
D. TEOlOl T E o iO l TEOlOl T EO lO l
A. Tivdg Tlvd (aooa) Tivag T iv a
770 The relative pronouns are og, tj, o , and 0 , i], t o who, which, what (765),
together with the indefinite relative pronoun d o n g , i]TiQ, o t i [og rig, i] rig, 6 t i )
whoever, whichever, whatever, 776.
771 The most important demonstrative pronouns are o m o g , am rj, t o v t o
this, {e)iceTyog, t], o that, 6 , ?/, t o (used also as a relative and as a personal pronoun,
765) this, that, with its compounds, as o d e, tjde, r o d e ; dye, ijye, Toye (0 ye, ^ ye,
TO ys), etc.
I l l These pronouns are declined in the main like adjectives of the vowel
declension (icaXog, ij, 6v, 721) with the exception that the neuter nominative and
accusative singular ends in - 0 instead of in -oi'.
773 Relative Pronouns
65 (6 ), 1], 0 who, which, what
M asc. Fem . N eut.
sin g u l a r
N. 65 ( 6) ^ 6
G. o v [o o v , 6o] ^5 [ET15] ov [6 o d , 6 o ]
7
D. M fi (p
A. ov iiv 6
314
MORPHOLOGY
DUAL
N. A. M (m ) (0
G. D. ou v (ouv) OllV
PLURAL
N. oi aY a
G. MV (bv (bv
D. o ia i,o i; o io ijo ig
A. OV5 ag a
774 D em on strativ e P ron o u n s
(e)keTvo 5 , n , o that
M asc . Fem . Neut.
SINGULAR
N. (e)KEivo5 ( e ) k e (v ii ( e)keTvo
G. (e)Keivov, oio (E)KElVtl5 (E)KEivOr, OIO
D. ( e ) k e iv (o (E)KElVfl (e )ke( v(o
A. ( e ) k eivo v (E)KElVtlV (e) keivo
DUAL
N. A. ( e) keiv(i) ( e ) k e (vm (e ) k e (vw
G. D. ( e)keivoiiv ( e ) ice(v o iiv (e ) k e iv o iiv
PLURAL
N. (e)keivoi (E)KElVai (E)KElVa
G. (e)keivwv (E)KElvd(OV [E(i)V, WV] ( e ) k e (v (ov
D. (e )k eiv o io i,o i5 ( e ) k e iv ii o i , 115 (E)KElVOiai,Ol 5
A. (e)keivov5 (£)KElVa5 (E)KElVa
o8 e , i i 8 e , x6 8 e this
SINGULAR
N. 68e ii8e t 68e
G. toC8e ,to io S e TtioSE toC8e,toToSe
D. t S 8e t|i8e t® 8e
A. t 6v8e T T jv 8 E t 68e
DUAL
N. A. t (o6 e ( t (o8 e ) t(o8e
G. D. toTi v S e (t o i i v 8 e ) toTiv S e
PLURAL
N. oiSe (to i8e) aiSE(tai8E) t (x8 e
G. t(ov8e Td(i)v8E[Trov8E] tmv 8 e
D. to io (i)6 e TflCT(l)8E to I o ( i )8 e
A. toi)o8e td o 8 E t <x8 e
315
HOMERIC GREEK
0 VT0 5 , a v T i], T o i t o this
SINGULAR
N. 0 UX05 ai)Tii TOVTO
G. TOVTOV,OlO tavTtig TOVTOV,OlO
D. TOVTft) ta v T fl TO\)T(p
A. TOVTOV tavT tiv TOVTO
DUAL
.A . xovtw (TOVTW) xovtw

. D. TOVTOllV (tOVTOllV) TOVTOllV
PLURAL
N. OVTOl a v ta i T ttC ta
G. TOVTWV tavtdrav [ewv, wv] TOVTWV
D. TOVTOlOl, 015 xavTfloi, 115 TOVTOiai, 015
A. TOV)TOV5 tavtag ta v ta
N o t e : The dative plural of o d e, ijde, r o d e at times has T oiod eo(o)i instead of

roio(i)d£.
775 Compounds of o, ?/, t o (as o d e , i j d e , t o S e ; o y e , i j y e , z o y e ) are declined

the same as the simple form (o, to)
with the additional part ( - y e , - d e , etc.)
attached. As these are compounds formed of the simple pronouns and the enclitics,
they are accented the same as the simple forms without the enclitics (553, 558).
776 The indefinite relative pronoun { o o i i g , ijriq, 6 ri) w h o e v e r , w h ic h e v e r ,
is a compound of the simple relative (og, i], 0 ) and the indefinite r;g, t i ,
w h atev er,
each part of which is declined separately (or sometimes only the latter part).
777 0 XI, the neuter of the indefinite relative pronoun, is thus printed in most
texts, that it may not be confused with the conjunction, d x i t h a t , b e c a u s e , w h y .
778 The Reciprocal Pronoun
dXXifj>i.otiv, t)iv , o iiv (of) one another
DUAL
G. d>-XT|)kOiiv dX,>.r|>kfliv d^>.r|)t.oiiv
D. dX.>^TjXoiiv dXXf|Xtiiv dXXXXr|Xoiiv
A. d^Xr|X(a dXXf|X.d dX.Xif|X(a
PLURAL
G. dX>.T|X(ov dXXiiXdwv [^(ov, wv] dXXr|â>v
D. dXX,T|Xoi5(i) dXX^XT|;(i) dX>.T|ôig(i)
A. dXXr|>i,ov5 dX.Xf|Xa; dXXt]Xa
316
MORPHOLOGY
779 This pronoun is used only in the genitive, dative, and accusative.
Adverbs
780 Most Greek adverbs are of twofold origin:

1) Isolated case-forms of nouns, pronouns, and adjectives, which became
crystallized and used in an adverbial connection.
2) Adverbs formed by means of various suffixes (630), the origin of which
is unknown.
781 The most common occurrence of the use of various cases of the noun,
pronoun, and adjective adverbially is the employment o f the neuter accusative of
the adjective, singular or plural, with or without the pronoun to. ret as an adverb.
The neuter of nouns and pronouns is sometimes, but less commonly, used in the
same way.
782 A great number of adverbs end either in -co or in -cog.
783 Those ending in -mg are adverbs of manner, and are formed from adjec
tives and pronouns. They have the accent of the genitive plural neuter of the word
from which they are formed.
784 For the comparative of these abverbs, the neuter accusative singular of the
comparative of the adjective is used, and for the superlative the neuter accusative
plural of the superlative of the adjective.
785 Adverbs of place that end in -a> (and a few others) form the comparative
by adding -T£po). and the superlative by adding -Tdtco to the stem (630).
786 The prepositions were originally adverbs, and most of them are still so
used in Homer.
787 E x a m p le s o f F o r m a t io n
ADJECTIVE STEM GENITIVEPLURAL ADVERB
KaXo;, i ] , 6v Kctô- icaXuv KaXug

KaKog, f|,6v KaKO- icaKuv KaK&g
aXXog, i],o d>.ô- aXXcov akkag
788 The most important suffixes (630) used in the formation of adverbs
(780:2) are:
1) -ai. - 0 1 , -ov denoting place where.
2) -6a, -de( y). denoting place where.
3) -dei’. denoting place whence.
4) -de (originally an enclitic preposition = English to), denoting whither.
5) -o£ , denoting w h ith er.
6) -Tf, denoting time.
7) -Tog. denoting w h ere.
8) -r a (origin unknown), as in a m i-K a .
317
HOMERIC GREEK
9) -Kaq (origin unknown), as in i-icdg.

10) -Kig (with generalizing, indefinite meaning; akin to Tig, ii), as JioXXd-
Kig many a time, often.
1 1 ) Some other endings are -a, -drjv, -dov, -zi, -o n .
Verbs
789 Verbs, as well as all other inflected (626-630) forms, consist of two prin
cipal elements:
1 ) the stem;
2) the ending, or suffix.
790 Often more than one suflix is fused with a verb stem, to indicate its vari
ous relations of m ood, tense, voice, person, number, etc., as Xv-o-fisv, Xv-e-te (from
Xv-co loose), where the primary stem of the verb is Xv-, to which the suffixes are
attached.
791 The forms of a Greek verb fall into two main classes:
1) Finite (indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative).
2) Infinite (infinitive and participle).
792 The characteristics of the finite forms are the personal endings, augment,
reduplication, voice, mood, and tense signs, etc.
793 The participle is a verbal adjective, and is used as other adjectives.
794 The infinitive is a verbal noun, formerly used in several cases, but
restricted in Greek to old case-forms of the dative and locative.
796 Thematic and Athematic forms With respect to form Greek verbs fall
into two main classes:
1 ) -0 ) verbs, i.e., those ending in - a in the first-person singular, present
active indicative, sometimes called them atic verbs (796).
2 ) -fii verbs, i.e., those ending in -fii in the first-person singular, present
active indicative, sometimes called athem atic verbs (797).
796 The thematic verbs are so named because in a majority of their forms the
personal ending (819-821) is preceded by o /e (o before n or v, o r in the optative
mood, otherwise e), which is called the them atic vowel. Thus, Xvo/e (Xvco) is called
the theme, to which the personal endings (819-821) are attached.
797 Athematic verbs do not have this connecting vowel, but the personal endings
are attached directly to the stem of the verb.
798 Many verbs that are regularly thematic may have athematic forms, as
dExdai, dsicro {dExofiai)-, Xvfirjv, Xvzo (Xva); aXxo {dXXofiai), etc.
799 In the subjunctive these thematic vowels, o /e , are regularly long, being
co/t] respectively.
318
MORPHOLOGY
800 In some cases the thematic vowel is short in the subjunctive, particularly
in the dual and plural of the present and second aorist of -fxi verbs, the first aorist
and second perfect of all verbs, and the second aorist of all verbs having athematic
second aorists in the indicative.
801 Strictly speaking no Greek verb is thematic or athematic throughout; but
certain of their forms are inflected thematically and others athematically.
802 Those inflected thematically are: all futures; all presents and imperfects of
-CO verbs (thematic presents); all second aorists having the thematic vowel (ending
in -ov in the first-person singular, active indicative, 865); all subjunctives.
803 The athematic forms are: the presents and imperfects in all voices of
(athematic) verbs; all aorists passive (except the subjunctive forms); all middle and
passive perfects and pluperfects; all second aorists whose tense stem does not end
in the thematic vowel (796); a few verbs (as larrjî) in the second perfect and plu
perfect, active; all first aorists, active and middle. The perfects and pluperfects
active are primarily athematic in their inflection.
804 In the thematic inflection the tense stem varies, o/f , as indicated above.
805 In the athematic inflection the final vowel of the tense stem is usually long
(lengthened grade) in the singular, and commonly (but not always) is short (stand
ing in ablaut relation (593-595), weakened or disappearing grade) in the dual and
plural. This is particularly true of athematic presents and imperfects, second aorists,
perfects, and pluperfects active.
806 Voices and Moods The Greek verb has three voices: active, middle, and
passive. Each voice has four moods: the indicative, subjunctive, optative, impera
tive, as weU as the infinitive and participle.
807 Tense systems The Greek verb has the following nine systems of tenses
(counting first and second tenses):
1 ) present, consisting of the present and imperfect.
2 ) future, consisting of the future, active and middle.
3) first aorist, consisting o f the first aorist, active and middle.
4) second aorist, consisting of the second aorist, active and middle.
5) first perfect, consisting of the first perfect and pluperfect active.
6) second perfect, consisting of the second perfect and pluperfect active.
7) perfect middle, consisting of the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect
middle (passive).
8) first passive, consisting o f the first aorist passive.
9) second passive, consisting of the second aorist passive.
808 Each of these systems has a stem, called the tense stem, to which are added
certain endings to denote person and number.
809 Tense Suffixes The suffixes (630) by which the various tense stems are
formed from the verb stem are as follows:
319
HOMERIC GREEK
1) present: a ) th ematic o/e (o before or v, or intheoptative, otherwise

e ), asX v - o - f i E V , ^ - - ; b ) athematicnone, as( p d - ^ e v , (p d -X E .
v e te
2 ) f u t u r e : a ) 0 ( 0 ) o / e (sameruleasthepresent foro / e ; o afterlongvowels

or diphthongs; either a or a o after short vowels), as k v - o o - f i E v ,
K a X io -a o - p L E v .
b) eo o /e inliquidandnasal stems (514-516), anda regularlydropped

(603), asf i a l - E - a , ( p a v - E - a ; exceptions X - , K v p - a c o , d p - o c o .
ke oco
3)f i r s t a o r i s t 0( 0) a { a afterlongvowelsordiphthongs; eithera or00 after

shortvowels).
N o t e : Som e verbs use an ablaut formof the stemplus first aorist endings
without a , suchas - - ( ic a ic o ) .
e ktj u
b) / inafewcases.
oo e
c) o is usually lost inliquidandnasal verbs, andthe precedingvowel

lengthenedbycompensation(601), asE - f i E i v - a , E - ( p r ] v - a , forE f i E v o a ,
E ip a v o a .
Exceptionstoc): e-reA-aa, E - K v p p - o u , c o p - o a .
4) s e c o n d a o r i s t : a ) thematic / , as - M - - ^ , E - X i n - E - t E .
o e e ji o ev
b ) ath ematicnone, asE - j i r j - v , E -O T t j- v , E - d v - r s , E - y v c o - v .

5)f i r s t p e r f e c t ic a , pluperfect , as( i E - f i r j - K a , i - ^ E - f i i ] - K E - a (-?/).
ke
6 )s e c o n d p e r f e c t a , pluperfect , asi i E - J i o i d - a , E - J i E - j i o i d - E - a { - r j) , ornone,

e
asE -O T a -jX E v , - - . e otu te
7 ) p e r fe c t m id d le n one, asX E - X v - ^ a i ; futureperfect o ( a ) / . o e
8 )f i r s t p a s s i v e d r jiE , asE - X v - d r j - f i E i ’ , -X - 9 - .
e v e v
9)s e c o n d p a s s i v e t]/E , asE - d d f i - r j - ^ E v , E - d a / u - E - v .

810 Principal Parts Theprincipal partsofaverbarethefirst-personsingular
ofeachtensesystemfoundinit.
811 Noverbhas all the tense systems entire. Most verbs have nomore than
six; thepresent, future, first aorist, first (or second) perfect active, perfect middle
(passive), andthefirst or secondaorist passive. If theverbdoes not have afuture
active, the future middle (passive) is given. If the verb has a second aorist, it is
added.
812 Of deponent verbs (897) theprincipal parts are: thepresent, future, per
fect, andaorist. This includes bothfirst andsecondaorists, middle andpassive, if
theyoccur.
813 Mood Suffix Observe that the optative has also the mood suffix i h r j ,
which contracts with the final vowel of the tense stem, as Xvoifii for Xv-o-l-fxi,
ioTalrjv for i-OTa-irj-v.
814 Tenses Of the tenses, seven are found in the indicative mood: the
present, imperfect, aorist, future, perfect, pluperfect, andfutureperfect.
815 Theother moodshavethepresent, aorist, andperfect tenses; theinfinitive
andparticiplehaveinadditionthefuturetense.
320
MORPHOLOGY
816 The tenses o f the indicative are distinguished as:

1) principal (primary) tenses: the present, future, perfect, and future perfect.
2) past (secondary) tenses: imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect (historical tenses).
817 The passive has a distinct form only in the aorist; in the other tenses the
middle form has both the middle and passive meaning.
N o t e . Two second future forms ( d a ^ o s a i, fxiyiôeoOai) are found.
818 Number and Person There are three numbers (singular, dual, plural) of
the Greek verb, as in nouns, and three persons (first, second, third).
819 Endings Certain suffixes, called personal endings, are attached to the
tense stems of the various finite (791) moods, and other endings are attached to the
infinitives and participles, to make the complete verbal forms.
820 Some of these personal endings have undergone considerable changes.
821 In their earlier form they were as follows:
A c t iv e M id d l e
Indicative Indicative Indicative Indicative

prim ary tenses, secondary tenses, prim ary tenses, secondary tenses,
and Subjunctive and Optative and Subjunctive and Optative
SINGULAR
1 -m,-M -V, -y =-a -f ta i

2 -o i, 5 - ,-(o)0a - 5, -o 0a -a a i -oo
3 -Tl = -Ol -(T) -ta i -TO
DUAL
1 ----- -HeGgy [-HE0OY]

2 -TOY -TOY -O 0O V -O0OY
3 -TOY -TtlV -O0GV -a0t)Y
PLURAL
1 -flEY -HEY -jiE0a (-nEO0a) -Ê0a (-fiEO0a)

2 -TE -TE -O0E -(T0E
3 -VTI =-VOl -Y(t ), -OttY -Yiai (- a T a i = -YTO(-aTO=
-YTtti, 597-598) -yTO 597-598)
Imperative
A c t iv e M id d l e
SINGULAR
2 -01,-5 -OO
3 -T(0 - 0 0 (1
)
321
H O M E R IC G REEK
DUAL
2 -TOV -O0 OV
3 -T(OV -O0 WV
PLURAL
2 -TE -O0 E
3 -VTMV -O0 WV
822 Observe that the subjunctive has the same endings throughout as the pri
mary tenses of the indicative, while the optative (except at times in the first singular,
when it ends in -fii) has the same endings as the secondary tenses of the indicative.
823 The first and second aorists passive have the same endings as the second
ary tenses of the active voice.
824 P r im a r y E n d in g s of the A c t iv e V o ic e
(In d ic a t iv e and Su b ju n c t iv e )
1 sing.: -fii is found in the present indicative of all -fii verbs, and in a few sub
junctives of -CO verbs, -co is found in the present indicative of all -cd verbs, in all
futures, and in the subjunctive. In the perfect indicative there is no personal ending,
-a taking the place of the thematic vowel.
2 sing.: -oi is found only in e o o l you are; elsewhere -q has taken its place, -da
(-o6 a) is used at times in the perfect, imperfect and pluperfect of the indicative,
and occasionally in the subjunctive and optative.
3 sing.: - t i is found only in ia x l he is. It becomes -oi in the other -fii verbs, and -oi
is occasionally found in the subjunctive of -a verbs, -co verbs have another ending,
-El, the origin of which is uncertain. The perfect, -e , has no personal ending.
3 plur.: -vTi regularly becomes -vai, and v is then lost, with lengthening of the
preceding vowel (613). Many -fii verbs seem to have ended in -a v n , which first
became -a v o i, and then -a o i (613). The perfect of consonant stems ended in -vri
i-yai), which became -yri {-yai) and then -a o i (597-598). Generally -a a i in both
present and perfect has been replaced by -a o i.
825 Secondary e n d in g s o f t h e A c t iv e
(In d ic a t iv e and O p t a t iv e)
1 sing.: -I' after vowels remained unchanged; after consonants it became -}»,
and then -a (597-598). Pluperfect -Ea is usually contracted to -rj. The optative has
-V when the mood suffix is -irj- (813); otherwise it has -/ui.
3 sing.: -r is always dropped (605); e'Xve from eXvet (cf. Latin, amat); e2voe
has no personal ending; it imports its - e from the thematic (second) aorist and the
perfect.
2 dual: - ttjv sometimes occurs instead of -rov.
3 dual; - tov sometimes occurs instead of -xriv.
3 plur.: - V is for an earlier - y z , z being lost (605), the vowel before it being regu
larly short, -o a y from the first aorist ending, is used in the imperfect of the -fxi
322
MORPHOLOGY
verbs and often in their second aorist, at times in the aorist passive, in the pluper
fect active, and in the optative when it has the mood suffix -irj-.
826 M id d le E n d in g s, P r im a r y a n d S e c o n d a r y
(In d ic a tiv e , S u b ju n c tiv e , a n d O p ta tiv e )
2 sin g .: -o a i drops its a between vowels (603), except in the perfect, and in the
present indicative of -î verbs.
2 sing, (secondary): -o o regularly drops its a between vowels (603), except in
the pluperfect, and in the imperfect of -fii verbs. In a few cases a is dropped in the
pluperfect.
Dual: the first dual -êdov is rare; -oGov occurs once instead of -adrjv.
3 plur. : -vxai, - vto regularly become - a r a i, - a r o (-VTai, -yro) in the perfect
and pluperfect of verbs with consonant stems, stems ending in occasionally in
vowel stems, and always in the optative. Elsewhere occasionally-vTai, -v to become
-a r a i, -ax o (597-598).
827 E n d in g s o f t h e Im p e ra tiv e
2 sing, active:
-E of the second sing, is the thematic vowel, and forms like Xve. d e id e have
no personal ending.
-6i is common, with both an active and passive meaning. In the first aorist
passive -9i becomes -r; after -Ot]- of the passive stem (619).
-Q occurs in a few cases. The origins of the endings of the aorist, -o ov (active)
and -o a i (middle) are obscure.
2 sing, middle:
-o o loses its a between vowels (603), except in the perfect of all verbs and the
pres, of -/// verbs.
E n d in g s of th e I n f i n i t i v e s , Pa r t i c i p l e s , and V e r b a l A d je c t iv e s
8 2 8 Infinitives were originally verbal nouns in case forms that subsequently

became fixed:
1) old dative forms end in -a i {-v ai, -fievai, -Evai, -o a i active; and -o6 ai,
-dui middle and passive).
2) old locative forms end in -ev, -êv {-eiv is a contraction of -e-ev,
5 8 4 -5 8 5 ).
8 2 9 Participles have the following endings added to the tense stem:
1) - I T - for all active tenses, except the perfect (usually), and the first and
second aorists passive.

2) -ox- (-for-), occasionally -ovx- in the perfect active.
3) -/<f I’o- (feminine -fieva-) in the middle; and in the passive, except the
aorist passive.
323
HOMERIC GREEK
No te Verbal adjectives end in - T o g , and are usually equivalent to passive

:
(sometimes active) participles in meaning, or else denote possibility, as yvcorog
[yiyvcooKco] known, iw irjrog [Tioiem] m ade, t v k to q [z£vx(o] made. They are formed
by adding the ending ro g to the verb stem, usually as it appears in the first or
second aorist passive.
830 Augment Greek verbs prefix an augment (increase) at the beginning of
the secondary (816) tenses of the indicative, to denote past time.
831 This augment is of two kinds:
1) syllabic augment, which prefixes i- to verbs beginning with a conso
nant, as Xvco I loose, imperfect eAvov I was loosing.
2) tem poral augment, which lengthens the first syllable of words begin
ning with a vowel or a diphthong, as dKovm I hear, fjKovov I was
hearing.
832 When augmented a , e regularly become tj, while /, o, v become I, co, v
respectively; a i and a become //, while o i becomes a .
833 O f course r], t], T, v, co, and co do not undergo any change when augmented.
834 Verbs beginning with p regularly double it after the augment. Those
beginning with A, /i, v, or o sometimes double the initial consonant after the
augment.
835 Verbs beginning with a vowel formerly preceded by a lost consonant
(usually f , or a), may take the syllabic instead of the temporal augment, as
M v d ai'oi’, imperfect of dvddyco (ofaudauco) please.
836 When initial o has thus been lost, the augment always contracts with the
first vowel of the stem, according to the rules (584-585); when initial f has been lost,
contraction may or may not take place. Thus {oexco), imperfect etxov {eoexov,
EEXov); EJiofiai (oEJiofiai), imperfect EiJWfitjv (ioEJiofitjv, eejw^yjv)-, Eidov
(ifid o v ), second aorist of opdco {fopaco)-, dyvvî {fayvvfii, aorist Eaâ (Epaâ).
837 The augment, both syllabic and temporal, is often omitted.
838 Compound Verbs Some prepositions (originally adverbs) are prefixed to
verbs, the whole forming a compound. If the preposition ends with a vowel and the
verb begins with one, the vowel of the preposition is usually elided (575), as
diloTTjfii (did-i'orrifii), dcpaipEco {diw-aipEco, 582).
839 The augment of compound verbs comes between the preposition and the
verb. If two vowels are thus brought together, the first is usually elided, as djioXvco
loose, free; imperfect diiEXvov {djio-Ekvov)-, aorist d n iX v aa {d jw -iX voa).
840 Imperfect The imperfect (a secondary tense, 816) is formed by adding
the secondary endings (821) to the augm ented stem of the present, as Xvco I loose,
imperfect eXvov I was loosing; TiOtj/ui I place, imperfect hlOrjy.
841 First Aorist The first aorist of vowel and mute verbs (849) (a secondary
tense, 816) is regularly formed by adding -o(o)a to the augmented verb stem, followed
324
MORPHOLOGY
by the personal endings o f the seco n d ary tenses. I f the verb stem ends in a long
vowel or a con so n an t only on e o is ever added; i f it ends in a sh o rt vowel, eith er one
or two sigm as m ay be used.
8 4 2 “Mixed” Aorists A few aorists (som etim es called “m ixed aorists”) are
form ed by adding a o /e, follow ed by the p erson al endings o f the seco n d ary tenses,
to the augm ented verb stem .
8 4 3 h ] n i throw, send; d i d c o f i i give, grant; and T i d r jf i i put, place have -ica in the
aorist instead o f -oa.
8 4 4 Future The future (a prim ary tense) o f vowel and m ute verbs (8 4 9 ) is regu
larly form ed by adding the tense suffix -o (o )o /e to the verb stem , follow ed by the
personal endings o f th e p rim ary tenses.
8 4 5 If the verb stem ends in a long vowel, th e stem is n ot affected by the ad d i

tion o f o o /e and -o a in the fo rm ation o f th e future and aorist.
8 4 6 If the verb stem ends in a short vowel, all tenses except th e presen t and
im p erfect regularly length en this, a and e b eco m in g rj; o b eco m in g a>; as Jioieco,
jioiôco, E.~ioi>]oa: x o ^ o a . yoXaom, kxoXmoa. E xcep tion ; Earn gives Eaam, s'laoa.
8 4 7 Som e verbs do n ot len gthen th e sh o rt vowel accord in g to th e rule in 846.
8 4 8 These, and a few oth ers, usually have o b efore the personal end in g o f the
p erfect m iddle and th e aorist passive.
849 Classes of Verbs Verbs are called vowel verbs, liquid verbs, nasal verbs,
and mute verbs, depending on w h eth er th e stem ends in a vowel, a liquid, a nasal,
or a m ute (5 0 9 - 5 1 6 ).
850 Mute Verbs I f the verb stem ends in a m ute, the follow ing euphonic
changes take place:
1) a labial m ute {ji. /3, q>) unites w ith the sigm a follow ing and form s v', as
nefijuo, Tiefiy/o) (jisjujioco), enefuj/a {eJiEfiJioa) send, escort: afieiftm, afiEiiffO), t]UEiy/a
{a fieiP o a , tj/UEi/iaa) (ex)change;
2) a velar (palatal) m ute {k, y, x) unites w ith th e sigm a follow ing and form s
as a p ^ y a , dptj^co (apriyaco), ijprjâ {tjptjyoa) help, assist; z ev x a, tev^co { tevxoco),
erev ^ a (iTEvxoa) m ake, fashion, cause.
3) a dental (lingual) m ute (r, d. 6) b efore the o is assim ilated (6 1 0 :4 ), as JiEidco,
jieIoo), EJiEioa persuade; a.Eid(o, deloco, ijEioa sing.
851 Liquid and Nasal Verbs If a verb stem ends in a liquid (A, p) or a nasal (/i,
y), the future is regularly form ed by adding -eooI e , with the loss o f a betw een vowels
(603), to the verb stem, to w hich are attached the prim ary personal endings, as ftdkXco.
fiaX sa (from fiaXeaco) throw, shoot.
8 5 2 In a few cases the first e is om itted , and o is retained in verbs o f this kind,
as dpvvî, opoco arouse, stir up.
8 5 3 A few verbs in addition to th o se w ith liquid and nasal stem s have lost o in
the future, as ku Xeco, KaXsco call, summon. In general these verbs have a liquid or
325
HOMERIC GREEK
nasal before the final vowel o f the stem, and imitate the forms o f the futures of
liquid and nasal verbs.
854 Those formations in which o is dropped after a or e are sometimes called
“Attic futures.”
855 Some verbs (especially those expressing physical actions, including sight,
hearing, smell, touch, and movement) have active forms in the present, but middle
forms in the future, as aKovm, a K o v o o ^ a i hear.
856 Verbs with liquid and nasal stems regularly form their aorists by drop
ping the o and lengthening the stem vowel by compensation (601), a becoming t],
e becoming £i, i becoming T, and v becoming v, as <pa(vco {(pav-), (pavta (<paueaco),
E(pr]va (E<puvoa) show; /uevco, /ueveco {fieveao)), e/ueiva (sfiEvoa) remain, await.
857 In some cases the o is retained in formations of this kind, as opvvfii,
m poa stir up, arouse; keXXco, eKeXoa land; Kvpco, Kvpom meet.
858 The present of most liquid and nasal verbs regularly lengthens the last
syllable of the stem by compensation (601) as the original form of the stem of these
verbs ended in consonantal i (600).
859 Presents in -AAcu are from an earlier form in -A/«. Thus ayyekXm, [idXXco,
oteXXco, teXXo), etc., were originally ayy E hjo, jiakim , oteXico, teXico, etc. In these
cases the last syllable of the stem is lengthened by doubling the final X.
860 Verbs with presents in -aivco, -aipm, -eivco, -Eipco, -Tvco, -Tpco, vuca, vpco,
originally had the endings -a v ia , -apico, -Evia, -spico, -ivico, -ipico, -vvuo, -vpm
( c o n s o n a n ta l600) respectively.
861 The quantity of the last vowel of the stem of many verbs often varies, as
Xi'ico, Xvaco, iX v oa, XeXvKa, XEXvfxai, EXvdrjv.
862 Ablaut (vowel gradation, 593-595) is seen in the various tense systems of
many verbs, particularly in what are known as “second” (863) tenses. The second
aorist and second passive systems commonly have the weak (594-595) grades i, v,
a . The other systems usually have the corresponding strong grades ei {oi), ev (ov ),
r] (ft)); o i, o v , (o in the second perfect. When e is preceded or followed by a liquid or
a nasal its weak grade is a .
863 Second Tenses Many verbs have what are called second tenses, as second
aorists (active, middle, and passive), and second perfects and pluperfects (active).
These second tenses are irregular in formation, and are thus named to distinguish
them from the more common, regularly formed tenses, which are called first tenses.
864 The meaning of these second tenses ordinarily corresponds to that of the
first tenses, except in the comparatively few cases when a verb has both forms.
Then the first and second tenses may differ slightly in meaning, usually by the first
being transitive (sometimes causative), the second intransitive. Compare the
Americanism shine, shined, shined, used transitively, as in the expression “he shined
my shoes,” with the more common forms of the verb, shine, shone, shone, used
326
MORPHOLOGY
intransitively, as “the sun shone.” “Shined” may be compared in form and meaning
to a first aorist, while “shone” would correspond in form and meaning to a second
aorist. Thus in Greek, eP i] v (2nd aor.) signifies I went, w alked (intransitive), while
efirjoa (1st aor.) signifies I caused to go, w alked (transitive), as in English I w alked
my horse {eftt}oa innov) i.e., I caused my horse to walk.
865 Second aorists are formed in various ways:
1) A common method is for them to have the secondary (816) endings,
following the thematic vowel o /e, thus being conjugated like the imper
fect, as e'xco, e^co, 'iayov to have, where eay ov the second aorist is con
jugated like e'h'oi’, the imperfect of 2.vco to loose.
2) Many have the secondary endings attached directly to the tense stem,
and thus are conjugated like the aorist passive, but without the 0 of the
passive stem. Thus k'firjv {fia'ivco), edvv (dvw), ey y au (yiyuao/cco), etc.
These are athematic (797) of course.
3) Others end in -a and are conjugated with the same endings as the first
(regular) aorists, but without the o, as eiJia, SKtja. (These may be
treated as first aorists without the o.)
4) Many are reduplicated (867), as ijy a y o v [aym], KExapojuTjv [x a lp a].
N o t e : The stem of the second aorist usually differs from the present, regularly
standing in ablaut (593-595) relation to it, zsfia'ivo), elirjv; Xeijuo, e lm o v .
866 The stem of the singular of athematic (797, 865:2) second aorists regularly
stands in ablaut (593-595) relation to the stem found in the dual and plural.
867 Reduplication The perfect and pluperfect (with a few presents, second
aorists and futures) in all moods have reduplication (doubling).
868 Verbs beginning with a single consonant, except p. prefix this consonant,
followed by the letter e. as dvco, dedvK a go in. Often the stem stands in ablaut (593-
595) relation to the stem of the present, as fialvco {[iav-. (ia-), PefirjKa come, go.
869 Verbs beginning with a double consonant (518), with two consonants
(except a mute followed by a liquid or nasal (509, 516), those beginning with p. and
some beginning with u, instead of being reduplicated, simply add e. the reduplica
tion in these cases having the same form as the syllabic augment (830-831).
870 A rough mute when reduplicated is changed to its cognate smooth (510-
511), as (pvo). Jte<pvKu: Oy/joKco. redvrjKa. This is deaspiration (dissimilation) (619).
871 In verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong the reduplication has the
form of the tem poral (831) augment, as o iy o fia i, aycoica.
872 Verbs beginning with a vowel that was formerly preceded by a lost conso
nant may take the reduplication in the form of the syllabic augment (830-831).
873 Some verbs beginning with a , £, or o, followed by a consonant, redupli
cate by repeating this vowel and the consonant and by lengthening the vowel, a
327
HOMERIC GREEK
and £ becoming r/, and o becoming co, as sdco, idr;dwg; apapioKco, d prjpa; oXXv/xi,
oXcoXa. This is sometimes called “Attic reduplication.”
874 A few verbs reduplicate the present by prefixing the first consonant of the
stem followed by as I'ortj/xi {oioTtjfii, 603-604), Tldrj/xi, dldoi/î, (aiorjfii,
603-604), Jii^JiXrjfii, y ly v o fia i, yiyvcooKco, fiifiviôKco.
875 When the reduplicated perfect begins with a consonant, the pluperfect
prefixes the syllabic augment (e) to the reduplication, as fiijir]Ka (perfect),
efiEfi^Kea (pluperfect).
876 Otherwise the pluperfect usually retains the temporal (831, 871) augment
of the perfect unchanged.
877 Perfect The first (regular) perfect adds - K a , the pluperfect -ke, to the
reduplicated theme to form the singular. The dual and plural regularly have the
endings of the second perfect, except at times in the third plural, which often has
the endings of the first perfect.
878 The stem is not affected by the addition of -Ka, - ke , except that a final
short vowel is usually lengthened (846).
879 This form of the perfect (first or regular perfect) is found only in verbs
with vowel stems and in only about twenty verbs in the whole of the Homeric
poems.
880 Second Perfect The stem of the second (irregular) perfect is formed by
adding -a to the reduplicated theme, and the pluperfect by adding -e.
881 The second perfects are the earlier and are much more common in the
Homeric poems than are the first or x'-perfects. They are found regularly in verbs
with consonantal and sometimes in those with vowel stems.
882 The singular of the first and second perfect and pluperfect active regularly
stands in ablaut (593-595) relation to the dual and plural, the dual and plural hav
ing the weak (disappearing) grade (594-595), while the singular has the strong
grade.
883 Both perfect and pluperfect are rare in Homer, the latter occurring in
only about twenty verbs.
884 The reduplication is occasionally omitted.
885 Verbs compounded with a preposition (838) regularly have the augment
and the reduplication between the preposition and the verb, as afi<piÊfir]Ka,
jipo/iEfiovXa {an<pi[ialvco, npofioyXo/xai).
886 When futures and second aorists are reduplicated it is usually after the
manner o f the reduplication of perfects; presents are reduplicated in various ways,
but chiefly with i (874).
887 Middle Voice The endings of the middle are different from those of the
active. See the table, 821.
328
MORPHOLOGY
888 Passive The aorist passive has active endings; the other forms of the pas
sive have middle endings.
889 Only the aorist of the passive differs in form from the middle. (See 817,
note, for two exceptions.) All the other tenses have the same forms in both voices,
and thus their context must determine which voice is intended.
890 The aorist middle, especially the athematic (797) aorist, is often used
instead of the aorist passive. On the other hand the aorist passive is often used with
a middle meaning.
891 The perfect and pluperfect, middle and passive, are athematic (797), i.e.,
the personal endings are attached directly to the reduplicated verb stem.
892 The future perfect passive stem is formed by adding -ao/e to the perfect
middle (passive) stem. A vowel that precedes this -ao/e is lengthened, even though
it be short in the perfect middle.
893 The first aorist passive stem is formed by adding d £ lr] to the verb stem.
894 Sometimes a sigma also is added to the verb stem before the
895 Before the theta of the passive stem, n and j i become (p: k and y become x :
T. (5, and 6 regularly become o (610:1-2).
896 Many verbs have a second aorist passive, which does not have the 9, but
otherwise has the same endings as the first aorist passive.
897 Deponent Verbs There are many verbs that have no active forms, but the
middle, or the middle and passive, are used with an active meaning. These are
called deponent verbs.
898 Defective Verbs Many verbs do not have all the principal parts, that is,
they are defective. When any parts are omitted from the vocabularies of this book,
it indicates that these forms do not occur either in Homer or in later classical Greek.
899 Periphrastic Forms There are some forms of the verb in Greek that are
expressed at times by a compound o f the verb to be {eifÔ with a participle of the
verb. These are called periphrastic forms. The most important are;
1) The perfect and pluperfect, represented at times by the perfect partici
ple with the present and imperfect respectively of eijul.
2) The future perfect, both active and passive, represented by the future of
f///; with the perfect active and middle (passive) participle.
900 Iterative Forms Many verbs have what are called iterative forms in the
im perfect and aorist, active and middle. These have no augment and add aic fol
lowed by the personal endings to the verb stem. Some have a connecting vowel
(usually f , sometimes a), others do not. Thus from Jiodeco comes nodeeoK ov, from
(pBivvda comes (pBivvdeoicov, etc. These can be translated with often or kept:
jtodeeoK ov he often desired or he kept desiring.
901 A few verbs have special forms in the present and second aorist made by add
ing 9 to the tense stem, as t'o x s d o v from e'xco (2nd aor. e o x o v ) , <p9ivv6co from tpBii’o).
329
HOMERIC GREEK
Accent of Verbs
902 Verbs, both simple and compound (838), usually have the recessive accent
(548), except in the following cases:
1) A few second aorists imperative, 2nd singular, have the acute on the
ultima, as eine, eXQe, evpe, Xaê. When compounded these verbs have
the recessive accent.
2) The following forms accent the penult: the first aorist active infinitive,
the second aorist active infinitive (usually contracted with the ultima),
the second aorist middle infinitive (except Jip la o d a i, dvaoQ ai), the
perfect middle (passive) infinitives and participles, and all infinitives in
-vai or -/!£('. except those in -fievai.
3) The following participles have the acute on the ultima for the mascu
line and neuter, and the circumflex on the penult of the feminine: the
second aorist active, all those of the third declension (except the first
aorist active) ending in -g in the nominative singular masculine, and
the present participles of eifii, <prifii, and k Ico (icov, iav , kicov).
4) For the variations in the enclitic forms of eifil, (prj/ul, see the paradigms
964, 967, and 554-556.
5) The accent of athematic optatives never goes further to the left than the
diphthong containing the i of the mood sign.
6) In unaugmented compound verbs the accent cannot go further to the
left than the last syllable of the preposition with which the verb is
compounded.
7) Unaugmented monosyllabic second aorists have the circumflex when
containing a long vowel, as fitj (= e'fir}).
8) In augmented and reduplicated compound forms the accent cannot go
further back than the augment or reduplication.
9) Middle imperatives in -eo have the acute on the penult when com
pounded with monosyllabic prepositions.
10) The exceptions are only apparent in the accent o f contracted forms,
936-944, including the aorist passive subjunctive, k v d m = XvOa, and
optative, kvde-i-fiEv - XvOeifiev, the future of liquid and nasal verbs,
and the present and second aorist active and middle subjunctive of
most -fii verbs. See 951-952.
903 Final -a i and -oi of the optative, and the final -oi of the locative oiicoi at
hom e, are always considered long when determining the accent; otherwise final
-a i, -oi are considered short for purposes of accent (547).
330
MORPHOLOGY
904 Conjugationof (>.v-)I loose, free

Note: The v of Xvco is long only when followed by o ; otherwise it is short.
Active
Indicative
PRESENT imperfect
S. 1 I loose, am loosing, do loose eXvov I was loosing, I loosed, did
loose
2 XvEi; you loose, are loosing, do loose eXrcg you were loosing, you loosed,
did loose
3 he looses, is loosing, does loose he was loosing, he loosed, did
loose
Du. 2 ^vetov you two loose, etc. E>.i)eTov you two were loosing, etc.
3 XvETOv they two loose, etc. eXvettiv they two were loosing, etc.
PI. 1 >.vo|iiev we loose, etc. E>.i)OHEV we were loosing, etc.
2 XvETE you loose, etc. e Xv e t e you were loosing, etc.
3 Xvovoi they loose, etc. E>.vov they were loosing, etc.
FUTURE AORIST
S. 1 >.vo(o I shall (will) loose EXCoa I loosed, did loose
2 XÔEi? you will (shall) loose EXCoa? you loosed, did loose
3 XvoEi he will (shall) loose eXCoe he loosed, did loose
Du. 2 >.voETov you two will (shall) E^tvoatov you two loosed, did loose
loose
3 XvoExov they two will (shall) EXCoditiv they two loosed, did loose
loose
PI. 1 XvooÊv we shall (will) loose E>.voanEv we loosed, did loose
2 XvoETE you will (shall) loose EXvoatE you loosed, did loose
3 ).vooi'oi they will (shall) loose EXCoav they loosed, did loose
PERFECT PLUPERFECT
(The perfect of Xvco is not found in Homer, but these are the ordinary forms in
Attic Greek. For the Homeric perfect system see 922-924, 966.)
S. >.£>.i)Ka I have loosed e Xe Xv k i ] (-Ett) I had loosed
XEXvKag you have loosed EÊXvKt); (-Eag) you had loosed
Ê^VKE he has loosed E>.E>.v)KEi (- ee ) he had loosed
Du. >.E>.v>KaTOV you two have E>.E>.i)KETOV you two had loosed
loosed
>.E>.i)KaTov they two have E>.E>kVKETiiv they two had loosed
loosed
PI. ^.E^vicanev we have loosed e>êX,i )kehev
we had loosed
XEX.VKaTE you have loosed e^êXvkete
you had loosed
>.EXvKaoi they have loosed EXEXvKEoav they had loosed
331
HOMERIC GREEK
905 Su b ju n c tiv e
The different tenses of the subjunctive, optative, imperative, and infinitive do

not of themselves represent distinctions of time. The present of these tenses denotes
continuance of action, as Xve'iv (pres, infin.) to be loosing (at any time). The aorist
denotes simply the occurrence of an action, its time being exactly the same as the
present, as k v o a i (aor. in f) to loose (at any time). The perfect denotes completion
of an action, as kelvKEfiEv (perf in f) to have loosed (at any time).
Note: Although meanings are given in the paradigms, various others must be
learned from the syntax.
PRESENT AORIST
S. 1 )kV(o(ni) I may loose I may loose
2 >.i)ti5(0a) you may loose X,iS(Tii5(0a) you may loose
3 )kVii(oi) he may loose Xôti(oi) he may loose
Du. 2 XviiTov you two may loose ^toilTov you two may loose
3 XvnTov they two may loose XtotiTov they two may loose
PI. 1 XrtonEV we may loose XtoronEV we may loose
2 you may loose XvotiTE you may loose
3 they may loose Xtoraoi they may loose
PERFECT
(The subj. of the perf is very rare in Homer.)
S. 1 Xe>^VK(o I may loose PI. XEXvKOjfiEV we may loose
2 >.EXvKii5(0a) you may loose XE>.VKtiTE you may loose
3 XeXv k ii ( o i ) he may loose XeXvkcaoi they may loose
Du. 2 Xs^VKtiTOV you two may Du. 3 >.eXvkiitov they two may loose
loose
906 Optative
See the introductory note to 905.
Present aorist
S. 1 Xvoim may I loose 1 X voaiî may I loose
2 Xv'oi5(0a) may you loose 2 Xvoai5(0a) (XtoEiag) mayyou
loose
3 Xvoi
may he loose 3 Xtoai (X^Soeie)mayheloose
Du. 2 WOITOV may you two loose 2 XvoaiTO Vmayyoutwoloose
3 >.t)o(Tiiv
may they two loose 3 >.CoafTiivmaytheytwoloose
PI. 1 XvoinEV may we loose 1 XôainEVm ayweloose
2 >.\)oiTEmay you loose 2 XtoaiTEmayyouloose
3 XvoiEV may they loose 3 XvioaiEV(XtoEiav) maythey
332
MORPHOLOGY
Perfect
(The opt. of the perf. is very rare in Homer.)
S. 1 ^£Xt)KOI^l may I loose PI. 1 ^.EXvKOifiev may we loose

2 X£XvKOi5(0a) may you loose 2 XeXvikoite may you loose
3 Xei^VKOi may he loose 3 XeXvKOiev may they loose
Du. 2 Xe>.vkoitov may you two loose 3 XeXv k o it iiv may they two loose
907 Imperative
On tenses of the imperative, see the introductory note to 905.
PRESENT AORIST
s. 2 loose (continue to loose) >.Caov loose
3 >.VET(i) let him loose XCadtoj let him loose
(continue to loose)
Du. 2 ^VETOV loose (you two), ^voatov loose (you two)
(continue to loose)
3 >kVCT(0V let those (two) loose XCodtMV let those (two) loose,
(continue to loose)
PI. 2 XuETE loose (continue to loose) XvoaxE loose
3 XVOVTMV let them loose X®odvxo)v let them loose
(continue to loose)
908 Infinitive
Pres. XvEiv (XVHEV, X vjiEvai, Xv e jie v , XvEÊvai) to loose, to be loosing
Put. XvoEiv (XCoEHEV, >.CoEHEvai) to loose, to be about to loose, to be
loosing
Aor. /.voai (XvadjiEV, XCodnEvai) to loose, to have loosed
Perf. >.E>.rKEHEV, XE>iVKE(nE)vai to loose, to have loosed
909 Participle
Pres. Xvwv, Xrovo a, Xrov (740) loosing
Put. Ktorov, Xvaovoa, XCoov (being) about to loose, desiring to loose
Aor. >,voa5, X.voaoa, XCaav ( 741 ) having loosed
Perf Ê^DKDia, i-EXvKo^ ( 744 ) having loosed
MiddleVoice OFXv<o loose, free

910 Indicative
The most common meanings are 1 loose fo r myself, I am loosed; I was loosing fo r
myself, I was being loosed, etc. The context must determine which of these is most
333
HOMERIC GREEK
suitable. When it has an active meaning, I loose, it is with the strict implication of
loosing ones own, or something in which the subject has an active personal inter
est, hence: to ransom, redeem, deliver, etc.
PRESENT
S. 1 XvoâI I loose (for) myself, I am loosed
2 XvEtti [(X,t)ii)] you loose (for) yourself, are loosed
3 XvEtai he looses (for) himself, is loosed
Du. 2 XveoGov you two loose (for) yourselves, are loosed
3 î6eo0ov they two loose (for) themselves, are loosed
P l. 1 >.v6Ê(o)6a we loose (for) ourselves, are loosed
2 Xveo0e you loose (for) yourselves, are loosed
3 Xvovtai they loose (for) themselves, are loosed
IMPERFECT
s. 1 eXv6|hiiv I was loosing (for) myself, was being loosed
2 eXveo [(eXvev)] you were loosing (for) yourself, were being loosed
3 eXvetohewas loosing(for) himself, wasbeingloosed
Du. 2 eXveoGov you two were loosing (for) yourselves, were being loosed
3 E>trEO0iiv they two were loosing (for) themselves, were being loosed
P l. 1 E?^r6fiE(a)0a we were loosing (for) ourselves, were being loosed
2 eXveoGe you were loosing (for) yourselves, were being loosed
3 E>.v)ovxo they were loosing (for) themselves, were being loosed
FUTURE
S. 1 Xvoofiai I shall loose (for) myself, shall be loosed
2 XuoEai [(XiSofl)] you will loose (for) yourself, will be loosed
3 ^.voEtai he will loose (for) himself, will be loosed
Du. 2 XÔEO0OV you two will loose (for) yourselves, will be loosed
3 XVOEO0OV they two will loose (for) themselves, will be loosed
P l . 1 XCoofiE(o)0a we will loose (for) ourselves, will be loosed
2 ^VOEO0E you will loose (for) yourselves, will be loosed
3 Xraovxai they will loose (for) themselves, will be loosed
AORIST 2ND AOR.

LESS COMMON
S. 1 EX,Codntiv I loosed (for) myself, was loosed eXvuhv
2 E^toao [(EXtow) you loosed (for) yourself, were loosed eXv(o)o
3 E^roato he loosed (for) himself, was loosed e>,vto
Du. 2 EXvoao0ov you two loosed (for) yourselves, were loosed eXvo Gov
3 EX,Ooda0t)V they two loosed (for) themselves, were loosed Eî)o0iiv
P l. 1 £XvoanE(0 )0a we loosed (for) ourselves, were loosed EXrfiE(o)0a
2 E>.vaao0E you loosed (for) yourselves, were loosed eXvo Oe
3 EXuoavTO they loosed (for) themselves, were loosed eXvvto
334
MORPHOLOGY
PERFECT
S. 1 Xe>.i)nai I have loosed (for) myself, have been loosed
2 Xt>.voai you have loosed (for) yourself, have been loosed
3 XE>.VTai he has loosed (for) himself, has been loosed
Du. 2 >,E^vo0ov you two have loosed (for) yourselves, have been loosed
3 XeXvoBov they two have loosed (for) themselves, have been loosed
Pl. 1 >.E>.v)Ê(o)6a we have loosed (for) ourselves, have been loosed
2 XeXvo0E you have loosed (for) yourselves, have been loosed
3 >.eXDVTai (XeXuatai) they have loosed (for) themselves, have been loosed
N : 597-598)
ote In the 3rd pers. plur. -a z a i, -a x o (= -vxai, v to , regularly
appears in verbs with consonantal stems, and stems ending in i; sometimes in
stems ending in other vowels.
pluperfect
S. 1 eX.eXvhtiv I had loosed (for) myself, had been loosed
2 e>.eXvoo you had loosed (for) yourself, had been loosed
3 eXeXvto he had loosed (for) himself, had been loosed
Du. 2 eXeXvo Oov you two had loosed (for) yourselves, had been loosed
3 EÊ>^va0tiv they two had loosed (for) themselves, had been loosed
P l. 1 E>tEX,i)HE(o)0a we had loosed (for) ourselves, had been loosed
2 eXe^doGe you had loosed (for) yourselves, had been loosed
3 E^£>i,vvTo (EXEXvato) they had loosed (for) themselves, had been loosed
Note: In the 3rd pers. plur. -a x a i,
-a x o (= -v x ai, yxo, 5 9 7 -5 9 8 ) regularly
appears in verbs with consonantal stems, and stems ending in i; sometimes in
stems ending in other vowels.
FUTURE perfect
S. 1 >ÊXvooâl I shall have loosed (for) myself, shall have been loosed
2 ).EXvoEai [(-t])] you will have loosed (for) yourself, will have been loosed
3 XEXvoETtti he will have loosed (for) himself, will have been loosed
Du. 2 Xe Xvoeo Gov you two will have loosed (for) yourselves, will have been loosed
3 >^XvoEa0ov they two will have loosed (for) themselves, will have been loosed
Pl. 1 XEXCo6nE(o)0a we shall have loosed (for) ourselves, shall have been loosed
2 XeXvoeoGe you will have loosed (for) yourselves, will have been loosed
3 >.EXvoovTai they will have loosed (for) themselves, will have been loosed
911 Subjunctive
Note:On tenses of the subjunctive see the introductory note to 905. Although
meanings are given, others must be learned from the syntax.
PRESENT
S. 1 Xvcoâi I may loose (for) myself, may be loosed
2 Xvtfai [(X,i)»i)] you may loose (for) yourself, may be loosed
3 W tjta i he may loose (for) himself, may be loosed
Du. 2 XvtioGov you two may loose (for) yourselves, may be loosed
3 ^vtiaGov they two may loose (for) themselves, may be loosed
335
HOMERIC GREEK
P l . 1 ^\)(one(o)0a we may loose (for) ourselves, may be loosed

2 Xvno0E you may loose (for) yourselves, may be loosed
3 XvMVxai they may loose (for) themselves, may be loosed
AORIST
S. 1 ^vo(l)âl I may loose (for) myself, be loosed
2 >,voT)ai [(>.V(jii)] you may loose (for) yourself, be loosed
3 Xvotitai he may loose (for) himself, be loosed
Du. 2 X«otio0ov you two may loose (for) yourselves, be loosed
3 XvotioBov they two may loose (for) themselves, be loosed
Pl . 1 XCaw|iie(o)0a we may loose (for) ourselves, be loosed
2 Xuai]o0e you may loose (for) yourselves, be loosed
3 Xvawvtai they may loose (for) themselves, may be loosed
PERFECT
S. 1 CO) I may loose (for) myself, may be loosed
2 EI15 you may loose (for) yourself, may be loosed
3 eii he may loose (for) himself, be loosed
Du. 2 etixov you two may loose (for) yourselves, may be loosed
3 êXunevM eiitov they two may loose (for) themselves, may be loosed
Pl. 1 ewfiev we may loose (for) ourselves, may be loosed
2 êXunEvoi etiTE you may loose (for) yourselves, may be loosed
3 ewoi they may loose (for) themselves, may be loosed
912 O pta t iv e
No te : On tenses of the optative see the introductory note to 905. Although

meanings are given, others must be learned from the syntax.
PRESENT
S. 1 may I loose (for) myself, may I be loosed
2 ^voio may you loose (for) yourself, may you be loosed
3 XvoiTo may he loose (for) himself, may he be loosed
Du. 2 Xvoio0ov may you two loose (for) yourselves, may you two be loosed
3 XvoioOtjv may they two loose (for) themselves, may they two be loosed
Pl . 1 >.voine(o)0a may we loose (for) ourselves, may we be loosed
2 XvoiaOe may you loose (for) yourselves, may you be loosed
3 Xvoiato may they loose (for) themselves, may they be loosed
AORIST
S. 1 XCoaifitiv may I loose (for) myself, may I be loosed
2 îSoaio may you loose (for) yourself, may you be loosed
3 XvoaiTO may he loose (for) himself, may he be loosed
336
MORPHOLOGY
Du. 2 )^voaio0ov may you two loose (for) yourselves, may you two be loosed
3 XCoaioOtiv may they two loose (for) themselves, may they two be loosed
P l. 1 Xvoaifi£(o)0a may we loose (for) ourselves, may we be loosed
2 X v o a io 0E may you loose (for) yourselves, may you be loosed
3 XC aaiato may they loose (for) themselves, may they be loosed
PERFECT
S. 1 Eitiv may I loose (for) myself, may I be loosed
2 Eiti5 may you loose (for) yourself, may you be loosed
3 XEXv^ ^ 0 5 Ell] may he loose (for) himself, may he be loosed
(Also )tE>.VTO = Ê>tV-l-TO)
Du. 2 ^>.DÊV(l) EiTov may you two loose (for) yourselves, may you two be loosed
3 ^>.Dnev(i) Einiv may they two loose (for) themselves, may they two be loosed
P l . 1 X.E^DjiEvoi e I hev may we loose (for) ourselves, may we be loosed
2 XEXvfiôi EiTE may you loose (for) yourselves, may you be loosed
3 X,E>i.V|iiôi EiEV may they loose (for) themselves, may they be loosed
913 Im p e ra tiv e
Note: On tenses of the imperative see the introductory note to 905.

PRESENT
S. 2 XvEO [(XvEv)] loose (for) yourself, be loosed
3 XveoGojlet himloose(for) himself, lethimbeloosed
Du. 2 XveoBovloose(for) yourtwoselves, beloosed
3 >,VEO0(OV let those two loose (for) themselves, let them be loosed
P l . 2 >.v)EO0E loose (for) yourselves, be loosed
3 >.VEO0(OV let them loose (for) themselves, let them be loosed
AORIST
S. 2 X ro ai loose (for) yourself, be loosed
3 XCodoOw let him loose (for) himself, let him be loosed
Du. 2 )^voao 0o v loose (for) your two selves, be loosed
3 ^Codo 0 <i)v let these two loose (for) themselves, let them be loosed
P l. 2 >.voao 0 E loose (for) yourselves, be loosed
3 >.Codo0(ov let them loose (for) themselves, let them be loosed
PERFECT
S 2 XeXvoo loose (for) yourself, be loosed
3 XeXvo Oo) let him loose (for) himself, let him be loosed
Du. 2 >.eX,uo0 ov loose (for) your two selves, be loosed
3 Xe>.i)(t0 (ov let those two loose (for) themselves, let them be loosed
P l. 2 XeXvoGe loose (for) yourselves, be loosed
3 Xe>.v)o0(ovletthemloose(for) themselves, let thembeloosed
337
HOMERIC GREEK
914 I n fin itive

N o te : On tenses of the infinitives see the introductory note to 905.
P res . XveoOai to loose (for) one’s self, to be loosed
Fut . XvotaGai to loose (for) one’s self, to be loosed, to be about to be loosed
Ao r . X voaa0ai to loose (for) one’s self, to be loosed, to have loosed
P erf . X£>kVO0ai to loose (for) one’s self, to be loosed, to have loosed
F. P erf . ^£>iVOEO0ai to loose (for) one’s self, to be loosed, to be about to be loosed
915 Participle
Pres. XvofiEVog, t], ov loosing (for) one’s self, being loosed.
Fut. ^CaonEvog, i], ov being about to loose (for) one’s self, being about to be
loosed, desiring to lo ose,. . . etc.
A or. XC0 dnEV05, ii, ov having loosed (for) one’s self, having been loosed
P erf. XeXvu^ o^, ti, ov having loosed (for) one’s self, having been loosed.
F. P erf. ÊXCoofiEvog, ii , ov being about to have loosed (for) one’s self, being
about to have been loosed
Passive Voice
(Occasionally with a middle meaning.)
Aorist only
916 I ndicative 917 Su b iu n c t iv e (See note to 905.)
S. 1 eXv Btiv I was loosed >.i)0w (Xv0£(o) (951-952) I maybe

loosed
2 eXv0ti5 you were loosed >,v0fi5 (Xv0Et]5) you may be loosed
3 E>kV)0Ti he was loosed Xt)0fi (^vGei]) he may be loosed
Du. 2 Eî)0t]Tov you two were loosed XvOiiTov (^v0^Tov) you two may be
loosed
3 £Xr0fftiiv they two were loosed XvOfiTov (Xv0EtiTov) they two may be
loosed
Pl. 1 eXvOiihev we were loosed Xv0mnEV (Xt)0d<onEv) we may be loosed
2 eXv Oiixe you were loosed Xv0fiTE (Xv0h]TE) you may be loosed
3 Ei,v0iiaav they were loosed X.v0wai (X,D0Ecooi) they may be loosed
918 Optative (See note to 905.) 919 Im p e r a t iv e (See note to 905.)
S. 1 )i,D0Eitiv may I be loosed

2 Xv0Eiii5 may you be loosed X,v0f)Ti be loosed
3 Xv Geit] may he be loosed >iV0T|T(a let him be loosed
Du. 2 Xv0Eixov(X 0 (
d eiixov may you) Xv0iiTov be loosed
two be loosed
3 Xv0EiTiiv (Xv0EitpTiv) may they Xv0T|t<ov let them be loosed
two be loosed
338
MORPHOLOGY
P l . 1 Xl)6E^ÊV (Xv0Eit]H£v) may we be loosed

2 Xv Geite (Xv Beiiite ) may you be loosed Xv Oiite be loosed
3 Xv GeTev (XD0Eitioav) may they be loosed Xv G ^ twv let them be loosed
920 Infinitive
Xv'0T]vai (XvOrmEvai) to be loosed, to have been loosed
921 Participle
Xv0Ei5, Eioa, (742) having been loosed
922 P e r f e c t System o f Paivo) (Pav-, Pa-), come, go, walk
INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE
S. 1 p£Pt]Ka PeP^KO) PEP^KOl^l PEpdîEv(ai)
2 p£Pt]Ka; PEpf|Kii5(0a) Pe Pt|k o i ; PEPa0i
3 PePtike PEPT)KIl(ai) Pe Pt|koi PEpdtO) PARTICIPLE
Du. 2 pEpatov PePt|ketov Pe Pt|KOITDV P^Patov Pe Pum; ,
3 PEPatov PePi ^ketov PEPt]KO(t11V PEpdTuv pEPavia,
P l. 1 PePu ^ ev PEpf|K<OfiEV PePi^k o i ^ ev Pe Puo;
2 PEPaTE pEPnKtlTE PePi^koite pEpatE
3 PEpdaai PePtIKUOI Pe Pi]KOIEV PEpdvTMV
PEPiijKaoi
No te ; The subjunctive is very rare; the dual and plural forms are uncertain.
PLUPERFECT
S. 1 EPEPiiKEa (-tj 585) Du. P l . EpEPaÊV
2 EpEp^KEag( - n ? 585) Ep^patov ePePote
3 ePePijkee (-El 585) EPEPattlV EPEPaoav
923 S econd P erfect System of jie i 0(o ( jie i 0-, :io i0-, rei0-),
persuade
INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLE PLUPERFECT
S. 1 3iCTOi0a :ie:ioi0(o jie :io i0w5, E:iE3ioi0Ea (-n 585)
2 :iCTOi0a 5 TOJioi0ii 5(0a) :iE™oi0uia, :iEnoi065 E:i£Jioi0Ea5 (-tig 585
3 JIEJIOI0E :iEJioi0ti(ai) EnErtOi0EE (-EI 585)
Du. 2 JlEJllOTOV rtEno(0ETov EJIKIIOXOV
3 rtKtlOTOV nEno(0ETOV EJlEniOTllV
P l. 1 rtEJiiOnEV JlEJtOl0O|LlEV EJt^lOjlEV
2 :ICT1CTTE JtEJlOI0ETE eniCTlCTTE
3 :iE:i(0aoi 71E:IO(0MOI (EJiKiioav)
JlE3lOl0aOI E7iE:ioi0Eoav
No te: The subjunctive is very rare; the dual and plural forms are uncertain.
339
HOMERIC GREEK
924 Second P e r f e c t System o f laxtmi (oti]-, ora-), s t a n d

N ote: The singular often uses the first perfect forms; on tense in subj. and opt.
see the note to 905.
perfect
INDICATIVE su b ju n c t iv e OPTATIVE IM PERA TIV E IN FINIT IV E

1 (tOTtlKa) (EOTIlKb)) eorainv EOTdflEV(ai)
2 (toTHKag) (eoTT|KTi5(0a)) eotaitig Eora0i
3 (ecniiKe) (EOXf|Ktl(Ol)) eoTaii] EOtdtCl) PARTICIPLE
2 eoratov eoT»ixov EoraiTov Eotatov Eorau;, via, 6;
3 Eoxatov eOTt]TOV Eorahtjv EordTwv
1 EO XaHEA’ eOTMHEV EOTaijlEV
2 EO XaTE EOTllTE EOtaiTE EOXatE
3 eoraoi COTW Ol EOXaiTE EordvTwv
EOTT|KaOl
925 P e r f e c t M id d le System o f L a b ia l Verbs:
tpKio) (tpen;-, tpan;-) tu rn , o f V e la r (P a la ta l) Verbs:
i ‘t £ V X - , T v y [ , - , t v K - ) f a s h i o n , m a k e , and o f
D e n ta l Verbs: :iEV0ofiai (nev0-, Jiv0-) l e a r n

Indicative
S. 1 T^pamiiai TETVYHai
(TEtpajijiai) (xExvxnai) (n E JirO n a i)
2 TCTpayai ji t m jo a i
(TEtpajioai) (TETV/Oai) (rtE:iv0oai)
3 TEtpajitai T^K Tai jiKivoxai
(TETpajitai) (TETVXTai) (rtEJtvOxai)
Du. 2 tETpaq>0ov TETVX0OV JIKIVO0OV
(TETpaJlO0OV) (TETVXW0O'') (™ErtV0O0OV)
3 TETpa<p0OV Ji»n)o ov
0
(T£tpa:io0ov) (TETDXW0OV) (jlErtV0O0OV)
Pl. 1 T£Tpd^Ê(o)Oa TEXl)YHE(o)0a 7iE:ii)onE(o)0a
(TETpa:iH£(o)0a) (TCTWXHE(o)0a) (n£Jtw0nE(o)0a)
2 TCTpa(p0E TETVX0E JlEm)O0E
(TETpa:io0E) (TETVXO0E) (nE:iV0O0E)
3 TETpdcpatai TETVxatai (TETVxyttti) n£rtV)0aTai
(TEtpartytai) (TETEVxatai) (rt£:iv0yTai)
Pluperfect Indicative
SINGULAR
1 ETETpdjlfltlV ETETVYfillV EÊnvoniiv
(ETETpaJlJillV) (etetvxj«1'') (En£rev0niiv)
2 ET^xpayo(ereTpcw ioo) (CTETUXOO) foiEJivoo (en£TOoo)
0
3 ET^rpmiTO (CTEXpCOTIO) CTETVKXO (CTETUXIO) EJIKIVOTO (E:i£m)0TO)
340
MORPHOLOGY
DUAL
2 ETEXpa(p0OV ETEXVX0OV E:iEJiva0ov
(ETETpaJloGov) (ETETVXW0OV) (EnEnv0o0ov)
3 ETETpd(p011V ETETV)X01JV E:iEJl\)O0 tlV
(E T E tp a :io 0 tiv ) ( etetvx®0'1v) (EnEnv0o0tiv)
PLURAL
1 ETETpd^lÊ(o)0a ETETVYJlE(o)0a EJiEm)ofiE(o)6a
(E T E xp a n ;fiE (o )0 a ) (EXETVXHE(o)0a) (EJlE™V0 flE(o) 0 a)
2 ET£Tpa(p0E Et^TVX0E En;En;vo0E
(ETEtpaJlO0E) (EXETVXO0E) (EJIEJIV0O0 E)
3 ETEtpacpato (ETETpajiyto) ETETVXatO EJiErtvOato
(ETETEI)X«10) (ETETVXytO) (E:iEn\)0yTo)
P e r f e c t Su b ju n c t iv e
1 TETpaillflEVOg Eft) TETDYHEVOi; E(0 JtEnVOflEVOgEd)

(TETpajifiôg) (TETvxHôg) (jlEnV0JlÔ?)
etc.
Perfect O p ta t iv e
1 TErtpannEvog e ii ^v TETl)YM^ 0 5 EI11V rtEJivajiôg Ei^v

etc.
P e r f e c t Im p e r a t iv e
sin g u l a r
2 TETpayO (TEtpaJlOO) TETVÔ(TETVX<T0) JiEnvoo (: te: iv 0 oo )

3 TETpd(p0(O (TETp«JlO0W) TETUxOw (tetvxoOw) n;£:iri)o0(o (TO:n)0o0(o)
dual
2 XETpa(p0ov TETVX0OV n:£Jiv(r0ov

(TETpaJlO0OV) (TETVXO0OV) (3ie : iv 0 o0 ov)
3 TETpd(p0(i)V TETI)X0WV JtEJlV)O0(i)V
(TEtpa;io0(i)v) (TETDXO0(OV) (:IEJIV0O0MV)
PLURAL
2 TETpa<p0E (TETpaJia0E) TETVX0E(TETVXO0E) nEJlVO0E (nEnt)0O0E)
3 TETpd(p0(l)V TETV)X0<1)V rt£Jll)CT0(OV
(TETpajia0wv) ( t e t d x o Om v ) ( :ie :iv 0 o 0 ( o v )
P e r fe c t in fin itiv e an d P a rtic ip le
TETpd(p0ai (TEtpajioO ai) TETVx0ai ( tetvxw0 « *) nE:ri)o0ai (™EJiv0a0ai)
TETpa^ÊV05 , 1], ov TETDyillEVOg, t|, ov rtEjrvCTnôg, 11, ov

(TEXpajifiEVog) (TEtrxnevog) (rtEnrOnEvog)
341
HOMERIC GREEK
926 For the change in the vowel of the stem between the singular and the dual
and plural of the perfect active, see 882.
927 For the euphonic changes found in the perfect middle, by means of which
the regular forms are derived from the forms in parentheses, see 608ff.
928 -vTui, -VTO (-yxai, -yro) of the third plural middle and passive become
-a x a i, -a r o after a consonant (597-598).
929 Ji-mutes and /r-mutes (510) are aspirated (619) before the endings of the
third plural, n and fi becoming <p and k , and y becoming X-
930 Second A o ris t System o f âivo) (Pav-, Pa-) come, go,
yiYvwoKW (yvw-, yvo-) know, and o f 8vo) (86-) enter, sink
Indicative
S. 1 ePhv Eyvwv e8 vv
2 gpns Eyvwg m g
3 gpn Eyv(o m
Du. 2 ePiitov (EPatov) EyVW TOV eSvtov
3 ePtjiiiv (Epdtiiv) EyvcoTiiv E8tTT]V
PI. 1 gpimev (gpafiEv) EyvwuEV eSvuev
2 ePiite (EpatE) EyVOTE e8 vte
3 EP?ioav (Epaoav, Spav) Eyvwoav (Eyvov) (E8Coav) e8 vv
S ubjunctive
S. 1 pf|(i)etc. yv(0(0 (yvfi 585), etc. 86 1()etc.
O ptative
S. 1 pait]v etc. yvo(f)v etc. 86tjv (= 8 ditjv) '
I mperative
S. 2 pf|6i etc. yvwGi etc. 8C01 etc.
In fin itiv es and Participles
Pfivai (PrinEvai) yvwvai (yv(oÊval) ( hev
8 C v a i 86
p6 ; , pdoa, pdv Yvov>5, yvovaa, yvov 86 q, 8voa, 8v
)
F ir st Aorist System of L iquid V erbs
<paiv(o ( stem (pav-) show
931 F irst Ao rist Active

INDICATIVE subjunctive OPTATIVE imperative INFINITIVE
S. 1 E<piiva <pT|V(i)(ni) <pT|vaini (pfivai
2 Ecpiivag (pf|vti5(6a) q>T|vai5(0a) (pfivov
3 E(pTiVE <pT|VTi(ai) q>f|vai <ptlvdt<o PARTICIPLE
(q>f|VElE) (pf|va5, a o a , av
342
MORPHOLOGY
Du. 2 etp u v d to v q)T|VtlTOV (p iiv a iT o v ( p iiv a t o v

3 ctptivdttiv <pr|ViiT0V (p iiv a ltiiv (p H v d tw v
PI. 1 E(piivajiFV q)T|V(onEV <pT|vainEV
2 E<pf|vaTC (pT|VtlTE <p r|vaitE (pfjvaTE
3 E(piivav (pf|V(aoi (pT|VaiEV (pHVdVTMV
((pT|VEiav)
932 F irst Ao rist M iddle

indicative subjunctive OPTATIVE IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE
s. 1 E (p tlv d ^ n v (p l^ (a ^ a l (p H v a ffitiv (p t^ a o 0 a i
2 £q)T|vao (pTivtiai <pT|vaio (p t iv a i
3 E(pT|VaTO ( p t iv iit a i (pT|VaiTO q>t)vdo0((> PARTICIPLE
Du. 2 E (p T |vao 0o v (pT|VtlO0OV (p T |v a i0 o v <ptjva 00 o v tpilvdflEVO?,
3 E cp iivd aftiiv (p q v iia 0 o v <p ilv a io 0 T iv (p tiv d o 0 w v 1 1 ,0 V
P l. 1 E (p iiv d jiE (o )6 a (p t]V (i)Ê(o)0a (p t]v a ifiE (o )0 a 2ND AOR.
2 EcpqvaoGE (pf|VTlO0E < p T |v a io 0 E (pT|VaO0E PASS.
3 E (p t|vavT o <pi|V(i)VTai < p tlvaiaT O (pt]vdo0M V E<pdvtiv
E<pdvti5
E .ijn i5(0 a ) X ijio i5 ( 0 a ) X u iE H E v(ai)
3 E>.i:tE Xinoi
Du. 2 E>.IJtETOV X in tiT o v ^(JIOITOV XlJlETOV participle
3 EX,i:i^Ttiv ^fjltlTO V ÎJIETWV >.lrt(OV,
PI. 1 EXirtOflEV X in w fic v ^(rtO lH EV o v o a ,6 v
2 e X Ijie t e XirtllTE itirtOlTE >.(JIETE
3 E>.i:iov >i(jlOlEV XlJl6VT(0V
934 S econd Ao rist M iddle

S. 1 EXlJI6^t)v X^;T(aâl XiJioifitiv XiJiâ0ai
2 EÛIEO Xuioio XinEO
3 EXfjtETO / .( j i t i t a i X.UIOITO XinEO0(a PARTICIPLE
Du. 2 EX ijiEO 0ov >.(mio0ov >.ijioio0ov X u iE a 0 o v X ijio jiE v o g ,
3 E X i:iE a 0 tiv XiJtiioOov îiTioioOtiv Xi:iEO0<ov r\,o\
343
HOMERIC GREEK
PI. 1 EXiJi6 nE(o)0a >w lJI(a^£(o)6a X i:i o if iE ( o ) 6 a

2 eXlJlE(T0 E Xint 1O0 E XijlOlO0 E XillEO0 E
3 eX Ijiovto X in w v T a i X irto laT O X i j i e o 0(ov
935 S e c o n d A o r i s t P a s s iv e System o f tpEtpco (tpEcp-, tpocp-, tpacp-,

FOR 0 pE(p-, ETC. 619 ) n o u r i s h
INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE IMPERATIVE
S. 1 Etpdquiv xpatpra xpatpEiiiv
2 ETpdq>Ti9 Tpa(pfj; Tpa(pEiti9 xpdcpiixi
3 ETpoupif tpacpfj xpatpEii] xpa<p^(o
Du. 2 ETpd<pt|Tov tp a (p iito v xpacpEixov (xpa<pEiiixov) xpdquixov
3 ETpa(pfp:iiv TpacpiiTOV xpaq>E(xtiv (xpa(pEiTp:t|v) xpaq)T|X(i)V
PI. 1 EtpaqmnEV Tpa(p&^£v xpa<pEinEV (xpa(pEitm£v)
2 £Xpd(pT]TE Tpaq>f)TE xpatpEiXE (xpatpEliixE) XpdcpiJXE
3 Expdcpnoav xpaq>&oi xpa<pEiEV (xpa<pEltioav) xpacp^xwv
(ExpatpEv)
INFINITIVE x p atp fjv a i (xpa<pT|fiEvai) PARTICIPLE xpacpEig, E i o a , ^
Contract Verbs
936 Verbs that end in -am, -eo), -oco; -a o fia i, -so fia i, -o o fia i (including the
futures of Hquids and nasals) in the first-person singular are contracted in the pres
ent and imperfect at times. For the laws of contraction see 584-585.
937 Verbs in -o a , -o o fia i are usually contracted; those in -aco, -a o fia i, -eco,
- E o /x a i may be, but are usually left uncontracted.
938 P r e s e n t System o f x l^ d u h o n o r
P resen t
INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE
S. 1 (xlndra) xlfiw (xlndw) xlfiM ( x ljid o im ) x1^ ra^ l
2 (xlfidEig) x ljifig (xl^dtl5) xijiag (xlfid o ig ) x1^ ra;
3 ( x l f i d E i) x ljifi (xl^dtl) xlfid (x lfid o i) xln w
Du. 2 (xljidEXOv) x ljia x o v (xTfidiixov) xlnaxov (xl|iidoixov) x ljifix o v
3 (xl|ndEXov) xlfiaxov (xljidiixov) xlnaxov (xlîaofxtiv) xlnSxtiv
PI. 1 (xlfidonEv) XlHWJlEV (xlndwHEV) XlH®|HEV (xlndoiHEV) Xl|llWHEV
2 (xlfldEXE) XljldXE (xl|iidllXE) XlfldXE (xlfidoixE ) xljiS x E
3 (x lfid o v o i) x ln S o i (xl^d(aol) x1ûal (xljldoiEV ) XlflWEV
IMPERATIVE IMPERFECT
S. 1 (Exifiaov) m ^ w v
2 (xinttE) x in ft (cxtjiaEg) Exijidg
3 (xlnaExra) xljidxM (ExijiaE) Extfia
Du. 2 (xl|iidEXov) x ljifix o v (ExludExov) Exlfidxov
3 (xljiaEXDJv) xlndxMV (£xlna^xi]v) Exlîdxnv
344
MORPHOLOGY
P l. 1 (etlfidonEv) ETlfiwiiiev
2 (T ln d tte ) T in a te (e T ln d E te ) e t I h c It e
3 (TlnaovTwv) TljitivTwv (ETinaov) etI hmv
PART.(Tlfidcflv, ovaa, ov) INFIN.(TlndElV=TlHttEEV)Tlfifiv,

xlnwv, woa, wv, 745. (tljiijn E v ai)
939 MiddleandPassive
Present
INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE
S. 1 (T1^doâl) T1^(5âl (Tl^d(aâl) T1^(aâI (T1âO^^T]V) tlfU^t]V
2 (Tlnd sai) T ljia (tljid iiai) Tlfia (T1^d0I0) T1^&0
3 (TlndEtai) T ln d ta i (tTfidi]Tai) T^^dTal ( T ln d o iT O ) Tlfl& TO
Du. 2 (HjidEoGov) (tljidnoGov) (T ln d o io 0 ov)
TlnaoGov tlfifioGov TIHW
O0OV
(TlndEoOov) (Tlfldl]O0OV) (T ln ao io 0 tjv)
T^âo0ov TlâoOov Tl|U®O011V
PI. 1 (Tlâ6Ê(o)6a) (Tlfia(onE(a)0a) (tlH aoinE(o)0a)
T1^(aÊ(o)6a Tl^(aÊ(o)0a Tl|UWJlE(o)0a
2 (TljidEO0E) TlnaoOe (TTîdti<j0e)Tljiao0E (TlfldoiO 0 E) Tl|UUO0E
3 (Tl^dovTal) (Tlfidwvxai) (Tlfiaoiato)
TluMVtai TlflMVtai Tljiwato
IMPERFECT PRESENTIMPERATIVE INFINITIVE
S. 1 (ETl|iia6niiv) (Tlnd£o0ai)
ETlfiWHTlV T ljia o 0 a i
2 (ETl|ud£0)ETljlM (TlHdEO)TlflW
3 (ETl^dETO) ET^âTO (TlnaEo0w) Tlnda0(i)
Du. 2 (ETlfldEoOov)ETlnaoOoV (TlndEoOov) T^â(T0OV PARTICIPLE
3 (CTinaEO0iiv) CTlndoOtiv (TlnaEO0<ov) Tlndo0(ov (TlfiaojiEVog,11,ov)
Tl^l(0ÊVO5,1], ov
P l . 1 (£TTâ6Ê(o)0a) ETlji(onE(o)0a
2 (E T ln d E O 0 E ) E T lf id o 0 E (T ln d E O 0 E ) T l n a a 0 E
3 (EtTfldoVTO)ETlHMVTO (TlnaEO0(OV)Tlndo0(ov
P r e s e n t Sy s t e m of JtoiEO) do, m ake
940 Active
PRESENTINDICATIVE IMPERFECT PRESENTsubjunctive
s. 1 (jioiEo) :ioiw (EJIOIEOV) ETOIEVV (JIOIEW) JtOlW
2 (rtoiEEig) JioiEig (ejioiee?) Enokii; (nOIEl]5) noifi;
3 (nOlEEl) :i01El (ejioiee) eto Iei ( n o i^ ) :ioiti
Du. 2 (nOlEETOV) JIOIEITOV (EJtOlEEXOV) EÔIEIXOV (J101E1]TGV) JlOlllTOV
3 (JIOIEETOV) :iOIElTOV (EJIOIECTIIV) EJIOIEITIIV (jlOlEtlTOV) JlOltjtOV
345
HOMERIC GREEK
PI. 1 (jioiEoêv) JioiEvjiev (EÔIEOHEV)EnOlEV|llEV (rtOlEWHEV) JIOIWHEV

2 (JIOIEETE)nOlElTE (EJIOIEETE)ErtOlElTE (jIOlEtlTE)JlOlfjTE
3 (jioiôvoi) jioieCoi (ejioIeov)EnoiEvv (JIOIEWOI)nOlWOl
PRESENTOPTATIVE IMPERATIVE
S. 1 (noiôiî) Jto io i^ i or (jioiE oliiv) Jio io iiiv
2 (noiEOi5) J10 10 15 or (noiEoit]9) (jtoiEE) rtOiEl
3 (t o ie o i ) TO ioi or (inoiEoit)) n oioit) (JIOIE^TW )JIOIeIt®
Du. 2 (noiEoiTov) jio io ito v (:iOlEETOV)nOElTOV
3 (noiEoitijv) :ioiolTtiv (JIOIEETW V)JlOlEitWV
PI. 1 (nOlÔlHEV) JlOlotHEV
2 (nOlEOlTE) JIOIOITE (nOlEETE)JIOIEITE
3 (rtOIEOlEV) JIOIOIEV (JIOIEOVTWV)JIOIEVVTW
V
Note:The subjunctive and optative are not contracted in Homer.
INFINITIVE (JIOIEEIV) rtOlElV, (jlOlllHEVai, nOltlVai)
PARTICIPLE (:101£0)V, OVOa, ov) ITOlSv, E®Oa, EVV, 745
941 MiddleandPassive
Indicative
present imperfect
S. 1 (noiEojiai) noiEvnai (EJlOlEOJltlV) En;Ol£VflllV
2 (jioiEEtti) JioiEiai, -Eai (e:10I^£0) ErtOlElO,-£o
3 (jioiEExai) JioiEitai (Enoifeto) EJIOIEITO
Du. 2 (noiEEoOov) noiEioOov (EnOlEEO0OV) EJlO lEiaOoV
3 (JIOIEEOOOV)n:OlElO0OV (e:IOIE£O0T1V) Ejtoi£io0tiv
PI. 1 (jioiE6nE(o)0a) rtoiEV|ii£(o)0a (EnoiE6nE(o)0a) £;ioi£rn£(o)0a
2 (:ioi£eo6e):ioieio0e (EnOlE£O0 E) EJIOIEIO0E
3 (:ioiôvTai) noiEvvtai (EJIOIÔVTO)ErtOlEVVTO
Present
SUBJUNCTIVE optative
S. 1 (irtoiEMfiai) ;IOlraâl (noiEoinnv) :;l0l0^^1lv
2 ( r to i^ a i) Jioifi (:ioiEoio) Jioiolo
3 (jio iE fitai) JtoifiTai (rtOlÔlTO)JIOIOITO
Du. 2 (jioi^tjaOov) noiT]o0ov (JIOIEOIO0 OV) JIOIOIO0OV
3 (jioi^t)o0ov) JIO111O0OV (jlOtEOlO0TlV) Jio io io 0liv
Pl. 1 (jioiEwnE(o)0a) nol(a^£(o)0a noioifiE(o)0a
(jioiE olfiE (o) 0a )
2 (n o i^ o 0 £ ) rtoifio0E (3tOlEOlO0 E) JIOIOIO0E
3 (jioiEMVxai) Jioiwvtai (jioiEoiato) noioiato
Present Imperative
s. 2 (JIOIEEO) Du. 2 (:t o i £EO0o v ) PI. 2 (jioi^£a0E)
jroiEV JIOIEIO0OV rtoi£io0£
(:toieeo0<o) 3 (JIOIE£O0(I)V) 3 (JIOIEEO0 (OV)
noiEio0(o rtOlEio0Ci)V noiEuiOtov
346
MORPHOLOGY
Infin. (jioiEEoOai) JTOiEioSai Part. (noie6 |iievo5,tj,ov) noiei)HEVo5,ti,ov

Present Systemof xoXoo)a n g e r , v e x
942 Active
presentindicative IMPERFECT PRESENTSUBJUNCTIVE
S. 1 (xo)^6(o) xoXS (exoôov) ex6>.ovv (XoXora)xoXS
2 (xo>^6e i 5) xoôi? (ExoXoEg) ex6).ov5 (XoUtig) X0X015
3 ( xo >.6e i ) xoôi (exoXoe)exoXov (XoXon)xoXoi
Du. 2 ( xo >.6etov ) xo XoCtov (exo>^6etov) exoôvtov (XOXotlTOV) XO>.®TOV
3 (xoôETov) xoXoCtov(EXoXoETIIV) EXO>,OVTtlV (XOXotlTOV) xoXwxov
PI. 1 (XOXOOHEV) XoXoVflEV (EXoXoOJIEV) EXoXoVJlEV (XOXOOJHEV) XoX&ÊV
2 (xoXoete)xo>.ovtE (exoXoete) exoXoCte (XoXoiltE) XO>.W
TE
3 (xoXoovai) xoXovoi (exoXoov)EXoXorV (XoXoMOl) xoXraol
Present
OPTATIVE IMPERATIVE
S. 1 (xoXooijii) xo^ôifii
2 (xoXooig) xoXotg (x 6>.oe) xoXov
3 (xoXooi) xoXoi (XoXo^tm) xoXovto)
Du. 2 (XOXOOITOV) XO)tOlTOV (XOXOETOV)XOXOVTOV
3 (xoXoo(thv) xoXoixiiv (XO>^6et(ov)xoXovtwv
PI. 1 (xoXooifiev) xoXoinEV
3 (xo>. oite) xoXoite
6 (XOX,OETe)XoXoVTE
3 (xoXooiEv) XOÔIEV (XOXOOVTW V)XOXorVTW V
Part. (xoXowv, ovoa, ov) xoXwv, oCoa, ovv, 746 Inf. (xoXoEiv)xoXovv
943 Middle andPassive
present INDICATIVE IMPERFECT PRESENT
SUBJUNCTIVE
S. 1 (xo>^6onai) (Exoxoontiv) (XoXoronai)
XoXovnai EXoXoV fltlV XoXraâi
2 (xoXoEtti) xoXoi (exo>,6eo) exo>.ov (XoXoTfai) xoXot
3 (xo>.6ETai) (exoXoeto) (XoXotitai)
XoXoCtai exoXoCto XoXwTtti
Du. 2 (xo>.6 Ea6ov) (eXoX6eo0ov) (XoXoiiGov)
XoXoCoGov ExoXoCo0ov XoXm00ov
3 (xo>.6eo0ov) (exo>.oeo0iiv) (XoX6iio0ov)
XoXoCoGov ExoXovaOiiv XOXW O0OV
PI. 1 (xo>.o6nE(a)0a) (EXoXo6 nE(o)0a) (XoXo(onE(o)0a)
XO>-ornE(o)0a EXoXovnE(o)0a XoX(aÊ(o)0a
2 (xo).6 EO0a) (exoXowoGe) (XoXoiioOe)
XO>ôCo0E EXoXoCo0E XoXwa0E
3 (xoXoovtai) (exoXoovto) (XoXocovtai)
XO>ôi)VTai EXOXOVVTO XoXwvtai
347
HOMERIC GREEK
PRESENT OPTATIVE IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE

S. 1 (xoXooi^fiv) (XoXoEoOai)
XoX,oijiiiv XoXoCo0ai
(XoXooio) xoX,oio (Xoi,6eo) xoôt
(XoXooiTo) xoXoiTo (XO>.oô0<a)xoXoi)o0(i) PARTICIPLE
Du. (XoXooioGov)xoXoioGov (XoX6eo0ov) xoXovo0ov (XoX«6h£vo5, 1], ov)
3 (xoXooioGiiv) xoXofajOt]v (XO)ÊO0(lJV) XO^«l)O0<l)V XoXovjiEvog, 1], ov
PI. 1 (xoXooifie(o)0a)
X o X o ifiE (o )0 a
2 (xoX6oio0e) xoôioBe (XO>.6e00E) xoXovff0E
3 (xo>.ooiaTo) xo>^.oiaTo (XoXoôOwv) xoXoroOwv
944 These verbs may be contracted as indicated above, and are regularly con
tracted in later classical Greek.
945 The manuscripts of the Homeric poems often show a series of forms for
verbs ending in -am (e.g., x i^ aa) and in -om (e.g., xokooi), which are known as
“assimilated” (sometimes called “distracted”) forms. In these cases a t , a e i, arj, at]
give a double a sound, by the a assimilating the e sound; but a o , aw, a o i, a o v give
a double o sound, by the o assimilating the a sound. Usually one of the vowels is
lengthened, sometimes both.
aE = 1) a a ao = l)o o ) oo = 1) 0(0
2) a a 2 ) (0(0 2) (OO
a E i = 1) a a a o i = 1) 0(0 OOl = 0(0
2) a a 2 ) (ooi OOV = 0(0
a fl = 1) a a a o v = 1) 0(0
2) a a 2) (0(0
ao = 1) 0(0
2 ) 0)0
946 These forms are used also in futures in - a a from - a a a (603).

947 They are found only when the second syllable in the original form is long
by nature or by position (5 2 2 ).
948 The following forms of dpdco ( fo p a -) see, may serve as examples of assimi
lation of an -am verb:
I ndicative
CONTRACTED ASSIMILATED
S. 1 opdo) opS 6p6(o
2 o p o E i; opa5 opdag
3 opdE i opa opda
Du. 2 OpOETOV op d xov
3 OpOETOV op axov
348
MORPHOLOGY
Pl. 1 6pdoêv opraÊV

2 op d cT E o p a tE
3 opdovoi op& oi 6p6o)oi
S u b ju n c t iv e O p t a t iv e
CONTR. ASSIM. CONTR. ASSIM.

opaii5 opag opdag opdoiî 6pu^l 6p6(a^l
Pa r t i c i p l e In f in it iv e
CONTR. ASSIM. CONTR. ASSIM.

M asc. opdtAV opwv oporav opdtoOai 6pao0ai opdaoOai
G en. opdovTog opwvtog opowvtog opdeiv opdv opdav
Fem . opdovoa opuoa opocooa
R eg u la r Verbs in -m
lOTtmi (oTii-, wra-), (m ake) stand; (0ii-, &£-),put; iim i (f|-, e-) send;
5iS(oî (8ft)-, 8o-),îve, grant
A c t iv e V o ic e
949 I n d ic a t iv e
PRESENT
S. 1 lOTtmi TlOtmi iiimi 5iSft)î
2 10X115 Ti0i]5 (0a) 1115, Iei5 Sl 8 oi 5 (0a)
3 lOTIlOl T1011OI, T10EI tiioi, Iei SiSmoi (5i5oi)
Du. 2 loraTov T10ETOV lETOV 8 i 8 oTov
3 loratov T10ETOV lETOV SiSoTov
Pl . 1 ioxa|iiEV T10 EHEV lEHEV SiSoÊV
2 icrraTE T10ETE lEXE SiSoTE
3 ioxdoi Tl0Eiai (0601)01) iElOl SiSovoi
IMPERFECT
S. 1 ICTTHV ET1011V lElV E8 i 8 ovv
2 ICTTI15 ETI0E15 IEI5 £5i5ov5
3 lOXt] ET10 ei ?El ESiSov
Du. 2 loxaTov ET10ETOV lETOV eSiSoxov
3 ICTTdtllV ET10ET11V lETIlV eSi56ti]v
Pl . 1 loxanEV ET( £HEV
0 lEfiEV e8 (8ohev
2 ICTTttTE et( ete
0 l£T£
Si
e815ote
3 loraoav ET10EOaV lEOaV, lEV ESiSooav
FUTURE
S. 1 OTT|Oe) 0T|Ob) {]Oft) 5(5oo)
2 OTT|OEl5 0T|OE15 110 E15 5(5oei5
3 OTT|OEl 0T|OEI 1]OEl (EOEI) 5(00£1
349
HOMERIC GREEK
Du. 2 0TT|0eT0v 0T|OETOV IÔETOV 6(ooetov

3 OTiioETOV 0tjoETOV ilffETOV 8(ooetov
PI. 1 OTljoOHEV 0f|OOHEV flOOHEV ScoaoÊV
2 OTfjoETE 0T|OETE ilOETE SraOETE
3 OXtJOODOl 0f|OOV0l i]00\)0 l Suoovoi
N ote, didco/ii may have (very rarely) dtdaoco instead of dcooo) in the future.
FIRST AORIST
s. 1 EOTiloa E0t)Ka EtjKa EScoica
2 EOTtioag E0t]Ka; ET)Ka5 EdoiKai;
3 EOXIJOE E0t1KE EtlKE eS coke
Du. 2 EOTiioaTov E0T|KaTOV ET|KaTOV E6(OKaTOV
3 EOTtlodTtlV eOtiKdtiiv EtlKdttlV ESwKaTiiv
PI. 1 £<JTT|OaHEV E0TlKaHEV ET|Kafiev E5(0KanEV
2 EOTT|aaTE e0f|KaTE ET|KaTE ESwKttTE
3 EOTHoav E0t]Kav EtJKaV ESwKav
(Eoraoav)
SECOND AORIST
S. 1 EOTTIV
2 EOTtig
3 EOTt]
Du. 2 EOTt)XOV E0ETOV EITOV eS otov
3 E(TTT|TtlV E0ETT1V EITIJV e66 tiiv
PI. 1 EOTtmEV E0E|llEV ElÊV E6oflEV
2 EOTIITE E0ETE EITE eSote
3 EOTIlOaV E0Eoav Eioav ESooav
(Eorav)
950 Subjun ctive

PRESENT
S. 1 ioTw(|iii) TiOra(î) iw(ni)
2 iatfi5(0a) Ti0ti5{0a) ifi5(0a) 8i5ra5(0a)
3 ioTti(oi) Ti0ti(oi) ifi(oi) 8 i 8 m(o i )
Du. 2 iorfiTov T10T1TOV ifjtov 8 i 5 wtov
3 icrtfiTov TlOflTOV ifjTOV S i S mtov
PI. 1 âtwÊV TlOwflEV iw|llEV Sl5uÊV
2 ioTtiTe TlOtlTE illTE SlS&TE
3 ioTwoi T10WOI iu o i 5i5raai
SECOND AORIST
S. 1 (TTra(î) 0&(^l) w(Hi) dra(î)
2 oxti5(0a) 0fi?(0a) fi5(0a) 5cp5(0a)
3 arfi(oi) 0fl(oi) 8w(oi)
350
MORPHOLOGY
Du. 2 OTtlTOV Ofjtov T|TOV 5 mtov

3 orttiTOV 0t]TOV flTOV 8 S tov
PI. 1 OTMflEV Gtonev (bjiev SuÊV
2 orfiTE 011TE f|TE 5 mte
3 OTMOl 0 MOI (dOI Suol
951 The second aorist subjunctive of -fii verbs (949ff.) seems to have had a
double form of inflection:
1) With a short thematic (796) vowel, such as d-qco, dijeig, dÊi, Oijetov,
dêzov, dt]o/iev, Otjere, Bôvoi, {rldrjfii put, place).
2) With a long thematic (796) vowel, such as 6i]a), Q'^r]q, dyjf], diqrjiov,
6 i]T]tov, dtjcofêv. d^rjTS, dy)(ooi.
The vowel of the stem is then shortened (572), producing:
3) Oeco, d E r]q , detj, der]zov. 0 et]to v , Oecofiev, derjTS, d e a a i.
This form then undergoes contraction (584-585), giving:
4) OS), dfjg. df], Ofjiov, Oijzov. dafiEU, drjiE, OS>oi.
952 The subjunctives of athematic (797; 865:2) second aorists and the sub
junctives passive of both first and second aorists are similarly formed. Thus, Xvda,
XvOfjg, XvOfj. etc., contracted from XvdEco, XvdEt]g, ^vOsr], etc.; Tpaqm, rpaqyfjg,
Tpa<pfj, etc., contracted from TpacpEco, rpatpstjg, TpacpEij, etc.
953 OPTATIVE
PRESENT
s. 1 i(rta iiiv t i 0 e (tiv lElllV 8 i 5 otf)v
2 ioTaiTi5 T10EII15 lEltl? 8 i 5 o(ti 5
3 i(rta iti Tl 0Elt) lEii] SiSoit)
Du. 2 ioraiTOV T10EITOV itito v 81801T0V
3 io x aiT iiv Tl0Eit11V iEixtiv 6 i8oiT tiv
PI. 1 io ra tn E v T10EI|IIEV iElÊV 8l8o^ÊV
2 ioxaiT E T10EITE I eit e 81801TE
3 ioTaiEV T10EIEV I eiev 81801EV
SECOND AORIST
S. 1 o r a iiiv 0EltlV EttlV 80 ill V
2 otaiiig 0 Eltl? 8oiT]g
3 orxait] 0EIt1 ElTl 8o ifi
Du. 2 o ra iT o v 0EITOV EITOV 801T0V
3 axaiT tiv 0EIT11V ElTllV SoiTtiv
PI. 1 CTxaifiEV 0E1JIEV EiflEV 8 oihev
2 oraiTE 0EITE EITE SOITE
3 otaiEV, 0 E1EV £l£V 801EV
o ta iiio a v
351
HOMERIC GREEK
954 Imperative
PRESENT
s. 2 10 X1] (-a) t ( 0ei (= -ee) lEl (=IEE) 8(8ot) (5i8(o0i)
3 ioTdtM T10EXM ierw 8i66t(o
Du. 2 loratov T10ETOV lETOV 8180T0V
3 iordtMV T10CT(OV I ctwv 8180 TMV
PI. 2 ICTTatE T10ETE lETE 8180 TE
3 iordvxMV T10^TMV i^ w v 8 i 86 vto)v
SECOND AORIST
S. 2 (jTii0i 0E5 S09
3 OTf|t(0 0CTtO ETO) 86 t (o
Du. 2 (TciiTOV 0CTOV ETOV SOTOV
3 OTtpwv Octwv ETWV 86 t (ov
PI. 2 oxiiTE 0ETE ETE SOTE
3 ordvTwv 0EVTWV EVTWV 86 vt (ov
955 I n fin itive

PRESENT
laTdnEv(ai) Ti0EHEv(ai) (1168) lEHEv(ai) 8iS6nEv(ai) 8iSoCvai
SECOND AORIST
CTtfivai (oTTmEvai) 0Eivai (0EHEv[ai]) Eivai (EHEv[ai]) 8ovvai (86|iiEv[ai])
956 Participle
Pres, ioxd^, iwraoa, T10EI?, Eioa, iEi5 , iEioa, 8i8o v ;, o v a a ,
ioxdv ev 6v
2Aor. ordg, ordaa, ordv 0Efg, 0Eioa, 0^ E15 , Eioa, EV Sovg, Sovoa,
Sov
Note: For the second perfect system oi'loTrjfii see 924.
MiddleVoice
957 Indicative
present
S. 1 loranai Ti0Ejiai lEâi i oâi
8 8
2 iCTxaaai t i 0 E o ai lEoai 8 iSoaai
3 lotatai t(0ETai lETttl 818oTai
Du. 2 loxaaOov t(0Ea0ov IEW0OV 8(Soo0ov
3 loraoOov t(0Ea0ov IEO0OV 8i5oo0ov
PL 1 i<rtdnE(o)0a Tl0EHE(o)0a iEÊ(o)0a Si86nE(o)0a
2 ioxaa0E Tl 0 Ea 0 £ IEO0 E 8 i8 oo0£
3 loravtai Tl0EVTai lEvxai SiSovtai
352
MORPHOLOGY
IMPERFECT
s. 1 iCTTdnnv ET10EH11V £Sl56^t1v
2 lo rao o ETI0EOO lEOO eS i S ooo
3 lo xato ET10ETO lETO E6 i 8oto
Du. 2 lotaaOov Eti0EO0OV i£CT0OV eS i 5 oo0 ov
3 ioxdoGiiv ETl0Ea0tlV iEO0tlV E8i86o0tiv
PI. 1 ioTa|iiE(o)0a ET10EHE(o)0a iEHE(o)0a E5iS6Ê(o)0a
2 iotao0E ET10EO0E IEO0E E5i8oa0£
3 loxavTO ET10EVTO lEVTO e5 (8 ovto
FUTURE
S. 1 (rtf|oonai 0Tjooâl iia o ^ a i Su oo ^ ai
2 (TTT|OEai 0T|OEai iloEai SraoEai
3 OTiioETai 0Ê Tai iloE tai 8 (ooETai
Du. 2 OTT|OE(J0OV 0T|OEO0OV 11OEO0OV 8(ooeo0 ov
3 (JXT|aEa0ov 0ÊO0O V 1]OEO0OV 8 woeo0 ov
PI. 1 (TTiia6nE(o)0a 0t]o6jiE(o)0a T|o6 nE(o)0a 8 (ao6 Ê(o)0a
2 (rtf|OEO0E 0lioEa0E 1]OEO0E 8(ooeo0 e
3 oTâovtai 0T|OOVTai iôovTai 8(5oovTai
FIRST AORIST
S. 1 EOTTiodniiv
2 EOTTIOaO
3 EOTTjOaTO E0T|KaTO
3 EOT»ioao6T)v
Pi. 1 EOTt]odnE(o)0a
2 EOTT|oaa0£
3 EOTT|OaVTO
SECOND AORIST
S. 1 E0EJII1V ElfillV e86 hiiv
2 E0EO eI o e 8 oo ( od )
3 ------- E0ETO EITO e 8 oto
Du. 2 E0EO0OV e I oOov e 8 oo 0 ov
3 ------- E0E(T01]V EIO011V e86o0tiv
PI. 1 E0EH£(a)0a £iH£(o)0a E86 Ê(o)0a
2 E0EO0E EIO0E e 8 oo 0£
3 E0EVTO EIVTO e 8 ovto
958 S u b ju n c t iv e
PRESEN T
S. 1 ioT&âi Ti0&ât iMâl 8 8 l raâl
2 lOTTiai Ti0tiai iiia i S iS & a i
3 iCTxiiTai Ti0iiTai ifiT a i 8 iS « x a i
353
HOMERIC GREEK
Du. 2 iotf]o0ov xiBtjoBov iiio0ov Si5ua0ov

3 iarfjoOov Ti0tio0ov itio0ov 8iSwa0ov
PI. 1 i(JT(one(o)0a Ti wnE(o) a
0 0 i(aê(o)0a 5l5(aê((T)0a
2 ioTi]a0e T1011O0E if)O£
0 Si§rao0E
3 ioTwvTai Ti0wvtai iwvtai 8i5wvtai
SECOND AORIST
S. 1 0&âi (aâl
2 0f]ai T|ai Sraai
3 ------- 0ilTai r|Tai 5uTai
Du. 2 OOV
011 0 T](J0OV 5rao0ov
3 ------- 0fja0ov T|O0OV SwaOov
PI. 1 0<a^£(a)Oa wne(o)0a 5(a^£(o)0a
2 tio E
0 0 T|o0e Srao0E
3 ------- 0SvTai (bvtai 8ravxai
959 O ptative
PRESENT
S. 1 icnaijniiv TI0Elfl11V lElflllV 5i5oi|iit]v
2 lo ra to T10EIO I eI o S iS o io
3 iatatTO T10EITO lElTO SlSoiTO
Du. 2 ioTaio0ov tl0ElO0OV i£lO0OV Si5oio0ov
3 ioTaio0Tiv Tl0Eio0tlV i£io0iiv 8i5oia0iiv
PI. 1 i(rra(fiE(o)0a Tl0E(nE(o)0a i£ifiE(o)0a 8i8o(fiE(a)0a
2 ioTaia0E T10EIO0E ieio Oe 8 i8ot(j0£
3 ioTaiato Ti0Eiaxo lEiaxo Si8oiaTo
SECOND AORIST
S. 1 0ElfltJV ElJlllV 8 oifitfv
2 0EIO ElO 8 oto
3 ------- 0EITO EITO 8oIto
Du. 2 ---- 0 EIO0 OV EiaOov 8 olo0ov
3 0e(00iiv EICT011V 8 o(o0tiv
PI. 1 0 EifiE(o)0 a £lJlE(o) 0a Soi|t£(o)0a
2 ---- 0 EIO0E eIo0e 8oio0e
3 ---- 0 ElaTO Eiato 8 otaxo
960 Im perative
PRESENT
S. 2 iCTxaoo Ti0EOO lEOO 8 iSooo
3 i(Ttdo 0 (o T10EO0O) i£O0ca 8i86o0(o
Du. 2 loxaoBov T10EO0OV IEW0OV 8 i8 o o 0 o v
3 i(iTdo 0 (ov T10EO0MV i£(T0COV 8 i86a0(ov
P l. 2 iOTao0E t(0EO0E i£O0£ 8 i8oo0£
3 iwrdaOrav Tl0£a0MV Ieo0(ov 8 i86o0(av
354
MORPHOLOGY
SECOND AORIST
S. 2 0EO (0EV ) EO 860 ( 8 o i )
3 0EO0(O £00(0 56a0o)
Du. 2 ------- 0EO0OV E(T0OV 66 o 0o v
3 0EO0WV EOOWV 66 o 0(i)v
P l. 2 0EO0E EO0E S 6 o0 e
3 ------- 0£O0(I)V Ea0(OV 86 o 0(ov
961 Infinitive
present iCTxaoOai T l0 E O 0 a i iE O 0 a i 8 i 8 o o 0a i
SEC. AOR. ------- 0EO 0ai EO 0ai SooO ai
962 Participle
PRESENT io t d n E v o g , I], o v T i0 e fie v o 5 ,t ],o v i^ n e v o g , n , o v 5i56|U £V og,

(T i0 f|-, 1 1 6 8 ) t |,o v
SEC. AOR. ------- 0eHEVO5,i|,ov EHEV05, n , o v S o ^ e v o ;, t | ,o v
9 6 3 For the second perfect system of {ozTjfii see 924.
Irregular Verbs in
964 e i|iii ( eo -) be
Indicative Present
present IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE IMPERATIVE
S. 1 E i^ i T|a (Ett, EOV) E(i) E ltJV
2 EOOl (E I 5 , E i) ^ o 0a (E iio 0a ) E il5 ( 0 a ) E 1115 (E 015 ) IO 01
3 eo tI ÊV EIIV, ^ v ) e t i( o i) (T |ai) E ll] (EO l) EOTM
Du. 2 EOTOV T|OTOV EtlTOV E itO V EOTOV
3 e(tc 6 v i^ aT iiv EtlTOV ElTt)V EOTMV
Pl. 1 E l^ E V Ê V EWJIEV E lflEV
2 EOTE ^T E E11TE EITE EOTE
3 E i o i (EftO l) T |o a v (E o a v ) EWOl ((OOl) e Iev EOTWV
Future E a ( o ) o f i a i , EO Etti, etc. Infin. E i v a i , E f i( n ) E v ( a i)

M id . I mper . EOOO Pa RTIC. EfOV, E o v o a , EOV
965 E i m ( E i -, i - ) come, go
PRES. IMPERP. SUBJ. OPT. IMPERAT.

S. 1 Eijii i l i a (iiio v ) l( 0( jl l ) lO l f l l
2 Ei5(0a) flEi5(0a) itl5 (0 a ) 1015 101
3 ElOl jlE l ( illE , T|E, IE) ITl(Ol) 101 (lE lH ) ITCl)
355
HOMERIC GREEK
Du. 2 ITOV ITOV ItlTOV lOlTOV ITOV

3 ITOV ITIIV lllTOV ioiTTlV ITWV
PI. 1 IflEV flOHEV IW HEV lOlflEV
2 IXE f|TE ItlTE lOlTE ITE
3 laoi ilioav (f|oav, 1(001 lOIEV iovTwv
qiov,loav)
Fut. e lo o ^ a l Infin. itvai, i n r v ( a i ) Partic. im v , oCoa, 6 v
966 ei5(o (£l5oâl) (ptiS-, poi5-, pi6-), Ei5iia<i), ciSov, oiSa know
Active
Indicative SecondPerfect
2 ndperf. 2 ndpluperf. SUBJ. OPT. IMPER.
S. 1 o i5 a flS E a ), i5 e w ) eISeIiiv
E i 5 t i ( e i S eo
2 o io 0 a tl5tig(ea) E i5 fj5 (0 a ) ElSsit]!; lo O i
(o i8 a 5 ) (f |E ( 8 E l5 )
3 oi8e f\ 5 n (jl8eE, EiSf)(oi) eISeiii iOT(a
T | E iS E l)
Du. 2 lOTOV lOTOV ei8etov EiSElTOV lOTOV

3 lOTOV ioxtiv eiSetov eISeitiiv lOTWV
PI. 1 i6 hev iS flE V ei8o|hev eISeihev
(EiSElimEV)
2 lOTE lo rtE eiSete eISeite lOTE
(eISeihte)
3 io (o )a o i lo a v EiSraoi eiSeiev lOTMV
(eiSEinoav)
Note: The only Homeric examples of the first- and second-person plural sub
junctive have the short mood vowel {-ofiev, -ere, 800).
Fut. ei5f|O(0 (dooâi) Infin. i6fiEv(ai) Partic. eiSw?, eiSvia (iSvia), eiSdg
967 <P»mt <P“ -) speak
Active
Indicative Present
PRES. IMPERF. (2ndAOR.) SUBJ opt . IMPER.
S. 1 tptmi £(ptlV (pM(Hl) q)aitiv
2 (p ij;, q>fio6a Ecpil5(0a) q>Ti5(0«) (pa(ii 5 <pa0i
(<pd0i)
3 (pT]oi Ecpi] <p?i(ai) (palti (pdTO)
Du. 2 <paTOV E<paTOV (ptlTOV (pdxov
3 (paxov EqKXTHV (ptjTOV <pdx(i)v
3 56
MORPHOLOGY
PI. 1 cpafiEV E(panEV (pa^t]ÊV

((paifiev)
2 (patE E(paTE (pfjTE cpaillTE (pdtE
3 <paoi Ecpaoav(E<pav) (puai (paitfoav (pdvTwv
((paiEv)
Partic. (pdg, (paoa, (pdv Infin. (pdvai, (pdÊv(al)
Note. The active imperative and infinitive do not occur in Homer; intead the
middle forms, <pdo, <pdadai, etc., are used.
968 K £^âl (KEI-) lie, recline
Indicative Present
PRES. IMPERF. SUBJ. IMPER.
S. 1 KEiâi EKEiflllV
2 KEioai EKEIOO KEIOO
3 KEitai EKEITO KEltai (KIlTai) KEIO0(I)
Du. 2 KEiaGov EKEIO0OV KEIO0OV
3 KEIO0OV EKEIO011V KE100MV
PI. 1 KEIflE(o)0a EKElflE(a)0a
2 KEIO0E EKE100E KEIO0E
3 KEiatai (KEO vtai, ekeivto(EKEiato, KEia0(OV
KEtttai) EKEttTO)
Put. K£iao|uai PRES. INFIN. KEloOai PRES. PART. KEiflEVOg, I], OV
969 final (f|o-) sit
Indicative ]Present
PRES. IMPERF. IMPER.
S. 1 Tijiai
2 f|oai f|00 f|00
3 f|axai T|OTO 11(10(0
Du. 2 rjaBov TJO0OV T|O0OV
3 T1O0 OV llO0t]V iio0(ov
PI. 1 ii|HE{o)0a t]Ê(o)0a
2 ô0E fjoOE r|o0E
3 T|vxai ( i i a t a i j E a t a i ) tivto ( tia to , E ato) 1]O0(|)V
PRES. INFIN. Ô0ai PRES. part. llHEVOg, 11, 0 V
357
HOMERIC GREEK
III. SYNTAX
General
970 The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case; oXeicovTO de X aol
and the people kept perishing, edetoEv d ’ 6 yipcov and that old man was afraid.
971 The subject of an infinitive is regularly in the accusative, d/x/ie dim dy/
djiovooT Jjoeiv I think we shall return home, PovXofi e y a k a d v a o o v en^ evai I
wish my people to be safe. The subject of the infinitive is usually omitted when it is
the same as the subject or object, either direct or indirect, of the main verb.
972 When the infinitive is used to express a command (1107:11), its subject,
when expressed, is in the nominative when of the second person, and in the accu
sative when of the third person: ai) rdv y' ejieeo o i KaQdmEoQai ^ a k a K o io iv but
(do you) attack him with soft words.
973 A finite verb regularly agrees with its subject nominative in person and
number, except:
1) A neuter plural subject may take its verb in the singular: (pxeio KrjXa
deoTo the shafts o f the g od sped, xd d e d a o ia i these (things) have been
distributed.
2) With two or more subjects connected by and, the verb may agree with
one of the subjects and be understood with the rest: fit] vv zoi ov
XpalofiT] oK fjm p ov Kai a r ififia deoTo lest the scepter and the fillet o f
the god avail thee naught, si d f j o fio v JiokEfidg re dujud K a i Xoi/idg
'Axaiovc, if war and pestilence at the sam e time crush the Achaeans.
3) When referring to two, the plural and dual are often interchanged or
united: deivm d e o i o a o e (pdavdev and her eyes appeared terrible, tco o i
£ oav K^pvKE Kai OTprjpo} depdjwvTE who were his two heralds and ready
attendants, tco <5’ a m m fid p iv p o i eoTcov and let these two be witnesses.
974 A noun or an adjective in the predicate after verbs meaning be, appear,
become, be thought, m ade, named, chosen, regarded, and the like, agrees with the
subject in case: ofirjyepeEg te ytvovTO and they becam e assembled; og dpioTog
'A x aiav Evxerai eiv a i who boasts that he is fa r the mightiest o f the Achaeans, t o 6 e
To i icfjp EidEzai Eivai but that seems to be even as death to you, dE ddg xe Kai
o v x id a v o g KaXEolfj.r]v I would be called both cow ard and worthless.
975 Apposition A noun used in connection with another noun to describe it,
and denoting the same person or thing, agrees with it in case, and is said to be in
apposition with it: ’AxpEidrjg dv a^ dvdp&v the son ofAtreus, king o f men, X pvorjv
i^xifiaoEv aprjxfjpa he slighted Chryses, the priest.
976 The verb sifil (especially the forms of the third-person singular and plural
iox t, Eiol) is often omitted, when it can easily be supplied from the context.
977 Other words are at times omitted: yai jud xode OKfjnxpov = vai fxd x6 6 e
oKfjnxpov dfivvfii yea, by this scepter (I swear).
358
SYNTAX
Nouns
Nominative Case
978 A noun is in the nominative;

1) When it is the subject of a finite verb (970).
2) When it is in the predicate after certain verbs (974).
3) Sometimes for the vocative: drjfiofidpog fiaoi^ sv g king, who devour
(the goods of) the people!
Genitive Case
The Greeic genitive represents two earlier cases (657): 1) the genitive proper,
denoting the class to which a person or thing belongs. 2) the ablatival genitive (for
merly the ablative), usually expressing separation, source, cause.
979 Some of the most common uses of the genitive are:
1) Possession: lipmcov souls o f warriors, Aidg jiovk^ the will o f Zeus,
£jii vrjag Axuimv to the ships o f the Achaeans: the possessive genitive.
2) The subject of an action or feeling: fifjviv ’A x d fjo g the wrath o f Achilles
(i.e., felt by Achilles): the subjective genitive.
3) The object of an action or feeling: AxdXrjog Jiodi] a yearning o f {i.e.,
fo r) Achilles, jw o io g Kai id rjiv o g ep ov the desire o f {i.e., fo r) fo o d and
drink: the objective genitive.
4) Material or contents: Jiv p ai vekvcov fu n eral pyres o f corpses, E K a x d n jia q
Tuvpav i]d a iy S y hecatom bs o f bulls an d o f goats: genitive of material.
5) Measure of time, space, or value (price): Kovprjg Xpvorj'idog d jio iv a
deâoO ai to accept the ransoms fo r the m aiden Chryseis: genitive of
price.
6) Cause or origin: evxcoXfjg ejiifi£jU(p£Tai he fin ds fau lt on account o f a
vow (unperformed), x^ ^fievov yvvaiK og vexed fo r the sake o f a
woman: the genitive of cause.
7) The whole after words denoting the part: rig OeSv; which (one) o f the
gods? TO M d o v jiokE fioto the greater p art o f the war: the partitive
genitive.
980 The partitive genitive may follow all adjectives, adverbs, nouns, and parti
ciples that denote a part: oicovojwXcov ox d p iaxog fa r the best o f augurs, oio g
ApyElcov alone o f the Argives, x&v (3' dlXoiv o v Tig opdTO but not any one o f the
others saw h er
981 A genitive in the predicate after verbs meaning to be, etc., and other copu
lative verbs, may express any of the relations of the genitive in 979:1 -7.
982 Any verb whose action affects the object in part only, or that means to
or to enjoy, may take the genitive: d p v a v ic v io rjg a iy a v t e t e X e 'ci ov d v T id o a g
sh a re ,
h a v in g p a rta k e n o f the f a t o f u n b le m ish e d la m b s a nd goats, 'iva J id v T sg E iia v p c o v xa i
f ia a ilf jo g in o rd e r th a t a ll m a y reap the b enefits o f th e ir kin g .
359
HOMERIC GREEK
983 Verbs meaning to begin, m ake trial of, take hold of, touch, attain, claim,
aim, hit, miss, take the genitive: icd^tjg ek e n r jle t a v a she grabbed Achilles by the
hair o f his head, la/Je yovycoy lay hold o f his knees, eX6 vze having taken hold
o f her hand, Jioddg lEzayw v having seized m e by the foot.
984 Verbs signifying to taste, smell, hear, perceive, comprehend, remember, forget,
desire, care for, spare, neglect, wonder at, admire, despise, take the genitive: KkvOl
juev hear me! oeOev d ’ eyco o v k aXeyl^co o v d o d o fia i Koxeovxoq I reck not o f thee,
nor am I concerned at thine anger, KTjdero A ava& v she grieved fo r the Danaans, Kai
jiEv Êv fiovMcov ^vviEv and they hearkened to my advice, x&v îv fxv^ aaoa having
rem inded him o f this, O ixiq o v X^dEX EfEXfiioyv Thetis did not forget the behests.
985 The genitive follows verbs signifying to rule, lead, direct: dg T eveS ow
a v d ooE ig (thou) who dost rule Tenedos, dg navxmv Apyelcov KpaxEEi who rules all
the Argives. (These verbs sometimes appear with the dative.)
986 Verbs signifying/u//ne55 and w a n t or la c k take the genitive of material
(979:4). Those meaning to f i l l take the accusative of the thing filled, and the geni
tive of material: f iE V E o g ( p p s v s g n l f i j d a v x o h i s d i a p h r a g m w a s f i l l e d w i t h r a g e ,
K o v p o i K p r jx r jp a g E Jie o x E ij/ a v x o J i o x o t o t h e y o u n g m e n f i l l e d th e m i x i n g b o w ls to th e
b r im w it h d r in k .
987 The genitive may denote that from which anything is separated or distin
guished (genitive of separation); hence it is used after verbs meaning remove,
restrain, release, cease, fail, differ, give up, etc.: Xrjy' epidog cease from strife, jw Xe^ ov
d' an ojm v E o but refrain fro m war! It is used also to denote source: dEivrj KXayyt]
yEVEX ap y v p E oio fiio lo a terrifying clang arose from the silver bow.
988 The genitive follows verbs signifying surpass, be inferior to, and all others
that imply a comparison (993): KXvxaifivtjoxptjg jipofiEjiovXa I prefer (her) to Cly-
temnestra, J i E p i ndvxcov E f i / i E v a i aXXmv to be above all others, oT n s p i fiovXrjv
Zlaraftii' EoxE (you) who surpass the D anaans in counsel.
989 Verbs compounded with a preposition are often followed by the genitive:
xd JioXiav EÊJipddofiEu what(soever) we took as spoil from the cities, TiEpioxso
jiaid d g protect your son. (However, see 1004.)
990 The genitive may denote time within which anything takes place.
991 Many adjectives kindred in meaning or derivation to verbs that take the
genitive are followed by the genitive (objective).
992 Many adverbs, chiefly those of place, and those derived from adjectives
that take the genitive, are construed with the genitive: xrjkddi ndxprjg fa r from her
native land, n d p o iff avxoTo in fron t o f him, h fiiv o g Evxdg within the harbor.
993 Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative degree take the genitive (988),
unless followed by rj (t]E) than: ov id iy eoxi xepe Icov she is not inferior to her (liter
ally not worse than), <pEpxEpdg Eifii oeQev I am mightier than you, yXvKlav fisXixog
sweeter than honey.
360
SYNTAX
994 A noun and a participle not closely connected grammatically with the
rest of the sentence may stand by themselves in the genitive. This construction is
called the genitive absolute. Examples: av x o v KlvrjBEVTog as the god moved, ifiev
âvxog Kai eni xôvi SepKoÊvoio while I live an d look out upon the earth. (See
also 1111-1112.)
Dative Case
The Greek dative represents three earlier cases (657): 1) the dative proper,
denoting to or fo r which something is or is done; 2) the instrumental (dative),
denoting instrument, means, manner, cause, accompaniment; 3) the locative (dative),
denoting p lace where and time when.
995 The indirect object of a transitive verb is in the dative: Tijv o i ndpe
(Poifiog AjidAAcoi' which Phoebus Apollo granted to him, Ji&q t o i d a a o v a i yepai;
how shall they give you a prize o f honor?
996 Many verbs that in English are transitive are intransitive in Greek and
take the dative. The verbs of this class are mainly those meaning serve, benefit,
defend, assist, please, obey, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort, and their opposites; also
those signifying abuse, anger, blame, envy, friendliness, hostility, reproach, threats,
etc.: (iaoiX fji xoXcoOeig incensed at the king, o v k 'Axpeidt] rjvdaue Ovfia it was not
pleasing to the son o f Atreus in his soul, v v t o i o v xpalofir] O K rjjiT p o v K a i
o re n fia d eo io lest the scepter and the fillet o f the god avail thee not, ijisld ero fivdm
he obeyed the com m and, ^ oi apij^ eiv to defend me, o t e xcooerai a v d p i x^PV^ when
he becom es enraged at an inferior, ajieiXijoo) d e t o i code an d I shall threaten you as
follows, nr] VI ’ A xaioT atv continue to rage against the Achaeans.
997 A person or thing for whose advantage or disadvantage a thing exists or
is done is put in the dative: a m o v g d e e k a p ia tevx£ k v v e o o i v oicovoial t e d a h a
and it m ade themselves a booty fo r the dogs and a banquet fo r the birds, n a id a (5’
Efioi )iVoai but fr e e fo r m e my child, r o d s ^ oi Kpijrivov EEXdcop accomplish fo r me
this desire, rjîv a n d Xoiydv d fiv v a i to ward o ff destruction fo r (from) us, icai 6i]
ju o i y e p a g a v r d g a .(p a ip t ]O E a d a i d j i E d E i g and you threaten to take away fo r (from)
m e my prize o f honor, 'A xi^ lfji êOe/êv xo^ ov to forego (your) anger fo r Achilles,
o v v d ’ )]juTv d a h a z a p d ^ t ] and (so that) he m ay (not) throw the banquet into confu
sion fo r us.
998 The dative of interest or reference denotes the person to whose case a
statement in limited.
999 The dative with E i/u f, y i y v o f ^ a i , and verbs of similar meaning, may
denote the possessor: r a v (5' alAwv a f i o i e o t i n a p d v r j l b u t o f a l l e ls e w h i c h a r e
m i n e b e s i d e m y s h ip , zcS o i E o a v K i ] p v K e w h o w e r e h i s t w o h e r a l d s .
1000 The dative of the personal pronouns often denotes the possessor, with
out such verbs as E i fii , y l y v o f i a i , etc.: o o o e 6 e o i n v p i e I k t t j v an d his two eyes were
like fire, 6 f i o i y e p a g e p x E t a i d X X i] my prize o f honor is going elsewhere, d E iifd } de
o i OOOE (p d a v O E v and her eyes gleam ed terribly.
361
HOMERIC GREEK
1001 The dative is used after verbs meaning to give commands, and to lead the
way fo r : v^ eoo ijy ^ o a r’ A x a ia v 'Ik io v e i a a and he led the way fo r the ships o f the
Achaeans into Troy, M v p fiid o v e o a i a v a a o e rule the Myrmidons!
1002 The dative follows some verbal nouns and many adjectives and adverbs
of kindred meaning with verbs that take the dative; r a Ka.K e o t i <plXa (ppeol evil is
dear to your heart, ov tI fio i a h i o l eio iv they are in no wise blam able in my view,
EXdioToq ^ oi e o o i you are most hateful to me, ejiei fidX a o i cpiXog iêv since he was
exceeding dear to him, zoi e o o v ia i they will be (too) hard fo r you, fXdog
EOOETai he will be propitious toward us.
1003 The dative is used after all words signifying likeness or unlikeness, agree
ment, disagreement, union, or approach: v v k t I EoiKcbg like the night, o o o e 3 e o i
nvpi ElKTt]v and his eyes were like unto fire, o v a o l j i o t e lo o v exco yspag never have
I a prize o f honor equal toyou(rs), im elKeX ov a d a v d t o io iv like the immortals.
1004 The dative follows many verbs compounded with ev, avv, and kn\, and
some compounded with npog, n a p d , Jiepi, and v jio : a m o l o i j3eXog e(pTe(g hurling
a dart upon them, og 'A pyeloiai iCTjde’ e d fjK E V who brought sorrows upon the
Argives, vtjvai n a p r i f i e v o c , sitting beside the ships, o o l ye n a p e ^ e x o she sat down
beside you, o i ovju<ppdaoaro /iovXdg 0 h i g Thetis devised plans with him, jirjrpi d'
eyo) Jiapd(prjjui but I advise my mother, e v a p r o ytXog Q e o w i v laughter arose am ong
the gods.
1005 The dative is used to denote cause, manner, means, instrument, and
agency: z io e ia v A a v a o i sfid d aK p v a o o io i fiE leo a iv may the D anaans atone fo r
my tears with thy darts, ejieoiv Kai x ep oiv dprjÊiv to assist with words and hands,
v jiep o jd irja i xdx d v jio re dvfiov okeaar] by his deeds o f arrogance he will soon lose
his life, fitjde ^l(pog eXkeo %Eipl and do not continue to draw your sword with your
hand, ejieoiv d v e ld io o v revile him with words, X^Pî o v /ia x ^ o o fia i 1 will not fight
with my hands, KvdE'i yalm v rejoicing in his glory, ra> a t KaKtj aiar] xekov therefore
I bore you to an evil lot, xfjv yS/// dsKovxag djirjvpcov whom they took away by vio
lence against his will, ôXjifj OEdv tXdoKovxo they appeased the god with music and
dancing, XdfiE yovvcov oK aifj she seized his knees with her left (hand), zoi KE(paXfj
K axavE voofiai I shall nod assent to you with my head.
1006 The dative is used to denote the circumstance, or that by which a thing
or person is accompanied. The dative of circumstance is most common with
abstract or semi-abstract words, and is often used to express the reason or occa
sion: o o i a/i’ E O J u if iE d a we accom pany you, o i o i afxa x p d c p E v TjdE y E v o v x o who
were bred and born with him, EKdoxco d a fia "Hcpaiaxog J i o i r j o E v idvlrjoiv
jip a jild eo o iv Hephaestus m ade a hom e fo r each with cunning mind, xlg a<pcoE Epidi
^v vet]Ke; who brought these two together in strife?
1007 The dative is used with verbs signifying to be with, follow, join, agree, be
like, fight, strive, trust, be pleased, and occasionally with those meaning to buy and
to abound: o v k AxpEidr] i ] v 6 a v E it was not pleasing to the son o f Atreus, K a i o i
362
SYNTAX
n e ld o v T a i'A x a io i and the Achaeans trust in him, a v d p d o iv fidxeoQ ai to fight with

men, K a p r l o T o i g E f i d x o v r o they fou ght with the mightiest, epi^ efievat (iaaiXf]i to
strive with the king, o v t o i ^ a x ^ o o f i a i I will not fight with you.
1008 The dative is used to denote the agent, particularly with the perfect and
pluperfect of the passive.
1009 The dative with or without a preposition is used to denote the place
where an action takes place. It is used of towns and countries, the great divisions of
the world, the chief spheres of action, of the parts of a thing, or of the human body,
after some verbs that imply locality or time, and after some verbs of motion where
we would expect the accusative with a preposition: oi>x ijvdave Gvfia it was not
pleasing in his soul, t6 ^ ' m fio io iv e'xcov having his bow on his shoulders, to T o i d'
dvEOTT] K d l x a g and Calchas arose am ong them, fii] k Xe jit e voco do not play the
th ief in your heart, dfiqxo d v fia <piÊovoa loving both ( o f them) in her heart, <ppEoi
dvEi he rages in his mind, iîEvov Kopv<pfj seated upon the summit, fidxj] TpcoEooiv
dpi]yEiv to assist the Trojans in battle, dsicdT t] 3 dyopi^vdE KaXsaoaTO Xadv
AxiXlEvg but on the tenth (day) Achilles sum m oned the people to an assembly,
dmdEKdTT] 6 e X e v o e t u i Oi)XvfiJidvdE but on the twelfth (day) he will com e to
Olympus, m)XXag 6 e \f/vx^q A idi npoiaij/Ev and sent many souls to Hades, o v d' iv i
tppEOi jidkXEO o fjo iv and do you place it in your heart, d y o v o i 5e d & p a d v aicn and
they are taking presents to the lord, KdiuiEoov ev A-qfivcp I fell into Lemnos.
1010 The dative is used to denote in what particular point or respect some
thing is true: d y a p filt] o v Jiaxpog dfiElvcov fo r he is better in strength than his own
fa th e r C f 1014.
Accusative Case
1011 The direct object of a transitive verb is in the accusative case: v o v oo v

cbpoE he roused a plague, Xpx>or]v tju fiaoE v he dishonored Chryses, X vodfisvog
d v y a r p a to ransom his own daughter, <pEpav d iw iv a bearing ransoms, OTEfi/xar’
e'Xcov having fillets, e a I o o e t o A x a io v g he kept entreating the Achaeans.
1012 Any verb whose meaning permits may take an accusative of cognate
form, or equivalent meaning. This is called the cognate accusative, and may follow
intransitive as well as transitive verbs: EiJiag snog you have spoken a word, 66dv>
e X d s f i E v a i to go (on) a journey, EJiog r' E(paxo and she spoke a word.
1013 The words f . i o g , f i v d o g , and Epyov with pronouns or adjectives are at

times practically equivalent to the neuter of the pronoun or adjective without these
words; e i a o i n dv Epyov v :i E i ^ o f i a t i f I shall yield to you in every m atter
1014 An accusative restricting the force of the verb to a part, character, quality,
or attribute of the subject may follow many verbs that are intransitive or reflexive
in meaning. This is the accusative o f the p art affected, or accusative o f specification,
and may also accompany a noun, an adjective, or even a whole sentence: Jiddag
(oicvg AxiXXEvg sw ift-footed Achilles (literally Achilles swift with respect to his feet),
363
HOMERIC GREEK
XcodfiEvoi; Kfjp enraged in heart, o v e9 ev eoti XEpElav, o v di/xag o v d t (pvrjv ovt

a p (ppEvag o v d s xi spy a she is not inferior to her, neither in build nor beauty nor
disposition, nor yet in accomplishments.
1015 The accusative is used to denote extent of time or space: Jiav d' w a p
(pEpofirjv and all day long I fell, n pdn av ^/xap da'ivvvTO the whole day through they
feasted, olkecov drjv fjoTo he sat silent a long time.
1016 The accusative dependent on an omitted verb follows the adverbs of
swearing vi^ and fid : fid 'AndXkoiva by A pollo! v a i jud t6 6 e oKfjiiTpov by this
scepter! (977)
1017 The verbs Einov and avddco, and more often their compounds, may take
an accusative of the person addressed: npooEEiJiEv he addressed Cal-
chas, ovS e zf fiiv npooEcpavEov nor did they say anything to him. (Compounded
with /xEtd, however, they may take the dative.)
1018 The accusative may be used of the person about whom a thing is told,
known, thought, provided that:
1) The person or thing is treated as the thing said or known, and not
merely as spoken or known about; ovd' i]v A yafiE fivova Emr]q not
even if you say Agamemnon.
2) The real object of the verb is a fact expressed by a limiting clause or
word.
1019 Words denoting the goal are in the accusative after verbs of motion: ov
KEV iK afiai upon whom (soever) I may come, Kviorj (5’ o v p a v o v ikev and the savor
went to heaven, spxEodov kXio It] v A x d fjo g g o to the tent o f Achilles!
1020 The following classes of verbs may be construed with two accusatives:
1) Verbs of asking, teaching, reminding, demanding, clothing, unclothing,
depriving, and taking aw ay: Efi' d(paipEixai X p v o r jld a 4>oij3og
AjidXXav Phoebus Apollo is depriving m e o f Chryseis, fiîE o v t6 v6 ’
djwaipEO Kovprjv nor do you deprive him o f the maiden.
2) Verbs of naming, choosing, appointing, making, thinking, regarding,
and the like: av z o v g <5e Ekcopia tevxe kvveooiv oicovoTof te d a h a
and m ade themselves a booty fo r the dogs and a banquet fo r the birds,
ov BpidpEcov KaX eovai 6eo(, dvdpEg 6 e te ndviEq A iyafcova whom
the gods call Briareiis, but all men (call) Aegaeon.
3) Verbs meaning to do anything to or say anything o f a person.
1021 The accusative may denote an object that is affected by an action, and a
second accusative of the particular part affected may be added {accusative o f the
whole and part): ri de a s (ppEvag iketo JiEvOog ; but what g rief has com e upon you
in your heart? nspi y a p p a i xakK og eXe i ^ ev <pvXXa te Kai (pXoidv the bronze has
stripped it o f leaves an d bark round about. Note: Some would classify the accusative
of this last sentence under 1020 above.
364
SYNTAX
Vocative Case
1022 The vocative, with or without ci), is used in addressing a person or thing:
d sa goddess! ci) AyjAev Achilles! A r p e id a i sons o f Atreus! Note: The nominative is
often used for the vocative, 978:3.
Adjectives
1023 The positive of an adjective may imply that the quahty indicated is not in
the proper proportion for the purpose under consideration: fit] dt) jidvTag ifio v g
EmEAn.EO fivdovg EidrjoEiv' yuXEJioi toi eoovtui do not hope to know all my plans;
they will be too hard fo r you (to understand).
1024 The comparative and superlative endings of adjectives are often employed
merely to denote an unusually high degree of the quality signified, without any idea
of comparison being involved, and are sometimes best translated as, for example,
rather g ood (comparative) or very g ood (superlative).
1025 An adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number, and case, but not
always in form, since they may belong to different declensions: vovoog kuki] an
evil plague, where vovoog, although feminine, is of the second declension and ends
in -og. This rule applies also to adjective pronouns and participles: fivpl' dkyE a
countless woes, noXXag (5' 'Kpdijuovg y/vyag A id i jipoiaiffEv and sent many valiant
souls to Hades, diaoT^Ttiv E ploaviE these two separated after they h ad quarreled,
dw g AyjXkEvg godlike Achilles, tjXOs 9 oag ejii vfjag he cam e to the swift ships, Oeoi
OXv fim a eyovTEg the gods who have Olympian homes.
1026 When referring to two, the plural and the dual are freely interchanged
(973:3): d v o yEvsal two generations, ro) <5’ a m a /udpTvpoi eotcov and let these two
themselves be witnesses.
1027 An adjective or a participle, usually with the pronoun o, tj, to, may be
used substantively as a noun: ret r s o v r a rd r' EOodfXEva Jipo r eovtu both what is,
what will be, and what was before, r d icaicd these calamities, such calamities (1034).
Pronouns
1028 The Pronoun 6, r|, to There are three chief uses of the pronoun o, to :
1) As an independent demonstrative (and third personal) pronoun,

meaning this, that, he, she, it. This is its original use, and the one most
commonly met with in Homer: 6 v ov oov copos he roused a plague,
Toi' X pvoijv fjTifiaoEv &pt]Tt]pa ATpeiStjg the son o f Atreus dishon
ored that (well-known) Chryses, the priest, tt] v d’ Eym ov kvaco but I
will not fr e e her, i'dEioey d ’ 6 yEpcov and that old man feared.
2) As an article properly speaking (“the”), that is, modifying and making
definite a noun, but not having any particular demonstrative force.
This is its ordinary use in Greek after Homer.
365
HOMERIC GREEK
3) As a relative pronoun; xbv teke Arjrcb whom Leto bore, tco o i e o a v

KijpvKE who were his two heralds, t^ v ^ oi S d o a v visg A xaim v whom
the sons o f the A chaeans gave unto me.
N o t e . Many expressions in Homer that are translated into English by the rela
tive pronoun in a subordinate clause seem to have been coordinate originally. Thus
the pronoun (o, ?/, to) in these last three sentences may well have been thought of
as demonstrative with asyndeton (i.e., without a conjunction) rather than as rela
tive (1113-1114).
1029 As an independent pronoun it has two main uses:
1) It is “resumptive,” that is, it refers to something already mentioned,
X pvorjv tjzifiaoEv, 6 y a p ÎQe Ooag eju vfjag he dishonored Chryses,
fo r he (Chryses) cam e to the swift ships.
2) It makes a contrast, usually in combinations, such as 6 fiEv . . . 6 6 e ,
and other words that help to give this effect.
1030 6 fiEv . . .6 3 e and 6 i juev . . . o i S e are frequently used to contrast both
definite and indefinite persons and things.
1031 Its use with an adversative particle generally, but not always, marks a
change of subject: o 3 e but the other
1032 The use of 6, x6 as an article evidently arose from its employment as
an independent pronoun, followed by a noun in apposition: i] 6' aEKOvaa a fia
Toioi yvvi] k Iev but she went with them against her will, i.e., the woman, where
yi>vfj is added as an afterthought for the sake of greater definiteness.
1033 So also it may serve to introduce a new person, in this case anticipating
the noun: a m a p 6 fitji'iE vtjvai jiap^fiEvog n tjk fjo g vidg Jiddag mKvq Axt^^svg
but he kept raging as he sat beside the ships, did the Zeus-born son o f Peleus, the
sw ift-footed Achilles.
1034 With the adjective or participle it is often used as a substantive: rd jiAeTov
the greater part, xa icaicd these calamities, such calamities (1027).
1035 It is also used with the neuter accusative, singular or plural, of the adjec
tive as an adverb: rd n p m a at first (780-781).
1036 On the other hand, the masculine or feminine with an adverb may be
used substantively.
1037 Nouns with a possessive pronoun take the article only when they refer
to a definite individual: ro ad v fiEvog this anger o f yours.
1038 It usually has a demonstrative force, and its absence does not mark a
noun as indefinite; fifjviv aEids, dsa, nrjktjiddEco 'Axi^fjog sing, goddess, the wrath
o f the son o f Peleus, Achilles.
1039 The Personal Pronouns The nominative of the personal pronouns is used
mainly for emphasis and contrast: o v 6 e ovvOeo but (you) consider! If the subject is
unemphatic, the pronoun is usually omitted; a g i<paxo thus he spoke (761).
366
SYNTAX
1040 The oblique cases of the third personal pronoun are anaphoric; that is,
they have an antecedent previously expressed to which they refer, when unac
cented; but when they are accented they have their original reflexive use: a jio eo
K a ^ fia k E V v io v she h u rle d h e r so n f r o m her, K a 'i o i n e lO o v T a i A x a io 'i a nd the
Achaeans t r u s t in h im .
1041 Dem onstrative Pronouns The demonstrative pronouns are thus

distinguished:
1) (£)ic£Tyog. rj, o is used of something remote from the speaker.
2) o, rj, TO differs from o v ro g , (i)ic£Tvog, o d e, etc., in that it usually
marks a contrast in objects, but does not distinguish them as near
and far, present and absent, etc.
3) The compounds of 6, //, to are used o f something near the speaker, or
o f something associated with him.
4) ovTog is used of something that has been mentioned already, or else
of something of particuler interest or concern to the second person.
5) o, ?/, TO in addition to being employed as a relative and as a personal
pronoun is used to mark a contrast.
6) avTog in all its cases regularly means self, but at times may mean
sam e; it is regularly intensive and is used especially to contrast a man
or an object with other less important details, such as clothing, weap
ons, and appurtenances of various kinds.
1042 Possessive Pronouns The possessive pronouns are as a rule equiva
lent to the possessive genitive of the personal pronoun: Jiaig ifio g = JiaTg Efxov
m y c h ild .
1043 The Interrogative Pronouns The interrogative rig, r i who? w hich?

w hat?may be either substantive or adjective, and may be used in either direct or
indirect questions.
1044 The Indefinite Pronoun The indefinite rig, ri som e (one), something,
any (one), anything may be either substantive or adjective, but is sometimes almost
the equivalent of the English indefinite article, a(n): xiva pidvxiv Epefofiev let us
ask a seer.
1045 Relative Pronouns A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and
number, but its case depends on the construction of the clause in which it stands:
ix f jv iv OLEidE, f j a k y E ’ £0t}iCEv sin g the w ra th w h ic h caused woes.
1046 The antecedent of the relative may be omitted when it can easily be sup
plied from the context, especially when it is indefinite: kco iof eoti d&p
ajw aipE iaO ai, ooT ig oeOev a v r io v Einj] i t is better to take aw ay the g if t s ( o f th a t
m a n) w hoever speaks a g a in st yo u .
1047 The antecedent is sometimes attracted into the relative clause. It then
agrees in case with the relative.
367
HOMERIC GREEK
Prepositions
1048 Most prepositions were originally adverbs (chiefly local), and are often
so employed in Homer (without case): e v 6 e but therein, v j i o below, Jiap d by his
side.
1049 They are used both with nouns and verbs, but are often separated from
the words they modify, sometimes following them. This separation in the case of
verbs has been incorrectly named tmesis {ififjo iq cutting), as in icpaiepdv eni
h e X le v and he enjoined a stern com m and (upon him), where ent is to be
fiv O o v
taken with heXXev as part of the verbal idea, and Kai ejii Kve<pag t^XOev and dark
ness cam e on, where em must be joined with fiXBsv.
1050 Dissyllabic prepositions regularly have the accent on the ultima, but in
two cases they take the accent on the penult:
1) When they follow the word modified (with the exception of dfi(plg,
a v a , avxl, d id ): a e j i i JioXkd f^dyrjoa fo r which I underwent great toil,
Olv’ Ecp aXoc, upon the shore o f the sea.
2) When a preposition stands for itself compounded with a verb: evi,
ETii, f i h a , Jid p a, Jiipi (all compounded with sifil), and d m for the
imperative o f dvloTrjfii stand up! up!
1051 Prepositions are used with the genitive, dative, and accusative cases;
some are used with all three cases, some with only two, and some with only one.
1052 They are used to emphasize or to define more clearly certain case rela
tions. The prepositions do not “govern” these cases; rather the cases take the
prepositions.
1053 The genitive with prepositions primarily denotes that/rom which some
thing proceeds, the dative that in or by which something is or is done, the accusa
tive that toward, over, along, or upon which motion occurs.
1054 The primary relations expressed by prepositions are those of place and
time, but they may express cause, origin, agency, condition, purpose, and various
other relations.
1055 Prepositions are used in forming compound verbs, many of which, par
ticularly those compounded with ei>, eji I, and avv, are construed with the dative.
1056 With the genitive alone are used the following;
dvTi instead of ek (e^) out of, from
d:i6 off, from, away from :ip6 before
368
SYNTAX
1057 And the following, known as im proper prepositions:
aYX> near, close HEOotiyvg between

dvEi) without Êoq>a until
dvta, dvTiov opposite, facing v6o<pi(v) apart from
dvTiKpv straight to 6rtia0E(v) (from) behind
d\|/ behind jidXiv back from
EVEKa(ElVEKa) on account of Jidpoi0E(v) before, in front of
EKIITI by will of n;p6(T0E(v) before
EKTOg without tii Xe far (from)
EVT05 within TtiôOi far (from)
Several other, less common prepostions also take the genitive.
1058 With the dative alone are used: ev(i), eiv in, and o v v (^vv) with.
1059 With the accusative alone are used eig (eg) into, to, -3 e to.
1060 With the genitive and accusative are used: d id through on account of,
vjiEp over, on b eh a lf of, and K a id down (through).
1061 The following are used with the genitive, dative, and accusative:
d^(pi around, about, on both sides. reapd beside, to the side of.
from beside,
dva (up)on, up through, along. JiEpi around, concerning,
Erti (up)on, to, toward, against. n p o; toward, with reference to.
lUEtd with, after. vjio under, by means of.
Syntax o f the Verb
1062 A transitive verb is one whose action passes over to an object in the
accusative: ur]vii’ d e id e sing the wrath, e U o o e t o A x a io v g he kept entreating the
Achaeans.
1063 An intransitive verb is one whose action does not pass over to an object:
he came.
1064 In verbs with both first and second tenses (first aorist, second aorist, first
perfect, second perfect, etc.), the first tense is usually transitive (often causative,
1069), the second intransitive.
1065 The active voice denotes the subject as acting: v o v o o v d v d ozpaTov
copo ehe kindled a plague up through the camp.

1066 The passive voice denotes the subject as being acted upon: Aidg 3'
irekelETo ftovAi] but the will o f Zeus was being accomplished.
1067 The middle voice denotes the subject as acting reflexively:
1) upon itself: Jieidojuai I persuade m yself (obey), (paivoâi /show m yself
(appear).
369
HOMERIC GREEK
2) for itself: K a k eo iia i I call fo r myself, summon.

3) upon something belonging to itself, or in which it has a special interest;
îvofiai I loose (free) my own, ransom.
1068 It is often difficult to distinguish in translation between the active and
middle, but the action of the middle always has some reference, either direct or
indirect, to the subject, and the subject has an interest in, or is affected by, the
action.
1069 Some verbs are used at times in a causative sense, that is, the subject
causes something to be done by another: dV 6 ’ avTf]v X p v orjld a p ^ o ofiev let us
cause Chrysets to go on board (864).
1070 Sometimes the present tense indicates that an action is only attempted;
this is called the conative present: apvvfiEvoq striving to win.
1071 When an active verb that takes two accusatives (1020) becomes passive,
the accusative of the thing is retained, while the accusative of the person becomes
the subject: av a id elrjv ejiieifiiv e (You who are) clothed in shamelessness!
1072 The tenses denote tim e of action and kind of action (i.e., aspect).
1073 The time of action is indicated by the tenses only in the indicative.
1074 The present is denoted by the present tense, and by the perfect.
1075 The past is denoted by the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. The future is
denoted by the future and the future perfect.
1076 Continued or repeated action is denoted by the present, the imperfect,
and (occasionally) the future.
1077 Completed action denoting a permanent state is indicated by the
perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect.
1078 Action that simply takes place is indicated by the aorist and (sometimes)
the future.
1079 The imperfect denotes the continuance of action in past time, customary
or repeated action: eXvov, I loosed (freed), was loosing, kept loosing, was accustom ed
to loose.
1080 The aorist indicative denotes the simple occurrence of an action in past
time: eACaa I loosed, did loose.
1081 Inceptive aorist: The aorist of verbs denoting a state or a condition, or
continued action, usually denotes the entrance into the state, or the beginning of
the action; eddicp v oe he fell to weeping.
1082 The aorist is often used to express a general truth; this is called a gnomic
aorist, and is considered a primary tense: dg ke deoTg sm n eidrjrai, /xdka t ekXvov
avT ov whoever obeys the gods, him they especially hear.
1083 The future ordinarily denotes that an action will take place later; but
may express desire or a command.
370
SYNTAX
1084 The perfect regularly denotes a state or a condition (usually as the result
of completed action), and should be translated by the present: Jip ofiejio v ka I pre
fer, afi(pi(i£fit]Kaq you protect.
Moods
1085 The adverbs dv and ice(v) are often used to qualify the meaning of the
moods; they are used in two ways:
1) In independent clauses they are used with the subjunctive, the opta
tive, and with the past and future tenses of the indicative; and also
with the participle and infinitive, when they represent the indepen
dent indicative and optative.
2) In dependent clauses, usually with the subjunctive.
1086 These adverbs usually give a touch of indefiniteness to the clause in
which they stand. They have no exact equivalent in English. When they appear in the
conclusion of conditional sentences, they are usually translated by could or would.
1087 The subjunctive with these adverbs is used almost the same as the future
indicative, or the potential optative (1105).
1088 They are used in simple sentences and in the apodosis (conclusion) of
complex sentences to express limitation by circumstances or conditions.
1089 They are regularly found in final clauses referring to the future.
1090 They are usually found in conditional clauses in the optative and in the
subjunctive, when the governing verb is future, or in a mood that implies futurity.
1091 They are not ordinarily used in conditional, relative, and temporal clauses
with the subjunctive in comparisons and similes, or when they refer to events that
occur repeatedly or at an indefinite time, or when they refer to sayings that have a
general application.
The Moods in Simple Sentences
T h e I n d e p e n d e n t I n d i c a t i v e w i t h o u t a v o r k c (v )
1092 Without dV or Vff v) the indicative mood simply states a fact, either pos
itively or negatively, asks a question, or makes an exclamation.
1093 An unattainable wish that refers to the present or to the past is expressed
by a past tense of the indicative with u We ( ei Qe), or ei y a p : the negative is fit],
1094 To express an unattainable wish, a(pekov ought is used with the present
infinitive to denote present time and continued past action, or with the aorist infin
itive to denote past time.
T he I ndependent Indicative w ith av or k e (v )
1095 The aorist (and sometimes the imperfect) indicative is used with dv or
iCE( v) to denote past possibility, probability, necessity, or a cautious statement.
371
HOMERIC GREEK
1096 The past tenses of the indicative may be used with d v or k£( v) to denote
unreality.
1097 dV or ke( u) may be used with the future indicative with a conditional or
limiting meaning.
T h e In d e p e n d e n t S u b ju n c t iv e w it h o u t av o r k ^( v )
1098 The subjunctive without d v or Ke(u) is used in the first person, present
and aorist, to express a desire or a request (hortatory subjunctive): r iv d fidvTiv
E p e lo fiE v let u s a sk som e seer.
1099 The aorist subjunctive is used in the second and third persons (and some
times in the first) with in prohibitions: l i r j ae k ix ^ co le t me n o t come upon yo u .
1100 The present and aorist subjunctive are used in the first person (rarely in
the third) in deliberative questions as to what may (or should) be done advanta
geously or with propriety.
1101 The subjunctive is frequently used as nearly the equivalent of the future
indicative, and refers to some future event. It is usually qualified by dv or ks ( v),
and the negative is o v .
T h e In d epen d en t O p t a t iv e w it h o u t av o r k e (v )
1102 The independent optative without dv or k e ( v) is used to express a wish

that something may happen: v f iiv Oe o i doTev m a y the gods g ra n t to yo u .
1103 The potential optative ( 1105), which regularly takes d v or ice ( v ), is occa
sionally found without either.
1104 The optative is employed at times to express a command, a request, or
an exhortation, being practically equivalent to the imperative.
T h e In d ep en d en t O p t a t iv e w it h av o r k e(v )
1105 With d v or ice(v) the optative is used to express a future action that is
dependent on circumstances or conditions. This is called the p o te n tia l optative, and
is usually to be translated by m ig h t, could, w o uld , etc.
The Imperative
1106 The imperative expresses a command, or a request; the negative is /urj.
The Infinitive
1107 1) The only tenses that occur in the infinitive are the present, future, aor
ist, perfect, and future perfect. The middle and passive differ in form in the aorist
only.
2) In the subjunctive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, the tenses do
not of themselves indicate time.
3) The present in these moods denotes an action simply as continued.
372
SYNTAX
4) The aorist denotes an action simply as brought to pass.

5) The perfect denotes an action simply as completed.
6) The subject of an infinitive is usually in the accusative, but may be
omitted when it is the subject of the leading verb, or its direct or
indirect object.
7) The infinitive may be the subject o f a verb, especially an impersonal
one, or
8) It may be the object of a verb, especially verbs indicating wish, com
mand, advice, consent, attempt, and the like.
9) The infinitive may depend on adjectives or substantives, especially
those denoting ability, fitness, willingness, or have a similar meaning
to verbs that take the infinitive (1107:7).
10) The infinitive also may express purpose; the negative is /u)].
11) The infinitive is also used to express a command with the nominative
of the second person, or with the accusative of the third person for
the subject if expressed; the subject may be omitted. In this usage it is
the equivalent of the imperative.
The Participle
1108 The participle has only the present, future, aorist, perfect, and future
perfect tenses. It is used attributively as an adjective to modify a noun, or the noun
may be omitted and the participle (usually with the pronoun, 6, z6) may be used
as a substantive. Such participles usually indicate time present, past, or future relative
to the time of the main verb.
N o te s :1. The aorist participle may denote time contemporaneous with the
action of the main verb: fiE id ijo a o a edeâTO Kvnekkov she took the cup with a smile.
2. On the other hand, the present participle may express time previous to the
action of the main verb: X p v o rjid a e io e v dycov leading Chryseis on board he
seated her.
1109 The participle may express:
1) Time: Toiai dvioTdfiEvoc, /XEZE<pt] Axt^Êvg when he h ad risen
am ong them Achilles addressed them.
2) Cause: du<pco <piXeovoa because she loved them both.
3) Manner or means.
4) Condition.
5) Purpose or desire (usually the future participle): XvodfiEvog Qvyaxpu
(desiring, intending) to ransom his own daughter; fiaxrjodÊvoq (desir
ing) to fight, fo r the purpose o f fighting.
6) Concession: dAoxq) JiEp eov oi] even though you are my wife.
7) Attendant circumstance.
373
HOMERIC GREEK
1110 Greek often employs a participle where we would use a relative clause:
d eoi 'O kvfiJiia dcbfiar' ex ov teg the gods who have Olympian homes.
1111 A noun and a participle, not closely connected grammatically with the
rest of the sentence, may stand by themselves in the genitive in the construction
known as the genitive absolute. See 994.
1112 This construction arose from the use of the genitive modified by a parti
ciple, where the genitive was dependent on some word in the main construction of
the sentence, and many cases are on the border line between the absolute and the
dependent constructions.
Compound Sentences
1113 Asyndeton, or the omission of conjunctions between independent ele

ments of a sentence, is often used to mark lively and rapid descriptions.
1114 Parataxis, or coordination, was often employed where one would expect
a subordinate construction. 1028, note.
Subordinate Constructions
Purpose Clauses
1115 Clauses that denote purpose, or final clauses, are introduced by the final
particles cog, oji(ji)cog, iv a, otppa, ecog; the negative is fii^.
1116 Purpose clauses take the subjunctive after primary (816) tenses, the
optative (occasionally the subjunctive) after secondary tenses.
1117 The subjunctive sometimes takes dV or k e { v), especially with mg, ojiin)-
(og, and 6<ppa.
Object Clauses
1118 The two main types of object clauses are:

1) Object clauses with verbs of effort.
2) Object clauses with verbs of fear.
1119 oji(7i)(og (sometimes oig and /Va) is used to introduce object clauses with
verbs of effort. These clauses take the future indicative after both primary and sec
ondary tenses (816). The negative is
1120 With verbs of effort, object clauses may take the construction of purpose
clauses, with 6n{n)mg and the subjunctive or optative.
1121 With verbs of caution, negative object clauses take the construction of
clauses with verbs of effort or with verbs of fear.
1122 With verbs of effort, object clauses may take the subjunctive with a v
after o:j(ji)cog, and sometimes after ag.
1123 With verbs meaning to consider, plan, try, the subjunctive with or without
or the optative is used. These object clauses do not take the future indicative.
k e ( v),
374
SYNTAX
1124 The subjunctive, optative, or the future indicative, with oji(ji)cog {oji(ji)-
cog in the negative) may follow verbs of will or desire, instead of the infinitive
that is the usual construction after these verbs.
O b je c t C la u ses a f t e r V erbs of F ea r
1125 With verbs of fear that refer to the future, object clauses have the sub
junctive after primary tenses, and the optative (sometimes the subjunctive) after
secondary tenses (816).
1126 With ui] or dninjcoq /xt], the subjunctive or optative may be used to indi
cate a possible object of fear. The aorist subjunctive may refer to past time: dedoiica
H'q a e Jiapelni] I fe a r lest she has beguiled you.
1127 The indicative with (jufj oi) in the negative) is used to express fear
that refers to the present or past time. The aorist is employed in the construction.
Causal Clauses
1128 Causal clauses are introduced by o r / , e j i s 'i, ijie id t], o re, 6 , o te , d ji(ji)6 re ,
o v v e i c a , cog, and e i ! t e .
1129 Causal clauses that denote a fact regularly have the indicative after both
primary and secondary tenses.
1130 Causal clauses that denote an alleged or a supposed reason have the
optative after secondary tenses.
Result Clauses (Consecutive Clauses)
1131 Clauses of result are introduced by various words, some of the most
common being w o t e , cog, o i o g , 6 a ( o ) o g .
1132 These clauses may employ either the infinitive or the finite verb:
1) The infinitive is used to indicate an anticipated, natural, or possible
result; the negative is pir\.
2) When the finite verb is used, any form of the simple sentence may be
employed. The indicative (especially in the aorist) is the form most
commonly used, denoting the actual result of the action of the princi
pal verb; the negative is oi).
Conditional Clauses
1133 A conditional sentence regularly consists of two principal elements:

1) The condition, denoting a supposed or assumed (i/) case, called the
protasis.
2) The conclusion, denoting what follows if the condition is realized,
called the apodosis.
1134 El and a i are used to introduce conditional clauses in the indicative
and optative.
375
HOMERIC GREEK
1135 Ei dV. ei' (a i) /ce(y), i]v are used to introduce conditional clauses in the
subjunctive.
1136 In the conclusion a v or k e ( v) is employed with the optative to indicate
possibility, and with the past tenses of the indicative to indicate the unfulfillment of
the condition, or repeated action.
1137 The negative of the condition is firi; of the conclusion it is o v when the
conclusion is considered a fact if the condition be true.
1138 Present unreal conditional sentences have e'l with the optative in the
condition, and dv with the optative in the conclusion.
1139 Past unreal conditional sentences have the aorist or imperfect indicative
in the condition, and in the conclusion either the aorist or imperfect indicative
with d v or k £ ( v ), or the present or aorist optative with dv or k e ( v ). The imperfect of
unreal conditions represents past time.
1140 More vivid future conditions have:
1) El d v , rfv with the subjunctive in the condition, and in the conclusion
either the fiiture indicative or some other form referring to future time.
2) The subjunctive with x-ef v) in both condition and conclusion.
3) (Rarely) e i' (a i) k e ( v) with the future in the condition.
1141 Less vivid future conditions have si' /ce( v), ei d v with the optative in the
condition, and in the conclusion may have the present or future indicative, the future
indicative with >c£(v). the hortatory subjunctive, the subjunctive with d v or iC£(v),
or the optative, with the same force as the optative with dv or k e (v ).
1142 Present general conditions have d v ( ijv ) with the subjunctive in the con
dition, and the present indicative or its equivalent in the conclusion.
1143 Past general conditions have ei with the optative in the condition, and
the imperfect indicative or its equivalent in the conclusion.
Relative Clauses
1144 Ordinary relative clauses, defining an antecedent, have the constructions

of other simple sentences, except that k e ( v ) or d v may be used with the future.
1145 Relative clauses of purpose have the subjunctive, usually with k e ( v),
after primary tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses, although the future
indicative may be used.
1146 More vivid future conditional relative clauses have the subjunctive, usu
ally with d v or k e ( v ), and sometimes the future with d v or k e ( v ).
1147 Less vivid future conditional relative clauses have the optative with d v
or ic£(v) in the main clause, and sometimes have d v or ic£(v) with the optative in
the relative clause.
376
SYNTAX
1148 Present generalizing relative clauses usually have dV or ke( v) with the
subjunctive in the relative clause, or the present indicative or an equivalent in the
main clause.
1149 Past generalizing relative clauses have the optative in the relative clause,
and the imperfect indicative or its equivalent in the main clause.
Temporal Clauses
1150 Temporal clauses are introduced by the temporal conjunctions ore,

Ecog, evte, tjftog. oji(ji)ci)g, oippa; ejieI, EJiEidtj, {a<p) o v ; Eig ote ( ke( v)),
E igo (IC£(V)).
1151 Temporal clauses that refer to the future or to indefinite present time
have the subjunctive with or without d y or ice( f).
1152 Temporal clauses that refer to future time have dv or ice( v) with the
optative in the temporal clause, and may have the future indicative, or the subjunc
tive with d i’ or k H y) in the main clause.
Indirect Questions
1153 Indirect questions keep the mood and tense of direct questions, after
primary tenses—the Indicative, the past indicative with dV, the deliberative sub
junctive, or the potential optative with dV or /c e ( rj. After secondary tenses they may
keep the mood and tense of direct questions, but generally change to the optative.
Indirect Discourse
1154 The kind of the leading verb or expression in a sentence involving indi
rect discourse determines the construction:
1) Verbs of saying have either the infinitive or a or; (d>g) clause.
2) Verbs of thinking and believing usually take the infinitive.
3) Verbs of knowing, learning, perceiving, hearing, showing, and the
like, usually have the participle, but may have a o n (cog) clause.
1155 Clauses in indirect discourse introduced by o n or d>g, after primary
tenses keep the mood and tense of the direct form unchanged.
1156 Indicatives and subjunctives without dV or /csfy) usually become opta
tive after secondary tenses, but may remain unchanged.
1157 Subordinate verbs after primary tenses keep their original mood and tense.
1158 The optative is not employed in indirect discourse except in indirect
questions ( I I 53). After both primary and secondary tenses in principal clauses, the
same past tense is used that would have been employed in an independent clause,
from the speaker’s point of view. After the secondary tenses the future is generally
represented by E/UeAaov with the infinitive.
377
HOMERIC GREEK
IV. PROSODY
Rules of Quantity, the Hexameter
1159 Every vowel that has the circumflex accent is long (537).
1160 The vowel of the ultima in every word having the circumflex on the
penult is short (545).
1161 If a long penult has the acute accent, then the ultima must be long also.
1162 If the ultima is short and the penult has the acute accent, then the penuh
must be short also.
1163 If the antepenult has the accent, the vowel of the uhima must be short
(544).
1164 Exceptions to these rules are to be found only in the cases of the diph
thongs a i and oi, when final, which are then considered short (except in the optative
and oiK oi) for the purpose of accent but must be counted long when marking the
feet of the verse (547).
1165 Apparent exceptions to these rules are to be found in the case of certain
classes of compounds; o v ie , fitjre, o v n g , ijde, o id e, a id e , T ovode, rd o d e,
etc., where the primary form is accented without considering the following enclitic
as an integral part of the word.
1166 Most exceptions to the rules of quantity are only apparent.
1167 If an apparently short final syllable stands where a long one is expected,
it is probable that:
1) The pause of the caesura (1185) or diaeresis (1188) fills out the time
required for the foot, allowing the same freedom as at the end of a
verse, or
2) The following word has lost an initial f , making the preceding syllable
long by position. For various forms of metrical lengthening, see 525,
566, 571, 1168.
1168 Metrical Lengthening Syllables containing a short vowel followed by a
single consonant or by another vowel are lengthened under the verse ictus (i.e.,
stress; 1183). Compare 525, 566, 571, 1167.
Special Rules for Determining the Length of Syllables by

Their Position in Hexameter
1169 If a long syllable is followed by a short, then the next syllable must be
short also.
1170 If a short syllable is followed by a long, then the preceding syllable must
be short also.
1171 The first syllable of each foot must be long, and is to be given slightly
more stress than the other half of the foot (1183).
378
PROSODY
1 1 7 2 When a word ends in a short vowel (and sometimes the diphthongs a i

and o i), and the next word begins with a vowel, the final vowel of the first word is
regularly elided (575).
1 1 7 3 When a word ends in a long vowel or a diphthong and the next word
begins with a vowel, the long final vowel or diphthong is regularly shortened.
No te : Sometimes a long vowel or diphthong is shortened when followed by a
vowel within the same word.
1 1 7 4 If a word ends in a short vowel and the next word originally began with
vau (digamma, f), elision ordinarily does not take place (580), but may, as in S'
oiK adE = Ev S' fo'iKadE.
1175 If a word ends in a long vowel or a diphthong and the next word origi
nally began with a vau ( f ), the long final vowel or diphthong ordinarily remains long.
1 1 7 6 If a word ends in a long vowel or a diphthong and has the verse-accent
(ictus, 1183) on it, the long vowel or diphthong may remain long, even though the
next word begins with a vowel. C f 1168.
1 1 7 7 When a word ending in a vowel is followed by a word beginning with a
vowel, the result is hiatus. Hiatus is ordinarily avoided in poetry either 1) by elision;
2) by the use of movable consonants, 561-563; 3) by the shortening o f a final long
vowel or diphthong, 1173; 4) by crasis or synizesis, 586-587.
1 1 7 8 Hiatus may be allowed 1) when there is a distinct pause in sense (diaere
sis or caesura, 1185-1189) between the vowels that produce it; 2) when the verse-
accent (ictus, 1183) falls on the long vowel or diphthong that is followed by another
vowel; 3) when elision has already taken place; 4) after i or v; 5) when a long vowel
or diphthong is shortened (weak or improper hiatus).
1179 The meter of the Homeric poems is the dactylic (sometimes called the
heroic) hexameter, the most common of all Greek verse.
1 1 8 0 There are six feet to the verse, the first five being either dactyls (that is,
one long followed by two shorts: - • ' - ) , or its equivalent, the spondee (that is, two
longs:------ ). The sixth foot is always a spondee.
1181 In dactylic hexameter the ictus (verse accent or stress) is always on the
first syllable of each foot (1183).
1 1 8 2 The fifth foot is usually a dactyl; only about one verse in twenty has a
spondee in this place, which gives the verse a movement slower than usual. It is
then called a spondaic verse.
1 1 8 3 In each foot one part is distinguished from the other by a slight stress of
voice, called the ictus (i.e., stress or beat; literally, blow; 1171, 1181).
1 1 8 4 The final syllable of a verse may be either long or short, but as there is a
slight pause here, the final syllable in hexameter is always considered long, making
the last foot of the verse always a spondee, 1180.
379
HOMERIC GREEK
1185 Whenever a word ends within a foot, it is called caesura. If this coincides
with a pause in the verse, it is called the caesura of the verse. The caesura is
employed with great skill in the Homeric poems to make the verse more melodious
and to aid in recital.
1186 There is almost always a caesura in the third foot. It occurs either after
the first syllable of the foot, or else between the two short syllables.
1187 The pause after the first syllable is called the masculine caesura, that after
the second the fem inine.
1188 Whenever the end of a word coincides with the end of a foot, it is called
diaeresis. When this falls with a pause, it is called the diaeresis of the verse.
1189 The most important diaeresis is the one that comes at the end of the
fourth foot. From its common employment in pastoral poetry it is called the bucolic
diaeresis.
1190 For metrical purposes all vowels and syllables of Greek words may be
divided into long and short.
1191 The rhythmn of Greek verse is based on the regular succession of long
and short syllables.
1192 To obtain facility in reading the verse, a considerable quantity of it
should be memorized, special attention being paid to the quantity (that is, twice as
much time should be given to each long syllable as to a short), and the pauses
should be carefully observed. Although English verse is primarily accentual rather
than quantitative, still the memorizing of a few lines of English dactylic hexameter
(Longfellows “Evangeline,” for example, mediocre though it be) will materially aid
in getting the swing and the movement of the Greek hexameter.
380
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
N o t e ; E n trie s th at are no t in b o ld fa ce are sp e cific fo rm s o f th e m ain e n try listed in

p are n th eses.
W ord s p reced ed by an asterisk ( * ) are assu m ed fo rm s; th o se follow ed by an asterisk are
A ttic, a n a lo g o u s to k n o w n H o m e ric fo rm s, b u t n o t fo u n d in H o m e r; th o se follow ed by a
d ou b le a ste risk (**) are A ttic n o t an alo g o u s to H o m e ric fo rm s; th o se follow ed by a d agg er
( t ) are n o t E p ic o r A ttic, bu t are Io n ic o r L yric. O n stem s see 6 2 6 - 6 3 0 .
d-yvo(i)^-w,T|yvoiiiao fail to n o tice

d-, d- “alpha copulative," an inseparable (o b s e rv e ), b e ig n o ra n t o f (1 1 6 8 ).
prefix, denoting likeness, union, d y o v T E g ( d y m ) pres. act. participle.
association with, intensification. d y o p d -o n a i,f| y o p iio d | n iv h aran g u e,
d(v) “alpha privative”; see dv-. ad d ress an assem bly.
a (dg, ij, o). d y d p E V E (d y o p E V co ) line 385 = ijy o p s v E
aan to s, ov u n to u ch ab le, inv in cib le. (8 3 7 ), imperf
dyaye (dyco) = fjyaye (8 3 7 ). dyop-Ev-w, dyopEvao), f|y6pEvao sp eak,
dyaBo;, T|, 6vg o o d , n o b le, brave, usefu l, say, tell, h aran g u e, ad d ress an assem bly,
ad vantageou s. dyopfj, 115, T| assem bly, m e e tin g (p la ce ),
0V05,6 A g a m em n o n , king o f co u n c il, g ath erin g , h arang u e.
Mycenae, brother o f Menelaus (Helens dyopr|vSE ( d y o p ^ v , - 6 e , 7 8 8 :4 ) to th e (a n )
husband), and commander-in-chief o f assem bly.

the allied Greek military expedition d y o p i j a a r o ( u y o p d o ^ a i ) = i^ yop^ oaT o
against Troy. (8 3 7 ).
dydv-VKpog, ov sn o w -clad , v ery snow y. dyopi]Tf|5, a o , 6 orato r, ad d resser o f an
dvYEôSi OD, 6 m essen g er, co u rier, assem bly.
dye, dyete(dyco) pres. act. imperat., used dyx« near, clo se (b y ), at han d,
as interject.. U p! C o m e ! G o! dy-w, d^w, iiyayov, T|xa**, r|ynai*,
dyelpofiEv (dyEipo)), line 142 = dyelpcoÊi' t]X 0t iv * lead, d rive, c o n d u ct, b rin g ,
( 8 0 0 ), aor subjunct. carry , take.
dyefpM, iiyEipa, dyriyepnai, f|yep0tiv d-SdKpCT05,11, ov tearless,
(stem: dyep-) co lle c t, assem b le, gather, del see a iE i.
b rin g tog ether. d s i d s (u E ld c o ), imperat.
dyEfiEv(ai) (dyco) = dyeiv, pres. act. inf UEidov (dEldco) = i ] E i 6 o v ( 8 3 7 ), imperf.
d-y£pa<no5,11, ov w ith ou t a p rize o f h o n o r deiS-A ), d E ioo ), t jE i o a sin g ( o f ), h y m n ,
(yipug). ch an t.
aykaoq, ij, ovb rig h t, sh in in g , sp len d id , d-EiKT|9, E5 u n seem ly , g riev o u s, sh am efu l,
g lorio u s. u n fittin g .
381
d-^Kwv, ovoa, ov unw illing, A 15, A i5o5, 6 Hades, god o f the

a ^ o f i a i (OY*) reveren ce. underworld.
a^dfiEvoi (d!ô/jui), participle. a ia a , i]5, f| fate, lo t, p o rtio n .
& -0 d v a T o ;, t], o v d eath less, im m o rta l, a lT io 5,11, ov blam ab le, to b lam e, guilty,
im p e rish ab le (1 1 6 8 ). a cco u n ta b le , resp on sible.
adipiôi’ {a.-0£pl^(o) = tjdipilôi' ( 8 3 7 ), aix^t)Tti5, ao , 6 sp e a rm a n , w arrior.
imperf. ai\|/o im m ed iately , straightw ay, quickly,
a-0Ep(i;<i) (stem: 6e p i 8-) slig ht, d isregard , dic^wv, ovo a, ov silen t, in silen ce, b e in g
d espise. silen t, qu iet.
115, T| = X 0T |vt).
A f t i iv a it ) , aKovEÊv(ai) (d/covoj), infin.
X0T|vi], 115, Ti A th en a, goddess o f war, aKovaa (aKovco) = rjKovaa (837).
wisdom, and crafts, dtcovA), dKo^)ooâl, ijKovoa, dicr|Koa*,
a i (6. ij, t6). ilK o v o fia i* ,T jK o t)a 0iiv * hear, h eark en
a i ( d g , i], d ) . to.
a i = El if, w hether. dKpo5, ti, ov sh arp, h ig h , utter.
A 1 CI5, av T 05,6 A jax, after Achilles, the dKpdiazog, rj, ov (dicpog, r], ov), superl.
mightiest o f the Greek warriors. dXa (dig, dXdg, 6 , 1^), acc.
A iY « fw v , (DV05,6 A eg aeo n , a sea-divinity. &>.a8 E = d>.a- 8E (788 :4 ) to th e sea.
A iYE'i 5 i i 5, a o , 6 so n o f A egeus, Theseus. aX,Y05, £05, t 6 g rief, p ain , w oe, trou ble.
a i Y i - o x o 5, 11, o v aeg is-b ea rin g , dX.£Yi^w (dX.EYi8-) with gen. (984 ), care
a e g is-h o ld in g . (fo r), co n sid er, (have) regard (fo r).
aiYX.f|Ei5, E o o a , ev b rig h t, sh in in g , dXe^£fiEv(ai) (dM^co), infin.
g leam in g . dXiô), dX.£^f|Ofa, riX£^T)oa (dXaX.KOv)
aiy&v <ai^. uiydg, 6, ij). (stems: dÊK-, d^K-)
a i 5 E0|uai, a i 5 £ o ( o ) o ^ a i , f| S E o (o)d ^ tlv , w ard off, d efen d , p ro tect.
jlS E O n a i* ,f | 8£ a 0tiv (stem: a iS E O -) d>.i05,11, ov o f th e sea, briny, salty, m arin e.
reverence. a ll& bu t, m oreover.
!Aidi (*'Aig, 'Aidog, 6). elsew here.
a I 5 o - ^ a l = a i 5 E o ^ a l rev eren ce. d U o ^ a l, d ^ o n a i* , f|^dfitiv (dX.rit]v)
aido/iivQ) (aidofiai), dual participle. (stem: oaX-, = d>.-, 603 - 604 ) ju m p , leap,
a i E i ( a i^ v , o e i) (= a ip E i) alw ays, ever, bound.
co n tin u ally , eternally. d>.>.o5,11, o o th er, an o th er.
aiEV = o i E i . dX,X,o-TE at a n o th e r tim e.
a i 0 E, used to introduce a wish. dkdg (dXg, dXdg, 6, ij).
A i 0iortEt) 5, 1105,6 E th io p ian . a -k o x o g (cf. Aexog), o v , t| w ife, spouse,
o i 0-o\|», 0J105 b rig h t, sh in in g , g leam in g , akg, akdg, 6 , t| sea, b rin e.
a i ^ a , a l ^ a T 05, t o b lo o d , gore. (xAto (dkkoâi), 2nd aor. (798 ).
a i v o 5 , f|, 6v d re a d (fu l), te rrib le , aw ful, a f i a at th e sam e tim e, to g e th e r w ith.
p ain fu l, sorrow fu l. d -^ P p 60 l 05, q , o v a m b ro sial, d eath less,
a l v o T a x o g . rj, o v ( a h d g , f], 6 v ) , s u p e r l . im m o rta l, d ivin e, heavenly.
a iv w 5 terrib ly , d readfully, awfully, dîeifidêvai (dn£ljico),fem. plur. participle.
a i ^ , a i v 65, 6 , t| goat. dÊ^P-(l), dÊ^\|/(l>, t^Êlx(fa, fmEi(p0tiv*
aipECi), a i p i i o u , leX o v (EiX.ov, 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) , (e x )ch a n g e ; mid., reply, answ er.
i]p ilK O * ,iip im a i* ,f | p ^ 0iiv ’'‘ (stems: d fiE ivw v, o v (dyaddg, ij, 6v) comparat.,
a ip E - , ik-) tak e, seize, d ep rive; mid., b etter, braver, su p erior, preferab le.
c h o o s e , tak e fo r on eself. dfiÊ (eycb), acc. plur
382
I'j ( e y w ) . d a t. p lu r. d v d y o v T o (d v d y coj = d v ijy o v T O (8 3 7 ),

d -n v n w v , ov b lam eless, noble. im p e r f
a / u v v a i ta /u rv co ). a o r. a ct. in fin . d v -d y -w , d vd^w , d v T iY ay o v , d v i jx a * * ,

d f i v v o t ’ ( d u v v o ) ) . a o r. a ct. im p e r a t . d v t jy f ia i * ,d v T jx 0t iv * lead fo rth , set
d u v v E w *, nuCva (stem: d u v v -) ou t, go fo rth .
w ard off, d efen d , p ro tect, avert. d v a - 8^-<o, d v a S ^ o w , d v E S C o a (dvE SC v),
d/AVÊig ( d f i v o a c o ) . dvaSESvKa, dvaS^SDjiai*, dvESv0iiv*
d^^)oo(a, d^^)ô>, (f|^v^dÎlv) rise, em erg e, “dive up,” plun ge up.
(stem: dfivX") gnaw, tear, bite, scratch . d v a - 0nX,E-w, d v a 0t]X.r|o«>, dvE 0T|Xiioat
d^q>-i]pE(p^;, co vered at b o th ends. sp rou t, b lo o m (fo rth , an ew ), bu d
d^(p^, a d v ., a n d p r e p , w it h g e n ., d a t., a n d (a g a in ), b lo sso m .
a cc ., a b o u t, a ro u n d ; a d v ., a ro u n d , ab o u t, d v - a i 8£ i t i , 1) 5, f| sh am elessn ess.
o n b o th sid es; w it h g e n ., aro u n d , ab o u t, d v - a i 8i i ; , e? sh am eless, u n feelin g.
c o n c e rn in g , for (th e sake o f ) ; w it h d a t., d v d l ^ a g ( d v a i a a c o ) a o r act. p a r t ic ip .
aro u n d , a b o u t, b e ca u se o f c o n c e rn in g , d v -a ip E w , d v a ip rjo o ), dv^-E>.ov (dvEt>.ov,
at, by ; w it h a cc ., aro u n d , abo u t. 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) , d v f| p t)K a*, d v T | p im a i*,
d^(pI-Pa^v(l), d^<pl|ir|0(l>(d^(plPr|ooâl), d v *ip £ 0 t)v * (stems: a ip E - , eX,-) tak e up,
d^(pEP 1l o a (d^q>EpI1v ), d ^ (p lP ^ P l]K a, sn atch up, seize,
d^(plPEpaâl*, d^cpE^dOiiv* (stems: d v -a ia a w , d v a i^ o i, d v f ji ^ a , d v n ( x 0tiv
(Ja v -, P a -) su rro u n d , go aro u n d , (stems: p a i - , piK -) start up, d art up,
p ro tect. sp rin g up.
d f i( p i( iifitjic u g ( d fi< p ilia iv io ) , p e r f. d v a ^ , d vaicT og , o k ing , lord , p ro tecto r,
dfi(pi-Yi'r|Ei 5 (m .) bow legged, bandy-legged; c h ie f
p o s s ib ly sk illfu l, a m b id ex tero u s, u s e d o f d v -d -;io iv o 5, o v u n ra n so m ed , w ith o u t a
H eph a estu s. ran so m paid.
dn(pi-icv)rtE>.Xov, OD, TO d ou b le cup, g ob let; d v a o o e , lin e 1 8 0 ( d v d o a c o ) , im p e r a t .
it m a y b e t u r n e d u p s id e d o w n , th e d v u o o e ( v ) . lin e 2 5 2 ( d v d a a t o ) = t jv u a o £ ( v )
b o t t o m f o r m i n g a n o t h e r re c e p ta c le . (8 3 7 ), i m p e r f
d^(pl-Ê>â;, o i v a , a v b la ck all aro u n d , d v d o o o ), dvd^M, ijv a ^ a (stem: p a v a K -)
v ery black . ru le (o v e r), guard, p ro tect.
d^(p(l), o i i v , d u a l, b o th . d v u o T u g ( d v io T T j i.il ) , 2 n d a o r . a c t .
d v = K£(v) ( 1 0 8 5 - 1 0 9 1 ) . p a r tic ip le .
dV. lin e 143, = u i 'd . dvuait]a£ie{v) ldvtoir]ni). aor. act. optat.,
d v- { b e fo r e v o w e ls ) , d - { b e fo r e c o n s o n a n t s ) , causative (1069).
a p r e f i x (so m e tim e s called a lp h a dvdoxEo (dvixco). 2nd aor. mid. imperat.
p r iv a t iv e ) n o t, u n -, d is-, -less, w ith ou t, dvaaxd)v (dvExoi). 2nd aor. act. participle.
d v d (d v ) a d v ., a n d p re p , w it h g e n ., d a t., a n d dva-cpaivw, dvacpovEo), dv^cpi^va,
a cc ., (u p )o n , alon g , up th ro u g h , th e re o n , dvajiE(pt]va*, dvaII^<paaâl,
h ig h on ; a d v ., (u p )o n , th ereo n ; w it h d a t., dvE(pdvT)V (stem: (pav-) reveal, sh ow
(u p )o n , alon g ; w it h a cc ., th ro u g h (o u t), (u p ), m an ifest.
up th ro u g h . dvSdvw, dSijaw t, eaSov (= EpaSov), M Sa
d v a -P a iv w , d v a p tio u ( d v a p f jo o ^ a i ) , (stems: apaS-, apaSE-) please, d elig ht,
dvEPnaa (dv^Pnv), dvaPEp?]Ka, ch a rm .
dvap^panai*, dvEpdOtiv* (stems: d v d p a , d v 6 p d a i(v ). d v d p E g , d v d p i,
P a v -, P a -) go up, ascen d , em b ark . d v d p c o v (d v ijp ).
d v a f i d v T i g . d v a ft d c , ( d v u ft u lv c o ) , a o r a ct. d v 8 po-(p 6v o ; , o v m a n -sla y in g , m u rd ero u s.
p a r t ic ip . d v i( h ] (d v a jia lv c o ).
383
u v i d v , a v E d v o E T O ( d i ’a d v o ) ) . dvwy-w,dvw^w,ijvuâ, dvwY«( fo r
d v -eK T 0 5 , f |, 6 v e n d u r a b l e , b e a r a b le , f f v w y a ? 8 8 4 ) c o m m a n d , o r d e r , b id .
to le r a b le . d ^ a ) (d y c o ).
d v iX o v T O ( d v a i p m ) . 2 n d a o r. m id . dn’ = d . t d ( 5 7 5 ).
dv E X co v ( d v a i p E w ) , 2 n d a o r. p a r t ic ip le . dn-aÊip-o), dnaÊi\|f(D, djirmeiya,
a v E ^ o ; , o v , 6 w in d , b re e z e . dm )H Ei<p0Tiv* ( e x )c h a n g e ; m id ., rep ly ,
a v i p a i ; i d v i j p ) (1 1 6 8 , 5 7 1 ). a n s w e r, r e s p o n d .
a v i a x a v fdvE aTrjf ii ). 2 n d a o r. a ct. d n -d v E D 0£ (v ) a p a r t, aw ay,
avE O T t] ( a v io T T ifii) , 2 n d a o r. a ct. a - j i a g , d - jiC ta a , a - j i a v a ll, e n tir e , w h o le , all
d v - E /w , ( d v a a x T |a w ) , d v E O x o v to g e th e r .
(d v e o x E 0o v ) , d v o x w K a , d v E o x ti f ia i * d n a T ii> .6 ;, t | , 6 v d e c e itf u l, false,
( s t e i n s : a e x - , o x - ) h o ld u p , ra is e ; m id ., d ji - o v p d o ) = d :c a p p d ( a ; i m p e r f d s n iv p w v
e n d u r e , su ffer. w it h a or. m e a n in g ; d n o v p T |o c a ; a o r
d v f |p , d v S p o i;, 6 ( r e a l) m a n , w a r r io r , h e r o , p a r t ic ip le d n o v p A ; ( = d n d p p f i ; ) (stem:
a s d is t in g u is h e d f r o m a v Q p w jio i; ( m e re ) F p a - ) ta k e aw ay, d e p r iv e , s n a t c h aw ay.
m a n (1 1 6 8 , 5 7 1 ). d jie fi^ a E T O ( d jt o ji a lv o ) ) (8 4 2 ).
d v 0£pE w v, W V 05,6 c h in , b e a r d . djiedEâro (djwdExofiai).
d v O p w jio g , o v , 6 ( m e r e ) m a n , a s d i s t in d jiE iX i-w , d™ EiX,f|ow, ti} iE i).t]o a t h r e a t e n ,
g u i s h e d f r o m u v T jp ( re a l) m a n , w a r r io r , b o a s t, m e n a c e .
h e ro . aTKlTlOV = djtO ElJlO V .
dvioTdfiEvog (dvlorr)fii), presentparticip. d -rtE ip w v , o v b o u n d l e s s , lim itle s s .
dv-i-OTiini, dvaoTT|a(i), dviarnaa a T iE k v ix a lv o v T O { d T w X v ^ a l v o ^ a i ) .
(dvôTtiv), dvEOTTiKa, dv£otanai*, d n i X v o E ( d jio X v o ) } .
dvEordOnv* (steins: orri]-, ora-) s t a n d d - n E p £ i o i o ; , o v b o u n d l e s s , lim itle s s ,
( u p ) , s e t u p , ra is e , (a )r is e . c o u n tle s s , i m m e a s u r a b le (1 1 6 8 ).
dv-opov-w*, dvMpovaa j u m p u p , s p r in g d:i-dxw> d<p^^w (dJtoaxT|OM), djiEOXov
u p , sta rt up. (d re io x E 0 o v ) (steins: o e x - , o x - ) h o l d
dvarrjrrju (dvioTr]fxi) = dvEOTT^xrjv (8 3 7 ), f r o m , k e e p off.
2nd aor. dual. d-JiTm<ov, o v u n h a r m e d , p a in le s s , w it h o u t
dvT-dîo;, II, ov e q u iv a le n t, o f e q u a l v a lu e . h u r t ( d a m a g e , p a in , s o r r o w ) ,
d v T iiv o p e n ly , b e f o r e t h e fa c e , in th e d ^ n v tj;, h a r s h , c r u e l, r u d e .
p re se n c e (o f so m e o n e ). d jt t ] v p o ) v ( d jm v p d m ) .
dvTid-M, dvTidaw (dvtidw, dvri6M, d -:ii0 ^ -M * , d n i0 T |a M , T |n i6 t i o a d is o b e y ,
6 0 3 - 6 0 4 , 9 4 5 - 9 4 8 ) , T|VT(aoa a p p r o a c h , fa il t o o b e y , d i s t r u s t ,
p re p a re , sh a re, p a rta k e , g o (c o m e ) to m eet. d n i o g , t) , o v (cf. d : i d ) far, d is ta n t.
d v T i - p i n v w ith o p p o s i n g m ig h t, in a n 6 a d v ., a n d p r e p , w it h g e n ., off, f ro m ,
o p p o s i t i o n , a n ta g o n is tic a lly . aw ay , b a c k .
dvt(-P i05,11, ov o p p o s i n g , h o s tile . d n o a l p E o ( d ( p a ip ic o ), im p e ra t.
d vti- 0 EO5 ,1], ov g o d lik e , e q u a l to t h e g o d s , d i w a i p E i a Q a i (d < p a ip ico ), in fin .
a m a tc h f o r t h e g o d s . d T io -a ip E c o = d t p a ip ic o .
dvTio;, 11, ov in o p p o s it io n , o p p o s in g , dno-Paiv(o, dnoPtjoo) (djiopr|ooâi),
h o s tile , fa c in g , m e e tin g , in o r d e r t o m e e t. d n ^ P i f o a ( d n £ p t ) v ) , d j io P ^ ^ t f K a ,
dvxidaiaav (dvTido)} = dvxidovaav d j t o P ^ P o n a i * , d n E p d 0 iiv * (steins;
( 9 4 5 - 9 4 8 ) , pres, participle, fem. P a v - , p a - ) d e p a r t , g o aw ay.
dvTi-(pEp(i), dvToiow (steins: cpep-, oi-, djio-8^x-*>M«i> djioSiôfiai, direSE^dntiv
EVEK-) b e a r a g a in s t, o p p o s e . (d jiE S ^ Y H ijv ), d :io 8 ^ S E Y H o i,
384
d:i£8^x6iiv* receive (from), accept djr-(i)0^w, djiuoo), d:iEwoa, dJiEwonai*,

(from). djiEwa0 tiv (stems: praO-, pw0 E-) shove
dno 5 (6o(i>, dn^SuKa, away, push off, drive away.
dnoSeSwKa,* d:lo5^5oâl, dne560tiv djubaei (djuodico).
(stems: Sm-, 5 o - ) give back, restore, dp, dpa, pa naturally, of course, as you
return, give away, pay. know, as you might expect, that is, in
d:m6ovva! (djio6ld(o/ji). aor. act. infin. effect. It is not always translatable into
djio-EiJiov (stem: peji-) 2nd aor., speak out, English, which has no exact equivalent.
deny, refuse, dpd-oâl, dptiooâl, ^ptiadî)v,
d-jtoiva, (ov, id ransom(s). ijp a n ai* pray, curse, invoke.
ajoXeoBai (djiAXki'ui), aor. infin. dp-ap-ioKio, f|poa (ijpopov), dpt]pa,
djwX£o(a)av (dnoXXvfii) = dnxbXeaiajav tip0iiv (stem: dp-) suit, adapt, adjust,
(837 ). join, fit.
dn-6X.Xe^l, d;i-o>ia(a)w, djiw>â(a)a, dpva>.E05, n, ov horrible, terrible, awful,
dji6>.(o>.a (stems: 6).-, 6X,e-, 6>,o-) cruel, difficult.
destroy, kill, ruin; mid., perish, die. XpYEiog, ov, 6 Argive, Greek.
A jioXXwv, WV05 , 6 Apollo, god o f light, and X p Y o ;, Eo;, to Argos, a town and territory
patron o f music, poetry, and healing in Greece.
( 1168 , 571 ). dpv65, r|, ov bright, shining, swift, flashing.
dno-X.€â^voâl (stem: X,Cnav-> purify dpyvpEO?, 11, ov silver(y), of silver.
(oneself), clean(se). dpyvp6-jiEi;o;, a , ov silvery-footed.
d;io-Xv)-ci), djio>.â(i), d;t^>.Caa, dpyvpo-Toô;, ov of a silver bow,
d:to>iXvKa*, dno^^>.vnai, o;ieXv)0 iiv equipped with a silver bow, silver-
loose, set free, release. bowed (one), Apollo,
d:ta-voffT£-(i>*, dJiovooTT|OM, dnrvoffTiiao d p eloaii I') (dpeUou, or).
return (home), go (home), come. dpEicov, ov (dya 065 , f|, ov) comparat.
djio-v6a<pi(v) apart, away (from). (754 : 1), better, mightier, braver.
anonavEO (d.~io.iaiw), imperat. dpf|Y-M, dpf|^w, tjptjâ help, assist, succor,
ano-nav-ia, dnonavoca, dJl^JIavaa, dpijv, dpvo;, 6, f| lamb.
d;io;iinavica*, djionEJiovnai, dpfjâi (dptjyco), aor. infin.
djiEJiai)&nv* cease (from), refrain dpi]^£iv (dptjycoj.fut. infin.
(from), stop (from), desist, restrain. dpt]Ttjp, tjpog, 6 priest, one who prays.
djio-OTEixw, dJlôTlxov (stems: oteix-, dpioTEvg, f]o;, 6 chief, nobleman, leader.
OTIX-) depart, step off, march away. dpioTog, t], ov (dyoOog, r|, ov) siiperl.,
dnooTixc (d:woxElxo}). aor. imperat. best, noblest, bravest, fairest,
dno-tivw, dnoTioo), d n itla a , d p -w -n a i, dpônai*, f|po^T|v (f|pd^t]v)
d n oT E T lK tt*, d n o t E T l a ji a i * , acquire, win, save, preserve.
d:iETta6tiv* (stems: tei-, ti-, tiv/'-) dpvwv (dptjv, dpvoQ, 6, t'l).
repay, requite, recompense, atone for. dpaavxeg (dpaploKo)}, aor. participle.
ujioTiao^tev (d.toTii'a)). dpxdg, oC, 6 leader, commander, ruler,
dmwpaq (d.~iavpdco). chief, guide, pilot,
d-rtpiato;, t), ov unbought, without price, apx-w, dp^M, ^pô, npxa*, nPYHai*,
free. i]PX0tiv* begin, be first, lead, rule.
dmw, a\\iv>* (d<(/oâl), rm/a, d-aPE0T05, ti, ov inextinguishable.
il(p0iiv* (stem: d(p-) touch, lay hold of, d o o a (ooTig, ijtig, 6 ti), nom. and acc.
attach, attack. plur. neut.
385
aoaov (uyyj) comparat., n earer, closer. avTCi)? in th e sam e way, th u s, so, as m atters
ooTEponiiTr| 5, a o , 6 h u rler o f lig h tn in g , n o w are.
a t d p = a i) t d p (5 7 1 ) bu t, m oreo ver, o n the d<p-aipE(i), dcpaipiioco, dq>ÊXov (d(pEiX.ov,
o th e r hand, 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) , d<p^pT|Ka*, d (p f| p i]^ a i*,
a t a p t i i p d g , f|, 6v h arsh , bitter. d<ptip^6i]v* (steins: oipE-, eX-) tak e
a-T£).ei)Ti]T 05, ov u n acco m p lish ed , away, rob, deprive.
a t e p apart, aw ay (fr o m ), w ith ou t. d (pap im m ed iately , forth w ith .
&Tii,ns,T| reckless im pulse, blind infatuation, uipiXEode (a<paipeco), 2nd aor. mid.
folly, ru in , m isfo rtu n e, hu rt. d(pEV05, E05, t 6 w ealth , rich es.
a-Tlnd^(i), dtlndaw*, fixtâoa (stem: a<pEÊi (ajiix(o),fut.
T l ^ a 8 -) d ish o n o r, in su lt, slight, d espise. a(plEi <d<pirjî), imperf
d -T ln d -o ), dTt|aT|aM, f | tt^ t] o a , d ish o n or, d (p - i-tm i, d(pô(a, d (p£i)ica (d cpfjK a),
in su lt, slight, d espise. d q )E iK a *, d tp E in a i,* dq>E(0tiv (steins:
d-Tluo;, ov d ish o n o red , u n h o n o red , < n i-, OE- = T|-, E-, 6 0 3 - 6 0 4 J , sen d away,
d espised. d ism iss, hu rl, d rive (o ff).

aTifidruTog. t], o v (aufiog. ov), superlat. a<pvÊiv (a<pvooco).
AtpE'iSii5, ao, 6 so n o f A treus, usually d<pt)oo(o, d<pv^(o (stem: d tp vy -) dip up,
refers to Agamemnon. d raw (o u t), c o lle ct, heap up.
AtpdMV, Mvog, 6 so n o f A treu s, usually ( 6o 5 /em., A ch aean .
refers to Agamemnon. ov, 6 A ch aean , Greek.
X x « i 65,
dtpt'YETo?, ov b a rre n (or possibly restless; XxiX,(X)ev»5, i jo s , 6 A ch illes.
the meaning is not certain). d x -v t ) -n a i b e g rieved , b e vexed , be
ai) anew , ag ain, a seco n d tim e, bu t now. en rag ed ,
av8d-w, avSriow*, t]i)5 t]oa d eclare, say, d x o g , E05, t 6 w oe, p ain , g r ie f
sh o u t, c ry out. dv|/ b a c k (a g a in ), back w ard (s).
ai)8r|, ii;, t| v o ice, sp e ech , d isco u rse,
langu age, so u n d , cry. B
avepvet (= dv-pepvw = dp-pEpvw), PoO vg, E i a , V deep, p ro fou n d .
avEpvaa (steins: FP'’") draw up Paivci), pr|0(a (p f| o o ^ a l), E P ijo a (e P ijv ),
(th e h ead ). P E ^ tlK a, P ^ P a jt a i * , EpdO iiv* (stems:
(w d’. line 370 = avTE (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ). P a v -, P a -) co m e, go, w alk.
a i d ’ = uvdi. jidlXEO (PdXX(o), imperat. mid.
o i) 0i here, th ere, in th is (th a t) place. pdXlra, Pa>ici), EPaXov, p^p>.t]Ka,
a v Jtd p ( d t d p , 5 7 1 ) bu t, m oreo v er, o n the P£pX.Tmai, Epx,r|0iiv* (stems: Pa>.-,
o th e r hand. PX1I-) throw , h u rl, sh o o t, put.
ai)TE anew , in tu rn , ag ain , a seco n d tim e, P a p v ;, E ia , i) heavy, w eighty, v iolen t,
fu rth e rm o re , bu t now , how ever. severe, grave, serio u s, im p o rta n t.
d f5T T | ,ii;,ti b attle-cry , w ar-w h oo p . P a o tX E v ;, f jo 5 ,6 k in g , ru ler, c h ie f(ta in ).
a i)T -Jifia p (o n ) th e (s e lf)s a m e day. ftaTTjv (fialvco) = sfidryjv (8 3 7 ), 2nd aor.,
a i)T iK a o n th e sp o t, im m ed iately , dual.
forth w ith . jiEfi^KEi(v) (fialvco) = E(iEfi^KEiiv} ( 8 3 7 ),
a v T i ; (b a ck ) ag ain, anew. pluperf
aiiTix’ = amiKU (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ). P ^ X o ;, E05, t 6 ( c f pd>^>.(a) d art, arrow ,
a x JT o ;, T|, 6 self, h im (s e lf), h e r(s e lf), shaft, m issile.
it(s e lf), sam e. P ev 0 o s , EOS, d epth .
avTO t' th ere, at th at place. f)fj ((ialvo)) = Ijit] ( 8 3 7 ), 2nd aor.
386
ov, 6 th resh o ld . YE^voâl, EyEivdfiiiv (stem: yev-) beget,

firjouw. ftfjoe (Paivm). aor. (8 3 7 ), causative produce, bear, be born.
(1 0 6 9 , 8 6 4 ). y ilo g , ov, 6 laughter, merriment, hilarity.
fitioofit'i’ tPuh’o}), line 144 = p/}0 (ouei> (8 0 0 ), YEVETi, 115, T|generation, family, stock.
aor. act. subjunct., causative (1 0 6 9 , 8 6 4 ). yiveTo {y\yvoi.iu\) - iy ivexo ( 8 3 7 ), 2nd
p i l l, 115, f| stren g th , m ig h t, v io len ce. aor
P 165 , ov, 6 bow. yevtjrai (ylyvofiui), 2nd aor. subjunct.
PovXevouvTi ijiovAEVo)). aor. act. parti yevovTO lylyi'o/uui) = iy ivo vx o ( 8 3 7 ),
ciple, dual. 2nd aor
Poi)>.EV)-o), PoD>.Evaw, epovrn'oa, YEpai65, r|, ov old, aged, ancient; masc. as
PEPov>.Et'Ka*, PEPovJkEi'nai*, substant., old man.
Epov'X,EV)6iiv * p lan, co u n sel, advise, Y£p«5, «o5, TO prize (of honor).
d elib erate. YEpMV, 0VT05,6 old man.
P ov>.ii, f j ; , T| plan, w ill, w ish, p u rp o se, Yri0Ew, y »i 6t|ow, EYT|6tiaa, y ^Y^6« (stems:
co u n sel, co u n cil. Yti0-, yhOe') rejoice, be glad, exult.
PovXt)-(p 6p o ; , ov co u n s e l-b e a rin g , fu ll o f ytjdtjaai (yridtw), aor. optat.
co u n sel, d iscreet. Ytjpa;, ao5, to old age.
PovX-oâi, PovXr|ooâi*, P^Pot)>.a, Yi-Yôiuai, YEVT|aonai*, eyevohhv,
PEpot')kiinai*, EPoi'XtjOiiv* (stems: YEYova, YEYEviinai*, £YEvii0»ivt
P o v X -, Pov'Xe-) w ish, d esire, b e w illing; (stems: ytv-, yrvE-, yov-) become, be,
prefer, usually followed by >j. arise, be born.
P 0V 5, P o o ; ,6 , f| cow, ox, bull. yi-yvwaKM, yvwaonoi, eyvmv, EYVWKa*,
fiovg (ftofg. lioog. 6. >)). line 154 = fioag. EyvMOnai*, EYVwofliiv* (stems: yvm-,
acc. plur yvo-) know, recognize, learn, perceive.
P o -r a m ;, iSogfem., larg e-ey ed , Y>>aDK-Mni5 ,1605 fern., gleaming-eyed,
ox -ey ed . flashing-eyed.
B p id p E u ;, (u, 6 (= Bpiuptjoz, ov, 6, 5 7 3 , Y^VKiMV, ov (yAvKvg, eTa, v) comparat.,
5 8 6 ) B ria reiis, a sea-divinity. sw eeter.
B p lo e v g , f jo 5 ,6 Briseus,/af/ier o f Briseis. Y>-VKV)5, Eia, V sweet.
B p 1 ( r i ] i ;, 1605 , f| B riseis, daughter of Y>.Maoa, 115, f| tongue, speech, language.
Briseus. yvw. yvdxooi (yiyt’cooicco), 2nd aor act.
p p o T o ;, o v , 6 m o rta l, m an. subjunct.
P«i^ 6 ; , o v , 6 (cf. jiuii’co) fo u n d a tio n , base, yovi), yoi'vo; (Y0vvat05), to knee.
altar. y o D v d ^ o n a i ( c f y o v t)), Y o v v d a o n o i
P w T i-d v E ip a fern., m a n -n o u rish in g , embrace the knees, entreat, implore.
n u rtu rin g h e ro es; as substant., n u rse yovvcov (yovv, yovvog, to).
o f heroes. YX)vf|, Yt)vaiK05, t| woman, wife.
A
y' = yt- (5 7 5 ). ( 5 '= (5e (5 7 5 ).
y a i a , 115, r| e a rth , land , co u ntry . 5ai^ 6 vio 5, n, ov p o ssessed (by a d a e m o n );
y a iM ( y « F ‘ ) re jo ice , exu lt, glory, g o o d frien d ; crazy, fo o lish ; w retch.
ydp postpos. conj., for, in fact. S a^ ^ (av , 0V 05 , 6 , fi d ivinity, god , god dess.
y i postpos. enclit. emphasizing the preceding 5 ai-vC-m (cf. 6a i 5), S a ia o ) , E6aiaa*
word or clause, in d eed , at least, at ( E S a io d n iiv ) e n te rta in , feast, b an q u et.
any rate. S a i 5 ,5 a i T 0 5 , t| p o rtio n , feast, ban q u et.
387
S d K p i), vo i;,t6 tear. 8EX-ofiai, 5Eôâl, E5E^d^T)v (£S£Yf‘*l'')>

SttKpt-w*, SoKp{>aw*, eSdKpfJoa, S eS eyhwi, ESixO’ l '’* receive, accept.
5 E6 dKpvâl weep, shed tears. 8 e-w, 5 tjo(i), E6 T|oa, SeSeko*, 5 £5 £^ al,
da/id idafiai^w) = da^dei ( 584 - 585 ), = E8 ^0 tiv* bind, tie.
danaaei (603 - 6 04 ) fut. 5 t| indeed, truly, forsooth, now.
S a ^ d ^ C l)*, 8a ^ d ( o ) ( a , E 5 d ^ a a (o )a , 5 ii 6 ^v-(i) loiter, tarry, delay.
e 8 a n d a a 6 i i v ( e S d ji t i v ) ( s t e m : 5 a ^ a S - ) 6n).£-ofiai*, 5t]X.f|aoâl, ESt]X.t]odîiv,
subdue, overcome, crush, dominate. SES1r|^âl harm, hurt, destroy,
Aava6g, oC, 6 Danaan, Greek. damage, wrong, ruin.
5 a o ^ 6 ; , ov, 6 division (of spoil). 5 tmo-p 6 p o ;, ov devouring the (goods of
d d a (a )a v x o (d u T eo/iai) = eddafajavT O the) people.
(837 ), aor. 5 r|v = 5 pf|v, an old accusative used as adv.,
5 a T ^ o ^ a l , 5 d o ( a ) o ^ a i , E8 a a ( a ) d n i i v , for a long time, long.
5 £ 5 a o ^ a l (s t e m s : 8 a t - , S a t e - ) divide, 8 id , adv., and prep, with gen. and acc.,
distribute, allot. through, by means of, on account
Se postpos. conjunct., and, but, for, so. of; adv., between, among; with gen.,
-8e with acc. (788 :4 ), to, up to. through; with acc., through, by means
d sdaarai (datio^ ai), perf. of, on account of, during.
deldoiKa (deldco). A(a (Zevg, Aidg, 6), acc.
5 E i5 (i), 5 e ^ o o ^ a l , e S E i o a , S E i S o i K a 5 i-dv- 5 ix a in two ways, differently.
(SEiSia) (s te m s : SpEi-, Spoi-, 6pi-) fear, 5 ia-ji^p 6 (a, Siojidpoo), S i^ E p o a
be afraid. (6 i^npa 0 ov) (stems: re£p0 -, jipaO-)
S e i Xo; , t|, 6v fearful, cowardly, cringing, sack (utterly, thoroughly), plunder,
miserable, pitiable. pillage, devastate.
S eiv 6 ;, t|, 6v dread(ful), awful, terrible, 5 ia-jrpr|aaw, Sianprjâi, 5 i£npT|â,
fearful. 8ian^:ipi]Yat, Siajii:ipiiYf»«»t,
ScKaTo;, t], ov tenth. 5 iEnpT|x0 tivt (stem: npftY-) go
ao g , t 6 build, stature, size, form, across, pass through, traverse, pass
body, structure. over, accomplish.
diâodai, diâzo (dexo/naii- diaoTijTr]v (ddaxrjfiij = dieoTTjTTjv (837 ),
6 v right (hand), lucky.
S E ^ i T E p o ;, T|, 2nd aor. dual.
8^05,6^05 (SE(ot)s), TO fear, dread, Sia-TnijYci), SiaTjiTi^w*, 5I£T^t]â
timidity. (SiETHOYOv), SiETndYilv (stems:
ao5, t 6 cup, goblet. TjiiiY-, tuttY-) separate, divide, part,
S^pKoâi, ESpaKov, S^SopKa, E5ipx0tiv* cut apart, split.
(E fip d K iiv * ) (ste m s: 5 e p k - , S o p K -, (5 i) 5 (ao(i), E8 (#Ka, SeSwko*,
5 p a K -) see, look, behold. S^Soâi, e8 6 6 iiv (stems: 5 w-, 6 o-) give,
S ip to , 5 e p iia * , e d e i p a , 6^8 a p f i a i * , grant, bestow.
E 5 d p i]V * (s te m s : 8 E p - , S a p - ) skin, flay. dielpeo (diEipofiai), imperat.
5 £ 0^ 6; , oC, 6 (cf. dect>) bond, band, fetter. 8 l-E^poâl, 5 lElp 1r|aoâl (stems: Eip-,
S E V O f i a i , S E v f | o o ^ a l , E 5 e v t ] o a (s t e m s : EipE-) inquire into, ask about item by
5 e v -, S e v e -) lack, need, be in want. item.
SEvpo hither, to this place, here. dieJipdOofiEi’ (diajiipdm ).
8 e t ) t £ p o 5 , 1] , o v second, succeeding, later. 8 i-£n:w, 8 ie\)/w, Si£a:iov (stems: OEn-, o:i-)
dexdai (dixofiai), 2nd aor. infin. accomplish, perform, go through, be
(possibly pres.). engaged in.
388
diEXuayev (diaiuijyo)). aor. 3rdplur. 8w pov, o v , TO gift, present.

All (Zev;. Aiog. 6j, dat. d d x jE i ( d i d c o ^ i ) .
6 i-i-a rtj| iii, 5iaoT r| o«), S i E o t i io a d M ( a i) (8 1 8 (0 ^ 1 ), 2 n d a o r . a c t . s u b ju n c t ., 3 r d
(5i^(TtT)v), 5iE O T iiK a, S i E o x a n o i * , s in g .
6 i£OTd 0iiv (stein s: o r t i- , o r a - ) stand d c o o o v o i ( d id c o ^ i) .
ap art, sep arate, divide. d c b w a i ( d i d o f i i ) , 2 n d a o r s u b ju n c t.
S ii- .o ;, I], ov d ear to Z eu s, belo v ed o f

Z eu s (1 1 6 8 ). E
diKalÊUfvtai) idiKulô)}, infin. E ( e Io , eo ) . a c c . s in g .
6 iKd^(i), S iK o a w * , E6iK oa(a)a, Ed. ( e u w ) = SUE ( 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) , i m p e r a t .
8 E6iK O K a * *, 5 E 5 iK a o | u a i*, Edw, Edoo), E ifiiao , E ia K a * , E i f i n a i * ,

E 5 iK a o 0 iiv * (s te m : S iK a S - ) ju d g e, E id O tiv* (ste m : OEpa-) p e rm it, allow ,
d ecid e, p ro n o u n ce ju d g m en t. give leave.
6 iK a a - n 6>.05, o d , 6 ju d g e, arbiter, E jia v ( fia lu c o ) = E fir jo a v 2 n d a o r.
d isp en ser o f ju s tice . t'firj i P a l v o } ) , 2 n d a o r .
Slo-Y£V T|;, e ; b o rn o f Zeu s, E yy v a^ i^ M , e y y v o >.(îii , f|YYvdX,iâ (ste m :

Z e u s-d e sce n d ed (1 1 6 8 ). EYYva>.iY-) g ran t, p re sen t w ith.
Aidg (Zevg. Aiog. 6). E y v o ) ( y iy v d i o K O ) ) , 2 n d a o r , 3 r d s in g .
8105, a , o v d iv in e, g od lik e, g lo rio u s, £Yw (v), EÊô I, m e.
heavenly. I d E ip u v (d ip w ).
5io-T pE(pf|;, ^5 Z e u s-n o u rish e d , u n d er e 8 e io e { v) (d E id c o ).
th e p ro te ctio n o f Zeu s. id E ^ a ro (d ix o fta i).
v'xo? d ou b le, tw o -fo ld . e d rja a v (8 ew ).
doiEV (d'ldcofii). 2nd aor. optat. e S t iT O S , V 05 , T| fo o d , feed.
5 o>.o-^f|T1] ; , ao, 6 deceiver, e 5 o ; , £ 05, t 6 seat, ab o d e, h a b itatio n .

cra fty -m in d ed . e 8 co ke ( v ) (d ld c o fii).
8dfiEv(ai) (Sidojfiij, 2nd aor. infin. eeIkoo i = E iK o a i tw enty.

dovTEg (didioui), 2nd aor. participle. EElJlEg = ElJlEg (Elpco).
66pv', 5 o v p 6 ; ( d o v p o t o ;) , t o b e a m , iikSlop i n d e c l , t 6 d esire, w ish.
tim b e r, spear. E ^ o jia i, Eooo|uai, E io a , E (£ )o a d fii)v (ste m :
ddg (didwui), 2nd aor. act. imper. aeS-, = eS - 6 0 3 - 6 0 4 ) , sit d ow n , seat.
86aav (8l8miu) = e8 oouv (8 3 7 ), 2nd aor. EIJKE ( I t ] f i t ) .
d o v p l {86pv. d o rp o g . to). E tjo g ( i v g ) .
A p v o t;, a v T o ;, 6 D ryas. (£)0^>.M, eGeôcd, ^6£XT|aa, T|0^>.iiKa*

8v 'v a - jt a i, S v v T | a o n a i, E S v v tia d jitiv , (ste m s : eOeX,-, iQ tls-) w ish, d esire, be
8 E 5 v )v iin a i* , £ 5 n v d o e i]v b e able, can , w illing.
have pow er. e Qe v , e Qe v ( e 'io , eo ).
6v)o ( 8i)(ii) two. E d E o a f, e Qt jk e (T lO r/fx i), a o r
S (v )w - 5 E ic a to 5, t], o v tw elfth. 1) E l, i n t e r j . . U p! C o m e ! G o!
5w , indecl, t o ho u se, h o m e. 2) e ’i ( a i ) if, w hether.
5 (i)-5 E K a T o ;, t i, ov (S v u S E K a x o ;, q , ov ) *E iS w (E ^ 5 o ^ a l), Ei5if|o«> ( £ ^ o o ^ a l) ,
tw elfth. E180V, 0160 (ste m s : f£ « 5 -,
8(btj(oi) (didiofii), 2nd aor. act. subjunct., p l u p e r f . t ] 5 £ a in a c t . : a o r s e e ; f u t . a n d
3rd sing. p e r f . k n o w ; in m i d . seem , appear.
dm-£ Idtdioui) = eScoke ( 8 3 7 ), aor. E id u g ( * e i 8 co) p e r f. a c t. p a r tic ip le .
5 (i)^ a , a x o ; , t o h o u se, h o m e, bu ild in g . E i f f = EiTE (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ).
389
eiKooi = eeiKooi twenty. EKaTt)-p6>ô;, o v , 6 free-shooter, sharp

elKTrjv t*£iKo)), pluperf. dual. shooter, dead shot, shooting according
eiKw, e!^( i), EoiKa (stems: pEiic-, poiK-, to will.
piK-) be like, resemble, be fitting, seem EKat6Y-X£*po5, ov hundred-handed,
(likely), appear (suitable). hundred-armed.
eiXtjkovQag (epyofiai). £ K a T 6 ^ - P l ] , 115, T| hecatomb, sacrifice, a
*EiX,w (E^).oâl), EEX,aa, EEX.âl, num ber o f anim als, originally one
(stem: fe X,-) crowd, drive. hundred cattle, offered in sacrifice.
E im , E ia o n a i (stems: Ei-, i-> com e, go; EKUTo;, o v , 6 free-shooter, sharpshooter, a
pres, often with fu t. meaning, shall (will) dead shot.
com e, go. EKEivo;, II, o (KEivog, ti, o) that (one); he,
Ei|u(, Ea(a)o|iai (stem: Ea-> be, exist. she, it.
eiv a i (ei,ui), infin. Eicr/a (Kaico).
EivEKa = rvEKtt (571) on account of, EKt^-fioXo;, o v , 6 free-shooter, sharp
because of, for the sake o f shooter, epithet o f Apollo, originally an
Eio (eo) o f him, her, it (760). adjective, shooting according to will
E105 = T105 while, until. (desire, inclination, pleasure); as
e i j i a g , e i j i E , s i n e . I ’l J i e i v , e i J i e g , e i ' j i t j , s ' f n r j g , substant., free-shooter, sure-shooter,
EiJtoi, eItiov. eintov (ei'pw), 2nd aor. sharpshooter; a dead shot.
E lp o ^ al (= Ep^w), Eipiôofiai (stems: Eip-, Eiclayâi’ (hrXd^co).
EipE-) ask, inquire, question, seek. ekXve, fVAiieg, ekX vov (*k-Xev(o).
£(l)p c ^ a l, E(i)pvo(o)oât, E(i)pva(o)dniiv EK-:iOY^05, ov terrible, dreadful, awful,
(stem: pEpC-) save, preserve, observe, frightful, fearful.
guard. EK-nayXoTaTog, rj, o v (EKnayXog, ov), superl.
ElpW, Ep^W, EIJIOV (EEIJIOV), EipT)ICa*, tK -n ay h o g terribly, horribly, awfully,
E ip tm a i, EppT|0iiv (stems: pEp-, f P»1-> dreadfully, frightfully.
FE71-) speak, say, tell. E K -Ji^ p 0 (i), E K n ^ p o w , E ^ ^ n E p o a
Eig, eg, adv. an d prep, with acc., into, to, (E^^rtpaOov) (stems: nEp0-, rtpo0-) sack
until, therein. (utterly), plunder, pillage, devastate.
e I ;, îio, EV one, only, sole. EK-tdn-VW, E^^TOHOV cut out.
eia a g , iiarjg (laog . rj (Eiarj), ov). “E ktw p , o p o ;, 6 Hector, son o f Priam and
EiOEi v) (e^ ofiai) aor., causative (1069). leader o f the Trojans.
E ia e ia i (*Eidco). tka-v\-e> (c f iXdco) drive, carry on, strike,
Eioiiv) (Ei^l), 3 r d plu r push, press.
Eiom into, to, within, often with acc. E>.aq>09, o v , 6 , T| deer, stag, hind, doe.
EiTE . . . EiTE whether . . . or. E^d-o), EX,d(a)(a)(a, ii> .ao(o)a, EX.T|>.aKo*,
EK (e^), adv., an d prep, with gen., out of, E>.f|Xaâl, T|>.d0T]v* drive, carry on,
(away) from. strike, push, press.
EKd-Epyo? (FEKdpEpYo;), o v , 6 eXe (aipEco) = eeXe (837), 2n d aor.
free-worker, working his will, eX^X.(ô»*, EWX,iâ, E^XixOtjv (stem:
Apollo. eXik-) shake, twirl, twist, coil, make
EKU1] (Kulco). tremble, brandish.
EKaoTo;, II, ov each, every. eXevoetui (E pxofiai).
£KaTii-PE)k£Tii5, S o , 6 free-shooter, free- eXe\!/e(Xetuo).
shooting, sharpshooter, a dead shot, iXdEfiEvfai). iXO ovaa, eXOwv (ep x o fia i),
epithet o f Apollo. 2n d aor., infinitives an d participles.
390
E>.iK:-o>\|/, m a s c . eX .iK -u } ii;, i 5 o ; , ^ 1 6 5 within, inside.

fem., bright-eyed, flashing-eyed. E vw pTO ( e v d p v v f i i ) , 2n d a or. m id .
eh jis (AeLko). E^ = EK.
eXiooo), c^Xiâ, eiXiynoi, E ^ a y E (E ^ d y c o ), im p e r a t .
EEXixftnv (ef = £/, 584 - 585 ) (stem: E^-dy-w, E^dô), E^^yayov, £î]xa**,
FE>.iK-) twirl, twist, curl, turn, roll. Eîjyfiai*, E^rixOilv* lead out, lead
e X k e o ( e lK o )). m id . im p e ra t. forth, bring forth.
eXkw (stem: oeXk-, = e>.k- 603 - 604 ) draw, 'E^dSio?, ov, 6 Exadius.
drag, pull, tug. i^-a\ana^(o, tâkana^ta, E^t)X.d}iaâ
e X o v ( a ip e c o ) = e e X o v (837 ). (stem: d>.ajioy-) sack utterly, destroy
kX d vT E , i k o v a a ( u ip ic o ) , 2 n d aor. p a r t ic ip le s , utterly.
s k o a l (Et2 co>. E ^ a v d a fi^ a v d d c o ) = E ^ a v d a E (584 - 585 ),
E lc o fia i, eX (o v (aipECD), 2n d a o r. f o r m s . im p e r a t .
E>.(Apiov, o«, TO booty, spoil(s), prey. E^-av5 d-(D, Eâv6T|a«*, Eî)v5 i|oa speak
= i f i i , E ftE d e v, EÊIO , EfiEV (E yd j). out, tell, say, declare.
EHEviai}, £fifiEv(ai) = Eti’a i (Eifilj. E^-avTi? (back) again, anew, then.
EfiflOpE f/UEipOfiai). £ê ( i19 one after another, in turn, in order.
Efioi (syw). E^-£(pci), EÊlrtOV, EÊipilKO*,
En6g, T|, 6v my, mine. E^£^pt]âl,£^£ppf|6t]v (stems: pEp-,
E /i7iE(pvvTa <Efi(pv(o). p e r f. p a r t ic ip le , f e m . ppti*, f£:i-) speak out, tell, say, declare.
E^-n11; nevertheless, for all that, by all EÊJlpddoÊV (EKTlipdo)}.
means, absolutely, completely. E ^ E p ico ( e ^ E lp a ) .
Efl-(p^-<l», E^q>ÔCD, EV£<pCaa (Êtpcv), EÊXafiOV {EKTafiVQ)}.
£|i:i£(pCKa grow in(to), cling very EO, Eio ( 760 ), of him, her, it.
closely. EOIKE (*EIICQ)), p e r f
^ ( 4), £iv, a d v ., a n d p r e p , w it h d a t ., in, at, E o iK w g (*EiK co), p e r f. a c t. p a r t ic ip le .
among, on, there(in, on). E d v T a , EOVTEg (E ifx l). p r e s . p a r t ic ip le s .
h'-ovTio5, T), ov opposite, facing, before, to e6 ;, e 6v = 05,11, ov his, her(s), its (own).
meet. E o v o a v , E o v a t ] ( E if t l) ,f e m . p a r t ic p le s .
^ a p i^ w , âp(ô), tjvdpiâ (stem: Eji = EJil (575 ).
E vap iy ) strip of armor, spoil, slay. En-ayE(poj, Emr|y£ipa, E3iayf|y£p nai,
^ - 6 eîo 5, n, ov to(ward) the right, from EniiyipOiiv (stem: dyEp-) collect,
left to right. gather (together).
e v - 5 o 6 i within, inside, at home. E:i-a(Tio;, ov blameworthy, responsible,
Ev-Eijii, Fv£o(o)oâl (stem: eg-) be in. blamable, accountable.
EVEKa = ElVEica ( 571 ), w it h g e n ., u s u a lly En-a3i£i>i-w, EjianEiXôiii, £nt]n£i>.i]oa
f o llo w s its o b je c t, on account of. threaten (against), boast.
E v fjE v (E V E ifii). i m p e r f EJi-dpx-w, EJidp^M, E:itjpâ, Enijpynai*,
EV0a then, thereupon. EJifipxOtjv* begin, perform the
^0d-8E here, there; hither, thither. initiatory rites.
i v i = EV. E Jid a a v T O ( Jt a r io / A a i) .
£W-iinap (for) nine days. En-aa<TVTEp05, n, ov thick, close, in quick
^ -6p-vC -n i, ^6po(i>, Evwpaa (rvcapopov), succession, crowded.
rv6pwpa, ôp(apEâl rouse among, E:i-a\)p(oKw* (EJiavp^w*) (EnavpôKoâl)
kindle among, excite. Enavpf|ooâl, EnaCpov (stems: ov)p-,
EVTO ( h ] fii) , 2 n d a o r m id . avpE-) enjoy, reap the benefit of.
391
EJiea, ETtisoi (e'jtog. eog. to). (stem: pEO-) both w ith and w ithout
ErtEi w hen, since, for, indeed. elision o f the prep., clothe, invest.
EJiEi = e:j£i (Ejwg, eog, rd) (584-585). Eni-icp(ai)a(vw , EnEKpfji]va (stem: Kpov-)
E:iEi8 r| when, since, for, indeed. accomplish, perform, fulfill (also, in
eTCEiff (line 583) = EJtsna (575, 582). addition).
* eji -e ( kw , enôiKtt (stems: pEiK-, poiK-, EmKp^t]vov (tm Kpaialvco). aor. imperat.
piK-) perf. as pres., be seemly, be fitting. £nl-^£^(p-oâl, Enl^£^\|f0âl*,
En-Eiî, E}lEôoâl (steins: £i-, i-) come ErtEHEmi/dnnv*, E™Efi^n<p0T)v* blame,
(upon, on), approach. find fault (with), reproach.
EJieiaii v) (f.T f 3rd sing. e jiijie IQ e o ( i m j i E l O c o ) , m i d . i m p e r a t .
EîEita then, thereupon, E3tl-JIE( 0W, EJtlJlEiaw, EJlEJlEiaO

EJi-Eoiica (stems: peiK-, poiK-, piK-) perf. (EJiiJi£:ii0ov), EjtiJiijToiOa,
only, be fitting, be seemly. EniJT^jiEiafiai*, E;i£nE(oOt)v* (stems:
ETlEJlEidEd' (ijllJlEidofiai) = EJKTlEidETO :i£ i 0-, 3TO10-, rti0-) persuade; m id ., trust
(575, 582). (in), believe, obey.
EJIEJiAeOV fijllJtlEQ)). Ejii-rtXiw, EninXEVooâi, b ib ik ev a a *,
EJieppwoavxo (EJiippcoonai). EJii™^jiX.Ei)Ka*,
Eji-^pxonai, EmjXBov (stems: jtXep -, :tXv -) sail (upon,
(e:w |Xv0ov), EnE>,ir|X\)0a (^ ii,f | X o v 0 a ) over), navigate.
(stems: Ep/-, i X Q - , eX£V0-, eX,v0-) come EIll-pp{A-oâl, £IlEpp(l>od^t1v flow down
upon (to, toward), attack. (upon), fall upon.
EJi£o(o)i (E.tog, Eog, rd). E ;ii- a(a)E V w , ^ io (o )E v a , E ^ io o D n a i,
EJlEOOVTai (ETliaaEVO)}. EJtEa(a)v)0t)v (stems: OEt)-, ov-) drive
imoTey/avTO (EJiiazEqxo). on, hurry on, urge.
EJi-et)-(pim^-o)*, EJtEvcpTmf|ao), CTI-OT^cp-W, EJtlOT^\|/0)*, ErtEOTEIj/a*
En EV (p^^ t]oa shout assent, approve. (EnEOTEvdflllV), E^lEOTEHfiai*,
EJiTjjiEiXrjOE (£Jia:j£d£co). EJtE(ni(p0t|v* surround, encircle, fill
eni,adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc., to, brimming full.
(up)on, against, by; adv., (up)on, thereon; e t h t e XXe o ( e j i i t e X I o) ) , m i d . i m p e r a t .
with gen., (up)on, over, during; with EJiitEi>.o, £jiit^TaX,nai (stems:

dat., (up)on, in, for, against, at, beside, te X.-, TttX,-) command, accomplish.
by; with acc., (up)on, up to, over, against. EJll-TllS^; sufficiently, in sufficient num
Ejtt (EnEijxi) = EJiEori, line 515. bers, appropriately, suitably.
Erti-Yvdn:i-Tw, E:iiYvdfi$«i)*, £ni-(p^p(a, EJioioAi, EnT|V£iKa (ejit|v eiko v ),
EJtEYvdn<p0iiv bend, curb, subdue, E:i£vf|Voxa**, ErtEVT|VEYnai*,
w in over. Ewtiv^xfrnv* (stems: <p£p-, o i-, ^ ek -)
ejii-e(ke>.05, o v lik e, resem bling. bear upon, bear against.
E Jii- E iK f|s, ^5 suitable, fittin g, proper, e:ii-X 06v io ? , ov upon the earth, earthly,
becom ing, decent. earth-born, o f the earth.
EniEifiEVE (EJiiEvvvfii, E<pEvvvfii), perf. E id E O , e t iX e x o (n tX w ) , 2n d aor
participle, voc. 7 0
E T W iO E l ( E ll< p ip C ) .
etiieXjieo (EJiiEXnofial), imperat. mid. EJi-olxonai, EJioiXT|aonai*, EJiwxMKa

eni-EX jioâi, OTôXjia (stems: pE/ji-, (stems: o ix -, oixE-, oixo-) go to, go
poXjr) hope (for), expect. against, attack, ply (in the sense of
E Jii-E vw u i* (E<p-^wrm*) (Ecp^vwuai), “work at” ).
E(pâ(a)w , E<p^0o a , E (p E i^ a l (Ecpdaâi) » io ;, E0§, t6 word, saying, command, speech.
392
EJiw, E$>w,eojiov (steins: atJi-, ajt-) b e b usy, epw E -o), E p u tjo o ) , t] p ( l) t) a a flo w , s p o u t ,
p e r f o r m ; m id ., follow , a c c o m p a n y , a tte n d . s p u rt, d a sh .
e g = e ig .
epyov (pEpyov), ov, to w o r k , d e e d , a c c o m t 'o a i ' ( t i f i l ) = t ] a a v ( 837 ), im p e r f.
p l i s h m e n t , feat. i 'o e a i , e o ( o ) e T u i ( e i/ il) .
EpSw, Ep^M , E p ^ a , E O p y a (from pcp^M! E0OX05, r |, 6 v g o o d , n o b le , b r a v e , tr u e ,
stems: fePYv F®PY‘ )d o , p e r f o r m , m a k e , h e lp f u l, k in d ( ly ) , v irile .
sa c rific e , w o rk . EOOVTO (fifil).
f p iO i^ s lep tO ii^ io ), im p e ra t. iojToêda (enw).
epeOiô), EpEOiocD, tjpE0iaa v ex , a n g e r. Eo((jjt'Tui, e a o i. eoad fiE v a, t o r a i (eifd ).
epe0-(iiv e x , e n r a g e , to r m e n t, te a s e . H J i u v ( H n t jf ii) , 2 n d a or.
ip eio /^ te v . lin e 62 (tp e co ) = e p e ic o fie i’ ( 800), ioTE (Ei^d).
s u b ju n c t . E ozrjcav (u m j^ i).
ip e o v T O ( t 'lp o u u i) . eotI( v), eoxov, eotco, Emo)v (ei/uI).
e p i o v o a ( ti'p c o ) .fu t. p a r t ic ip le , fe r n . EO<puûv (a<pdô)).
EpETii5, ao, 6 o a r s m a n , ro w e r, sa ilo r. ET = ETI ( 575).
EpETHOv, 0 1 ', TO o ar. E T a tp o ; ( E ia p o ;, 571) , o v , 6 co m rad e,
EpE(p-w*, £ p E v « )* , HpEM/a r o o f ( o v e r), c o m p a n i o n , fo llo w e r, f r ie n d .
c o v e r, b u ild . ETEKEg (TIKTCO).
t'p cil/a { ip iip o }) = ijp t y / a ( 837). ETt'kEa(o)ag ( xeAeIw).
1) epEW (stem: EpEp-) a s k , in q u ir e , se e k ; eT ^p«0E V f r o m t h e o t h e r sid e .
2 ) i p i ( o (t i'p(o). ET-T|TVno5, o v t r u e , u n f a ilin g , s u r e , re a l,
£pi1T^-M, »ipf|T€aa, r|piiTt'0 iiv c h e c k , a c tu a l.
r e s t r a i n , h o ld b a c k , c o n tr o l, c o n t a i n , ETi still, in a d d i t i o n , f u r t h e r ( m o r e ) .
c u rb . h u m g , i'TloE (rivco).
E p i-P w > .a^ , ttK o g r ic h - c lo d d e d , h e a v y - etX>) (*TAdci)).
c l o d d e d , f e rtile , h a v in g f e rtile la n d s . E T O ijid ^ w * , E T O ifid a w * , f |T o f ^ a o ( o ) a
EpiSaivfi), Epi5t]va (r|piSiiadniiv) (stem: (stem: E T 0 l^ a 5 - ) p r e p a r e , m a k e re a d y .
EpiSav-) q u a r r e l, b ic k e r, s tr iv e , fig h t, EtpuTiETO (rpE.iaj.
i 'p i d i . e p id o ^ ( i'p i^ . i ' p i d o ; , ij) . t v , El) w e ll, s u c c e s s fu lly , h a p p ily ,
Epi^w,ilpia(o)a, Epripionai* (stem: Epi5-) p r o s p e r o u s ly , fa v o ra b ly , lu ck ily .
q u a r r e l, s tr iv e , fig h t. E V -S m iT o ? , o v w e ll- b u ilt.
E p ig , 1 8 0 5 , t | s tr if e , q u a r r e l, fig h t. Ei)-^ci)V05, o v w e ll- g ird e d , b e a u tif u l-w a is te d .
e p l o a i ’ Te (E p fô )). a o r. p a r t ic ip le . EVKii>,05, o v u n d i s t u r b e d , in p e a c e , ( in )
E p K o ;, E 05, TO h e d g e , f e n c e , d e f e n s e , b u l c a lm , q u ie t.
w a r k , b a r r ie r . E v -K v iijit? , 1 8 0 5 w e ll- g re a v e d .
E p ^ a , t t T o ; , TO b e a m , p r o p , s u p p o r t , stay. E i)v f|, f is , f| b e d , a n c h o r - s to n e , lair,
E p o ;, o v , 6 lo v e , d e s ire , p a s s io n . den.
r p i'o ( a ) o t t t 'v . lin e 141 le p i'c o ) = a o r. s u b EV^CmEVOlO, EVâÊVOV, EVÛVXO
ju n c t . ( 800). (E v x o/jai).
E pvM , E p \)[a](o , E i p v a ( a ) a , e i p C ( a ) n a i EVpiOKW, E i)p f|a(l)* , E v p o v , E V ptJK a*,
( s te m s : p E p v -, p p t'- ) d ra w , d r a g , E v p i i n a i * , Ei)pE 0tjv * (stems: E v p -,
la u n c h . E vpE -) f in d , c o m e u p o n , h i t u p o n .
Epxoâl, E>.Evaonai, »i>.6ov (ijXi'Gov), E v p D -p d T ti5 , a o , 6 E u ry b a te s .
EXr|)ki'0a (EiX f|X ov'0a ) (stems: Epx-, E v> p v -0 v , o n o ; f a r - t h u n d e r i n g (cf.
eX.0-, eX evO -, e>.v0-) c o m e , go. v^ iP p E fiE T rjg )-, p o s s ib ly fa r- s e e in g .
393
£ i)p i);, e t a , t w ide, b ro ad , large. H

£ v ;, ET)05 mighty, valiant, good(ly). 11 (T|i) or, th a n , w h eth e r; i j . . . rj e ith e r . . .
ei)T£ when, as. or, w h e t h e r . . . or.
ev -te (x £05, ov well-walled. 1) T| surely, in d eed , truly, for a fact,
E v x - o n a i, E V ^ o jia i, Ev^dnTjv (riv ^ d m iv *), ce rta in ly ;
P '‘3y> ta lk lo u d ly , b o a s t, 2) tj(iifii), imperf 3rd sing.
e x u lt. 1) (0 . rj. TO).
Evxw^^» iiS* n vow, b o a st, prayer. i] (dg. ij. 0 ).
£(f = Em = ETli. T|Yd-0EO5, t), o v v ery sacred , holy,
Ecpaio ((prjfil). (aya-, 1 168, 5 7 1 ).
s a cro s a n ct
Etpeico (E(plr],ui). 2nd aor. subjunct. if\ yE (o ye, ij ye, z6 y e).
£(ph’ VV^l (EJtlEUVVfll). t| Y ^ -o n a i, t|YT|ao(iai, T|Ynodnnv,
Eq>ET^ti, T|;, f| co m m a n d , req u est, b eh est, i lY i m a i * lead (th e w ay), guide,
p re scrip tio n . co m m a n d , rule.
£(pri ijyepdev (ayeipco), aor. pass. 3rd plur
E<pfjKE(v). Eipijaeig (iiplrjfxi). ijyijauro (ijyiofxai).
E(pr]o(da} ((prjulj. rjYVoltjoE (dyvoiEco).
£(pdlad' fcpdivco) = £(pdlaTO (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ), ijyofiEv (aya).
3rdplur., pluperf. f|8E an d , also, o n th e o th e r han d.
£(pT£lg (E<plr]m), participle. i jS i i already, now, at th is tim e.
E(p-i-T]î, E(pô(i>, E(pii]K a (E<piiKa), i]6r] (*eidio), pluperf
E(pEiKa*, EcpEifiai*, E(pE(0 tjv (stems: f| 5 o ;, E05, TO use, utility, ad vantage,
ffi]-, 0£- = T|-, E-, 6 0 3 - 6 0 4 ) sh o o t su periority.
ag ain st, hu rl u p o n , sen d up on. f|8i)-£m fj5, E5 sw eet-to n ed , sw eet-sp eak in g .
£X It'xoi) = ££%£ = e'Z £ (8 3 7 , 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) . t|8\ );. E ta , v sw eet.
EXE-JiEVKT|;, sharp, biting. ê, ê = ij.
EXETO (e'x CO) = EEXETO = e '(x ETO (8 3 7 , t|£)îo;, 01), 6 sun.
5 8 4 -5 8 5 ). rjEV (Elfil).
EXdioTog, r], ov {kxQpdc,. tj. dv), superlat. i f e p i o ;, 1] , o v early in th e m o rn in g ; possibly
*eX 0o - 8 oji^ -w , f|x6o 86n i) 0a en gag e in clad in m ist.
h o stility w ith , b e hateful. ’H E tfw v , (o v o ;, 6 Eetion,/flf/ier of
Ex 6p 69, t j , ov h atefu l, h ated , en em y, o d i Andromache.
ou s, h o stile. ijQelov (eQeXco).
EXOV (e'x CO) = EEXOV = EIXOV (8 3 7 , fjlE (EI/.11).
5 8 4 -5 8 5 ). ^KE (h]lil).
EXW, E^« (OXnO“ )- E«XOV (EOXE0OV), ijKovoav (d/covco).
5 x«)Ka, Eoxnfiai* (-wyp*®*) (stems: ijXaoav (ekdo)).
OEX-, ox-> have, h o ld , keep. ijXdE, ijXdov (epxofiai).
EO). E(bv (Elî). ri^ 05, o v , 6 n ail, rivet, stud.
ijXvdov (epxoâi).
Tjiiiai (ste m : f|a-) sit, b e seated,
i;d-0 EOS, I], ov v ery sacred , holy, f m a p , a t o g , t o day.
sa cro sa n ct. ijêtfieTO (afisljico).
Z e v ;, A 165,6 Zeus, father and king of gods T|-n^v surely, in d eed , truly, o n th e o n e
and men. h an d ; correl. with tjdi.
^(6-(i) live. tjfiii't], ijfiEvov i^nai).
394
rm E T E p o;, t], o v o u r(s). 6a ^ P r | o u * , E0d|uPi)oa w onder,

t jj i i ($ tem : f|Y-) imperf. f|v sp eak, say, tell. b e am azed , b e frig h ten ed , b e aghast.
i^^Tv ie y d } ) . E ia i, th ick , crow ded .
T|no5 w hen, Bdvatoi;, ov, 6 d eath .
fjv = El a v if. 6apo£-(i>, Bapoôo)*, EBdp<n]oa,
i]v: I) ( o ;. r/. d); 2) (og. ij. ov). T EB dpoifK a tak e h e art, tak e co u rag e, b e
{ji’d a v e luvddvco>. b o ld , d are, b e resolu te.
T|05 w hile, un til. B e 6 , a ; , f| g od d ess, divinity.
tjjieiAtjae (a.niAeo)). BEivw, Bev^m*, E0£iva (ste m : Bev-) strik e,
i ji i E i p o ;, 01), f| m a in (la n d ), co n tin e n t. h it, beat.
t|pa, indecl, t d favor, b e n efit, p leasu re, diXe (EdiXco) = i'deXe, imperat.
k in d n ess, p ro tectio n . B £ ^ l ;, lO T o ;, t| cu sto m , law, d ecree, ju s tic e ,
tjpad' id .p d ou ai) = d p d r o = d p d e m o ra cle, rule.
( 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 , 5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ). -0EV (su ffix w ith ^ e n ., 7 1 2 ), from .
"H p il,115, f| H era, consort o f Zeus and BE0 -EiKE>.0 ;, ov g od lik e.
queen o f the gods. 6EO-™po;i^-(ii prophesy, in q u ire o f a god,
>]p)jauTO id p d o iim ) d eclare an o racle, in terp ret th e d ivin e
tjp i-y E V E io g , a , ov e a rly -b o rn , b o rn early w ill.
in th e m o rn in g . 6E O -:ip o n it| ,i| ;, T| o racle, prophecy.
VPXC (upxo)). 0 E o - jip 6 :iio v , ov, TO o ra cle, prophecy.
I1PM5, wog,6 h e ro, m ig h ty w arrio r, 0EO5, OV, 6 god , divinity.
p ro tecto r. 0Epd:t(iiv, o v T o ;, 6 a tten d an t, sq u ire,
/jg: 1) (3g. ij. a); 2) (dg. ij. ov). co m ra d e.
rja O a i (tj/u a i). diaav (TidrjfAi) = i'deaav (8 3 7 ), 2nd aor.
fjat, lines 205, 3 3 3 (og, ij, ov). 0E-onâio;, n, ov d iv in e, m arv elou s,
fjOTO (fi!.iui). d iv in ely so u n d in g .
lizifm oef V) idzTudl^co). Calchas.
0 E f f T o p ( 8 i i 5 , a o , 6 so n o f T h esto r,
tjriurjot: (dxiiido)). 0 E T i ; , i 8o ; , f| T h etis,
a sea-goddess, wife of
T| T oi surely, indeed, truly, for a fact, certainly, Peleus and mother o f Achilles.
i jt o p , o p o ; , t o h eart, soul, spirit. 0EW, 0Evaonai (ste m s: Bev-, Bep-) ru n ,
r]v6a (avddw) = tji'dae ( 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) . speed.
ii^)-K0^ 0; , ov fa ir-h aired , w ith beau tifu l 0 t ] P t ] , t] 5, T| T h eb e,
a city in Asia Minor
h a ir (= t v-Kouog, 1 1 6 8 , 5 7 1 ). efjiC£(v) iTldTiiui) = E0rjiC£(v) (8 3 7 ).
T|\)TE as (w h e n ), ju s t as, like. Bijonev (rtdtjfii) = drjwuev (8 0 0 ), 2nd aor,
'H <poiaT 05, o v , 6 H ep haestu s, the lame god subjunct.
offire. &r}oia (QrjOEvg, fjog, 6) = Qrjafja ( 5 7 2 ).
T ixtjEiS, E o a a , EV (onomatopoetic) (re )e c h o - ©HOEV5 , 1105,6 T heseu s.
ing, ro a rin g , (re )so u n d in g , th u n d erin g . Big, BIV05 , T| b e a ch , sh ore, stran d .
t|xi w here. 0vtjaK(i), Oav£oâl, eBovov, ti0VT)Ka
tjlffUTO (U.ITCO). (ste m s : 0vn-, Bav-) d ie, b e killed .
'Hcig, 'Hoog, f| g od d ess o f th e d aw n, daw n, Bvtjto;, T|,ov m o rta l, h u m an .
tico;, f|6o;, r| dawn. B065,f|,ov sw ift, speedy, q u ick .
Bpovog, ov, 6 th ro n e , seat, arm ch air.
0 Bvydtiip, TEpog, tpog, t|d aughter.
ff = Tt- (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ). BCpiog, o v , 6 h e art, so u l, sp irit, co u rag e,
Qakaaaa, i ] ; , f| sea. p assion.
395
E0 i 5a a rush (headlong), dash, be in-Tonai*, l\|/oâl, i\|/d^T)v crush, over

rash, rage, be insane. whelm, punish, afflict.
6«>pif|oo(a* (6(l>p1f|oooâl), 0(i>pT|ôâi, !5 ,iv o 5 , f| {instrumental Itpi) power, might,
E6(6pt]â, E0 ii)ptjx6 iiv (stem: OuptfK-) strength, violence.
arm, put on the breast-plate. loav (Eifii), imperf, 965 .
laog, n (eIoii), ov equal, equivalent, well-
I balanced, symmetrical.
idXM, to x a (steins: F*F®XE-) shout, i-oTiini (oioTimi), 0TT|O(D, EaTi]aa
howl, roar. (eothv), EOTt]Ka, EOTOfiai* EordOiiv
'(drj ( * n d ( o ) . 2 n d a o r. s u b ju n c t . (steins: ott)-, ora-, 603 - 604 ), set up,
f d / i t v (*E i'do )), p e r f . stand, make stand, take one’s stand,
*I6ofiEVEV)5,1105,6 Idomeneus, le a d e r o f station,
th e C re ta n s . io rio v, ov , t 6 sail.
'{60V, i d o v o a ( * e i8 ( o ) . 2n d a o r. i<no-5 6 Kt],t);, T| mast-receiver.
id v lt ) (*£ td c o ), p e r f. p a r t ic ip le , fe r n . 10x65, d loom, mast.
'{dcojuai, i8 (b v ( * e i8 o } } , 2 n d a o r IfaxEO (taxco), imperat.
Ui ('{r]/iii). loxw (stem: iox- = ai-a(E)x-) another form
lEvai (eJfii). o/ex*> have, hold, keep.
lEpEv;, fjo ;, 6 priest, holy man. h£.mjt>(Eifii) (965 ).
iEp6v, oC, TO sacrifice, sacred rite, vicitm I(p61ô;, (ti), ov mighty, valiant, stout
for sacrifice ( 1168 ). hearted, brave, 723 - 724 .
iEp6;, T|, 6v sacred, holy. i(p i <fg, iv6g, tj) instrumental case, mightily,
(= o l ( n ] ^ l ) , 110(1), E t]K a (T |K a), e i k u ’'', with might.
Elfiai*, Ei0tiv (steins: at)-, oe-, = f|-, E-, ly/ao (ijnofiai).
603 - 604 ) throw, hurl, shoot, send. id)v (Eifii) (participle, 965 ).
Wi (eJfii). imperat.
iK-dv-w come (upon), go. K
iKjiEVo;, T), ov (cf. fieco) favorable, prosper Ka 0 -djiT(i>, KaOdyw* (KaBdyonai),
ing, welcome. Ka 0 i]\|/a, Ka 0 t)^âl, Ka 0 fjq>0 T)v*
iK-v^-ofiai, ^ôâl, iic6niiv, ly n a i come, (stem: dcp-) lay hold, attach, attack,
arrive, reach (one’s destination). accost.
?K-M, iôv come, go. Ka 0 -Eôâl, Ka 0 £oooâl, Ka 0 Etoa,
K>^(lo;, n, ov propitious, kind(ly), gentle, KO0 E(E)aadfinv (stems: oe5 - = e5 -) sit
favorable. down.
iXd-oKoâi, i>.do(o)oâl, i>.aa(a)dnfjv, Ka 0 -EvSw, Ka 0 Ev8 r|aw* (stems: ev 5 -,
iXdoStiv* propitiate, appease. ev 5 e-) sleep, slumber, rest (in bed), lie
■R105, ov, r| Ilium, Troy, the Troad (the (in bed).
region around Troy). Kd0-iinai (stem: t|o-) sit down, be seated.
iffit v ( a i) ( e i ^ i ) ( in fin ., 965 ). KaOrjoo (leddtjfiai), imperat.
!v a in order that, (so) that, where. KadfjoTO (icdOrjâi) imperf.
'(êrat (iKVEOfxai). Ktti and, also, even, furthermore; K a l . . .
id v ff ( a fit ) = i d v i a ( lin e 567) (575 , 582 ), icai both . . . and, not only. . . but also.
p a r t ic ip le . K a iv E v ;, ijo ; ( io ;, 572 ), 6 Caeneus.
id ;, ov, 6 arrow. K aiu, Kavow*, EKt]a, kekovko *,
io v a r j g ( e i f t i ) , f e m . p a r t ic ip le . KEKavfiai*, EKdiiv (stems: Kav-, aKp-,
Twcog, ov, 6, f| horse, mare. Ktti-) burn, consume.
396
KaKKelovxeg (KaxaKelm) = KaT(a}KdovTEg, •cata-Kaiw, KaxaKavjaw*, KaTeKt)a,

pres, participle. KataKEKttvica*, KotaK^Kavfiai*,
KttKo;, ij, 6v bad, poor, ugly, mean, cow KttTEKdiiv (stems: icav-, Kap-, k o i -)
ardly, wicked, evil. burn down, consume.
KttKM; evilly, wickedly, harshly, in a Kata-KEi-o) desire to lie down (rest, slum
cowardly way, with evil consequences. ber, repose).
KaX.eoi, KaXiia, £Kd>ô(a)a, K^KXiiKa*, icaxdvevoov (Karaveixo), aor. imperat.
KEK^tmai, eKXTj0r)v* (stems: KaX.c-, Kata-VEV)-w, KatavEVOM, Kat^vEuoa,
call, summon, convoke. KatavEVEVKtt* nod (in a downward
KaX>.i-ndpi|o;, ov beautiful-cheeked, motion), assent.
fair-cheeked. KaTa-neooAi, Kaxaniîei*, lcaT^;l£^(â,
KCtX.6;, 1], 6v good(ly), noble, brave, fair, KatajiEJiEnnai*, KatEJiEq)0 t)v* (stems:
beautiful, handsome. ™ek-, JIEJI-) digest, repress, cook.
Ka>^v)}iTb>, Ka>.vt|/(i), eKd>kV«|fa, Kazajiitf/T] (Kaxajiiooo)). aor. subjunct.
KEKdXv^âi, EKo)ii)(p6tiv (stem; Kata-rtirttw, Katouieoôfiai, KotîiEaov
KttX,vP-) cover, conceal, hide, envelop. (KttTOiEaov), Kotaji^nTn(K)a (stems:
K dX .x^ ?’ a v T o ;, 6 C alch as. JIET-, JITE-, 71TI1-) fall down, drop.
Kd^v(D, K a ^ E 0 ^ a l, ekohov , K^KîiKa Kata-p^ô), Katap^^d), icaTip(p)Eâ,
(stems: Kttfi-, Kjiti-) do, make, toil, be KatEpExOnv (stem: ppEY") caress,
weary, suffer, accomplish with pain. stroke, fondle.
Kaô) (Kdfivio). 2nd aor. subjunct. Kaxidv (KaTadvw).
Kcwtvd;, oC, 6 smoke, mist, vapor, fume. KaTip(p)EÊ( v) (learapE^w).
Kd:uiEaov (KaTamjiTm) = kolttkoov = Ki(v) = dv, 1 0 8 5 - 1 0 9 1 .
KaTEJiEoov ( 8 3 7 , 6 0 8 , 6 0 9 ). KE^-âl, KEôoâl lie (about), recline,
KapSit] (Kpa5 it), 5 9 7 - 5 9 8 ) , i i s , t| h eart. repose.
Kdpt], KpetTOi; (KttptiTo;), to head, peak, KEivog, tj, o = EKEivog, t], o that (one), he,
summit. she, it.
Kdpiivov, ot), TO peak, summit, headland, KE).ai-vEq>fi;, E5 black-clouded, wrapped
citadel. in dark clouds.
Kapna>.^^(l>; quickly, suddenly, swiftly. KE>.aiv6;, I), ov black, dark, dusky.
Kapno;, ot>, 6 fruit, crop, produce, harvest. k^XevOo;, ov, t| (plur. K^>xt)0oi and
KopTEpd;, r|, ov (= icpaTEpo^, 6 ,6v, 5 9 7 -5 9 8 ), KeX,£t)0a), road, way, path, journey,
strong, mighty, severe, harsh, stern. route.
KdpTioTo; (= KpdtioTog, 5 9 7 - 5 9 8 ) , i ] , ov, K^>.oâl, KE).T|ooâl, EicEX,i]adnnv*
superl. of Kaptepog, f|, ov mightiest, (EKEK>.6^t|v) (stems: keX-, ke X^-, k X-)
strongest, bravest, most excellent, harsh urge, command, bid, request.
est, sternest. K^(v) = dv ( 1 0 8 5 - 1 0 9 1 ) , perchance,
Kaxd adv., and prep, with gen. and acc., perhaps.
down (from, over, through); adv., down, KEpSa>^6-(pp(i)v, ov crafty-minded, cun
below; with gen., down (over, from, ning (-minded), sly, mindful of gain.
below); with acc., down (along, KEpT6^lo;, ov biting, cutting, sharp, bitter,
through), according to, on. contemptuous, reviling.
Kata-S^-M, KataSôo), Kat^SCaa kevGe (icEvdco), imperat.
(Kttt^SCv), KUTaSiSCKa, kev6(i), KEvaw, EKEvaa (ekdOov, k^kvOov),
KaTaS^8i)|iioi*, koteS v Oiiv * go down, K^KEt)0 a (stems; KEV0 -, kv 0 -) hide, con
sink, set, dive. ceal, enclose.
397
KE(paX.T|,{j;,T| head. KV^(pa5, ao5, t6 darkness, night, gloom.

icExapolaxo (xaipco), 2nd aor. optat. Kviot), 115, T| fat, savor, odor of roast meat.
KexoXco/UEuou, leexokcbaexai (xokdwj. K0TX.05 (ic6 i >.o5), 1], ov hollow.
Kt^So;, £05, TO woe, grief, care, sorrow, KOlftad' (Koifidco) = EKOlfi&tO = EKOlfidEXO
concern, suffering. ( 575 , 582 , 584 - 585 , 837 ).
Kf|S(i), KifSijoai, EKT|5t)oa*, K^Kt^Sa* KOl^d-QI (cf KElâi), K0l^t]00}*,
(steins: k ii 8-, kti8 e-, Ka8-) grieve, £Ko^^t1oa, £K0i^f|6T)v (lull to) sleep,
distress, hurt, afflict. slumber, lie down.
KTi>.ov, ov, t6 arrow, dart, shaft. ko(v)Xe6v , oC, t6 sheath, scabbard ( 1168 ).
KT|p, Kt|p6;, f| death, fate. koXi(>65, o€, 6 brawl, wrangle, quarrel.
Kt)p, Ktjpo;, TO heart, soul. K6^t), f|5, f| hair, locks, tresses.
Kt)pv^, CK05,6 herald. KO^^^(a, KO^lU, EK6^lo(o)a, K£K6niKa**,
kIe(v) (Ki(0) = EKtEV (837 ). K£K6^loâl’'‘, EKOfiioOiiv* (stem:
KiXXo, 115, ij Cilia, a town in the Troad. Ko^l8-) care for, attend, accompany,
Klvtjao)*, EKiviiaa, KEKivi]nai*, bear (off).
EKlv^ftilv move, stir; mid. and pass., KOfiiaavTo ( koÔô)) = EKOjiioavTO (837 ).
move (self), bestir, go, come. Kopv(p^, 115, T| peak, summit, crest.
KTvrjdEfTog (KlvEco), aor., pass, participle. Kop(i)vi5, (805 curved, bent.
Kixdtvw, Klx^(’ o ^ a l, £Kix»lo6t‘ »lv (ekixov, Koafif|T{i)p, opo5,6 marshal(ler),
ek(xiiv) (stems: ki^-, kixe-) come upon, commander.
overtake, arrive at. KOT^-W, Eic6t£a(a)0, (-dutlV), K£K6Tt|(K)a
Ktxijo) (Kixdvco), aor. subjunct. hold a grudge, be vindictive, be angry.
Kiw come, go, depart. k 6to5, ot), 6 grudge, rancor, hate.
Kimv (kIco), participle. kovXeov (koXe6v, 571 ), ov, t6 sheath,
KXaYYT|,ii5,Ti noise, shriek, (up)roar, scabbard ( 1168 ).
twang (of bow). Kovpi|, 115, ^ girl, maid(en), young woman.
icX,dY4®*» tKkayâ, K^KXijya Kovpi8io5, Ti, ov lavrfully wedded, married
(stem: K>.aYY-) roar, shriek, resound. in youth.
Kâici), K>.avooâl, EK>,avaa, K0Vp05, ot), 6 young man, youth.
K^KX,a\)(o)nai* (stems: KXav-, KXap-, Kpadit], t]i;, 1] = icapdlt], rjg, ij (597 - 598 ).
K>.ai-, KX,aiE-) cry, weep. Kp(ai)aiv(i), EKpTiiiva (stem: Kpav-)
kXejite (/cXLttco), imperat. accomplish, perform, fulfill.
K>inTw, K>.iyw*, EK>^»(fa, K^KXocpa**, KpaT£po5, r|, 6v = KapT£p65, t|, 6v
K^K>.EHHOl*, EKX,^(p0tJVt (EkXoJIIIV*) ( 597 - 598 ).
(stems: K>.E:t-, Kl.on-, K>.a;i-) steal, be KpaTEO) (stem: KpaTEa-) rule, bear away.
stealthy, deceive, hide. Kpazdg (KapT], Kparog, xd).
*kXei)0), ekXdov (k^kXdov), KîAvKa* (stems: KpdT05, E05, t6 power, might, sway, rule,
kX,£1)-, kX.ef, kX,v-) hear, hearken to. victory, strength, dominion.
K>îoiti, 115, r| hut, barrack. KpEiaawv, ov (cf icpdxog power) com-
kX,io(i]6ev, from the barrack (hut). parat., mightier, more powerful, better.
K>,io(tiv8E (788 :4 ) to the hut (barrack) KpEicov, ovo a, ov ruling prince(ss), ruler.
ic^.v6i (*/cXevq)), aor. imperat. Kpf|YD05, ov good, helpful, favorable, hon
KX,VTai-(i(v)T|aTpii, ti5, t| Clytemnestra, est, true, truthful, useful.
wife of Agamemnon. Kp^rjvov (Kpaialvo)) aor imperat.
K>.i)To-T£xvt)5, E5 renowned for skill in KptiTTjp, t|po5,6 mixing-bowl,
handcraft, of renowned skill. punch-bowl.
398
icpivw, Kpiveu, EKplva, KEicpiKa**, AeXoiJuf v) (Atijuo).

K^Kpinai,EKp((v)0iiv (stems: Kpiv-, kenm*, >.e\|/«), eX,e»(/«, > .£ X a fin a i* , E >.d ;iijv*
Kpi-) p ick ou t, select, ch o o s e , d iscern , (stems: X e;i-, X a n -) strip, p eel, scale,
d ecid e, ju d g e. hull.
Kpov(6i]5,ao, 6 son o f C ro n u s, Zeus. XEVK05, T|, 6v w hite, sh in in g .
Kpovicov, wvog, 6 so n o f C ro n u s, Zeus. X evk-w > .evo;, ov w h ite-arm ed .
Kpv:iTd6 io5,1),ov h id d en , secret. >.Evaaw (>.EVK-) see, b e h o ld , o b serv e, loo k.
Kteivw,Ktev^w,EKttiva(Eictav,EKtavov), X,^xo5» E05, TO b ed , co u ch .
EKTOva*, EKtdOtiv (steins: ktev-, ktov-, Xfjy’ (^yco) = Dkfjye (5 7 5 ), imperat.;
Kta-v-) k ill, slay, m urder. 2) i'ArjYE (5 7 5 , 8 3 7 ), imperf.
Kt'dvEo;, r],ov d ark (b lu e ), b lack , dusky >.r|Y-w, E>.iiâ cease (fr o m ), refrain ,
(1 1 6 8 ). slack en , w eak en.
KCSi-dvEipa fern., m a n -e n n o b lin g , b r in g >,T|0-(i),with gen., escap e th e n o tice , b e h id
ing g lo ry to m en. d en ;mid., forg et, lose sig h t o f
KV'SIOTO;, ?i,ov (cf. K-vdog) superl, m o st A fju v o g , o v , r| L em n o s, an island in the
g lorio u s. Aegean near Troy.
k C 5 o 5 , E05, TO glory, h o n o r, ren ow n . Atjiovg (ArjTo), dog. 1)} = Arjrdog
K V ^ a, a t o g , t o sw elling, w ave, billow . (5 8 4 -5 8 5 ).
Kvvag. K i'vtooiii’), icvi’dg ( kvcov. Kvvog. 6, AtiTw , 60; , T| L eto , mother o f Apollo.
> ^ ld ^ o^ al, E > .ia a a a , E X id aflu v (stem:
K vv-w jiti 5 {voc. Kvvw.Ta) d o g -fa ced , d o g X106-)b e n d , tu rn asid e, sin k , fall.
eyed, sh am eless. X iy v g , E ia , v sh rill, clea r-to n e d .
KVJtE^X,0V, ov, TO cup, g ob let. X,inv exceed in g ly , very, esp ecially.
Ki)(ov, KDV05, 6 , f| dog. X ijii]v , E v o ;, 6 h arb o r, a n c h o rin g -p la c e .
KMJit], ti 5, ij h ilt, han dle. A/aa; (Alaoofiui), aor. imperat.
X i o o o ^ a i , £X.(X.)lod^t 1V (eX iT O niiv) (stem:
XiT-) beg, en treat.
Ad/5f (Aauftui’io) = D.ajit (8 3 7 ). >.0( 7105 , 11, o v d read fu l, d estru ctiv e, h o r
Aa/Jf (kuîftdx’w). 2nd aor. imperat. (9 0 2 :1 ). rib le, nasty, deadly.
>.afipdv(o*, ).d\|»ojiait (>.rm/onai**), X o i y o ;, o v , 6 d e stru ctio n , ru in , cu rse,
c X a P o v , >.E>.dpiiicat, W > .a fin a i, d eath .
E X d n (p 0iivt (E>.r|(p6t)V *) (stems: X a P -, > .ol^ 6; , o v , 6 p e s t(ile n c e ), plague.
JitlP") take, seize, lay hold of, get, >,6x o v S e (M xov, -de) (7 8 8 :4 ) to an
receive. am bu sh .
>ianJi-ETd-M sh in e, g leam , blaze, flam e. >,6x 05, o v , 6 am b u sh , am b u scad e.
Xafi:it'Td(ovTi (Auu:ieTuco). participle > .v ^ a, a T 05, t o ofFscourin g, filth.
(9 4 5 -9 4 8 ). Xvuai ikv(o}, aor. infin.
> .a^ np 6; , r|, ov b rig h t, b rillia n t, sh in in g , XvauiTE (Xva>), aor. optat.
g leam in g . Xvaav (kvm) = eavouv. 8 3 7 .
>.a 6; , o v , 6 p eo p le, h o st, soldiery. Xv-w, >.ô«), E>.Caa, >.EXvica*, >.£>.vâl,
)^dai 05, 1] , o v hairy, shaggy, ro u g h , bushy. E>.v0t|v lo o se, free, release, b rea k up,
>îP-(i), E>.Ei\|/a p o u r a lib atio n . destroy.
JwEiJiM, XEi\(/«>, E X in o v , >.eXoijTa, > .w P d -o n a i*, >.(l)P1f| o o ^ a l*, EX(l)Ptlod^t]v
>.£X,Einnai,E)î(p0i]v* (stems: Xe iji -, in su lt, revile, a ct arrog antly , ru in ,
>.0131-, X in -) leave (b e h in d ), forsak e, w rong.
a b a n d o n , d esert. Xtolhjamo (XcoPdo^mi). aor. optat.
399
X.(aici)v, o v , comparat. o f d y a O A ? , t|, 6 v b e t jiEivai (nev(o), aor infin.

te r, s u p e r io r , p re fe ra b le . ^ E ^ p o ^ a l, E^ôpE (ste m s : o ^ E p -, o ^ o p -,
o ^ a p - ) divid e, (receiv e as) sh are, receive
M (as lo t); tifia p r a i,p e r f mid., it is fated.
f i (ey d )} = HE ( 575), acc. ^cX.ot;, ^ E X .alv a, fiEX,av, b lack , d ark, dusky.
H d (cf. êv, H^v), adv. used in swearing, fieXiiaezui (fiiXa).
surely, verily. H e X.1, IT 0 5 , t 6 h o n e y .
^ d K a p , a p o g b le s s e d , h a p p y , f o r tu n a te , (iE>.)^Tja(o*, En^>.>.naa* (stem s:
lu ck y . ÊX.X.-, HEXX.E-) b e ab o u t (to ), be
^ a K p 6 ; , i j , 6 v lo n g , h ig h , lofty, larg e, d is ta n t. d estin ed (to ).
n d X a v e ry , e x c e e d in g ly , e v e n , b y a ll m e a n s , ji e Xj i - w , n iX y w * , enE/.\(/a* sin g, d an ce,
m uch, enough. h y m n , ch an t.
^ a X .a K 6 ;, t| , 6 v so ft, g e n tle , te n d e r , m ild . ^£X.(0, ÊXfjo(l), Eft^>kT]Oa*, Ê^ 1)X a ,
^ d > .io T a , superl. o f ^ d X .a , m o s t, e s p e c ia lly , (f» E n iX T ]n a i*), EHEX,f|0t)v *
b y a ll m e a n s . (ste m s: heX,-, h e ^ - ) b e a co n c e r n , b e
fidA.X,ov, comparat. o f ^ d X .a , m o r e , r a th e r , a care.
p re fe ra b ly . HEfiama (fiifiova), participle.
fiavT£V)-onai, âvTe^)ooâl, ^ E -^ o v a (ste m s : h e v -, hov-, |ua-) perf only,
E U a v T E v a d ftfiv p r e d ic t , p r o p h e s y , a c t a s b e eager, d esire greatly, striv e zealously,
se e r, d iv in e . in ten d , plan.
f id v T ig , l o ; , 6 se e r, p r o p h e t , s o o th s a y e r . H^v (cf. fid), correl. with d i, o n th e
fittV T oavvT i, 115, r| g ift o f p r o p h e c y , o n e h an d , tru ly ; fiEV . . . 8^ o n th e o n e
n d p v a - n a i s tr iv e , fig h t, c o n te n d . h an d . . . o n th e o th er, p a r t ly . . . partly,
^ d p T v p o ; , 01), 6 w itn e s s . th e o n e ( s ) . . . th e o th e r(s).
âx^-oâl (= ndx-onai), âx1ôoâl M e v E -^ a o 5, o t),
6 M en elau s, king of Sparta,
(-te o o n a i?) (fiaxôfiai), enaxeo(o)- brother o f Agamemnon, and husband
d ^ l ] v , ^ e ^ d x 1 l ^ a l * fig h t, b a ttle . o f Helen.
^ d x tl, n?< n battle, fig h t, fray. M E v o iT id 6ti 5, f io , 6 so n o f M en o etiu s,
^ d x - o ^ a l fig h t, b a ttle . Patroclus.
f i e feyco ). fiE v o ;, E o ;, t 6 rage, anger, m ig h t, co u rag e,
f» e y d -0 C fio ;, o v g r e a t- s o u le d , b ra v e . fury, pow er, spirit.
H i y a p o v , o v , t 6 g r e a t h a ll; plur p a la c e . ^ ^ o ) , ÊV^()>, E fiE iv a , H E fiiv tiK o ** (stem s:
la rg e , g r e a t, fiEV-, HEVE-) rem a in , aw ait.
m ig h ty , tall. Êp-^T)p^^(a, E^£p ^f| pl^ a (ste m : j i t i p i v )
fiiyioTog, ov, superl. of fieyag, p o n d er, co n sid er.
fieyukr], fiiy a . ^£po«|/, o j i o ; m o rta l, h u m an , m an.
f i e d t f i £ v ( a i ) (fiedirjfii), 2nd aor. infin. ^ e o ( o ) o ;, I], ov m id d le, m id st, m ed iu m .
ÊOfjod), ê6Et|Ka (Ê&^Ka), HETd adv., and prep, with gen., dat., and acc.,
HE0EtKa*, nE0Einai*, nE0e(0i]v (stems: w ith , in , a m o n g , am id , in to th e m id st of,
o n - , -OE = f |- , E-, 603- 604) , le t g o , g iv e adv., am o n g , after(w ard ),
after, n e x t to ;
u p , fo re g o , d is m is s . with
aro u n d , in th e d ire c tio n , in p u rsu it;
HE0-o filX i- w , ^ c O o > ^ i^ t1 o a a s s o c ia te w ith , gen., w ith ; with dat., am o n g , in th e
c o n s o r t w ith . m id st of; with acc., a m o n g , in to th e
^ E iS d - o ), E |iE i 5 t ] o a s m ile , la u g h . m id st of, after, in p u rsu it of, to.
H e (^ w v , o v , comparat. o ffiiy a q la rg e r, fiETaXkcl ifiExaXXdco} = fiErdXXaE
g r e a te r , m ig h tie r , ta lle r. ( 584- 585), imperat.
400
HET-a)^X,d-w, nEta)k>.»jao)*, E îEtdXîiaa |in-jivf|oKw, ^VT|o«>, Efiviioa, ^£^VT|âl,

in q u ire after, seek to know , search after. EjivâGijv (stem: jiva-) rem in d , recall,
li£TuXX& = ii£TaAAdco ( 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) . call to m in d , rem em b er.
jiETtt^v) b e tw ee n , in terv en in g . HIV, acc. sing., all genders, h im , her, it.
fU T U T p in t ] ( u i ' T U T p i n a ) = u E x a x p i : i e u i fiivuvBa s h o rt(ly ), fo r a sh o rt tim e.
(5 8 4 -5 8 5 ), 2nd sing. m.-p. HiVDvOdSiog, n, ov sh o rt-liv ed , brief.
HEta-TpEJio), ^ ET aT p£y(«, fiE te tp E v o fiio u ’AXov = EfiioTvkXov (8 3 7 ).
(HETEtpaJlOV), H EtaTETpO (pa**, moTi)>.-X,(i) slice, cu t in to bits.
H E TO TETpajinai, HETetpdq) 6i]v (stem s: Hvr]aaoa {pupivqaKw), aor. act. particip.,
T p E Ji-,T p o Ji-,T p a n -) tu rn (a ro u n d ); fern.
mid., tu rn o n e s e lf tow ard , heed. (^0Y^-M, E ji o y i i o a to il, s tr u g g le , e n d u r e
ÊTd<pt]^l, ÊTa(p 1f|0(a, fiETEcpiioa*, imperf. h a r d s h ip .
(lETEcpnv, ÊTE(pd^t]v, with dot, sp eak (£)Hol {eycb}.
a m o n g , ad dress, co n v erse w ith. ^ o t p a , 115, T| lot, fate, p o rtio n , su itability.
ÊTa-(ppd^(a, nE taq> pd aw * (^ £ ta (p p d o (o )- fioXjtf|, 115, t| d a n ce, so n g , d a n cin g , sin g
o ^ a i ) , ^ ET £(ppaoa (^ E tE n E (p p a5o v ), ing, h y m n (in g ).
fiE T ttJiE cppaK a**, fiE T a jiE tp p o a fia i* , Movoa, 115, T| M u se. The Muses were
HETEcppdaOiiv (ste m : (ppa 8-) tell, p o in t patronesses o f music, dancing, and poetry.
o u t, d eclare (later, hereafter, a m o n g ); ^€6£-oâl, fi€6r|ooâi, e^€6Tlod^TlV
mid., co n sid e r later, plan hereafter, sp eak, tell, d eclare.
reflect o n later. ^v6o5, o\), 6 w ord , c o m m a n d , story.
îeTtei:ie(v) (fUTt'Tnoi'). ^Cpôl, 0 1, a co u n tless, in n u m erab le.
HET-Ei:iov (ste m : pEJi-) 2nd aor., spoke M v p ^ iS u v , 0V 0 5 ,6 M y rm id o n , Greek, one
a m o n g , ad dressed . o f Achilles’ men.
fieiecptj <ueT(i(p)]uij.
HET-6n i o 6E(v) a fterw ard (s), later, N
(h ere )a fter. va( yea, yes.
/<fr, /uev (eyco). vaici), Evaooa, cvdoOiiv (stem: vaa-)
(if| n o t, lest, th at not. dw ell, in h a b it; mid., b e situated.
^T)-5E and n o t, but n o t, nor, n o t even; I’ia g (I’tjvg, vrjog. = vfjag (5 7 2 ).
H IIS e . . . h iiS e n e ith e r . . . nor. verjai (viofiui), 2nd sing, subjunct.
H ijv (cf. uei’. uu), truly, in d eed , surely, VEiK^to, VEiK£o(a)«, Ê(KEa(o)a (stem:
verily. VEIKEO-) S tru g g le , c o n te n d , re v ile , q u a r
H i jv i ;, 105, f| w rath , fury, m ad n ess, re l, fig h t.
rage, anger. v^KTttp, a p o 5 , TO n e c ta r (d rin k o f th e
E ^ i]V lo a rage, fu m e, g od s).
b e fu rio u s, b e m ad. vîcC5, V 05 , 6 d ead body, co rp se,
^ t 1Pôv, o u , TO th ig h -b o n e , th ig h -p ie ce . vônai (stem: veo-) usually in fut. sense,
^t|pov, o i ', TO th ig h -p ie ce , th ig h -b o n e , co m e , go, retu rn .
th ig h . VE 05 (= v ^ p o 5 ) , ?i, o v new, y ou n g , y ou th fu l,
îilpog, o € ,6 th ig h . recen t, late.
Hf|-TE and n o t, n eith er, n o r; nr|TE . . . (if|TE NEOTwp, opo5,6 N estor, the oldest of the
n e ith e r . . . nor. Greek chieftains.
^ 1f|Tt]p, T E p o ; (Tpog), f| m other. VEV)-W, VEvaw, EV Evaa, vEVEVKa* no d .
H fjT iE T a, cto, o c o u n s e lo r, (p ru d e n t) VE(pE>.-iiYEp^Ta, a o , 6 clo u d -g ath erer,
ad viser. w rapped in clou d s.
401
I'Ew t' ( v t]v g , vt] 6 g, ?/j = vrjo iv ( 572). 6 P e X .6 ;, o v , 6 sp it.

vEcoTEpog, Y], o v {v E O Q , t], o v ) . C o m p a ra tiv e , 0 y e , 11 to th is , th a t; h e , s h e , it.
vrja, v r ju g , v i j e a o i , v r]l ( v r jv g , ^ ). 6 -8 e, i i -8 e , t6 - 8 e t h i s ( h e re ).
V T ]Ê pT f|;, ^5 u n e r r i n g , t r u e , t r u th f u l , r e li 6 8 6 ; , o v , f| ro a d , way, p a th , jo u rn e y ,
a b le , f a ith fu l, in f a llib le , c e r ta in . e x p e d itio n .
1) v » i6 ;, o v , 6 te m p le , s h r in e ; t)8 v a (a )E V );, i j o ; , 6 O dysseu s (Lat. U lysses),
2 ) v r jo g , v r j v o l ( I 't jv g , vt]6 g , rj). o ^ o g , o t), 6 b ra n ch , sh o o t, lim b.
V11V5, v t i o ; , T| sh ip . o 6 - o ^ a l w it h g e n . 9 8 4 , ca re (fo r), co n sid er,
v lK d - o , v lK tja w , E v iK n o a , v e v tK tiK o *, (h ave) regard (fo r), w o rry (ab o u t).
V E v iK iin o i* , ^ l K f |0 i i v c o n q u e r , 01 (6, t], t6 ).
p r e v a il, s u r p a s s . o U o g .ij.o ) .
v o E o i'O ]] ( v o £ ( o ) ,fe m . p a r t ic ip le . o i (E to , EO).
voE-ci), V 0r|0(i), ^ O T |a a , V E v d i|K a * , o IS e (* E id (o ).
v rv o T in a i* , evot |0 tiv * p e r c e iv e , th in k , o i E a i (o i(o ), 2n d sin g .
c o n s id e r , p la n , 6 i ^ C p 6 ; , T|, 6 v p ite o u s , w o e f u l, m is e r a b le .
v o o g , o i) , 6 m in d , p la n , p u r p o s e . o iK ttS E = o iK 6 v 8 E (cf. o iK o g , S e , 7 8 8 :4 )
v 6 a ( p i( v ) a p a r t , aw ay , a s id e , s e p a ra te , h o m e w a rd , to h o m e .
vovaog, o d , t| p la g u e , p e s tile n c e , d is e a s e , o iK o i ( o iic o g ) lo c a t iv e , a t h o m e .
sic k n e s s . o I k 6 v S e { o iK o g , - d s , 7 8 8 :4 ), h o m e ( w a r d ) .
\ T en cl., n o w , in d e e d , to b e su re , surely, th e n , o iK o ;, o v , 6 h o u se , h o m e.
v v v n o w , a t th is tim e , a s m a t te r s n o w a re , o i v o - P a p f |; , w in e - h e a v y .
a s it is; c o m m o n ly im p lie s a c o n tra st. o '{ v o n a ( o iv o y / , o j w g ) .
vv)^, W K T o ;, tj n i g h t, d a r k n e s s . 01V05 (polvog), ov, 6 w in e ,
v ft)jid -w , v w n f |o o * , ^ w f i n o o d i s t r i b u te , oivo-xo^-w, wvox6iiaa p o u r w in e , p o u r
a p p o r t i o n , h a n d l e e a sily , b r a n d i s h . d r in k ( s ) .
o iv-o y, ono5 w in e - c o lo r e d , w in e - fa c e d .
oiog, 11, ov alo n e, sole, only.
^ a v 6 6 ; , f |, 6 v ta w n y , y e llo w , b lo n d . o io ;, I], ov s u c h ( a s ) , o f w h a t s o r t, w h a t.
^ i ( p o ; , E o ;, t 6 s w o rd . o i g ( o , {], o v ) , d a t. p lu r.
= avr. o la O a f * E i d a ) , p e r f , 2n d sin g .
(= a v v - ) , ^ v v S iio o ), ^ v v ^ S n o a , 0 10x6;, ov, 6 a r ro w , s h a ft.
^vv8^6eko*, ^DvSEfiEnai, ^vve8^6iiv* o txo ^ al, oixTjooâl*, (steins:
b i n d ( h a n d a n d fo o t). oix-, oixE-, oi/o-) c o m e , g o , d e p a r t.
^VVET]KE (^Vfirjfil). 6i(i> (oiw), oiT|aonai*, cil1od^t]v, wiaGtiv
^ C v f |i o ; , t ] , o v c o m m o n ( s to c k , (stems: oi-, 01E-) t h i n k , s u p p o s e ,
p o s s e s s io n s ) . im a g in e , b e lie v e , e x p e c t.
^ v v iE v i^ v v lr j^ t j. im p e r f, 3 r d p lu r . oiwvo-n6>.os, ov, 6 b i r d - i n t e r p r e t e r , a u g u r ,
^vv-i-tim , ^vv^t)Ka (^vvfjKo), s o o th s a y e r ,
^DVEiKa*, ^vvEinai*, ûvEiftiiv (stems: o iu v o ;, ov, 6 b i r d ( o f p r e y ) , v u ltu r e , o m e n .
a t ) - , OE-, = f |- , £ -, 603- 604) b r in g 6XiK(i) k ill, d e s tro y , r u in .
to g e th e r , t h r o w to g e th e r , h e a r k e n , h e e d . d X i a f o l E i g , d X ia ( o ) r ] g , 6 X E o (o )t] (o X X v p ii).
6X(yo?, tf, ov little , few , s m a ll, o f s lig h t
O v a lu e , c h e a p .
6 , f |, TO th is , th a t; h e , s h e , it; w h o , ^X>.€^l, 6>ia(a)w, M>.£a(a)a, dXo>).a
w h ic h , w h a t. (stems: 6i,-, 6X.E-, 6>.o-) d e s tro y , k ill,
3 fo g . i], o ) . r u i n , lo se ; m id ., p e r i s h , d ie .
402
6X,o(i)o 5, t|, 6 v (cf. oÂvfxi) accu rsed , 6 :ri(o)0e(v)b e h in d , fro m b e h in d , later,

b a n e fu l, d estru ctiv e (5 7 1 , 116 8 ). latter; as prep, with gen.
t ) W n : t i o 5, 1] , o v O ly m p ian . 6rtia (a )(o b a c k (w a rd ), b e h in d , later.
"'OX.Dnnos (O vX ,vn Jio 5, 5 7 1 ) , o d , 6 O ly m 6 (ji)-3t 6 tE w h en (ev er).
a tall mountain in northern Greece,
pus, o (n )-n w 5 th at, in o rd er th a t, how that,
the home of the gods. on td -ci), M :TTiiaa, w jrttjO iiv co o k , ro ast,
on-iiYEpr| 9, ic, co llected , g ath ered , bak e.
assem b led . o(:t)ji(D5 see above.
a sso ciate oparo (dpdw) = (bpdeio (8 3 7 , 5 8 4 - 5 8 5 ) .
w ith. opdu, oyoâl, eiSov, oTiujia,
>15, n m ist, fog, clou d , vapor. (Ewpdfiai)*, ^ 6t]v*(stem s: pop-,F*S‘>
o^ â, a to s, t6 eye; plur., face. o n -) see, b e h o ld , lo o k , o b serv e.
6ôvâl (= 6^6(o)oâl = 6p £ y -v t5 n i (= op^yw ) reach fo rth , stretch
^ oâl, 603-604, 584-585), uôo(o)-
6 6 ou t, exten d .
o, omonoKtt*, 6^(&ô(o)âl*, (b^6(o)- opeyvvs (dpeyvvî), participle.
6 iiv * (steins: o f i- , o jie - , o f io - ) p le d g e opEy-w ( c f op^yvCfii),
opEû, ^ E ^ a ,
w i t h a n o a t h , s w e a r to o r b y ( s o m e o n e opcopEyâi, MpExfltiv* reach fo rth ,
o r s o m e th i n g ) a s w itn e s s , stretch ou t, exten d .
o ^ o t o ; , T), o v e q u a l, s im ila r. opô-Kcpo;, ov liv in g in m o u n ta in d ens,
6^ o l 6-(D’'‘, 6ôl(ao(l>*, u fio iia 6t]v lik en , ly in g in m o u n ta in lairs.
m ak e like, co m p are, m ak e equ al. 6pK05, ov, 6 o a th , th at by w h ich o n e
d/ioa(o)ov (o/uvvfii). aor. imperat. sw ears (as w itn ess),
o n o v to g eth er, at th e sam e tim e. o p ^ a iv b i, a>p^t1v a (stem:6p ^ a v -) toss
ofiovfiai {6nvvfii)Jut. a b o u t, tu rn o v er (in m in d ), tu rn abo u t,
O f tu ; e q u a lly , a lik e , to g e th e r , a t t h e s a m e co n sid er, p lan, pond er.
tim e . 5pô;, ov, 6 an ch o rag e.
ov {og, ij, d). (dg. rj, ov). ^p-vt3^l,opou, (opoa(Mpopov),opupa,
o v a p , indecl, t 6 d ream . 6p (a p £ ^ a l stir up, k in d le, in cite , ex cite,
6v e ( S e i o 5, o v r e v ilin g , a b u s iv e , s la n d e r o u s . aro u se.
d vE iSi^ w ( c f o v E iS o g ), (o v E iS io a r e v ile , opog (ovpoi;, 5 7 1 ) , E05, t6 m o u n ta in .
s la n d e r, r e p r o a c h , a b u s e . opocov (opdco) = opdcov ( 9 4 5 - 9 4 8 ) ,
oveidioov (oveidlt^co). aor imperat. pres, participle.
o v E iS o g , E05, t 6 a b u s e , s la n d e r, re v ilin g , 0 ;, fj, o w ho , w h ich , w hat.
in s u lt. ?, ], ovhis, h e r(s ), its (o w n ).
6 1
6vE ip 0-3t6X ,05, ov, 6 d rea m -in terp reter, 6a(a)oi;, ti, ov how m u ch , how m any, how
d re a m e r o f d ream s. large, how g reat, how long.
dvtjoa fovlvrifii) = oivrjaa ( 8 3 7 ). oaoE, ooooiiv, TM (tw o ) eyes.
o v i v i jm , 6vt|0(i), w v iia a , wvf|6t jv * (stems: 5oooftai (stem:o k - ) eye, lo o k (u p o n ),
o v tj- , o v a -) help, b e n efit, favor, assist, g lare at.
p rofit, b e useful. 6a(a)o;, t), ov ho w m u ch , how m any, how
6vo^d^ca, 6vo^docl>*, u v o ju a o a , large, how g reat, how lon g.
wvofiaKa**, wv6fiaanoi*, 6(o)-t i 5, ii-tig, 6(t)-ti w h o (ev e r),
( i)v o n d o 6 tiv * a d d r e s s , c a ll (b y n a m e ) w h ich (e v e r), w h at(ev er).
( c f ovo fM u n a m e ) . 6 t ’ = OTE (5 7 5 ), w h e n ( e v e r ) ; th a t.
E io , V s h a rp , b itin g , k e e n , c u ttin g , acid . o (a )-T E , ii-TE, 6 - t e w h o , w h ic h , w h a t.
OTii (d\j/, 6 :i6 g . t}). 6 ( t ) - t i th at, b ecau se.
403
o(t> ri (ooTig, fjiig, 6 ri). 6x0^-^l)*, be vexed, be displeased,

0Tpt]p 6i;, T|, 6v ready, eager, n im b le, sw ift. be worried,
0 ( t ) XI ( = 6 Tl). ov, 6:16; , T|voice, word, speech, language.
o i) , o v K , o i)x n o t, n o .
ov (5g. fj, o). n
o v-8 i and n o t, n o t even , nor, bu t not. JiaTda, Tuiideg, jmiddg (Jia/g, Jiaiddg, 0 , r]).
o i) 6- e ( s , o i)5 e -(» la , oviS-ev n o o n e, n o t naif|(av, ovo;, 6 paean, song of praise.
o n e, n o t any, n o n e, n o bo d y , n o th in g . Jia i;, jiaiSo ;, 6, t| child, son, daughter.
ov9’ = ovTE (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ). :laXd^1], T|;, f| palm, hand, fist.
OVK(OV). :iaXlX.->,0Y05, ov gathered together again,
ov)Xonevo 5 , tj, o v (cf. o X lC n i) accu rsed , re-collected, re-assembled.
d estru ctiv e, deadly, b a n efu l (1 1 6 8 ). jidXiv back, backward(s), again, anew.
ov)X.o-xvtii, tjs, T|(usually in plural) rtaXiv-dypETos, ov revocable, to be taken
p o u re d -o u t g ro u n d barley. back.
OvAvfiJiog ( "OXvfiJiog, o v ,6 ,5 7 l, 1 168). IlaXXd;, d5o;, T|Pallas (Athena),
oi)V th ere fo re, h e n ce , now, th e n , in fact. ndfi-nav completely, altogether, entirely.
owvEKtt (= 01) EVEKa) b ecau se. n a v (Tiag, J ia a a , Jidv).
OV-JIO0’ = ov-noT E (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ), n o t ever, nav-Tin^pio5, tl, ov all day long, enduring
never. the whole day through.
ov-3i(a n o t ever, never. TidvTa, jid v ia g , ndvzeg, Jid v x eaai (nag,
O t)p a v (w v , WV05, 6 , f| d w eller o f h eaven, Jidoa, jidi').
divinity, g o d (d ess). n&vtt] everywhere, throughout.
o i)p a v 6 0 E v (ablativalgen.), fro m heaven. jtdi'Twi’ (Tidg, ji a a a , jidv).
o i)p a v 6 ; , o v , 6 heav en , sky. Jiapd (ndp) adv., and prep., with gen., dat.,
o v p E T ?, T)05, 6 m u le (opevg, 1 1 6 8 ). and acc., from the side of, by the side of,
1 ) o v p o ;, o v , 6 breeze, w ind ; to the side of, beside, along; adv., beside,
2 ) o v p o ; ( o p o 5 , e o 5 , t 6 , 571), m o u n t a i n near by; with gen., from (the side of,
( 1168). beside); with dat., by (the side of), near,
ov-TE and n o t, n o r; o v t e ___o vx e n e ith e r beside; with acc., to the side of, along (by).
. . . nor. Jidpa = Jia p ijv (Jid p e ifii).
o i)-T iS a v o 5, f|, ov w o rth less, o f n o a cco u n t, n a p d -(p im i, ;iapa(piiO(i>, Jio p ^ ep fia a *;

cow ardly, feeble. imperf, :iopi<piiv, napEcpd^tiv (stems:
oi)T 05, a i}T ii,T 0i 3T0 th at (o n e ). <pa-) advise, counsel, urge, per
o v tm (;) thu s, so, in th is way. suade, win over.
6<pEi>.o) 6q>EiXijo(i>*, ^ eX.ov, oxpEiXiiKa**, napOêo (jiapeônai), imperat.
(b<pEiX,T|6iiv * (stems; 6<peX-, 6<pEiX^-> Jiap-^ônai (stem: OE6-, = e6- 603-604) sit
ow e, o u g h t, b e o b lig ated ; aor. in wishes, beside, sit near.
w ould t h a t . . . ndp-El^l, napia(a)onai (stem: eo-) be
dipsXeg (d(pelXco) = aipeAeg (8 3 7 ). present (at hand, near, beside).
opeAAef v) (6(piXXa) = w<peXXe(v) (8 3 7 ). nap-Einov (stem:/'En-) 2nd aor., per
1 ) dipiXAo) = dipelXeo; suade, cajole, win over, urge, outwit,
2) ocp£>^(a in crease, m agn ify , swell. delude, beguile, talk over.
6 (p 9 a > .^ 6 ;, o v , 6 eye, sight. n a p e l e v a e a i (Tiapepxaîai).
d<ppa u n til, in o rd e r th at, w hile. reap-ipxonai, jiapfiXEVoonai, jioptjXOov
6<pp^l5, V05, »| (eye)brow . (jiapf|>.v0ov), jiapEX,T|Xv0a
oxa by far, m u ch . (jtapEiX,f|X,ov0a) (stems: Epx-, eX,0-,
404
EX.ED0- , ikvQ-) evade, pass by, ou tw it, ji^njici), nE^t|/(o, £nE^<|/a, n£Jiofi<pa**,
delude, elud e, circu m v en t. JiE rtE fiH ai*, En£^q>0T )v *(stem s: JiE jin -,
mipiaoETdi (miptiLit). jio n ji - ) sen d , e sc o rt, co n d u ct.
;ldp-I)âl (stem: f|o-) sit besid e. n E ^ n -l 6po>.ov, o v , TO fiv e-p ron ged fork.
.Tdpoi0 E(v) adv., and prep, with gen. (992 ), jii/iy /(o ( 7ie fi 7uo).
b e fo re, fo rm e rly ; with gen., in fro n t of, JIEV0O5, E05, TO w oe, g rief, sad ness.
be fo re. nEV -O fiai w ork, b e busy, labo r, do.
n d p o ; form erly, o f old, b e fo re this. JiEJtap/uivov (Twipco), perf. mid. participle.
J i a ; , J i a a a , Jia v all, every, (th e ) w hole. :i£7ioldt]g (neidw).
naaaxno (M zcouai) = indoavTO (8 3 7 ). JiEp encl., exceed in g ly , very, even ( if),
nuauti’>(nag. ndou, (a l)th o u g h .
JiatEonai*, ejtaa(a)d(»iiv, ;lEJlaoâl :iE p iadv., and prep., with gen., dat., and
(stems: J i a t - , jia t E - ) eat, feed. acc., aro u n d , ab o u t, c o n c e r n in g , for,
jia tT ip , Jta tp o g (jia tE p o g ), 6 fath er, sire, exceed in g ly , above, over, m o re th an ,
n d t p i i, »)5, f| fath erlan d , native land. su p erio r; adv., aro u n d , ab o u t, b eyo n d ,
la r p l (nuTt'jp. naxpdg, 6j. over, ex ce ed in g ly ; with gen., aro u n d ,
n d tp o K > .o ; ( - f i i ; ) , ov' (- 1105), 6 P atroclu s, ab o u t, c o n c e r n in g , b ey o n d ; with dat.,
Greek warrior and close friend of Achilles. aro u n d , ab o u t, c o n c e r n in g , fo r; with
.KXTpog i:iuT)]p. Tpog, 0 ). acc., a ro u n d , a b o u t, co n ce rn in g .
(::ravo)). imperat. ji E p k i ^ i (Jiepi, eifit) b e above, excel.
nuvaui’TO (nav(o) = t-.-ravaai’TO (8 3 7 ). rtEpl-EXW, JlEpiE^W (n£plOXT|Obl),
TiavoEiEv, 7iuvoorau im ro)). iiE p i^ o xo v (s te m s : aE / -, ax-, o x e -)
Jia t'w , Jia v a w , E ;ia D a a , .T E Jia v K a *, e n co m p a ss, em b ra c e , p ro tect, d efen d.
jiE rta v 'n o i, £ n a v 0i]v * cease, stop , pause, Jt£pi-KaX).f| 5 , E5 v ery b e a u tifu l, ch a rm in g .
ch e ck , cu rb , restrain , hold off. jiE p i-K JiV T o ;, ( i i ) , 6v , fa m o u s, v e ry
leideo (:i8idco). imperat. re n o w n e d .
nE iO u, nEiacA, E JiE io a (:i£ni0ov), ;i£noi0a, TiepioxEo {jiepiExco). 2nd aor. mid. imperat.
;i£:iEianai*, ejieio Oiiv * (stems: rt£i0-, Jiepi-<ppa5^(i); v ery carefully.
IIO I0-, J110-) p ersu ad e, w in over, jiEoovTu 2nd aor. participle.
m islead ; mid., tru st in , b eliev e, obey. ^ lE T d w C n i*, jiE T d ao )*, E n £ T a o (o )a ,
Ji£ ip d -w , jiEipiôa), E JtE ip T jaa* JlEJl^TttKa*, JlEJlTttHai, £JlETdo01lV
(£ n £ lp 1) o d ^ 1]V ), 3l£rt£lp T lK at, (s te m s : jtE T a -, J ir a - ) stre tch , spread
JtE JiE ip tin a i, EnEipT|0iiv try, attem p t, ou t, u n fu rl.
m ak e trial. jiETaaoav (m'Tdvvvm) = em:Tuo(a}av (837).
neip7]oai t.ieipuio), mid. imperat. jiEV0onai (^l'v0dvoâl), }T£vaoâl,
I lE i p i - 0005, 01', 6 P irith o u s (1 1 6 8 ). E ;it'0 6 n t)v (:iE :T r0 6 n i]v ),
JlElpO), EJTElpa, rtEjTttpHOI, EJldpllvt (s te m s : ;iE i'0 -, m >0-) learn (by in q u iry ).
(stems: JtEp-, Jia p -) p ierce, stud , rivet. n t]X E ’i 5 i ] ; , fto , 6 so n Achilles.
o f P eleu s,
:T i'ia e o d u i (neida> ). n tiX E iw v , WV05,6 so n o f Peleu s,
Achilles.
jiEXdiôi (cf. :i£ ).a 5 n e a r), }i£>.do(i>, nrjXiog (n>]?.Evg. tjog, 6) = nt]?.fjog (5 7 2 ).
EJi£Xaa(a)a, £;iE>.do0i]v IliiX,Ei) 5, T|05,6 P eleu s, husband of Thetis,
(EJi).tiH ijv) b rin g near, draw near, and father o f Achilles.
ap p roach , I l i ] X t ] i d 5 t ) ;, a o (ew ), 6 so n o f Peleus,
2nd aor., often 3rd per.,
jieXw (n £ > .o ^ a l), Achilles.
eitke (£jT>.ETo) (stems: jie>,-, J t l - ) tu rn ji IOeoOe (TiEldo)). 2nd aor imperat.
o u t to be, m ove; mid., be, b e co m e. jiiOijat, jilOtjTui (:iEi9co).
405
nlnnXavTO = EJilfuiXavro (8 3 7 ). jio X v -d l^ , IK 05 im p etu o u s, on ru sh in g .

n>.r|oo>, c}iX.t]oa (EJiX.rmt)v), jioX D -P rv 0T|5, ^5 v ery deep.
:iinXnKa*, jidjiXtiafiai*, ejiXijaetiv noXv-SEipdg, d5o; m an y -rid g ed , w ith
(s te m s : nX,i)-, nA,a-) with gen. of m an y cliffs.
material, 9 8 6 , fill, sate, stuff. noXv-j»iiTi5, log wily, shrew d, rich in
n fo v a (Jiimv, jiiEipa, Jiiov). co u n sel.
jii-jiT w , jt E o i o n a i , e n e a o v , n e n tti(K )o J10X.V5,no>.).r|, jioXv) = noXld;, t|, 6v m u ch ,
(s te m s : JIET-, J t t - , jr t i] - ) fall (d o w n ), m any, n u m erou s.
drop, p e rish , die, sin k, nokv-ato\og, ov cau sin g m an y g ro an s,
rtiw v, J i i e i p a , Jito v fat, rich , fertile. rich in g ro an s.
TdayxdEvTUi; (.’lAd^w), aor. pass, participle. I1oX.v-(pt]ô;, o\), 6 P olyphem us.
nXd^w, jiX ,d Y ^ o n a i, inkayâ, ErtX,dyx6ilv noXv)-(p>.oia|}o;, ov m u ch ro arin g , lou d -
(s te m : jiX a y v ), b eat (b a c k ), baffle, ro a rin g , h e av y -th u n d erin g .
(cau se to ) w ander. J16V05,ov, 6 w ork, labor, toil, trou ble.
f.-xoAi'ig, JiokXrj, m l v ) , com parat.
Tdeicov, o v ji0VT0-n6p 05,ov cro ssin g th e sea, se a -tra
JiAedueaai {:nlio)v, o v = jiAeIcov, o r , 57 1 ). v ersin g , sea-g o in g .
jiAecov, o v = jiXeIcov. o v , 5 7 1 . rt6vT05,ov, 6 sea.
jiX o v T o ;, o v , 6 w ealth , rich es, abu n d an ce. :t6}toi alas! ah m e! o h d ear!
n o 6-d p ict)s, E5 sw ift-fo o ted , a b le-fo o ted . nopov 2nd aor., = EJiopov (8 3 7 ) (ste m s :
Jiddag, Jiodog (Jiovg, jw d og , 6). Jiop-, Jipw-) give, g ran t, bestow , fu rn ish ;
jioOÊGKE {jwdEO)), iterative (900). perf., jiin p m a i it is fated.
Jio 0^-w, ji o 0T|a<i)*, E :i6 0 e o a (Ert66i ] a a * ) nop-(pvpEo;, n, ov g listen in g , lu rid , p u rple,
y earn , lo n g for (w h at is la ck in g ), d esire, v iolet.
lack , m iss. n o o E iS d c o v , MV05,6 P o seid o n ,
god o f the
JIO0T1,115, T| y e a rn in g , lo n g in g , d esire, seas, brother o f Zeus, and one of the
lack , regret. mightiest of the Greek divinities.
:i o 0( encl., ever, at any tim e. n6aig, 105, t| d rin k (in g ).
;ioi£-ci), ; i 0 ii| 0{i), E n o iT )o a , itE n o it]K a * , nozi encl. ever, at any (so m e ) tim e, on ce.
E Jio iii 0t)v * d o, m ake, jt o t I = .ip o T l in p o g ).
p e rfo rm , ex ecu te, cau se, effect, fash io n , 3i 6 tv ia , 115, T| revered, honored (lady, qu een).
bu ild , p ro d u ce. not6v, ov, TO d rin k (in g ).
rtoinf| v, EV05,6 sh ep h erd , g u ard ian , :tov e n cl., an y (w h ere, w ay), so m e(w h ere,
p ro tecto r, way, h o w ), perhap s.
n o t o ; . I], o v w hat (so rt)? w hat kind ? J10V 5,noSog, 6 foot.
:ro i-jtv ^ -w , E BO invtSoa b u stle, hurry, npa:ii5,1605 ,t| h e a r t, m in d , so u l,
puff, pant. d ia p h ra g m .
7io2.£ag (jioAvg, noXXi], jioXv). Jipr|0-«), jipôu, £npt]oa b u rn , blow ,
n(T)oX,Eni^w ( c f nT 6X E ^ o ;), 7l(T)oXE^^ô> in fla te .
war, ba ttle, fight. jipfjâi fjipi]oa(o).
Il 6X E ^ o ; (™T6X .côs), o v , 6 w ar, b attle, JiprjaE(v) (:i.pi]6o}) = £:ipr)aE(v) (8 3 7 ).
fight, fray. jcpr|oo(i>, npfiÂ), E:ipt]â, n i:ip iixat,
™oî6; , f|, 6v gray, hoary. n^jipHYHait, £npf|x0»ivt (s te m : JipOy-)
( :t t 6>.i?), 105, f| city, com m unity, state. c a rr y th ro u g h , a cco m p lish , p e rfo rm ,
:ioX X .d K i; o ften , m an y tim es. do, act.
Jiokkdg, t j, 6v = n o X v ;, n o X X fj, no/,v m u ch , ^pâô 5,ov, 6 P ria m , the aged king
m any, n u m erou s. o f Troy.
406
jipiv so on er, u n til, b e fo re, form erly. np6o(o)ii> forw ard , in fro n t, fo rth .
:ip 6 adv., and prep, with gen., b e fo re, in np6o-(ptmi, npoocprjou, :ipoa^(piiao*,
fro n t, fo rth , forw ard . imperf. ;ip oo £q> iiv , npooE(pd^T)v
jipo-(idX.X(i), npo(ia>.E(i), n p oeP aX .ov , (s te m s : (p ij-, <pa-) sp e ak to, ad dress,
jipo|i£pXT|Ka, ;lpopep>.1)âl, a cco st.
jipoEp>.tjeiiv* (stems: PaX,-, cast :ipOO-(pOIVE-M, Jlp0 0 (pWVtj0 W*,
forw ard , th ro w forw ard , cast forth . jipoaEtpwvtiao sp e ak to, ad d ress, acco st.
.ip o fle fto I'AU (Ttpofiovkojiiui). npdaco = np6a(o)co.
}lpo-PovXoâl, npopovXiôoâI*, npOTEpo;, 1], ov fo rm er, so o n er, old er,
jipoPePovXa, npoPEPovXtmai*, befo re.
;ipoEPov>.r| 0»iv* (steins: P o v X -, P ovX e-) ji{p}oxi = jipdg.
prefer, w ish or w ant (o n e th in g rath e r jipo-Ti-0 tm i, npoOrjau, jipo£Ot]Ka,
th a n a n o th e r). r tp o t£ 0 E iK o *, re p o T ^ 0 E in a i*,
JTpo-Epeoaw, :ipotpEO(o)a (stem: EpEt-) :ip o£T E 0tiv (s te m s : 01]-, 0E-) ad d, g ran t
row forw ard . in ad d itio n , p lace u p on also.
Jipo-Ept'w, :ipoEpv>(i), jipoEipva(o)a, jip6-tovo5, ot), 6 fore-stay , co rd ag e.
itpoEipv(o)âi (stems: pEpv-, ppv-) :ip6-<pp(i)V, ov eager, glad, zealou s, jo y fu l,
draw forw ard , d rag forw ard , lau n ch . k in d (ly ).
inpoiy]ui), 2nd aor. imperat. Jip v fiv ii, 115, T| stern o f a ship.
n.podeovoi( v) in.poTiOi]uit, 3rd plur. JipDfivTiaiov, ov, TO ste rn -c a b le ,
;tpo-id;i-Tw, Jipoiavw , Jip o ia y a hu rl fo r stern -h aw ser.
w ard, sen d fo rth . JipmioTog, rj, ov (jipaiog, r], ov).
:ipoiu>//F( I’) (JipoidTcco). superl.
.Tpotei (npoh]nij. repwTo?, 11, ov first, fo rem o st, c h ie f
:lp o-i-l)^ l, npof|06>, jtpoEt]Ka (npot]Ka), jiTEpoEi?, Eoaa, Ev w inged, flying.
jtpoEiKa*, n p o E in a i*, ;ipoE(0iiv jvtdXefiog = TioXEfioc,, ov, 6.
(stems: a i] - , oe-, = f|-, E-, 6 0 3 - 6 0 4 ) sen d jiToX(E0 pov (cf. rt(t)6X,is), oD, to city.
forw ard , sen d fo rth , give up. m dkig = jioAig, log, ?/.
rtpo-jiag, Jip o-Jiaaa, Jipo-Jiav all, en tire, jtvOoluTo (jievdofiui, nvvddvofiai), optat.
w hole. n v X io ;, n, ov P y lian , o f Pylus.
adv., and prep, with gen.,
ji p o ; , n (p )o T i I1v>.o;, ov, T| P ylu s, a town and district on
dat., and acc., to, tow ard, also, at, on , the west coast o f the Peloponnesus.
fro m , o n b e h a lf of; with gen., fro m rtCp, rtvpo;, TO fire, flam e.
b e fo re, at th e b id d in g ( o f ), in th e sight nvpT|,f|;,T| (fu n e ra l) pyre.
( o f ); with dat., on , at, by; with acc., to, ma encl., in so m e way, in any way, ever, yet,
tow ard , (u p )o n , against. at so m e tim e, at any tim e.
npoo-avSa-M, jipoaaD8if|OM*, npooi]i)5i]oa ;l(l)X ^ -o ^ a l, :l<llX.r|ooâl co m e , go, atten d ,
ad dress, sp e ak to, say to, acco st. freq u en t, retu rn .
jipoo-EiJiov (jipoaEEi^TOV) (Stem: pEn-) juoXeoKETo (juoAiw), iterative (9 0 0 ).
2nd aor., sp o k e to, ad dressed . JiM-JioTE ever yet, at any tim e.
:ipoa£ipt] (:ip6a<pf]ui>. JiwS, encl., (in ) so m e way, so m eh ow , (in )
JtpooE(pcbveov (7ipoo(pcoviw). any way, p erh ap s.
Tipoarjvda (n p oaav d d to). n&g how ? in w hat way?
JipooflE(v) adv., and prep, with gen. ( 9 9 2 );
adv., b e fo re, form erly, so o n e r; with gen.,
in fro n t of, before. pd (apa, dp).
407
p£l;(a, p^^ca, e p (p )£ ^ a , s p ^ x ^ ^ (stem: oreiAavro fareAAwj = earelhivTO (8 3 7 ).

Fpey-) w ork, a cco m p lish , do, p e rfo rm , O T Eipa, 11s , t| cu t-w ater, stem ( o f a b o a t).
m ake, sacrifice. oteWo), EaTEiX,a, EOta^Ka**,
piâi.piâg ipE^w). EOTa>.noi*,£aTdXnv* (stems: oteX,-,
pim, p E v a o ji a i * , e p p e v o a * , E p p v tjK a *, arai.-) put, p lace, arran g e, furl.
e p p v iiv (stems: a p e v -, 0p £F -, a p t)-, oT^^â, atog, t o fillet, w reath.
ap\)E- = pEV-, 6 0 3 - 6 0 4 ) ru n , flow, OTEvdx-M g ro an , so b, sigh.
strea m , pour. aifj (latrjfî) = eott] (8 3 7 ).
p ilV n tv , i v o s , r] (cf. p7]Yvvfii b reak ) b e a ch , 0T i]O o ;, E05, t 6 b reast, ch est.
stran d , sh ore, OTtjaavTO, OT^TTiv (lOTrjiii) = eorôavxo,

p ly iw v , o v (c f. piyog c o ld ) w o rse , m o re ioT^TYjv (8 3 7 ).
h o rr ib le .
O T p a i o ;, o C , 6 arm y , e n c a m p m e n t,
ca m p , h o st.
p tji-T w , p ty (i> , Eppl»|/a, e p p T t p a * * ,
oTvy^M, EOTVâ (e o td y o v ), EOTDyiiOilvt
E p p l f i a i * , E p p i< p (0 )iiv * hu rl, d ash,
th ro w w ith a tw irl, b ran d ish .
(stems: OTDy-, o r v y e -) hate, loath e,
d islik e, m ak e h atefu l, h o ld in
pTy/E(v) (pimco) = Ipply/eiv) (8 3 7 ).
h o rro r, fear.
p o S o - S d K T t'X o g , o v ro sy -fin g ered .
OTV(pE>.i!;(i), EOTV(p£X.iâ (stem: oTV(pE>.iy-)
strik e, th ru st, hurl,
crw, OEO you, singular.
a = 1) (j£, 2) a o / (5 7 5 ).
(T v n -Jia ;, o v ji - n a a a , o v jt-n a v all (to g eth er).
odog, t], ov = adog, rj, ov.
ov^-<ppdôâl, (n)^(ppdo(o)oâl,
aa6-m, aamam, Eodcooa, Eoa(a 0t]v save,
<n)V£tppoo(o)dniiv, aDn;i^<ppaanoi*,
p ro tect, rescu e, p reserve.
<n)v£(ppda 0tiv (stem: (ppa 6-) d evise
aam epog, r], ov (adog, rj, ov), comparat.
p lans w ith , co u n sel tog ether,
ae, aedev, aeo (ov).
ovv, adv., and prep, with dat., w ith ,
oimaivA), ot]âve(l>, Eoirmt]va,
to g e th e r (w ith ), alo n g w ith.
aE01f|â0âl*, Eanndv0T)v* (stem:
ovvOeo (ovvzldrjfii), 2nd aor imperat.
( n i n a v - ) p o i n t o u t, o r d e r , c o m m a n d .
(TDV-Ti-Btim, {TDvOtjaw, ovviOrjKa,
afia(i) (adg, aij, o6v). on)VT^0£iK a*, < n )V T £0E in ai*,
L iv T iE S , (OV, 6 S in tia n s, early inhabitants <n)V£T^0i]v (stems: 0i i - , 0E-) put
of Lemnos. tog eth er, u n ite, p erceiv e, co m p reh en d ,
O K ai 6; , r|, ov left (h a n d ), unlucky.
h eed , co n sid er.
a K t)rtt-o C x o 5, o v sce p ter-h o ld in g , 0(pd^(D, 0<pd^M*, EO(paâ, e a t p a y n a i,
sce p te r-b ea rin g . Ea(pdx 0i i v t (stem: ocpay-) slaughter.
O K fjjtT pov, OD, TO s c e p te r, staff. o(pl(v). o<ptoi(v) (efo, io).
a K ( 8-vT|m ( a K i 5 v a ^ a i , usually middle) 0(p6g, ocpij, o<p6v o n e’s ow n, th e ir ow n.
sc a tte r, d is p e rs e . o<pcb (av). oifxoe (eio, io), atpibi (ov), o(pcolv
G K io c i;, E o a a , ev shady, shadow y. (a o , £o).
D ^ iv S e v ;, 1105,6 S m in th e u s, epithet o(p«iiTEpog, n , o v o f y ou tw o, b e lo n g in g to
of Apollo, y ou two.
aol (ov). oxide {'ixo)) = eoxede (8 3 7 ).
aoToi, o6v (adg. aij, o6v). a x i ^ n .» 15» n split w ood.
0605, t i, o v (= a a o ; = od p o g) safe, soun d ,
u n h u rt, u n h a rm ed , w ell. T
065, ot|, o o v y o u r(s ). t' = zi (5 7 5 ).
o n J id y x v o v , OD , t 6 v ita ls , in n a r d s . r d (6 .1 ], i d ) .
408
r d d e ( o d e . ijd e , T o d e ) . T E p j i i - K ^ p a v v o ; , o v r e j o i c i n g in t h e
TaX,0i)-Pio;,ov, 6T a lth y b iu s . th u n d e r b o l t; p o s s ib ly h u r lin g th e
t u X A a = r a a k X a ( 587). th u n d e r b o lt,
T u v v a ( a } a v ( t a v v i o ) = £ T d y v a ( a ) a u ( 837). t i p n w , T£p\|»0»* ( T £ p \ |/ 0 ^ a l ) , ETEp\(»a*
T o-vv'-w ( / o r t v - w - o ) , 597- 598), ta - v v )( a ) m , (£TEp\(/dni)v, «a p ji6niiv, TETapn;6(Miv),
ETdvt)o(a)o,TEtdwa(iai, Eravv)a0iiv ET^p<p0t jv (CTdp<p0t i v , E td p r t n v ) (stems:
s tr e tc h , p la c e a lo n g . TEpjT-, T E p n -, T p a ji- ) p le a s e , d e lig h t,
x a p d ^ r ] ( T a p d a a c o j. s a te , sa tis fy , c h a r m , re jo ic e .
ta p d a a w * , ta p d ^ w * , e t d p a ^ a , t^ x p iix a , T E - ta y -w v , 2n d a o r. a ct. p a r t ic ip le on ly,
T E T d p a y f ia i* , E ta p d /O iiv * ( s te m : t o u c h , la y h o l d o f, se iz e .
t a p a x - ) d i s t u r b v io le n tly , t h r o w in to t e t e X e o h e v o v , T E T E k E o iiE vo g (teX eIco ).
c o n f u s io n ; p e r f. b e d is tu r b e d . r i z k a d i {*T X d (o ), 2n d p e r f. im p e r a t .
T a p P ^ - u , t a p p f |a w * , E t d p ^ i i a a fear, b e in TETX vjKag ( * r X d ( o ).
te r r o r , b e f r ig h te n e d . T E T pa-nX fl f o u r f o ld , fo u r-p ly , q u a d r u p ly .
l a v f f ( o in o g , a v t t ] , t o v t o ) = l a m a ZETVKOVXO (TEVXCO).
( 575, 582). TEVJXW, TEVSÔ), ETEVâ (t^TVICOV), T^XEDXtt,
T o t p o g , o t), 6 b u ll. ETOxO’lv (stems: tevx-, tvx-,
T a m a ( o v i o g , a v T r j. t o v t o ). TDK-) d o , m a k e , p e r f o r m , p r e p a r e ,
l a x a (cf. T a / v g . 781) q u ic k ly , sw iftly , s o o n . f a s h io n , c a u s e .
x i ,p o s t p o s . e n c l., a n d , a ls o ; or zt Ttj ( 6 . r]. t 6 ).
. . . K a i b o t h . . . a n d , n o t o n l y . . . b u t also. t»|>. 60 e (v ) , a d v ., a n d p r e p , w it h g e n ., fa r
T iK e ( t I ictco) = e i e ic e ( 837 ). ( f r o m ) , f r o m afar.
T£K^(I)p, in d e c L , t o su re ty , p le d g e , s ig n , t i ] ) . 6 6 i , a d v ., a n d p r e p , w it h g e n ., f a r ( f r o m ,
g o a l, lim it. a w a y ), a t a d is ta n c e .
T^KVOV, o v , t 6 c h ild , y o u n g , o f fs p rin g , T tjv ( 0 , ij, t o ).
d e s c e n d a n t. t-^ v 8 e , x r ja d E ( o 8 e , rjd E , T d d s ) .
TS/COl' (TiKTCO) = hsKOV ( 837). tI (Tig, t I) : ti (Tig, t i ).
Tîcog, £ 0 5 , TO c h ild , y o u n g , o f fs p rin g , t 16e i ( T l 6i] fii) = 1) ET idE i ( 837), 2) im p e r a t .

d e s c e n d a n t. 6f|oci), E 0 tiK a , T £ 0 E iica* ,
T eK ovaa (tIktco), 2 n d a o r. fe r n , p a r t ic ip le . xd 0 E ip ia i* , ETÔnv (stems: 0i i - , 0 E-) p u t,
t ^ X e i o ; , I], o v c o m p le te , f in is h e d , p la c e , c a u s e .
f u ll- g r o w n , u n b le m is h e d , p e r fe c t. tiK T U (= TI-TEK m ) ETEKOV, t^ T O K a*
TeXe(w (TE>io)), T E > i(o )(o )w , « £ X £ 0 ( 0 ) a , (stems: t e k -, t o k -) b e a r , p r o d u c e , g iv e
TET^X.EKa**, T E T ^^ E aH ai, ETEXiaOlIV b i r t h to , b e g e t.
( s t e m : t e X t a - ) fu lfill, a c c o m p lis h , p e r T1 ^d-a>, T1 ^rio(a, CTtfiiiaa, TETintjKa*,
f o r m , c o m p le te . T E T if iim a i, £T lfiT|& nv* h o n o r , g a in
T E k ia ( a } r ] , x e k e a ia jc o {T E X e ia }. h o n o r , b e s to w h o n o r ; m id ., a v e n g e ,
T eX io ) = TsAEico. ex act reco m p en se .
TEX,iiEi5, E o o a , Ev c o m p le te , f in is h e d , p e r fjg , t | h o n o r , s a tis f a c tio n , r e c o m
fe c t, f u ll- g r o w n , u n b le m is h e d . p e n s e , r e t r i b u t i o n , v a lu e .
ETEi>.a, T E ta X jia i ( s te m s : te> .-, z d k - ) T i/ ir jo o v (Ti/udco), a o r im p e r a t .
a c c o m p lis h , ra is e , ris e ; w it h EJii c o m T iv d (T ig , T i), r l v a (T ig , T i).
m a n d , e n jo in (u p o n ). tiv M , Tioco, E T la a , T ^ x lK a * , t i t l o n a i * ,
T ^ v e 5 o 5 , o d , ij T e n e d o s , a s m a ll is la n d in E T to 0 iiv * (stems: t e i - , t i - , T iv p -)
th e A e g e a n n e a r Troy. r e q u ite , a t o n e fo r, p a y t h e p e n a l ty for.
TE65, f |, 6 v th y , t h i n e , y o u r ( s ) . tijiT E ( = t / j w t e , 592) w h y ( in t h e w o r ld )?
409
tI;, encl., indef, s o m e ( o n e , th i n g ) , a n y (stems: tpE<p-, Tpoip-, tpacp- = OpEcp-,

( o n e , th i n g ) , a c e r ta i n ( p e r s o n , th in g ) ; 0 po<p-, 0 pa<p-, 619), nurture, nourish,
t\ as adverb ( 780- 781), a t all. feed, breed, grow up.
interrog., w h o ? w h ic h ? w h a t? ( t ( w hy?).
t ig , t i Tpi-n>.fl threefold, three-ply, triply.
T iaeiav (tIuco), optat. Tpig thrice, three times.
u o o v (Tivco). imperat. (tico). xp((ta)T05, n, ov third.
rfacoai( v) (rt(o) (uvco). Tpoiti, ti;, T|Troy.
Ti-w, ttow , ETlao, T^Tljiai honor, esteem, TpwE;, wv, o i Trojans, inhabitants of Troy.
bestow honor upon, imperat. •n)T0 6 ; , T|, 6v small, little, young, brief
*tXdo), TX.T|ooâi, ETdX,aa(o)a (etXi )v ), xw (cf. o, 1], t6) therefore.
T^T>.iiKa (stems: tX a-, tXi]-, taX a-) Tw, tw (6, )j, id).
have the heart, have courage, endure, TCO(Tig, TI).
dare, suffer. Twi' (6, tj, t6).
Tkfjvai <*TAdcoj.
x6 (6 , //, t o ).
t68 e (o8 e , rjde, rdde). v p p t ;, 1 0 5 , T| in s o le n c e , w a n to n n e s s ,

1) ( a v ) , 2 ) ( 6 , ij, t 6 ), 3 )
T o l: su re ly . h u b r is .
roTo (6. t], t6). i ) Y p 6 ;, T|, 6 v w e t, m o i s t , d a m p , w a te ry .
T o i o ; , >1, o v s u c h (a s ), o f t h e s o r t th a t , o f 1 )1 6 5 ,0 6 (gen. a ls o t) i£ o ; or V 109), 6 s o n ,
t h e k i n d th a t. d e s c e n d a n t, o f fs p rin g .
toTo(i) (6 . rj, t6 ). v fiE t g , v f u v , v fifiE ( ;, v ^ f i i ( v ) ( iy c b ) .
To^tj, i j ; , f| cutting, stump. V T iid E io a v (v T w d E id c o ) = v jiid fE ia a v .
t6v (6, rj, id), v it-E fK o i (v n o -E (K w ), (v r tE i^ o n a i,

rdvde (o8e, ijde, rdds). ^)noE^ôâl), vjiEiâ (vjioEiâ) (stem:
t6^ ov , o\), t6 bow. FE IK -) y ie ld , s u b m it , w e a k e n .
t 6a(o)o5, t), ov so much, so great, so large, v m k v o a o (v jio k v a ).
so many, so long. v jiip , \)n£{p adv., and prep, with gen. and acc.,
t6 tethen, at that time. o v e r, b e y o n d , in b e h a l f o f, c o n c e r n i n g ,
Tov (6, ?/, to). ab o v e; adv., ab o v e; with gen., ab o v e, (fro m )
T o v d e ( o d e , t fd e , i d d e ) . o v er, f o r t h e sa k e; with acc., o v e r b e y o n d .
T o v v c K tt ( = z o v E V E K a, 587) on account i) n E p - o jiX ,iij,ii5 , T| a r r o g a n c e , in s u lt in g
o f th is , f o r th i s r e a s o n , th e r e f o r e , c o n d u c t , d e e d o f i n s o le n c e ( 1168).
c o n s e q u e n tly , v j i - i a x o n a i ( v n o i o x o n a i ) ( o i - a ( E ) x - , cf.
row ; {6, r], t6). Ex«i>), i ) n o o x i l » o n a i , v r tE O x d n n v ,
TO V TO ( O V T O g , a V T t ] , T O V T O ). (stems: aex-, ox-, oxe-)
t6(ppa so long, meanwhile. u n d e r t a k e , p r o m is e , a s s u re .
TpdjUTO (Tpt JUO) = ETpUJU'TO ( 837). v n v o 5 , o t) , 6 s le e p , s lu m b e r .
xpd<pEV (rpE<pco) = hpa<pEv, 2nd aor., vn6 ( v n a ( ) , adv., and prep, with gen., dat.,
3rd plur. and acc., u n d e r , b e n e a t h , by, a t th e
Tp^no), Tp^yo), ExpE\|/a (Erpo:tov), h a n d s of, b y m e a n s of; adv.,
T^tpo<pa**, T £Tpa^âl, Etpd(p6t]v u n d e r ( n e a t h ) , s e c re tly , b e n e a th , by,
(stems: tpEJi-, tp o ji-, tpoji-) turn with gen., ( f r o m ) u n d e r , b y ;
g r a d u a lly ;
(around), put to flight; mid., turn with dat., ( d o w n ) u n d e r ; with acc.,
oneself, flee. ( d o w n ) u n d e r , d u r i n g , to w a r d .
Tp£(p(l), 0p^\)/(ll*, E0p£\|>a (8TpO(pOV), v ji0 -p x .t)6 i]v ( c f fidkXco) i n t e r r u p t i n g ,
T^Tpo<pa, tiOpafijiai*, ETpdcptfv b r e a k i n g in .
410
i)n o -5 E i8 (i), ^)Jlo6E ^ a o ^ a l, v ji ^ S t i o a , (pEvyci), (pEVJônai, Ecpvyo'’) JtEcpEvya,

vno5Ei5oiKa (i);ioSEi5ia) (stem s: Ji^cpuynai (stem s: cpEvy-, (pvy-) flee, fly,
S p E i-, S p o l-, S p i-) fear, sh rin k b efo re, escap e, ru n (off', away, alon g ).
crin g e befo re. (pimi, (prjou, Eipiioa* (stem s: <p?i-, (pa-);
i)Jto -S p a scow lingly, ask an ce, lo o k in g at imperf. E<piiv, £(pd^ 1lv sp eak, say, tell.
{dipKouui) darkly, fro m b e n e a th (vjw) (pT|p, 6 5,6 , T| w ild an im a l, (savage)
th e brow s d raw n dow n. b e ast, brute.
vjio-)ki)-w, i'noXtoM, i)n£>.t'oa, <ptj(}l(i') (iprjul).
im o>.^Xvnai,{):iE>.v) 0n v lo o se, free <l>0i»l, t i ;, T| P h th ia , a town and district in
(fro m b e n ea th , by stealth ). northern Greece, home o f Achilles.
iinooxEo iVTiloyouai). 2nd aor. imperat. «I>0iilvSE ( 7 8 8 :4 ), to P h th ia.
ijo rtaT o ;, t], ov (superl. o f i'OTipog. tj. ov) (pdivvdeoKe {(pQivvdo)}. iterative.
latest, last, u p p erm o st, h in d m o st. <p0i-vv-0<i) d estroy, w aste away, pine,
v a T E p o ;, 11, ov b e h in d , later, fu rth e r(m o re ), p erish .
at a n o th e r tim e. (p0ivw, (pOtoci), EtpOlaa, E(p0lâl, Eq)0(0iiv
i'<p' = VJW (5 7 5 , 5 8 2 ). (stem : <p0ivp-) destroy, co n su m e,
v<pevx£g (v(pit}fu), 2nd aor. participle. p erish , d ie, w aste away.
i)(pr|aw, ixpEtiK a (i)(p fjK a), (piXi-(i>, (piX.T|0(a, EipiXtiaa, 7iE(pi>.tiKa*,
iicp E iK a*, ix p E in a i * , ixpEiOrjv (ste m s : :iE (p (X ,tm a i*, £<piXti0tiv love, ch erish ,
a t ]- , OE- = T|-, E-, 6 0 3 - 6 0 4 ) , let dow n, e n te rta in hospitably.
low er, slack en . (piX,0 -KTEav(i)TaT05 , 1), ov superl., m o st
i)yi-PpE H E T ii 5, f io , 6 th u n d erin g a v aricio u s, m o st g reed y o f gain.
(grow lin g , ro a rin g ) o n h ig h , or h ig h (pi>io;, 11 , ov d ear, d arlin g , lovely, beloved .
th u n d e rin g , etc. (p>kOi6;, oC, 6 b ark , peel, rin d , h u ll, shell.
i'y o v i (o n ) h ig h , lofty, lo ftily <l>otpo;, ov, 6 P h o e b u s = th e clear, b rig h t,
s h in in g o n e; used o f Apollo.
<popE-w, <popT|Ow*, £<popiiaa bear, carry ,
(puavOsv (<put'li'co) = £<pdev6£i’ (8 3 7 ), 3rd brin g .
plur. ( 9 4 5 - 9 4 8 ) . (p o p ^ iy ^ , l y y o ; , i j lyre, harp.
tpaEivM , E(padv0T|V (s te m : cpaEV-) sh in e, <ppdi;«i>* ((p p d ^ o fja i), (ppdocD* ((p p d a(a)
glea m , glare, flash. o ^ a l ) , £< p p ao (o )a (EJi£(ppo 8 o v ),
(p aivw , <pavEw, Ecpiiva, Jt£ (p iiv a *, jiEcppaKo**, n i< p p a a f ia i* , E<ppdo0iiv
jT E cp ao ^ ai, E(pdv(0* ) iiv (s te m : (pav-) (stem : (p p a 5 -) tell, p o in t ou t, d eclare;
mid. appear, seem .
show , sh in e; mid., co n sid er, p lan , th in k .
<pdvi] (<puivco) = i(pui’}j (8 3 7 ). (ppdoai ((ppdlô)), aor mid. imperat.
<pdo;, E05, t o lig h t, g leam , lum inary. <ppt va, (ppevag, tpph’eg, <pp£ol(v) (<ppt^v.
(papETpn, 115, i] quiver. (ppevog, tj).
(p d a v a v o v , o d , to sw ord, saber. q)pT|V, q>pEV05, f| d iap h rag m , m id riff, h e art,
( p u a d u i, (puTO = eqiUTO (ip rjfd ). m in d , sp irit, soul, d isp o sitio n .
( p i p T U T o g , t], o i ’ ( t p t p r e p o g , 1] , o v ) . s u p e r l . (ppovE-to th in k , co n sid er, p lan; evs tppovEw
<pEpTEpo5 , 11, o v m ig h tier, better, braver, b e well (k in d ly ) d isp o sed , b e w ise (p ru
stro n g er, m o re pow erfu l, m o re p ro d u c d e n t), th in k carefully.
tive, m o re p rofitable. (pvyoifiEv ((pevyco).
<p£pci>, o ia w , ijv E iK a (ijv E iK o v ), ^ v o ^ a * * , cpi)f|, 115 , fi fo rm , n atu re, g ro w th , beauty,
^ riv E Y H a i*,i| V E x 6i lv * (s te m s : ipEp-, ch a ra cter, ap p earan ce.
o i - , ^ E K -) bear, b rin g , carry. q>i)X,X,ov, 01), TO leaf, foliage.
411
(pi)-(i), (pôcii, Ecp€oa (ccpf5v), n£<p€Ka b e a r, with or without iaziv: (it) is necessary,
p r o d u c e , b r i n g f o r th , ( c a u s e to ) g ro w . (one) must.
<p(i)v^-o), (pwvtjaw*, E(p<ovt]oa s p e a k , lift u p XPâE(i)o;, I), ov gold(en), of gold.
t h e v o ic e . Xp6ati,t)5,f| Chrysa, a town in the Troad.
XpC(H)i;, (So;, f| Chryseis, daughter of
Chryses.
Xa(pM, xaipT|ow, ^ l 1 pd^t1v (icEXop6 nt)v), Xp^ OHS, fio, 6 Chryses, a priest o f Apollo,
icExdpti(ic)a, icexdp(ii)nai*, ex^PHV from the town Chrysa.
(steins: x«p-, X«p£-. X«»pE-) r e jo ic e , b e XpCo6-6povos, ov golden-throned; possibly
g la d , h ail! w e lc o m e ! with robes embroidered with golden
X a i t i i , t i ; , T| h a ir , lo c k s , tr e s s e s , m a n e . flowers, 6p6va.
X a > ^ 65 , r|, 6v h a r d , h a r s h , se v e re , s te r n , X(o-oâl, x®ffOfiai*, ô>odî|v be angry
c r u e l, d iffic u lt. (enraged, irritated, infuriated).
X aX .K O -paTi^;, i g w i th b r o n z e th r e s h o l d ,
w ith b r o n z e p a v e m e n t. V
XaX.K65 , oi), 6 b r o n z e , i m p le m e n t o f b r o n z e \|/dâ6o;, ov, f| sand (of the beach), dune.
(a x e , s w o rd , s p e a r, e tc .). \|»CxT|, i];, T|soul, hfe, spirit, breath.
X a>.K o-x(Tw v, WV05 w i th b r o n z e t u n ic , c la d
in a b r o n z e tu n ic . Si
X ap iE i;, Eaoa, ev p le a s in g , g r a te fu l, wO!
g r a c e f u l, a g re e a b le . u (d g .ij.o ).
X E (p,X E (*)p6s> »l h a n d , a r m . w-5 e thus, so, in this way, as follows.
XepEiwv, ov w o r s e , in f e rio r . u6£(i>, uoM, Edioa, EIaaâl’'‘, euoOiiv*
X ^ p t);, e ; w o r s e , in f e r io r , m e a n e r , (stems: pwe-, pw0 E-) shove, push, thrust,
u n d e r l i n g , s u b je c t. drive, strike.
X Ep-v(m ojioi, x£pv^t|/oâl, £XEpvl\)>d^l]v WKO (cf. ci)Kvg, 780-781) quickly, swiftly,
(stem: vip*) w a s h th e h a n d s, p o u r suddenly.
l u s tr a l w a te r, p u r i f y w ith l u s tr a l w a te r. ][2KEav65, ot), 6 ocean, Oceanus, god o f
XEpaU V) (xeip, X f ( i)pdg, ij). waters, a great all-encompassing river.
X^W, XEVW» £3CE(v)a, K^xi>»ca*, uK^)-ôpo;, ov swift-fated.
exvOtiv (stems: xev-, XeF'. X^-) P « u r coicv-/iopa)TaTog, rj, oi’ ((OKVfiopog, rj, ov),
( o u t, f o r t h ) , s h e d ( te a rs ) . superl.
X0i^6s, ij, 6v y e s te rd a y s , o f ( o n ) y este rd a y . (bicv-n0p05, ov crossing-quickly, swift-
XOwv, X 0 o v 6 s , f] e a r t h , la n d , c o u n tr y . going, swift-sailing.
x 6 X .o ;, OD, 6 h o t ( f u r i o u s ) w r a th , b li n d (OKv;, E ia , V swift, speedy, quick, sudden.
a n g e r , c h o le r. (bfiiXrjoa (ofiTkeco).
XoX.6 -0), xoX.ii)ooi, Ex6 >.(i>oa, KEx6^ ^ a l , blô-6£T£-(l>, (aô6£T1loa place raw meat
EXoX,weiiv a n g e r , e n r a g e , v e x , in f u r ia te . (upon).
*Xpaioni-(i>, xpalo^^<'<"’ Expaiafiiioa u-ôt alas! ah me!
(Expaiofiov) h e lp , a s s is t, b e n e f it, a v a il, (oô;, ov, 6 shoulder.
with dat. avrjaag (dvtvrjî).
XPE(l)d) (xpv)- & n6noi alas! ah me!
X pil (XPE*w> XPEW) n e e d , n e c e s s ity , d e s tin y , (omr}aav (6md(o).
d u e , d u ty , o b lig a tio n ; used impersonally copftaivE (dpfialvco).
412
Mpae (Opvvfii). m e (dote, tjre, ore).

w?, W5, W5 how, so (that), in order that, cox' = (575, 582).
since, like (as), when, thus; in this way; wxeto (o'(xofiai).
W5 . . . W5 as . . . so. (oxOrjaav (dx6i(o).
WOE (wdew). (pxdfieda (o'fxoiiui).
413
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY
always a i e / , aiiv.
a, an not ordinarily expressed in Greek; amazed, be OanfiEo).
sometimes a, a certain tig, r). ambush Xoxog, ov, 6: i n t o a n a m b u s h
able, be d v v a fia i. Xdxovds (788:4).
about ajicpi, m p l; lie a b o u t, Keifiai. among d(a, ev(i), e'iv, /uEzd.
above vjiep, Tiepl; b e a b o v e , e x c e l jiepl a(n) not expressed in Greek; see a.
d fii {Tiepieifii). and Kal, r e , <3e.
accept (ajiojdExofiai. anger xdXog, ov, 6 ; pLEvog. Eog, t o ; fitjvig,
accomplish reAete (teXew), (Em)Kpaialvco. log, r]; t o a n g e r EpEdl^co, xoXoco.
dlETUO, l6ia)jipi]ooo). pE^co. a n g r y xeoofiEvog, rj, ov (xmoâi); t o b e
accomplishment Epyov, ov,x6. a n g r y koxeo), xtoofiai.
accursed ovXdfiEvog, rj, ov. another dXXog, rj, o.
Achaean A xaidg, ov. 6. answer dîEifiofiai, djiaÊifio/âi.
Achilles fjog. d. any, anyone, anything rig, z'l.
adapt apaploKco. apart d7tdvEv6E(v), ujiovdo(pi(v).
address ayopdofiai. ayopEvco, Apollo A jw XXcov, covog, 6.
jipooavddco, Jipdoiprjfii, 7ipoo<po)VE(o, appear (palvofxui (mid. of<palv(o t o s h o w ).
fiErdqnjfii: TtpoaEiJwv, /xeteTjiov (2nd aor.) appease iXdoKo/iui.
aegis-bearing aiyloxog, rj, ov. Argive ApyEiog, ov, 6.
again, (back) avzs, a v n g (avOij, av, arise dviozrjî ( to s t a n d u p ) ; dvafiaivQ) ( to
eâvzig, ndXiv. g o u p , a sce n d ); ylyvoâi (to b e c o m e ,
against avTlog, t], ov; (adv.) dvrlov; (adv. b e , c o m e in to b e in g , a r is e ) ,
or prep.) EJii, npog. arm with the breast plate Ocoptjoow.
A gam e mn o n Ayaî^vcov, ovog, o. army ozpazog, ov, 6.
aged yepaiog, rj, ov. around jKpl, afiipi.
Ajax Aiag, avtog, 6. arrogance vnEpoTiXir], rjg, rj (1168).
Alas M/uoi = difioi. arrow oiozdg, ov, 6; log, ov, 6; KfjXov, ov,
all ;i a g , Jidaa, Jiav;
a ll t o g e th e r avfijwig. zd; jiEXog, e o g , zd.
aaa, av. as (bg, (6g.
alone oiog, t], ov. as many (as) z6(a)aog, rj,ov.
along Jiapd (with gen., dat., and acc.), dvd. as the opportunity may offer cog eoezuI :iEp.
also /cal, r e , de. ascend dvafialvw.
although jiEp; often not expressed in Greek askance vjwdpa.
(see 1109:6, and e v e n th o u g h ) . assemble dyEipw.
415
assembled dfiriyspi^g, ig. blamable ah io g (ejialxiog), r/, ov.

assembly ayopt], fjg. rj; to th e assem b ly blame E m n in < p o fia i.
dyoptjvde ( 788:4 ). blameless d/nv/icov, ov.
associate with dfiiX ia (dat.). blaze XafiJiExdm.
at (use dative); at all ri; at h o m e oikoi ; at blood af/ia, axog, x6.
so m e tim e tiote: at th e h an d s o f np6g board, go on board dvajiaivm.
(gen.); at th e sam e tim e oftov. boast E v x o / u a t .
Athena A9j]vr]. t]g, Adtjvalr]. rjg, booty ikcbpiov, ov,x6.
atone ior {a:jo}xivco. born, be yiyvofiai.
Atreus, son o f Azpefdrjg, u o .o . both dnipo), o iiv; b o th . . . and Kai . .. ical;
attack i j z o i x o ^ a i , u n x c o , K a d a T t iw , K ai .. . x e ; x e . . . xi.
e n ip x o n a i. boundless d jiE p E io io g , o v ; d jiE lpcov, o v ;
attendant Oepdnwv, ovzog, 6. Hvploi, ai, a (co u n tle ss),
a\aW xpuiofiEw (dat.). bow xdôv, ov, x6; jiidg, ov, 6.
avaricious (see most avaricious). branch dt,og, ov, 6.
brave KolSg, rj, 6v; dyaddg, rj, 6v; fisydBufiog,
B ov; i(pdTfiog, ov; brav est dpioxog, rj, ov.
back, back again a jw , dy/. Jid h v , avxig, breast axfjdog, Eog, x6.
i-ûvTig. breed xpE<p(o.
bad KUKog, ij, ov. bright-eyed iXitccoy/, (ojwg (m.); EkiKmmg,
banquet daig , d a n d g , >]. idog (f.).
barrack (hut) Kkiolr], rjg, r;. bring (pipio, <pop£co, dyw.
hattXtndxr], rjg, rj. bring forth (pvw.
be (become) eifil, ylyvofiai, jiiXofiai. bring together ^vvlrjîi, dyEipco.
bear (pipo), <popico; in the sense b eg et, give Briseis BpTorjlg, idog, li].
b irth to tIktco. yelvonai. broad Evpvg, Eia, v.
beat back;rdA/>' jikdtô) (jiaXifiJiXd^wj. bronze o v ,6 .
beautiful KaXbg. r], 6v. build dijuag, aog, x6; to bu ild £pi<pco, jioieco.
beautiful-cheeked KaXkiJidprjog, ov. bull xavpog, ov, 6; fiovg, fiodg, 6.
beauty (pvtj, rjg, tj. bulwark eprog, Eog, x6.
because oi'veK a, o n , eIv eku . burn K u ico; KaxaKala.
become yiyvoftui. but <5e, 5^, avxE, dkXd, dXkd K a i, d(v)xdp.
behind djiito)d£( v); 6m o(o)(o, voTspog by u se t h e d a t., napd, im w ith t h e d a t. or
(later), vji6 w ith t h e g e n .; b y (m ea n s o f ) did
beloved <piXog, rj, ov. w ith t h e a c c u s .; by all m ea n s fidXiaxa.
beside .rapri, ijti.
best u p io io g , rj, ov.
better (pipTEpog, rj, o v ; dpEloiv, o v ; Calchas Kdkxag, avxog, 6.
dfiElv(ov, o v ; X(oi(ov, ov . call Kaki(o.
between êxa^v. fieoor]yv(g). camp oxpaxdg, o v , 6.
birdoicovdg, o v , 6. care icfjdog, Eog, x6; to ca re (a b o u t)
biting EXEJiEvictjg, ig. oGofxai, K ijdw (m id .), dkE y l^ co ; to b e a
bitter dxapxrjpdg, rj, 6v. care ^ i lc o .
black//eAaj, a iv a , a v ; KEkaivdg, ij, 6 v ; carry (pipw, (popsco, dyco; c a rr y to d vdya.
co m p letely, all aro u n d d^KpiHEkag, cast fidXXo).
a iv a , av. c a t t l e o)v, o i, a i.
416
cause TEvym. Tidtjui, noieco. crop icapjw g, o v , 6.

cause to go into eiajiuivco: avapalvm. crush dafidlô}.
cease, stop (a:jo).-iai'co: Xijyco. curb EprjTvo), navco.
certain,a r;g , ti.
check-Tatw, eptjrvo). D
chest OTÔog, 8og, to. Danaan A a m d g , o v , 6.
chief dpioTcvg, fjog. 6; ava^, u v u K x o g , 6: dare *T?.dco.
apxdg. o f, 6 ; / S a a i A e f g , rjog, 6 darling (plXog, r], ov.
child nalg. Jiaidog, d. >j. dart ptX og, sog, t o ; KrjXov, o v , to .
Chrysa Xpvor], rjg, iq. daughter dvyuTrjp, TEpog (rpog), rj; n aig,
Chryseis Xpvoijig. idog. rj. Jiaid og , rj.
Chryses Xpvarjg, ao. 6. dead, be (have died), use perf. of
Cilia KI aau . rjg, OvrjoKco die.
city 7i(T)d'Aig, log. ij; dorv, eog, to. dead body vEKvg, vog, 6.
clang KXayyt], rjg. >]; icXd^co. dear (plAog, rj, ov .
clear-toned/.(yj;5, ela. v. death O dvaiog, o v , 6 ; Krjp, KTjpog, rj.
clothe emevvvî (E(pivvvnO. declare Eêipm.
Clytemnestra KAviaifi( lOrjoTprj, rjg. vj. deed Epyov, o v , t 6 .
collect (en}uydpa>. a.(pvao(o. deer sXacpog, o v , 6, ij.
co m e Palvco, epxouai. iicviofiai. ikcd, kIo), defend dprjyco (dat.).
oi'xouai; eifti. depart (djw}ftalva>.
come! dye. dyeie. desire dv/xog, o v , 6 ; jwOrj, rjg, rj; TioOici).
come upon eneiui. i:iepxoftai. iKVEoâi, despise ddepii^w.
Kix&vw: evpioKo) (fin d ), destroy d rjliofiai, oAekw, oXXvfii,
command ftvBog. o r. 6: to give (a) djidXXvfii; d estro y , (u tte r ly )
co m m a n d i:il with teAaco, dvcbyco. EâXandô).
commander dpxog, o r, 6. destruction Xoiydg, ov, 6.
common (store) ^vftjiog. rj. oi>. devourer of (the goods of) the people,
compare duoioo). devouring drjfiofidpog, rj, ov.
comrade erapog (iralpog), o r, 6. did, emphatic, implied in past tense o f verb.
consider <ppu^co (mid.), dXeylô), die dvrjoKco.
fi£pfit]pit^w, fiBTaTpejiouai, dOoâi. digest Kaxaniaaw.
consider afterward fiETa<ppdt,(o (mid.), dishonor dTTfid(^)co.
contend udpuaâi. vsiKico. dishonored drifiog, rj, ov.
continue, keep doing (a thing), use dismiss Xvco, dipirjî, fiEdirj/ui.
imperfect (1079). disobey dmOEco (dat.).
council dyopt], rjg. tj; fiovXtj, rjg, rj. dispenser of justice diKaojwXog, ov, 6.
counsel PovAtj, rjg, rj. disposed, well ev (ppovicov.
counsel-bearing fiovArjipdpog, oi>. distant dmog, r], ov.
counselor lurjTI£TU, ao, 6. divide duTEOfiui.
countless /^vptoi, ai, a : djiepelaiog, rj, ov. divine dw g, a , o v ; dEOJiioiog, rj, o v ;
covered at both ends d^(pt]pe(prjg, eg. dfj.Pp6aiog, o v ; to divine (prophesy)
covf (3oCg, fioog, rj. jUavTEVOfiai.
coward(ly) deiAog, rj, ov; KUKog, rj, 6v; divinity daificov, ovog, 6. rj; deog, o v , 6 ;
(adv.) K U K c o g . dEd, dg, 1^.
crafty-minded KEp6aAEd<pp(ov, ov. division (of spoil) d a o fio g , o v , 6
417
do spdco, jw iico, Jip ija a a ; d o (auxiliary far, by far oxa, jioXv, noXXdv; f a r (a w a y )
verb, em phatic, im plied in present tense TtjXodl, Tt]XodEV.
o f verb). fat KvioT], T]g, ij; mcov, TUEipa, Jiiov.
dog icvcov, Kvvdg, 6, ij. father jiax^p, Jtarpdg (jiaripog), 6.
down (from) K aid (with gen. an d acc.). fatherland ndxpr], r/g, 7 .
drag epvo), eXkw ; d r a g f o r w a r d npoepvw . fear dEldco.
draw Epvm, eXko). fertile Epiji&Xa^, aicog.
dread(ful) deivdg, 6v; iicjiaYXog, ov. fight fidxo/iai, fia x io fia i. fidpvafiai.
drive eXda), eXavvoy, dyco, cbdiw; d r iv e filliilfiTiXrjiii.
aw ay ajuodico. fillet OTEfifia, azog, t6.
drunken oivojiap^g, eg. filth Xvfia, arog, z6.
find K i x a v w , E l p l o K o i .
fire Jivp, nvpdg, xd.
earth xôvdg, y a i a , rjg, ij. first Jipmog, rj, ov; firs t(ly ) , a t f ir s t (adv.)
either . . .o r rj .. . rj; after negative ovte .. . (xd) jipSxov, (xd) Jipwxa.
OVTE. fitting, be EJiioiKa, eoiku (* eik(o).
elsewhere dXX^. fittingly Kaxd /noTpav.
encampment oTpaidg, ov, 6. flashing-eyed iXtKcoy/, cojwg, m.; EXiK&mg,
enjoin ( a c o m m a n d ) sni with xiXXai. id o g .f; yXavicoijiig, id o g .f
enrage x p X o m : b e e n r a g e d d x w f ^ a i , flow ipcoEw, pEO).
Xcoofiai. fly {in the sense o f flee) (pEvyco.
entreat X laaofiai. follow EJtofiai (with dat.).
equal iaog, tj (Eiarj), ov. for prep, (use dat.); conj. ydp.
equally for this (reason) rovvEica.
equivalent dvrdîog, t],ov. forebode daaofiai.
escape (pEvyco. forego fiEdirjfii.
escort JIBHJUD. fourfold xExpajdfj.
especially jidXa, fidXiaza. free (set free) Xva, dnoXvo); w i t h o u t a
eternal, being forever a iiv iwv, io v o a , e6v. dnpiaxog, tj, ov.
p r ic e
Eurybates Evpvfidtrjg, a o , 6. free-shooter EKrjfidXog, ov, 6;
even though kuI (Jisp). EKaxrjfÊXixtjg, a o , 6.
ever jub, jw t e ; f o r e v e r a/e/, aiiv. free-worker EKdEpyog, ov, 6.
every jidg, jid o a , jidv; e v e r y th in g (all from use the gen., or ek (e^), n apd, and
th in g s ) Jidvia, (ov, xd (with gen.).
evil KUKog, >], ov. from the time when ov.
evilly KUKcog. fulfiU xeXeIo), (EJii)Kp(ai)alva).
expedition (literally journey) 6d6g, ov, >7. funeral pyre jivpi], fjg, rj.
eye d a o o fia i: ofifia, arog, t o : 6(pdaX^6g,
ov, 6.
eyes oooe (dual), d /ifia r a , cou, i d . gather (together) ayE lpa; g a th e r t o g e t h e r
a g a in E T m yE lp o ): g a th e r e d t o g e th e r
ofir/yEpijg, Eg; g a th e r e d t o g e t h e r a g a in
face ofiâTa, av, id . naXtXXoyog, rj, ov.
fair KaXdg, i], 6v. generation ysvEij, fjg, ij.
fair-haired ^VKOfiog, ov. gift dapov, ov, xd; g ift o f h o n o r yipag, aog,
fall nimo). x6; g ift o f prophecy fiavxoovvT], rjg, 77
418
g ir l Kovprj. rjg. rj. have EX(o, loxco.

g iv e 6(8cofii: e:iopo\> (2nd aor.). he d , 1], T d ; a v i d g , 7, d ; a l s o i m p l i e d in
g iv e b a c k ajwdldmfxi. th e verb.
g iv e u p Jipoirjfii, a.:w8i8(Ofii. hear * k X e v w w ith g e n ., d /c o v c o .
g le a m tpaeivo). h e a r k e n ( to ) a v v T i G r / ^ i , * ic X e v c o w i t h
g lo r io u s dyXadg, tj, 6v; dToq, a, ov. g e n ., d K o v m .
g lo r y Kvdog, fo g , z6. h e art K fjp , K r jp o g , r d ; (e p r jv , (p p e v d g , ) j;
g n a w a^vaao). t jr o p , o p o g , r d ; K p a d ir j ( K a p d ir j),
gofiaivQ), elfii, epyoftai, lelw: go down,

descend icaTafialva): go on board, go heaven ovpavdg, ov, d ; from heaven
up, ascend d v a f ia i v o } . ov p av d d sv .
g o a t alf^, aiydg, 6. tj. heavy f i a p v g , eTu , v .

g o d dedg, ov. 6. h e c a to m b E K a i d n f i r ] , r jg , r j.
g o d d e s s dea, dg. rd H e c to r "EKXcop, opog, d.

g o d lik e diog, a, ov; deoef/reAog, rj, ov. h e e d , g iv e h e e d t o * K k E v w ( g e n .) ,
g o ld (e n ), o f g o ld xpvaeog. rj, ov. odo/iai ( g e n . ) .

g o o d (ly ) icaXdg, jj , 6 v: dyaddg, rj, dv; h e lp *xpo.tafi£co ( d a t . ) .
Kprjyvog, r], ov. h e r, h im , it d, ij, rd; avzdg, d; filv
g r a n t didcoî, EJiopov (2nd aor.). ( a c c . o n ly ).
g r a n t in a d d itio n :ipoTi6rjni. h e r (o w n ) og, if, dv; kog, et], kdv.

g re a t neyag, fieydkrj. fiiy a : greater H e ra rjg, ij.
" H p rj,
/lef^cov, ov; greater (part) ro jiXewv. h e r a ld icrjpv^, v/cog, d.

g re a tly :wXv. /idXa, fiiy a. h e re ivddds.
g r e a t-s o u le d fieyddvôg, ov. h e r o ifpiog, wog, d.
G r e e k Axaidg. ov. 6; Aavaog. ov, d; h ilt Kmnr], rjg, ij.
ApyeTog, ov, d. h im , h e r, it d , r j, t o ; a v i d g , ) j , d ; ^ I v
g r i e f dxog, eog, t6. ( a c c . o n ly ).
g rie v e Ktjda; be grieved dxvv/uai, h im s e lf , h e r s e lf, i t s e l f a m d g , ij, d .
Krjdofiai (gen.). h is , h e r ( s ) , its (o w n ) d g , tj, d v ( i d g ,
g r o u n d yaia, rjg, i^; x^cov, xdovdg, rj. Eifj, kdv).

g ro w w e a ry icd/Avco. h it h e r dsvpo.
g ru d g e Kdiog, ov, d. h o ld Exco. i'oxco.
g u id e ^yEOftai (dat.). h o ld a g ru d g e K o ik o i, /r d r o v ex eiv .
h o llo w K o i X o g , r j, o v .
H hom e o i K o g , o v , d ; d w f i a , a i o g , r d ; home,
H ad es *"Aig, ~Ai8og, d. at o iico i; home(ward) oficadE, oJkovSe .

h a ir y Xdotog, rj, ov. honey f i i h , n o g , rd.
h a n d ^ e^ p . xÛ)pdg. tj. honor rTfxi], r j g , i j ; K v d o g , E o g , rd ; honor,

h a p p ily ev, ev. do honor to z i f i d a , t i c o .
h a r a n g u e dyopeva, dyopdo/nai. h o rse ' (ju w g , o v , d , ij.
h a r s h drapTtjpog, ij, dv; Kaprepdg, ij, dv; h o st a r p a r d g , o v ,d .
XakeTwg, r}. dv. h o t w ra th xoX og, o v , d.
h a r s h ly KaKwg. how ? jtS g .
h a te OTvyeco. how m u ch da(a)og, r], ov.

h a te fu l ixOpdg, >], dv; most hateful h u rl (r j^ i, fidkXco; hurl upon k < p lr )fii
Exdiaxog, t], ov. ( w ith d a t.).
419
I lead, lead away d y c o , lead the way,

d iu x y w ,
I eywiv), [isv. guide T ^ y t o f i a i (d at); lead upon d v d y m .

Idomeneus ~I6ofi£V£vg, fjog, 6. leader dpiazEvg, rjog, 6.
ifTji', ai. £1 . leaf ( p v k X o v , o v , t o .
Ilium 'IkioQ, ov, rj. learn m > v 9d v o f i a i , J i e v d o j x a i .
immediately uvtIku , aiy/a. leave kelTuo.
impetuous ,ToAi;df|, Iicog. let u s e s u b j . o r i m p e r a t . ; let, allow E d w .
implore M aaofiai. Leto A t ] t 6 , A r j x d o g ( A r j i o v g ) , i j .
in iud) (with dat.), or use simple dat. lie K E i f i a i .
in no wise ovdiv ( 7 8 0 - 7 8 1 ) . lift up the voice ( p c o v i c o .
in order that o:r(jt)cog, oig. iva. like, be * e i k q ) ( d a t . ) .
in person uvTog, //,6. live ^(0(0.
in single combat /cat' am d v . living in mountain dens (lairs) d p i o K c p o g ,
in sufficient numbers ijinridig. r j, o v .
in two ways Sidudixu. locks K -d fiT j, r jg ,

inferior i'S: ;êpe/<ui'. ov. loiter d t j d v v c o .
insolence vftpig, log, rj. longer e t i : no longer o i > ( i c ) h i .
insult X afid o^ ai, look, look out upon d i p i c o f i a i , o p d c o .
into Eig (eg) (acc.); etaco. loom i o r d g , o v , 6.
it (implied in the verb); d, ij, t6 ; avrdg, rj, loose XvQ).
6: ^'iv (acc.). lord d v a ^ , d v a t a o g , 6.
lose okkv/ii.
J loud-roaring i w k v i p k o i a f i o g , o v .
justice Bifiig, lOTog, >j: dispenser of justice, love t p i k i a .
judge diKaandXog, ov, 6. lovely ( p i k o g , r j, o v .
lying in mountain lairs o p i a i c c p o g , r j, o v .
K
keep (doing a thing), continue use M
imperfect (1079). maiden K o v p r j , r j g , r j.
kill dkeKQ). oXhifit, ujioXkvfii. make t e v x o ) , J t o i i c o .
kindle dpvvfii. m a n d v i j p , d v i p o g ( d v d p d g ) , 6 ; man,
kindly disposed, be £v (ev) (ppoviw. ordinary man, mere man d v d p c o j i o g , ov,
king uva^, dvaKiog, 6; jiaadevg, 6.

rjog. 6. man-nourishing/SoTfdi'e/pa (f.).
know yiyvaoKco. *£ido). man-slaying d v d p o < p 6 v o g , r j, o v .
m ^ n y T io k k d g , i ] ,d v .
marshal(ler) K o o f i ^ T c o p , o p o g , 6 .
lack dEvofiai (gen.). may s u b j u n c t . , o p t a t .
lamb dptjv, upvdg, 6, t]. Menelaus M e v e k a o g , o v , 6 .
land y a ia , t]g. tj. might s u b j u n c t . , o p t a t . ; j x E v o g , E o g , i d ; ig ;
last voTUTog, tj, ov: for the last time might, with might, mightily i< pi.
v arax a. v o t u t o v ( 7 8 1 ). mightier K p E l a a c o v , o v .
later voTEpog, tj, ov. mightiest K d p r z i a z o g , r ], o v .
law diîg. lOTog, i). mightily//eya, i< pi.
lawfully wedded icovpldiog, rj. ov . mighty H E y a g , f i E y d k r / , n i y a .
lay upon ijiKptpo) (dat.). mind ( p p i^ v , < p p E v d g , ij: v o o g , o v , 6.
420
more jdecof. ov ; .'delcov, ov. old man yipoyv, oviog, 6: yspuiog, ov, 6.
more safe(ly) a a m ep o g , rj. ov. Olympian 'OXvjiJiiog. rj,ov.
mortal fiipoty, o:iog, 6; f}poi6g, ov, 6, r). Olympus 'OXvfiM)g, ov, 6.
most avaricious (piXoKreavmraxog, t], ov. on EJil, dat.
most glorious Kvdioiog, t}. ov. on account of (usegen.), s'lveica, ivEKa (gen.).
most hateful exîaTog. rj. ov. on the selfsame day am fjjiap.
most terrible EKnayXoxaTog, rj, ov. once 7WTE.
mother fiijTTjp, firjrepog i^rjTpdg), ij. one Eig, jila, ev; which (one)? r/g, r/; ones
mountain opog (ovpog 571), eog, rd. ... others o i fitv .. . o i d i.
much jioXXdg, tj, 6v; jioXvg, twXX^ jioXv . openly dvrtjv.
mule ovpevg, fjog, 6. opposing av iip iog , rj, ov.
must XPV eoTi(v). opposition, in avitfilrjv.
m y Eftdg, rj, ov. used only fo r sake o f or ij (i] e); whether ... or eite . . . EtXE.
clearness or emphasis. oracle dEonpdmov, ov. to; dsoTiponlrj,
Myrmidon Mvpfiidcov, dvog, 6.
orator ayoprji^g, do, d.
N order, give orders fivdeofj-ai, keXo^ ui ,
nail ^ X og , o v . 6. arjfiuivw, ejiiteXXm , uvcoyco.
native land jtaTpt], r]g, tj. other dXXog, rj, o.
neither o v ie : neither ... nor ovte . . . our ^jiEXEpog, r], ov. used only fo r emphasis
o m e ; fiijTe . . .fiijTe. or clarity.
Nestor NioTcop, opog, 6. ourselves i j f i s T g . u s e d o n ly f o r e m p h a s is
never (not ever), not ever at any time o r c la r ity .
OVJIW, OV:WTE. outwit JlUpEpXOfiUl.

nine days ivvfj/xap. ox P o v g . f i o d g . d .
noble K-aXdg, i j . d v .
noblest a p i a x o g , rj, o v .
noise K X ayy i] , rjg, ij. partake dvTidm.
none, no one, nothing o i h i g , r i: ovdelg, pass away (pdivco.
ovd efila, ovdev. peel Xetw).
nor OVTE, o v d i , ji r jd i. people Xaog. ov. 6.
not oi) ( o v K , o i ’x ) . perchance ke( v). juo(g). dv.
now vvv. perfect lEXrjEig. eoou, ev.
numbers see in sufficient numbers. perform pi^w, tevxo), jioieco, Epdco.
perhaps ice( v), jiov , jubg, dv.
O perish dji6XXvfj.i, mid.
o«. person, in avzog, ov, 6.
oarsman Epirtjg, ao, 6. persuade Jieidco.
oath dpKog, ov, 6. pestilence Xoi/Aog, ov, 6.
obey Jieidofxui, mid. of jiEtdoa (dat.). Phoebus (Poijiog, o v ,6 .
obtain (one’ s share) fiEipojtai. Phthia <Pd1t], rjg, rj.
Odysseus 'Odva(a)Evg, rjog, 6. pierce jiElpco.
of (use the gen.). place Tldtjfii; place in EiaxiOrjui.
offscouring Xvfia, azog, t o . plague vovoog, ov, ij: Xoijiog, ov, 6.
old yEpaidg, rj, 6v. plan (iovXtj, rjg, rj.
old age yijpag, aog, r6. please, be pleasing (to) dvddvm (dat.).
421
pleasing yupieig, eo o a , ev. revile dveidl^co.

ply e:w ixofiai. reviling dveidog, eog, t6 ; dveldsiog, t], ov.
ponder dpftalvco. riches d<pEvog, eog, rd; TiXovzog, ov, 6.
pray evyopiai. ap d o fia i. roar icXayyi], rjg, to roar Kkdlâ.
prayer evyw ^ . fjg, roaring r iy i^ E ig , e a a a , e v ; iqyv, V?- V-
prefer Jipoftovkofiai. roll, curl eXIoo(o.
prepare ezoifidlâ). roof (over) ip e< p < o .
preserve ipvofiu i. round about j i e p l .
Priam Flpiafiog. ov, 6. rouse d v i o T r j f i i , d p v v ^ i i .
priest upt]T^p, ^pog, 6 ; iepevg, fjog, 6. rule (over) d v d a o c o ( g e n . ) , K p a x i c o ( g e n . ) .
prize (of honor) yepag, aog, x6. ruling Kpelcov, o v a a , ov.
produce (pvco.
prophecy, gift of /xavToavvrj, rjg, ij.
prophesy fia v iev o ftai, dsonpojiico. sack jtipdca: sack (utterly) sKTiipQa,
prophet udvTig, log, 6. EâXaJidô).
protect ufi<piPutv(o, avdoaco. sacred iepdg, ij, 6v.
purify (oneself) djioX vfialvofiat. sacrifice epdto, pel^w; sacrificial victims,
put Tidj]ui. pdXXo3. iepd, &v, xd.
Pylian FlvXiog, >]. ov. safe(ly) odog, (odog = adfog), rj, ov.
Pylus rivXog. ov, r], safer, more safely aacoxepog, r], ov (comp.
pyre .Ti’
p;;, r]g, //. o f odog, rj, ov).
sail upon eniJjXeco.
Q sailor EpExrjg, do, 6.
quarrel ipil^w; i'pig, idog, r], save oado).
quickly alifra. savor Kviar], rjg, -q.
quiver (pupeipti, rjg, r). say dyopevQ), (prjfil, eiJiov ( 2n d aor.).
scabbard ko(v)Xe6 v, ov, x6.
R scepter oKfjnxpov, ov,x6.
rage fifji'ig, log, tj; to rage firji'lco. scepter-bearing aKrjmovyog, rj, ov.
ransom(s) dm )iva, wv, id ; to ransom sea BdXaaaa, rjg, ij: aXg, dXdg, 6, ij; to the
(d:io)Avo/jai. sea dXade (788:4).
rather than (often after a comparative) rf (rje). seat (oneself), sit down eô/iai; seat sdog.
ready oiprjpog, r], 6v. see opdo), XEi)aoco, *E’fdo).
receive d iy o fia i, d jio d ix o fia i. seem eidofxai, * eik(o.
recognize yiyvcboKO). seemly, be * eik(o.
recompense rjg, i]; aTioTivo), xivo). seer fidvxig, log, 6; oiiovoTidXog, ov, 6.
regard dkeyil^co (gen.). seize aipico.
rejoice ytj6i(o, yulpco. select Kpivco.
release k v a , djioXva. self avxog, >j, 6.
remain nivio. selfsame day avxfjâp.
restrain iprjTvw: laxco. send jiEfiJuo, npoidm a, Yrjui; send away
return viofiai, iK viofiai; return d(plt]iii.
home(ward) ujiovoaxeo), oiKaS' separate ddaxrjfii.
iKvioiuai. shadowy oKidEig, Eoaa, e v .
reveal dva<paivco. shameless dvaidtjg, Eg.
reverence dôftai, a id io fia i, a'idofiai. shamelessness avaidElr], tjg, rj.
422
share avtido). stand ' (o T T jp i.
sharp d^vg, sTa, v : ix^jKvnrijg, ig . stealthy, be K k i m c o .

she 1] (6, r\. to ), avTtj (avTog, rj, 6), used stern K p a T s p d g , r j, 6 v ( K a p T E p d g , r }, 6v ).
only fo r em phasis or clarity; im plied in still E T l.
the ending o f the verb. strand d i g , d i v d g , ij.
shining ayA aog. >]. 6v. strife E p i g , i d o g , r j.

ship vTjvg, vt]dg, rj. strive p d p v a p a i .
shoot pdXlco, £(pirifii. strong K a p T E p d g , i], 6v (K p aT E p d g ).
shoulder cofiog, o v , 6. stronger ( p i p T E p o g , r j,o v .
shout assent eJiev<pt]nico. struggle p o y i c o .

silent, in silence aKEcov, o v a a , ov. stud jiE ip c o .
silver, of silver dp y v p eog , t], ov. stump T o p i ] , f j g , I].
silver bow(ed) (of, with) dpyopoT o^ og, such (as) T o w g , o v .

rj, ov. sufficient numbers, in i j t i T r j d i g .
since ejie/, in eidi]. suggest T ld r jp i ( E jii < p p £ o l).
sing deidco, piA:ia). summit K d p r j v o v , o v , t 6 .

sit (down) ijp a i, stôpai. Kadelôfiai. summon K a l s o p a i {mid. o f K a X i w ca ll).
slay evaplô). surely f j , d i ] , p i v , p jjv , p d .
slight a u p d (^ )u . swear o p v v p i.
small oXiyog, rj, ov. sweet y X v K v g , eTu, v; sw eeter yXvKlcov, o v .
Smintheus2'//(i'0ei35, ijog, 6 . sweet-speaking, sweet-toned ijdvEJttjg, eg.
smoke K o n v o g , o v . 6. swift 6 o 6 g , 6 v ; coKvg, e t a , v.
so wg. swift-footed ji o d d p K r j g , E g; J i 6 8 a g wKvg,
so great(ly) x d o i a j o g . rj, o v . E?a, V.
so that dn ij i} o)g , cog, i v a . sword ^l(pog, Eog, t 6 ; i p d a y a v o v , o v , t 6 .
some (one) Tig, t'i; so m e . . . o th ers o i f i e v
.. .o l dt.
son v i d g , o v (a lso gen. e o g , o g ) . 6 ; so n o f take aipEco; tak e aw ay dcpaipEco; tak e b a c k
A treu s A T p e i d i j g . d o , 6 ; so n o f dipaipico; ta k e co u rag e d a p a e a ; tak e
M e n o e tiu s M E v o n i d d t j g , a o , 6 ; so n up d v aip ico.
o f Peleu s ri tj X rj id dr jg , a o , 6 : so n o f Talthybius TaXdvfiiog, ov, 6.
T h e sto r OeoTopldrjg, do, 6. tarry drjdvvo).
soon T d x a . tawny âvddg, ov.
soothsayer oicovoTidXog, o v , 6. tear ddicpv, vog, to .
soul y/vxV: fjg. Ovpog, o v , 6. tell p v d E o p a i, Eipco; eijw v (2nd a o r).
speak (prjfii, p v d io p a i, avddco, e ip a ; eijw v temple vt]6g, o v , »/.
(2nd aor.); sp e ak am o n g peTacprjpi, Tenedos TivEdog, ov, r].
fiETEEiJiov (pETELtov) (2nd aor.); sp eak tent Kliolri, rjg, ij.
ou t EÊlpoj; sp eak to npooE iJiov, eijw v terrible dsivdg, i], o v ; EKjmykog, o v ; m o st
(2nd aor.). te rrib le EKJiayXdTUTog, rj, o v ; terrib ly
spear ddpv, d ov p o g (dovpaT og), t6 . EKJidyXwg.
spirit fjTop, opog, t 6 : dvpdg, o v , 6. than (usegen. after com paratives) rj.
splendid dyX aog, r], 6v. that (in order) (conj.) 6<ppa, Iv a, cog;
spoke among peteT jiov (p eteeijw v ). (b e ca u se ) th a t o t e ; th at (pron.) KEivog,
spring up dvopovco, d v aloo co. rj, o ((E)KEivog, t}, o ) ; 6, ij, t 6 ; 68e,
sprout (forth) dvadyjXEco. fjdE, t6 6 e.
423
th e [6, rj, x6] not ordinarily expressed in tw ic e dig.

Homeric Greek. tw o use the dual or 8v o (dvco).
t h e i r , t h e i r o w n ; h is , h e r , its o w n idi;, it],
eov <og. rj, 6v), used only fo r emphasis or U
clarity. u n b le m is h e d xElEiog, r], ov.
th e m plur o f 6. ?/, t6; avrdg, ?], 6. unbought dnplaxog, rj, ov.
th e m s e lv e s plur o f am dg, t], 6. u n r a n s o m e d avdjw ivog, r],ov.
th e n xdxe, eneiza. u n s e e m ly aiiKrjg, ig.
t h e r e (expletive implied in the verb, as in u n til ocppa.
there isj; avxov. u n w illin g aiKwv, o v a a , ov.
t h e r e f o r e xovveku. u p , u p th r o u g h dvd.
t h e r e in eg, e;g, ev(1). u p o n iv, EJil, d v d ; use dat.
th e r e u p o n xdxe, EJieixa. u p r o a r Klayy^, fjg, i].
th e s e tw o O(pcoe. u r g e EJiiaoEvco, K ikofiai.
th e y (implied in the verb); oi, ai, xd. u s ^fiag (from iyco).
th ig h nrjpdg, ov, 6. u t t e r fivdio/xai.
th ig h -p ie c e fir/plov, ov, x6.
t h in k did) (o'lco). ppd^co (mid.).
th ir d Tpl(xa)xoQ. r], ov. v a lia n ticpdTîog, tj, ov.
th is (t h in g ) o , to; ovxog, avxrj, xovxo; v e ry jrep, ^dX a, fi iy a , jwXv, m k k d v ,
ode, t]6e, x68e. Jw X ld ; very mighty ^ iy io x og , r], o v ;
th o u g h , h o w e v e r m u c h Tiip. KpElaacov, o v ; very sacred ^ddEog, rj,
8i.
th o u g h . . . y e t (5e . . . o v ; T]yddeog, t], ov.
th r e a t e n cltieiMo): threaten (against) vex ipEdll^co, xoXdco; be vexed axw /xai.
ETKUKlkio). vow EVXcoX.1], rjg, ij.
th r e e f o ld xpiTiXfj.
t h r i c e xpig. W
th r o u g h dtd. w ar jt(x)6Xeiiog, ov, 6; 7i(x)oXEfil^co.
th r o u g h o u t Kaxd, dvd. w a r d o f f dfivvco, anafivvco.
t h r u s t (oQeo). w a r r i o r aixfirjxi^g, do, 6; ijpcog, coog, 6.
th u s mg (cog, cog), ovxco(g). w a t e r y vypdg, t], 6v.
ov.
t i m e , f r o m t h e tim e w h e n e | w a y KlXEvdog, ov, (plur. also KiXsvOa,
to , to w a r d Eig (ig), in i, npdg, Ji(p)oxi. Eiaco, cov, xd).
fiEXpi; compound verbs often use dat. w e (implied in verb) rjfiEig.
t o g e t h e r w ith afia , avv (dat.). w e o u r s e lv e s tifiEig; avxol, al, d.
to n g u e yX&oaa, rjg, rj. w e a lth TiXovzog, ov, 6; dcpevog, Eog, xd.
to w a r d see to . w e ll EV, EV.
T r o ja n TpcoiKdg, t], dv. w e ll- b a la n c e d hog, rj (iiar}), ov.
T r o ja n s Tpwsg, cov, oi. iv cppovEoi.
w e ll- d is p o s e d , b e
T r o y Tpoir], rjg, r]; "iXiog, ov, i]. w e ll- g r e a v e d ivKvrjfiig, l3og.
t r u s t (in ) TwlQojiai (dat.). w e ll- s itu a t e d si) vai6fievog, t], ov.
t r y jiEipdco. w e ll-w a lle d ivxElxEog, ov.
t u r n a r o u n d fiExaxpEJuo. w h a t 6, rj, xd; 6g, fj, 6 (rel); what? xlg,
tw e n ty (E)EiKoai. xl (interr.).
424
w hen 6n{:i)dTE; e v t e : use participle. w o rd E Jio g , s a g , t o .

w h e n (e v e r ) o jr ( ,T ) o r f . w o rse p T y lc o v , o v .
w h ic h o , t o ; dg. rj, 5 (rei); which? (one) w o r th le s s o v r i d a v o g , r j, o v .
rig, tI (interrog.). w o u ld u s e o p t a t .
w h ile )]og, eiog, use participle. w r a th f i f j v i g , l o g , r]; xoXog, ov, d ; fiiv o g ,
w h ite -a r m e d XancibXei'og, ov. E og, xd.
w h o , w h ic h , w h a t(rel.) dg, rj, 6 : o, i], t o ;

oozig, {]Tig. o n ; o o t e , rjxE, o t e ; who? Y
which? what? (intern) rig. rl. yea v a l.
w h y ? r/, I'lnTE. y e a r n in g noQi^, fjg,
w ic k e d KUKog, r],6v. yet ETi.
w ife aXoxog, ov. i]. y ie ld vjie Ikw.
w ild b e a s t <piqp, (prjpog, 6.)]. y o u (y o u r s e lf ) a v , o e T o , u s e d o n l y f o r
w ill fiovX^, fjg, ij. e m p h a s i s o r c l a r i t y ; o t h e r w i s e i m p l i e d in
w illin g , b e EdiXco. fiovXofiai. th e verb.
w ily TwXvfirjTig. log. y o u n g v e o g , r j, o v ; younger V E m E p o g , r j,
apvvfiai.
w in , s t r iv e to ov.
w in g e d mEpoEig. Eooa, ev. you r a d g , a ij, a b v ; u s e d o n ly f o r e m p h a s is

w is e , i n n o ovri, ovdh' (780-781). o r c la r ity .
w ish fiovXofiai, EdiXm.

w ith avv. ana (dat.); use dat.
w ith in EV, Evdodi. ewq). z e a lo u s (ly ) npd<ppwv, ov.
w ith o u t a p r iz e o f h o n o r ayEpuoxog, r], ov. Z eus ZEvg, Aidg, 6.
w o e dXyog, Eog, t o ; Tiivdog, Eog, z6. Z e u s - n o u r is h e d 8iorpE<pijg, ig.
425
INDEX
Numbers refer to sections in the Grammar.
ablaut, 5 9 3 -9 6 , 862
accentuation, 5 3 4 - 5 0
o f adjectives {see o f nouns)
o f com parative and superlative adjectives, 748
co n traction and, 5 8 9 -9 1
crasis and, 588
o f disyllabic prepositions, 1050
elision and, 583
enclitics and, 5 5 3 -5 9
o f indefinite and interrogative pronouns, 7 6 7 - 6 8
o f nouns, 6 4 1 - 4 3
persistent accen t, 6 4 1 - 4 3
proclitics and, 5i51
recessive accen t, 548, 668, 697, 902
o f verbs, 5 4 8 ,9 0 2 - 9 0 3
accusative, 68 5 , 6 8 8 - 8 9
w ith infinitive. 971, 972, 1107
use of, 1 0 1 1 -2 1 , 1051, 1053, 1 0 5 9 -6 1 , 1071
active voice, 1065
adjectives, 7 1 7 - 1 9 , 734
as adverbs, 7 8 0 - 8 1 , 1035
com parison of, 721n , 7 4 7 -5 6 , 993, 1024
first- and second -declension (2 -1 -2 ), 7 2 0 - 2 8
w ith genitive, 993
irregular, 733
as substantives, 1027, 1034
third -d eclension (3 -3 , 3 -1 -3 ), 7 2 9 -3 2
use of, 1 0 2 3 -2 7
verbal, 48 7 , 829n
See also participles; pronouns
adverbs, 7 8 0 - 8 8
dv and Ke(v). 10 8 5 -9 1
w ith genitive, 992, 993
o f m anner, 783
neuter accusative adjectives as, 7 8 0 - 8 1 , 1035
o f place, 785
prepositions as, 786, 1048
o f swearing, 1016
agreem ent, 9 7 3 - 7 4 , 1025, 1045, 1047
alphabet, 501
av, in Attic G reek, 488
d v & n d K £ ( v ) . 1 0 8 5 -9 1 , 1 1 3 5 -3 6 , 1 1 3 9 -4 8 , 1 1 5 1 -5 3 , 1156
antepenult, 54 3 , 544, 590
aorist tense, 84 1 , 8 6 3 - 6 6 , 1064, 1075, 1078, 1 0 8 0 -8 2
427
INDEX
apodosis, 1133
apposition, 975
articles
Attic G reek. 4 8 1 - 8 6
use of, 660, 1028, 1032, 1044
aspect, 1072
assim ilated (“d istracted ") verb form s, 9 4 5 - 4 8
assim ilation o f consonants, 6 0 8 -1 1
asyndeton, 1028n, 1113
athem atic verbs, 795, 797, 798, 800, 801, 803, 805, 9 4 9 -6 3
augm ents, 630, 8 3 0 - 3 7 , 8 3 9 -4 2
breathings, 5 2 7 - 3 3 , 619
caesura, 1167, 1 1 8 5 -8 7
capital letters, 502, 527, 539, 541, 542
cases o f nouns, 6 3 9 - 4 0 , 6 5 6 - 5 7 , 661. See also nom inative; genitive; dative;
accusative; vocative
causal clauses, 1 1 2 8 -3 0
causative sense, verbs used in, 1069
clauses, subordinate. See subordinate (dependent) constru ctions
com m ands
use o f im perative to express, 1106
use o f infinitive to express, 1107
use o f optative to express, 1104
com parison o f adjectives, 72 In , 7 4 7 - 5 6 , 9 9 3 ,1 0 2 4
com pensative (com pensatory) lengthening, 601, 692
com plex sentences, 1088. See also subordinate (dependent) constru ctions
com pound sentences, 1 1 1 3 -1 4
conative present, 1070
conditional clauses, 1090, 1 1 3 3 -4 9
less vivid future, 1141
m ore vivid future, 1140
past general, 1143
past unreal, 1139
present general, 1142
present unreal, 1138
relative, 1 1 4 4 -4 9
use o f participle to express, 1109
conjugation, general, 7 8 9 -9 0 3
consonantal change, in A ttic, 465
consonantal i, 600, 8 5 8 - 6 0
consonantal i', 602
consonants, 5 0 8 -1 8
changes in, 6 0 8 - 1 9
double, 518
final, 6 0 5 -6 0 7
m ovable, 5 6 1 -6 3
sonant, 5 9 7 -9 9
co ntractions, 4 5 9 - 6 3 , 5 8 4 - 9 2
table of, 585
contract verbs, 9 3 6 - 4 4
coronis, 587
crasis, 5 8 7 -8 8 , 1177
428
INDEX
dactylic hexam eter, 1 1 7 9 -8 9

dactyls, 1180
dative, 6 5 0 - 5 2 , 684, 686
use of, 9 9 5 -1 0 1 0 , 1051, 1 0 5 3 ,1 0 5 8 , 1061
-^ £ ,7 1 3
deaspiration, 61 9 , 870
d eclension, 6 3 2 - 5 8
case endings, 6 4 8 - 4 9
declension o f adjectives
first- and -second declension (2 -1 -2 ), 7 2 0 - 2 8
third -d eclension (3 -3 , 3 -1 -3 ), 7 2 9 -3 2
declension o f nouns
first-d eclension, 6 5 9 - 7 5
second -d eclen sion , 6 7 6 - 7 9
third -d eclension, 6 8 0 -7 1 0
defective verbs, 8 98
deliberative questions, 1100
dem onstrative pronouns, 637, 765, 7 7 1 - 7 2 , 774, 1028, 1041
deponent verbs, 812, 897
diaeresis, 1167, 1 1 8 8 -8 9
dialects, 4 5 6 - 6 8 , 6 2 0 -2 1
digam m a (p, vau)
in A ttic G reek, 464
consonantal v, 602
loss of, 8 3 5 - 3 6
in prosody, 580, 1 1 7 4 -7 5
diphthongs, 5 0 4 -5 0 6 , 521
accents, 5 3 8 -4 0 , 547, 1164
breathings, 5 3 1 -3 2
co n traction , 584
direct o b ject, 1011
d issim ilation, 6 1 9 , 870
double consonan ts, 518
dual, 6 33, 6 54
use of, 97 3 , 1026
effort clauses, 1 1 1 8 -2 2
elision, 5 7 5 - 8 3 , 1172, 1 1 7 4 -7 5
enclitics, 5 5 3 - 5 9
endings. See suffixes
fear clauses, 1118, 1121, 1 1 2 5 -2 7

final (purp ose) clauses, 1089, 1 1 1 5 -1 7 , 1145
finite verbs, 791, 792
use of, 973
first- and second -declen sion adjectives (2 -1 -2 ), 7 2 0 - 2 8
first-declension nouns, 6 5 9 - 7 5
future and future perfect tenses, 844, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1078, 1083. See also tenses
gam m a-nasal, 508

gender, 6 3 4 - 3 6 , 7 0 9 -1 0
use o f m asculine form for m asculine and fem inine, 724
genitive, 653
use of, 9 7 9 -9 4 , 1051, 1053, 1 0 5 6 -3 7 , 1 0 6 0 -6 1 , 1 1 1 1 -1 2
429
INDEX
genitive absolute, 9 9 4 ,1 1 1 1 - 1 2
gnom ic aorist, 1082
hiatus. 1 1 7 7 -7 8
hortatory subjunctive, 1098
/, consonantal, 600, 8 5 8 - 6 0
-I (ending), 714
ictus, 525, 1181, 1183
im peratives, 827, 9 0 7 ,1 1 0 6
im perfect tense, 8 4 0 ,1 0 7 5 , 1 0 7 6 ,1 0 7 9
im proper prepositions, 1057
inceptive aorist, 1081
indefinite pronouns, 554, 7 6 8 - 6 9 , 1044
indefinite relative pronouns, 770, 7 7 6 - 7 7
indicative, 8 14, 816, 1073
with ay or K£(v), 1 0 9 5 -9 7
w ithout dv or Ke(v). 1 0 9 2 -9 4
ind irect discourse, 1 1 5 4 -5 8
indirect ob ject, 995
ind irect questions, 1153
infinitive, 791, 794, 815, 828, 908
use of, 9 7 1 -7 2 , 1107, 1132
inflection, 6 2 6 -3 1
A ttic vs. H om eric form s, 4 6 6 - 6 7
intensive pronouns, 766
interrogative pronouns, 767, 769, 1043
intransitive verbs, 1063
iota subscript, 505
iterative verb form s, 900
liquids, 516
liquid verbs, 851, 853, 856, 858
locative, 6 5 7 , 714
long alpha, 621
long by nature or by position, 522
m etathesis o f quantity, 5 7 3 - 7 4
m eter. See prosody
m etrical lengthening, 1168
-fit verbs. See athem atic verbs
m iddle voice, 8 8 7 ,1 0 6 7 - 6 8
m oods, 8 0 6 ,8 1 3 , 1 0 8 5 -1 1 1 2
general use o f dv or ici(u) with, 1 0 8 5 -9 1
im peratives, 827, 907, 1106
independent indicative w ith dv or K-efv), 1 0 9 5 -9 7
independent indicative w ithout dv or ici(v), 1 0 9 2 -9 4
independent optative with dv or >c£(v), 1105
independent optative w ithout dv or ics(v), 1 1 0 2 -1 1 0 4
independent subjunctive w ithout dv or ici(v), 1 0 9 8 -1 1 0 1
m ovable consonants, 5 6 1 -6 3
m utes (stops), 5 0 9 -1 3
m ute verbs, 850
►’-m ovable, 5 6 1 -6 2
nasals, 5 1 4 -1 5
430
INDEX
nasal verbs, 8 5 1 ,8 5 3 , 8 5 6 ,8 5 8
nom inative, 6 8 1 - 8 2
use of. 97 0 , 972, 978
nouns, 6 38
accent of, 6 4 1 - 4 3
irregular, 716
See also d eclension; declension o f nouns
num ber, 633
num erals, 7 5 7 - 5 9
ob ject clauses, 1 1 1 8 -2 7
after verbs o f effort, 1 1 1 8 -2 2
after verbs o f fear, 1118, 1121, 1 1 2 5 -2 7
6 fiiv .. .6 di. 1030
om ission o f words, 9 7 6 - 7 7
optative
to express com m and s, 1104
independent, vkîth a i' or icci y), 1105
independent, w ithout dv or icelv), 1 1 0 2 -1 1 0 4
potential, 1103, 1105
oxytones, 5 4 9 - 5 0
parataxis (coo rd in ation ), 1114, 1028n

participles
d eclension of, 7 3 5 - 4 6
form ation of, 829, 909
tenses of, 815
use of, 793, 1027, 1034, 1 1 0 8 -1 2
particles, 554, 1030, 1031
passive voice, 8 8 8 -9 6 , 1066
penult, 543, 545, 590
perfect tense, 86 7 , 8 7 7 - 7 9 , 882, 883, 1074, 1077, 1084
periphrastic verb form s, 899
personal pronouns, 554, 7 6 0 -6 3 , 765, 1000
phonology, 5 0 1 -6 2 5
accents, 5 3 4 - 5 9
breathings, 5 2 7 - 3 3 , 619
spelling, 5 6 1 - 7 0
pluperfect tense. 867, 875, 876, 877, 882, 883, 1075, 1077
possessive pronouns/adjectives. 764, 1042
potential optative, 1103, 1105
predicate, 97 4 , 9 78
prepositions, 1 0 4 8 -6 1
accentu ation o f disyllabic, 1050
with accusative, 1051, 1053, 1 0 5 9 -6 1
as adverbs, 786, 1048
in com pound verbs, 8 3 8 - 3 9 , 1049, 1055
with dative, 1051, 1053, 1058, 1061
with genitive, 1051, 1053, 1 0 5 6 -5 7 . 1 0 6 0 -6 1
im proper, 1057
tm esis, 1049
present tense, 1070, 1074, 1076
proclitics. 5 5 1 -5 2
prohibitions, 1099
pronouns
com pounds o f d. //. t o . 775
dem onstrative, 6 3 7 , 765, 7 7 1 -7 2 , 774, 1028, 1041
431
INDEX
indefinite. 554, 7 6 8 - 6 9 ,1 0 4 4
indefinite relative, 770, 7 7 6 - 7 7
intensive, 766
interrogative, 767, 7 6 9 ,1 0 4 3
personal, 554, 7 6 0 - 6 3 , 765, 1000
possessive, 7 6 4 ,1 0 4 2
reciprocal, 7 7 8 -7 9
relative, 765, 770, 773, 1028, 1 0 4 5 -4 7
pronouns, use of, 1 0 2 8 -4 7
dem onstrative, 1 0 2 8 ,1 0 4 1
indefinite, 1044
interrogative, 1043
6, ?/, TO , 1 0 2 8 -3 8 , 1041
personal, 761, 763, 1 0 3 9 -4 0
possessive, 1042
relative, 1 0 2 8 ,1 0 4 5 - 4 7
prosody, 1 1 5 9 -9 2
caesura, 1 1 6 7 ,1 1 8 5 - 8 7
dactylic hexam eter, 1 1 7 9 -8 9
diaeresis, 1167, 1 1 8 8 -8 9
hiatus, 1 1 7 7 -7 8
ictus, 525, 1181, 1183
rules for d eterm ining length o f syllables by position, 1 1 6 9 -7 6
protasis, 1133
punctuation, 622
purpose
clauses, 1 0 8 9 ,1 1 1 5 - 1 7 , 1145
use o f infinitive to express, 1107
use o f participle to express, 1109
quantity, 5 1 9 -2 6
m etathesis of, 5 7 3 - 7 4
variations in, 5 7 1 -7 2
See also prosody
recessive accen t, 548, 902

reciprocal pronouns, 7 7 8 - 7 9
reduplication, 8 6 7 - 7 5 , 8 8 4 - 8 6
relative clauses
cond itional, 1 1 4 4 -4 9
o f purpose, 1145
use o f participles instead of, 1110
relative pronouns, 765, 770, 773, 1028, 1 0 4 5 -4 7
result (consecutive) clauses, 1 1 3 1 -3 2
roots, 6 2 7 - 2 9
scansion. See prosody

second -declension nouns, 6 7 6 -7 9 . See also adjectives, first- and second -declension
sigm a
initial, 569
loss of, 6 0 3 - 6 0 4 , 8 3 5 - 3 6
m ovable, 563
single vs. double, 564
sonant consonants, 5 9 7 - 9 9
spellings, variant, 5 6 4 - 7 0
spirants (sibilants), 517
432
INDEX
spondees, 1180
stem s, 6 2 8 - 3 1 ,7 8 9 , 808
subjunctive
hortatory, 1098
independent, w ithout d i' or ke( v), 1 0 9 8 -1 1 0 1
subordinate (dependent) constru ctions
causal clauses, 1 1 2 8 -3 0
cond itional clauses, 1090, 1 1 3 3 -4 9
effort clauses, 1 1 1 8 -2 2
fear clauses, 1 1 2 1 ,1 1 2 5 - 2 7
indirect discourse, 1 1 5 4 -5 8
ind irect questions, 1153
o b ject clauses, 1 1 1 8 -2 7
purpose clauses, 1089, 1 1 1 5 -1 7 , 1145
relative clauses, 1 1 4 4 -4 9
result (consecu tive) clauses, 1 1 3 1 -3 2
tem poral clauses, 1 1 5 0 -5 2
suffixes, 6 30
A ttic G reek, 468
used to form adverbs, 788
used to form nouns, 6 4 8 - 5 8
used to form verbs, 7 8 9 - 9 0 , 8 1 9 - 2 1 , 809, 813, 8 1 9 - 2 9
superlative adjectives, 721n , 7 4 7 - 5 6 , 1024
swearing, 9 77, 1016
syllabic vs. tem poral augm ent, 831
syllables, 560
syncope, 592
synizesis, 586, 1177
tem poral clauses, 1 1 5 0 -5 2

tenses, 8 0 7 -8 0 9
first and second, 8 6 3 - 6 6 , 1064
first aorist, 841
future and future perfect, 8 4 4 ,1 0 7 5 - 7 8 , 1083
im perfect, 8 40, 1075, 1076, 1079
“m ixed” aorist, 8 4 2 - 4 3
p erfect, 8 67, 8 7 7 - 7 9 , 882, 883, 1074, 1077, 1084
pluperfect. 867, 875, 876, 877, 882, 883, 1075, 1077
present, 1070, 1074, 1076
principal and past (prim ary and second ary), 816
second, 8 6 3 - 6 6 , 1064
second aorist, 865
second perfect, 8 8 0 - 8 2
tenses, use of, 1 0 7 2 -8 4
-dev, 712
them atic verbs, 7 9 5 - 9 6 , 7 9 8 -8 0 2 , 804
-0(. 711
third -d eclension adjectives (3 -3 , 3 -1 -3 ), 7 2 9 - 3 2
third -d eclension nouns, 6 8 0 - 7 1 0
tm esis. 1049
transitive vs. intransitive verbs. 1 0 6 2 -6 3
transliteration, 6 2 3 - 2 5
ultim a, 543, 54 6 , 590, 643

uppercase letters, 502, 527, 539. 541, 542
-ipiiv). 715
433
INDEX
variant spellings, 5 6 4 - 7 0
vau (p, d igam m a). See digam m a (p, vau)
verbal adjectives, 4 8 7 , 829n
verbs, 7 8 9 -9 0 3
accentu ation of, 548, 9 0 2 -9 0 3
assim ilated (“distracted”) form s, 9 4 5 - 4 8
Attic G reek, 4 7 1 - 7 6
augm ents, 630, 8 3 0 - 3 7 , 8 3 9 - 4 2
classes of, 8 4 9 -5 1
com pound, 8 3 8 - 3 9 , 885, 989, 1004, 1049, 1055
co ntract, 9 3 6 - 4 4
defective, 898
deponent, 812, 897
finite, 7 9 1 ,7 9 2 ,9 7 3
infinitive, 7 9 1 ,7 9 4 ,8 1 5 , 828, 908, 9 7 1 - 7 2 , 1107, 1132
intransitive, 1063
iterative form s, 900
liquid, 8 5 1 ,8 5 3 , 8 5 6 ,8 5 8
m ute, 850
nasal, 851, 853, 856, 858
num ber and person, 818
om itted, 9 7 6 - 7 7
p eriphrastic form s, 899
personal endings, 8 1 9 - 2 9
principal parts, 8 1 0 - 1 2
tenses, 8 0 7 - 8 0 9 ,8 1 1
them atic vs. athem atic, 7 9 5 -8 0 5
transitive, 1062
verbs, paradigm s o f conjugated
aorist passive o f Mco, 9 1 6 - 1 9 ; (second ) aorist passive o f ipeipo), 935
co n tract verbs, present: opdo) (assim ilated form s), 948; Ttoieco. 9 4 0 -4 1 ; Ti/iueo,
9 3 8 - 3 9 ; xoioo), 9 4 2 - 4 3
first aorist o f liquid verbs (<paim), 9 3 1 -3 2
irregular verbs: dd(o (oida), 966; eifti, eifii, 9 6 4 -6 5 ; 969; KEifiai, 968; (prjfii. 967
- m (regular) verbs, d i d a ^ i . T i d r j f i i : active, 9 4 9 - 5 6 ; m iddle (-passive),
9 5 7 - 6 2 ; passive (see Avm), 9 1 6 - 2 1 ; (second ) perfect o f ioxr]fii, 924
perfect ofjiaivm, 922; (second ) perfect o f jk IQw
perfect m iddle (-passive) ofjKvdo/uai, xevxco, Tpsjuo, 925
root (second ) aorist o f fialvu, yiyvwoKw, dvco, 930
-ftj verbs (kvai): active, 9 0 4 - 9 0 9 ; m iddle (-passive), 9 1 0 - 1 5 ; passive, 9 1 6 - 2 1 ;
second aorist (Xcfmo), 9 3 3 - 3 4
verbs, syntax of, 1 0 6 2 -1 1 1 2
m ood s, 1 0 8 5 -1 1 0 7
participles, 1 1 0 8 -1 2
tenses, 1 0 7 2 -8 4
vocative, 65 5, 691, 737, 978
use of, 1022
voices, 806. See also active voice; m iddle voice; passive voice
vowel gradation (ablaut), 5 9 3 -9 6 , 862
vowels, 503
doubtful, 5 1 9 -2 0
them atic, 796
wishes, 1102
unattainable, 1 0 9 3 -9 4
434

Pharr 4thed Homeric Greek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pharr 4thed Homeric Greek

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pharr 4thed Homeric Greek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HOMERIC GREEK

Clyde Pharr, John Wright, and Paula Debnar

Preface to the Fourth Edition ix

24. The Imperative Mood, Active; Iliad, 4 8-52 112

6\. Iliad, m - 4 l 2 225

Greek-English Vocabulary 381

Despite the many advantages o f Homeric Greek, the majority of classicists

Many Atticists have maintained that the great number of irregularities in

The Twenty-Four Commonest Verb Forms

nian in the fifth century.

Equally valuable are the introductory essays in the multivolume G. S. Kirk et

ELIS . Ath ens

How to learn Greek with this book

H om eric Greek is divided into five main parts:

1) Seventy-seven lessons (sections 1-455)

The individual lessons contain:

• the grammatical material covered in the lesson

To be well prepared to tackle—and get the most benefit from—the translation

• read assigned sections carefully

1 The Greek alphabet and pronunciation

2a Learn the alphabet and sounds of Greek letters (501-508).

The Greek Alphabet

Letter Sound Greek Name English Name

2b Learn the order o f the alphabet.

2c The digamma (vau)

3a Learn the breathing marks: the /j-sound in Greek (527-533).

Example Pronunciation Sound Breathing

3b Capitalization (502, 527)

3c Learn the pronunciation of g-combinations, called gamma nasals (508).

As is true in many languages, the pronunciation of Greek consonants most

3d Learn the pronunciation of diphthongs (504-506).

Vowel + iota Saying this quickly. . . should give you this:

Vowel + upsilon Saying this quickly. . . should give you this:

When a diphthong is followed by a vowel, adding a closing y-sound (for a

aioX og —> ai-(y)o-los

Vowel + iota subscript (“improper diphthongs”)

4a Learn the principles of dividing words into syllables (560).

1) A vowel (or diphthong) on its own may comprise a syllable.

Which is easier to pronounce?

4b WORD LIST FOR PRACTICE IN PRONUNCIATION

^fjvig wrath, fury, madness, rage

Related words: maniac, maniacal (621); ode, odeum, melody, palinode;

5a Learn the basic principles of accentuation (534-550).

Acute ( ' ): A higher or rising pitch: or fiovXri.

6 Learn Greek punctuation (622).

A question mark in Greek looks like an English semicolon.

7b Optional: Definitions o f parts of speech and other grammatical terms

wise —> wisdom

Gender is not a part of speech, but it is an important grammatical concept when

Verbs express actions and states of being.

Interjections are words like Oh! or Alas!

8a Cases of nouns, pronouns, and adjectives

Sally gave Sam a book.

8b Learn some common uses of the Greek cases (978-1022).

1) The nominative (978) is used to express:

2) The genitive (979-994) limits nouns (or pronouns); it often expresses:

• Possession, source, or origin (think of genesis): In Priam is Cassandra’s

N o t e : W h e n in d ou bt, fo r now try tran slating th e genitive by using the word

3) The dative (995-1010) is used to express:

The pattern of case endings for each declension as it is demonstrated by a rep